summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/15376.txt
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to '15376.txt')
-rw-r--r--15376.txt21552
1 files changed, 21552 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/15376.txt b/15376.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6b91dd8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/15376.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21552 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of Voyages
+and Travels, Volume 11, by Robert Kerr
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: A General History and Collection of Voyages and Travels, Volume 11
+ Arranged in Systematic Order: Forming a Complete History
+ of the Origin and Progress of Navigation, Discovery, and
+ Commerce, by Sea and Land, from the Earliest Ages to the
+ Present Time
+
+Author: Robert Kerr
+
+Release Date: March 16, 2005 [EBook #15376]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOLUME 11 ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Alison Hadwin and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team. This file was produced from
+images generously made available by the Canadian Institute
+for Historical Microreproductions.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS,
+
+ARRANGED IN SYSTEMATIC ORDER:
+
+FORMING A COMPLETE HISTORY OF THE ORIGIN AND PROGRESS OF NAVIGATION,
+DISCOVERY, AND COMMERCE, BY SEA AND LAND, FROM THE EARLIEST AGES TO
+THE PRESENT TIME.
+
+
+BY
+
+
+ROBERT KERR, F.R.S. & F.A.S. EDIN.
+
+ILLUSTRATED BY MAPS AND CHARTS.
+
+VOL. XI.
+
+WILLIAM BLACKWOOD, EDINBURGH:
+AND T. CADELL, LONDON.
+MDCCCXXIV.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS OF VOL. XI
+
+
+PART II. BOOK IV. CONTINUED.
+
+CHAP. XII.--(_Continued_.)
+ Voyage round the World, by Captain George Shelvocke, in 1719-1722,
+
+ SECT.
+ V. Voyage from California to Canton in China,
+
+ VI. Residence in China, and Voyage thence to
+ England,
+
+ VII. Supplement to the foregoing Voyage,
+
+ VIII. Appendix to Shelvocke's Voyage round the
+ World. Containing Observations on the
+ Country and Inhabitants of Peru, by Captain
+ Betagh,
+
+ Introduction,
+ Sec. 1. Particulars of the Capture of the Mercury
+ by the Spaniards,
+ Sec. 2. Observations made by Betagh in the
+ North of Peru,
+ Sec. 3. Voyage from Payta to Lima, and Account
+ of the English Prisoners at that
+ Place,
+ Sec. 4. Description of Lima, and some Account
+ of the Government of Peru,
+ Sec. 5. Some Account of the Mines of Peru and
+ Chili,
+ Sec. 6. Observations on the Trade of Chili,
+ Sec. 7. Some Account of the French Interlopers
+ in Chili,
+ Sec. 8. Return of Betagh to England,
+
+CHAP. XIII. Voyage round the World, by Commodore Roggewein, in 1721-1723
+
+ Introduction
+
+ SECT.
+ I. Narrative of the Voyage from Holland to the Coast of Brazil,
+
+ II. Arrival in Brazil, with some Account of that Country,
+
+ III. Incidents during the Voyage from Brazil to Juan Fernandez, with a
+ Description of that Island,
+
+ IV. Continuation of the Voyage from Juan Fernandez till the Shipwreck of
+ the African Galley,
+
+ V. Continuation of the Voyage after the Loss of the African, to the
+ Arrival of Roggewein at New Britain,
+
+ VI. Description of New Britain, and farther Continuation of the Voyage
+ till the Arrival of Roggewein at Java,
+
+ VII. Occurrences from their Arrival at the Island of Java, to the
+ Confiscation of the Ships at Batavia,
+
+ VIII. Description of Batavia and the Island of Java, with some Account
+ of the Government of the Dutch East-India Company's Affairs,
+
+ IX. Description of Ceylon,
+
+ X. Some Account of the Governments of Amboina, Banda, Macasser, the
+ Moluccas, Mallacca, and the Cape of Good Hope,
+
+ XI. Account of the Directories of Coromandel, Surat, Bengal, and
+ Persia,
+
+ XII. Account of the Commanderies of Malabar, Gallo, Java, and
+ Bantam,
+
+ XIII. Some Account of the Residences of Cheribon, Siam, and Mockha,
+
+ XIV. Of the Trade of the Dutch in Borneo and China,
+
+ XV. Of the Dutch Trade with Japan,
+
+ XVI. Account of the Colony of the Cape of Good Hope,
+
+ XVII. Voyage from the Cape of Good Hope to Holland, with some Account of
+ St Helena, the Island of Ascension, and the Acores,
+
+CHAP. XIV. Voyage round the World, by Captain George Anson, in the Years
+1740-1744,
+
+ Preface,
+
+ Introduction,
+
+ SECT.
+ I. Of the Equipment of the Squadron, and the Incidents relating to it,
+ from its first Appointment to its setting Sail from St Helens,
+
+ II. The Passage from St Helens to the Island of Madeira, with a short
+ Account of that Island, and of our Stay there,
+
+ III. History of the Spanish Squadron commanded by Don Joseph
+ Pizarro, 236
+
+ IV. Passage from Madeira to St Catharines,
+
+ V. Proceedings at St Catharines, and a Description of that Place, with
+ a short Account of Brazil,
+
+ VI. The Run from St Catharines to Port St Julian; with some Account of
+ the Port, and of the Country to the South of the Rio Plata,
+
+ VII. Departure from the Bay of St Julian, and Passage from thence to
+ the Straits of Le Maire,
+
+ VIII. Course from the Straits of Le Maire to Cape Noir,
+
+ IX. Observations and Directions for facilitating the Passage of future
+ Navigators round Cape Horn,
+
+ X. Course from Cape Noir to the Island of Juan Fernandez,
+
+ XI. Arrival of the Centurion at Juan Fernandez, with a Description of
+ that Island,
+
+ XII. Separate Arrivals of the Gloucester, and Anna Pink, at Juan
+ Fernandez, and Transactions at that Island during the
+ Interval,
+
+ XIII. Short Account of what befell the Anna Pink before she rejoined;
+ with an Account of the Loss of the Wager, and the putting back of
+ the Severn and Pearl,
+
+ XIV. Conclusion of Proceedings at Juan Fernandez, from the Arrival of
+ the Anna Pink, to our final Departure from thence,
+
+ XV. Our Cruise, from leaving Juan Fernandez, to the taking of
+ Payta,
+
+ XVI. Capture of Payta, and Proceedings at that Place,
+
+ XVII. Occurrences from our Departure from Payta to our Arrival
+ at Quibo,
+
+ XVIII. Our Proceedings at Quibo, with an Account of the Place,
+
+ XIX. From Quibo to the Coast of Mexico,
+
+ XX. An Account of the Commerce carried on between the City of Manilla on
+ the Island of Luconia, and the Port of Acapulco on the Coast of
+ Mexico,
+
+ XXI. Our Cruise off the Port of Acapulco for the Manilla Ship,
+
+ XXII. A short Account of Chequetan, and of the adjacent Coast and
+ Country,
+
+ XXIII. Account of Proceedings at Chequetan and on the adjacent Coast,
+ till our setting sail for Asia,
+
+ XXIV. The Run from the Coast of Mexico to the Ladrones or Marian
+ Islands,
+
+ XXV. Our Arrival at Tinian, and an Account of the Island, and of our
+ Proceedings there, till the Centurion drove out to Sea,
+
+ XXVI. Transactions at Tinian after the Departure of the Centurion,
+
+ XXVII. Account of the Proceedings on board the Centurion when driven out
+ to Sea,
+
+ XXVIII. Of our Employment at Tinian, till the final Departure of the
+ Centurion, and of the Voyage to Macao,
+
+ XXIX. Proceeding at Macao,
+
+ XXX. From Macao to Cape Espiritu Santo: The taking of the Manilla
+ Galleon, and returning back again,
+
+ XXXI. Transactions in the River of Canton,
+
+ XXXII. Proceedings at the City of Canton, and the Return of the
+ Centurion to England,
+
+
+
+
+A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS.
+
+PART II.
+
+BOOK IV. (CONTINUED.)
+
+ * * * * *
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII--_Continued_.
+
+VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD, BY CAPTAIN GEORGE SHELVOCKE, IN 1719-1722.
+
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Voyage from California to Canton in China_.
+
+We fell in with the coast of California on the 11th of August, and
+as soon as we were discovered by the natives, they made fires on the
+shore as we sailed past. Towards evening, two of them came off on a
+bark log, and were with difficulty induced to come on board. Seeing
+our negroes standing promiscuously among the whites, they angrily
+separated them from us, and would hardly suffer them to look at us.
+They then made signs for us to sit down, after which one of them put
+himself into strange postures, talking to us with great vehemence, and
+seeming to be in a transport of extacy, running from one to the
+other of us with great vehemence, continually singing, speaking, and
+running, till quite out of breath. Night coming on, they were for
+departing, when we gave them a knife and an old coat each, with which
+they were much pleased, and invited us by signs to go on shore along
+with them. On the 13th, we were near Porto Leguro, whence some of the
+natives came out to meet us on bark-logs, while others made fires,
+as if to welcome us, on the tops of hills and rocks near the sea, all
+seemingly rejoiced to see us; those on shore running up and down
+to each other, and those on the bark-logs paddling with all their
+strength to meet us.
+
+No sooner was our anchor down than they came off to us in crowds, some
+off bark-logs, but most of them swimming, all the while talking and
+calling to each other confusedly. In an instant our ship was full of
+these swarthy gentry, all quite naked. Among the rest was their
+king or chief; who was no way distinguishable from the rest by any
+particular ornament, or even by any deference paid to him by his
+people, his only ensign of sovereignty being a round black stick of
+hard wood, about two feet and a half long. This being observed by some
+of our people, they brought him to me, and concluding that I was the
+chief of the ship, he delivered his black sceptre to me in a handsome
+manner, which I immediately returned. Notwithstanding his savage
+appearance, this man had a good countenance, and there was something
+dignified in his manner and behaviour. I soon found a way to regale
+them, by setting before them abundance of our choicest Peruvian
+conserves, with which they seemed much gratified. They were
+accommodated with spoons, mostly silver, all of which they very
+honestly returned.
+
+Having thus commenced friendship with the natives, I sent an officer
+ashore to view the watering-place; and, to make him the more welcome,
+I sent with him some coarse blue baize and some sugar, to distribute
+among the women. On seeing our boat ready to put off, the king was
+for accompanying her in his bark-log, but I persuaded him to go in the
+boat, with which he seemed to be much gratified. The remainder of
+the day was spent with our wild visitors, who behaved in general very
+quietly. The officer returned with an account of having been very
+civilly received, and we prepared our casks for being sent ashore next
+morning. Although, at first view, the country and inhabitants might
+dissuade us from venturing freely among them, I had formerly read such
+accounts of these people, that I was under no apprehension of being
+molested in wooding and watering. The Californians, however, appeared
+very terrible to our negroes, insomuch, that one of them, who
+accompanied the officer on shore, was afraid to stir from the boat,
+and held an axe constantly in his hand, to defend himself in case of
+being attacked. On the approach of night, all the Indians swam ashore,
+leaving us a clear ship, after the fatigues of the day.
+
+Next morning, at day-break, our boat went ashore with the people
+appointed to cut wood and fill our water-casks; and before the sun was
+up, our ship was again filled with our former guests, who seemed
+never satisfied with gazing at us and every thing about the ship. That
+nothing might be wanting to keep up our amity, I sent a large boiler
+on shore, with a good store of flour and sugar, and a negro cook, who
+continually boiled hasty-pudding, to serve the numerous guests on the
+beach. At first the natives remained idle spectators of our labours;
+but at length, taking compassion to see our few men labouring hard in
+rolling great casks of water over the heavy sand in the sultry heat
+of the day, they put forth their hands to help them, encouraged by the
+particular readiness of their chief to serve us; for, after seeing Mr
+Randal take up a log of wood to carry to the boat, he took up another,
+and was immediately followed by two or three hundred of the natives,
+so that they eased our men mightily. They also rolled our casks down
+to the beach, but always expected a white man to assist them, though
+quite satisfied if he only touched the cask with his finger. This
+eased our men of a great deal of fatigue, and shortened the time of
+our stay at this place. We even found means to make those who used to
+stay all day on board, of some use to us; for, when we came to heel
+the ship, we crowded them, all over on one side, which, with other
+shifts, gave her a deep heel, while we cleaned and paid her bottom
+with pitch and tallow.
+
+The natives seemed every day more and more attached to us. When our
+boat went ashore in the morning, there was constantly a large retinue
+in waiting on the beach for our people, and particularly for those
+whom they guessed to be above the common rank, by their better dress.
+By this time, the news of our arrival had spread through all the
+neighbouring parts, and some natives of different tribes from that
+which dwelt about the bay, came daily to visit us. Those who came
+from any distance in the inland country could not swim, and were
+differently painted, besides some other visible distinctions; but
+all united amicably to assist us, and hardly any were idle except the
+women, who used to sit in circles on the scorching sand, waiting for
+their shares of what was going forwards, which they received without
+any quarrelling among themselves about the inequality of distribution.
+Having completed our business in five days, we prepared for our
+departure on the 18th August, and employed that morning in making a
+large distribution of sugar among the women, and gave a great many
+knives, old axes, and old iron among the men, being the most valuable
+presents we could make them; and, in return, they gave us bows and
+arrows, deer-skin bags, live foxes and squirrels, and the like. That
+we might impress them with awe of our superior power, we saluted them
+with five guns on loosing our top-sails, which greatly frightened
+them, and there seemed an universal damp on their spirits on seeing
+our sails loosed, as sorry for our approaching departure. The women
+were all in tears when my people were coming off to the ship; and many
+of the men remained till we were under sail, and then leapt into the
+sea with sorrowful countenances.
+
+Having made some stay in California, some account of that country and
+its inhabitants may be expected; though I believe a complete discovery
+of its extent and boundaries would produce few real advantages, except
+satisfying the curious. That part of California which I saw, being the
+southern extremity of its western coast, appears mountainous, barren,
+and sandy, much like some parts of Peru: yet the soil about Porto
+Leguro, and most likely in the other vallies, is a rich black mould,
+and when turned up fresh to the sun, appears as if intermingled with
+gold-dust. We endeavoured to wash and purify some of this, and the
+more this was done, the more it appeared like gold. In order to be
+farther satisfied, I brought away some of this earth, but it was
+afterwards lost in our confusions in China. However this may be,
+California probably abounds in metals of all sorts, though the natives
+had no ornaments or utensils of any metal, which is not to be wondered
+at, as they are perfectly ignorant of all arts.
+
+The country has plenty of wood, but the trees are very small, hardly
+better than bushes. But woods, which are an ornament to most other
+countries, serve only to make this appear the more desolate; for
+locusts swarm here in such numbers, that they do not leave a
+green leaf on the trees. In the day, these destructive insects are
+continually on the wing in clouds, and are extremely troublesome by
+flying in, one's face. In shape and size they greatly resemble our
+green grasshoppers, but are of a yellow colour. Immediately after we
+cast anchor, they came off in such numbers, that the sea around the
+ship was covered with their dead bodies. By their incessant ravages,
+the whole country round Porto Leguro was stripped totally naked,
+notwithstanding the warmth of the climate and the richness of the
+soil. Believing that the natives are only visited with this plague at
+this season of the year, I gave them a large quantity of calavances,
+and shewed them how they were sown. The harbour of Porto Leguro is
+about two leagues to the N.E. of Cape St Lucas, being a good and safe
+port, and very convenient for privateers when cruizing for the Manilla
+ship. The watering-place is on the north side of the bay or harbour,
+being a small river which there flows into the sea, and may easily be
+known by the appearance of a great quantity of green canes growing
+in it, which always retain their verdure, not being touched by the
+locusts, as these canes probably contain, something noxious to that
+voracious insect.
+
+The men of this country are tall, straight, and well set, having large
+limbs, with coarse black hair, hardly reaching to their shoulders. The
+women are of much smaller size, having much longer hair than the men,
+with which some of them almost cover their faces. Some of both sexes
+have good countenances; but all are much darker-complexioned than
+any of the other Indians I saw in the South Seas, being a very deep
+copper-colour. The men go quite naked, wearing only a few trifles by
+way of ornament, such as a band or wreath of red and white silk-grass
+round their heads, adorned on each side with a tuft of hawk's
+feathers. Others have pieces of mother-of-pearl and small shells
+fastened among their hair, and tied round their necks; and some had
+large necklaces of six or seven strings, composed of small red and
+black berries. Some are scarified all over their bodies; others use
+paint, some smearing their faces and breasts with black, while others
+were painted black down to the navel, and from thence to the feet with
+red.
+
+The women wear a thick fringe or petticoat of silk-grass, reaching
+from their middle to their heels, and have a deer-skin carelessly
+thrown over their shoulders. Some of the better sort have a cloak of
+the skin of some large bird, instead of the bear-skins. Though the
+appearance of the Californians is exceedingly savage, yet, from what
+I could observe of their behaviour to each other, and their deportment
+towards us, they seem to possess all imaginable humanity. All the time
+we were there, and constantly among many hundreds of them, there
+was nothing to be seen but the most agreeable harmony, and most
+affectionate behaviour to each other. When any of us gave any thing
+eatable to one person, he always divided it among all who were around
+him, reserving the smallest share to himself. They seldom walked
+singly, but mostly in pairs, hand in hand. They seemed of meek
+and gentle dispositions, having no appearance of cruelty in their
+countenances or behaviour, yet seemed haughty towards their women.
+They lead a careless life, having every thing in common, and seemed to
+desire nothing beyond the necessaries of life. They never once offered
+to pilfer or steal any of our tools or other utensils; and such was
+their honesty, that my men having forgotten their axes one day on
+shore, while cutting wood, which was noticed by one of the natives, he
+told it to the king, who sent into the wood for the axes, and restored
+them with much apparent satisfaction.
+
+Their language is guttural and harsh, and they talk a great deal, but
+I could never understand a single word they spoke. Their dwellings
+were very mean, being scarcely sufficient to shelter them. Their diet
+is, I believe, mostly fish, which they frequently eat raw, but they
+sometimes bake it in the sand. They seldom want abundance of this
+food, as the men go out to sea on their bark-logs, and are very expert
+harponiers. Their harpoons are made of hard wood, and with these
+they strike the largest albicores, and bring them ashore on their
+bark-logs, which they row with double paddles. This seemed strange
+to us, who had often experienced the strength of these fish; for
+frequently when we had hold of one of these with very large hooks,
+made fast to eight-strand twine, we had to bring the ship to, to bring
+them in, and it was then as much as eight or ten men could do; so that
+one would expect, when an Indian had struck one of these fish,
+from his light float, it would easily run away with the man and the
+bark-log; but they have some sleight in their way of management, by
+which the strength and struggling of these fish are all in vain. There
+are hardly any birds to be seen in this country except a few pelicans.
+
+When the Californians want to drink, they wade into the river, up to
+their middles, where they take up the water in their hands, or stoop
+down and suck it with their mouths. Their time is occupied between
+hunting, fishing, eating, and sleeping; and having abundant exercise,
+and rather a spare diet, their lives are ordinarily prolonged to
+considerable age, many of both sexes appearing to be very old, by
+their faces being much wrinkled, and their hair very grey. Their bows
+are about six feet long, with strings made of deer's sinews, but their
+arrows seemed too long for their bows; and considering that they have
+no adequate tools, these articles must require much time in making.
+The shafts of their arrows consist of a hollow cane, for two-thirds of
+their length, the other third, or head, being of a heavy kind of wood,
+edged with flint, or sometimes agate, and the edges notched like a
+saw, with a very sharp point. They made no display of their arms to
+us, and we seldom saw any in their hands, though they have need of
+some arms to defend themselves from wild beasts, as I saw some men who
+had been severely hurt in that way, particularly one old man, who
+had his thigh almost torn in pieces by a tiger or lion, and though,
+healed, it was frightfully scarred. The women commonly go into the
+woods with bows and arrows in search of game, while the men are
+chiefly occupied in fishing. I can say nothing respecting their
+government, except that it did not seem any way strict or rigorous.
+When the king appeared in public, he was usually attended by many
+couples, or men walking hand in hand, two and two together. On the
+first morning of our arrival, he was seen in this manner coming out of
+a wood, and noticing one of my officers cutting down a tree, whom
+he judged to be better than ordinary, by having silver lace on his
+waistcoat, be shewed both his authority and civility at the same time,
+by ordering one of his attendants to take the axe and work in his
+stead.
+
+One day while we were there, a prodigious flat fish was seen basking
+in the sun on the surface of the water near the shore, on which twelve
+Indians swam off and surrounded him. Finding himself disturbed, the
+fish dived, and they after him, but he escaped from them at this time.
+He appeared again in about an hour, when sixteen or seventeen Indians
+swam off and encompassed him; and, by continually tormenting him,
+drove, him insensibly ashore. On grounding, the force with which he
+struck the ground with his fins is not to be expressed, neither can
+I describe the agility with which the Indians strove to dispatch
+him, lest the surf should set him again afloat, which they at length
+accomplished with the help of a dagger lent them by Mr Randal. They
+then cut him into pieces, which were distributed among all who stood
+by. This fish, though of the flat kind, was very thick, and had a
+large hideous mouth, being fourteen or fifteen feet broad, but not
+quite so much in length.
+
+On the 18th August, 1721, we set sail from Porto Leguro, bound for
+Canton in China, as a likely place for meeting with some English
+ships, in which we might procure a passage home. Considering the
+length of the voyage before us, our ship was in a very bad condition,
+as her sails and rigging were so old and rotten, that if any accident
+had befallen our masts or sails, we had been reduced to extreme
+distress and danger, having no change either of sails or ropes; but
+ours being a case of necessity, we had to run all hazards, and to
+endeavour, by the utmost attention, to guard against deficiencies
+which could not be supplied. Having already overcome many
+difficulties, seemingly insurmountable in prospect, we were full
+of hope to get over these also, and the pleasing expectation of
+revisiting our native shores gave us spirits to encounter this tedious
+navigation in so weak and comfortless a condition. We were now so
+weakly manned, that we could scarcely have been able to navigate our
+vessel without the assistance of the negroes, not amounting now
+to thirty whites, so much had our crew been reduced by untoward
+accidents.
+
+We discovered an island on the 21st, 110 leagues W.S.W. from Cape St
+Lucas,[1] but as the wind blew fresh, I could not get nearer than two
+leagues, and did not think proper to lose time in laying-to in the
+night. It seemed seven or eight leagues in circumference, having a
+large bay on its S.W. side, in the middle of which was a high rock. My
+people named this Shelvocke's island. From hence we shelved, down to
+the latitude of 13 deg. N. but were stopped two or three days by westerly
+winds, which we did not expect in this sea, especially as being
+now five or six hundred leagues from the land. The trade-wind again
+returning, we kept in the parallel of 13 deg. N. except when we judged
+that we were near the shoals of St Bartholomew, and then haled a
+degree more to the north, and so continued for sixty or seventy
+leagues. A fortnight after leaving California, my people, who had
+hitherto enjoyed uninterrupted health, began to be afflicted with
+sickness, particularly affecting their stomachs, owing doubtless to
+the great quantities of sweetmeats they were continually devouring,
+and also to oar common food, chiefly composed of puddings made of
+coarse flour and sweetmeats, mixed up with sea-water, together with
+jerked beef, most of which was destroyed by ants, cockroaches, and
+other vermin. We could not afford to boil the kettle once in the whole
+passage with fresh water, so that the crew became reduced to a
+very melancholy state by scurvy and other distempers. The sickness
+increased upon us every day, so that we once buried two in one day,
+the armourer and carpenter's, mate, besides whom the carpenter,
+gunner, and several others died, together with some of our best
+negroes.
+
+[Footnote 1: Probably La Nablada, in lat. 18 deg. 55' N. long. 180 deg. 48'
+E.]
+
+The greatest part of my remaining people were disabled, and our ship
+very leaky; and to add to our misfortunes, one of our pumps split and
+became useless. Under these unhappy circumstances, we pushed forwards
+with favourable gales till within 80 leagues of Guam, one of the
+Ladrones, when we encountered dismal weather and tempestuous winds,
+veering round the compass. This was the more frightful, as we were
+unable to help ourselves, not above six or seven, being able for duty,
+though necessity obliged even those who were extremely low and weak
+to lend what help they could. In the boisterous sea raised by these
+gales, our ship so laboured that the knee of her head, and her whole
+beak-head, became loose, so that the boltsprit fetched away and played
+with every motion of the ship, and so continued all the rest of
+the time we were at sea. For some time our main-mast stood without
+larboard shrouds, till we could unlay our best cable to make more,
+having knotted and spliced the old shrouds till our labour was in
+vain. In the midst of these difficulties, I was taken very ill, and
+had little expectations of living much longer, till the gout gave me
+some painful hopes of recovery.
+
+In the beginning of October, we made the island of Guam, 100 leagues
+short of the account given by Rogers, who makes 105 deg. of longitude
+between Cape St Lucas and Guam, while we made not quite 100 deg..[2] We
+passed through between Guam and Serpana, and saw several flying proas,
+but none came near us that day. We had heavy and squally weather,
+which obliged me to keep the deck in the rain, by which I caught a
+cold, which threw me into a worse condition than before, in which I
+continued all the time I was in China. Guam seemed very green and of
+moderate height, and the sight of land was so pleasant after our long
+run, that we would gladly have stopped to procure some refreshments,
+but durst not venture in, though on the point of perishing, lest the
+inhabitants should take advantage of our weakness. From Guam I shaped
+our course for the island of Formosa, to which we had a long and
+melancholy voyage, as our sickness daily increased; so that, on the 3d
+November, when we got sight of that island, both ship and company
+were almost entirely worn out. Next day we doubled the south Cape of
+Formosa, passing within a league of the rocks of _Vele-Rete_, where
+we were sensible of a very strong current. As we passed in sight, the
+inhabitants of Formosa made continual fires on the coast, as inviting
+us to land; but we were so weak that we did not deem it prudent to
+venture into any of their harbours.
+
+[Footnote 2: Rogers is however nearer the truth, the difference of
+longitude being 106 deg. 42' between these two places.--E.]
+
+We directed our course from Formosa for the neighbouring coast of
+China, and found ourselves on the 6th at the mouth of the river
+_Loma_,[3] in twelve fathoms water, but the weather was so hazy that
+we could not ascertain where we were. Seeing abundance of fishing
+boats, we tried every method we could think of to induce some of
+the fishermen to come on board to pilot us to Macao, but found
+this impracticable, as we could not understand each other. We were
+therefore obliged to keep the land close on board, and to anchor
+every evening. This was a prodigious fatigue to our men, who were so
+universally ill that we could hardly find any one able to steer
+the ship. We were bewildered in a mist during four days, and much
+surprised by seeing a great many islands, omitted in our charts, on
+some of which we saw large fortifications. This made us believe
+that the current had carried us beyond our port, and occasioned much
+dejection of spirits; for, though the sea was covered with fishing
+boats, we could get no one to set us right, or to give us any
+directions we could understand.
+
+[Footnote 3: This name is so corrupted as to be unintelligible.--E]
+
+Towards evening of the 10th, as we were passing through a very narrow
+channel between two islands, a fisherman who was near, and observed
+by our manner of working that we were afraid to venture through, waved
+with his cap for us to bring to till he came to us. When he came, he
+seemed to understand that we enquired for Macao, and made signs that
+he would carry us there, if we gave him as many pieces of silver as
+he counted little fish from his basket, which amounted to forty. We
+accordingly counted out forty dollars into a hat, and gave them to
+him, on which he came into our ship, and took her in charge, carrying
+us through the narrow channel, and brought us to anchor at sun-set. We
+weighed next morning, and kept the coast of China close on board. By
+noon we were abreast of Pulo Lantoon, whence we could see two English
+ships under sail, passing the island of Macao on their way from the
+river of Canton. They kept on their way, taking no notice of us, which
+struck a damp into our spirits, fearing we should miss a passage for
+England this season. In the afternoon of next day, we anchored in
+the road of Macao, near the entrance of Canton river, which we never
+should have found out by any of our charts.
+
+I was much amazed at the incorrectness with which these coasts are
+laid down, to the eastwards of Pulo Lantoon; as there runs a cluster
+of islands for upwards of twenty leagues in that direction, which are
+not in the least noticed by any of our hydrographers, nor have I ever
+met with any navigator who knew any thing about them. The coast of
+China, within these islands, is rocky, mountainous, and barren;
+but, owing to my heavy sickness, I was unable to make any useful
+observations.
+
+
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_Residence in China, and Voyage thence to England._
+
+As Macao is the place where ships always stop for a pilot to carry
+them up the river of Canton, I sent an officer with my compliments
+to the governor, and with orders to bring off a pilot; but
+hearing nothing of him till next morning, I was under very great
+apprehensions. Next morning, a great number of the people belonging
+to the Success came off to our ship, and acquainted me that Clipperton
+had left me designedly. About noon this day, the 12th November,
+1721, a pilot came off to us, when we immediately weighed anchor, and
+immediately entered Canton river, being assured that there still were
+some European ships at Wampoo, about ten miles short of Canton. We
+were four days in plying up to the road between the tower bars, where
+we anchored; and, finding the Bonetta and Hastings, two English
+ships, I sent an officer to request their instructions how to conduct
+ourselves in this port, and to acquaint us with its customs. They
+answered, that the Cadogan and Francis, two English European ships,
+were lying at Wampoo, and advised me to send up to the English factors
+at Canton, to acquaint them with our arrival, and the reasons which
+obliged us to come here. This I accordingly did next day, borrowing
+one of their flags to hoist as our boat, without which we had met with
+much trouble from the _Hoppo-men_, or custom-house officers. I sent
+letters to the captains of the English ships, signifying the necessity
+which forced me to this country, and requesting their succour and
+protection; assuring them that I acted under his majesty's commission,
+which also I sent, for their perusal. Next morning, being the 17th, I
+weighed and worked up to Wampoo, where, besides the two English ships,
+I found three belonging to France, one Ostender, and a small ship from
+Manilla.
+
+I was here in hopes of all my troubles being at an end, and that I
+should have full leisure for rest and refreshment after my many and
+great fatigues; but I soon found these expectations ill grounded,
+and after all my perils, that I was fallen into others least to be
+endured, as proceeding from false brethren. A most unlucky accident
+happened the very evening that we anchored at Wampoo, which gave birth
+to all the troubles I encountered in India; though, in respect to
+me, both unforeseen and unavoidable, and purely the effects of that
+eagerness in the ship's company to get out of this part of the world
+at any rate. Had there been any government among the English settled
+here, to have supported my authority, this unlucky business had never
+happened; and, as it was, could only be imputed to nothing but the
+want of such an establishment. One of my men, named David Griffith,
+being in a hurry to remove his effects into the Bonetta's boat, in
+which he was chased by a _Hoppo_ or custom-house boat; and being a
+little in liquor, and fearing to lose his silver, fired a musket and
+killed the Hoppo-man or custom-house officer. Early next morning, the
+dead body was laid at the door of the English factory, where Chinese
+officers lay in wait to seize the first Englishman that should come
+out. A supercargo belonging to the Bonetta happened to be the first;
+he was immediately seized and carried off, and afterwards led in
+chains about the suburbs of Canton. All that could be said or done
+by the most considerable Chinese merchants who were in correspondence
+with the English, was of no avail. In the mean time, my man, who had
+slain the Chinese officer, and another, were put in irons aboard
+the Francis, which was _chopped_, or seized, till the guilty man
+was delivered up. He was then carried to Canton in chains, and the
+supercargo was released.
+
+I had not been here many days, when I was deserted by all my officers
+and men, who were continually employed in removing their effects from
+my ship to some of the European ships, without my knowledge, I being
+then confined to bed. My officers were using all their efforts to
+engage the gentlemen belonging to the company in their interest, and
+had only left my son and a few negroes to look after the ship, and
+to defend my effects, which were on the brink of falling into the
+bottomless pit of Chinese avarice; besides, they and the ship's
+company had so many ways of disposing of every thing they could lay
+their hands on, that I found it impossible to oblige them to do what
+I thought justice to our owners: They all soon recovered from
+their illness, and they all became their own masters. There were no
+magistrates for me to appeal to on shore, who would aid me so far as
+to compel them to remain in my ship; and the officers commanding
+the English ships could not afford me the help they might have been
+inclined to give, lest the supercargoes might represent their conduct
+to the East India Company. And these last, who superintend the English
+trade at this port, seemed even inclined to have refused me a passage
+in one of their ships, and even treated me as one enemy would treat
+another in a neutral port; looking on me in that light for presuming
+to come within the limits of the Company, without considering the
+necessity by which I had been compelled to take that step.
+
+When Captains Hill and Newsham came to visit me, they were astonished
+at the ruinous condition of my ship, and could scarcely think it
+possible for her to have made so long a passage. The rottenness of her
+cordage, and the raggedness of her sails, filled them with surprise
+and pity for my condition. When I had given them a short history of
+the voyage, and requested they would receive my officers and company,
+with their effects, they at once said, That they saw plainly my ship
+was in no condition to be carried any farther, and they were willing
+to receive us all as soon as we pleased, on payment of our passage.
+But the supercargoes were displeased that I had not applied to them,
+as they are the chief men here, though only passengers when aboard; so
+that I was quite neglected, and the English captains were ordered to
+fall down with their ships five or six miles below where I lay. I was
+thus left destitute in the company of five foreign ships; yet their
+officers, seeing me deserted by my countrymen, kindly offered me their
+services, and assisted me as much as they could, and without them
+I know not what might have been my fate, as I was under perpetual
+apprehensions that the Chinese would have seized my ship.
+
+After the murder of the custom-house officer seemed to have been quite
+forgotten, a magistrate, called a _Little Mandarin_, committed the
+following outrageous action:--At the beginning of the troubles,
+occasioned by that murder, he had received orders to apprehend all the
+English he could find, which he neglected till all was over. He then
+one day, while passing the European factories, ordered his attendants
+to seize on all the English he could see in the adjoining shops, and
+took hold of nine or ten, French as well as English, whom he carried,
+with halters about their necks, to the palace of the _Chantock_, or
+viceroy. Application was then made to the _Hoppo_, or chief customer,
+who represented matters to the viceroy in favour of the injured
+Europeans; on which the mandarin was sent for, and being unable to
+vindicate himself was degraded from his post, subjected to the bamboo,
+a severe punishment, and rendered incapable of acting again as a
+magistrate; the Europeans being immediately liberated. It appears to
+me, however, that the English are tyrannized over by the Chinese, and
+exposed to the caprices of every magistrate, wherefore I was the more
+urgent to be on board one of the European ships. I had now discovered
+my error in addressing the captains, and now sent a letter to the
+supercargoes, demanding a passage for myself, my officers, and
+ship's company, which I was sensible they could not refuse: but their
+compliance was clogged with a charge to the captains not to receive
+any thing belonging to us, unless consigned to the company in England.
+
+The hoppo now made a demand upon me for anchorage in the river,
+amounting to no less than 6000 _tahel_, and, to quicken the payment,
+annexed a penalty to this extortion of 500 _tahel_ for every day
+the payment was delayed. There were no means to avoid this gross
+imposition; and though a day necessarily elapsed before I could
+send up the money, I had to add the penalty of that day, so that he
+received 6500 _tahel_, or L. 2166:13:4 sterling;[4] being about six
+times as much as was paid for the Cadogan, the largest English ship
+there at the time, and which measured a third larger than mine. I soon
+after sold my ship for 2000 tahel, or L. 666, 13s. 4d. sterling, which
+money was consigned to the India Company, along with all the rest of
+my effects, and I prevailed on most of my officers and men to take
+their passage in the English homeward-bound ships.
+
+[Footnote 4: At these proportions, the Chinese _tahel_ is exactly 6s.
+8d. sterling.--E.]
+
+Considering my short stay in China, and my bad health, I cannot be
+expected to give any tolerable account of this place from my own
+observation, and to copy others would be inconsistent with the purpose
+of this narrative, so that I shall only observe, that the English, at
+this time, had no settled factory at Canton, being only permitted
+to hire large houses, called _hongs_, with convenient warehouses
+adjoining, for receiving their goods previous to their shipment. For
+these they pay rent to the proprietors, and either hire the same or
+others, as they think proper, next time they have occasion for the
+accommodation.
+
+Notwithstanding my utmost diligence, the business I was engaged in
+kept me in a continual hurry till the ships were ready to depart,
+which was in December, 1721: At which time, heartily tired of the
+country, and the ill usage I had met with, I sailed in the Cadogan,
+Captain John Hall, in company with the Francis, Captain Newsham; and
+as the latter ship sailed much better than the Cadogan, she left us
+immediately after getting out to sea. Finding his ship very tender, or
+crank, Captain Hill put in at Batavia, to get her into better trim. We
+continued here about ten days; but I can say little about that place,
+being all the time unable to stand on my legs, and was only twice out
+in a coach to take the air, two or three miles out of the city, in
+which little excursion I saw a great variety of beautiful prospects of
+fine country seats and gardens, and, indeed, every thing around shewed
+the greatest industry. The buildings in the city are generally very
+handsome, and laid out in very regular streets, having canals running
+through most of them, with trees planted on each side, so that Batavia
+may justly be called a fine city: But the sight is the only sense that
+is gratified here, for the canals smell very offensively when the tide
+is low, and breed vast swarms of muskitoes, which are more troublesome
+here than in any place I was ever in.
+
+A great part of the inhabitants of Batavia are Chinese, who are
+remarkable for wearing there their ancient dress, having their hair
+rolled up in such a manner that there is little difference in that
+respect between the men and women. Ever since the revolution in China,
+which brought that country under the Tartar yoke, the Tartarian
+dress has been imposed upon the whole kingdom, which was not
+effected without great bloodshed: For many of the Chinese were
+so superstitiously attached to their ancient modes, that they
+unaccountably chose rather to lose their lives than their hair; as the
+Tartar fashion is to shave the head, except a long lock on the crown,
+which they plait in the same manner we do. The Dutch, taking advantage
+of this superstitious attachment of the Chinese to their hair, exact
+from all the men who live under their protection, a poll-tax of a
+dollar a month for the liberty of wearing their hair, which produces a
+very considerable revenue.
+
+Hearing at Batavia that there were several pirates in these seas,
+Captain Hill joined the Dutch homeward-bound fleet in Bantam bay, and
+the Dutch commodore promised to assist Captain Hill in wooding and
+watering at _Mew_ island, the water at Batavia being very bad. We fell
+in with the Francis in the Straits of Sunda, though we imagined that
+ship had been far a-head. The Dutch made this a pretence for leaving
+us before we got to Mew island, and Captain Newsham also deserted
+us, so that we were left alone. We continued six or seven days at
+Mew island, during which time several boats came to us from Prince's
+island, and brought us turtle, cocoa-nuts, pine-apples, and other
+fruits. From Mew island we had a very pleasant voyage to and about the
+Cape of Good Hope. By the good management of Captain Hill, although
+the Francis and the Dutch ships had the start of us seven days, by
+deserting us in the Straits of Sunda, we yet got to the cape seven
+days before the Francis, though she sailed considerably better than
+we. By comparing notes with the officers of the Francis, we found that
+she had suffered a good deal of bad weather off the south of Africa,
+while we, by keeping about ten leagues nearer shore, continually
+enjoyed pleasant weather and a fair wind, till we anchored in Table
+Bay, which we did towards the end of March, 1722.
+
+We here found Governor Boon and others, bound for England in the
+London Indiaman. We had a pleasant voyage from the cape to St Helena,
+and thence to England, arriving off the Land's-end towards the close
+of July. On coming into the British channel we had brisk gales from
+the west, with thick foggy weather. In the evening of the 30th July we
+anchored under Dungeness, and that same night some of the supercargoes
+and passengers, among whom I was one, hired a small vessel to carry
+us to Dover, where we arrived the next morning early. The same day we
+proceeded for London, and arrived there on the 1st August, 1722. Thus
+ended a long, fatiguing, and unfortunate voyage, of _three years,
+seven months, and eleven days_, in which I had sailed considerably
+more than round the circumference of the globe, and had undergone a
+great variety of troubles and hardships by sea and land.
+
+
+
+SECTION VII.
+
+_Supplement to the foregoing Voyage._
+
+In the Collection of Harris, besides interweaving several
+controversial matters respecting this voyage, from an account of it by
+one Betagh, who was captain of marines in the Speedwell, a long series
+of remarks on the conduct of Shelvocke by that person, are appended.
+Neither of these appear to possess sufficient interest, at this
+distance of time, almost a century, to justify their insertion in
+our collection, where they would have very uselessly occupied a
+considerable space. Captain Betagh appears to have been actuated by
+violent animosity against Captain Shelvocke, whose actions he traduced
+and misrepresented with the utmost malignity, the innocent cause of
+his having suffered captivity among the Spaniards in South America,
+of which some account will be found in the subsequent section. Of
+all these charges, we have only deemed it expedient to insert the
+following statement of the circumstances connected with the capture
+of the Conception, as related by Betagh, which Harris, I. 230,
+characterizes as "a very extraordinary piece of recent history, and
+seemingly supported by evidence;" but at this distance of time we have
+no means of ascertaining to which side the truth belongs.--_Ed._
+
+"This being the great crisis of the voyage, I shall be more particular
+in relating the affair of this last prize. This ship was named the
+Conception, Don _Stephen de Recova_ commander,[1] bound from Calao to
+Panama, having on board several persons of distinction, particularly
+the Conde de la Rosa, who had been some time governor of Pisco,
+and was now going to Spain, laden with flour, sugar, marmalade, _et
+cetera_. Now, be it known to all men, that the _et cetera_ was 108,630
+pieces of eight, or Spanish dollars: And Shelvocke little thought,
+when he took this prize, or compiled his book, that I, of all men,
+should have the exact state of this affair. He often said that he
+would give the gentlemen owners a fair account; and I have often
+promised to prove that he did say so. We have now both made our
+words good, and I have not only an authentic account, but I will also
+declare how I got it.
+
+[Footnote 1: Shelvocke who certainly ought to have known best, names
+the ship the Conception de Recova, and her commander Don Joseph
+Desorio.--E.]
+
+"When I was carried prisoner to Lima, I had sufficient leisure to
+reflect on my misfortunes, and how likely I was to be ruined and
+the owners cheated; wherefore, to prepare them to defend their just
+rights, I wrote to one of them the substance of what had occurred
+to me; how Shelvocke had mismanaged; how arbitrarily he had acted in
+defiance of their articles, and what were his private intentions in
+the latter part of the voyage. As soon as I came to London, which was
+in October, 1721, I confirmed the report of my letter with several
+new circumstances; for all which performance of my duty, it is, as
+I suppose, that my name has met with so much reproach in Captain
+Shelvocke's book. But, besides my advices, the gentlemen owners had
+many proofs from prisoners and other people. Eleven months after me,
+being August, 1722, Shelvocke himself arrived, and immediately waited
+on the gentlemen in the lump for all his transactions; not owning any
+thing of this prize, which he had unlawfully shared, with every thing
+else, among twenty-three of his men. Instead of compromising the
+matter, the gentlemen read him a letter, secured him, and had him
+the same day confined in _Wood-street Compter_. A few days after, his
+pupil, Stewart, arrived at Dover, and was seized by the honest warden
+of the castle, according to directions, securing also his book of
+accounts, and brought it along with the prisoner to the owners, from
+whom I had the book, and copied from it the following statement of the
+dividends:--
+
+Names. Quality Number Dollars Eng.
+ of Money.
+ Shares
+
+George Shelvocke Captain 6 14,325 2642 10 0
+Samuel Rundal Lieutenant 2-1/2|
+John Rainer Cap. Marines 2-1/2|
+Blowfield Coldsea Master 2-1/2|---4718 1100 17 4
+Nicholas Adams Surgeon 2-1/2| each
+Mathew Stewart First mate 2|
+Monsieur La Porte Second mate 2|
+George Henshall Boatswain 2|-------3775 880 16 8
+Robert Davenport Carpenter 2| each
+William Clark Gunner 2|
+James Daniel Midshipman 1-1/2|
+David Griffith Ditto 1-1/2|
+Christopher Hawkins Ditto 1-1/2|
+Oliver Lefevre Sail-maker 1-1/2|
+John Doydge Surgeon's |
+ mate 1-1/2|
+William Morgan Ditto 1-1/2|---2850 660 0 0
+John Popplestone Armourer 1-1/2| each
+James Moyett Cooper 1-1/2|
+John Pearson Carpenter's 1-1/2|
+ mate |
+Geo. Shelvocke, jun. 1-1/2|
+William Clement Able seaman 1|
+John Norris Ditto 1|
+James Moulville Ditto 1|
+George Gill Ditto 1|
+Peter Fero Ditto 1|-------1887-1/4 440 7 2
+John Smith Ditto 1| each
+Edward Alcocke Ditto 1|
+John Theobald Barber 1|
+William Burrows Old seaman 3/4
+Daniel M'Donald Ditto 3/4
+Richard Croft Ditto 3/4
+John Robbins Grommet, 1/2|
+ or boy |----943-1/4 220 4 2
+Benedict Harry Cook 1/2| each
+------------------------------------------------------------------
+33 persons in all 52-1/4 98,604-2/3 23,007 15 6
+
+"The reader will perceive that the sum total of this dividend falls
+short of what I said the capture amounted to; but, in order to set
+that matter right, there is a secret article of 627 quadruples of
+gold, which Shelvocke graciously shared among private friends, each
+quadruple, or double doubloon; being worth sixteen dollars each, or L.
+3:14:8 sterling, at 4s. 8d. the dollar. The value of these is 10,032
+dollars, which, added to the sum of the foregoing account, make
+108,636-3/4 dollars, or L. 25,348:11:6 sterling in all. Which large
+sum of money Shelvocke had the prodigious modesty to conceal, under
+the mysterious _et cetera_. Stewart's book mentions the double
+doubloons, but says not a word as to how they were distributed, so
+that we may imagine they were sunk between the two Shelvockes and
+Stewart: For, as Stewart was agent, cashier, and paymaster, it was an
+easy matter to hide a bag of gold from the public, and to divide it
+afterwards in a committee of two or three."--_Betagh._
+
+
+
+SECTION VIII.
+
+_Appendix to Shelvocke's Voyage round the World. Containing
+Observations on the Country and Inhabitants of Peru, by Captain
+Betagh._[1]
+
+[Footnote 1: Harris, I. 240.]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+This article may rather seem misplaced, as here inserted among the
+circumnavigations; but, both as having arisen out of the voyage of
+Shelvocke, and because arranged in this manner by Harris, it has been
+deemed proper and necessary to preserve it in this place, where it
+may be in a great measure considered as a supplement to the preceding
+voyage. In the opinion of Harris, "The time that Betagh lived among
+the Spaniards in Peru, and the manner in which he was treated by them,
+gave him an opportunity of acquainting himself with their manners and
+customs, and with the nature and maxims of their government, such as
+no Englishman had possessed; and the lively manner in which he tells
+his story, gives it much beauty and spirit." We have already seen, in
+the narrative of Shelvocke, the occasion of Betagh separating from his
+commander, along with Hately and a complement of men in the Mercury,
+on which occasion Shelvocke alleged that they purposely separated from
+him, in consequence of taking a prize containing 150,000 dollars. In
+the following narrative, Betagh tells his own story very differently,
+and we do not presume to determine between them. The separation of
+Shelvocke originally from his own superior officer, Clipperton, is not
+without suspicion; and Hately and Betagh may have learnt from their
+commander, to endeavour to promote their own individual interests, at
+the expense of their duty, already weakened by bad example.--_Ed_.
+
+Sec. 1. _PARTICULARS OF THE CAPTURE OF THE MERCURY BY THE SPANIARDS_.
+
+It was in the beginning of the year 1720, about the middle of March,
+when Captain Shelvocke sent Hately and the rest of us to seek our
+fortunes in the lighter called the Mercury. He then went in the
+Speedwell to plunder the village of Payta, where we might easily have
+joined him, had he been pleased to have imparted his design to us.
+We had not cruized long off Cape Blanco, when we took a small bark,
+having a good quantity of flour and chocolate. There were also on
+board an elderly lady, and a thin old friar, whom we detained two
+or three days; and, after taking out what could be of use to us, we
+discharged the bark and them. Soon after this we took the Pink, which
+Shelvocke calls the rich prize. Her people had no suspicion of our
+being an enemy, and held on their way till they saw the Mercury
+standing towards them, and then began to suspect us; on which, about
+noon, they clapt their helm hard a-weather, and crowded all sail
+before the wind; and, being in ballast, this was her best sailing, yet
+proved also the greatest advantage they could have given us; for, had
+she held her wind, our flat-bottomed vessel could never have got up
+with theirs. About ten o'clock at night, with the assistance of hard
+rowing, we got up within shot of the chase, and made her bring to,
+when pretty near the shore. On boarding the prize, in which were
+about seventy persons, thirty of whom were negroes, Hately left me and
+Pressick in the Mercury, with other four, where we continued two or
+three days, till a heavy rain spoiled all our bread and other dry
+provisions. We then went on board the prize, sending three men to take
+charge of the Mercury.
+
+After this, we stood off and on in the height of Cape Blanco for seven
+or eight days, expecting to meet with the Speedwell; and at that
+place we sent ashore the Spanish Captain, a padre or priest, and some
+gentlemen passengers. At last we espied a sail plying to windward;
+and, having no doubt that she was either the Speedwell or the Success,
+we stood towards her, while she also edged down towards us. About ten
+in the morning we were near enough to make her out to be a ship of
+war, but neither of these we wished for. The master of our prize had
+before informed us, that he had fallen in with the _Brilliante_,
+which was cruizing for our privateers, and we had till now entirely
+disregarded his information. Upon this, Hately advised with me what
+we ought to do in this emergency, when we agreed to endeavour to take
+advantage of the information given us by the Spaniards; considering,
+as the Brilliante had spoken so very lately with the Pink, that there
+might not be many questions asked now. Accordingly, Hately and
+I dressed ourselves like Spaniards, and hoisted Spanish colours,
+confined all our prisoners in the great cabin, and allowed none but
+Indians and negroes to appear on the deck, that the Pink might have
+the same appearance as before. We had probably succeeded in this
+contrivance, but for the obstinacy of John Sprake, one of our men,
+whom we could not persuade to keep off the deck. As the Brilliante
+came up, she fired a gun to leeward, on which we lowered our topsail,
+going under easy sail till we got alongside. The first question asked
+was, If we had seen the English privateer? We answered, No. The next
+question was, How we had got no farther on our way to Lima? To
+which we answered, By reason of the currents. To two or three other
+questions, we answered satisfactorily in Spanish, and they were
+getting their tacks aboard in order to leave us, when Sprake and two
+or three more of our men appeared on the main deck. A Frenchman aboard
+the Brilliante, who was on the mast-head, seeing their long trowsers,
+called out, _Par Dieu, Monsieur, ils sont Anglois_, By Heaven, Sir,
+they are English: Upon which they immediately fired a broad-side into
+us with round and partridge shot, by one of which Hately was slightly
+wounded in the leg.
+
+As soon as we struck our flag, the enemy sent for all the English
+on board their ships, and ordered two of their own officers into our
+prize. The Brilliante then bore down on the Mercury, into which she
+fired at least twenty-five shot, which bored her sides through and
+through: Yet such was the construction of that extraordinary vessel,
+that, though quite full of water, there was not weight enough to sink
+her, and our three men who were in her remained unhurt. Don Pedro
+Midrando, the Spanish commander, ordered these three men into his
+own ship, in which he intended to sail for Payta. As for me, he gave
+directions that I should be sent forty miles up the country, to a
+place called _Piura_, and was so kind as to leave Mr Pressick the
+surgeon, and my serjeant Cobbs, to bear me company. Mr Hately and
+the rest of our men were ordered to Lima by land, a journey of four
+hundred miles.[2] Hately had the misfortune to be doubly under the
+displeasure of the Spaniards: First, for returning into these seas
+after having been long their prisoner, and being well used among them:
+And, second, for having stripped the Portuguese captain at Cape Frio
+of a good quantity of moidores, which were now found upon him. Don
+Pedro proposed to have this business searched to the bottom, and the
+guilty severely punished, without exposing the innocent to any danger.
+
+[Footnote 2: Lima is above six hundred miles from Cape Blanco, and
+Piura is about seventy-five miles from the same place. Betagh gives no
+account of the place where he landed; but forty miles northwards from
+Piura would only carry him to the north side of the bay of Payta; and,
+as he makes no mention of passing any river, he was probably landed on
+the south side of the river Amatape or Chira.--E.]
+
+Sec. 2. _OBSERVATIONS MADE BY BETAGH IN THE NORTH OF PERU._
+
+Leaving Mr Hately for the present, I proceed to the observations I
+made on the road, as the admiral was so good as send me up into the
+country, till his return from Payta. As the weather in this part of
+the world is much too hot to admit of any labour in the middle of the
+day, the custom is to travel only from six in the evening till eight
+next morning. My Indian guide set me on the best mule he had,
+which did not think proper to follow the rest, so that I led my
+fellow-travellers while day lasted. The whole country through which we
+travelled was an open plain, having Indian plantations laid out with
+tolerable regularity, on both sides of us. This champaign country is
+from thirty to an hundred miles broad, and extends three hundred
+miles along shore; and I was travelling to the southward, having the
+Cordelieras, or mountains of the Andes, on my left hand, and the great
+Pacific Ocean to the right. As the soil is good and fertile, this land
+would be as fine a country as any in the world, if well watered; but
+travellers are here obliged to carry water for their mules as well as
+themselves. At the approach of night, I was much puzzled to find the
+way, my mule still persisting to go foremost, being often stopped by
+great sand hills, and my mule as often endeavoured to pull the reins
+out of my hand. This being very troublesome, the Indians advised me
+to lay the reins on the mule's neck, and on doing that the creature
+easily hit the way. These sand hills often shift from place to place,
+which I suppose is occasioned by strong eddy winds, reverberated from
+the mountains.
+
+We rested at night in an old empty house, about half way, which
+the guide told me was built by the inhabitants of Piura, for the
+accommodation of the prince of San Bueno, viceroy of Peru, when they
+met and regaled him at his entrance on his government. After a short
+rest, we continued our journey, and arrived at Piura, a handsome
+regularly built town, on the banks of the river _Callan_ or _Piura_.
+The Indian conducted us to the house of an honest Spanish gentleman
+and his wife, to whose charge he committed us, and then returned to
+Payta. In less than a quarter of an hour, the inhabitants of the town
+flocked to see us, as a raree-show, and entertained us with respect
+and civility, instead of using us as prisoners of war. The gentleman
+to whose charge we were committed was named Don Jeronimo Baldivieso,
+who had five daughters, who received us in so benevolent a manner,
+that we hoped our time would slide easily away, and our captivity
+prove no way disagreeable; and I now became sensible of the favour
+shewn me by Don Pedro in sending me to this place; for he had such
+interest in all Peru, that for his sake we found very good treatment.
+
+After refreshing ourselves, according to the custom of the country,
+with chocolate, biscuit, and water, we were serenaded by the sound
+of a harp from some inner apartment, of which instrument the artist
+seemed to have a good command, as I heard parts of several famous
+compositions, both Italian and English. Upon enquiry, I found that
+all Don Jeronimo's daughters had learnt music, and sung or played
+upon some instrument. Though this seemed unaccountable at first, I
+afterwards found that music was much cultivated in Peru. During the
+prevalence of the Italian party at the court of Madrid, the last
+viceroy of Peru, the prince of San Bueno, who was an Italian, brought
+a great many musicians to that country along with him, by whom the
+taste for music had spread every where, and had become as good in
+Peru as in old Spain. I the rather notice this, because, by our
+being lovers of music, and behaving peaceably and civilly to the
+inhabitants, we passed our time quietly and chearfully. We were only
+exposed to one inconvenience, which lasted all the time we remained
+here: which was, the daily assembling of the people to stare at us.
+I and my sergeant Cobbs, being used to exercise in public, bore this
+pretty well; but Mr Pressick, being a grave man, at first hung down
+his head, and was very melancholy. But he grew better acquainted with
+the people by degrees, and came to like them so well, that we had much
+ado to get him away, when it became necessary for us to remove our
+quarters.
+
+Almost all the commodities of Europe are distributed through Spanish
+America by a sort of pedlars, or merchants who travel on foot. These
+men come from Panama to Payta by sea; and in their road from Payta
+to Lima, make Piura their first stage, disposing of their goods, and
+lessening their burdens, as they go along. From Piura, some take the
+inland road by Caxamarca, and others the road along the coast through
+Truxillo. From Lima they take their passage back to Panama by sea,
+perhaps carrying with them a small adventure of brandy. At Panama
+they again stock themselves with European goods, and return by sea to
+Payta. Here they hire mules to carry their goods, taking Indians along
+with them to guide the mules and carry them back: And in this
+way these traders keep a continual round, till they have gained a
+sufficiency to live on. Their travelling expenses are next to nothing;
+as the Indians are under such entire subjection to the Spaniards,
+that they always find them in lodgings free, and provide them with
+provender for their mules. All this every white man may command, being
+an homage the Indians have long been accustomed to, and some think
+themselves honoured into the bargain. Yet out of generosity, they
+sometimes meet with a small recompense. Among the British and French,
+a pedlar is despised, and his employment is considered as a very, mean
+shift for getting a living: But it is quite otherwise here, where the
+quick return of money is a sufficient excuse for the manner in which
+it is gained; and there are many gentlemen in old Spain, in declining
+circumstances, who send their sons to what they call _the Indies_, to
+retrieve their fortunes in this way.
+
+Our lodging while at Piura was in an out-house, which had been built
+on purpose for accommodating such travelling merchants. Every day,
+according to the Spanish custom, our dinner was served up under
+covers, and we eat at the same table with Don Jeronimo; while the good
+lady of the house and her daughters sat in another room. Any strong
+liquors are only used during dinner: And I think the only circumstance
+in our conduct that any way disobliged our good host, was once seeing
+me drink a dram with the doctor, at a small eating-house; and, as
+nothing is more offensive to the Spaniards than drunkenness, I had
+much ado to apologise for this step. Yet they admit of gallantry in
+the utmost excess, thus only exchanging one enormity for another.
+
+After remaining about six weeks at Piura, our Indian guide came to
+conduct us to Payta, to which place the Brilliante had returned. When
+about to take leave, Mr Pressick our surgeon was not to be found,
+which detained us a day. They had concealed him in the town, meaning
+to have kept him there, being a very useful man; and if he could have
+had a small chest of medicines, he might soon have made a handsome
+fortune. Next day, however, we mounted our mules, and parted
+reluctantly with our kind host and his family. We went on board the
+Brilliante at Payta, which had done nothing at sea since we left her,
+and now made a sort of cruizing voyage to Calao, the port of Lima.
+I have already mentioned the civility I received from Don Pedro
+Midranda, who was admiral or general of the South Seas; and I shall
+here add one circumstance to the honour of Monsieur de Grange, a
+captain under the general. When taken by the Brilliante, the soldiers
+stripped us, considering our clothes as the usual perquisite of
+conquerors; on which that gentleman generously gave me a handsome suit
+of clothes, two pair of silk stockings, shirts, a hat and wig, and
+every thing accordant, so that I was rather a gainer by this accident.
+
+Sec. 3. _VOYAGE FROM PAYTA TO LIMA, AND ACCOUNT OF THE ENGLISH PRISONERS
+AT THAT PLACE._
+
+Our voyage to Lima occupied about five weeks; and, immediately on our
+arrival, we were committed to the same prison in which the rest of
+the ship's company were confined, except Mr Hately, who, for reasons
+formerly assigned, was confined by himself, and very roughly treated.
+A short time after our arrival, commissioners were appointed to
+hear our cause, and to determine whether we were to be treated as
+criminals, or as prisoners of war. We were charged with piracy,
+not solely for what we had done in the South Seas in plundering
+the Spaniards, but for having used the like violence against other
+nations, before our arrival in that sea, from which they proposed to
+infer that we had evinced a piratical disposition in the whole of
+our conduct. Of this they thought they had sufficient proof in the
+moidores found upon Hately, as they appeared to have been taken from
+the subjects of a prince in amity with our sovereign. Happily for us,
+Don Diego Morsilio, the viceroy, who was an archbishop in the decline
+of life, was pleased to investigate this matter; and finding only one
+of us guilty, would not sign an order for taking away the lives of
+the innocent. Some were for sending Hatley to the mines for life,
+and others for hanging him: But the several accounts of the vile
+proceedings of Captain Shelvocke contributed to his deliverance, of
+the truth of which circumstance, there were enough of our people at
+Lima to witness; for, besides Lieutenant Sergeantson and his men,
+who were brought thither, there came also the men whom Shelvocke sent
+along with Hopkins to shift for themselves in an empty bark, who were
+forced to surrender themselves to the Indians for want of sustenance;
+so that the court were satisfied that Shelvocke was the principal in
+that piratical act, rather than Hately. Considering that we had all
+been sufficiently punished before our arrival at Lima, they thought
+fit to let us all go by degrees. Hately was kept in irons about a
+twelvemonth, and was then allowed to return to England. I was more
+fortunate, as my imprisonment lasted only a fortnight, owing to the
+interposition of one Captain Fitzgerald, a gentleman born in France,
+who had great interest with the viceroy, and became security for
+me, on which I was allowed my liberty in the city, provided I were
+forthcoming when called for.
+
+Among my first enquiries was into the condition of other English
+prisoners at this place. I learnt from Lieutenant Sergeantson and
+his men, who were here before us, that most of them had adopted the
+religion of the country, had been christened, and were dispersed among
+the convents of the city. The first of these I met had his catechism
+in one hand, and a large string of beads dangling in the other. I
+smiled, and asked him how he liked it? He said, very well; for having
+a religion to chuse, he thought theirs better than none, especially
+as it brought him good meat and drink, and a quiet life. Many of
+Shelvocke's men followed this example, and I may venture to say, that
+most of them had the same substantial reason for their conversion.
+It is here reckoned very meritorious to make a convert, and many
+arguments were used for that purpose, but no rigorous measures
+were used to bring any one over to their way of thinking. Those who
+consented to be baptized, generally had some of the merchants of Lima
+for their patrons and god-fathers, who never failed to give them a
+good suit of clothes, and some money to drink their healths.
+
+About this time four or five of Clipperton's men had leave from the
+convents where they resided, to meet together at a public-house kept
+by one John Bell, an Englishman, who had a negro wife, who had been
+made free for some service or other. The purpose of this meeting was
+merely to confirm their new baptism over a bowl of punch; but they all
+got drunk and quarrelled, and, forgetting they were true catholics,
+they demolished the image of some honest saint that stood in a corner,
+mistaking him for one of their companions. Missing them for a few
+days, I enquired at Bell what was become of them, when he told me they
+were all in the Inquisition; for the thing having taken air, he was
+obliged to go himself to complain of their behaviour, but he got them
+released a few days after, when they had time to repent and get
+sober in the dungeons of the holy office. Bell said, if these men had
+remained heretics, their drunken exploit had not come within the verge
+of the ecclesiastical power; but as they were novices, they were the
+easier pardoned, their outrages on the saint being attributed to the
+liquor, and not to any designed affront to the catholic faith, or a
+relapse into heresy.
+
+Some time afterwards, about a dozen of our men from the Success and
+Speedwell were sent to Calao, to assist in careening and fitting out
+the Flying-fish, designed for Europe. They here entered into a plot
+to run away with the Margarita, a good sailing ship which lay in the
+harbour, meaning to have gone for themselves, in which of course they
+would have acted as pirates. Not knowing what to do for ammunition and
+a compass, they applied to Mr Sergeantson, pretending they meant to
+steal away to Panama, where there was an English factory, and whence
+they had hopes of getting home. They said they had got half a dozen
+firelocks, with which they might be able to kill wild hogs or other
+game, as they went along, and begged him to help them to some powder
+and shot, and a compass to steer their way through the woods. By
+begging and making catholic signs to the people in Lima, they had
+collected some dollars, which they desired Sergeantson to lay out
+for them; and he, not mistrusting their plot, bought them what they
+wanted. Thus furnished, one of them came to me at Lima, and told me
+their intention, and that Sprake was to have the command, as being the
+only one among them who knew any thing of navigation. I answered, that
+it was a bold design; but as Captain Fitzgerald had engaged for my
+honour, I could not engage in it. Their plot was discovered a few days
+after, their lodgings searched, their arms taken away, and they were
+committed to prison. The government was much incensed against them,
+and had nearly determined upon their execution; but they were soon all
+released except Sprake, who was the ringleader, and was kept in irons
+for two or three months, and then set at liberty.
+
+The dominions belonging to the Spaniards in America are so large and
+valuable, that, if well governed, they might render that monarchy
+exceedingly formidable. In my long stay in Peru, I had the means of
+examining at leisure, and with attention, their manner of living, the
+form of their government, and many other circumstances little known
+in our part of the world, and had many opportunities of enquiring into
+things minutely, which did not fall under my immediate observation;
+and of which I propose to give as clear and accurate an account as
+I can, constantly distinguishing between what fell under my own
+immediate knowledge, and what I received from the information of
+others.
+
+Sec. 4. _DESCRIPTION OF LIMA, AND SOME ACCOUNT OF THE GOVERNMENT OF
+PERU._
+
+The great and rich city of Lima is the metropolis of Peru, and the
+seat of an archbishop. It is all regularly built, the streets being
+all straight and spacious, dividing the whole into small squares. It
+stands in an open vale, through which runs a gentle stream, dividing
+the city in two, as the Thames does London from Southwark. Calao is
+the port of Lima, from whence it is about seven miles distant. Because
+of the frequent earthquakes, the houses are only of one story, and
+generally twelve or fourteen feet high. It contains eight parish
+churches, three colleges for students, twenty-eight monasteries of
+friars, and thirteen nunneries, so that the religions occupy a fourth
+part of the city; yet, by the quick and plentiful flow of money, and
+the vast sums bequeathed through the effects of celibacy, they are
+well endowed. Besides these, there are two hospitals for sick, poor,
+and disabled; and in which several of our men were kindly looked
+after. The length of the city from north to south is two miles, and
+its breadth one and a half; its whole circumference, including the
+wall and the river, being six miles. The other, or smaller part of
+the city, is to the east of the river, over which there is a handsome
+stone bridge of seven arches. Including all sorts and colours, I
+computed that the whole population of Lima amounted to between
+sixty and seventy thousand persons; and I should not wonder at any
+multiplication in this city, as it is the centre of so much affluence
+and pleasure. Besides the natural increase of the inhabitants, all
+ships that trade this way, whether public or private, generally leave
+some deserters, who remain behind in consequence of the encouragement
+given to all white faces.
+
+The people here are perhaps the most expensive in their habits of any
+in the world. The men dress nearly as in England, their coats being
+either of silk, fine English cloth, or camblets, embroidered or laced
+with gold or silver, and their waistcoats usually of the richest
+brocades. The women wear no stays or hoops, having only a stitched
+holland jacket next their shifts, and they generally wear a square
+piece of swansdown flannel thrown over their shoulders, entirely
+covered with Flanders lace, and have their petticoats adorned with
+gold or silver lace. When they walk out, the Creole women are mostly
+veiled, but not the mulattoes; and, till thirty or forty years of
+age, they wear no head-clothes, their hair being tied behind with fine
+ribbons. The pride of the ladies chiefly appears in fine Mechlin or
+Brussels lace, with which they trim their linen in a most extravagant
+manner, not omitting even their sheets and pillows. Their linen
+jackets are double bordered with it, both at top and bottom, with four
+or five ruffles or furbelows hanging down to their knees. They
+are very extravagant also in pearls and precious stones, in rings,
+bracelets, and necklaces, though the value of these is hardly equal to
+the shew.
+
+The viceroy has a splendid palace in the royal square, or great
+quadrangle of the city, which seemed as large as Lincoln's-Inn-Fields.
+His salary is ten thousand pounds a-year, but his perquisites amount
+to double that sum. And though his government expires at the end of
+three, four, or five years, he generally makes a handsome fortune,
+as all places are in his gift, both in the government and the army
+throughout all Peru, except such as are sent out or nominated by the
+king. The great court of justice consists of twelve judges, besides a
+number of inferior officers, councillors, and solicitors. Before this
+court all causes are decided, but they are too often determined in
+favour of the party who gives most money. And, though these vast
+dominions abound in riches, there is not much work for the lawyers,
+as the laws are few and plain, which certainly is much better than
+a multiplicity of laws, explaining one another till they become so
+intricate that the issue of a cause depends more on the craft of the
+solicitor and advocate, than on its justice. Every magistrate in this
+country knows that his reign is short, and that he will be laughed at
+if he does not make a fortune, so that they wink at each other; and,
+so great is the distance between Spain and Peru, that the royal orders
+are seldom, regarded, being two years in going backward and forward:
+Hence arise many clandestine doings. According to law, the king ought
+to have a twentieth part of all the gold, and a fifth of all the
+silver procured from the mines; but vast quantities are carried away
+privately, without paying any duty, both north by Panama, and south
+through the Straits of Magellan. There are also vast sums allowed for
+the militia, the garrisons, and the repairs of fortifications, one
+half of which are never applied to these objects. Hence it may easily
+be imagined what immense riches would flow into the treasury of
+Madrid, if his catholic majesty were faithfully served.
+
+The country of Peru is naturally subject to earthquakes. About fifty
+years before I was there, or about the year 1670, there were two great
+ones at Lima, which overturned many houses, churches, and convents.
+And in the reign of Charles II. the late king of Spain, there was an
+earthquake near the equator, which lifted up whole fields, carrying
+them to the distance of several miles. Small shocks are often felt
+which do no harm, and I have been often called out of bed on such
+occasions, and heard nothing more about the matter; but on these
+occasions the bells always toll to prayers. Yet, although this country
+has suffered much from earthquakes, especially near the coast, their
+churches are lofty and neatly built. Such parts of their buildings as
+require strength are made of burnt bricks; but their dwelling-houses
+are all constructed of bamboos, canes, and bricks only dried in
+the sun, which are sufficiently durable, as it never rains in Peru.
+Instead of roofs, they are merely covered over with mats, on which
+ashes are strewed, to keep out the dews. The small river of Lima,
+or _Runac_, consists mostly of snow-water from the neighbouring
+mountains, which are covered all the year with snow, that partly
+dissolves in the summer-season, from September to March.
+
+One would expect the weather to be much hotter here; but there is
+no proportion between the heat of this part of America and the
+same latitudes in Africa. This is owing to two causes; that the
+neighbourhood of the snowy mountains diffuses a cool temperature
+of the air all around; and the constant humid vapours, which are so
+frequent that I often expected it to rain when I first went to Lima.
+These vapours are not so dense, low, and gloomy, like our fogs, nor
+yet are they separated above like our summer clouds; but an exhalation
+between both, spread all around, as when we say the day is overcast,
+so that sometimes a fine dew is felt on the upper garments, and may
+even be discerned on the knap of the cloth. This is a prodigious
+convenience to the inhabitants of Lima, who are thus screened half the
+day from the sun; and though it often shines out in the afternoon, yet
+is the heat very tolerable, being tempered by the sea-breezes, and
+not near so hot as at Lisbon and some parts of Spain, more than thirty
+degrees farther from the equator.
+
+The entire want of rain in this country induced the Indians, even
+before the conquest, to construct canals and drains for leading water
+from among the distant mountains, which they have done with great
+skill and labour, so as to irrigate and refresh the vallies, by which
+they produce grass and corn, and a variety of fruits, to which also
+the dews contribute. A Spanish writer observes that this perpetual
+want of rain is occasioned by the south-west wind blowing on the coast
+of Peru the whole year round, which always bears away the vapours from
+the plains before they are of sufficient body to descend in showers:
+But, when carried higher and farther inland, they become more compact,
+and at length fall down in rain on the interior hills. The inhabitants
+of Peru have plenty of cattle, fowls, fish, and all kinds of
+provisions common among us, except butter, instead of which they
+always use lard. They have oil, wine, and brandy in abundance, but not
+so good as in Europe. Instead of tea from China, which is prohibited,
+they make great use of _camini_, called herb of Paraguay, or Jesuits
+tea, which, is brought from Paraguay by land. They make a decoction
+of this, which they usually suck through a pipe, calling it _Mattea_,
+being the name of the bowl out of which it is drank. Chocolate is
+their usual breakfast, and their grace cup after dinner; and sometimes
+they take a glass of brandy, to promote digestion, but scarcely drink
+any wine. In Chili, they make some butter, such as it is, the cream
+being put into a skin bag kept for that purpose, which is laid on a
+table between two women, who shake it till the butter comes.
+
+The Spaniards are no friends to the bottle, yet gallantry and intrigue
+are here brought to perfection, insomuch that it is quite unmannerly
+here not to have a mistress, and scandalous not to keep her well. The
+women have many accomplishments, both natural and acquired, having
+graceful motions, winning looks, and engaging, free, and sprightly
+conversation. They are all delicately shaped, not injured by
+stiff-bodied stays, but left entirely to the beauty of nature, and
+hardly is there a crooked body to be seen, among them. Their eyes and
+teeth are singularly beautiful, and their hair is universally of a
+dark polished hue, nicely combed and plaited, and tied behind with
+ribbons, but never disguised by powder; and the brightness of their
+skins round the temples, clearly appears through their dark hair.
+Though amours are universal at Lima, the men are very careful to bide
+them, and no indecent word or action is ever permitted in public.
+They usually meet for these purposes, either in the afternoon at
+the _Siesta_, or in the evening in calashes on the other side of the
+river, or in the great square of the city, where calashes meet in
+great numbers in the dusk. These are slung like our coaches, but
+smaller, many of them being made only to hold two persons sitting
+opposite. They are all drawn by one mule, with the negro driver
+sitting on his back; and it is quite usual to see some of these
+calashes, with the blinds close, standing still for half an hour at
+a time. In these amusements they have several customs peculiar to
+themselves. After evening prayers, the gentleman changes his dress
+from a cloak to a _montero_, or jockey-coat, with a laced linen cap on
+his head, and a handkerchief round his neck, instead of a wig; or if
+he wear his own hair, it must be tucked under a cap and concealed, as
+it is the universal fashion to be thus disguised. Even those who
+have no mistress, are ashamed to appear virtuous, and must be somehow
+masked or disguised, in order to countenance the way of the world.
+As, all this is night-work, they have an established rule to avoid
+quarrels, by never speaking to or noticing each other, when going in
+quest of or to visit their ladies.
+
+In short, the fore-part of every night in the year is a kind of
+masquerade. Among people of any rank who do not keep calashes, one
+couple never walks close behind another, but each at the distance
+of at least twelve paces, to prevent the overhearing of any secret
+whispers. Should a lady drop a fan or any thing else by accident, a
+gentleman may take it up, but he must not give it to the lady, but to
+the gentleman who accompanies her, lest she may happen to be the wife
+or sister of him who takes it up; and as all the ladies are veiled,
+these wise rules are devised to prevent any impertinent discoveries.
+Any freedom in contravention of these laws of gallantry would be
+looked upon as the highest affront, and would be thought to merit a
+drawn sword through the midriff. Should any one see his most intimate
+friend any where with a woman, he must never take notice of it, or
+mention it afterwards. Every thing of this nature is conducted with
+all imaginary gravity and decorum, by which the practice of gallantry
+becomes decent and easy; yet there are some jealousies in this regular
+commerce of love, which sometimes end fatally. A story of this kind
+happened shortly before I went to Lima. A young lady, who thought
+herself sole sovereign in the heart of her lover, saw him by chance
+in the company of another, and, waiting no farther proof of his
+infidelity, she instantly plunged a dagger in his bosom. She was soon
+after brought to trial, and every one expected that she should pay
+the forfeit with her life; but the judges, considering her rashness
+as proceeding from excess of love, not malice, acquitted her. However
+agreeable these gallantries may be to the _Creole_ Spaniards, they
+have an inconvenient effect on society; as the men are so engrossed
+by these matters, as to spoil all public conversation. Their time is
+entirely taken up in attendance on their mistresses, so that there are
+no coffee-houses or taverns, and they can only be met with at their
+offices, or in church.
+
+Perhaps it may be chiefly owing to this effeminate propensity, that
+all manly exercises, all useful knowledge, and that noble emulation
+which inspires virtue, and keeps alive respect for the public good,
+are here unknown. Those amusements which serve in other countries to
+relax the labours of the industrious, and to keep alive the vigour of
+the body and mind, are unknown in Peru; and whoever should attempt to
+introduce any such, would be considered as an innovator, which, among
+them, is a hateful character: For they will never be convinced, that
+martial exercises or literary conferences are preferable to intrigues.
+They have, however, a sort of a play-house, where the young gentlemen
+and students divert themselves after their fashion; but their dramatic
+performances are so mean as hardly to be worth mentioning, being
+scripture stories, interwoven with romance, a mixture still worse than
+gallantry. At this theatre, two Englishmen belonging to the squadron
+of Mons. Martinat, fought a prize-battle a short time before I came
+to Lima. Having first obtained leave of the viceroy to display their
+skill at the usual weapons, and the day being fixed, they went through
+many previous ceremonies, to draw, as the phrase is, a good house.
+Preceded by beat of drum, and dressed in holland shirts and ribbons,
+they went about the streets saluting the spectators at the windows
+with flourishes of their swords, so that the whole city came to see
+the trial of skill, some giving gold for admittance, and hardly any
+one less than a dollar. The company, male and female, being assembled,
+the masters mounted the stage, and, after the usual manner of the
+English, having shaken hands, they took their distance, and stood
+on their guard in good order. Several bouts were played without much
+wrath or damage, the design being more to get money than cuts or
+credit, till at length one of the masters received a small hurt on
+the breast, which blooded his shirt, and began to make the combat look
+terrible. Upon this, fearing from this dreadful beginning that the
+zeal of the combatants might grow too warm, the company cried out,
+_Basta! basta!_ or enough! enough! And the viceroy would never permit
+another exhibition of the same kind, lest one of the combatants might
+receive a mortal wound, and so die without absolution.
+
+So deficient are the Spaniards in energy of spirit, that many
+extensive countries and islands remain unexplored, in the immediate
+neighbourhood of their vast American dominions, though some of these
+are reported to be richer and more valuable than those which are
+already conquered and settled. The first Spanish governors of Mexico
+and Peru were not of this indolent disposition, but bestowed great
+pains in endeavouring to acquire the most perfect knowledge bordering
+upon their respective governments: But now that general thirst of fame
+is entirely extinguished, and they content themselves with plundering
+their fellow-subjects in the countries already known. The regions to
+the north of Mexico are known to abound in silver, precious stones,
+and other rich commodities, yet the Spaniards decline all conquest on
+that side, and discourage as much as possible the reports which have
+spread of the riches of these countries. On the same principles, they
+give no encouragement to attempt penetrating into the heart of South
+America, whence most of the riches of Peru are known to come, the
+mountains at the back of the country being extremely rich in gold; and
+the regions, on the other side, towards the Atlantic, being inhabited
+by nations that have abundance of that metal, though, for fear of
+being oppressed by the Europeans, they conceal it as much as possible.
+
+Of all the discoveries that have been talked of among the Spaniards,
+that which has made the most noise is the island or islands of
+Solomon, supposed to be the same with those discovered by the famous
+Ferdinand Quiros. He reported them to be extremely rich and very
+populous, and repeatedly memorialed the court of Spain to be
+authorised to complete his discovery. All his solicitations, however,
+were neglected, and it became a question in a few years whether any
+such islands had ever existed. At length, towards the close of the
+seventeenth century, such discoveries were made as to the reality of
+these islands, that Don Alvaro de Miranda was sent out to discover
+them in 1695. He failed in the attempt, but in the search met with
+four islands, between the latitude of 7 deg. and 10 deg. S. which were
+wonderfully rich and pleasant, the inhabitants being a better looking
+race, and far more civilized than any of the Indians on the continent
+of America. This discovery occasioned a good deal of discourse at the
+time; but the subsequent disturbances relative to the succession to
+the crown of Spain, so occupied the attention of every person, that
+all views of endeavouring to find the islands of Solomon were laid
+aside.[2]
+
+[Footnote 2: These islands of Miranda appear to have been the
+Marquebes, between the latitudes of 8 deg. 45' and 10 deg. 25' N. and long.
+139 deg. W. The Solomon islands, or New Georgia, are between 5 deg. and 10 deg. N.
+and long. 200 deg. to 205 deg. W. 63-1/2 degrees of longitude farther to the
+westwards.--E.]
+
+Sec. 5. _SOME ACCOUNT OF THE MINES OF PERU AND CHILI_.
+
+As the riches of Peru consist chiefly in mines of silver, I shall
+endeavour to give some account of them, from the best information I
+could procure. There are two sorts of silver-mines, in one of which
+the silver is found scattered about in small quantities, or detached
+masses, while, in the other kind of mine, it runs in a vein between
+two rocks, one of which is excessively hard, and the other much
+softer. These certainly best deserve the name of silver-mines, and
+are accordingly so denominated. This precious metal, which in other
+countries is the standard or measure of riches, is the actual riches
+of Peru, or its chief natural commodity; as, throughout the whole of
+that vast country, silver-mines are almost every where to be met with,
+of more or less value, according as the ore produces more or less
+silver, or can be wrought at a greater or less expence. Some of these
+mines are to the north of Lima, but not a great many, but to the south
+they are very numerous. On the back, or eastern side of the Andes,
+there is a nation of Indians called _Los Platerors_, or the _Plate_,
+or _Silver_ men, from their possessing vast quantities of silver,[1]
+but with them the Spaniards have very little communication. The best
+of the mine countries are to the south of Cusco, from thence to Potosi
+and the frontiers of Chili, where, for the space of 800 miles, there
+is a continued succession of mines, some being discovered and others
+abandoned almost every day.
+
+[Footnote 1: This tribe still holds its place in modern geography,
+in the vast plain to the E. of the Maranors or Amazons, where there
+cannot be any silver-mines, at least that they can explore. They are
+so named because of wearing silver ear-rings, which they must, almost
+certainly, procure in barter from the tribes in the mountains, far to
+the west.--E.]
+
+It is common, both here and elsewhere, for people to complain of the
+times, commending the past, as if there had been infinitely greater
+quantities of silver dug from the mines formerly than at present. This
+certainly may be the case with particular mines; but, on the whole,
+the quantities of silver now annually obtained from the mines in
+Spanish America, abundantly exceeds what used formerly to be procured.
+Those mines which are at present [1720] most remarkable in Peru are,
+Loxa, Camora, Cuenca, Puerto-veio, and St Juan del Oro. Those of Oruro
+and Titiri are neglected; and those of Porco and Plata are filled
+up. At Potosi there are a vast number of mines; and those of Tomina,
+Chocaia, Atacuna, Xuxui, Calchaques, Guasco, Iquique, &c. are all
+wrought with more or less profit, according to the skill of the
+proprietors or managers. It is generally believed that the Creoles
+have a very perfect acquaintance with the minerals, from experience,
+and with the art of treating them, so as to obtain the largest profit;
+but, when their utter ignorance in all other arts is considered, their
+constant going on in the old beaten track, and their enormous waste of
+quicksilver, one is tempted to believe that our European miners might
+conduct their works to still greater advantage.
+
+The most perfect silver that is brought from Peru is in the forms
+called _pinnas_ by the Spaniards, being extremely porous lumps of
+silver, as they are the remainder of a paste composed of silver dust
+and mercury, whence the latter being exhaled or evaporated, leaves the
+silver in a spongy mass, full of holes, and very light. This is the
+kind of silver which is put into various forms by the merchants, in
+order to cheat the king of his duty; wherefore all silver in this
+state, found any where on the road, or on board any ship, is looked
+upon as contraband, and liable to seizure.
+
+In regard to the art of refining, I propose to shew the progress of
+the ore, from the mine till it comes to this spongy mass or cake.
+After breaking the stone or ore taken out of the veins, it is grinded
+in mills between grindstones, or pounded in the _ingenious reales_,
+or royal engines, by means of hammers or beetles, like the mills for
+Paris plaster. These generally have a wheel of twenty-five or thirty
+feet diameter, with a long axle or lying shaft, set round with smooth
+triangular projections, which, as the axle turns, lay hold of the iron
+hammers, of about two hundred-weight each, lifting them to a certain
+height, whence they drop down with such violence that they crush and
+reduce the hardest stones to powder. The pounded ore is afterwards
+sifted through iron or copper sieves, which allow the finest powder
+to go through, the coarse being returned to the mill. When the one
+happens to be mixed with copper or other metals which prevent
+its reduction to powder, it is roasted or calcined in an oven or
+reverberatory furnace, and pounded over again.
+
+At the smaller mines, where they only use grindstones, they, for the
+most part, grind the ore along with water, forming it into a liquid
+paste, which runs out into receivers. When grinded dry, it has to be
+afterwards mixed with water, and well moulded up with the feet for a
+long time. For this purpose, they make a court or floor, on which that
+mud, or paste of pounded ore and water, is disposed in square parcels
+of about a foot thick, each parcel containing half a _caxon_, or
+chest, which is twenty-five quintals or hundred-weights of ore, and
+these parcels are called _cuerpos_, or bodies. On each of these they
+throw about two hundred-weights of sea-salt, more or less, according
+to the nature of the ore, which they mould or incorporate with the
+moistened ore for two or three days. They then add a certain quantity
+of quicksilver, squeezing it from a skin bag, to make it fall in drops
+equally on the mass or _cuerpo_, allowing to each mass ten, fifteen,
+or twenty pounds of quicksilver, according to the nature or quality of
+the ore, as the richer it is, it requires the more mercury to draw it
+to the silver contained in the mass, so that they know the quantity
+by long experience. An Indian is employed to mould or trample one
+of these square cuerpos eight times a-day, that the mercury
+may thoroughly incorporate with the silver. To expedite this
+incorporation, they often mix lime with the mass, when the ore happens
+to be what they call greasy, and in this great caution is required,
+as they say the mass sometimes grows so hot that they neither find
+mercury nor silver in it, which seems quite incredible. Sometimes also
+they strew in some lead or tin ore, to facilitate the operation of the
+mercury, which is slower in very cold weather; wherefore, at Potosi
+and Lipes, they are often obliged to mould or work up their cuerpos
+during a month or six weeks; but, in more temperate climates, the
+amalgama is completed in eight or ten days. To facilitate the action
+of the mercury, they, in some places, as at Puno and elsewhere,
+construct their _buiterons_ or floors on arches, under which they keep
+fires for twenty-four hours, to heat the masses or _cuerpos_, which
+are in that case placed as a pavement of bricks.
+
+When it is thought that the mercury has attracted all the silver,
+the assayer takes a small quantity of ore from each cuerpo, which he
+washes separately in a small earthen plate or wooden bowl; and, by the
+colour and appearance of the amalgama found at the bottom, when the
+earthy matters are washed away, he knows whether the mercury has
+produced its proper effect. When blackish, the ore is said to have
+been too much heated, and they add more salt, or some other temper. In
+this case they say that mercury is _dispara_, that is, shoots or flees
+away. If the mercury remains white, they put a drop under the thumb,
+and pressing it hastily, the silver in the amalgam sticks to the
+thumb, and the mercury slips away in little drops. When they conceive
+that all the silver has incorporated with the mercury, the mixed mass,
+or cuerpo, is carried to a basin or pond, into which a small stream
+of water is introduced to wash it, much in the same way as I shall
+afterwards describe the manner in which they wash gold, only that as
+the silver-ore is reduced to a fine mud without stones, it is stirred
+by an Indian with his feet, to dissolve it thoroughly, and loosen the
+silver. From the first basin it falls into a second, and thence into
+a third, where the stirring and washing is repeated, that any amalgam
+which has not subsided in the first and second may not escape the
+third.
+
+The whole being thoroughly washed in these basins, which are lined
+with leather, till the water runs clear off, the amalgam of mercury
+and silver is found at the bottom, and is termed _la pella_. This is
+put into a woollen bag and hung up, from whence some of the mercury
+runs out. The bag is then beaten and pressed as much as they can,
+laying upon it a flat piece of wood loaded with a heavy weight, to get
+out as much of the mercury as they can. The paste is then put into
+a mould of wooden planks bound together, generally in the form of an
+octagon pyramid cut short, its bottoms being a plate of copper, full
+of small holes, into which the paste is stirred and pressed down, in
+order to fasten it. When they design to make many _pinnas_, or spongy
+lumps of various weights, these are divided from each other by thin
+beds or layers of earth, which hinder them from uniting. For this
+purpose, the _pella_, or mass of amalgam, must be weighed out in
+separate portions, deducting two-thirds for the contained mercury, by
+which they know to a small matter the quantity of silver contained in
+each. They then take off the mould, and place the pella or mass with
+its copper base on a trivet, or such like instrument, standing over a
+great earthen vessel full of water, and cover it with an earthen cap,
+which again is covered by lighted coals. This fire is fed and kept
+up for some hours, by which the mass of pella below becomes violently
+heated, the contained mercury being thereby raised into vapour: But,
+having no means of escape through the cap or cover, it is forced down
+to the water underneath, where it condenses into quicksilver and sinks
+to the bottom. By this contrivance, little of the mercury is lost,
+and the same serves over again. But the quantity must be increased,
+_because it grows weak_.[2] At Potosi, as Acosta relates, they
+formerly consumed six or seven thousand quintals of mercury every
+year, by which Some idea may be formed of the silver there procured.
+
+[Footnote 2: This is utterly absurd, as the mercury must be the same
+in _quality_ as before, the _quantity_ only being _weakened_.]
+
+On the evaporation of the mercury, nothing remains but a spongy lump
+of contiguous grains of silver, very light and almost mouldering,
+called _la pinna_ by the Spaniards. These masses must be carried to
+the king's receipt or mint, to pay the royal fifth; and are there cast
+into ingots, on which are stamped the arms of the crown, the place
+where cast, and their weight and fineness. All these ingots, having
+paid the fifth, are sure to be without fraud or deceit; but it is not
+so with the _pinnas_, as these have often iron, sand, or some other
+matter contained within them, to increase their weight; Hence,
+prudence requires that these should be opened, and made red hot in a
+fire; for, if falsified, the fire will turn them black or yellow, or
+melt them more easily. This trial by fire is also necessary to extract
+moisture, which they contract in places where they are purposely laid
+to render them heavier, as also for separating the mercury with which
+the bottom of the mass is always more or less impregnated. The weight
+of these _pinnas_ may be increased nearly a third, by dipping them
+while red hot into water. It also sometimes happens that the same mass
+of pinna may be of different fineness in different parts.
+
+The ore, or stones taken from the mines, or the _mineray_, as it is
+called in Peru, from which the silver is extracted, is not always of
+the same nature, consistence, and colour. Some are white and grey,
+mixed with red or bluish spots, called _plata blanca_ or white silver;
+of which sort the one in the Lipes mines mostly consists. For the most
+part, some little grains of silver are to be discerned, and very often
+small branches are seen, ramifying along the layers of the stone. Some
+ores are as black as the dross of iron, and in which no silver is to
+be seen, which is called _negrillo_ or blackish ore. Sometimes the ore
+is rendered black by admixture of lead, and is called _plombo ronco_,
+or coarse lead, in which the silver appears as if scratched by
+something harsh. This ore is generally the richest in silver, and from
+it also the silver is got at the smallest charge; as instead of having
+to be moulded or kneaded with quicksilver, it has only to be melted
+in furnaces, where the lead evaporates by the force of fire, and the
+silver remains pure behind. From this sort. of mines, the Indians drew
+their silver before the coming of the Spaniards, having no knowledge
+of the use of mercury, and they accordingly only wrought those mines
+of which the ore would melt; and, having but little wood, they heated
+their furnaces with _ylo_, the dung of the _Llamas_ or Peruvian sheep,
+placing their furnaces on the sides of mountains, that the wind might
+render their fires fierce.
+
+There is another sort of black ore, in which the silver does not at
+all appear; and which, when wetted and rubbed against iron, becomes
+red. This ore is called _rosicler_, signifying that ruddiness which
+appears at the dawn of day. This is very rich, and affords the finest
+silver. Another kind, called _zoroche_, glitters like talc, and is
+generally very poor, yielding little silver: Its outer coat is very
+soft and of a yellowish red, but seldom rich; and the mines of this
+sort are wrought on account of the easiness of extracting the ore,
+being very easily dug. Another kind, not much harder than the last, is
+of a green colour, called _cobrissa_ or copperish, and is very rare.
+Although the silver usually appears in this kind, and it is almost
+mouldering, it is the most difficult of all to manage, as it parts
+very difficultly with the silver. Sometimes, after being stamped or
+reduced to powder, it has to be burnt in the fire, and several other
+expedients must be used to separate the silver, doubtless because
+mixed with copper. There is another very rare sort of ore, which has
+only been found in the mine of _Cotamiso_ at Potosi, being threads of
+pure silver entangled, or wound up together, like burnt lace, and so
+fine that it is called _arana_, or spider ore, from its resemblance to
+a cobweb.
+
+The veins of _mineray_, of whatever sort they may be, are generally
+richer in the middle than towards the edges; and where two veins
+happen to cross each other, the place where they meet is always very
+rich. It is also observed that those which lie north and south are
+richer than those which lie in any other direction. Those also which
+are near to places where mills can be erected, and can consequently
+be more commodiously wrought, are often preferable to others that are
+richer, but require more expense in working. For this reason, at Lipes
+and Potosi, a chest of ore must yield ten marks or eighty ounces of
+silver, to pay the charges of working; while those in the province of
+Tarama only require five merks or forty ounces to defray the expences.
+When even very rich, and they happen to sink down so as to be liable
+to be flooded, the adventurers must have recourse to pumps and
+machines in order to drain them; or to _cocabones_ or levels dug
+through the sides of the mountain, which often ruin the owners by the
+enormous expence they are insensibly drawn into. At some of the mines,
+where the methods of separation already described fail, they use other
+means of extracting the silver from the ore, and from other metals
+which may be combined with it; as by fire, or strong separating
+waters; and there the silver is cast into a sort of ingots, called
+_bollos_. But the most general and useful method is that already
+described.
+
+It may naturally be supposed that mines, as well as other things, are
+subject to variation in their productiveness. The mines which, till
+very lately, yielded most silver, were those of _Oroura_, a small town
+about eight leagues from Arica. In the year 1712, one was discovered
+at _Ollachea_ near Cusco, so rich that it yielded 2500 marks of silver
+of eight ounces each, or 20,000 ounces, out of each _caxon_ or chest,
+being almost a fifth part of the ore; but it has since declined much,
+and is now [1720] only reckoned among the ordinary sort. Those of
+Lipes have had a similar fate. Those at Potosi now yield but little,
+and are worked at a very heavy expence, owing to their excessive
+depth. Although the mines here are far diminished in their
+productiveness, yet the quantity of ore which has been formerly
+wrought, and has lain many years on the surface, is now thought
+capable of yielding a second crop; and when I was at Lima, they were
+actually turning it up, and milling it over again with great success.
+This is a proof that these minerals generate in the earth like all
+other inanimate things;[3] and it likewise appears, from all the
+accounts of the Spaniards, that gold, silver, and other metals are
+continually growing and forming in the earth. This opinion is verified
+by experience in the mountain of Potosi, where several mines had
+fallen in, burying the workmen and their tools; and these being
+again opened up after some years, many boxes and pieces of wood were
+discovered, having veins of silver actually running through them.[4]
+
+[Footnote 3: It is merely a proof that the ore had been formerly very
+imperfectly managed, and still contained enough of silver to pay for
+extraction with profit, by more expert methods.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 4: This proves only change of place, by solution,
+infiltration, and deposition not growth, increase, or new
+production.--E.]
+
+All these mines become the property of their first discoverer, who
+immediately presents a petition to the magistrates, desiring to have
+such a piece of ground for his own. This is accordingly granted, and
+a spot of ground eighty Spanish yards in length by forty in breadth[5]
+is measured out and appropriated to the discoverer, who chuses what
+spot he pleases within these bounds, and does with it as he thinks
+fit. The exact same quantity is then measured off as belonging to the
+king, and is sold to the best bidder, there being always many who are
+willing to purchase, what may turn out an inestimable treasure. After
+this, if any person may incline to work a part of this mine on his own
+account, he bargains with the proprietor for a particular vein. All
+that is dug out by any one is his own, subject however to payment of
+the royal duties; being one-twentieth part for gold, and a fifth for
+silver; and some proprietors find a good account in letting out their
+grounds and mills to others.
+
+[Footnote 5: In Harris this is said to be _about 1200 feet in length,
+and 100 in breadth_, which is obviously absurd; as the one measure
+gives the Spanish yard at 15 English feet, and the latter at 2-1/2
+feet. Both measures are probably erroneous; but there are no data for
+their correction.--E.]
+
+There are gold-mines just beyond the town of Copaipo, and in all the
+country around, which have attracted many purchasers and workmen to
+that district, to the great injury and oppression of the Indians;
+as the Spanish magistrates not only take away their lands for the
+purposes of mining, but their horses also, which they sell to the
+new adventurers, under pretence of serving the king and improving the
+settlements. There is also abundance of magnet and _lapiz lazuli_,
+of which the Indians know not the value; and some leagues within the
+country, there is plenty of salt and salt-petre, which often lies an
+inch thick on the ground. On the _Cordelieras_, about an hundred miles
+to the east, there is a vein of sulphur about two feet wide, so fine
+and pure that it needs no cleaning. This part of the country is full
+of all sorts of mines, but so excessively barren, that the inhabitants
+have to fetch all their subsistence from the country about Coquimbo,
+over a desert of more than 300 miles extent, in which the earth
+abounds so much in salt and sulphur that the mules often perish by
+the way, for want of grass and fresh water. In that long road there
+is only one river in the course of two hundred miles, which is named
+_Ancalulae_ or the Hyporite, because it runs only from sun-rise to
+sun-set. This is occasioned by the great quantities of snow melted on
+the Cordelieras in the day, which freezes again by the excessive cold
+of the night. Hence _Chili_ is said to derive its name, as _chile_
+signifies cold in the Indian language; and we are told by the Spanish
+historians, that some of their countrymen and others, who first traded
+to this country, were frozen to death on their mules; for which reason
+they now always travel by a lower road, towards the coast.
+
+The mine countries are all so cold and barren, that the inhabitants
+have to procure most of their provisions from the coast; this is
+caused by the exhalations of salts and sulphur from the earth, which
+destroy the growth of all vegetables. These are so stifling to the
+Spaniards who dwell about the mines, that they are obliged often to
+drink the _mattea_, or tea made of the herb _camini_, to moisten their
+mouths. The mules also, that trip it nimbly over the mountains, are
+forced to walk slowly in the country about the mines, and have often
+to stop to take breath. If these vapours are so strong without and in
+the open air, what must they be within the bowels of the earth in the
+mines, into which, if a fresh man go, he is suddenly benumbed with
+pain. This is the case with many, but seldom lasts above a day, and
+they are not liable to be affected a second time: Yet vapours often
+burst forth suddenly, by which the workmen are killed on the spot;
+and one way or another, great multitudes of Indians die in working the
+mines. One is apt to wonder that, through all this part of the world,
+those districts which are most barren and unwholesome are the best
+inhabited; while other places, that seem to vie with our nations of
+the terrestrial paradise, in beauty and fertility, are but thinly
+peopled. Yet, when one considers, that it is the thirst of wealth, not
+the love of ease, which attracts people thither, the wonder ceases,
+and we see how much the hope of living rich gets the better even of
+the hope of living; as if the sole end for which man was created was
+to acquire wealth, at the expence of health and happiness.
+
+In reference to these deserts, the following observation occurs to my
+memory, as having happened when we were on the road to Piura. When
+we lay down to sleep at night, our mules went eagerly in search of a
+certain root, not unlike a parsnip, but much bigger, which contains a
+great deal of juice, and, besides serving as food, often answers as
+a substitute for water in the deserts. When the mules find these, and
+are unable to rake them out of the ground with their feet, they stand
+over them and bray with all their might, till the Indians come to
+their assistance.
+
+It is generally understood that silver is the peculiar wealth of Peru,
+and the Spaniards usually talk of gold-mines as confined to Chili: Yet
+there are one or two _lavaderas_, or washing-places for gold in the
+south of Peru, near the frontiers of Chili. In 1709, two surprizingly
+large _pepitos_, or lumps of virgin gold, were found in one of these
+places, one of which weighed complete thirty-two pounds, and was
+purchased by the _Conde de Monclod_, then viceroy of Peru, and
+presented by him to the king of Spain. The other, shaped somewhat like
+an ox's heart, weighed twenty-two pounds and a half; and was purchased
+by the corregidor of Arica. In searching for these _lavadores_ or
+washing places, they dig in the corners of some little brook, where
+they judge, from certain tokens, that the grains of gold are lodged.
+To assist in carrying away the earth or mud, they let in a stream or
+current of water into the excavation, and keep stirring up the soil,
+that the water may carry it away. On reaching the golden sand, they
+turn the stream another way, and dig out this sand, which is carried
+on mules to certain ponds or basons, which are joined by small canals.
+Into these they introduce a smart stream of water, to loosen the earth
+and carry away the grosser part. The Indians stand in the basons or
+ponds, stirring up the earth to assist the operation of the water, and
+throwing out the stones. The gold remains at the bottom, still mixed
+with a black sand, and is hardly to be seen till farther cleaned and
+separated, which is easily done. These washing places differ much from
+each other. In some the grains of gold are as big as small shot; and
+in one belonging to the priests, near Valparaiso, some are found from
+the weight of two or three ounces to a pound and a half. This way
+of getting gold is much better than from the mines, as it does not
+require expensive digging, neither are mills necessary for grinding
+the ore, nor quicksilver for extracting the metal; so that both the
+trouble and expence are much less. The Creoles are by no means so nice
+in washing their gold as are the people in Europe; but great plenty
+makes them careless, both in this and other matters.
+
+Sec. 6. _OBSERVATIONS ON THE TRADE OF CHILI._
+
+It is not intended in this place to give a description of the large
+kingdom of Chili, but only some account of the nature of its trade,
+and the manner in which that is connected with the general commerce
+of Peru, by which the wealth of Chili is transmitted to Europe.
+Chili extends in length about 1200 miles from north to south, but its
+breadth is uncertain. The air is very temperate and wholesome, unless
+when rendered otherwise by pestilential exhalations, that are most
+common after earthquakes, to which this country is peculiarly liable.
+The winter rains are very heavy, during the months of May, June, July,
+and August; after which, for eight months together, they have fine
+weather, generally speaking. The soil, where it admits of cultivation,
+is prodigiously fertile, and fruit-trees carried thither from Europe
+come to the greatest perfection, so that fruit is coming forward in
+its different stages at all times of the year; insomuch that it is
+common to see apple-trees, in the situation so much admired in orange
+trees, having blossoms, fruit just set, green fruit, and ripe apples,
+all on one tree at the same time. The valleys, wherever they have any
+moisture, wear a perpetual verdure; and the hills are covered with
+odoriferous herbs, many of which are very useful in medicine. The
+country also produces trees of all sorts. Thus Chili, independent of
+its gold-mines, may well be accounted one of the richest and finest
+countries in the world. For instance, the town of Coquimbo, in lat.
+30 deg. S. [30 deg. 20'] a short mile from the sea, in a most delightful
+place. It is situated on a green rising ground, about ten yards high,
+formed by nature like a regular terrace, stretching north and south in
+a direct line of more than half a mile, turning a little at each end
+to the eastwards; and its principal street forms a delightful walk,
+having a fine prospect of the country and the bay. All this is placed
+in an evergreen valley, and watered by a beautiful river, which rises
+in the mountains, and flows in a winding stream to the sea, through
+beautiful meadows and fertile vales.
+
+Notwithstanding its many advantages, this vast country is very thinly
+inhabited; so that through its whole extent there are scarcely five
+towns deserving that appellation, and only one city, named St Jago.
+Through all the rest of the country there are only farms, called
+_estancias_, which are so remote from each other, that the whole
+country cannot muster 20,000 whites capable of bearing arms, of which
+St Jago contains 2000. All the rest of the population consists of
+mesticoes, mulattoes, and Indians, the number of whom may amount to
+three times as many.[1] This is exclusive of the _friendly_ Indians to
+the south of the river _Biobio_, who are reckoned to amount to 15,000
+fighting men, but whose fidelity is not much to be depended upon.
+
+[Footnote 1: Allowing _eight_ persons of all ages and both sexes
+to _one_ fit to bear arms, this would give to Chili, in 1720, a
+population of 160,000 whites, and 480,000 of colour, or 640,000 in
+all.--E.]
+
+The trade of this country is chiefly carried on by sea, and at
+present, 1720, is rather in a declining situation. The port of
+Baldivia was formerly very famous, on account of the very rich
+gold-mines which were wrought in its neighbourhood, which are now in
+a great measure disused. Hence it is now only kept as a garrison,
+serving to Peru as the fortresses on the coast of Barbary do to
+Spain, as a place to which malefactors are sent, to serve against the
+Indians. The trade of this place consists in sending ten or twelve
+ships every year to Peru, laden with hides, tanned leather, salt meat,
+corn, and other provisions, which are to be had here in great plenty.
+
+The port of Conception is more considerable, by reason of its trade
+with the Indians who are not under subjection to the crown of Spain.
+These Indians are copper-coloured, having large limbs, broad faces,
+and coarse lank hair. The nation of the _Puelches_ differs somewhat
+from the rest, as among them there are some who are tolerably white,
+and have some little colour in their cheeks; which is supposed to be
+owing to their having some Europeans blood in their veins, ever since
+the natives of this country revolted from the Spaniards, and cut off
+most of their garrisons; on which occasion they preserved the women,
+and especially the nuns, by whom they had many children; who still
+retain a sort of affection for the country of their mothers, and,
+though too proud to submit to the Spaniards, yet are unwilling to hurt
+them.
+
+These _Puelches_ inhabit the ridge of mountains called _La Cordeliera_
+by the Spaniards, and as the manner of trading with them is very
+singular, it may be proper to give some account of it. When the
+Spanish pedlar or travelling merchant goes into this country, he
+goes directly to a cacique or chief, and presents himself before him
+without speaking a word. The cacique breaks silence first, saying
+to the merchant, _Are you come?_ To which the merchant answers _I am
+come._ _What have you brought me?_ replies the cacique. To which the
+merchant rejoins, _Wine_, and such other things as he may have to
+dispose of, wine being a necessary article. Upon which the cacique
+never fails to say, _You are welcome_. The cacique then appoints
+a lodging for the merchant near his own hut, where his wives and
+children, bidding him welcome, each demand a present, however small,
+which he accordingly gives. The cacique then gives notice to his
+scattered subjects, by means of his horn or trumpet, that a merchant
+is arrived with whom they may trade. They come accordingly and see
+the commodities, which are knives, axes, combs, needles, thread, small
+mirrors, ribbons, and the like. The best of all would be wine, were it
+not dangerous to supply them with that article; as, when drunk, they
+are very quarrelsome and apt to kill one another, and it would not
+then be safe to be among them. When they have agreed on the price, or
+barter rather, they carry away all the articles without then making
+payment; so that the merchant delivers all his commodities without
+knowing to whom, or even seeing any of his debtors. When his business
+is concluded, and he proposes to go away, the cacique commands payment
+by again sounding his horn, and then every man honestly brings to
+the merchant the cattle he owes for the goods received; and, as
+these consist of mules, goats, oxen, and cows, the cacique commands a
+sufficient number of men to conduct them to the Spanish frontiers.
+
+The far greater number of bullocks and cows that are slaughtered and
+consumed every year in Chili, comes from the plains of Paraguay,[2]
+which are in a manner covered by them. The Puelches bring them through
+the plain of _Tapa-papa_, inhabited by the _Pteheingues_,[3] or
+unconquered Indians, this being the best pass for crossing the
+mountains, as being divided into two hills of less difficult access
+than the others, which are almost impassable for mules. There is
+another pass, about eighty leagues from Conception, at the volcano of
+_Silla Velluda_, which now and then casts out fire, and sometimes with
+so great a noise as to be heard even at that city. In that way the
+journey is much shortened, and they can go to Buenos Ayres in six
+weeks. By these communications they generally bring all the beeves and
+goats,[4] which are slaughtered in Chili by thousands for their tallow
+and lard. This last consists of the marrow of the bones, which serves
+throughout all South America instead of butter and oil, for making
+sauces. The flesh is either dried in the sun, or by means of smoke,
+to preserve it for use, instead of salt as used in Europe. These
+slaughters also afford great quantities of hides, especially
+goat-skins, which they dress like Morocco leather, by them called
+cordovanes, and is sent into Peru for making shoes, or other uses.
+
+[Footnote 2: Paraguay is here used in far too extensive a sense,
+as comprising the whole level country to the east of the Andes: The
+plains of Cuyo are those alluded to in the text.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 3: The Pehneuches are probably here meant, who dwell on the
+west side of the Andes, between the latitudes of 33 deg. and 36 deg. S. The
+Puelches on the same side of the Andes, from 36 deg. to 40 deg..--E.]
+
+[Footnote 4: Perhaps, instead of the goats in the text, _vicunnas_
+ought to be understood.--E.]
+
+Besides the trade of hides, tallow, and dried meat, the inhabitants of
+Conception send every year eight or ten ships of forty or fifty tons
+to Calao laden with corn; besides supplying meal and biscuit to the
+French ships, which take in provisions there in order to proceed
+to Peru, and for their voyage back to France. All this were quite
+inconsiderable for so fine a country, were it better peopled; since
+the land is so extraordinarily fertile, were it well cultivated, that
+they only scratch it for the most part, by means of a plough made of a
+crooked stick, and drawn by two oxen; and, though the seed be scarcely
+covered, it produces seldom less than an hundred fold. Neither are
+they at any more pains in procuring their vines, in order to make good
+wine. Besides which, as they have not the art to glaze their jars in
+which the wine is secured, to make them hold in, they are under the
+necessity of pitching them. And this, together with the goat-skin bags
+in which it is carried from the estancias, gives it a bitter taste
+like treacle, and a flavour to which it is hard for strangers to
+accustom themselves. The grasses also are allowed to grow without any
+attention or industry being employed in grafting. Apples and pears
+grow naturally in the woods, and in such abundance as it is hard to
+comprehend how they could have so multiplied since the conquest, as
+they affirm there were none in the country before.
+
+The mines of _Quilogoya_ and _Quilacura_ are within four leagues of
+this port, and afford vast quantities of gold. At the _Estancia del
+Re_, or king's farm, which is at no great distance, there is by far
+the most plentiful _lavaders_, or washing-place for gold in all Chili,
+where sometimes they find lumps of pure gold of prodigious size. The
+mountains of the Cordelieras are reported to contain a continued chain
+of mines for many hundred miles, which certainly is highly probable,
+as hardly any of these mountains have hitherto been opened without
+vast quantities of metal being found in them, especially fine copper,
+of which all the artillery in the Spanish West Indies is constructed,
+at least all that are used in the countries on the South Seas.
+
+The most considerable port in Chili is Valparaiso, which is esteemed
+one of the best harbours on the whole coast of the South Sea. It lies
+on a river fifteen leagues below St Jago, the capital of Chili.[5]
+To this port all the riches of the mines on every side are brought,
+particularly from those of _Tiltil_, which are immensely rich, and are
+situated between St Jago and Valparaiso. The gold here is found in
+a very hard stone, some of which sparkles and betrays the inclosed
+treasure to the eye; but most of it does not shew the smallest sign
+of gold, appearing merely a hard harsh stone of various colours, some
+white, some red, some black. This ore, after being broken in pieces,
+is grinded or stamped in a mill by the help of water, into a gross
+powder, with which quicksilver is afterwards mixed. To this mixture a
+brisk stream of water is let in, which reduces the earthy matters to a
+kind of mud, which is carried off by the current, the amalgam of gold
+and quicksilver remaining at the bottom, in consequence of its weight.
+This amalgam is then put into a linen bag, and pressed very hard,
+by which the greatest part of the mercury is strained off, and the
+remainder is evaporated off by the force of fire, leaving the gold in
+a little wedge or mass, shaped like a pine-apple, whence it is called
+a _pinna_. This is afterwards melted and cast in a mould, to know its
+exact weight, and to ascertain the proportion of silver that is mixed
+with the gold, no farther process of refining being done here. The
+weightiness of the gold, and the facility with which it forms an
+amalgam with the mercury, occasions it easily to part from the dross
+or earthy matters of the stone or matrix. This is a great advantage
+to the gold-miners, as they every day know what they get; but the
+silver-miners often do not know how much they get till two months
+after, owing to the tediousness of their operation, as formerly
+described.
+
+[Footnote 5: This is a material error. Valparaiso is on no river, and
+lies forty English miles north from the river Maypo, on one of the
+upper branches of which, the Mapocho, St Jago is situated.--E.]
+
+According to the nature of these gold-mines, and the comparative
+richness of the veins, every _caxon_, or chest of fifty quintals,
+yields four, five, or six ounces of gold. When it only yields two
+ounces, the miner does not cover his charges, which often happens; but
+he sometimes receives ample amends, when he meets with good veins; and
+the gold-mines are those which produce metals the most unequally. In
+following a vein, it frequently widens, then becomes narrower, and
+then seems to disappear, all within a small space of ground; and this
+sport of nature makes the miners live in continual hopes of finding
+what they call a _purse_, being the expanded end of a vein, which is
+sometimes so rich as to make a man's fortune at once; yet this same
+inequality sometimes ruins them, which is the reason that it is more
+rare to see a gold-miner rich than a silver-miner, or even one in any
+other metal, although there be less expence in extracting gold from
+the mineral than any other metal. For this reason also the gold-miners
+have the particular privilege that they cannot be sued to execution in
+civil actions. Gold only pays a twentieth part to the king, which
+duty is called _Covo_, from the name of a private individual at whose
+instance the duty was thus reduced, gold having formerly paid a fifth,
+as silver still does.
+
+On the descent of this mountain of _Tiltil_, there runs, during the
+rainy season, a brisk stream of water, which passes through among
+the gold-ore, and washes away abundance of that rich metal, as it
+ripens[6] and breaks from its bed. On this account, this stream is
+accounted one of the richest lavaderos in all Chili for four months
+of every year; and well it may, as there are sometimes found in it
+pellets of gold of an ounce weight. At _Palma_, about four leagues
+from Valparaiso, there is another rich lavadero; and every where
+throughout the country, the fall of a brook or rivulet is accompanied
+by more or less of these golden showers, the richest of which fall
+into the laps of the jesuits, who farm or purchase abundance of mines
+and lavaderos, which are wrought for their benefit by their servants.
+The soil in the neighbourhood of Valparaiso is exceedingly rich and
+fertile, so that forty ships go from thence yearly to Calao, laden
+with corn; yet that commodity still remains so cheap at this place,
+where money is so abundant, that an English bushel of wheat may be
+bought for less than three shillings. It would be still cheaper, could
+all the country be cultivated; but as it has constant dry weather for
+eight months endurance, cultivation is only possible where they have
+brooks or little rills in the vales coming from the mountains, which
+can be applied for irrigating or watering the cultivated land.
+
+[Footnote 6: That is, as the matrix or rock in which it is contained,
+moulders and decays by the influences of the weather and of this
+stream; for the notion of ores ripening is a mere dream or fancy.--E.]
+
+There is a great trade carried on to all parts of Chili from the
+Atlantic ocean, by way of Buenos Ayres, whence the Chilese receive
+some European goods, together with large sums in silver, in return
+for their commodities. This is perhaps the largest route of Indian
+commerce in the world, as the road from Buenos Ayres to Potosi is 1500
+miles; and though the distance from Valparaiso be not above 160 miles
+more,[7] yet it is attended with much greater difficulty, as the
+vast chain of mountains called the Cordelieras of the Andes has to be
+passed, which can only be done during the three first months of the
+year, the passes being impracticable at all other times. At that
+season the merchants come from Mendoza, an inland town about 300
+leagues from Buenos Ayres, and travel through the mountains to St
+Jago. The passage of the mountains usually takes up six or seven days,
+though only about sixty leagues, and the travellers have not only to
+carry their own provisions with them, but also the provender of their
+mules, as the whole of that part of the road is a continued series
+of rocks and precipices, and all the country round so barren and so
+exposed to snows in winter, that it is utterly uninhabitable. The
+remainder of the journey, from St Jago to the mines, and from thence
+to Valparaiso, is both safe and pleasant; and in this the merchants
+have nothing to fear, except staying too long, and losing their
+passage home through the mountains for that season, in which case they
+would have to remain in Chili at least nine months longer than they
+intended.
+
+[Footnote 7: In these estimates, Betagh has been very unfortunate, as
+the direct distance from Buenos Ayres to Potosi does not exceed 1100
+miles, and the distance from Valparaiso, also in a straight line, is
+hardly 800 miles.--E.]
+
+On the whole, though a very great part of the enormous extent of
+the Spanish dominions in South America be absolutely desert, and the
+people in some of the inhabited parts do not acquire large fortunes,
+yet the Spanish settlers in Chili certainly procure immense riches
+yearly, as the country is but thinly inhabited, and all the gold
+drawn from the mines and lavadores must be divided among them. It
+is evident, however, that the greater part of the inhabitants do not
+abound in wealth. Those among them who deal in cattle, corn, and the
+other productions of the country, only acquire moderate fortunes;
+and those who are concerned in the mines are frequently ruined by
+launching out into unsuccessful speculations, and by expensive living.
+Those who are easy in their circumstances, and retire to the city of
+St Jago, Jago, live in such a manner as sufficiently demonstrates
+the riches of Chili; as all their utensils, even those of the most
+ordinary sort, are of pure gold, and it is believed that the wealth
+of that city cannot fall short of twenty millions.[8] Add to this,
+the gold-mines are continually increasing, and it is only for want
+of hands that they are not wrought to infinitely more advantage; for
+those already discovered and now neglected, would be sufficient to
+employ 40,000 men. It may also be observed, that the frauds practised
+against the royal revenue are increasing daily, and, as the riches
+of the Spanish West Indies are measured by the amount of the royal
+revenue, this must make them appear poorer than they are in reality.
+We have one instance of this in the mines of Potosi, which are said to
+produce less silver than they did formerly; yet, on a computation
+for fifty years, the annual revenue to the king has amounted, on the
+average, to 220,000 _pesos_, of thirteen rials and a quarter yearly,
+which shews that the annual produce of these mines, so far as it has
+paid the royal duty, amounts nearly to two million pieces of eight,
+or dollars, and it may be confidently asserted that the royal treasury
+does not receive above half of what is due: wherefore, from this
+example, the rest may be judged of.
+
+[Footnote 8: The coin or denomination is not specified: If dollars, at
+4s. 6d., this would amount to four millions and a half sterling.--E.]
+
+Sec. 7. _SOME ACCOUNT OF THE FRENCH INTERLOPERS IN CHILI._
+
+As the policy of Spain chiefly consists in endeavouring, by all
+possible means, to prevent the riches of these extensive dominions
+from passing into other hands, so the knowledge possessed by other
+nations of the great wealth of these countries, and of the great
+demand for European manufactures among their inhabitants, has excited
+almost every nation in Europe to devise every possible contrivance for
+coming in for a share in these riches, and this with such effect, that
+it is even questionable whether any considerable portion of the riches
+of the new world centres among the inhabitants of Old Spain. This may
+be judged of from the following considerations: Even the trade carried
+on from Spain to the new world is of much greater importance to
+foreigners than to the Spaniards themselves. For as Spain has few
+commodities of its own, and carries on scarcely any manufactures, the
+Spanish merchants at Cadiz have to make up their cargoes by means of
+purchases from other countries; or rather the Cadiz merchants are mere
+factors for the merchants of England, France, and Holland, whose goods
+they send to America, and pay them by the returns made in the Plate
+fleets. Spain also is a country very ill provided with some of the
+necessaries of life, and most of the conveniences; so that prodigious
+sums of the money brought from America have to be yearly exported for
+the purchase of these.
+
+Besides such drawbacks as the above, to which the Spaniards willingly
+submit, there are many others which they are forced to endure: For
+instance, all the negroes they employ in their plantations, in
+which every kind of labour is performed by them, are purchased from
+foreigners, particularly the English and Dutch, at a very large
+annual expence; and, under pretence of furnishing them with negroes, a
+clandestine trade is carried on every year, along the whole coasts
+of their possessions on the Atlantic. In the South Sea, however,
+they were tolerably free from every thing except the depredations
+of pirates, till the general war on account of the succession to the
+crown of Spain, which created a new kind of contraband trade, unknown
+in former times, of which I now propose to give some account.
+
+The _French interlopers_ carried vast quantities of goods directly
+from Europe into the South Seas, which till then had hardly ever been
+attempted by any European nation. This was always viewed with an evil
+eye by the court of Spain, as repugnant to the interests of Spain, and
+diametrically opposite to the maxims of her government; but there
+were many circumstances at that time which rendered this a kind of
+necessary evil, and obliged therefore the people of Old Spain to
+submit to it. As for the Creoles, they had European goods and at a
+cheaper rate, and it did not give them much concern who it was that
+received their money. The town of St Malo has always been noted for
+privateers, and greatly annoyed the trade of the English and Dutch
+during the whole reign of King William, and part of that of Queen
+Anne; and though some allege that money procured by privateering never
+prospers, yet I may safely affirm that the people of St Malo are as
+rich and flourishing as any in all France. Privateering has thriven
+so well among them, that all their South Sea trade has arisen from
+thence; and, during the last war, they were so rich and generous,
+that they made several free gifts to Louis XIV.; and so dexterous were
+they, that though our Admiralty always kept a stout squadron in
+the Atlantic, we were never able to capture one of their South-Sea
+traders. The reason of this was, that they always kept their ships
+extremely clean, having ports to careen at of which we knew not. In
+1709, when I belonged to her majesty's ship the Loo, being one of the
+convoy that year to Newfoundland, we saw and chased upon that coast
+a ship of fifty guns, which we soon perceived to be French-built; but
+she crowded sail and soon left us. She had just careened at Placentia,
+and we wondered much to find such a ship in that part of the world. We
+afterwards learnt, from some French prisoners, that she was a French
+ship bound to St Malo, having two or three millions of dollars on
+board, and was then so trim that she trusted to her heels, and valued
+nobody. They went thus far to the north and west on purpose to have
+the advantage of a westerly wind, which seldom failed of sending them
+into soundings at one spirt, if not quite home. Since Placentia
+has been yielded to Great Britain, they now use St Catherine and
+Islagrande, on the coast of Brasil, and Martinico in the West Indies.
+
+This trade succeeded so well, that all the merchants of St Malo
+engaged in it, sending every year to the number of twenty sail of
+ships. In 1721, I saw eleven sail of these together at one time on the
+coast of Chili, among which were several of fifty guns, and one called
+the _Fleur-de-luce_, which could mount seventy, formerly a man-of-war.
+As this trade was contrary to the _Assiento_ treaty between Great
+Britain and Spain, memorials were frequently presented against it
+at Madrid by the court of London; and the king of Spain, willing to
+fulfil his engagements to the king of England, resolved to destroy
+this contraband French trade. As there was no other way to accomplish
+this but by sending a squadron of men-of-war into the South Sea, and
+as few of the Spaniards were acquainted with the navigation of Cape
+Horn, or could bear the extreme rigour of the climate, the court of
+Spain was obliged to use foreigners on this expedition, and the
+four ships sent oat were both manned and commanded by Frenchmen. The
+squadron consisted of the _Gloucester_, of 50 guns, and 400 men, the
+_Ruby_, of 50 guns, and 330 men, both of these formerly English ships
+of war, the _Leon Franco_, of 60 guns, and 450 men, and a frigate
+of 40 guns, and 200 men. Monsieur _Martinet_, a French officer, was
+commodore of this squadron, and commanded the _Pembroke_,[1] and
+Monsieur _La Jonquiere_ the Ruby. The French conducted the navigation
+round the cape very well, though in the middle of winter; but the last
+ship of the four, which was manned with Spaniards, could not weather
+Cape Horn, and was forced back to the Rio Plata, where she was cast
+away. As the Spaniards have little or no trade into any of the cold
+climates, and are unused to hard work, it is not to be wondered that
+they failed on this occasion, especially considering the improper
+season of the year. The Biscaneers, indeed, are robust enough fellows;
+and had the Leon Franco been manned with them, she had certainly
+doubled the cape along with the other three ships; but the Spaniards
+in general, since acquiring their possessions in America, have become
+so delicate and indolent, that it would be difficult to find an entire
+ship's company capable to perform that navigation.
+
+[Footnote 1: No such name occurs, in enumerating the squadron
+immediately before--E.]
+
+The vast advantage of the trade of Chili by way of Cape Horn, is so
+obvious, that his catholic majesty is obliged by treaty to shut out
+all the European nations from it, as well as the English, although
+his own subjects make nothing of it, as it very rarely happens that
+a Spanish ship ventures to go round Cape Horn. Owing to this, all
+European goods sell enormously dear in Chili and Peru; insomuch, that
+I have been told at Lima, that they are often at 400 per cent. profit,
+and it may be fairly asserted, that the goods carried from France by
+Cape Horn are in themselves 50 per cent. better than those sent in
+the Cadiz _flota_ to Carthagena and Vera Cruz, because the former are
+delivered in six months, fresh and undamaged, while the latter are
+generally eighteen months before they reach Chili. In the course of
+this trade, the French sold their goods, furnished themselves with
+provisions, and got home again, all within twelve or fourteen months.
+
+When Martinet arrived on the coast of Chili in 1717, furnished with a
+commission from the king of Spain to take or destroy all the ships of
+his countrymen found trading in the South Sea, he soon had sufficient
+employment for his squadron and of fourteen ships belonging to St
+Malo, then on the coast, only one escaped him, which lay hid in a
+landlocked creek unseen till he had gone to leeward. Although in this
+he executed the orders of his catholic majesty, and did a material
+benefit to the British South Sea company, yet he almost ruined the
+trading part of the Creole Spaniards, as hindering the circulation of
+money and spoiling business, so that they could not bear the sight
+of the French men-of-war, though they liked the French merchant ships
+very much. On the other hand, imagining that they had done essential
+service to the Spaniards, the French expected to have received at
+least civil treatment in return, during their stay in these seas.
+As soon, however, as Martinet brought his prizes into Calao, and the
+Frenchmen had received their shares of the prize-money, forgetting
+the ancient antipathy of the Spaniards for the French, they gave
+themselves extravagant airs on shore, by dancing and drinking, which
+still more incensed the creolians against them, who called them
+cavachos and renegados, for falling foul of their own countrymen. From
+one thing to another, their mutual quarrels grew so high, that the
+Frenchmen were obliged to go about Lima and Calao in strong armed
+parties, the better to avoid outrages and affronts. At last, a young
+gentleman, who was ensign of the Ruby, and nephew to Captain La
+Jonquiere, was shot from a window, and the murderer took refuge in
+the great church of Calao. Martinet and La Jonquiere petitioned the
+viceroy to have the murderer delivered up to justice: But the viceroy,
+who was at the same time archbishop, would on no account consent to
+violate the privileges of the church. On this refusal, they called all
+their men on board by beat of drum, and laid the broadsides of their
+three ships to bear on the town of Calao, threatening to demolish
+the town and fortifications, unless the assassin were delivered up
+or executed. All this blustering, however, could not prevail upon the
+viceroy to give them any satisfaction, though they had several other
+men killed, besides that gentleman.
+
+At length, unwilling to proceed to extremities, and no longer able
+to endure the place where his nephew had been murdered, La Jonquiere
+obtained leave of his commodore to make the best of his way home.
+About this time, many _padros_ and many rich passengers were assembled
+at Conception in Chili, intending to take their passage to Europe in
+the French squadron, knowing that all ships bound for Cape Horn must
+touch at Conception, or some places thereabout, for provisions.
+La Jonquiere, having thus the start of his commodore, had all the
+advantage to himself of so many good passengers in his ship; for, as
+the king of Spain had no officer at Conception to register the
+money shipped at that place, these passengers and missionaries put
+astonishing sums of money on board the Ruby. They were thereby spared
+the trouble of a voyage to Panama or Acapulco, and travelling thence
+for Portobello or Vera Cruz, where they must have had their coffers
+visited, to see if the _indulto_ of his majesty were fairly accounted
+for. They therefore saved every shilling of that _indulto_, as the
+Ruby touched first in France, where no cognizance whatever was taken
+of this affair. They also got clear of the other moiety payable in
+Spain, as they landed all their money in France.
+
+Besides these rich passengers and their money, the Ruby had also on
+board a considerable sum arising to his catholic majesty from the
+confiscation of the thirteen captured interlopers, all of which, as I
+was informed, amounted to four millions of dollars in that ship. What
+a fine booty we missed therefore by the obstinacy of Shelvocke! For,
+when this ship, the Ruby, found us at the island of St Catharine, her
+company was so sickly that she had not above sixty sound men out of
+four hundred; so that La Jonquiere was actually afraid of us, and
+would not send his boat to the watering-place, where we kept guard,
+and our coopers and sail-makers were at work, till he had first
+obtained leave of our captain; neither is this strange, for he knew we
+had a consort, and was in Spain all the time he staid there, lest the
+Success should have joined us.
+
+After Commodore Martinet had cleared the coast of Chili and Peru
+of his countrymen, he sent his brother-in-law, Monsieur de Grange,
+express with the news to Madrid, who went by way of Panama,
+Portobello, Jamaica, and London. On delivering his message, the king
+of Spain asked what he could do for him, when he humbly requested his
+majesty would give him the command of a ship, and send him again round
+Cape Horn into the South Sea. He accordingly got the Zelerin, of fifty
+guns. He came first to _Calais_,[2] where the ship was getting ready,
+and was surprised to meet with a cold reception from the French
+merchants and other gentlemen of his acquaintance residing there; for,
+as there were merchants of various nations interested in the ships
+taken and confiscated in the South Sea, they universally considered
+him and all the French in that squadron as false brethren, for serving
+the crown of Spain to the prejudice of their own countrymen. Thus,
+while he expected to have had a valuable cargo consigned to his care,
+no man would ship the value of a dollar with him. Captain Fitzgerald,
+who was then at _Cales_, made him a considerable offer for the
+privilege of going out as his second officer, with liberty to take out
+what goods he might be able to procure, in his own name. As de Grange
+was not a little embarrassed, he accepted this offer, and procured a
+commission for Fitzgerald as second captain. They accordingly manned
+the Zelerin chiefly with French seamen, and some English, and got very
+well round Cape Horn. At this time our two privateers, the Success and
+Speedwell, were known to be in the South Seas, and the Zelerin was
+one of the ships commissioned by the viceroy of Peru to cruize for
+us. Fitzgerald sold all his goods to great advantage at Lima, where he
+continued to reside; while de Grange served as captain under Admiral
+Don Pedro Miranda, who took Hately and me prisoners.
+
+[Footnote 2: This, certainly, is a mistake for Cadiz, often named
+Cales by English seamen; and, in fact, only a few lines lower down,
+the place is actually named Cales.--E.]
+
+Though great sufferers by so many confiscations, the merchants of St
+Malo were not entirely discouraged; for, in the year 1720, we found
+the Solomon of St Malo, of 40 guns, and 150 men, at _Ylo_, on the
+coast of Chili, with several Spanish barks at her stern. In the course
+of six weeks, she sold all her cargo, got in a supply of provisions,
+and left the coast without interruption, as by this time Martinet's
+squadron had left the coast. Encouraged by the success of the Solomon,
+the merchants of St Malo fitted out fourteen sail together, all of
+which arrived in the South Sea in the beginning of the year 1721.
+Three of the commanders of these ships, being well acquainted with the
+creolians, quickly sold their cargoes and returned home. About this
+time, the people of Lima judged that our privateers were gone off the
+coast, or at least would not commit any more hostilities, because
+of the truce between the two crowns. Wherefore, the three Spanish
+men-of-war that had been fitted out to cruize against us, were ordered
+against these fresh interlopers. I was on board the Flying-fish, an
+advice-boat that accompanied the men-of-war, when they came up with
+eleven sail of the St Malo ships, which were then altogether on the
+coast of Chili, and, instead of firing on them, the Spaniards joined
+them as friends. At first, expecting to have been attacked, the French
+ships drew up in a line, as if daring the ships of war. This seemed to
+me somewhat strange, that three such ships, purposely fitted out for
+this cruize, should decline doing their duty on their own coasts; for,
+had they proved too weak, they had ports of their own to retire
+to, under their lee. But the ships of war contented themselves with
+watching the motions of the interlopers, keeping them always in sight;
+and when any of the French ships drew near the shore, the Spaniards
+always sent a pinnace or long-boat along with her, carrying the
+Spanish flag, the sight of which effectually deterred the creolians
+from trading with the French. In this manner they contrived to prevent
+all these ships from disposing of their goods, except when they
+were met with at sea by chance, and sold some of their commodities
+clandestinely. At length, completely tired out by this close
+superintendence, the French got leave to take in provisions, and went
+home, at least half of their goods remaining unsold. Notwithstanding
+these losses and disappointments, and severe edicts issued against
+this trade in France, the merchants of St Malo still persist to carry
+it on, though privately, nor is it probable they will ever leave off
+so lucrative a commerce, unless prevented by the strong arm of power,
+or supplanted by some other nation.
+
+Sec. 8. RETURN OF BETAGH TO ENGLAND.
+
+I now return to my own affairs, and the manner of my return to England
+from Peru. I have already acknowledged the kind reception I met with
+from the admiral of the South Seas, Don Pedro Miranda, and the reasons
+of his treating us so civilly. I think it barely justice to mention
+the several favours I received, during the eleven months that I
+continued at Lima, particularly from Don Juan Baptista Palacio, a
+native of Biscay, a knight of the order of St Jago, who came weekly
+to the prison while we were there, and distributed money to us all, in
+proportion to our several ranks. Captain Nicholas Fitzgerald procured
+my enlargement, by becoming security for me; and he afterwards
+supplied me with money and necessaries, from that time till my
+departure; and procured for me and twenty more, a passage to Cadiz, in
+a Spanish advice-boat called the Flying-fish, of which our surgeon's
+mate, Mr Pressick, acted as surgeon, receiving wages, as did the
+rest of our men, being released from prison expressly to assist in
+navigating that vessel home to Spain. For my own part, being well
+treated, I did not think proper to eat the bread of idleness, but kept
+my watches as well as the other officers. And pray, what is the harm
+of all this? Though Shelvocke had the stupidity to call it treason;
+it must surely appear a very malicious, as well as an ignorant charge,
+after a man has been driven among the enemy, to call him a traitor
+because he has been kindly used, and for accepting his passage back
+again; and, because I was not murdered in Peru, I ought to be
+executed at home. This is Shelvocke's great Christian charity and good
+conscience![1]
+
+[Footnote 1: After all, had the Flying-fish been captured by a British
+cruizer, Betagh would have run great risk of being found guilty of
+treason for _keeping his watches_.--E.]
+
+On my arrival at Cadiz, captain John Evers of the Britannia kindly
+gave me my passage to London, and entertained me at his own table. On
+my return to London, and representing the hardships I had undergone,
+nine honourable persons made me a present of ten guineas each; which
+afforded me the satisfaction of seeing, that such as were the best
+judges, had a proper idea of the miseries I had suffered, and approved
+the manner in which I had behaved, the only consolation I could
+receive in the circumstances in which I was left by that unfortunate
+voyage. The fair account I have given of facts, and the detail of my
+proceedings in the Spanish West Indies, together with the account of
+what I observed worthy of notice during my stay in these parts,
+will acquit me, I hope, in the opinion of every candid and impartial
+person, from the aspersions thrown upon me by Shelvocke, in the
+account he has published of his voyage.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+_Note._
+
+"Betagh has fully shewn, that the navigation round Cape Horn is no
+such dangerous or wonderful voyage. If twenty ships from St Malo could
+perform it in one year, and not a single vessel either shipwrecked or
+forced to put back, what shall hinder an English ship or an English
+fleet from doing the same? We see from the foregoing account, with how
+much ease the French carried on a prodigious trade to the South Seas,
+at a time when the appearance of an English ship there was esteemed
+a prodigy. We certainly can send our frigates there, as well as the
+French can their ships from St Malo; and it might be well worth the
+while of our merchants to send out ships to the coasts of Chili and
+Peru, laden with proper goods for that country."--_Harris._
+
+In the present day, this trade to the coasts of Chili and Peru has
+been resumed by the citizens of the United States; but the subjects
+of Britain are debarred from even attempting to take a share, because
+within the exclusive limits of the East India Company; although their
+ships never come nearer to the western coast of America than Canton
+in China, at the enormous distance of 174 degrees of longitude, and
+59 degrees of latitude, counting from Canton in China to Conception in
+Peru, or upwards of _twelve thousand English miles_. It is certainly
+at least extremely desirable, that a trade of such promise should not
+remain any longer prohibited, merely to satisfy a punctilio, without
+the most distant shadow of benefit to the India Company, or to the
+nonentity denominated the South-sea Company.--_Ed._
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD, BY COMMODORE ROGGEWEIN, IS 1721-1723.[1]
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+There was, perhaps, no country in the world where commerce was more
+profitable, or held more honourable, than in Holland, or where more
+respect and attention was shewn to it by the government. As the
+republic chiefly subsisted by trade, every thing relating to it was
+considered as an affair of a public nature, in which the welfare
+of the state was concerned, and highly deserving therefore of the
+strictest and readiest attention. The great companies in Holland,
+as in other countries, were considered as injurious to trade in
+some lights, yet necessary to its welfare in others. The _West India
+Company_ of that country, originally erected in 1621, held, by an
+exclusive charter, the commerce of the coast of Africa, from the
+tropic of Cancer to the Cape of Good Hope, and that of America, from
+the southern point of Newfoundland in the N.E. all along the eastern
+coast to the Straits of Magellan or Le Maire, and thence northwards
+again along the western coast, to the supposed Straits of Anian, thus
+including the entire coasts of the Atlantic and Pacific oceans. The
+directors of this company consisted of seventy-two persons, divided
+into five chambers, of whom eighteen were chosen to administer the
+affairs of the Company, together with a nineteenth person, nominated
+by the States-General.
+
+[Footnote 1: Harris, I. 256. Callender, III. 644.]
+
+The affairs of this Company were once in so very flourishing a
+condition, that it was considered as even superior to their East India
+Company. This prosperity was chiefly owing, to the happy success of
+their affairs at sea; as their admiral, Peter Haines, in the 1629,
+captured the Spanish plate fleet, laden with immense riches. They at
+one time made themselves masters of the greatest part of Brazil; and
+were so considerable that the great Count Maurice of Nassau did not
+think it beneath him to accept a commission from this Company as
+Governor-General of Brazil; which country, however, after it had cost
+them immense sums to defend, they at length lost. The term of their
+charter, originally limited to twenty-four years, expired in 1647,
+and was then renewed for other twenty-five years. During this second
+period, their affairs became so perplexed, so that the Company was
+dissolved towards the close of that term, with its own consent.
+
+In 1674, a new company was erected, by letters patent from the
+States-General, with nearly the same powers and privileges, which has
+subsisted ever since with great reputation.[2] The capital of this
+new company consisted of six millions of florins, which are equal
+to 545,454l. 10s. 10d. 10-11ths sterling. And the limits of their
+authority are the western coast of Africa and both coasts of America,
+all the establishments of the Dutch in these countries being under
+their authority, so that any one who proposes a new scheme of commerce
+in those parts, must necessarily apply himself to that company. Under
+these circumstances, a Mr Roggewein, a person of parts and enterprize,
+formed a project for the discovery of the vast continent and numerous
+islands, supposed to be in the southern part of the globe, under the
+name of _Terra Australis Incognita_, of which the world had hitherto
+only very imperfect notices from others; which project, with a plan
+for carrying the discovery into execution, they presented to the Dutch
+_East_ India Company[3] in 1696, by which it was favourably received,
+and he was assured of receiving all the assistance and support he
+could desire or expect, as soon as the affairs of the Company would
+permit. But the disturbances which soon afterwards followed put a stop
+to the good intentions of the Company; and Mr Roggewein died before
+any thing could be done. Mr Roggewein was a gentleman of the province
+of Zealand, who had addicted himself from his youth to mathematical
+studies, and we have reason to suppose recommended his projected
+discovery on his death-bed to his son.
+
+[Footnote 2: This refers to the year 1743, when Harris wrote: It
+is hardly necessary to say, that Holland and its great commercial
+companies are now merely matters of history.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 3: From what goes both before and after, this seems a
+mistake for the _West_ India Company.--E.]
+
+After the death of his father, the younger Roggewein applied to his
+studies with much vigour, and qualified himself for the office of
+counsellor in the court of justice at Batavia, where he resided
+for many years. After his return from Java, where he had acquired a
+handsome fortune, he resolved upon carrying his father's projected
+discovery into execution; and, in the year 1721, presented a memorial
+to the West India Company, narrating the proposal of his father
+for discovering the southern continent and islands, which they had
+formerly been pleased to approve of, and which he was now ready to
+attempt. The Company received this memorial with readiness; and, as
+its affairs were now in better order, acquainted Mr Roggewein, that it
+would give immediate orders for equipping such a squadron as might
+be necessary for carrying his design into effect. The squadron
+accordingly fitted out on this occasion consisted of three ships: The
+Eagle of 36 guns and 111 men, commanded by Captain Job Coster, and in
+which Mr Roggewein embarked as Commodore; the Tienhoven of 28 guns and
+100 men, commanded by Captain James Bowman; and the African, a galley
+armed with 14 guns, and carrying 60 men, commanded by Captain Henry
+Bosenthal.
+
+It may be proper to acquaint the reader, that the subsequent account
+of this voyage is derived from an original journal, which never
+appeared before in our language, for which I was indebted to the
+gentleman who commanded the land-forces on board the Commodore, and
+whose name I am not at liberty to mention; neither that of another
+gentleman who was engaged in the voyage, and from whom I received
+considerable assistance. The nature of the expedition is sufficient
+in itself to recommend it to the notice of the curious; and the many
+remarkable particulars it contains, especially respecting the state of
+the Dutch Company in the Indies, renders it both a very entertaining
+and a most instructive performance.
+
+Before proceeding to the narrative of this voyage, I hope to be
+indulged in making a few remarks, which may contribute both to
+amusement and information, and may clear up some points that might
+otherwise appear obscure in the following voyage. It is worth
+observing, that the Dutch West India Company had been long in a
+declining condition; which, instead of dispiriting the Directors,
+engaged them to turn their thoughts to every method that could be
+devised for recovering their affairs. There is so wide a difference
+between our English great chartered companies and those [formerly]
+in Holland, that it may not be amiss to give a concise account of the
+flourishing state of that Company, as it may shew what great things
+may be managed by a board of merchants, for such the Directors
+generally were.
+
+It appears, from the books of the Company, that, in the space of
+thirteen years, from 1623 to 1636, the Company had fitted out 800
+ships, either for war or trade, and that the expence of building,
+equipping, and seamen's wages had cost forty-five millions of florins,
+or upwards of _four millions_ sterling: And, in the same space of
+time, the Company had taken from the enemy 545 vessels, valued at
+_sixty millions_ of florins, or nearly _five and a half millions_
+sterling; besides to the value of _thirty millions_ at the least, or
+nearly _two millions and a quarter_ sterling, in spoils of various
+denominations. The greatest of their exploits was the capture of the
+Spanish _flota_ at the Havannah, by their admiral Peter Heyne; by
+which they gained seven millions of dollars in money, or L. 2,625,000
+sterling; besides ships, brass cannon, and other military stores, to
+the value of above ten millions.[4] Such were the flourishing times of
+the Company.
+
+[Footnote 4: Harris does not say whether dollars or florins: If the
+former, equal to L. 2,250,000 sterling at 4s. 6d. the dollar; if the
+latter, a little above L. 900,000 sterling at 11 florins to the pound
+sterling; both of these the old par of exchange.--E.]
+
+The causes of their decay seem to have been principally the following.
+_First_, their emulation of the East India Company, which induced
+them to make the conquest of Brazil from Portugal, the crown of which
+country had been usurped by their arch enemy the king of Spain. This
+was achieved at a vast expence, and Count Maurice of Nassau was
+appointed governor-general, who conducted their affairs with great
+skill and prudence. _Secondly_, owing to the desire of the Company
+to conduct all things, and repining at the expence incurred by
+that prince in the government of Brazil, was another cause of their
+misfortunes: For the merchants, who had conducted their affairs with
+great wisdom and capacity, while they confined themselves to commerce
+and maritime war, shewed themselves only indifferent statesmen, and
+soon lost all that Prince Maurice had gained, and loaded the Company
+with so heavy a debt, as compelled them in the end to consent to its
+dissolution.
+
+The new West India Company, warned by the example of its predecessors,
+has kept more within bounds, and has certainly managed its affairs
+with great prudence and economy. Having formed a project in 1714,
+for uniting the East and West India Companies into one,[5] and the
+proposition, being rejected, the directors of the West India
+Company very wisely turned their thoughts another way; and it is not
+improbable, that the rejection of their proposal on this occasion
+may have induced them to give encouragement to the proposition of
+Roggewein: For, being disappointed in their aim of coming in for a
+share in the commodities of the East Indies, they were desirous of
+acquiring the same articles of trade by some other means, expecting to
+have found these in the continent or islands proposed to be discovered
+by Roggewein. This also accounts for the extraordinary heat and
+violence of the Dutch East India Company, against those who were
+engaged on the present expedition, and is the true secret of the
+dispute so warmly carried on by the two Companies, and so wisely
+decided by the States-General. When the Dutch East India Company
+persecuted and destroyed Le Maire for his voyage of discovery,
+under pretence of interfering within their exclusive boundaries, the
+government did not interfere, because at that time the power of the
+East India Company was of the highest importance to the state: But,
+as the government of Holland became better established, and especially
+since a share in the public administration has been acquired by such
+as are conversant in trade, the concerns of the East India Company
+have been viewed in a new light. The first who explained this matter
+clearly was that consummate statesman and true patriot, John de Witte,
+whose words are most worthy the attention of the reader.
+
+[Footnote 5: A long, indistinct, and uninteresting account of this
+project is here omitted, which Harris alleges might have transferred
+the whole commerce of Europe to the Dutch, but for which opinion he
+advances no substantial reasons, or rather none at all.--E.]
+
+"When the East India Company had attained to a certain extent of power
+and grandeur, its interests came not only to clash with, but grew
+absolutely opposite to those of the country. For, whereas the
+advantage of the nation consists in the increase of manufactures,
+commerce, and freight of ships; the interests of the Company are to
+promote the sale of foreign manufactures, and that with the smallest
+extent of traffic and navigation that can be contrived. Hence, if
+the East India Company can gain more by importing Japan cloths, India
+quilts, carpets, and chintzes, than by raw silk; or, if the Company,
+by creating an artificial scarcity of nutmegs, mace, cloves, cinnamon,
+and other spices, can raise their price so as to gain as much profit
+by the sale of 100 tons, as it would otherwise gain by the sale of
+1000 tons, we are not to expect that it will import raw silks, or be
+at the expence of transporting 1000 tons of spice; though the former
+would assist and encourage our manufactures at home, and the latter
+would increase our navigation.
+
+This chain of reasoning is so plain, and so evidently agrees with the
+interests of all nations, as well as with those of Holland, that it
+is impossible for any unprejudiced person not to discern that all
+exclusive companies destroy, instead of promoting, the commerce of
+the countries in which they are established. The same great statesman
+already quoted observes, "That the more any country extends its
+foreign conquests, the more of its stock must necessarily be spent,
+for the preservation and defence of these conquests: And consequently,
+by how much the greater are its dominions, so much the less is that
+company able to prosecute the trade, for the promotion of which it was
+erected."[6]--_Harris._
+
+[Footnote 6: The remarks of Harris on this voyage are extended to a
+far greater length than have been here adopted, and are many of them
+loose and uninteresting; but some of those here inserted have a strong
+reference to a most important subject now under consideration of the
+legislature; and the notices respecting the Dutch West India Companies
+are curious in themselves, as well as upon a subject very little known
+in this country.
+
+The subject of this voyage round the world is principally exhausted
+in the _seven_ first sections; all those subsequent being chiefly a
+detail of the Indian settlements of the Dutch East India Company, as
+it was in the year 1722, almost a century ago. These certainly might
+have been omitted on the present occasion, without injury to the
+present article, as a _circumnavigation_: But, as conveying a
+considerable mass of information, respecting the _Dutch possessions in
+India_, now all belonging to Britain, and respecting which hardly any
+thing has been published in the English language, it has been deemed
+indispensable to preserve them.--E.]
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Narrative of the Voyage from Holland to the Coast of Brazil._[1]
+
+The small squadron of three ships, already enumerated, sailed
+from Amsterdam on the 16th July, 1721, and arrived at the Texel in
+thirty-six hours, where they were provided with every thing requisite
+for so long a voyage. All things being in readiness, they sailed with
+a fair wind on the 21st August; but, as the wind changed next day,
+they were three days in beating to windward through the British
+channel, after which they continued their course to the S.W. for the
+coast of Barbary, but were opposed by a heavy storm which did them
+considerable damage. To this a dead calm succeeded, during which the
+water ran mountains high, owing to agitation they had been thrown into
+by the storm. By the rolling of the ships during the calm, several
+injuries were sustained, one of the vessels losing its main-top-mast
+and mizen-mast; and the main-yard of the Commodore came down with such
+force as to wound several of the people on deck. After two days the
+wind freshened again, and they continued their course S.W. towards the
+Canaries, amusing themselves with observing the manner in which the
+flying-fish endeavours to escape from its enemies, the albicores and
+bonitoes. The _flying-fish_ are not larger than a herring, and raise
+themselves into the air by means of two long fins, one on each side,
+not much unlike the wings of a bat in strength and texture. They are
+considered as good eating, and the sailors are always well pleased
+when they are met with in plenty. The _bonito_ is about two feet long,
+of a greyish colour, finely streaked from head to tail; but the flesh
+is hard, dry, and disagreeably tasted. The _albicore_ is generally
+five or six feet long, and sometimes weighs 150 pounds. They saw
+likewise several water-fowls, particularly _teal_, which the seamen
+account a sign of land being near.
+
+[Footnote 1: In the various steps of this voyage, the merely
+uninteresting journal or log-book incidents have been materially
+abbreviated.--E.]
+
+While in lat. 28 deg. N. and soon expecting to see the Canaries, a sail
+was descried from the mast-head carrying English colours. On drawing
+near she struck her colours and bore away, but re-appeared in about an
+hour, having four sail more in her company, sometimes carrying white,
+sometimes red, and sometimes black colours, which gave reason to
+suspect that they were pirates. The Commodore immediately made the
+signal for the line of battle, and all hands went to work in clearing
+the ship for action, filling grenades, and preparing every thing for
+the ensuing engagement, in which they fortunately had the advantage
+of the weather-gage. Observing this, the pirates put themselves into
+a fighting posture, struck their red flag, and hoisted a black one, on
+which was a death's head in the centre, surmounted by a powder horn,
+and two cross bones underneath. They likewise formed the line, and
+commenced a smart action. The pirates fought very briskly for some
+time, as believing the Dutch ships to be merchantmen; but after two
+hours cannonade, perceiving the Commodore preparing to board the
+vessel to which he was opposed, the pirates spread all their canvass,
+and crowded away as fast as they could sail. Commodore Roggewein, on
+seeing them bear away, called out, _Let the rascals go:_ In which he
+strictly obeyed his instructions; as all the ships belonging to the
+Dutch East and West India Companies have strict orders to pursue their
+course, and never to give chase. In this action, four men were killed,
+and nine wounded in the Commodore, the other two ships having seven
+slain and twenty-six wounded. The carpenters also had full employment
+in stopping leaks, and repairing the other damages sustained.
+
+Continuing their voyage, they had sight of Madeira on the 15th
+November, and in the neighbourhood saw a desert island which is much
+frequented by the pirates, for wood and water and other refreshments.
+They afterwards had sight of the Peak of Teneriffe, which is generally
+esteemed the highest single mountain in the world, on which account
+the geographers of Holland adopt it as the first meridian in their
+maps and charts; while the French and English of late incline to
+fix their first meridians at their respective capitals of Paris and
+London. These differences are apt to create much confusion in the
+longitudes of places, when not explained by the writers who use these
+several modes of reckoning; on which account Lewis XIII. of France, by
+edict in 1634, endeavoured to obviate this inconvenience, by directing
+the first meridian to be placed in the island of Ferro, the most
+westerly of the Canaries.[1] From these islands they directed their
+course for the islands of Cape Verde, so named from Cabo Verde, or
+the Green Cape, a point or mountain on the coast of Africa, called
+_Arlinarium_ by Ptolemy.
+
+[Footnote 1: The Royal Observatory at Greenwich is now the first
+meridian in British maps and globes, from which St Paul's in London is
+0 deg. 5' 37" W. the observatory of Paris 2 deg. 20' E. Teneriffe peak 16 deg. 40'
+W. and Ferrotown 17 deg. 45' 50" W.]
+
+This cape is bounded by two rivers, the Senegal and Gambia, called by
+the ancients the _Garatius_ and _Stachiris_. It has an island to the
+west, which is frequented by an infinite number of birds, the eggs of
+which are frequently gathered by mariners going this way. This cape is
+dangerous to land upon, because of a great many sunken rocks about
+it. The continent is here inhabited by negroes, who trade with all
+nations, and speak many languages, especially French and Portuguese.
+Most of them go naked, except a piece of cloth about their middle, but
+their princes and great men wear long garments of calico striped
+with blue, and made like shifts; they hang also little square bags of
+leather on their arms and legs, but we could not learn of them what
+these bags contain.[2] They wear necklaces made of sea-horses teeth,
+alternating with glass beads; and have caps of blue and white striped
+calico on their heads. They are a prudent and wise people, cultivating
+their soil, which bears good rice and other articles sufficient for
+their maintenance; and the richer people keep cattle, which are very
+dear, as being scarce. They have many good blacksmiths, and iron is
+much, valued among them, being forged into fish-spears, implements for
+cultivating the ground, and various weapons, as the heads of arrows,
+darts, and javelins. Their religion seems to border on Mahometism, as
+they are all circumcised; but they have little knowledge of the true
+God, except among a few who converse with Christians. They are very
+lascivious, and may have as many wives as they please; but the women
+are seldom contented with one husband, and are passionately fond of
+strangers. The whole country is under subjection to the governors
+or head-men of the various towns and villages, who row on board such
+ships as arrive, making them pay customs. Several Portuguese reside
+here, who trade freely with all nations, but have no power or
+authority, except over their own slaves and servants.
+
+[Footnote 2: These are called _obi_, containing a variety
+of ridiculous trash, and are held in superstitious esteem as
+amulets.--E.]
+
+Having the advantage of a strong N.E. wind, they took their departure
+from Cape de Verde, and continued their course for six weeks, without
+coming to anchor or handing a sail. In this long passage, they had
+some days in which the heat was almost insupportable, and the crew
+began to murmur excessively on account of being at short allowance of
+water. On this occasion one of the swabbers got into the hold, and,
+being extremely thirsty, pierced a cask of brandy, of which he pulled,
+so heartily that he was soon intoxicated to a degree of madness. In
+this condition he staggered into the cook-room, where he threw down a
+pan of grease, and being sharply reproved by the cook, drew his knife
+and rushed upon him. Some of the crew gathered about him and wrenched
+the knife out of his hand, but not till he had drawn it two or three
+times across the cook's face. For this they drubbed him soundly, which
+he resented so deeply that he seized a knife as soon as he got loose,
+and gave himself several stabs in the belly. The utmost care was taken
+of his recovery, in order to make him a public example, to prevent
+such actions in future among the crew; and after his recovery he
+was punished in the following manner. Being declared infamous at
+the fore-mast, he was thrice keel-hauled, and had 300 strokes on the
+buttocks, after which his right hand was fastened to the mast with his
+own knife. When he had stood some time in this condition, he was put
+in chains on the fore-castle, being allowed nothing but bread and
+water for some days; and was continued in irons to be set on shore at
+the first barren island they came to.
+
+Continuing their voyage till near the line, they were much incommoded
+by the shifting of the wind; and by scarcity of water, many of the
+crew falling ill of the scurvy. When it sometimes fell entirely calm,
+the heat of the sun became more than ordinarily oppressive, owing to
+which some of the men became quite distracted, others fell into high
+fevers, and some had fits like the epilepsy. Their water, as it grew
+low, stunk abominably, and became full of worms. The salt provisions
+were in a manner quite spoiled, and served only to turn their stomachs
+and increase their thirst. Hunger is said to be the greatest of
+torments, but they had reason to consider thirst as the greatest
+misery incident to human nature. At this time they often observed
+towards evening that the sea appeared all on fire; and taking up some
+buckets of water in this condition, they observed that it was full of
+an infinite number of little globules, of the size, form, and colour
+of pearls. These retained their lustre for some time when held in the
+hand, but on pressure seemed nothing more than an earthy fat substance
+like mud.
+
+They at length crossed the line, with the loss only of one man, who
+died of a high fever; and on getting into the latitude of 3 deg. S. they
+fell into the true trade-wind, before which they scudded along at a
+great rate. In lat. 5 deg. S. they had the sun directly vertical, so that
+they were some days without any observation. In 6 deg. S. they caught
+many dorados and dolphins, both, in the opinion of the author of this
+voyage, being the same fish, of which the dolphin is the male and
+the dorado the female. Some of these are six feet long, but not of
+proportional bulk. In the water they appear excessively beautiful,
+their skins shining as if streaked with burnished gold; but lose their
+splendid appearance on being taken out of the water. Their flesh is
+very sweet and well flavoured, so that the seamen always feast when
+they can procure plenty of this fish. They saw also abundance of
+sharks, many of which are ten feet long. Their flesh is hard, stringy,
+and very disagreeably tasted; yet the seamen frequently hang them up
+in the air for a day or two, and then eat them: Which compliment the
+surviving sharks never fail to return when a seaman falls in their
+way, either dead or alive, and seem to attend ships for that purpose.
+
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Arrival in Brazil, with some Account of that Country._
+
+Coming near the coast of Brazil, their design was to have anchored
+at the island _Grande_, but finding they had passed that island, they
+continued their course till off Porto, in lat. 24 deg. S. where they came
+to anchor. Some of the ship's company of the commodore then got into
+the boat in order to go shore, both for the purpose of procuring wood
+and water and other refreshments, and in order to bury one of their
+seamen who had died. Before they could get on shore, they descried a
+body of Portuguese well armed moving along the coast, who seemed
+to prevent them from landing, and beckoned the Dutch to keep off,
+threatening to fire if they attempted to land: But, on shewing them
+the dead body, they allowed them to land, and even shewed them a place
+in which to inter their dead companion. Being desirous of procuring
+some intelligence, the Dutch asked many questions about the country,
+but could only get for answer, that Porto was an advanced port to St
+Sebastian, not marked in the charts, and that they were inhabitants
+of Rio Janeiro, which lay at the distance of eight miles.[1] The Dutch
+endeavoured to persuade them to go on board the commodore, but they
+refused, fearing they might be pirates, which frequently used to come
+upon the coast, and, under pretence of getting fresh water, would land
+and pillage any of the little towns near the sea.
+
+[Footnote 1: There must be a considerable mistake here in regard to
+the latitude of Porto, said to be in 21 deg. S. as Rio Janeiro is in
+lat. 22 deg. 54' S. and must therefore have been eighty leagues distant.
+Perhaps the eight miles in the text, as the distance to Rio Janeiro,
+ought to have been eighty leagues or Dutch miles.--E.]
+
+About six months before the arrival of Roggewein at this place, a
+pirate had been there, and, while the crew were preparing to make a
+descent, a French ship of force arrived, which sent her to the bottom
+with one broadside. She sank in thirteen fathoms, and as she was
+supposed to have seven millions on board,[2] they had sent for divers
+from Portugal, in order to attempt recovering a part of her treasure.
+However, by dint of entreaties and the strongest possible assurance of
+safety, two of them were prevailed upon to go on board the commodore,
+where they were very kindly treated, and had clothes given them, by
+which they were induced to carry the squadron into a safe port, which
+was most serviceable to men in their condition, almost worn out with
+fatigues, and in a manner destroyed for want of water.
+
+[Footnote 2: This is a most inconclusive mode of expression, perhaps
+meaning Dutch florins, and if so, about L636,363 sterling.--E.]
+
+The harbour of Porto affords good anchorage in from six to eight
+fathoms. In entering it on the S.W. the main land is on the right, and
+a large island on the left, all the coast appearing very high land,
+consisting of mountains and intermediate vallies, overgrown with trees
+and shrubs. Porto is in a pleasant situation, but at this time had
+no inhabitants. They caught here both fish and tortoises of exquisite
+flavour, and so very nourishing, that about forty of the people who
+were ill of the scurvy, recovered very fast. Having remained there two
+days, in which time they supplied themselves with wood and water, they
+weighed anchor, and in six leagues sailing to the S.W. came into the
+road of St Sebastian. Just when entering the mouth of the river a
+violent storm arose, on which they had to drop their anchors, lest
+they had been driven on the rocks, and to wait the return of the tide
+in that situation. They entered the port next day, and came to anchor
+just before the town, which they saluted, but without being answered,
+either because the Portuguese guns were not in order, of because the
+inhabitants were not pleased, with their arrival, suspecting them of
+being pirates, though under the Dutch flag. In order to remove these
+apprehensions, Roggewein wrote to the governor, informing him what
+they were, and desiring to be furnished with cattle, vegetables,
+fruits, and other refreshments for payment, also requesting the use
+of a few huts on shore for the recovery of the sick men. The governor
+made answer, that these things were not in his power, as he was
+subordinate to the governor of Rio de Janeiro, to whom he should
+dispatch an express that evening, and hoped the commodore would give
+him time to receive the orders of his superior officer. But Roggewein
+was by no means satisfied with this answer, giving the governor to
+know, if he refused to deal with him by fair means and for ready money
+as offered, be should be obliged to have recourse to force, though
+much against his inclinations. Having learnt that there was a
+Franciscan monastery in the town, Roggewein sent also to inform the
+fathers of his arrival, accompanying his message by a present.
+
+It happened fortunately for the Dutch, that a native of Utrecht, one
+Father Thomas, belonged to this monastery, who came immediately on
+board, accompanied by several other monks. He was so much delighted
+at the sight of his countrymen, that he declared he should now die
+in peace, having earnestly wished for twenty-two years to enjoy the
+satisfaction he was now gratified with. The commodore gave him a kind
+welcome, and presented him with whatever was deemed useful for the
+monastery. The prior, who was of the party on this occasion, begged
+the commodore to have patience till the return of the express from
+Rio de Janeiro, and promised to use his interest with the governor, to
+induce him to furnish the demanded refreshments, so that they parted
+well satisfied with each other. In the mean time, the Portuguese came
+down to the coast in large bodies well armed, posting themselves in
+such places as they judged the Dutch might attempt to put their men on
+shore; and at the approach of a Dutch pinnace, thought proper to fire
+at her, by which one of the Dutchmen was dangerously wounded in the
+shoulder. The boat's crew returned the fire by a general discharge of
+their fire-arms, by which two of the Portuguese were brought down,
+and the rest made a precipitate retreat. The Dutch then landed
+immediately, filling what water they had occasion for, and returned on
+board.
+
+On the report of what had happened, which he deemed an act of
+hostility, Roggewein made immediate dispositions for attacking the
+town, ordering his smallest ship to go as near the place as possible,
+while the Teinhoven was ordered to watch the coast, and the commodore
+laid his own ship opposite the monastery, as if he had intended to
+batter it down. All this was merely to frighten the Portuguese
+into better behaviour, and it had the desired effect, as the
+deputy-governor came soon after on board, and entered into a
+treaty, granting every thing desired. He at the same time expressed
+considerable doubts of being paid for what they might furnish, as
+a French ship had been lately supplied with necessaries, and at its
+departure the French captain threatened to burn the town about their
+ears, if they insisted on payment according to agreement and his
+promises on first coming in. The sick were now landed on the island,
+and the whole of the ships companies were daily furnished by the
+Portuguese with beef, mutton, fowls, vegetables, fruits, and every
+thing else they wanted. The ships companies also had leave to go on
+shore, and soon contracted acquaintance among the Portuguese, from
+whom they obtained sugar, tobacco, brandy, and every thing else they
+wished for, in exchange for European goods, although the governor had
+strictly prohibited all commerce, under the strictest penalties. Thus,
+in a very short time the Portuguese became so well satisfied of the
+honesty and good intentions of the Dutch, that they brought back all
+their rich effects, formerly carried out of town when the ships first
+arrived. The Portuguese, however, complained loudly of the bad usage
+they met with from the French, who came frequently to this place with
+their ships, taking whatever they pleased by force, and plundering the
+houses in which they were permitted to lodge the sick; owing to which
+the Portuguese believed that all other Europeans would treat them in
+the same manner.
+
+The town of St Sebastians is situated in lat. 24 deg. S. and long. 60 deg.
+W.[3] being a place of moderate extent, only indifferently fortified
+by an inclosure of palisades, with a few cannon for its defence. The
+church however is a beautiful building, and the palace of the governor
+is very magnificent; but the houses of the inhabitants are only such
+as are commonly met with among the Spanish and Portuguese colonists in
+America. The Franciscan monastery stands on the S. side of the town,
+and accommodates about thirty monks very conveniently. The prior
+shewed to the commodore and his officers a curious idol, which he said
+had been worshipped by the ancient natives of the place. It was the
+image of a creature half tiger half lion, about four feet high and a
+foot and a half round. Its feet resembled the paws of a lion, and
+the head was adorned with a double crown, in which were stuck twelve
+Indian darts, one of which on each side was broken. On each shoulder
+there was a large wing like that of a stork. In the inside was seen
+the statue of a man, completely armed in the manner of the country,
+having a quiver of arrows at his back, a bow in his left hand, and an
+arrow in his right. The tail of this strange idol was very long, and
+twisted three or four times round the body of the man. It had been
+called _Nasil Lichma_, by its worshippers, and the prior said that it
+was made of gold; but the author of this voyage suspected it was
+only gilded. The monks had also a numerous collection of European and
+American curiosities, which they exhibited at the same time.
+
+[Footnote 3: It is impossible to reconcile this longitude with any
+of the first meridians mentioned in a former note, or indeed with any
+known geographical principles. It is 45 deg. 30' W. from Greenwich. If
+reckoned from the meridian of Teneriffe, said to be that used by the
+Dutch, this would place it 21 deg. 10' too far west, as Teneriffe is 16 deg.
+40' W. from Greenwich. This place, in an island of the same name, has
+to be carefully distinguished from the city of St Sebastian, now more
+commonly known by the name of Rio de Janeiro.--E.]
+
+The port, or river rather, of St Sebastian, is three or four leagues
+in length, and about one league broad, having a very fine island on
+the N.E. of about four miles round, and there are smaller islands on
+all the other sides of this haven. The country of Brazil is very large
+and rich, insomuch that the king of Portugal is said to draw as
+great a revenue from hence, as the king of Spain from all his vast
+possessions in America. Its capital is Bahia, or St Salvador, besides
+which there are many other towns, as Siara, Olinda, Rio de Janeiro, St
+Vincent, and others. The country was discovered in 1590; but even at
+this day the Portuguese have not penetrated above eighty leagues
+into the interior. The soil is good, and the country would doubtless
+produce abundance of corn and wine for the use of its inhabitants;
+but, from a principle of policy, the colonists are not permitted to
+cultivate these productions, and are consequently supplied with them
+from Portugal. It is the common opinion that the ancient inhabitants
+were _anthropophagi_, or cannibals, and it is even said that human
+flesh was sold in their markets, as commonly as beef and mutton, but
+of this there is no authentic proof.[4]
+
+[Footnote 4: There is no doubt that at least some of the tribes
+roasted and eat their prisoners, like the Caribs of the West Indies.
+But certainly they had not arrived to that state of civilization as
+to have markets; and beef and mutton were unknown in America, till
+carried there from Europe.--E.]
+
+Such of the natives as were seen were large dark-complexioned men,
+having thick lips, flat noses, and very white teeth. The Portuguese
+are numerous in Brazil, both Creoles, and such as come from time to
+time from Portugal, to repair their broken fortunes. A little time
+before the arrival of Roggewein, the Portuguese had discovered a
+diamond mine not far from St Sebastian, of which at that time they
+were not in full possession, but were meditating an expedition against
+the Indians, in order to become sole masters of so valuable a prize;
+and with this view they invited the Dutch to join them, promising them
+a share in the riches in the event of success. By these means, nine
+of our soldiers were tempted to desert. I know not the success of this
+expedition; but it is probable that it succeeded, as great quantities
+of diamonds have since been imported from Brazil into Europe. They are
+said to be found on the tops of mountains among a peculiar red earth
+containing a great deal of gold; and, being washed down by the great
+rains and torrents into the vallies, are there gathered in lavaderas
+by negroes employed for the purpose.
+
+Brazil abounds with numerous sorts of beasts, birds, and fish, both
+wild and tame. They have tigers that do a great deal of mischief,
+also elephants in great abundance, the teeth of which are of great
+value.[5] There is no country on earth where serpents, and other
+venomous reptiles, are more frequent, or of larger size. So far as
+the Portuguese power and colonization extends, the popish religion is
+established; but vast numbers of the indigenous natives of the country
+remain unsubdued, and continue their original idolatry, being of such
+cruel and vindictive dispositions, that when a Christian falls into
+their hands, the best thing that can happen to him is to have his
+throat cut, as they are, for the most part, put to death by means
+of cruel tortures. The air of the country, though excessively hot at
+certain times of the year, is extremely wholesome, as we experienced
+by our speedy recovery from the scurvy and other distempers. About
+St Sebastian there are vast quantities of venomous musquetoes, which
+sting to such a degree that we were all covered over with blisters.
+Our pilot, having drank too freely of the country rum, and afterwards
+fallen asleep in the open air, had his head, face, arms, and legs so
+severely stung, that his life was in imminent danger, and he recovered
+after a long time, not without much care.
+
+[Footnote 5: There are animals of the tyger kind in Brazil and
+other parts of America, and the Jaguar, Owza, or Brazilian tyger, is
+probably the one here meant. No elephants exist in America, and
+their teeth, mentioned in the text, must have come from some of the
+Portuguese African possessions.--E.]
+
+While here, the commodore kept up a very strict discipline over his
+people; and some of his sailors being complained against as having
+maltreated some Indian women, he caused them to be severely punished,
+and would never afterwards allow them to go on shore. The Dutch and
+Portuguese agreed extremely well, but the governor was far from being
+pleased with his visitors, more especially because he had learnt from
+some of the deserters that the object of the expedition was to make
+discoveries in the south. For this reason he practised every art he
+could devise to hinder and distress them, and furnished them with
+provisions only from day to day, that they might not increase their
+sea-stores. He also frequently talked of there being five or six
+Portuguese men-of-war in Rio de Janeiro, in order to put the Dutch in
+fear of being attacked, and actually sent for the only ship that
+was there at the time, to come to St Sebastian. Roggewein perfectly
+understood the meaning of all this, of which he took no notice, and
+complied exactly with the terms of the agreement entered into with the
+deputy governor, saving part of the fresh provisions daily and salting
+them, cleaned and repaired his ship in succession, and took on board
+tobacco, sugar, and every thing else he wanted, till in a condition
+to continue the voyage. He then fully satisfied the governor for every
+thing procured at this place, making payment in fire-arms, hats, silk
+stockings, linen, stock-fish, and other European articles, and made
+him a considerable present besides. In return, the governor sent
+him some black cattle, and gave him a certificate of his honourable
+behaviour.
+
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Incidents during the Voyage from Brazil to Juan Fernandez, with a
+Description of that Island._
+
+Every thing being settled at St Sebastian, Roggewein set sail towards
+the S.W. and falling in with a desert island about three leagues from
+the coast, he set on shore the swabber who had attempted to murder the
+cook, pursuant to his sentence, as formerly related. Leaving the coast
+of Brazil, the commodore proposed to have visited an island called
+Aukes Magdeland, after the name of its supposed discoverer, who
+is said to have seen a light on that island about an hundred years
+before, but did not go on shore. This island was said to be situated
+in the latitude of 30 deg. S. and as being in the route of the navigation
+towards the South Sea, and in a good climate, he proposed to have
+settled a colony there for the service of such ships as might
+afterwards be bound for the _Southern Indies_, the object he was now
+in search of, where they might be supplied with wood, water, and other
+refreshments. But after much pains, he could neither discover that
+nor any other island in or near the latitude of 30 deg. S. He therefore
+altered his coarse, steering for those called the _New Islands_ by the
+Dutch, and the _Islands of St Lewis_, by a French privateer who first
+discovered them. Keeping always within forty or fifty leagues of
+the American coast, the squadron prosecuted its course very happily,
+having always the advantage of the land and sea-breezes; whereas, if
+it had kept farther from land, it would infallibly have fallen in with
+the western trade-wind.
+
+On the 21st December, being in lat. 40 deg.. S. they were assailed by a
+hurricane, attended with thunder and lightning, during which storm
+the Tienhoven parted company, and did not rejoin till three months
+afterwards. The extreme violence of this hurricane only lasted about
+four hours, during which they every moment expected to have been
+swallowed up by the waves, which ran mountain-high. These hurricanes
+are extremely dangerous, and are far more frequent in the American
+seas than in the East Indies. They usually happen at that season of
+the year when the west monsoon reigns, which is from the 20th July to
+the 15th October, for which reason ships usually remain then in port
+till they think the danger is over. Yet as storms of this kind are not
+exactly periodical, ships that trust to such calculations are often
+caught, as there are some years in which there are no hurricanes, and
+others in which they are more frequent and violent, and at unusual
+periods. The ordinary, or at least the surest sign of an approaching
+hurricane, is very fair weather, and so dead a calm that not even a
+wrinkle is to be seen on the surface of the sea. A very dark cloud is
+then seen to rise in the air, not larger than a man's hand, and in a
+very little time the whole sky becomes overcast. The wind then begins
+to blow from the west, and in a short space of time, whirls round the
+compass, swelling the sea to a dreadful height; and as the wind blows
+now on one side and then on the other, the contrary waves beat so
+forcibly on the ships that they seldom escape foundering or shipwreck.
+On first perceiving the before-mentioned small cloud, the best thing
+a ship can do is to stand out to sea. It is remarkable that the
+hurricanes are less frequent as we approach the higher latitudes in
+either hemisphere, so that they are not to be feared beyond the lat.
+of 55 deg. either S. or N. It is also remarked, that hurricanes rarely
+happen in the middle of the wide ocean, but chiefly on the coasts of
+such countries as abound with minerals, and off the mouths of large
+rivers. Another surprising phenomenon at sea is what is called a
+whirlwind water-spout, or syphon, which often carries up high into
+the air whatever comes within the circle of its force, as fish,
+grasshoppers, and other things, where they appear like a thick vapour
+or cloud. The English fire at a water-spout or whirlwind, and often
+succeed in stopping its progress; the circular motion ceasing, and all
+that it had taken up falling immediately down, when the sea becomes
+presently calm.
+
+On the cessation of the hurricane, the commodore and his remaining
+consort, the African galley, continued their course to the S.S.W. till
+in the height of the Straits of Magellan. They here fell in with an
+island of near 200 leagues in circumference, and about 14 leagues from
+the mainland of America, and seeing no smoke, nor any boat, or other
+kind of embarkation, they concluded that it was uninhabited. The west
+coast of this island was discovered by a French privateer, and named
+the Island of St Lewis; but being seen afterwards by the Dutch, who
+fancied its many capes to be distinct islands, they called it _New
+Islands_. Considering that, if ever it should be inhabited, its
+inhabitants would be the antipodes of the Dutch, Roggewein gave it the
+name of _Belgia Australis_. It is in the lat. of 52 deg. S. and long. of
+95 deg. W.[1]
+
+[Footnote 1: There is not the smallest doubt that the text refers
+to the Falkland islands or Malouines, which consist of two principal
+islands, called West and East Islands, besides a number of islets,
+about 360 English miles from the continent of South America. The
+centre of the west, or principal island, is in lat. 51 deg. 25' S. and
+long. 60 deg. W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+The land appeared extremely beautiful and very fertile, being
+chequered with mountains and vallies, all of which were cloathed with
+fine straight trees. The verdure of the meadows, and freshness of the
+woods, afforded a delightful prospect, insomuch that all the people
+believed they should have found abundance of excellent fruits. But the
+commodore would not delay by permitting them to land, being anxious
+to get round Cape Horn, and chose therefore to defer a thorough
+examination of this new country till his return from discovering the
+southern continent and islands: This, however reasonable, proved vain
+in the sequel, as he was forced to return with his squadron by the
+East Indies; and this fine island, therefore, is likely to continue in
+a great measure unknown.
+
+Quitting this island, they made for the Straits of Magellan, in order
+to wait a wind favourable for their navigation, which took place in a
+few days: for, if it had continued to blow from the west, they could
+not possibly have got into the South Seas. They now resolved to
+attempt the Straits of Le Maire, as infinitely more commodious than
+the Strait of Magellan, in which latter the sea has but small depth,
+and the meeting of the north and south currents occasion continual
+rough seas. The bottom also of the Straits of Magellan is rocky,
+affording no good anchorage; and the flows of winds from the mountains
+on both sides are apt to endanger all ships that endeavour to pass
+through these perilous straits. Having now a fair wind, they continued
+their course to the south for the Straits of Le Maire, seeing on their
+way abundance of whales and other large fish of that kind. Among the
+rest, they were followed for a whole month by that kind of fish which
+is called the _Sea Devil_ by the Dutch sailors, which they took the
+utmost pains to catch, but to no purpose. It has a large head, a thick
+short body, and a very long tail, like that which painters bestow on
+the dragon.
+
+Arriving in the lat. of 55 deg. S. they soon after saw State Island, or
+Staten-land, which forms one side of the Straits of Luttaire. The
+fury of the waves, and the clashing of contending currents, gave such
+terrible shocks to their vessels, that they expected every moment
+their yards should have been broken, and their masts to come by the
+board. They would gladly have come to anchor, especially on finding
+the bottom to be good, but the weather and the sea were so rough that
+they durst not. They passed through the straits, which are about ten
+leagues long, by six over, with a swiftness not to be expressed, owing
+to the force and rapidity of the current. After getting through, this
+current, together with the westerly winds, carried them a great way
+from the coast of America; and, that they might be sure to sail free
+of Cape Horn, they sailed as high as the lat. of 62 deg. 30' S. For three
+weeks together, they sustained the most dreadful gusts of a furious
+west wind, accompanied with hail and snow, and the most piercing
+frost. While enveloped in thick mists, they were apprehensive of being
+driven by the extreme violence of the winds upon mountains of ice,
+where they must inevitably have perished.
+
+Whenever the weather was in any degree clear or serene, they had
+scarcely any night; for, being in the middle of January, 1722, the
+summer was then in its height, and the days at their utmost length.
+
+These mountains of ice, of which they were so much afraid, are certain
+proofs that the southern countries extend quite to the pole, as well
+as those under the north; for, without question, these vast hills of
+ice cannot be produced in the sea, nor formed by the common force of
+cold. It must therefore he concluded, that they are occasioned by the
+sharp piercing winds blowing out of the mouths of large rivers.[2] It
+is no less certain, that the currents discerned in this ocean must all
+proceed from the mouths of large rivers, which, rolling down from
+a high continent, fall with such impetuosity into the sea, as to
+preserve a great part of their force long after they have entered
+it.[3] The great quantity of birds seen here was an additional proof
+that land was not far off. It may be asked, whether this land be
+inhabited or not? For my part I believe it is. It may be again asked,
+How men should live in such a climate, in the lat. of 70 deg. S. where the
+winter is so very long, the summer so short, and where they must be
+involved for so great a portion of the year in perpetual night? To
+this I answer, That such as dwell there come only in the fine season
+in order to fish, and retire on the approach of winter, as is done by
+many of the inhabitants of Russia and of Davis Straits, who, when they
+have provided themselves with fish on the coasts of a frozen climate,
+retire farther inland, and eat in their cabins during the winter
+the fish they have caught in the summer. If the people who inhabit
+Greenland and Davis Straits are to be believed, the country is
+inhabited even as high as 70 deg. N. both winter and summer; and what is
+practicable in one country, cannot justly be reputed impracticable
+when supposed in another.[4]
+
+[Footnote 2: This is quite erroneous, as it is now well known that
+the sea water freezes, when reduced to a sufficient degree of cold,
+considerably lower than what is requisite for freezing fresh water. On
+this occasion, the salt precipitates from the freezing water, and the
+ice of sea water is sufficiently fresh for use when melted, if the
+first running be thrown away, which often contains salt, either
+adhering to the surface, or contained in cells.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 3: This is poor reasoning to support a preconceived theory
+of a southern continent, and might easily have been answered by
+themselves, as the prodigious current which set them through the
+Straits of Le Maire with such rapidity, could not have originated from
+any such cause. Currents are well known to be occasioned by the
+tides, the diurnal revolution of the earth, and by prevailing winds,
+influenced and directed by the bendings of coasts, the interposition
+of islands, and the position of straits. No such currents could
+possibly come from rivers in an austral land, locked up in ever-during
+frost, should any such land exist.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 4: It might be asked, whence are these fishers to come?
+Not surely from among the miserable inhabitants of Terra del Fuego.
+A miserable hypothesis is thus often obstinately defended by wretched
+arguments.--E.]
+
+Being driven 500 leagues from the continent by the contrary winds, the
+commodore now believed that he was beyond Cape Horn to the westwards,
+and steered therefore N.E. by N. in order to fall in with the coast of
+Chili. On the 10th March, being in lat. 37 deg. 30' S. they discovered
+the coast of Chili to their great joy, and anchored soon after on
+the coast of the island of Mocha, which is three leagues from the
+continent.[5] They were in hopes of finding on this island at least a
+part of the refreshments of which they were in want, especially fresh
+meat and vegetables, but were disappointed, by finding the island
+entirely abandoned, all its inhabitants having removed to the main
+land. They saw, however, in the island a multitude of horses and
+birds, and found some dogs in two cabins near the shore. They also
+discovered the wreck of a Spanish ship, from which they supposed the
+dogs had got on shore. The horses were supposed to have been left here
+to graze, and that the owners came at certain times from the main to
+take them, as wanted. They here killed abundance of geese and ducks;
+and finding the coast extremely rocky, and having no safe place of
+anchorage, they resolved to put to sea. In a council of the officers,
+it was determined to continue for some time longer on the coast of
+Chili, in hopes of meeting with some port in which they could
+safely anchor, in order to get some refreshments; but perceiving the
+Spaniards to be every where on their guard, they steered W.N.W.
+for the island of Juan Fernandez, which they reckoned to be at the
+distance of ninety leagues in that direction. Although the coast of
+Chili appears to be enormously high when seen from a distance, they
+discovered, by sailing along shore, that it was not higher than the
+coast of England, and that they had been deceived by the enormous
+height of the inland mountains, the tops of which are hid in the
+clouds, and cloathed in perpetual snow.
+
+[Footnote 5: Mocha is in lat. 36 deg. 20' S. and about 20 miles from the
+coast of Chili.--E.]
+
+Having a favourable wind, they made way at a great rate, and got sight
+of the island of Juan Fernandez, on the fourth day after leaving the
+coast of Chili, but could not get to anchor that day in the road,
+owing to its falling calm. Next day, when ready to go in, they were
+astonished by seeing a ship riding at anchor, which they conjectured
+to be either a Spanish ship of force or a French interloper, but at
+last concluded to be a pirate. While consulting what to do, they saw
+the boat belonging to the ship coming towards them, carrying a Spanish
+flag, on which they began to prepare for an engagement, but were
+astonished beyond measure, on its nearer approach, to find that it
+belonged to their consort the Tienhoven, which they concluded had
+foundered. Captain Bowman was himself on board the boat, and shewed
+how well he had followed his instructions, as, by the commodore's
+orders in case of separation, this was to be the first place of
+rendezvous; whence, after cruizing six weeks, they were to repair
+to lat. 28 deg. S. and cruize there a similar time: But, in case of not
+meeting the commodore in either of these places, they were then to
+open their sealed instructions, and follow them exactly. As soon as
+Captain Bowman was on board the commodore, he made a signal agreed
+on to his own ship, to acquaint them that the two ships were their
+consorts, After this, the Eagle and African entered the harbour.
+
+When leisure permitted, Captain Bowman gave an account of the dangers
+he had encountered in passing the Straits of Magellan: That he had met
+with many storms on the coast of America, and that his ship was in a
+very bad condition, having only arrived at Juan Fernandez the evening
+before his consorts, both of which he believed had been lost in
+the hurricane at the time of their separation. The three captains
+afterwards dined together very cheerfully in the Tienhoven, where they
+recounted and reciprocally commiserated their past misfortunes, and
+rejoiced at their present happy meeting. As it still continued a dead
+calm, they were unable to come to anchor at the place intended, but
+they next day got close beside the Tienhoven, anchoring in forty
+fathoms, within musket-shot of the shore. The sick were now landed,
+and proper persons sent ashore along with them to construct cabins
+or huts for their accommodation; and to search for provisions and
+refreshments.
+
+According to the author of this voyage, the island of Juan Fernandez
+is one of the finest and best situated in the world, having a
+pleasant, wholesome, and temperate climate, fit to restore health to
+the sick, and to give a constant flow of spirits to those who are
+in health, which this author personally experienced, having here
+recovered from a complication of disorders to perfect health. The
+hills are covered with tall trees of various kinds, fit for all kinds
+of uses; and the vallies are fertile, and able to produce all the
+necessaries of life with very little cultivation. It abounds with
+small streams and brooks, the banks of which are covered with
+wholesome giants; and the waters which run down from the mountains,
+though not in the least disagreeable to the taste, or injurious to
+health, are so impregnated with some mineral particles, that they
+never corrupt. On the east side of the bay in which the Dutch ships
+anchored, there are three mountains, the middlemost of which resembles
+the Table Mountains at the Cape of Good Hope. Behind these there
+are many other mountains which rise to a prodigious height, and are
+generally covered by very thick mist, especially in the mornings and
+evenings, whence I am apt to suspect that these mountains may contain
+rich mines. To give a just idea of the island in few words, it
+resembles in all respects the country at the Cape of Good Hope.
+
+This author also mentions the sea-lions and seals of other writers,
+and adds, that there are sea-cows also of enormous size, some weighing
+near half a ton. He also mentions the abundance and excellence of the
+fish, of which the Dutch cured many thousands during their short stay,
+which proved extraordinarily good, and were of great service during
+the rest of the voyage. He mentions goats also on the island in
+abundance, but says the Dutch were unable to catch them, and at a loss
+how to get at their bodies when shot; but they were frightened from
+this sport by an unlucky accident which happened to the steward of one
+of the ships, soon after their arrival, who, rambling one evening in
+the mountains, fell suddenly from the top of a rock and was dashed to
+pieces. They found here the remains of a wreck, supposed by them to
+have been of a Spanish ship; but it was more probably the vestiges of
+the Speedwell, lost a year before, and from which, by diving, some of
+the sailors recovered several pieces of silver plate.
+
+Having attentively considered the advantageous situation and many
+conveniences of this island, Roggewein conceived the design of
+settling on it, as the most proper place that could be thought of
+for ships bound, as he was, for the _Terra Australis_, or southern
+islands, and was the more encouraged in this design by considering
+the fertility of the island, which could not fail to afford sufficient
+subsistence for six hundred families at least. He postponed this,
+however, as also the settlement of _Belgia Australis_, or Falkland
+islands, till his proposed return, owing to which they never were
+settled. A settlement at the latter might have afforded a proper place
+for ships to careen and refit at, and to procure wood and water, after
+the long voyage from Europe, before entering the Straits of Magellan,
+and Juan Fernandez would have afforded every convenience for repairing
+any injuries that might have been sustained in passing through these
+straits, or going round Cape Horn. Whatever nation may revive and
+prosecute this plan, will certainly acquire in a few years as rich and
+profitable a commerce as is now possessed by the Spaniards with Mexico
+and Peru, or the Portuguese with Brazil.[6]
+
+[Footnote 6: Britain once tried a settlement at Falkland islands, and
+had nearly gone to war with Spain on the occasion; and there can be no
+doubt that Spain could never have submitted to the settlement of Juan
+Fernandez by any other power. There is now a fort and small garrison
+kept in that island.--E]
+
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Continuation of the Voyage from Juan Fernandez till the Shipwreck of
+the African Galley._
+
+On leaving Juan Fernandez, Roggewein proposed to visit that part of
+the southern lands which was reported to have been discovered by Davis
+in 1680.[1] As the Dutch author of this voyage is rather dark on this
+subject, I shall here insert Mr Wafer's account of this discovery, as
+it is very short. Wafer was a man of sense and knowledge, who sailed
+along with Davis when this discovery was made.
+
+[Footnote 1: We have omitted a long, inconclusive, and uninteresting
+discussion about the climate and productions of the proposed
+discovery, the _Terra Australis_, which still remains _incognito_, or
+rather has been clearly shewn to have no existence.--E.]
+
+"We steered from the Gallapagos island S. by E. 1/2 E. until we came
+into the lat. of 27 deg. 20' S. when we fell in with a low sandy island,
+and heard a great roaring noise right a-head of the ship, like that
+of the sea beating on the shore. It being some hours before day, and
+fearing to fall foul of the shore, the ship put about, and plied off
+and on till next morning, and then stood in for the land, which
+proved to be a small flat island, not surrounded by any rocks. To the
+westwards, about twelve leagues by estimation, we saw a range of high
+land which we took to be islands, as there were several partitions
+in the prospect, and this land seemed to extend fourteen or sixteen
+leagues. There came great flocks of fowls from that direction; and I
+and more of the men would have made this land and gone on shore there,
+but the captain would not consent. The small island bears 500 leagues
+from Copaipo almost due W. and from the Gallapagos 600 leagues."[2]
+
+[Footnote 2: There can be no doubt that the small low flat island was
+Easter island, in lat. 27 deg. 20' S. long. 110 deg. 10' W. Its distance from
+Copaipo, almost due W. is almost exactly 40 deg. or 800 marine leagues.
+The range of high land seen to the westwards, could be nothing but a
+fog bank, so that Roggewein set out from Juan Fernandez in search of a
+nonentity.--E.]
+
+In prosecuting his voyage to the westwards, the first land seen by
+Roggewein was the lesser island of Juan Fernandez, otherwise called
+Massa-fuero, about ninety-five English miles direct west. This
+appeared lower and less fertile from a distance, but they had not an
+opportunity of landing. Having the benefit of a S.E. trade-wind, they
+soon arrived in lat. 28 deg. S. and the longitude of 251 deg. E. where they
+expected to have fallen in with the land seen by Davis, but no such
+land was to be found. Continuing their voyage to the westwards, and
+attended by a vast quantity of birds, they arrived on the coast of a
+small island about sixteen leagues in extent, which they fell in with
+on the 14th April, 1722, being Easter-day, and called it therefore
+_Pascha_, or _Easter_ Island.
+
+The African galley being the smallest ship, was sent in first to
+examine this new discovery, and reported that it seemed to be very
+fertile and well peopled, as abundance of smoke was to be seen in all
+parts of the island. Next day, while looking out for a port, and when
+about two miles from the shore, an Indian came off to the ships in a
+canoe, who came readily on board and was well received. Being naked,
+he was first presented with a piece of cloth to cover him, and they
+gave him afterwards pieces of coral, beads, and other toys, all of
+which he hung about his neck, together with a dried fish. His body was
+painted all over with a variety of figures, through which the
+natural colour of his skin appeared to be dark brown. His ears were
+excessively large and long, hanging down to his shoulders, occasioned
+doubtless by wearing large heavy ear-rings; a thing also practised
+by the natives of Malabar. He was tall, well-made, robust and of a
+pleasing countenance, and brisk and active in his manners, appearing
+to be very merry by his gestures and way of speaking. They gave him
+victuals, of which he eat heartily, but could not be prevailed on to
+use a knife and fork; and when offered a glass of wine threw it away
+to their great surprise, afraid of being poisoned, or offended by
+the smell of strong liquor, to which he was unaccustomed. He was then
+dressed from head to foot, and had a hat put on his head, with which
+he did not seem at all pleased, but cut a very awkward figure, and
+seemed uneasy. The music was then ordered to play, with which he
+seemed much pleased, and when taken by the hand would leap and dance.
+Finding it impossible to bring the ships to anchor that day, they
+sent off the Indian, allowing him to keep all he had got in order to
+encourage the rest to come on board. But, what was really surprising,
+he had no mind to go away, and looked at the Dutch with regret, held
+up his hands towards his native island, and cried in a loud voice
+several times _Odorega!_ making appear by signs that he would much
+rather have staid, and they had much ado to get him into his canoe.
+They afterwards imagined he called upon his gods, as they saw
+abundance of idols erected on the coast when they landed.[3]
+
+[Footnote 3: It will be afterwards seen in the modern
+circumnavigations, that there are several gigantic statues, having
+a distant resemblance to the human figure, on this island, which are
+perhaps alluded to in the text.--E.]
+
+
+Next morning at day-break, the ships entered a cove or bay on the S.E.
+side of the island, when _many thousands_[4] of the inhabitants came
+down to meet them, bringing with them vast quantities of fowls and
+roots; and many of them brought these provisions on board, while
+the rest ran backwards and forwards on the shore, like so many wild
+beasts. As the ships drew near, the islanders crowded down to the
+shore to get a better view of them, and at the same time lighted
+fires, and made offerings to their idols, probably to implore their
+protection against the strangers. All that day the Dutch spent in
+getting into the bay and mooring their ships. Next morning very early,
+the islanders were observed prostrating themselves before their idols
+towards the rising sun, and making burnt offerings. While preparations
+were making for landing, the friendly native who had been before on
+board came a second time, accompanied by many others, who had their
+canoes loaded with living fowls and roots cooked after their manner,
+as if to make themselves welcome. Among this troop of islanders there
+was one man perfectly white, having round pendents in his ears as big
+as a man's fist. He had a grave decent air, and was supposed to be a
+priest. By some accident, one of the islanders was shot dead in his
+canoe by a musket, which threw the whole into prodigious confusion,
+most of them leaping into the sea in order to get the sooner ashore;
+while the rest who remained in their canoes paddled away with all
+their might.
+
+[Footnote 4: This surely is a prodigious exaggeration, as the island
+is utterly incapable to have supported any considerable number of
+inhabitants, and there is not any other within 1500 miles.--E.]
+
+The Dutch presently followed, and made a descent with 150 soldiers and
+seamen, at the head of whom was Commodore Roggewein, accompanied by
+the author of the voyage, who commanded the soldiers. The islanders
+crowded so close upon them while landing, that they thought it
+necessary to make their way by force, especially as some of the
+natives were so bold as to lay hold of their arms; and the Dutch
+accordingly fired, when a great number of the islanders were slain,
+among whom was the friendly native who had been twice aboard ship.
+This frightened and dispersed them; yet in a few minutes they rallied
+again, but did not come quite so near the strangers as before, keeping
+at the distance of about ten yards, as if they supposed that
+were sufficient to ensure their safety from the muskets. Their
+consternation was however very great, and they howled and lamented
+dismally. After all, as if to employ every possible means to mollify
+their invaders, the men, women, and children presented themselves in
+the most humble postures, carrying branches of palm in token of peace
+and submission, bringing plenty of provisions of all kinds, and even
+pointing to their women, giving the Dutch to understand by signs that
+these were entirely at their disposal, and that they might carry as
+many of them on board ship as they thought proper. Softened by these
+tokens of submission, the Dutch did them no farther harm, but
+made them presents of coral beads and small looking-glasses, and
+distributed among them sixty yards of painted cloth.
+
+The natives now brought at once to the Dutch about 500 live fowls,
+every way the same with the ordinary poultry of Europe, together with
+a great quantity of red and white roots and potatoes, which these
+islanders use instead of bread. They brought also several hundred
+sugar-canes, and a great quantity of _pisans_, which are a sort of
+figs as large as gourds covered by a green rind, the pulp of which is
+as sweet as honey. The leaves of the tree on which these figs grow
+are six or eight feet long and three broad, and there are sometimes an
+hundred of these _pisans_ on one bough. The Dutch saw no quadrupeds of
+any kind, yet supposed there might be cattle and other beasts in the
+interior, as on shewing some hogs to the islanders, they expressed by
+signs that they had seen such animals before. They used pots to dress
+their meat in; and it appeared that every family or tribe among
+them dwelt in a separate village. The huts or cabins composing these
+villages were from forty to sixty feet long, by six or eight feet
+broad, made of upright poles, having the interstices filled up with
+loam or fat earth, and covered at top with palm leaves. They drew most
+of their subsistence from the earth by cultivation, the land being
+portioned out into small plantations very neatly divided and staked
+out. While the Dutch were there, almost all the fruits and roots were
+in full maturity, and the island seemed to abound in good things. In
+their houses there were not many moveables, and those they had were
+of no value, except some red and white quilts or cloths, which served
+them in the day for mantles, and at night for coverlets. The stuff of
+which these were composed felt as soft as silk, and was probably of
+their own manufacture.
+
+The natives of this island were in general a brisk, slender, active,
+well-made people, very swift of foot, and seemed of sweet tempers, and
+modest dispositions, but timorous and faint-hearted; for whenever they
+brought fowls or other provisions to the Dutch, they threw themselves
+on their knees, and immediately on delivering their presents retired
+in all haste. They were mostly as brown-complexioned as Spaniards,
+some among them being almost black, while others were white, and
+others again had their skins entirely red, as if sun-burnt. Their ears
+hung down to their shoulders, and some had large white bales hanging
+to them, which they seemed to consider as a great ornament. Their
+bodies were painted all over with the figures of birds and other
+animals, on some much better executed than on others.[5] All their
+women had artificial bloom on their cheeks, but of a much deeper
+crimson than is known in Europe, and the Dutch could not discover what
+this colour was composed of. They wore little hats on their heads
+made of straw or reeds, and had no other covering than the quilts or
+mantles formerly mentioned.[6] The women were by no means extremely
+modest, for they invited the Dutchmen into their houses by signs,
+and when they sat by them would throw off their mantles, as inviting
+familiarity. It is very singular of these islanders, that the Dutch
+saw no appearance whatever of arms among them; but, when attacked,
+they fled for refuge to their idols, numbers of which were erected
+all along the coast. These idols were all of stone, representing
+the figures of men with great ears, their heads covered by the
+representations of crowns; and all so nicely proportioned, and
+so highly finished, that the Dutch were much amazed. Many of the
+inhabitants seemed to be more frequent and more zealous worshippers
+of these images than the rest, which induced the Dutch to believe that
+these were priests; and that the more especially, as their heads were
+close shaven, on which they wore caps of black and white feathers,[7]
+and they had large white balls hanging at their ears.
+
+[Footnote 5: _Tatooed_ in all probability, a practice so common
+through the inhabitants of Polynesia, which will be minutely described
+in an after division of this collection. It may suffice to say at
+present, that this decoration is formed by pricking the skin with
+sharp instruments till it just bleeds, and afterwards rubbing
+some coloured powders into the punctures, which leave indelible
+stains.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 6: It is left ambiguous whether these straw hats and mantles
+were worn by both sexes, or confined exclusively to the women.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 7: A dissertation is here omitted on a fancied migration
+of storks annually from Europe to this island and others in the
+South-sea, as high as lat. 40 deg. and 50 deg. S. merely because the Dutch
+thought the feathers in these caps resembled those of storks.--E.]
+
+No appearance of government or subordination was observed among these
+islanders, and consequently no prince or chief having dominion over
+the rest. The old people wore bonnets made of feathers resembling
+the down of ostriches, and had sticks in their hands. In some of the
+houses, the father of the family was observed to have rule over all
+its inhabitants, and was obeyed with the greatest readiness. In the
+opinion of the Dutch author of this voyage, this island might be
+settled to great advantage, as the air is very wholesome and the soil
+rich; being proper for producing corn in the low lands, and its higher
+grounds might be converted into vineyards. On the evening, after
+returning on board, Roggewein proposed to land again next morning with
+a force sufficient to make a strict survey of the whole island: But
+during the night there arose so strong a west wind as drove them from
+their anchors, and they were forced to put to sea, to avoid being
+shipwrecked. After this misfortune, they cruized for some time in the
+same latitude, seeking in vain for the land discovered by Davis, on
+which Roggewein determined to bear away for the _Bad Sea of Schouten_,
+keeping always a west course, in hopes of discovering some new land.
+In this coarse, they soon found themselves in the height of the
+island discovered by Schonten in 1615, to which he gave the name of
+_Bad-water_, because all its waters were brackish; but, by changing
+their course, they ran 300 leagues out of their way, and at least 150
+leagues farther than Schonten.
+
+In this wide sea, Roggewein sailed upwards of 800 leagues without
+seeing land, though he frequently varied his course. At length, when
+in lat. 15 deg. 30' S. they discovered a very low island, the coast of
+which was covered with a deep yellow-coloured sand, having in
+the middle of the island a kind of pond, lake, or lagoon. All the
+principal officers were of opinion that this was the island to which
+Schonten gave the name of _Dog_ island, and did not therefore think
+it necessary to go on shore for more particular examination.[8] The
+author of this voyage was of a different opinion, conceiving it a new
+discovery, and calling it _Carlshoff_,[9] which he says is in lat. 15 deg.
+45' S. and long. 280 deg.. He describes it as a low flat island of about
+three leagues in extent, having a lake in the middle.
+
+[Footnote 8: In modern geography Dog island is placed in lat. 15 deg. 10'
+S. long. 137 deg. 45' W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 9: Carlshoff is laid down by Arrowsmith in lat. 15 deg. 45' S.
+as in the text, and long. 145 deg. 28' W. The first meridian used for the
+longitude in the text is quite inexplicable, and was probably assumed
+on very erroneous computation. It is 190 marine leagues due west from
+Dog island.--E.]
+
+Leaving this island, the wind came about to the S.W. a sign that they
+were near some coast, which had changed the current of the air; and
+by this alteration of wind they were driven among some small islands,
+where they found themselves considerably embarrassed. In this
+situation the African galley led the way for the rest, as sailing best
+and drawing least water; but she soon found herself in such danger,
+that they fired repeated guns of distress, on which the other two
+ships hastened to her assistance, when they found her stuck so fast
+between two rocks that it was impossible to get her of? and were only
+able to save her people. Roused by the noise of the signal guns, the
+natives of the surrounding islands kindled many fires on their hills,
+and flocked in crowds to the coasts; and the Dutch; not knowing what
+might be their designs in the darkness of the night and in the midst
+of their own confusion, fired upon them without ceremony, that they
+might have as few dangers as possible to deal with at one time. In the
+morning as soon as it was light, they had a clear view of the danger
+all the ships had been in during the darkness of the past night,
+finding themselves environed on all sides by four islands, with a
+continued chain of steep rocks, and so close together that they could
+hardly discern the channel by which they had got in, so that they had
+much reason to be thankful for having been so wonderfully preserved
+in the midst of so much danger. On this occasion only one seaman was
+lost, who belonged to the Tienhoven, and who, in his eagerness to go
+to succour his friends, dropt overboard and was drowned.
+
+The danger was by no means over as soon as discovered, as it cost
+the Dutch no less than five days to extricate themselves from their
+perilous situation, during which time the commodore was separated from
+the Tienhoven, and remained ignorant of the fate of the African. At
+length, the boat of the Tienhoven, having sailed all round the group
+of islands, brought information that the crew of the African had got
+safe on shore; and that the natives, after being once fired on, had
+retired into the interior in all haste. Roggewein now sent his boat to
+bring off all those who had got on shore; and on mustering the crew of
+the African on board the Eagle, it appeared that a quarter-master and
+four seamen were missing. On enquiry, it was found that these men had
+chosen to remain on the island, as they had mutinied against their
+officers on getting ashore, because they had interposed to prevent
+them from killing each other with their knives, and Captain Rosenthall
+had threatened to have them all put to death when he got them aboard
+the commodore, wherefore they had fled to avoid punishment. Being
+unwilling to lose them, the commodore sent the author of this
+narrative with a detachment of soldiers to bring them away, but he was
+unable to succeed.
+
+These islands are situated between the latitudes of 15 deg. and 16 deg. S.
+about twelve leagues west from Carlshoff,[10] each of them appearing
+to be four or five leagues in compass. That on which the African
+was shipwrecked was named _Mischievous Island_, the two next it
+the _Brothers_, and the fourth the _Sister_ All four islands were
+beautifully verdant, and abounded in fine tall trees, especially
+cocoas; and the crews found material benefit while here by refreshing
+themselves on the vegetable productions of these islands, by which
+many of them were surprisingly recovered from the scurvy. The Dutch
+found here vast quantities of muscles, cockles, mother-of-pearls,
+and pearl-oysters, which gave reason to expect that a valuable pearl
+fishery might have been established here. These islands are extremely
+low, so that some parts of them must be frequently overflowed; but the
+inhabitants have plenty of stout canoes, as also stout barks provided
+with sails and cables; and the Dutch found several pieces of rope on
+the shore, that seemed made of hemp. The natives were of extraordinary
+size, all their bodies being painted [or _tatooed_] with many colours,
+and had mostly long black hair, though some had brown hair even
+inclined towards red. They were armed with pikes or lances eighteen or
+twenty feet long, and kept in bodies of fifty or an hundred together,
+endeavouring to entice the Dutch to follow them into the interior, as
+if to draw them into an ambuscade, on purpose to be revenged for the
+loss they had sustained by the firing on the night of the shipwreck.
+
+[Footnote 10: Pernicious islands, almost certainly the Mischievous
+islands of the text, are placed in lat. 16 deg. 5' S. and long. 148 deg. 50'
+W. about 20 leagues W. by S. from Carlshoff by Arrowsmith.--E.]
+
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Continuation of the Voyage after the Loss of the African, to the
+Arrival of Roggewein at New Britain._
+
+The next morning after leaving Mischievous island, they saw a new
+island eight leagues to the west, to which they gave the name of
+_Aurora_ island, because observed first at break of day. At this time
+the Tienhoven was so near, that if the sun had risen half an hour
+later, she must have shared the same fate with the African, as she was
+within cannon-shot of the shore when the danger was perceived, and she
+then tacked and escaped with considerable difficulty. The fright which
+this occasioned produced a mutiny, in which all the seamen insisted
+with the commodore either to return immediately, or to give them
+security for payment of their wages, in case they should be so
+unfortunate as to suffer shipwreck. This request seemed just and
+reasonable, being daily exposed to excessive fatigue in these stormy
+and unknown seas, and at the same time ran the hazard of losing all
+the reward of their labours, as it is the custom in Holland that the
+seamen lose their wages if the ship is lost in which they sail.
+The commodore listened to their complaints with much humanity, and
+immediately gave them assurance upon oath, that they should have their
+wages to the uttermost farthing, and kept his promise with the utmost
+exactness; for, though the African was lost before, and both the other
+ships were condemned at Batavia, yet every one of their respective
+crews received their full wages on their arrival at Amsterdam.
+
+The island of _Aurora_ was about four leagues in extent, the whole
+being covered with delightful verdure, and adorned with lofty trees
+interspersed with smaller wood. But, as the coast was found to be all
+foul and rocky, they left this island also without landing. Towards
+evening of the same day, they had sight of another island, to which
+therefore they gave the name of _Vesper_.[1] This was about twelve
+leagues in circuit, all low land, yet verdant and containing abundance
+of trees of various sorts. Continuing their course to the west in
+about the latitude of 15 deg. S. they next morning discovered another
+country; and, as it was covered with smoke, they concluded it
+was inhabited, and made there all sail to come to it, in hopes of
+procuring refreshments. On approaching nearer, some of the inhabitants
+were seen diverting themselves off the coast in their canoes. They
+also perceived by degrees, that what they had at first supposed to
+be one country or large island, was in reality abundance of islands
+standing close together, among which they had now entered so far, that
+they found it difficult to get out again. In this situation, a man was
+sent to the mast-head to look out for a passage, and as the weather
+was quite serene, they had the good fortune to get out once more into
+the open sea without injury; although in passing by several steep
+ranges of rocks, they had reason to consider this as a great
+deliverance. There were six of these islands, exceedingly beautiful
+and pleasant in appearance, which altogether could not be less than
+thirty leagues in circumference. They were about twenty-five
+leagues west from Mischievous island, and the Dutch called them the
+Labyrinth,[2] having difficultly got clear of them by numerous tacks.
+
+[Footnote 1: Aurora and Vesper are called in modern geography
+Roggewein's or Palliser's Islands, in lat. 15 deg. 32' S, about 10 leagues
+N. by W. of Pernicious Islands.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 2: Perhaps Prince of Wales' islands are here alluded to, in
+lat. 15 deg. 50' S. and long. 148 deg. 5' W. about 40 marine leagues W.N.W.
+from Pernicious islands.--E.]
+
+As it was very dangerous to anchor on the coast, and as none of the
+inhabitants came off in their canoes, the Dutch did not think fit to
+make any stay, but continued still a western course, and in a few days
+discovered another island, which at a distance appeared very high
+and beautiful; but, on a nearer approach they found no ground for
+anchorage, and the coast appeared so rocky that they were afraid to
+venture near. Each ship therefore embarked twenty-five men in their
+boats, in order to make a descent. The natives no sooner perceived
+their design than they came down in crowds to the coast to oppose
+their landing, being armed with long spears, which they soon shewed
+they knew how to use to the best advantage. When the boats drew near,
+the shore was found to be so steep and rocky, that the boats could not
+come to land, on which most of the sailors went into the water with
+their arms in their hands, having some baubles fit for presents to the
+natives tied upon their heads; while those who remained in the boats
+kept up a continual fire to clear the shore. This expedient succeeded,
+and the seamen got ashore without much resistance from the natives;
+who were frightened by the fire of the musquetry, and retired up the
+mountains, but came down again as soon as the Dutch ceased firing.
+
+On the return of the islanders, the Dutch who had landed shewed them
+small mirrors, beads, and other baubles, and the people came up to
+them without fear, took their presents, and suffered them to search
+where they pleased for herbs and sallading for the sick. They found
+abundance of these, and soon filled twelve sacks, six for the Eagle
+and six for the Tienhoven, the inhabitants even assisting them and
+shewing them the best sorts. They carried their cargo of greens
+immediately on board, which were more acceptable to the sick than if
+they had brought them as much gold and silver. Next morning a larger
+body of men were ordered on shore, both on purpose to gather herbs and
+to examine the island. The first thing they did was to make a present
+to the king or chief of a considerable assortment of trinkets, which
+he received with an air of indifference and disdain, which did not
+promise much good in their future intercourse, yet sent the Dutch
+a considerable quantity of cocoa nuts in return, which were very
+agreeable to them in their present circumstances. The chief was
+distinguished from the ordinary inhabitants by wearing various
+ornaments of pearls, as they judged to the value of 600 florins, or
+L. 55 sterling. The women of the island seemed to admire the white men
+much, and almost stifled them with caresses: But this was all employed
+to lull the Dutch into security, that the plot contrived by the men
+for their destruction might the more readily succeed.
+
+When the Dutch had filled twenty sacks with greens, they advanced
+farther into the country, till they came to the top of some steep
+rocks, which hung over a large and deep valley, the natives going both
+before and behind them, quite unsuspected of any evil intention.
+At length, thinking they had the Dutch at an advantage, the natives
+suddenly quitted them, and soon after prodigious numbers came pouring
+out from caves and holes in the rocks, and surrounded the Dutch on all
+sides, while they immediately formed in close order for defence. The
+chief or king then made a signal for the Dutch to keep off, but as
+they continued to advance, the chief made a signal of battle, which
+was instantly followed by a prodigious shower of stones. The Dutch in
+return made a general discharge of their fire arms, which did great
+execution, and the chief was among the first who fell. Yet the
+islanders continued to throw stones with great fury, so that most of
+the Dutch were soon wounded and almost disabled, on which they retired
+under shelter of a rock, whence they fired with such success that
+great numbers of the islanders were slain. They still obstinately
+maintained their ground, and the Dutch were at last forced to retreat,
+having some of their number killed, and a great many wounded, most of
+whom died not long after, in consequence of their scorbutical habit
+of body, in spite of every care. As soon as they could disengage
+themselves from the enemy, the Dutch retired on board ship, carrying
+with them the sacks of greens which they had gathered. This rencounter
+had so great an effect on the Dutch, that when it was proposed to
+land again, not a man could be prevailed upon to make the dangerous
+attempt.
+
+They had given to this island, before this unfortunate affair, the
+name of the _Island of Recreation_,[3] which is in lat. 16 deg. S. and
+long. 285 deg.. It is about twelve leagues in compass, with a fertile
+soil, producing a great number of trees, especially cocoa nuts, palms,
+and iron-wood. The Dutch conceived that there might be rich mines
+in the heart of the country, and other valuable things, but were not
+allowed to search. The natives were of middle size, but robust
+and active, having long black shining hair, which they anoint with
+cocoa-nut oil, a practice very common among the Indians. They were
+painted all over, like the inhabitants of Easter island; the men
+wearing a kind of net-work round their middles, which they stick
+up between their legs. The women were entirely covered by a kind of
+mantles of their own manufacture, the stuff of which to the sight and
+touch resembled silk;[4] and they wear long strings of pearls about
+their necks and wrists.
+
+[Footnote 3: By Arrowsmith, this island is placed in lat. 16 deg. 32' S.
+and long. 148 deg. 50' W. The longitude in the text is inexplicable on any
+supposition.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 4: The cloth of the South-sea islands is a substance in
+a great measure resembling paper, composed of the inner bark of the
+paper mulberry, the preparation of which will be afterwards detailed
+in the narratives of the modern circumnavigators--E.]
+
+Roggewein thought proper to sail from this island without farther loss
+of time, and before his departure held a council of his officers,
+in which he stated his instructions, which were,--If no discovery of
+importance could be made in the latitude and longitude in which they
+then were, that he should return home. Some of the council were much
+astonished at this, and remonstrated, That having already gone so
+far, and met with such encouragement to hope for discoveries of great
+importance, they thought it would betray a great want of spirit not
+to proceed. To this Roggewein answered, That they had now been out ten
+months, having still a long voyage to make to the East Indies; that
+provisions began to grow scarce, and, above all, that the crews were
+already so much diminished in number, and the survivors in so weak a
+condition, that if twenty more were to die or fall sick, there would
+not be a sufficient number remaining to navigate both ships. The true
+reason, however, in the opinion of the author of this voyage, was the
+anxiety to get to the East Indies before the change of the monsoon,
+in which case they must have remained six months longer in these
+seas. Some of the officers opposed this motion to the last, earnestly
+entreating the commodore that he would rather winter at the land
+mentioned by Ferdinand de Quiros, from which they could not now be
+more than 150 leagues distant. They insisted that it was wrong to
+think of going to the East Indies, that being directly contrary to
+the design of their instructions: And that by continuing in the same
+western course, they could not fail to fall in with some island, where
+they might land and procure refreshments, remaining on shore till
+all their sick men were recovered, and erecting a fort to defend
+themselves against the natives. If this were complied with, they said
+they might afterwards return home by an eastern coarse; and, by taking
+time, might effectually complete the discoveries on which they were
+sent.
+
+These reasons were listened to with patience and civility, but had
+not the weight they deserved; and a resolution was formed to continue
+their coarse for New Britain and New Guinea, and thence to the East
+Indies, by way of the Moluccas, being in hopes to procure there a
+supply of provisions and necessaries, together with a reinforcement
+of seamen, in case they should then be too weak for navigating their
+ships home to Europe. In consequence of this resolution, an end was
+put to all hope of visiting the land of Quiros, which the best seamen
+on board thought might have been easily discovered, called by him
+and Torres the _Islands of Solomon_, and reported to be beautiful
+and fertile, and abounding in gold, silver, precious stones, and
+spices.[5]
+
+[Footnote 5: We have here omitted a long, uninteresting, and
+inconclusive disquisition on the supposed Terra Australis, as
+altogether founded on supposition and error.--E.]
+
+Leaving the island of _Recreation_, Roggewein steered a coarse towards
+the N.W. pursuant to the resolution of the council, in order to get
+into the latitude of New Britain. On the third day, in lat. 12 deg. S.
+and long. 29 deg. they discovered several islands which appeared very
+beautiful at a distance, and, on a nearer approach, were seen to be
+well planted with all sorts of trees, and produced herbs, corn,
+and roots in great plenty, to which they gave the name of _Bowman's
+Islands_, after the captain of the Tienhoven, by whom they were first
+seen.[6] As soon as they were seen by the natives, they came off in
+their canoes to the ships, bringing fish, cocoa-nuts, Indian figs,
+and other refreshments, in return for which the Dutch gave them small
+mirrors, strings of beads, and other trifles. These islands were very
+fully peopled, as many thousands of men and women came down to the
+shore to view the ships, most of the men being armed with bows and
+arrows. Among the rest, they saw a majestic personage, who, from the
+peculiar dress he wore, and the honours that were paid him, evidently
+appeared to be chief or king of these islanders. This person soon
+afterwards went into a canoe, accompanied by a fair young woman, who
+sat close by his side, and his canoe was immediately surrounded by a
+vast number of others, which seemed intended for his guard.
+
+[Footnote 6: These appear to have been the most northerly of the
+Society islands, about 70 marine leagues, or 3-1/2 degrees W. by N.
+from Recreation island, in lat. 15 deg. 20' S. long. 152 deg. W.]
+
+All the inhabitants of these islands were white, differing only from
+Europeans in being sun-burnt, and they seemed a very harmless good
+sort of people, of brisk and lively dispositions, behaving to each
+other with much civility, and shewing no appearance of wildness or
+savageness in their behaviour. Their bodies were not painted like
+those of the islanders they had seen hitherto, but very handsomely
+cloathed from the waist downwards, with a sort of silk fringes very
+neatly arranged. On their heads they wore hats of a very neat-looking
+stuff, very large and wide spreading, in order to keep off the sun,
+and their necks were adorned with collars or garlands of beautiful
+odoriferous flowers. The islands appeared quite charming, being
+agreeably diversified with beautiful hills and intermediate vallies.
+Each family or tribe appeared to have its separate district, and
+to compose a separate government or community, all the land being
+regularly laid out into regular and fair plantations, as had formerly
+been observed at _Pasch_, or _Easter_ island. In all respects, the
+natives were the most civilized and best disposed people they had seen
+in the South Seas. Instead of shewing any terror or apprehension at
+the arrival of the Dutch, the natives expressed the utmost joy and
+satisfaction, treating them with the utmost kindness and respect, and
+manifested the most sincere and deep concern at their departure. Many
+of the Dutch also felt a similar regret, and would have been well
+pleased to have made a longer stay in this delightful and plenteous
+country, among so kind a people, as, by the help of the excellent
+provisions in great abundance with which these good islands furnished
+them, all their sick people would have been perfectly recovered in
+a month. These islands had also one convenience greatly superior to
+those they had met with before, as there was good anchorage almost
+every where along their coasts, where they rode in the utmost safety,
+in from fifteen to twenty fathoms.
+
+So many advantageous circumstances ought to have induced Roggewein
+and his officers to have remained here longer; but their heads were
+so full of proceeding for the East Indies, that they were fearful of
+missing the favourable monsoon, while they afterwards discovered, to
+their cost, that they were two months too early, instead of two months
+too late. By this indiscreet step, they sacrificed the health and
+strength of their crew to such a degree, that they were at length
+hardly able to navigate their ships, and at one time were on the
+point of burning one of their ships, that they might be better able to
+manage the other: All of which inconveniences might have been avoided,
+had they embraced this opportunity afforded them by Divine Providence,
+and been contented to remain in a place of safety, plenty, and
+pleasure, till their sick were recovered, instead of wilfully seeking
+new dangers which they were so little able to encounter.
+
+Leaving Bowman's islands, and continuing their course towards the N.W.
+they came next morning in sight of two islands, which they took to
+be _Coccos_ and _Traitor's_ islands,[7] so called by Schouten, who
+discovered them. The island of Coccos, at a distance, for Roggewein
+would not stop to examine it, seemed very high land, and about eight
+leagues in circuit. The other seemed much lower, composed of a red
+soil, and destitute of trees. They soon after saw two other islands
+of large extent, one of which they named _Tienhoven_,[8] and the other
+_Groninguen_; which last many of their officers were of opinion was
+no island, but the _great southern continent_ they were sent out to
+discover. The island of _Tienhoven_ appeared a rich and beautiful
+country, moderately high, its meadows or low lands, by the sea,
+exceedingly green, and the interior well provided with trees. They
+coasted along this island for a whole day without reaching its
+extremity, yet noticed that it extended semi-circularly towards the
+island of Groninguen, so that those which they took for islands might
+be contiguous lands, and both of them parts of the _Terra Australis
+incognita_.
+
+[Footnote 7: There must be here an enormous error in the text; Coccos
+and Traitor's islands are almost directly west from Recreation
+island, and the northermost of the Society islands, supposed to be the
+Bowman's islands of the text, and not less than 23 deg.10' farther west
+than these last, or 463 marine leagues, which could not well be run in
+less than a week or ten days.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 8: These were probably the _Fee-jee_, or Bligh's islands, in
+lat. 17 deg. 20' S. long. 181 deg. 30' W. but the narrative is too
+incomplete to ascertain this and many other points with any tolerable
+certainty.--E.]
+
+A great part of the company were for anchoring on this coast, and
+making a descent, but the officers were so intent on proceeding
+for India, that they alleged it might be very dangerous to attempt
+landing, lest any of the men might be cut off, and they should not
+have enough left to carry on the ships. They continued in their
+course, therefore, not doubting that they should soon see the coasts
+of New Britain or New Guinea: But, after sailing many days without
+seeing any land at all, they began to see the vanity of these
+calculations, and could not forbear murmuring at their effects, as
+the scurvy began to cut off three, four, or five of their best hands
+daily. At this time nothing was to be seen but sick people, struggling
+with inexpressible pains, or dead carcasses just relieved from their
+intolerable distress. From these there arose so abominable a stench,
+that even those who were yet sound often fainted away, unable to
+endure it. Cries and groans were incessantly heard in all parts of the
+ships, and the sight of the poor diseased wretches who were still able
+to crawl about, excited horror and compassion. Some were reduced to
+such mere skeletons that their skins seemed to cleave to their bones,
+and these had this consolation, that they gradually consumed away
+without pain. Others were swelled out to monstrous sizes, and were so
+tormented with excruciating pain, as to drive them to furious madness.
+Some were worn away by the dysentery, and others were racked with
+excruciating rheumatism, while others again dragged their dead limbs
+after them, having lost feeling through the palsy. To these
+numerous and complicated diseases of the body, many had superadded
+distemperature of the mind. An anabaptist of twenty-five years old
+called out continually to be baptized, and when told with a sneer that
+there was no parson on board, he became quiet, and died with great
+resignation. Two papists on board gave what little money they had to
+their friends, beseeching them, if they ever got back to Holland, to
+lay it out in masses to St Anthony of Padua for the repose of their
+souls. Others again would listen to nothing that had the smallest
+savour of religion, for some time before they died. Some refused
+meat and drink for twenty-four hours before death, while others were
+suddenly carried off in the midst of conversation.
+
+All these various appearances of disease are attributed by the author
+of this voyage principally to the bad quality of their provisions;
+their salt meat being corrupted, their bread full of maggots, and
+their water intolerably putrid. Under these circumstances medicines
+were of no avail, being utterly unable to work a cure, and could at
+best only defer death for a little, and protract the sufferings of
+the sick. Though as well as any one in either ship, the author of this
+journal had the scurvy to such a degree that his teeth were all loose,
+his gums inflamed and ulcerated, and his body all over covered with
+livid spots. Even such as were reputed in best health, were low, weak,
+and much afflicted with the scurvy. Nothing could effectually relieve
+or even alleviate their sufferings, except fresh meat, vegetables,
+and sweet water. At length it pleased God to put a period to their
+miseries, by giving them sight of the coast of New Britain, the joy of
+which filled the sick with new spirits, and encouraged those who were
+still able to move, with the enlivening hope of once more revisiting
+their native land. Our author was fully of opinion, that if they
+had been many days longer at sea, they must all have perished by the
+continuance and necessary increase of the miseries which they endured,
+which no description can possibly express in any thing like adequate
+terms.
+
+
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_Description of New Britain, and farther Continuation of the Voyage
+till the Arrival of Roggewein at Java._
+
+The country of New Britain, and all the islands in its neighbourhood,
+is composed of very high land, many of the mountains hiding their
+heads in the clouds. The sea coasts are however both pleasant and
+fertile, the low lands being cloathed in perpetual verdure, and the
+hills covered with a variety of trees, mostly bearing fruit. It is
+in lat. between 4 deg.and 7 deg. S.[1] and both in regard to situation and
+appearance, no country can promise better than this. After some
+consultation, it was resolved to go on shore here at all events,
+though now so much reduced by the long-continued sickness, that they
+could hardly muster a sufficient number of men from both ships to man
+a boat, and leave men enough, in case they were cut off, to navigate
+one ship home, supposing them even to sacrifice one of the ships. Yet
+such was the ardent desire of all to get on shore, and so urgent was
+the necessity for that measure, that it appeared indispensable
+to venture on landing, let the consequences be what they might.
+Accordingly, our author was ordered into the boat, with as many men
+as could be spared, with orders to get on shore at any rate, by fair
+means if possible, and with the consent of the inhabitants, for whom
+he carried a great number of baubles to distribute among them as
+presents. If, however, these had no effect, he was then to use force,
+as the circumstances to which they were reduced made it as eligible to
+die by the hands of barbarians as to perish gradually by disease and
+famine.
+
+[Footnote 1: No account is given of this voyage from Bowman's islands,
+perhaps the Fee-jees, as already mentioned, to New Britain, neither
+indeed is it any way expressed on what part of New Britain they had
+now arrived. They probably steered a course N.W. or N.W. by W. from
+the Fee-jees, and fell in with the N.E. part of New Britain, now known
+to be a separate island, and called New Ireland; and by the lower
+latitude mentioned, in the text, they appear to come first to the
+eastern part of New Ireland; but it is impossible to say whether they
+went to the N. or S. of Solomon's island.--E.]
+
+The nearer they drew towards the coast, the more they were delighted
+with its appearance, as giving them a nearer prospect of the
+wished-for refreshments. The inhabitants came down in multitudes to
+the coast, but in such guise as did not by any means increase their
+satisfaction, as they were all armed with bows and arrows and slings,
+and demonstrated sufficiently by their gestures that the Dutch were
+by no means welcome visitors, and that they were not to expect being
+permitted to land peaceably. As the boat approached the shore, the
+natives seemed to become frantic with despair, made frightful faces,
+tore their hair, and howled in a horrible manner; and at length, as
+borrowing courage from the increase of danger, they hurried into
+their canoes and put off from the shore, as if to meet that danger the
+sooner which was evidently unavoidable. As the Dutch continued their
+way towards the land, the natives discharged a flight of arrows at the
+boat, which they followed by throwing their spears or javelins,
+after which they threw in a shower of stones discharged from slings.
+Convinced now that there was nothing to be trusted to but force, the
+Dutch opened their fire, and kept it up with such effect, that many of
+the natives were slain, and the rest so terrified, that great numbers
+of them leapt into the water to swim ashore, and at last all the
+survivors followed the example, by turning their canoes towards the
+land. But such was their confusion and dismay, that they were now
+unable to distinguish the proper channels by which to get back to the
+coast, but ran them on the rocks and shoals. This circumstance almost
+deprived the Dutch of all hopes of being able to attain the coast.
+
+While thus embarrassed, there arose a violent storm, of that kind
+which the Dutch call _traffat_, and which in the east is named a
+_tuffoon_, which usually arises suddenly in the midst of a calm, and
+when the air is perfectly clear and serene, and which, by its extreme
+violence, often brings the masts by the board, and whirls the sails
+into the air, if they are not furled in an instant. By this sudden
+tempest, the two ships were forced out to sea, and the poor people in
+the boat were left without relief, and almost devoid of hope. The boat
+was forced on a sand-bank, where she was for some time so beaten by
+the winds and waves, that there seemed no chance of escaping almost
+instant destruction. But despair often lends strength and spirits to
+men beyond their usual powers; and, by dint of great exertions, they
+dragged their boat clear of the bank, and got to land, where all got
+safe on shore without hurt, but almost exhausted by fatigue. The first
+thing they did was to look out for some place of retreat, where they
+might be safe from any sudden assault of the natives; but night came
+on before any such could be found, so that they were forced to rest
+contented with making a fire on the shore, in order to dry and warm
+themselves, which in some measure revived their spirits. The light
+of the fire enabled them to discover several huts or cabins of the
+natives in the neighbourhood of where they were, on which they felt
+inclined to examine them, but found neither inhabitants nor household
+goods of any kind, all that they met with worth taking away being a
+few nets of curious workmanship. They also saw abundance of cocoa-nut
+trees, but, having no hatchets, were unable to come at any of the
+fruit, and had to pass a most comfortless night, during which they
+were perpetually disturbed and alarmed by the frightful noise of the
+natives in the adjoining wood, whence they naturally concluded they
+were every moment about to attack them. About midnight they heard a
+signal from the ships, which had been able to come back to that
+part of the coast, on which they immediately hastened on board, and
+immediately continued their voyage along the coast of New Britain,
+making their way with considerable difficulty through among numerous
+islands. They named that part of the coast on which they landed,
+_Stormland_, which was probably the same called _Slinger's bay_ by
+Dampier, on account of the dexterity of the natives in the management
+of that instrument.
+
+This country of New Britain seems to be extremely fertile, and to
+abound in fruits of many sorts. The inhabitants are a tall well-made
+people, perfect mulattoes in their complexions, with long black hair
+hanging down to their waists, being extremely nimble and vigorous,
+and so dexterous in the management of their weapons, that in all
+probability they live in a state of continual warfare with their
+neighbours. The sea along the coast is studded with numerous islands,
+so that they had great difficulty in getting a passage through them.
+
+Notwithstanding the dangers they had already experienced, they
+resolved to make another descent upon the coast on the first
+opportunity, though they had not now ten men in both vessels in
+perfect health, but their necessities admitted of no other remedy.
+The stock-fish, on which they had lived for some time past, was now
+so full of worms, and stunk so abominably, that, instead of eating
+it, they were unable to come near it. The officers were unable now
+to pacify the men with stories of relief in the East Indies, for
+they unanimously declared that immediate death on shore would be more
+welcome than living longer at sea in this dreadful condition. In
+this forlorn condition they arrived in the lat. of 2 deg. S. where they
+fortunately fell in with the islands of _Moa_ and _Arimoa_, [2]
+formerly discovered by Schouten, and immediately determined upon
+endeavouring to procure relief from Arimoa, the larger of these
+islands. The natives, on perceiving the approach of the two ships,
+came immediately off to meet them in their canoes, of which they
+had prodigious numbers. All of these people were armed with bows and
+arrows, even their women and children; but they brought with them
+various refreshments, as cocoa-nuts, _pisans_, or Indian figs, with
+various other fruits, and different kinds of roots, rowing directly to
+the ships without any signs of fear or distrust. The Dutch gave them
+such kind of trifles as they had by way of presents, and in return
+for these refreshments; but on shewing more of these, and giving the
+islanders to understand, by signs, that such was the merchandize they
+had to give in barter for refreshments, they looked at them coolly,
+as if they had no desire to trade for such commodities. Next day,
+however, they returned with great quantities of similar articles of
+provision; and the Dutch having endeavoured to express by signs
+that they wished them to bring some hogs, the natives mistook their
+meaning, and brought two or three dogs the day following, to the great
+disappointment of the Dutch.
+
+[Footnote 2: It is utterly impossible to ascertain what islands are
+here meant, as the indications of the voyage are so entirely vague. In
+the indicated latitude, off the mouth of the Great bay, in New Guinea,
+there are two considerable islands, named Mysory, or Schouten's
+island, and Jobie, or Long-island, which may possibly be Arimoa and
+Moa. Perhaps Jobie of our modern maps includes both, as in some more
+recent maps it is laid down as two contiguous islands, and it is more
+exactly in the indicated latitude, while Mysory is rather less than
+one degree from the line.]
+
+These refreshments were very seasonable, and greatly amended the
+health of many of the sick people in the two ships; and our author is
+convinced that most of them would have perfectly recovered in a few
+days, if they could have ventured to live on shore. The islanders
+never failed to invite them ashore every time they came off; but being
+greatly weakened, as for some days they had thrown four or five of
+their people overboard, they did not think it prudent to run so great
+a hazard; more especially as, even in the midst of their civility, the
+air, look, and language of these people seemed to savour of perfidy,
+and besides the island was extremely populous. The Dutch noticed that
+these islanders, always on coming on board their ships, carried a
+piece of stick to which some white stuff was fixed, as if in the
+nature of a flag of truce, whence they supposed they were often at
+war with some neighbouring nation or tribe, and especially with the
+inhabitants of _Moa_, particularly as none of their canoes ever went
+ashore on that island, but always, on the contrary, passed it with
+evident precipitation. These remarks furnished the Dutch with a
+new project by which to acquire a considerable stock of provisions
+speedily, by a sudden descent on Moa, which appeared to be but thinly
+peopled, though as pleasant and fertile as the other, hoping to carry
+off at once enough of provisions to enable them to prosecute their
+voyage, without the risk of falling again into the distress they had
+so lately endured.
+
+This bold scheme required much prudence, and it was thought expedient
+to land in different places at once, one party being directed to
+advance into the country, while the others should be at hand to
+support them, and to secure their retreat. This was accordingly very
+happily effected; for, although the natives formed an ambush behind
+the trees and bushes, and discharged their arrows at the principal
+party as soon as they began to cut down the cocoa-trees, the Dutch
+fortunately remained uninjured, and laid many of the natives dead by
+discharges of their fire-arms. This so frightened the rest that they
+took refuge in their canoes, whence they endeavoured by cries
+and shouts to alarm the rest of their countrymen to come to their
+assistance: But the Dutch were so judiciously posted as to constrain
+them to remain in the mountains, by which means the main party were
+enabled to carry off about 800 cocoa-nuts to their boats, with which
+booty they rejoined their ships.
+
+The _cocoa-tree_ is a species of palm, found in most parts of the East
+and West Indies. The trunk is large, straight, and lofty, tapering
+insensibly to the top, whence the fruit hangs in bunches united by a
+tendril, not unlike the twig of a vine, but stronger. The flowers are
+yellow, resembling those of the chesnut. As it produces new bunches
+every month, there are always some quite ripe, some green, some
+just beginning to button, and others in full flower. The fruit is
+three-lobed and of a greenish hue, of different sizes, from the size
+of an ordinary tennis-ball, to that of a man's head, and is composed
+of two rinds. The outer is composed of long tough fibres, between red
+and yellow colour, the second being a hard shell. Within this is a
+thick firm white substance or kernel, lining the shell, tasting like
+a sweet almond; and in a central hollow of this kernel there is a
+considerable quantity of a clear, bright, cool liquor, tasting like
+sugared water. The natives of the countries in which these trees grow,
+eat the kernel with their victuals instead of bread; and likewise
+extract from it, by pressure, a liquor resembling milk of almonds
+in taste and consistence. When this milk is exposed to the action of
+fire, it changes to a kind of oil, which they use as we do butter
+in dressing their victuals, and also burn in their lamps; and they
+likewise employ it for smearing their bodies. They also draw from the
+tree a liquor called _sura_ by the Indians, and which the Europeans
+name _toddy_, or palm-wine. For this purpose, having cut one of the
+largest twigs about a foot from the body of the tree, they hang to
+this stump a bottle or calabash, into which the sap distils. This
+_sura_ is of a very agreeable taste, little inferior to the Spanish
+white wine; but being strong and heady, is generally diluted with
+fresh clear water got from the nut It does not however keep, as it
+becomes sour in about two days; when, by exposure to the sun, it is
+converted into excellent vinegar. When boiled in its recent state,
+it is converted into another liquor, called _orraqua_ by the Indians;
+from which they distil a spirituous liquor called arrack, which many
+people prefer to the other liquor of the same name distilled from rice
+in India, which is so well known and so much esteemed in Europe.
+
+Besides cocoa-nuts, the Dutch found in Moa great plenty of
+pomegranates of exquisite taste, and abundance of _pisans_ or Indian
+figs. These refreshments were of infinite service to them, as without
+them the whole of both ships companies must have inevitably perished;
+and immediately on returning to their ships, they began to prepare
+for resuming their voyage. While engaged in these preparations, the
+inhabitants of Moa came off to the ships in about 200 canoes, which
+they exchanged with the Dutch for various articles, apparently doing
+this to prevent the Dutch from making a second descent on their
+island: But on this occasion, though the Dutch received them kindly,
+and treated them with fairness in purchasing their provisions, they
+would only admit a few of them into the ships at once; and when the
+islanders attempted to rush on board in crowds, they fired upon them.
+On these occasions, the natives all ducked their heads, and when they
+raised them again broke out into loud laughter. This exchange was no
+sooner over than they weighed anchor and proceeded on their voyage.
+The author of this narrative remarks, that such of the sick as had any
+strength remaining recovered surprisingly at these islands, through
+the excellent refreshments they procured there, while those who were
+already quite exhausted soon died.
+
+Leaving these islands of _Moa_ and _Arimoa_, they continued their
+voyage through a part of the sea so very full of islands, that finding
+it difficult or impossible to count them, they gave them the name of
+_Thousand Isles_.[3] Their inhabitants were negroes, of a short squat
+make, and their heads covered with thick curled wool, being a bold,
+mischievous, and intractable race of savages. They were all naked,
+men, women, and children, having no other ornaments except a belt
+about two fingers broad, stuck fall of teeth, and bracelets of
+the same; and some of them wore light straw hats, adorned with the
+feathers of the _Bird-of-Paradise_. These birds are said to be found
+no where else but in these islands. Such of these islands as are
+situated near the west point of New Guinea are still called the
+_Islands of the Popoes_ or _Papuas_, the continent itself being called
+the _Land of Papua_, till Schouten imposed upon it the name of _New
+Guinea_, chiefly because of its being in the same latitude with _Old
+Guinea_.[4]
+
+[Footnote 3: These appear, by the sequel, to have been the islands
+at the N.W. extremity of Papua or New Guinea, and from thence to
+Celebes--E.]
+
+[Footnote 4: More probably because of its inhabitants being
+negroes.--E.]
+
+When the inhabitants of these islands go to Ternate, Banda, Amboina,
+or any of the Moluccas, in order to sell their salt pork, amber,[5]
+gold-dust, and other merchandise, they always carry some of these
+_Birds-of-Paradise_, which they constantly sell dead, affirming that
+they find them so, and that they know not whence they come or where
+they breed. This bird is always seen very high in the air. It is
+extremely light, as its bulk consists mostly of feathers, which are
+extremely beautiful, rendering it one of the greatest curiosities in
+the world. The plumage of the head is as bright as burnished gold;
+that of the neck resembles the neck of a drake; and those of the wings
+and tail are like those of a peacock. In beak and form, this bird
+comes nearest to a swallow, though considerably larger. Such as deal
+in them endeavour to persuade strangers that they have no feet, and
+that they hang themselves, when they sleep, to the boughs of trees by
+means of their feathers. But, in reality, these traders cut off their
+feet, to render them the more wonderful. They also pretend that the
+male has a cavity on his back, where the female lodges her young till
+they are able to fly. They always cut off the feet of these birds so
+close to the body, that the flesh dries in such a manner that the skin
+and feathers perfectly unite, making it impossible to perceive the
+smallest scar. They also assert, that these birds are perpetually on
+the wing, subsisting on birds and insects, which they catch in the
+air. The feathers of the male are much brighter than those of the
+female. In the east, this bird is usually called _Mancodiata_, or the
+Bird-of-God. Great numbers of them are sent to Batavia, where they
+generally sell for three crowns each. The Moors, Arabians, and
+Persians are anxious to procure these birds, with which they adorn
+their saddles and housings, often mixing with them pearls and
+diamonds. They wear them also in their turbans, especially on going
+to war, having a superstitious notion that they act as a charm or
+talisman, capable of preserving them from wounds. Formerly, the Shah
+and Mogul used to present their favourites with one of these birds, as
+a mark of esteem or favour.
+
+[Footnote 5: Perhaps ambergris ought to be here understood.--E.]
+
+Besides their girdle and bracelets, formerly mentioned, the _Popoes_,
+or inhabitants of the Thousand Isles, wear a bit of stick, the size of
+a tobacco-pipe and the length of a finger, thrust through the gristle
+of the nose, which they think renders them terrible to their enemies,
+as some Europeans consider mustachios. They are the worst and most
+savage people in all the South Seas. The continent of _New Guinea_
+appeared a high country, extremely full of trees and plants of a vast
+variety of kinds, so that, in sailing 400 leagues along its coast,
+they did not observe one barren spot. Our author thinks that it
+probably contains many precious commodities, as rich metals and
+valuable spices, especially as most of the countries hitherto
+discovered under the same parallel are not deficient in such riches.
+He was afterwards assured, that some of the free burgesses in the
+Moluccas go annually to New Guinea, where they exchange small pieces
+of iron for nutmegs. Schouten and other navigators conceived high
+ideas of this country, and represented it as one of the finest and
+richest in the world; but they were unable to penetrate any way into
+the interior, which could not be done with a small force, as it is
+extremely populous, and the natives are mostly well armed, and of a
+martial disposition.
+
+Roggewein and his officers were at this time in considerable doubts,
+whether to prosecute the route formerly followed by Dampier, or to go
+by Ternate, Tidore, and Bacian, as the less dangerous passage. To
+gain time, however, they chose the former, as they most otherwise
+have coasted round the last-mentioned islands, in their way to the
+Moluccas. In this view, they steered along shore, or rather through an
+innumerable chain of small islands, extending from the western point
+of New Guinea to the island of Gilolo, making their passage with much
+difficulty and danger, and were greatly delighted and astonished on
+getting sight of the island of _Bouro_, in lat. 2 deg. S. [3 deg. 30' S. and
+long. 127 deg. E.] the most eastern country in which the Dutch East-India
+Company, maintain a factory. This island is mostly pretty high land,
+and abounds every where with trees and shrubs of various kinds. On
+their arrival upon its coast, they were spoken with by a small vessel,
+in which were two white men and several blacks. The white men examined
+them very strictly to whom they belonged, whence they came, and
+whither they were bound. To which they answered, that they came from
+New Guinea, and were going to Batavia, but wisely concealed belonging
+to the West-India Company, knowing that the East-India Company
+permitted no vessels, except their own, to navigate these seas, and
+had given strict orders to capture all strange vessels that might
+appear there. Yet, in spite of these precautions, the English
+sometimes find their way among these islands, to the no small
+displeasure of the Dutch company, although they keep ships cruizing
+here during both monsoons, to preserve their monopoly of spices.
+
+The island of _Bouro_ is about forty or fifty leagues in
+circumference, and is indifferently fertile, formerly producing
+abundance of clove-trees; but a detachment of Dutch soldiers is sent
+yearly to grub them up, as they do also in the other Molucca islands,
+because Amboina is thought to produce enough of that commodity to
+maintain their commerce. Formerly also the Dutch had a strong fort
+here, which the natives took and demolished after a long siege,
+putting all the garrison to the sword. At present, [in 1721,]
+the company only sends a detachment of soldiers to root out the
+clove-trees, for which the inhabitants receive some present. The two
+whites who were on board this Dutch bark were the first Christians
+seen by Roggewein for the space of ten months, or since leaving the
+coast of Brazil. Continuing their course for the island of _Bootan_,
+in hopes of meeting with refreshments, of which they were now in
+extreme want, they arrived there in lat 4 deg. S.[6] and sailed along its
+coast for a whole day, in hopes of finding the strait for which they
+sought, and at length found they were eight leagues to leeward of
+it, and the monsoon now blew too strong to be able to bear up for the
+intended port. They had now no hopes of being able to find any port
+for refreshments till they should arrive at the island of Java; as,
+wherever they might attempt to land, they well knew that their ships
+would be confiscated, in consequence of the invariable maxims of the
+East-India Company. All men therefore, but especially the sick and
+feeble, cast an anxious look on the fertile island now left behind
+them, presaging the melancholy effects which must necessarily attend
+so pernicious a measure.
+
+[Footnote 6: The northern end of Bootan is in lat. 4 deg. 40' S.]
+
+The situation of the island of _Bootan_ is remarkably advantageous,
+being in from 4 deg. to 6 deg. of S. latitude, and nearly equal in size to the
+island of _Bouro_. It is extremely fertile, especially in rice, and
+has abundance of cattle and fish. It would also produce plenty both
+of clove and nutmeg trees, if they were permitted to grow. The king
+of the island has a very strong fort, on which the Dutch standard is
+displayed, though there is no Dutch garrison; the company contenting
+itself with sending deputies yearly to see the spice trees destroyed,
+in consideration of which the king receives a considerable sum
+yearly from the company. This nation is the most faithful of all the
+inhabitants of the Indian islands to the India company, having not
+only assisted them in expelling the Portuguese, but also against the
+inhabitants of the Moluccas, whenever they have attempted to revolt;
+by which means the company has acquired the whole trade of this part
+of the world. In consideration of this, the inhabitants of Bootan
+enjoy many privileges that are denied to all other Indians: As, for
+instance, they are allowed to come into any of the Dutch forts armed,
+which is never allowed even to the natives of the countries in which
+the forts are situated. Some time before this voyage, the king of
+Bootan sent his eldest son ambassador to the governor-general
+of Batavia, where he was received with every mark of honour and
+distinction. It would not have been easy to have known this prince for
+an Indian, had he not worn a triple-rowed turban, richly adorned
+with gold and precious stones, as the rest of his dress was entirely
+European, and he wore a sword instead of a cutlass, which no Indian
+had done before. His train was numerous and splendid, all dressed
+in the Indian manner: Twelve of them were armed with cuirasses and
+bucklers, carrying each a naked sword resting on his shoulder. At this
+time there was a prodigious mortality in Batavia, which carried off
+500 of the attendants of this prince, and destroyed no less than
+150,000 persons in one year, besides vast numbers of beasts. This
+mortality was occasioned by a malignant pestilential fever, which
+attacked indiscriminately all the inhabitants of Batavia, Europeans,
+natives, Chinese, and blacks. It spread also through Bengal and all
+the dominions of the Great Mogul, where it made incredible ravages,
+and extended even to Japan in the most extreme violence, where numbers
+fell down dead in the streets, who had left their houses in perfect
+health. This dreadful malady was supposed to have arisen from
+excessive drought, as no rain had fallen during the space of two
+years, whence it was conceived that the air was surcharged with
+mineral vapours.
+
+Leaving the island of Bootan, and passing through the channel of
+the Moluccas, or between the S.W. leg of Celebes and Salayr
+islands, during which course the crews of the two vessels suffered
+inexpressible miseries, by which the greatest part of them were
+carried off, Roggewein arrived on the coast of Java towards the close
+of September 1722.
+
+
+
+SECTION VII.
+
+_Occurrences from their Arrival at the Island of Java, to the
+Confiscation of the Ships at Batavia._
+
+Roggewein came to anchor immediately in the road of Japara, and
+saluted the city and fort, after which the boats were hoisted out to
+go on shore, where they were astonished to find that it was Saturday,
+whereas on quitting their ships they conceived it to be Friday
+morning. This was occasioned by having come round from the east
+along with the sun, by which they had lost a day in their reckoning.
+Roggewein immediately waited upon Ensign Kuster, a very civil and
+well-behaved gentleman, who commanded there on the part of the
+East-India Company, to whom he gave an account of his motives for
+coming to this place. Kuster immediately assembled a council, to
+consider what measures were to be taken on this occasion, and all
+were much moved at the recital of the miseries which Roggewein and
+his people had endured. In truth, never were men more worthy of
+compassion. Only ten persons remained in any tolerable health, and
+twenty-six were down in various sicknesses, by which, exclusive of
+those who had been slain in their different engagements with the
+Indians, they had lost seventy men during the voyage. Their next care
+was to get the sick men on shore, which was done with all care and
+diligence, slinging them in their hammocks into the boats. Four of
+these poor people were in so low a condition that it was thought
+impossible they could bear removal, and they were therefore left on
+board, the very thoughts of which, after their companions went ashore,
+soon killed them. Those who were carried on shore were lodged under
+tents in an island, where they had every necessary afforded them that
+the country produced, yet many of them died.
+
+Mr Kuster sent an immediate account of their arrival to the
+commandant of the coasts of Java, who instantly forwarded it to Mr
+_Swaardekroon_, at that time governor-general of the East Indies. He
+sent a favourable answer, promising every assistance in his power, and
+adding, that they had nothing to do but to get to Batavia as soon as
+possible. While waiting the answer of the governor-general and the
+recovery of their sick, they passed their time agreeably enough at
+Japara, as their countrymen used them with all imaginable kindness.
+In a few days, the seamen became as frolicsome and gay as if they had
+made a pleasant and fortunate voyage; insomuch, that those who, only
+a few days before, were weeping, sighing, praying, and making warm
+protestations of leading new lives, if God in his mercy were pleased
+to save them, now ran headlong into the greatest extravagances;
+spending their whole time in debauched houses, and in swearing and
+drinking. This our author attributed to the bad example of those among
+whom they lived, all the lower people at Japara being as lewd and
+profligate as could be imagined; insomuch, that the first question
+they put to strangers from Europe is, if they have brought over any
+new oaths.
+
+The town of _Japara_ is seated at the bottom of a mountain of moderate
+height, is of a middling size, and is inhabited by Javans, Chinese,
+and Dutch; and was of more considerable extent than now, when in the
+hands of the Portuguese. Before getting possession of Jacatra, now
+Batavia, the Dutch East-India Company had their principal magazines
+for trade at this place, which was their chief factory, and on which
+all the other factories in Java were dependent; but it has fallen much
+in importance since the factory was transferred to Samarang. The port
+of Japara is both safe and commodious, and is defended by a fort,
+built mostly of wood, on the top of the mountain at the foot of which
+the town is seated. This fort is called the _Invincible Mountain_,
+because the Javanese were constantly defeated in all their attempts to
+get it into their hands, when in possession of the Portuguese; and its
+guns command the whole road.
+
+The king of Japara mostly resides at a place called _Kattasura_, about
+twenty-nine leagues up the country, where the Dutch have a strong
+fort with a good garrison, serving at the same time to secure their
+conquest, and to guard the king. This prince is a Mahomedan, and is
+served entirely by women, of whom he takes as many as he pleases,
+either as wives or concubines. Some of his priests are obliged to
+go every year on pilgrimage to Mecca, in order to make vows for the
+safety and prosperity of the king and royal family. His subjects are
+extremely faithful, and devoted to his service; the principal persons
+of his court having to approach him on their knees, every time they
+have an audience; but in time of war, this slavish custom is dispensed
+with. Such as commit the slightest fault, are poniarded on the spot by
+a kriss or dagger; this being almost the only punishment in use among
+them, as the smallest faults and the greatest crimes are all equally
+capital. The natives of this country are mostly of a very brown
+complexion, tolerably well shaped, and having long black hair, which
+however many of them cut short. Their noses are all flat and broad,
+and their teeth very black, owing to the incessant chewing of betel
+and faufel.
+
+The _faufel_ or _areka_ is a kind of nut, not much unlike a nutmeg,
+but smaller, and in a great measure tasteless, but yielding a red
+juice when chewed, which juice also is used by the Indians in painting
+chintzes, so much admired in Europe. The tree which bears this nut is
+very straight, and has leaves like those of the cocoa-nut tree. The
+_betel_ is a plant producing long rank leaves, shaped like those of
+the citron, and having an agreeable bitter taste. The fruit of this
+plant resembles a lizard's tail, and is about an inch and half long,
+having a pleasant aromatic flavour. The Indians continually carry
+the leaves of this plant, which also are presented at all ceremonious
+visits. They are almost continually chewing these leaves, and they
+mostly qualify their extreme bitterness by the addition of the faufel
+or areka-nut, and the powder of calcined oyster-shells, which give
+them a very agreeable taste; though some mix their betel leaves with
+shell lime, ambergris, and cardamom seeds, while others use Chinese
+tobacco. After all the juice is chewed out, they throw away the
+remaining dry mass. Many Europeans have got into the habit of chewing
+betel, so that they cannot leave it off, though it has proved fatal to
+some of them; for the natives are very skilful in preparing betel so
+as to do a man's business as effectually as a pistol or a dagger.
+
+The prevailing diversion among these people is called _tandakes_,
+which are a kind of comedies, acted by women very richly dressed, and
+consists chiefly in singing and dancing, accompanied by music, not
+very pleasant to European ears, the only instruments being small
+drums, on which they beat with much dexterity. Their dancing is mostly
+of a grotesque kind, in which they are very dexterous, throwing
+their bodies into all sorts of postures with astonishing agility, and
+expressing by them the passions of the mind so comically, that it is
+impossible to refrain from laughing. The men also practise a kind
+of war dance, in which the king and grandees bear a part. They also
+practise cock-fighting, like the English, and bet such considerable
+sums on this sport as often beggars them.
+
+The country abounds in all the necessaries of life, having abundance
+of beeves and hogs, and amazing quantities of fowls. The only thing
+scarce is mutton, chiefly owing to the richness of the pasture,
+which is very apt to burst the sheep. As to wild animals, they have
+buffaloes, stags, tygers, and rhinoceroses; which last animal is
+hunted by the Indians chiefly for the sake of its horns, of which they
+make drinking cups that are greatly valued, owing to a notion that
+they will not contain poison, but break immediately on that being
+poured into them. The high price of these tends to shew that the
+Javanese are addicted to the infamous practice of poisoning. The land
+is every where extremely fertile, producing vast abundance of pepper,
+ginger, cinnamon, rice, cardamoms, and other valuable articles. Of
+late they have planted coffee, and with such success as to have a
+reasonable hope of rendering it a principal commodity of the country.
+Cocoa-nuts, figs, and a variety of other excellent fruits grow every
+where in the greatest profusion; and as the trees on which they grow
+are verdant during the whole year, and are planted in rows along the
+rivers, they form the most agreeable walks that can be conceived.
+Sugar-canes also abound in Java. They have also plenty of vines, which
+produce ripe grapes seven times every year, but they are only fit
+for making raisins, and not wine, being too hastily ripened by the
+climate. The sea, and all the rivers, furnish an infinite variety of
+the finest fish. Thus, taking it altogether, it may be safely affirmed
+that Java is one of the most plentiful and pleasantest islands in the
+world.
+
+Having refreshed at Japara for about a month, Roggewein began to
+think of proceeding to Batavia, encouraged by the fine promises of the
+governor-general. Every thing being ready, the voyagers spent two
+days in taking leave of their kind friends, who supplied them with all
+sorts of provisions, much more than sufficient for so short a voyage,
+and they at length departed, feeling a sensible regret at parting with
+those who had treated them with so much kindness, relieving all their
+wants with so much generosity, and had enabled them to spend several
+weeks in peace and plenty, after a long period of sickness and misery.
+Steering from thence about seventy leagues to the westwards, with a
+fair wind, they entered the road of Batavia, where they saluted the
+fort, and anchored close to the ships that were loading for the voyage
+home, believing that all their distresses were now over, and that they
+should speedily accompany these other ships homewards. As soon as
+the ships were safely anchored, Roggewein went along with the other
+captains into his boat, meaning to have gone ashore to Batavia, but
+had not proceeded far from the ship when he met a boat having the
+commandant of Batavia on board, together with the fiscal, and some
+other members of the council, by whom he was desired to go back to his
+ship, which he did immediately; and, when the two boats came within
+hearing of the ships, the fiscal proclaimed, with a loud voice, that
+both ships were confiscated by order of the governor-general. At this
+time both ships were so environed by other large vessels belonging
+to the East India Company, that it was impossible to have escaped,
+if they had so inclined; and soon afterwards several hundred soldiers
+came on board, taking possession of both ships, and placing their
+crews under safe custody. Taught by so many and such unlooked-for
+misfortunes, Roggewein now thoroughly repented having proposed to
+return home by way of the East Indies, but was now wise behind hand.
+He had neglected prosecuting the discovery on which he had been
+sent, for which he now suffered a just punishment from the East India
+Company, however unjust in itself the sentence might be considered. By
+the sentence, both ships were declared legal prizes, and all the goods
+they contained were confiscated; and to prevent all trouble and delay
+from representations, reclamations, or memorials, every thing was
+immediately exposed to public auction, and sold to the highest
+bidders. The crews of both ships were divided, and put on board
+several of the homeward-bound ships.
+
+
+
+SECTION VIII.
+
+_Description of Batavia and the Island of Java, with some Account of
+the Government of the Dutch East India Company's Affairs._
+
+The city of Batavia lies in the lat. of 6 deg. 20' S. and long. 107 deg. E.
+from Greenwich, being the capital of all the vast dominions belonging
+to the Dutch East India Company, serving also as the emporium of
+its prodigious trade, where all the merchandise and riches of that
+princely and wealthy company are laid up. It fell into the hands of
+the Dutch company in 1618, till which time it was known by the name of
+_Jacatra_, and soon afterwards they built a fort in the neighbourhood
+of that native city, to which they gave the name of Batavia. By the
+time this was hardly well finished, the natives of the island attacked
+it, animated and assisted by the English, and repeated their attempts
+several times, but always unsuccessfully, and to their great loss.
+The last time, they kept it blockaded for a considerable time, till
+succoured by a powerful squadron from Europe under Admiral Koen, when
+the siege was immediately raised, and the natives obliged to retire
+with the utmost precipitation. The Dutch had now leisure to consider
+the excellent situation of the fort, and the many advantages it
+possessed for becoming the centre of their East Indian trade and
+dominion, on which they resolved to build a town in the neighbourhood
+of the fort. With this view they demolished Jacatra, and erected on
+its ruins this famous commercial city, which they named Batavia.
+
+This city arrived at perfection in a short time, by the extraordinary
+diligence bestowed upon its construction, in spite of the many
+obstacles it met with from the two kings of Matarana and Bantam; the
+former of whom laid siege to it in 1629, and the latter in 1649. It
+is surrounded by an earthen rampart of twenty-one feet thick, faced on
+the outside with stone, and strengthened by twenty-two bastions, the
+whole environed by a ditch forty-five yards wide, and quite full of
+water, especially in spring-tides. All the approaches to the town are
+defended by several detached forts, all of which are well furnished
+with excellent brass cannon. Six of these are so considerable as
+to deserve being particularly mentioned, which are, Ansiol, Anke,
+Jacatra, Ryswyk, Noordywyk, and Vythock. The fort of _Ansiol_ is
+seated on a river of the same name, to the eastwards, and about 1200
+yards from the city, being built entirely of squared stone, and always
+provided with a strong garrison. _Anke_ is on a river of the same
+name, to the westwards, about 500 yards from the city, and is built
+like the former. _Jacatra_ lies also on a river of the same name, and
+is exactly like the two former, being 500 paces from the city. The
+road to this fort lies between two regular rows of fine trees, having
+very fine country houses and gardens on each side. The other three
+forts are all built of similar materials on the inland side of the
+city, and at small distances; the two first-named serving to secure
+the city on the side of the sea, and the other four to defend the
+approaches towards it from the land, and at the same time to protect
+the country houses, plantations, and gardens of the inhabitants.
+By these, all enemies are prevented from coming upon the city by
+surprise, as on every side they would be sure to meet a formidable
+resistance; and besides, no person is allowed to pass the forts, even
+outwards, unless with a passport.
+
+The river of Jacatra passes through the middle of the city, and
+supplies water to fifteen canals, all faced with freestone, and
+adorned on each side with ever-green trees, affording a charming
+prospect. Over these canals, which are all within the city, there are
+fifty-six bridges, besides others without the town. The streets are
+all perfectly straight, and are in general thirty feet broad on each
+side, besides the breadth of the canals. The houses are built of
+stone, mostly of several stories high, like those in the cities of
+Holland. The city of Batavia is about a league and a half in circuit,
+but is surrounded by a vast number of houses without the walls, which
+may be considered as forming suburbs, and in which there is ten times
+the population that is within the city. It has five gates, including
+that leading to the port, near to which there is a boom, or barrier,
+which is shut every night at nine o'clock, and at which there is a
+strong guard of soldiers night and day. There were formerly six
+gates, but one of these has since been walled up. There is a very fine
+stadt-house, or town-hall, and four churches for the Calvinists. The
+first of these, named _Kruist-kirk_, or Cross-church, was built in
+1640, and the second in 1672, and in both of these the worship is
+in the Dutch language. The third church belongs to the _protestant_
+Portuguese, and the fourth is for the Malays who have been converted
+to the reformed Christian religion. Besides these, there are abundance
+of other places of worship for various sorts of religions.
+
+They have likewise in this city a _Spin-hays_, or house of correction
+for the confinement of disorderly women; an orphan-house, and arsenal
+of marine stores, and many magazines for spiceries: Also many wharfs,
+docks, rope-walks, and other public buildings. The garrison usually
+consists of from two to three thousand men. Besides the forts formerly
+mentioned, the famous citadel or castle of Batavia is a fine regular
+fortification, having four bastions, situated at the mouth of the
+river opposite to the city; two of its bastions fronting towards the
+sea and commanding the anchorage, while the other two face towards
+the city. There are two main gates to the citadel, one called the
+Company's gate, which was built in 1636, to which leads a stone bridge
+of fourteen arches, each of which is twenty-six feet span, and ten
+feet wide. The other is called the Water-gate. Besides which, there
+are two posterns, one in the east curtain, and the other in the
+west, neither of which are ever opened except for the purposes of the
+garrison. In this citadel the governor-general resides, having a brick
+palace two stories high, with a noble front of Italian architecture.
+Opposite to this palace is that of the director-general, who is next
+in rank to the governor. The counsellors and other principal officers
+of the company have also their apartments within the citadel, together
+with the chief physician, chief surgeon, and chief apothecary. There
+in also a remarkably neat and light small church, and there are many
+magazines and store-houses well furnished with ammunition and military
+stores; and in it are the offices in which all the affairs of the
+company are transacted, and archives for containing all the records.
+
+Besides many Dutch, all of whom are either in the service of the
+company or free burgesses, the city is inhabited by a vast number
+of people of many different Indian nations, besides many Portuguese,
+French, and other Europeans, established here on account of trade. The
+Portuguese are mostly descendants of those who lived formerly here or
+at Goa, and who, finding their account in living under the government
+of the Dutch, did not think proper to remove after the Dutch had
+reduced the country; but far the greater number of these are now of
+the reformed religion. The Indian inhabitants consist of Javanese, or
+natives of the island, Chinese, Malays, negroes, Amboinese, Armenians,
+natives of the island of Bali, Mardykers, Macassars, Bougis, and
+others. It is a very curious thing to see so great a multitude of
+different nations all living in the same great city, and each nation
+according to their own manners. Every moment one sees new customs,
+strange manners, varieties of dresses, and faces of different colours,
+as black, white, brown, yellow, and olive-coloured; every one living
+as he pleases, and all speaking their different languages. Yet, amidst
+all this variety of people and customs so opposite to each other,
+there is a surprising unity among the citizens, occasioned by the
+advantages of commerce, the common object of all, so that they live
+harmoniously and happily under the gentle and prudent laws established
+by the company. All enjoy perfect liberty of conscience, whatever may
+be their religion or sect, only that none are permitted the public
+exercise of their religion except the Calvinists, any more than in
+Holland, so that priests and monks must not walk the streets in the
+habits of their respective orders. All are however allowed to live
+here in peace, and may exercise the rites of their religion within
+doors. Jesuits are, however, excluded, for fear of their intrigues;
+and the Chinese religion, because of its abominable idolatry, is
+obliged to have its pagoda, or idol temple, about a league from the
+city, where also they bury their dead.
+
+Every Indian nation settled at Batavia has its chief or head, who
+watches over the interests of his nation, but is not allowed to decide
+upon any thing of importance, his chief functions being those of
+religion, and to decide slight controversies among his countrymen. The
+_Japanese_ chiefly addict themselves to agriculture, ship-building,
+and fishing. These people, for the most part, only wear a kind of
+short petticoat, reaching to their knees, all the rest of their
+bodies being naked, having also a sort of scarf or sash across their
+shoulders, from which hangs a short sword. On their heads they wear
+small bonnets. Their huts or cabins are remarkably neater than those
+of the other Indians, built of split bamboos, with large spreading
+roofs, under which they sit in the open air.
+
+The _Chinese_ are very numerous, as it is reckoned there are at least
+five thousand of them in the city and its suburbs. These people seem
+naturally born for trade, and are great enemies to idleness, thinking
+nothing too hard or laborious that is attended with a prospect of
+gain. They can live on very little, are bold, enterprising, possessed
+of much address, and indefatigably industrious. Their sagacity,
+penetration, and subtilty, are so extraordinary as to make good their
+own saying, "That the Dutch have only one eye, while they have two;"
+but they are deceitful beyond measure, taking a pride in imposing on
+those who deal with them, and even boast of that cunning of which they
+ought to be ashamed. In husbandry and navigation they surpass all the
+other nations of India. Most of the sugar-mills around Batavia belong
+to them, and the distillery of arrack is entirely in their hands. They
+are the carriers of eastern Asia, and even the Dutch often make use
+of their vessels. They keep all the shops and most of the inns of
+Batavia, and farm all the duties of excise and customs. Generally
+speaking, they are well-made men, of an olive complexion, their heads
+being peculiarly round, with small eyes, and short flat noses. They
+do not cut their hair, as all in China are obliged to do since the
+Tartars conquered the country; and whenever any one comes to Batavia
+from China, he immediately suffers his hair to grow, as a token
+of freedom, dressing it with the utmost care; their priests only
+excepted, whose heads are all close shaven.
+
+The Chinese go always bare headed, carrying an umbrella in their hands
+to keep off the sun; and they suffer their nails to grow immoderately
+long, which gives them prodigious dexterity in slight of hand, an art
+of considerable importance as they use it. Their dress here differs
+materially from what they wear in their own country, their cotton
+robes being very ample, and their sleeves very wide. Below this they
+have a kind of breeches reaching to their ancles, having a kind
+of little slippers on their feet instead of shoes, and never wear
+stockings. Their women, who are very brisk, lively, impudent, and
+debauched, wear very long cotton robes. In general, the Chinese have
+no distinction of meats, but eat without ceremony of any animal that
+comes to hand, be it even dog, cat, or rat, or what it may. They are
+amazingly fond of shows and entertainments. Their feast of the new
+year, which they celebrate in the beginning of March, commonly lasts
+a whole month; during which they do nothing but divert themselves,
+chiefly in dancing, which they do in a strange manner, running round
+about to the sound of gongs, flutes, and trumpets, which do not form a
+very agreeable concert. They use the same music at their comedies,
+or theatrical diversions, of which they are extremely fond: These
+comedies consist of a strange mixture of drama, opera, and pantomime,
+as they sometimes sing, sometimes speak, and at other times the whole
+business of the scene consists in gesture. They have none but _women_
+players,[1] who are brought up to this employment from their infancy;
+but many of them act male parts, using proper disguises for the
+purpose. Whenever they act a comedy, the city receives fifty crowns
+for a licence. They erect the theatre in the street, in front of the
+house of him who is at the expence of the play, the subject of
+which always turns on the exploits of their ancient heroes, or the
+austerities of their old saints.
+
+[Footnote 1: This may possibly have been the case at this time in
+Batavia; but we are assured by recent travellers in China, that they
+have there none but _men_ players, the female parts being acted by
+youths.--E.]
+
+The funerals of the Chinese are very singular, as well as very rich
+and pompous, forming grand and solemn processions, in which sometimes
+at least 500 persons of both sexes assist, the women being all
+cloathed in white. At these funerals they employ music to heighten the
+shew, together with coloured umbrellas and canopies, carrying their
+principal idol, which they call _Joostie de Batavia_, under one of
+their canopies. Their tombs are some of them very magnificent. They
+follow the idolatrous religion of their native country, and have a
+pagoda, or idol temple, about the distance of a league from the
+city, where they assemble for worship. They are perhaps the grossest
+idolaters, and the most ridiculous in their opinions, of all the
+pagans of the east, as they openly profess to worship and adore the
+devil. This does not proceed from their ignorance or unbelief in a
+God, but rather from mistaken notions in their belief concerning him.
+They say that God is infinitely good and merciful, giving to man every
+thing he possesses, and never doing any hurt; and therefore that there
+is no need to worship him. But with the devil, the author of all ill,
+they are desirous to live upon good terms, and to omit nothing that
+can entitle them to his good graces. It is the devil therefore whom
+they represent by the idol above mentioned, and in whose honour they
+have frequently great feasts and rejoicings.
+
+Like the Javans, the Chinese are extravagantly addicted to gaming
+and laying wagers; and this humour, especially at cock-fights and the
+new-year's feasts, drives them sometimes into downright madness.
+They will not only stake and lose their money, goods, and houses, but
+sometimes their wives and children; and when these are all lost, will
+stake their beards, nails, and winds; that is, they bind themselves
+not to shave their beards, pare their nails, or go on board ship to
+trade, till they have paid their game debts. When reduced to this
+condition, they are forced to hire themselves as the bond slaves of
+some other Chinese. Under such misfortunes their only resource is,
+that some relative, either at Batavia or China, pays their debts out
+of compassion, and by that means reinstates them in their property and
+freedom.
+
+The _Malays_ who live at Batavia usually employ themselves in fishing,
+having very neat and shewy vessels, the sails of which are most
+ingeniously constructed of straw. These are a most wicked and
+profligate people, who often commit atrocious murders for very
+trifling gain. They profess the Mahomedan religion, but are so
+absolutely devoid of moral principle, that they even make a boast and
+merit of cheating Christians. Their last chief was publicly whipped
+and branded for his frauds and villainies, his goods confiscated, and
+he himself banished to Ceylon; since when they have been ashamed
+to elect another chief. Their habits are of silk or cotton, the men
+wearing a piece of cotton round their heads, and their black hair tied
+into a knot behind.
+
+The blacks or negroes at Batavia are mostly Mahomedans, who come
+chiefly from Bengal, dressing like the Malays, and living in the same
+quarter of the city. Some of them work at different mechanic trades,
+and others are a kind of pedlars; but the most considerable of them
+trade in stones for buildings, which they bring from the neighbouring
+islands.
+
+The _Amboinese_ are chiefly employed in building houses of bamboos,
+the windows of which are made of split canes, very nicely wrought in
+various figures. They are a bold boisterous race, and so turbulent
+that they are not permitted to reside in the city, but have their
+quarter near the Chinese burying ground. The chief of their own
+nation, to whom they pay the utmost submission, has a magnificent
+house in their quarter, well furnished after their manner. Their arms
+are chiefly large sabres and long bucklers. The men wear a piece of
+cotton cloth wrapped round their heads, the ends of which hang down
+behind, and adorn this species of turban with a variety of flowers.
+Their women wear a close habit, and a cotton mantle over their
+shoulders, having their arms bare. Their houses are built of boards,
+thatched with leaves, usually two or three stories high, the ground
+floor especially being divided into several apartments.
+
+The _Mardykers_ or _Topasses_ are idolaters from various Indian
+nations, and follow various trades and professions; and their
+merchants, under licences or passports from the company, carry on
+considerable commerce among the neighbouring islands. Some of these
+people are gardeners, others rear cattle, and others breed fowls. The
+men of this mixed tribe generally dress after the Dutch fashion, but
+the women wear the habits of other Indians. These people dwell both
+in the city and country, their houses being better than those of the
+other Indians, built of stone or brick, several stories high, and very
+neat. There are also some _Macassers_ at Batavia, so famous for their
+little poisoned arrows, which they blow from tubes. This poison is
+made of the juice of a certain tree, which grows in Macasser and the
+_Bougis_ islands, into which they dip the points of the arrows and
+allow them to dry. The wound inflicted by these arrows is absolutely
+mortal. The _Bougis_ are natives of three or four islands near
+Macasser, and since the conquest of that island have settled at
+Batavia. They are very bold and hardy fellows, for which reason they
+are employed as soldiers by the company. Their arms are bows and
+arrows, with sabres and bucklers. Besides these enumerated nations,
+which contribute to form the population of Batavia, there are several
+Armenians and some other Asiatics who reside there occasionally for
+the sake of trade, and stay no longer than their affairs require, All
+the inhabitants around Batavia, and for a track of about forty leagues
+along the mountains of the country of Bantam, are immediately subject
+to the governor-general, who sends _drossards_ or commissaries among
+them, to administer justice, and to collect the public revenues; and
+the chief men of the several districts resort at certain times to
+Batavia, to give an account of the behaviour of these commissaries.
+
+The city of Batavia, and all the dominions possessed by the company in
+the East Indies, are governed by two supreme councils, one of which is
+named the Council of the Indies, and the other the Council of Justice,
+both of which are fixed at Batavia, the capital of the dominions
+belonging to the company. To the first of these belong all matters
+of government, and the entire direction of public affairs, and to
+the other the administration of justice in all its branches. The
+governor-general always presided in the former of these councils,
+which is ordinarily composed of eighteen or twenty persons, called
+counsellors of the Indies; but it seldom happens that these are all
+at Batavia at one time, as they are usually promoted to the seven
+governments which are at the disposal of the company. This council
+assembles regularly twice a-week, besides as often extraordinarily as
+the governor pleases. They deliberate on all affairs concerning the
+interest of the company, and superintend the government of the island
+of Java and its dependencies: But in affairs of very great importance,
+the approbation and consent of the directors of the company in Europe
+must be had. From this Council of the Indies, orders and instructions
+are sent to all the other governments, which must be implicitly
+obeyed. In this council, all letters addressed to the governor or
+director-general are read and debated, and answers agreed upon by a
+plurality of voices.
+
+The Council of Justice consists of a president, who is generally a
+counsellor of the Indies, together with eight counsellors of justice,
+a fiscal or attorney-general for affairs of government, another fiscal
+for maritime affairs, and a secretary. The first fiscal has a vote
+along with the counsellors, and receives a third part of all fines
+below an hundred florins, and a sixth part of all above that sum.
+The duty of his office is to observe that the laws are obeyed, and to
+prefer informations against those who break them. The fiscal of the
+sea has jurisdiction over all frauds committed in commerce, in cases
+of piracy, or in whatever tends to disturb the settled rules of
+maritime affairs. Besides these sovereign tribunals, there is a
+council of the city of Batavia, consisting of nine burgomasters or
+aldermen, including a president, who is always a member of the Council
+of the Indies, and a vice-president. The bailiff of the city, and the
+commissary of the adjacent territory, have also seats in this council,
+to which likewise there is a secretary.
+
+The governor-general is head of the empire belonging to the company in
+India, being as it were stadtholder, captain-general, and admiral of
+the Indies. By his office he is president of the supreme council, in
+which he has two voices. He has the keys of all the magazines, and
+directs every thing belonging to them, without being accountable to
+any one. He commands by his own proper authority, and every person is
+bound to obey him, so that his authority equals, and even surpasses,
+that of several European sovereigns. But he is accountable to, and
+removeable by the directors at home. In cases, however, of being
+guilty of treason, or any other enormous crime, the Council of Justice
+have a right to seize his person and call him to account. In case the
+governor-general dies or resigns his office, the Council of the Indies
+meets and elects a successor, when they immediately write to the
+directors at home, desiring them to confirm and approve their choice.
+They also write to the same purpose to the states-general of the
+United Provinces, who have reserved to themselves the power of
+confirming or excluding a governor-general. It is usual, however, for
+the directors and the state to confirm the choice of the council, and
+to send him letters patent, conformable to the desire of the council;
+yet there have been some instances of the directors rejecting the
+governor-general thus elected, and sending out another.
+
+The salary allowed by the company to the governor-general is 800
+rix-dollars, with other 500 dollars for his table, and also pay the
+salaries of the officers of his household. But these appointments form
+a very small portion of his revenue; as the legal emoluments of his
+office are so great that he is able to amass an immense fortune in
+two or three years, without oppressing the people or burdening his
+conscience. Being the head and apparent sovereign of all the countries
+belonging to or dependent upon the company, he is allowed a court and
+most of the honours usually paid to crowned heads, in compliance with
+the customs of the east. When he goes from his palace to his country
+seat, he is preceded by the master of his household, at the head
+of six gentlemen on horseback. A trumpeter and two halberdeers on
+horseback go immediately before the coach. The master of the horse and
+six mounted halberdeers ride on the right; and he is followed by
+other coaches carrying his friends and retinue. The whole cavalcade is
+closed by a troop of forty-eight dragoons, commanded by a captain and
+three quarter-masters, and preceded by a trumpeter richly clothed. If
+this office be considerable for its honour, power, and emolument,
+it is also very fatiguing, as the governor-general is employed from
+morning to night in giving audiences, in reading letters, and in
+giving orders in the service of the company; so that he seldom can
+allow above half an hour for dinner, and even dispatches pressing
+affairs while at table. He has also to receive all Indian princes and
+ambassadors who come to Batavia, and of these many arrive every year.
+
+The director-general is the next in authority after the
+governor-general, and is the second person in the council of the
+Indies. This employment requires great care and attention, as he has
+the charge of buying and selling all the commodities that enter into
+or go out from the Company's warehouses. He gives orders for the kinds
+and quantities of all goods sent to Holland or elsewhere, keeps the
+keys of all the magazines, and every officer in the service of the
+Company makes a report to him daily of every thing committed to their
+charge. He has the supreme direction of every thing relative to the
+trade and commerce of the Company, both at Batavia and all other
+places; and the members of all the factories belonging to the Company
+are accountable to him for their conduct.
+
+The third person in the government is the Major-general, who has the
+command of all the forces under the governor-general. The number of
+regular troops in the service of the Company throughout the Indies may
+be about 12,000 men, exclusive of the militia, which amount to about
+100,000 more, and are well disciplined, and always called out in time
+of danger. The entire military and naval strength of the Company by
+land and sea is about 25,000 men, including officers, soldiers,
+and sailors. For the support of its commerce, the Company keeps
+in constant employment about 180 ships, of from 30 to 60 pieces of
+cannon, and in cases of emergency are able at any time to fit out
+forty of the largest size.
+
+The ecclesiastical government at Batavia, or consistory, consists of
+eleven persons; viz. the five ministers of the two Dutch churches in
+the city, and that in the citadel, besides the minister who resides
+in the island of _Ourust_, together with the three ministers of the
+Portuguese churches, and the two belonging to the Malay church. These
+last five are all Dutchmen-born, though they preach in the Portuguese
+and Malay languages. As it is deemed necessary that the state should
+be informed of all that passes among their clergy, the eleventh person
+is nominated by the government, whose especial business is to see
+that they do nothing contrary to the laws or to the regulations of the
+Company. Besides these, the consistory also consists of eight elders
+and twenty deacons. One principal branch of business confided to the
+consistory, is to provide ministers for the subordinate governments;
+where they are relieved after a certain term of years, and either
+return to Batavia or to Holland, to enjoy the fruits of their labours.
+Our author relates that one of these ministers went home in the same
+ship with him, who had made such good use of his time, that he bought
+a _noble fief_ on his return, and became a man of quality. In
+the smaller places belonging to the Company, where there are no
+established ministers, an itinerant is sent once in three or four
+years, to marry, baptize, and dispense the communion; which is
+necessary, since the synods do not permit the propagation of any other
+except the reformed religion in the territories of the Company.
+
+For a long time the Lutherans have solicited for permission to have a
+church in Batavia, but have constantly been refused, though certainly
+a just and reasonable demand, especially in a place where Mahomedans
+and Pagans are freely tolerated in the exercise of their religion,
+and where the Chinese are even permitted to worship the devil.
+This ecclesiastical consistory has also dependent upon it all the
+schoolmasters, consolators of the sick, and catechists. Of these last
+there are many in the service of the Company in their ships; their
+duty being to say prayers every day, and to instruct such as embrace
+the Christian religion; and as they are mostly natives, and speak
+several languages, they are the better able to give instructions, and
+to teach the confession of faith to so many different nations. Such
+as are converted are baptized and receive the communion; and, for the
+better preservation of uniformity in doctrine, an annual visitation of
+all the new converts is made by the ministers. In consequence of
+these regulations, the reformed religion has made amazing progress,
+especially among the blacks, of whom our author says he has seen 150
+at a time present themselves to receive baptism. This however is not
+rashly granted, as all who receive it must be well instructed, and be
+able to make their confession of faith. The Chinese are well known
+to be so obstinately addicted to their great Confucius, as not to be
+easily induced to embrace any other religion; yet some even of them
+from time to time have abjured their idolatry, and embraced the
+protestant faith. Yet our author seems to doubt their sincerity,
+alleging that the Chinese are seldom sincere in any thing; and he
+tells us, that a Chinese, on renouncing idolatry; said he was about to
+embrace the religion of the Company.
+
+The country around Batavia is extremely beautiful, and it may be said
+that nature and art seem to strive which shall have the greatest share
+in adorning it. The air is sweet and mild, the land extremely fertile,
+and the face of the country finely diversified with hills and vallies,
+all laid out in regular plantations, beautiful canals, and whatever
+can contribute to render the country pleasant and agreeable. The
+island of Java is about 300 leagues in circumference, divided into
+several kingdoms and principalities, all dependent upon the emperor
+who resides at _Kattasura_, except the kings of Bantam and Japara,[2]
+who do not acknowledge his authority. The country produces in
+abundance all the necessaries of life, as also great quantities of
+those valuable productions which form its commerce. It is interspersed
+by many mountains, rivers, and woods, to all of which nature has
+bestowed her treasures with a bountiful hand. There are gold-mines in
+some parts of the country, and for some years the government caused
+the mountains of _Parang_ to be wrought, in hopes of reaping profit;
+but, after expending a million, the marcasites were found not to
+be fully ripened.[3] Those who directed this enterprise were much
+censured, and the works have been long discontinued. Some are
+thoroughly satisfied that the natives find considerable quantities
+of gold in several places, which they carefully conceal from the
+knowledge of the Dutch. During the last war in Java, which continued
+from 1716 to 1721, the inhabitants of some parts of the country were
+so often plundered that they were reduced to absolute beggary; yet,
+after a year's peace, they were observed to have grown excessively
+rich, having plenty of gold, both in dust and ingots.
+
+[Footnote 2: There is some strange error here, which we do not presume
+to correct or explain. In the former section, the king of _Japara_ is
+said to reside chiefly at _Kattasura_, which in the present instance
+is said to be the residence of the emperor. In an after division of
+this collection, more ample and distinct accounts will be found of
+this rich island, now subject to Britain.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 3: In plain English, the mineral, or ore, was so poor as not
+to defray the expence of extracting the metal.--E.]
+
+The mountains of Java are very high, so that many of them can be seen
+at the distance of thirty or forty leagues. That which is called the
+_Blue Mountain_ is by far the highest, being seen from the greatest
+distance at sea. Java is subject to frequent and terrible earthquakes,
+which the inhabitants believe are caused by the mountain of Parang,
+which is full of sulphur, salt-petre, and bitumen, which take fire by
+their intestine commotions, causing a prodigious struggle within the
+bowels of the earth, whence proceeds the earthquake; and they assert
+that it is common, after an earthquake, to see a vast cloud of smoke
+hanging over the top of that mountain. About thirty years before
+Roggewein was in Batavia, Mynheer Ribeck, then governor-general, went
+with many attendants to the top of this mountain, where he perceived
+a large cavity, into which he caused a man to be let down, to examine
+the inside. On his return, this man reported that the mountain was
+all hollow within, that he heard a most frightful noise of torrents of
+water on every side, that he here and there saw flames bursting out,
+so that he was afraid of going far, from apprehension of either being
+stifled by the noxious vapours, or falling into one of the chasms. The
+waters in the neighbourhood of this mountain are unwholesome, and even
+those in the neighbourhood of Batavia are impregnated with sulphur,
+those who drink much of them being liable to several disorders,
+particularly the dysentery. But when boiled, their water is entirely
+freed from the sulphur, and does no manner of harm, though drank
+copiously.
+
+The fruits and plants of Java are excellent and numberless. Among
+these the cocoa-nut tree is by far the most valuable, as besides
+its fruit already described, the bark makes a kind of hemp which is
+manufactured into good ropes and cables; the timber serves to build
+houses and ships, and the leaves serve to cover the former. It is said
+that the father of a family in this country causes a cocoa-nut tree
+to be planted at the birth of each of his children, by which each may
+always know his own age, as this tree has a circle rising yearly on
+its stem, so that its age may be known by counting these circles: and
+when any one asks a father the ages of his children, he sends them to
+look at his cocoa trees.
+
+There are numerous woods or forests in different parts of the
+island, in which are abundance of wild beasts, as buffaloes, tigers,
+rhinoceroses, and wild horses. These also abound in serpents, some
+of which are of prodigious size. Crocodiles are numerous and large in
+this island, being mostly found about the mouths of the rivers; and,
+being amphibious animals, delight much in marshes and savannahs. Like
+the tortoise, this creature deposits its eggs in the hot sands,
+taking no farther care of them, and the sun hatches them in the proper
+season, when they immediately betake themselves to the water. A short
+time before the arrival of Roggewein at Batavia, a crocodile was
+taken in the mouth of the river to the east of the city, upwards of
+thirty-three feet long, and proportionally large. They have fowls of
+all kinds, and exquisitely good; particularly peacocks, partridges,
+pheasants, and wood-pigeons. The Indian bat is a great curiosity,
+differing little in form from ours, but its extended wings measure a
+full yard, and its body is as large as a rat.
+
+There are great numbers of excellent fish of different sorts to be had
+in the adjoining sea, and so plentiful and cheap that as much may be
+bought for three-pence as will dine six or seven men. Tortoises or
+sea-turtle also are abundant, their flesh resembling veal, and there
+are many persons who think it much better. The flat country round
+Batavia abounds in all kinds of provisions; and to prevent all danger
+of scarcity, vessels belonging to the Company are continually employed
+in bringing provisions, spiceries, and all other necessaries, from the
+most distant parts of the island, together with indigo, rice, pepper,
+cardamoms, coffee, and the like. In the magazines and store-houses,
+there are always vast quantities of rich and valuable commodities, not
+of Java only, but of all parts of India, ready to be transported to
+other parts of the Company's dominions, in the ships which return
+annually to Holland.
+
+The homeward-bound ships sail five times every year from Batavia. The
+first fleet sails in July, generally consisting of four or five sail,
+which touch on their way at the island of Ceylon. The second, of six
+or seven vessels, sails in September. The third usually consists
+of from sixteen to twenty ships, and leaves Batavia in October. The
+fourth, of four or five vessels, sails in January. And the fifth,
+being only a single ship, generally sails in March, but not till the
+arrival of the fleet from China which brings the tea, of which the
+principal part of the cargo of this ship consists, wherefore it is
+usually called the _tea-ship_: The common people call it also the
+_book-ship_ as it carries home the current account of the whole year,
+by which the Company is enabled to judge of the state of its trade
+in India. It is to be observed that these ships, laden with the rich
+commodities of many countries, all sail from this single port of
+Batavia; the ships from Mokha which carry coffee, being the only
+vessels in the service of the Dutch East India Company that are
+allowed to proceed directly home without going to Batavia.
+
+
+
+SECTION IX.
+
+_Description of Ceylon._
+
+The next best government belonging to the Dutch East India Company,
+after Batavia, is that of the island of Ceylon. The governor of this
+island is generally a member of the council of the Indies, and has
+a council appointed to assist him, framed after the model of that in
+Batavia, only that the members are not quite such great men. Though
+the governor of Ceylon be dependent upon the Council of the Indies at
+Batavia, he is at liberty to write directly to the directors of
+the Company in Holland, without asking permission from the
+governor-general, or being obliged to give any account of his conduct
+in so doing. This singular privilege has had bad effects, having even
+tempted some governors of Ceylon to endeavour to withdraw themselves
+from their obedience to the Company, in order to become absolute
+sovereigns of the island. There have been many examples of this kind,
+but it may be sufficient to mention the two last, owing to the
+tyranny of two successive governors, Vuist and Versluys, which made a
+considerable noise in Europe.
+
+When Mr Rumpf left the government of Ceylon, his immediate successor,
+Mr Vuist, began to act the tyrant towards all who were not so
+fortunate as to be in his good graces, persecuting both Europeans and
+natives. Having from the beginning formed the project of rendering
+himself an independent sovereign, he pursued his plan steadily, by
+such methods as seemed best calculated to insure success. He thought
+it necessary in the first place to rid himself of the richest persons
+in the island, and of all having the reputation of wisdom, experience,
+and penetration. In order to save appearances, and to play the
+villain with an air of justice, he thought it necessary to trump up a
+pretended plot, and caused informations to be preferred against such
+persons as he intended to ruin, charging them with having entered into
+a conspiracy to betray the principal fortresses of the island into the
+hands of some foreign power. This scheme secured him in two ways, as
+it seemed to manifest his great zeal for the interest of the Company,
+and enabled him to convict those he hated of high treason, and to
+deprive them at once of life and fortune. To manage this the more
+easily, he contrived to change the members of his council, into
+which he brought creatures of his own, on whose acquiescence in his
+iniquities he could depend upon. The confiscations of the estates and
+effects of a number of innocent persons whom he had murdered by these
+false judicial proceedings, gave him the means of obliging many, and
+gained him numerous dependants.
+
+Vuist was born in India of Dutch parents, and had a strong natural
+capacity which had been improved by assiduous application to his
+studies. His dark brow, and morose air, shewed the cruelty of his
+disposition: Yet he loved and protected the Indians, either from a
+natural disposition, or because he deemed them fit instruments to
+forward his designs. In order to gain the natives in his interest, he
+preferred them to many vacant offices under his government, in direct
+opposition to repeated instructions from the Company, to bestow the
+principal offices on Dutchmen or other Europeans. After carrying on
+his designs with much dexterity, and having acquired by gifts a vast
+number of dependants, ready to support his purposes, some of the
+faithful servants of the Company sent such clear and distinct
+information of his proceedings to Holland, as sufficiently evinced his
+real intentions, in spite of all his arts to conceal them. At length
+the Company sent out Mr Versluys to supersede him in the government
+of Ceylon, with orders to send him prisoner to Batavia. As soon as he
+arrived there, abundance of informations were preferred against him,
+for a variety of crimes both of a private and public nature, into
+all of which the council of justice made strict inquisition, and were
+furnished with abundant proofs of his guilt. In the end, he freely
+confessed that he had caused nineteen innocent persons to be put to
+death, having put them all to the torture, extorting from all of them
+confessions of crimes which they had never even dreamt of committing.
+He was accordingly sentenced to be broken alive on the wheel, his body
+to be quartered, and his quarters burnt to ashes and thrown into the
+sea.
+
+Such was the deserved end of the traitor and tyrant Vuist; yet
+Versluys, who was sent expressly to amend what the other had done
+amiss, and to make the people forget the excesses of his predecessor
+by a mild and gentle administration, acted perhaps even worse than
+Vuist. Versluys was by no means of a cruel disposition, wherefore,
+strictly speaking, he shed no blood, yet acted as despotically and
+tyrannically as the other, though with more subtilty and under a
+fairer appearance. His great point was not the absolute possession of
+the country, but to possess himself of all that it contained of value.
+For this purpose, immediately on getting possession of the government,
+he raised the price of rice, the bread of the country, to so
+extravagant a height that the people in a short time were unable
+to purchase it, and were soon reduced to beggary and a starving
+condition. Their humble representations of the great and general
+misery which reigned among all ranks of people throughout the island
+made no impression on his avaricious disposition; but all things went
+on from bad to worse, till an account of his nefarious conduct was
+transmitted to Holland. When informed of the distressed situation of
+the inhabitants of Ceylon, the States-general sent out Mr Doembourgh
+as governor, with orders to repair all past errors, and to treat the
+natives with all possible tenderness and indulgence. On his arrival,
+Versluys, after beggaring the whole nation, took it into his head that
+they would defend him against his masters, and absolutely refused to
+resign the government; and had even the insolency to fire upon
+the Company's ships as they lay at anchor in the road of Columbo.
+Doembourgh, however, immediately landed, and his authority was readily
+recognised by all the Company's servants, and submitted to by the
+people. He caused Versluys to be immediately arrested and sent to
+Batavia, where a long criminal process was instituted against him, but
+which was not concluded when our author left India.
+
+Of all the Asiatic islands, Ceylon is perhaps the fairest and most
+fertile. It lies to the S.E. of the peninsula of India on this side of
+the Ganges, between the latitudes of 5 deg. 30' and 9 deg. N. and between
+the longitudes of 79 deg. 45' and 82 deg. 12' E. so that it extends 70 marine
+leagues from N. to S. and 49 leagues from E. to W. It is so fertile
+and delicious, that many have believed it to have been the seat of the
+terrestrial paradise; and the natives certainly believe this, for they
+pretend to shew the tomb of Adam, and the print of his foot on the
+mountain named the Peak of Adam,[1] one of the highest mountains
+in the world. On another mountain there is a salt-lake, which the
+inhabitants affirm was filled by the tears shed by Eve, while she wept
+incessantly an hundred years for the death of Abel.
+
+[Footnote 1: This gross absurdity is not worth contesting; but the
+fact is, that the real natives, the idolaters of the interior, refer
+both the tomb and the footmark to their false god, or lawgiver,
+Bodh.--E.]
+
+The principal places in Ceylon are Jafnapatam, Trinkamaly, Baracola,
+Punta de Galla, Columbo, Negombo, Sitavaca, and Candy. The Dutch East
+India Company are possessed of all the coasts of the island, and ten
+or twelve leagues within the land, and most of the before-mentioned
+towns, except the two last. While the Portuguese had possession, they
+built abundance of forts for their security, so that the Dutch found
+it a difficult matter to dislodge them; but having contracted a secret
+treaty with the king of Candy, the Portuguese were attacked on all
+sides, by sea and land, and were driven by degrees out of all their
+possessions. Since then, the Dutch have taken much pains to cultivate
+a good understanding with that native sovereign, from whom they have
+obtained almost every thing they demanded. They send every year an
+ambassador to him with various presents; in return for which his
+Candian majesty sends to the company a casket of jewels, of such value
+that the ship which carries it home is reckoned to be worth half the
+fleet.
+
+Punta de Galle and Columbo are the two principal places in the
+island, the latter being the residence of the governor, and the other,
+properly speaking, is only the port of that city. Though extremely
+hot, the air of Ceylon is reckoned healthy, and the country abounds
+with excellent fruits of many kinds. The sea and the rivers afford
+plenty of various kinds of fish. There are also on the land great
+abundance of fowls, both wild and tame, and many wild animals,
+particularly elephants that are larger than any other country in Asia,
+also tygers, bears, civet cats, monkeys, and others. _Cinnamon_ is the
+production for which this island is peculiarly famous, as that which
+is procured here is estimated far superior to any other. The Dutch
+East India Company have the entire monopoly not only of this, but of
+all the other spices, with which they supply all parts of the world.
+Cinnamon is the inner bark of a tree resembling the orange, the
+flowers of which very much resemble those of the laurel both in size
+and figure. There are three sorts of cinnamon. The finest is taken
+from young trees; a coarser sort from the old ones; and the third is
+the _wild cinnamon_, or cassia, which grows not only in Ceylon, but
+in Malabar and China, and of late years in Brazil. The company also
+derives great profit from an essential oil drawn from cinnamon, which
+sells at a high price; and it also makes considerable gain by the
+precious stones found in this island, being rubies, white and blue
+sapphires, topazes, and others.
+
+Off the coast of this island, at Manaar and Tutecorin, there is a fine
+pearl fishery, which brings in a large revenue, being let twice a-year
+in farm to certain black merchants. The oysters are at the bottom of
+the sea, and the fishery is only carried on in fine weather, when the
+sea is perfectly calm. The diver has one end of a rope fastened round
+his body below the arm-pits, the other end being tied to the boat,
+having a large stone tied to his feet, that he may descend the
+quicker, and a bag tied round his waist to receive the oysters. As
+soon as he gets to the bottom of the sea, he takes up as many oysters
+as are within his reach, putting them as fast as possible into the
+bag; and in order to ascend, pulls strongly at a cord, different from
+that which is round his body, as a signal for those in the boat to
+haul him up as fast as they can, while he endeavours so shake loose
+the stone at his feet. When the boats are filled with oysters, the
+black merchants carry them to different places on the coast, selling
+them at so much the hundred; which trade is hazardous for the
+purchasers, who sometimes find pearls of great value, and sometimes
+none at all, or those only of small value.
+
+The inhabitants of Ceylon are called _Cingolesians_, or Cingalese, who
+are mostly very tall, of a very dark complexion, with very large ears,
+owing to the numerous large and heavy ornaments they wear in them.
+They are men of great courage, and live in a hardy manner, and
+are therefore excellent soldiers. They are, for the most part,
+Mahomedans,[2] though there are many idolaters among them who worship
+cows and calves. The inhabitants of the interior do not greatly
+respect the Dutch, whom they term their _coast-keepers_, in derision;
+but the Dutch care little about this, endeavouring to keep in good
+correspondence with the king of Candy, whose dominions are separated
+from theirs by a large rapid river, and by impenetrable forests. The
+Ceylonese are remarkable for their great skill in taming elephants,
+which they employ as beasts of burden in time of peace, and render
+serviceable against their enemies in war.
+
+[Footnote 2: The author has probably confounded the original natives
+of Ceylon, who are idolaters, with the Malays, who are Mahomedans, and
+of whom a considerable number are settled on the coast country.--E.]
+
+
+
+SECTION X.
+
+_Some Account of the Governments of Amboina, Banda, Macasser, the
+Moluccas, Mallacca, and the Cape of Good Hope._
+
+The third government under the East India Company is that of Amboina,
+one of the Molucca islands, which was formerly the seat of the
+governor-general till the building of Batavia, when it was transferred
+there on account of its advantageous situation, in the centre of the
+company's trade and settlements, while Amboina lay too far to the
+east. The island of Java also is vastly more fertile than Amboina,
+producing all the necessaries of life in abundance, so that it has
+no dependence for provisions on any other country, while they had
+provisions to search for in all other places, at the time when the
+government was established at Amboina. This island is one of the
+largest of the Moluccas, being situated in the _Archipelago of St
+Lazarus_, in lat. 3 40' S. and long. 128 deg. 30' E. 21 deg. 30' or 430 marine
+leagues east from Batavia. It was conquered in 1519 by the Portuguese,
+who built a fort there to keep the inhabitants under subjection, and
+to facilitate the conquest of all the adjacent islands. This fort was
+taken by the Dutch in 1605, but they did not entirely reduce the whole
+island of Amboina and the neighbouring islands till 1627, by which
+conquest they acquired entire possession of the clove trade, whence
+these islands are termed the _gold-mine_ of the company, owing to the
+vast profit they draw from them, and it is so far superior to
+other gold-mines, that there is no fear of these islands being ever
+exhausted of that commodity. A pound weight of cloves or nutmegs, for
+the company has the entire monopoly of both, does not in fact cost the
+company much more than a half-penny, and every one knows at what rate
+the spices are sold in Europe. Amboina is the centre of all this rich
+commerce; and to keep it more effectually in the hands of the company,
+all the clove-trees in the other islands are grubbed up and destroyed;
+and sometimes, when the harvest is very large at Amboina, a part even
+of its superfluous produce is burnt.
+
+This valuable spice grows only in Amboina and the other five Molucca
+islands, and in the islands of Meao, Cinomo, Cabel, and Marigoran. The
+Indians call cloves _calafoor_, while the inhabitants of the Moluccas
+call them _chinke_. The clove-tree is much like the laurel, but its
+leaves are narrower, resembling those of the almond and willow. Even
+the wood and leaves taste almost as strong as the cloves themselves.
+These trees bear a great quantity of branches and flowers, and each
+flower produces a single clove. The flowers are at first white, then
+green, and at last grow red and pretty hard, and are properly the
+cloves. While green, their smell is sweet and comfortable, beyond all
+other flowers. When ripe, the cloves are of a yellow colour, but
+after being gathered and dried, they assume a smoky and black hue. In
+gathering, they tie a rope round each bough, and strip off the whole
+of its produce by force, which violence injures the tree for the next
+year, but it bears more than ever in the following season. Others beat
+the trees with long poles, as we do walnut-trees, when the cloves fall
+down on cloths spread on the ground to receive them. The trees
+bear more fruit than leaves, the fruit hanging from the trees like
+cherries. Such cloves as are sold in the Indies are delivered just as
+procured from the trees, mixed with their stalks, and with dust and
+dirt; but such as are to be transported to Holland are carefully
+cleaned and freed from the stalks. If left ungathered on the tree,
+they grow large and thick, and are then termed _mother-cloves_, which
+the Javanese value more than the others, but the Dutch prefer the
+ordinary cloves.
+
+No care is ever taken in propagating or planting clove-trees, as the
+cloves which fall to the ground produce them in abundance, and the
+rains make them grow so fast that they give fruit in eight years,
+continuing to bear for more than an hundred years after. Some are of
+opinion that the clove-tree does not thrive close to the sea, nor when
+too far removed; but seamen who have been on the island assert that
+they are found everywhere, on the mountains, in the vallies, and
+quite near the sea. They ripen from the latter end of August to the
+beginning of January. Nothing whatever grows below or near these
+trees, neither grass, herb, or weed, as their heat draws all the
+moisture and nourishment of the soil to themselves. Such is the hot
+nature of cloves, that when a sackful of them is laid over a vessel
+of water, some of the water is very soon wasted, but the cloves are no
+way injured. When a pitcher of water is left in a room in which cloves
+are cleaned, all the water is consumed in two days, although even the
+cloves have been removed. Cloves are preserved in sugar, forming an
+extraordinary good confection. They are also pickled. Many Indian
+women chew cloves to give them a sweet breath. A very sweet-smelling
+water is distilled from green cloves, which is excellent for
+strengthening the eyes, by putting a drop or two into the eyes. Powder
+of cloves laid upon the head cures the headache; and used inwardly,
+increases urine, helps digestion, and is good against a diarrhoea, and
+drank in milk, procures sleep.
+
+A few days after the cloves are gathered, they are collected together
+and dried before the fire in bundles, by which operation they lose
+their natural beautiful red colour, changing into a deep purple or
+black. This is perhaps partly owing to their being sprinkled with
+water, which is said to be necessary for preventing worms from getting
+into them. Those persons who are sent for this commodity in the
+company's ships, practise a fraud of this nature, in order to conceal
+their thefts: For, having abstracted a certain quantity or proportion
+from the cloves received on board, they place two or three hogsheads
+of sea-water among those remaining, which is all sucked up in a few
+days by the cloves, which that recover their former weight. By this
+contrivance, the captain and merchant or supercargo agreeing
+together, find a way to cheat the company out of part of this valuable
+commodity. Yet this fraud, though easy and expeditious, is extremely
+dangerous as when detected it is invariably punished with death,
+and the company never want spies. Owing to this, cloves are commonly
+enough called galgen kruid, or gallows-spice, as frequently bringing
+men to an ill end.
+
+The king of Amboina has a pension from the company, and a guard of
+European soldiers, maintained at its expence. The inhabitants of the
+island are of middle stature, and of black complexions, being all
+extremely lazy and given to thieving; yet some of them are very
+ingenious, and have a singular art of working up the cloves while
+green into a variety of curious toys, as small ships or houses,
+crowns, and such like, which are annually sent to Europe as presents,
+and are much esteemed. Those of the Amboinese who acknowledge the
+authority of the king are Mahomedans, but there are many idolaters who
+live in the mountains, and maintain their independence, considering
+themselves as free men, but the king and the Hollanders reckon them
+savages; and as they are guilty of frequent robberies and murders,
+they are always reduced to slavery when caught, and are treated with
+the utmost rigour, and employed in the hardest labour. On this
+account a most excessive hatred subsists between them and the other
+inhabitants of the island, with whom they are perpetually at war,
+and to whom they hardly ever give quarter. Their arms are bucklers;
+swords, and javelins or pikes.
+
+The garrison kept in the fort of Amboina is numerous, and constantly
+maintained in excellent order, being composed of the best troops in
+the company's service. The fort is so strong, both by nature and
+art, as to be reckoned impregnable, and so effectually commands the
+harbour, that no vessel can possibly go in or out without being sunk
+by its cannon. Although the rich commerce in cloves might make a
+sufficient return to the company for the charges of this island, yet
+of late years coffee has been ordered to be cultivated here, and
+is likely to turn out to advantage. While this island was under
+the government of Mr Barnard, it was discovered that considerable
+quantities of gold-dust were washed down by the torrents in some parts
+of the mountains, and by tracing up the auriferous streams to their
+sources, the mine has at last been found. Amboina also produces a red
+kind of wood, which is both beautiful and durable, and is naturally
+embellished in its grain with abundance of curious figures. Of this
+wood they make tables, cabinets, writing-desks, and other beautiful
+pieces of furniture, which are sent as presents to the principal
+persons in the government, the rest being sold at extravagant prices
+all over India.
+
+The fourth government under the company is _Banda_, an island about
+fifty leagues from Amboina towards the east, and to the southward
+of the Moluccas. The governor, who is generally an eminent merchant,
+resides at _Nera_, the capital of the country, and has several other
+neighbouring islands under his jurisdiction, in the government of
+all which he is assisted by a council, as at Amboina. In some
+representations sent home, and published by the company, this island
+is set forth as being very expensive to the company, and so thinly
+inhabited as to take off very little goods, while it is so barren as
+to require large supplies of provisions. All this is pure artifice;
+for, though Banda is a very small island in comparison with Amboina,
+being only about twelve leagues in circumference, it certainly affords
+as great profits, which arise from the important commerce in nutmegs,
+which grow here in such prodigious quantities as to enable the Dutch
+company to supply all the markets in Europe.
+
+This admirable and much-valued fruit grows in no other part of the
+world except Banda and a few other small islands in its neighbourhood,
+named Orattan, Guimanasa, Wayer, Pulo-wai, and Pulo-rion. The
+nutmeg-tree is much like a peach-tree, but the leaves are shorter and
+rounder. The fruit is at first covered by two skins or shells, the
+outer one being tough and as thick as one's finger, which falls off
+when the fruit ripens. This outer rind when candied has a fine taste
+and flavour. When this falls off, the next is a fine smooth skin or
+peel, which is the mace, or flower of the nutmeg; and below this is a
+harder and blackish shell, much like that of a walnut; and on opening
+this shell, the nutmeg is found within, being the kernel. The mace is
+at first of a fine scarlet colour; but, when ripe, it falls off the
+shell, and is then of an orange colour, as it comes to Europe. They
+preserve whole nutmegs in sugar, which make the best sweetmeat in
+India. The Bandanese call nutmegs _palla_, and mace _buaa-palla_.
+There are two sorts of nutmegs; the one being of a long shape, called
+males, and the other round and reddish, called females, which latter
+have better taste and flavour than the other. When gathered and the
+mace carefully preserved, the shells are removed and the nutmegs
+dried, being first thrown among quicklime, as otherwise worms would
+breed in and destroy them.
+
+There are several islands in the neighbourhood of Banda in which the
+nutmeg-trees grow, but these are carefully destroyed every year, which
+at first sight may seem extraordinary, as, if once destroyed, one
+would imagine they would never grow again. But they are annually
+carried by birds to these islands. Some persons allege that the birds
+disgorge them undigested, while others assert that they pass through
+in the ordinary manner, still retaining their vegetative power. This
+bird resembles a cuckoo, and is called the nutmeg-gardener by the
+Dutch, who prohibit their subjects from killing any of them on pain
+of death. The nutmeg is a sovereign remedy for strengthening the
+brain and memory, for warming the stomach, sweetening the breath,
+and promoting urine; it is also good against flatulence, diarrhoea,
+head-ach, pain of the stomach, heat of the liver, and amenorrhoea.
+Oil of nutmegs is a powerful cordial. Mace is an effectual remedy
+for weakness of the stomach, helps digestion, expels bad humours,
+and cures flatulence. A plaister of mace and nutmegs in powder,
+and diluted with rose-water, greatly strengthens the stomach. Being
+peculiar to Banda, merchants from Java, Malucca, China, and all parts
+of the Indies, come to Nera and the other towns of Banda to purchase
+mace and nutmegs; and immediately on their arrival, they all purchase
+wives to keep house for them and dress their victuals during their
+stay, which is usually two or three months, and when they go away
+again, they give liberty to these temporary wives to go where they
+please.
+
+The island of Banda is very hilly, yet fertile, the government
+among the natives being a kind of commonwealth, administered by the
+Mahomedan priests, who are very strict and severe. The population
+of the whole island may be about 12,000 persons of all ages, of whom
+about 4000 are fighting men. It is so well fortified as to be deemed
+impregnable, yet there is always a numerous squadron of small vessels
+on the coast for farther security. The garrison is numerous, but in
+a worse condition than those of any other garrison, belonging to the
+company, owing to the scarcity of victuals, as the island is of a
+barren sandy soil,[1] wherefore the soldiers eat dogs, cats, and
+any other animal they can find. For six months of the year they have
+tolerable abundance of turtle or sea-tortoises, and after this they
+are glad to get a little sorry fish, now and then. Their bread is made
+from the juice of a tree, which resembles the grounds of beer when
+first drawn, but grows as hard as a stone when dried: Yet, when put
+into water, it swells and ferments, and so becomes fit to eat, at
+least in this country, where nothing else is to be had.[2] Butter,
+rice, dried fish, and other provisions, are all imported from Batavia,
+and are much too dear to be purchased by the soldiers, at least in any
+great plenty. Thus the inhabitants are none of the happiest; but, to
+do them justice, they live fully as well as they deserve, as there is
+not an honest man on the island.
+
+[Footnote 1: This is contradictory, having been before described as
+hilly, yet fertile.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 2: This account of the matter is not easily understood, and
+seems to want confirmation. Perhaps it is an ignorant or perverted
+report of sago: Yet there may possibly be some tree or plant affording
+a considerable quantity of fecula or starch by expression.--E.]
+
+According to the Dutch, the original natives of this island were so
+cruel, perfidious and intractable, that they were forced to root them
+out in a great measure for their own security, and to send a Dutch
+colony to occupy the island: But such a colony as has not much mended
+the matter, being entirely composed of a rascally good-for-nothing
+people, who were either content to come, or were sentenced to be sent
+here, almost to starve, not being able to live elsewhere. Their misery
+at this place does not continue long, as they are usually soon carried
+off by the dry gripes or twisting of the guts, which is the endemic,
+or peculiar disease of the country. Hence, and because wild young
+fellows are sometimes sent here by their relations, the Dutch at
+Batavia usually call this _Verbeetering Island_, or the Island of
+Correction.
+
+Macasser, or the island of Celebes, is considered as the fourth best
+government after Batavia. This island lies between Borneo and the
+Moluccas, 260 leagues or 13 deg. E. from Batavia. It is a singularly
+irregular island, consisting in a manner of four long peninsular
+processes, two projecting eastwards, and two towards the south,
+reaching from lat. 1 deg. 30' N. to 5 deg. 45' S. and from long. 119 deg. to 125 deg.
+20', both E. It is called, and with great reason, the key of the spice
+islands, and the form of its government is much the same as in the
+other islands, consisting of a governor and council. Since the Dutch
+conquered these islands from the Portuguese, they have carefully
+fortified the sea-coast, and have always a very numerous garrison
+in the fort of Macasser, where the governor resides; which is
+particularly necessary, as the island is very populous, and the
+natives are beyond comparison the bravest and best soldiers in India.
+This nation long gave inexpressible trouble to the Dutch, but was at
+length, subdued, and stands now in as much awe of the company as any
+other nation: But, till very lately, the expences of the troops at
+this place were so large, that the company derived very little gain
+from the conquest, although the slave-trade here is very profitable.
+
+Before the last Macasser war, which ended in the entire subjugation of
+the prince of this country, he was able to procure great quantities
+of mace, nutmegs, and cloves, which he sold to the English and other
+nations, at much more reasonable rates than they could procure them
+from the Dutch. For which reason the Dutch were at great pains and
+expence to reduce this island to entire subjection, that it might
+become the bulwark of the Moluccas, and secure their monopoly of the
+spice-trade: But, for similar reasons, the other European powers ought
+to have supported the king of Macasser in his independence. The
+island of Celebes is very fertile, and produces abundance of rice, and
+articles of great value in the Indies. The inhabitants are of middle
+stature, and have yellow complexions, with good features, and are of
+brisk and active dispositions: But are naturally thieves, traitors,
+and murderers to such a degree, that it is not safe for an European to
+venture beyond the walls of the fort after dark, or to travel at any
+time far into the country, lest he be robbed and murdered. Yet many of
+the natives live under the protection of the Dutch forts, being
+free burgesses, who carry on considerable trade. There are also a
+considerable number of Chinese residents, who sail from hence in
+vessels of their own to all parts of the company's dominions, and who
+acquire immense wealth by means of extensive commerce.
+
+The inland country is under the dominion of three different princes,
+who, fortunately for the Dutch, are in continual opposition to each
+other; for, if united, they might easily drive the Dutch from the
+island. One of these princes is styled the _Company's King_, as
+he lives in good correspondence with the Dutch, and promotes their
+interest as far as he can. On this account the Dutch make him presents
+of considerable value from time to time, such as gold chains, golden
+coronets set with precious stones, and the like, in order to keep him
+steady in his allegiance, and to prevent him from uniting with the
+other two princes of the island. Some little time before the arrival
+of Roggewein at Batavia, a rich gold-mine was discovered in Celebes,
+to which a director and a great number of workmen were sent from
+Batavia; but how far this has been attended with success, our author
+was unable to say.
+
+_Ternate_ is the fifth government at the disposal of the company, and
+the farthest east of all belonging to the Dutch dominions in India, so
+that it is a kind of frontier. The governor is always a merchant, and
+has a council, like all the others already mentioned. This is one of
+the largest of the Molucca islands, and the king of Ternate is the
+most valuable of all the allies of the company; as, although his
+island would abound in cloves, he causes them to be rooted out
+annually, for which the company allows him a pension of eighteen
+or twenty thousand rix dollars yearly. He has likewise a numerous
+life-guard, with a very strong fort well garrisoned, all at the
+expence of the company. The kings of Tidore and Bachian are his
+tributaries. Ternate is very fertile, and abounds in all sorts of
+provisions, and in every thing that can contribute to the ease and
+happiness of life, yet its commerce is of no great importance, hardly
+amounting to as much as is necessary to defray the charges of the
+government. It was at this time, however, expected to turn out to
+better account, as a rich gold-mine had been recently discovered. The
+natives are a middle-sized people, strong and active, more faithful
+than their neighbours, and better affected towards the Europeans. In
+religion they are mostly Mahometans or Pagans; but of late many of
+them had become Christians, chiefly occasioned by their king having
+declared himself of that religion, a point of great consequence
+towards the conversion of the people. The inhabitants of Ternate
+make a species of palm wine, called _Seggeweer_, which is excessively
+strong. There are here many most beautiful birds, having feathers
+of all sorts of colours, charmingly diversified, which are sent to
+Batavia, where they are sold at high prices on account of their beauty
+and docility, as they may be taught to sing finely, and to imitate the
+human voice. Many Birds-of-Paradise are also brought from this island.
+There are several sorts of these birds. The most common kind is
+yellow, having small bodies, about eight inches long exclusive of the
+tail, which is half a yard long, and sometimes more. The second kind
+is red, the third blue, and the fourth black. These last are the
+most beautiful and most in request, being called the King of the
+Birds-of-Paradise. This kind has a crown or tuft of feathers on the
+top of its head, which lies flat or is raised up at pleasure. In this
+they resemble the _cadocus_ or cockatoo, a bird entirely white, with a
+yellow crown on its head.
+
+The sixth government is Malacca, which city is the capital of a
+small kingdom of the same name, inhabited by Malayans or Malays. The
+governor here is a merchant, and is assisted by a council like all the
+others. This kingdom of Malacca is the south part of the peninsula of
+India beyond the Ganges, being divided from the island of Sumatra by
+a strait, named the strait of Malacca. This city is of considerable
+size, and carries on an extensive commerce, for which it is admirably
+situated, and is the storehouse or emporium of all that part of India.
+It is also the rendezvous of all the homeward-bound ships from Japan,
+which make at this place a distribution of their merchandise into
+various assortments, which are sent from hence to all the settlements
+of the company in India. It is however subject to the great
+inconvenience of scarcity of provisions, having nothing of that kind
+except various sorts of fish. The princes of the adjacent countries
+and their subjects are all notorious pirates, and give much
+disturbance to the trade of India; but are particularly inimical to
+the Dutch company, and omit no opportunity of doing all the evil
+in their power to its subjects. These people suffered formerly some
+severe reverses from the Portuguese, who were formerly established
+here, and since from their successors the Dutch, which has gradually
+reduced their power, so that they are now much less able to carry
+on their depredations. The natives of Malacca are of a very dark
+complexion, but brisk and active, and greatly addicted to thieving.
+Some are idolaters but they are mostly Mahometans.
+
+When the Portuguese were masters of Malacca, they had no less than
+three churches and a chapel within the fortress, and one on the
+outside. That which is now used for worship by the Dutch stands
+conspicuously on the top of a hill, and may be seen for a great
+distance up or down the straits. It has a flag-staff on the top of its
+steeple, where a flag is always displayed on seeing a ship. The fort
+is large and strong. A third part of its walls is washed by the sea:
+A deep, narrow, and rapid river covers its western side; and all the
+rest is secured by a broad, deep ditch. The governor's house is both
+beautiful and convenient, and there are several other good houses,
+both in the fort and the town. But, owing to the shallowness of the
+sea at this place, ships are obliged to ride above a league off,
+which is a great inconvenience, as the fort is of no use to defend the
+roads. The straits here are not above four leagues broad, and though
+the opposite coast of Sumatra is very low, it may easily be seen in
+a clear day: Hence the sea here is always quite smooth, except
+in squalls of wind, which are generally accompanied with thunder,
+lightning, and rain. These squalls, though violent, seldom last more
+than an hour.
+
+The country of Malacca produces nothing for exportation, except a
+little tin and elephants teeth; but has several excellent fruits and
+roots for the use of its inhabitants, and the refreshment of strangers
+who navigate this way. The pine-apples of Malacca are esteemed the
+best in the world, as they never offend the stomach; while those of
+other places, if eaten in the smallest excess, are apt to occasion
+surfeits. The _mangostein_ is a delicious fruit, almost in the shape
+of an apple. Its skin is thick and red, and when dried is an excellent
+astringent. The kernels, if they may be so called, are like cloves of
+garlic, of a most agreeable taste, but very cold. The _rambostan_ is
+a fruit about the size of a walnut, with a tough skin beset with
+capillaments,[3] and the pulp within is very savoury.
+
+[Footnote 3: This uncommon word is explained by Johnson, as "small
+threads or hairs growing in the middle of flowers, adorned with little
+knobs."--Here it may be supposed to mean that the fruit is hairy.--E.]
+
+There is a high mountain to the N.E. of Malacca, whence several rivers
+descend, that of Malacca being one of them, and all these have small
+quantities of gold in their channels. The inland inhabitants, called
+_Monacaboes_, are a barbarous and savage people, whose chief delight
+is in doing injury to their neighbours. On this account, the peasantry
+about Malacca sow no grain, except in inclosures defended by thickset
+prickly hedges or deep ditches: For, when the grain is ripe in the
+open plains, the Monacaboes never fail to set it on fire. These inland
+natives are much whiter than the Malays of the lower country; and the
+king of Johor, whose subjects they are or ought to be, has never been
+able to civilize them.
+
+When the Dutch finally attempted to conquer Malacca from the
+Portuguese, in alliance with the king of Johor, and besieged it both
+by sea and land, they found it too strong to be reduced by force, and
+thought it would be tedious to reduce it by famine. Hearing that the
+Portuguese governor was a sordid, avaricious wretch, much hated by the
+garrison, they tampered with him by letters, offering him mountains of
+gold to betray his trust, and at length struck a bargain with him for
+80,000 dollars, and to convey him to Batavia. Having in consequence of
+his treachery got into the fort, where they gave no quarter to any one
+found in arms, they dispatched the governor himself, to save payment
+of the promised bribe.
+
+The seventh government bestowed by the company is that of the Cape of
+Good Hope. The governor here is always one of the counsellors of the
+Indies, and has a council to assist him. This colony was taken from
+the Portuguese by the Dutch in 1653, and is justly esteemed one of the
+most important places in the hands of the company, though the profits
+derived from it are not comparable to what they derive from some of
+the islands in the East Indies. Formerly things were still worse, as
+the revenues of this settlement fell short of its expences. Yet the
+company could hardly carry on the trade to India, were it not in
+possession of this place, as here only the ships can meet with water
+and other refreshments on the outward and homeward-bound voyages; and
+these are indispensably necessary, especially for such ships as are
+distressed with the scurvy. This place so abounds in all sorts of
+provisions, that there never is any scarcity, notwithstanding the vast
+yearly demand, and all ships putting in here are supplied at moderate
+rates. These refreshments consist of beef, mutton, fowls, fruit,
+vegetables, wine, and every thing, in short, that is necessary, either
+for recovering the sick on shore, or recruiting the sea-stores for
+the continuance of the voyage out or home. In the space of a year, at
+least forty outward-bound ships touch here from Holland alone, and
+in these there cannot be less than eight or nine thousand people. The
+homeward-bound Dutch ships are not less than thirty-six yearly, in
+which there are about three thousand persons; not to mention
+foreign vessels, which likewise put in here, and have all kinds of
+refreshments furnished to them at reasonable rates. There are almost
+always some ships in this road, except in the months of May, June, and
+July, when the wind usually blows with great violence at N.W. and then
+the road is very dangerous.
+
+
+
+SECTION XI.
+
+_Account of the Directories of Coromandel, Surat, Bengal, and Persia._
+
+Having now given a short view of the governments in the disposal of
+the Dutch East-India Company, which are a kind of principalities, as
+each governor, with the advice and assistance of his council, is a
+kind of sovereign, and acts without controul through the whole extent
+of his jurisdiction, we are now to consider the other establishments
+of the company in India, for carrying on this extensive trade. In all
+the countries where their affairs require it, they have factories, in
+each of which there is a chief, with some title or other, having also
+a council to assist him in regard to matters of policy or trade. Among
+these, the directories of Coromandel, Surat, Bengal, and Persia are
+all of great importance, and the direction of them is attended with
+great profit. The directors have the same power with the governors,
+within their respective jurisdictions; only that they cannot execute
+any criminal sentences within the countries in which they reside, so
+that all criminals are executed on board ship, under the flag of the
+company.
+
+The directory of Coromandel is the first of the four, and has all the
+forts and factories belonging to the Dutch on that coast under
+his jurisdiction. Besides Negapatnam, on the southernmost point of
+Coromandel, and the fort of _Gueldria_, in which the director resides,
+they have factories at Guenepatnam, Sadraspatnam, Masulipatnam,
+Pelicol, Datskorom, Benlispatnam, Nagernauty, and Golconda. The Dutch
+director is a principal merchant, and if he discharges his office with
+reputation, he is commonly in a few years promoted to be one of
+the counsellors of the Indies. It is not uncommon for a governor
+or director in the Indies, in the space of a few years, to amass a
+fortune equal to the original capital of the company, or six millions
+and a half of guilders, or nearly L600,000 sterling.
+
+Formerly, the country of Coromandel was divided into a great number of
+principalities, and the little princes and chiefs imposed such heavy
+duties, and gave such interruptions to trade in other respects, as
+rendered the company very uneasy. But after the war of Golconda, which
+cost the company a great deal of money, yet ended to their advantage,
+these princes grow more tractable. At present, the kings of Bisnagar
+and Hassinga,[1] who are the most powerful in Coromandel, live in
+tolerably good terms with the Dutch and other European nations; the
+English and Danes having also a share in Coromandel, with several good
+fortresses for the protection of their trade.
+
+[Footnote 1: This seems to be a misprint for Narsinga, otherwise the
+Carnatic.--E.]
+
+The great trade carried on here is in cotton goods, as muslins,
+chintzes, and the like; in exchange for which the Dutch bring them
+spices, Japan copper, steel, gold-dust, sandal and _siampan_ woods.
+In this country, the inhabitants are some Pagans, some Mahomedans, and
+not a few Christians. The country is very fertile in rice, fruits,
+and herbs, and in every thing necessary to the support of man; but
+the weather is exceedingly hot during the eastern monsoon. All the
+manufactures of this country, purchased by the Dutch, are transported
+first to Batavia, whence they are sent home to Holland, and are thence
+distributed through all Germany and the north of Europe.
+
+The second and third directories are established at Hoogly on the
+Ganges, and at Surat on the western coast of India, both in the
+territories of the Great Mogul, and the two most important places
+of trade in all Asia. The Dutch, English, French, and other European
+natives trade to both, and have erected forts and magazines for their
+security and convenience. The best part of the trade is carried on by
+black merchants, who deal in all sorts of rich goods; such as opium,
+diamonds, rich stuffs, and all kinds of cotton cloths. The empire of
+the Great Mogul is of prodigious extent, and the countries under his
+dominion are esteemed the richest in the world. The air is tolerably
+pure, yet malignant fevers are common, generally attacking strangers
+as a kind of seasoning sickness, in which, if the patient escape the
+third day, he generally recovers.
+
+Most of the inhabitants of this country are tall black robust men, of
+gay and lively dispositions. In point of religion, many of them are
+idolaters, more of them Mahometans,[2] and some of them Christians.
+The idolaters are split into numerous sects, some of whom believe
+firmly in the metempsychosis, or transmigration of souls; for which
+reason they will not take away the life of any living creature, not
+even daring to kill a fly or a flea. They have even hospitals for
+worn-out oxen and old cows, where they are fed and attended till they
+die of age or disease. These people are in general very industrious,
+but covetous, false, and perfidious. They employ themselves, such as
+reside in towns, in the manufactures of silk and cotton; and those
+who live in the country are very diligent cultivators, so that they
+annually expect from hence vast quantities of grain to Batavia.
+
+[Footnote 2: This is an obvious mistake, as by far the greater part of
+the population is idolatrous.--E.]
+
+The Great Mogul is one of the richest and most powerful princes in the
+world, having a most magnificent court, and a numerous army always
+on foot. The directors at Bengal and Surat know perfectly well how
+to deal with him, and, by making shewy presents, procure valuable
+diamonds and other precious stones in return. Surat is a town of no
+great antiquity, yet very large and immensely rich. It is in compass
+about five miles within the walls, and is computed to contain about
+200,000 inhabitants. The Moorish and even the Indian merchants
+here are many of them prodigiously rich. The former chiefly addict
+themselves to the diamond trade, which is very precarious; for
+sometimes a small stock produces an immense fortune, while at other
+times, a man wastes immense sums without finding stones of any great
+value: For, at the diamond-mines, the adventurers purchase so many
+yards square at a certain price, employing slaves to dig and lift the
+earth, taking whatever stones are found in that spot; which sometimes
+are of great value, and sometimes so few and small as not to pay
+costs. Other Moorish merchants deal largely in foreign trade, and
+as the Mogul is a very easy master, some of them acquire prodigious
+wealth, and carry on commerce to such an extent as can scarce be
+credited in Europe. About twenty years ago, [that is, about the year
+1700,] there died a Moorish merchant at Surat, who used yearly to
+fit out twenty sail of ships, from three to eight hundred tons, the
+cargoes of each of which were in value from ten to twenty thousand
+pounds, and who always retained goods in his warehouses equal in
+value to what he sent away. The customs of Surat amount every year to
+upwards of L. 160,000 sterling, and, as the merchants pay three per
+cent. at a medium, the value of the goods must exceed five millions
+yearly.
+
+The fourth and last factory under a director, is that of Gambroon or
+Bendar-abassi on the coast of Persia. The director here is always a
+principal merchant, having a council and a fiscal to assist him. As
+this city stands on the Persian gulf or sea of Basora, being the only
+port of Persia on the Indian sea, and lies at a great distance from
+Batavia, this direction is not so much sought after as others; and
+besides, the heat at this place is greater than in any part of the
+world, and the air is excessively unwholesome. To balance these
+inconveniences, the director at Gambroon has an opportunity of making
+a vast fortune in a short time, so that in general, in four or five
+years, he has no farther occasion to concern himself in commerce.
+There are several other European nations settled here besides the
+Dutch, but they have by far the best factory, and have fortified it so
+effectually, that the inhabitants of the neighbouring mountains, who
+are a crew of bold and barbarous robbers, have never been able to gain
+possession of it, though they have made frequent attempts. The king
+of Persia, who reigned about 1722, came sometimes to Gambroon, and
+distinguished the Dutch above the other European nations by many marks
+of his favour, and by the grant of many privileges. Some time before
+that period, he sent a gold saddle very richly wrought, and adorned
+with precious stones, a present to the governor of Batavia, desiring
+in return an European habit for himself and another for his queen.
+
+Gambroon is a disagreeable place to live in, as in August it is
+unbearably hot; and yet the winter is so cold that they wear English
+cloth lined with furs. They have here beeves, sheep, goats, poultry,
+and fish, all good of their kinds, and tolerably cheap. They have also
+grapes, melons, and mangoes in the utmost perfection, and excellent
+wine, which is esteemed superior to that of all other countries,
+insomuch that it still preserves its flavour after being diluted with
+four times its quantity of water. At the time when our author was in
+India, intestine wars raged to such a degree in Persia, that a ship
+had to be constantly stationed at Gambroon to bring off the factory,
+in case of danger. Another inconvenience to the trade on this
+coast proceeded from the multitude of pirates on those seas, mostly
+Europeans, who, having run away with the ships of their owners,
+subsisted by robbing all nations. Among these at this time was a stout
+ship named the Hare, which had been sent from Batavia to Persia: But
+the crew mutinied, and forced their officers to turn pirates. After
+committing many depredations on this coast, they sailed to the
+Red-Sea, where they attacked and plundered many Arabian pirates. At
+length, being short of provisions, and not daring to put into any
+port, they resolved to return; and finding themselves also in want
+of water, they resolved to supply themselves at an island. With this
+view, most of them crowded into the pinnace and put off from the ship,
+which gave an opportunity to the officers to resume their authority;
+wherefore they cut the cable, and brought the ship into the harbour
+of Gambroon, by which means the ship and cargo were restored to the
+Company.
+
+In 1701, the Ballorches, who rebelled against the Shah, attempted
+to make themselves masters of the English and Dutch factories at
+Gambroon, with a body of four thousand men, but were beat off at both
+places; but a warehouse belonging to the Dutch, at some distance from
+the factory, fell into their hands, in which were goods to the value
+of twenty thousand pounds. A short time afterwards, the famous rebel
+_Meriweys_ made himself master of Ispahan, where he plundered both the
+English and Dutch factories, taking from the former goods to the value
+of half a million, and from the latter to the value of two hundred
+thousand pounds.
+
+
+
+SECTION XII.
+
+_Account of the Commanderies of Malabar, Gallo, Java, and Bantam._
+
+In such subordinate places as were not thought of sufficient
+consequence to require a governor or director, the Dutch East India
+Company has established another principal officer, with the title of
+chief or commander. If the person entrusted with this authority be a
+merchant, he is accountable for his conduct to the civil government,
+but if a captain, to the military establishment. A chief or commander,
+in conjunction with his council, has nearly the same authority with
+a governor, except that he cannot execute any capital judgment on
+criminals, till the case has been reviewed and confirmed by the
+council at Batavia.
+
+At the time when our author was in India, the commander at the fort of
+Cochin on the Malabar coast, was Captain Julius de Golints, a native
+of Mecklenburg, from whom he received great civilities. Malabar was
+the first country discovered by the Portuguese in India, and in which
+they established themselves, not without great effusion of blood, nor
+were they many years in possession till they were driven out by the
+Dutch. These conquerors, in their turn, found it very difficult to
+support themselves against the natives, who attacked them with great
+spirit and success, and had infallibly driven them out of the country,
+but for the courage and conduct of Major John Bergman, who preserved
+their establishments with much difficulty.
+
+Though very warm, the climate of Malabar is very healthy, and the soil
+is fertile in rice, fruit, and all sorts of herbs. It is divided into
+many principalities, among which the following are reckoned kingdoms;
+Cananore, Calicut, Cranganore, Cochin, Calicoulan, Porcaloulang, and
+Travancore. As the capital of the Dutch possessions in Malabar was the
+city of Cochin, it may be proper to describe this little kingdom as
+at that period. It reaches from _Chitway_ in the north, and extends
+twenty-four leagues to the southwards along the coast, being divided
+into a multitude of small islands by the streams which descend from
+the mountains of _Gatti_, [the Gauts.] These rivers have two great
+or principal mouths, one at Cranganore in the north, and the other at
+Cochin, in the south, distant thirty marine leagues from each other.
+The Portuguese were the first European nation who settled here, where
+they built a fine city on the river about three leagues from the sea;
+but the sea has since so gained on the land, that it is now not above
+an hundred paces from the city. This place is so pleasantly situated,
+that the Portuguese had a common saying, "That China was a good place
+to get money in, and Cochin a pleasant place to spend it at." The
+great number of islands formed by the rivers and canals, make fishing
+and fowling very amusing; and the mountains, which are at no great
+distance, are well stored with wild game. On the island of _Baypin_
+[Vaypen], there stands an old fort called _Pallapore_, for the purpose
+of inspecting all boats that pass between Cranganore and Cochin:
+And five leagues up the rivulets, there is a Romish church called
+_Varapoli_ [Virapell], served by French and Italian priests, and at
+which the bishop takes up his residence when he visits this part of
+the country. The _padre_, or superior priest at Virapell can raise
+four thousand men on occasion, all Christians of the church of Rome;
+but there are many more Christians of the church of St Thomas, who do
+not communicate with the Romanists.[1] About two leagues farther
+up than Virapell, towards the mountains, there is a place called
+_Firdalgo_,[2] on the side of a small but deep river, where the
+inhabitants of Cochin annually resort in the hot months of April and
+May to refresh themselves. The banks and bottom of the river here are
+clean sand, and the water is so clear that a small pebble stone may be
+seen at the bottom, in three fathoms water.
+
+[Footnote 1: A very interesting account of the remnant of an ancient
+Christian church in the Travancore country, a little to the southward
+of Cochin, has been lately published by Dr Buchanan, in a work named
+Christian Researches in India, which will be noticed more particularly
+in an after division of our Collection.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 2: Perhaps Bardello, about the distance mentioned in the
+text.--E.]
+
+All the water along this low flat coast, to the south of Cranganore,
+has the very bad quality of occasioning swelled legs to those who
+drink it. This disease sometimes only affects one leg, but sometimes
+both, and the swelling is often so great as to measure a yard round at
+the ancles. It occasions no pain, but great itching, neither does
+the swelled leg feel any heavier than that which occasionally remains
+unaffected. To avoid this disease, the Dutch who reside at Cochin,
+send boats daily to Virapell, from which they bring water in small
+casks of about ten or twelve gallons, to serve the city. This water is
+given free to the servants of the Company, but private persons have to
+pay six-pence for each cask-full, which is brought to their houses
+at that price. Still, however, both Dutch men and women are sometimes
+afflicted with this disease, and no means have hitherto been found
+out for prevention or cure. The old legend imputes this disease to the
+curse laid by St Thomas upon his murderers and their posterity, as
+an odious mark to distinguish them: But St Thomas was slain by the
+_Tilnigue_[3] priests at Miliapoor in Coromandel, above four hundred
+miles from this coast; and the natives there have no touch of this
+malady.
+
+[Footnote 3: This word ought assuredly to have been Telinga.--E.]
+
+Cochin is washed by the greatest outlet on this coast, and being
+near the sea, its situation is strong by nature, but art has not been
+wanting to strengthen it. As built by the Portugueze, it was a mile
+and a half long by a mile in breadth. The Dutch took it in 1662, when
+Heitloff van Chowz was commander of the forces by sea and land. The
+insolence of the Portuguese had made several of the neighbouring
+princes their enemies, who joined with the Dutch to drive them out of
+that country, and the king of Cochin in particular assisted them with
+twenty thousand men. Not long after the Dutch had invested the town,
+Van Chowz received notice of a peace having been concluded between
+Portugal and Holland, but kept the secret to himself and pushed on the
+siege. Having made a breach in the weakest part of the fortifications,
+he proceeded to a furious assault, which was kept up for eight days
+and nights incessantly, relieving the assailants every three hours,
+while the Portuguese were kept on continual duty the whole time, and
+were quite worn out with fatigue. Finding the city in danger of being
+taken by storm, the Portuguese at length capitulated and gave up the
+place. There were at this time four hundred topasses in the garrison,
+who had done good service to the Portuguese, but were not comprehended
+in the capitulation. On discovering this omission, and knowing the
+cruel and licentious character of the Dutch soldiery in India, they
+drew up close to the gate at which the Portuguese were to march out,
+and the Dutch to enter, declaring, unless they had equally favourable
+terms granted them with the Portugueze, they would massacre them all,
+and set fire to the town. The Dutch general not only granted them all
+they asked, but even offered to take those who had a mind into the
+Dutch pay, to which many of them assented. The very day after the
+surrender, a frigate came from Goa, with the articles of peace, and
+the Portuguese loudly complained of having been unfairly dealt with by
+Van Chowz; but he answered, that the Portuguese had acted in the same
+manner with the Dutch, only a few years before, in the capture of
+Pernambuco in Brazil. The English had at that time a factory in
+Cochin, but the Dutch ordered them immediately to remove with all
+their effects, which they accordingly did to their factory at Paniany.
+
+On gaining possession of Cochin, the Dutch thought it too extensive,
+and therefore contracted it to the size it is now, being hardly a
+tenth part of what it was before. It measures about 600 paces long,
+by 200 in breadth, and is fortified with seven large bastions and
+intermediate curtains, all the ramparts being so thick that they are
+planted with double rows of trees, to give shade in the hot season.
+Some of the streets built by the Portuguese still remain, together
+with a church, which is now used for the Dutch worship, the cathedral
+being converted into a warehouse. The house of the commandant is the
+only one built in the Dutch fashion, which is so near the river that
+the water washes some part of its walls. The flag-staff is placed on
+the steeple of the old cathedral, on a mast seventy-five feet high,
+above which is the staff, other sixty feet in length, so that the flag
+may be seen above seven leagues off at sea. The garrison of Cochin
+usually consists of three hundred men; and from Cape Comoras upwards,
+in all their forts and factories, they have five hundred soldiers,
+and an hundred seamen, all Europeans, besides some topasses and the
+militia. They procure their store of rice from Barcelore, because the
+Malabar rice will not keep above three months out of the husk,
+though it will keep twelve with the husk on. This part of the country
+produces great quantities of pepper, but it is lighter than that which
+grows more to the northwards. The forests in the interior affords good
+teak-wood for ship-building, and two woods, called _angelique_ and
+_prospect_, which make beautiful chests and cabinets, which are sent
+all over the coasts of western India. They have also iron and steel
+in plenty, and bees-wax for exportation. The sea and the rivers afford
+abundance of excellent fish of various kinds, which are sold very
+cheap.
+
+_Cranganore_, a little to the north of Cochin, stands upon a river
+about a league from the sea, and at this place the Dutch have a
+fort. This place is remarkable for having formerly been the seat of a
+_Jewish government_, and that nation was once so numerous here as to
+consist of 40,000 families, though now reduced to 4000. They have a
+synagogue about two miles from the city of Cochin, not far from the
+palace of the rajah, and in it they carefully preserve their records,
+engraven upon plates of copper in the Hebrew language; and when any
+of the characters decay, they are cut anew, so that they still possess
+their history down from the reign of Nebuchadnezzar to the present
+day. About the year 1695, _Mynheer van Reede_ had an abstract of this
+history translated from Hebrew into the Dutch language. They assert
+themselves to be of the tribe of Manasseh, a part of which was sent
+by Nebuchadnezzar to the most easterly province of his large empire,
+which is alleged to have reached Cape Comorin. Twenty thousand of them
+travelled from Babylon to this place in three years, and were civilly
+and hospitably treated by the inhabitants of Malabar, who allowed
+them liberty of conscience in religion, and the free exercise of their
+reason and industry in the management of their secular affairs. Having
+increased in numbers and riches, they at length, by policy or wealth,
+became masters of the small kingdom of Cranganore: And a particular
+family among them being much esteemed for wisdom and riches, two of
+that family were chosen by their elders and senators to govern the
+commonwealth, and to reign jointly over them. At length one of the
+brothers invited his colleague to a feast, at which he basely killed
+him, thinking to reign alone; but a son of the deceased slew the
+fratricide, after which the state fell into a democracy, which still
+continues among the Jews here. Their lands have, however, reverted for
+many years into the hands of the Malabars, and poverty and oppression
+have occasioned many of them to apostatise.
+
+Between Cranganore and Cochin there is an island called Baypin,
+[Vaypen] four leagues long, but in no part above two miles broad.
+The Dutch do not allow any vessels or boats to enter or go out at
+Cranganore, obliging all to use the river of Cochin, which is a
+quarter of a mile broad, and very deep, but has a bar on which there
+is no more than fourteen feet water at spring-tides. The inhabitants
+of this country are mostly idolaters, over whom the bramins or
+priests exercise great authority, which they much abuse, of which
+the following abominable custom is a strong instance. When any man
+marries, he is prohibited from bedding with his wife the first night,
+which function is performed in his stead by one of the bramins, or, if
+none of these be at hand, by some other man. Foreigners used formerly
+to be often employed on these occasions, as the Malabars made choice
+of them instead of their own countrymen, often making large presents
+to the substitutes, sometimes to the value of forty or fifty pounds.
+But of late the bramins have become so very religious, that they
+never fail to execute this duty themselves. Besides this, the bramins
+frequent the company of the women so much, that no one of their
+religion can pretend to know his own father with any certainty. For
+which reason, by the laws of this country, sons or daughters never
+inherit from the husbands of their mothers, but the heritage always
+goes, to nephews and nieces, by sisters of the deceased born of the
+same mother, as certainly of his blood. This rule is observed also
+in the order of succession in their royal families, and is a glaring
+proof of the strange effects of boundless superstition.[4]
+
+[Footnote 4: This strange custom has been differently related
+formerly, and we believe more accurately, as prevalent only in the
+Nayra tribe, in which the women are allowed several husbands at the
+same time, and may change them at pleasure.--E.]
+
+The next commandery is _Gallo_, or Point de Galle, on the island of
+Ceylon, at the distance of about twenty leagues from Columbo, the
+Dutch capital of that island. Gallo was the first place in Ceylon
+taken from the Portuguese by the Dutch, and still is a place of
+considerable trade. The commander at this place is entirely
+dependent upon the governor of Ceylon, and can do nothing without his
+approbation. About the year 1672, Lewis XIV. sent out a squadron of
+eight frigates, with orders to make themselves master of this place,
+this project having been proposed to the court of France by one
+Mynheer Jan Martin, who had served the Dutch East India Company for
+many years, and had quitted their service on some disgust. When
+the royal orders came to be opened at sea, Martin found that the
+government was to be vested in another person, in case the place were
+taken, on which he took such measures as frustrated the object of the
+expedition. Mynheer van Cosse, who then commanded the Dutch fleet,
+soon arrived on the coast, and the French retired without venturing
+an engagement. They went to _Trankamala_, or _Trinconomalee_, and
+anchored in the bay of that name, meaning to force the garrison of
+that small fort to surrender: But Van Cosse soon followed them, and
+brought them to action while disadvantageously situated in the bay,
+and either sank or burnt half of the French fleet. The rest fled to
+St Thomas, on the coast of Coromandel, intending to have formed a
+settlement there; but Van Cosse again followed them to that place and
+seized all their ships, many of their guns having been carried ashore,
+as were at this time a great number of their officers and men. The
+French who were on shore capitulated with the Dutch to quit India, on
+being allowed shipping to carry them home, which Van Cosse agreed to,
+giving them his flag-ship, the _Groote Britanye_, and two others, for
+that purpose. Martin was detained and carried to Batavia, where he was
+confined for life on an allowance of a rix-dollar a-day.
+
+The next commandery is that of Samarang, on the island of Java, and
+he who commands here has the direction of all the factories in that
+island, except those which depend immediately on the government of
+Batavia. _Kuttasura_, which is the residence of the emperor of Java,
+is within his jurisdiction. In the year 1704, a war broke out in Java
+between the brother and son of the deceased emperor, as competitors
+for the succession, which lasted twenty years. The Dutch sided with
+the former, but the affections of the natives were with the latter,
+who drew over to his party a great number of the native soldiers who
+had served under the Dutch, and who, being well disciplined, behaved
+gallantly on all occasions, and gave the Dutch much trouble.
+
+At _Bantam_, on the same island, the Dutch have a strong fort with a
+numerous garrison, to keep the people in awe, who are very mutinous,
+and far from being well affected to the Dutch government. The king,
+or rajah of Bantam, has also a fort only a few hundred paces from that
+belonging to the Dutch, in which be keeps a numerous garrison for the
+security of his person. The only commodity of this part of the country
+is pepper, of which they are able to export 10,000 tons yearly. The
+king is obliged to supply the company with a certain quantity of
+pepper yearly; but in all other respects they treat him kindly enough.
+His dominions are extensive and well peopled, and his subjects are
+hardy and enterprising, but perfidious and revengeful, and mortally
+hate all Christians. The bay of Bantam is safe and pleasant, having
+many islands, which still retain the names given them by the English,
+who had a fine factory here, from which they were expelled in 1683.
+The territory of Bantam is very fertile, abounding in rice, pepper,
+fruits, and cattle. In the interior of the country the natives
+sometimes find precious stones of great value, of which however the
+Dutch rarely get possession, as the people fear they might be
+induced to extend their conquests, by which they are already greatly
+oppressed. The head of the factory at this place has the title of
+chief.
+
+Another Dutch chief resides at _Padang_, on that part of the coast of
+Sumatra which is called the _gold-coast_. This chief has a council
+and fiscal like all the rest, and his post is considered as both
+honourable and profitable. Sumatra is a very large fine island,
+separated from the continent of Asia by the Straits of Malacca,
+and from the island of Java by the Straits of Sunda, and is justly
+esteemed one of the richest and noblest islands in all India. The
+Dutch have a factory at Palambaugan, about eight leagues from the sea,
+on the banks of a very large river, which empties itself into the
+sea by four different channels. The great trade of this part of the
+country is in pepper, which the Dutch company wish to monopolize, as
+they have done cloves, nutmegs, mace, and cinnamon; and are at great
+expence in keeping several armed barks cruising at the mouths of this
+river, to prevent what they are pleased to call smuggling. It must
+be allowed, however, that they have a contract with the king of this
+country to take all the pepper in his dominions, at the rate of ten
+dollars the bahar of 400 pounds weight, which is a fair price.[5] They
+have, however, a clause in the contract, by which half the price is to
+be paid in cloth, at such rates as greatly reduce the cost.
+
+[Footnote 5: Exactly five farthings and two-fifths of a farthing the
+pound.--E.]
+
+The interior of the island is very mountainous, but most of the
+mountains abound in mines of gold, silver, lead, and other metals. The
+company possesses some mines of gold, said to be very rich, and great
+care is taken to secure and conceal the profits. Gold-dust is found
+in great quantities in all the rivers and rivulets of the country,
+especially when the western monsoon reigns, when the torrents roll
+down from the mountains with great rapidity. Abundance of copper
+is also found here, of which they make very good cannon. There are
+likewise found several sorts of precious stones. There is a burning
+mountain on the island, which continually throws forth flame and
+smoke, like Etna in Sicily; and there is said to be a fountain of
+balsam, or petroleum. This island abounds also in spice and silk; but
+the air is not very wholesome, especially to strangers, owing to the
+great numbers of rivers, standing waters, and thick forests, which
+every where abound. It produces no wheat, nor any other of the grains
+which grow in Europe; but has plenty of rice, millet, and fruits,
+which afford good and sufficient nourishment for the inhabitants. It
+produces also, in great abundance, honey, bees-wax, ginger, camphor,
+cassia, pepper, and many Other valuable articles. It is of great
+extent, being 310 leagues long from N.W. to S.E. and about 50 leagues
+across at an average. The greatest sovereign in the island is the king
+of _Acheen, Atcheen_, or Achem, who resides in a city of that name
+at the N.W. end of the island. It was formerly always governed by a
+woman, and it is not above forty years ago since the government fell
+into the hands of a man, since which several attempts have been made
+to restore the old constitution. Acheen is a free port, to which the
+English, Dutch, Portuguese, and Chinese resort, and in short all the
+trading nations of Europe and Asia. The goods brought there are rich
+brocades, silks of all kinds, muslins of all sorts, raw silk, fish,
+butter, oil, and ammunition, for which the payments are mostly made in
+gold, the great commodity of the country, and remarkably fine.
+
+During the western monsoon, the rains fall here with prodigious
+violence, attended with terrible storms of thunder and lightning, and
+frequent earthquakes; but the people, being used to them, are not much
+alarmed. The nations are, generally speaking, Mahometans, and are very
+expert in making all sorts of plate and ornaments in gold, with very
+few tools, yet with such inimitable dexterity, that their workmanship
+sells at a high rate all over India. The company sends a great number
+of slaves to this island every year to work in their gold-mines; but
+the kings in that part of the country are seldom on good terms with
+the Dutch, with whom they often quarrel. The principal places where
+gold is found are _Trion_ and _Manicabo_, and the way in which they
+procure the gold is as follows:--They dig trenches at the bottoms of
+the hills, so as to intercept the torrents which roll rapidly down
+their sides in the winter months: and having drained off the water
+from the ditches in summer, they find considerable quantities of
+gold-dust in the mud which remains. It is generally believed that this
+island furnishes annually 5000 pounds weight of gold-dust,[6] yet
+very little of this quantity is ever brought to Europe, being mostly
+employed by the servants of the East India Company in making purchases
+of commodities in places where gold bears a high price.
+
+[Footnote 6: Supposing these troy pounds, the value may be estimated
+at L. 240,000 sterling.--E.]
+
+The Dutch East India Company has long entertained a project of
+building ships at this island, as its timber is so good that ships
+built here are expected to last forty or fifty years, whereas those of
+Europe seldom last more than twelve or thirteen years. The Dutch have
+a strong fort and great factory at _Jambee_, and another at _Siack_,
+both in this island. This last place is excessively unwholesome, owing
+to the following circumstance, which certainly might be obviated. It
+stands on the great river Andragheira, into which, at one season of
+the year, there come vast shoals of large shads, a third part of
+their bulk being composed of their _roes_, which are accounted a great
+delicacy. Wherefore, after taking these out, the rest of the fish is
+thrown away, and as these lie in great heaps to corrupt, they exhale
+pestilential vapours and infect the air. The persons, therefore, who
+are sent to reside at Siack, are much of the same description
+with those formerly mentioned as sent to Banda, being of abandoned
+characters and desperate fortunes. There is another very considerable
+factory on the river Bencalis, which produces a large profit from the
+sale of cloth and opium, for which gold-dust is received in payment.
+This trade was discovered about forty years ago, that is, about
+the year 1680, by a factor, who carried it on privately for his own
+emolument for ten years, during which he acquired upwards of a _ton
+of gold_ yearly, a Dutch phrase implying L. 10,000 sterling. He then
+resolved to secure what he had got by making a disclosure of this
+valuable branch of traffic to the company. There are also several
+Dutch establishments on what is called the _West-coast_ of Sumatra.
+
+A very powerful and warlike people subsists in this island, known to
+Europeans by the name of the _Free-nation_, who are equally averse
+from submitting either to the Sumatran sovereigns or Europeans,
+and have always defended themselves valiantly against both. All the
+natives of Sumatra are much more inclined to the English than the
+Dutch, perhaps because they are not under subjection to the former.
+But the latter use every precaution they can to prevent the natives
+from dealing with any except themselves. For a considerable time past,
+the chiefs at Padang have been so unlucky as to have their honesty
+much suspected, chiefly owing to their management of the mines, which
+do not turn out greatly to the profit of the company, while all their
+officers gain immense sums out of them, which the councils at Batavia
+are much dissatisfied with, yet cannot prevent. For this reason they
+change the chief very frequently, yet to little purpose.
+
+
+
+SECTION XIII.
+
+_Some Account of the Residences of Cheribon, Siam, and Mockha._
+
+The chiefs of those factories belonging to the Dutch in India are
+termed _Residents_, and correspond directly with the governor-general
+at Batavia, and are not dependent on any subordinate governor or
+director. The first of these independent residents is fixed at
+_Cheribon_, on the coast of Java, at the distance of about forty
+leagues from Batavia, where a very advantageous commerce is carried on
+by the company in coffee, cardamoms, indigo, and cotton. The land at
+this place is as fertile in rice and other provisions as perhaps any
+country in the world. This district is of considerable extent, and was
+formerly under the dominion of four great lords, who used to be
+styled _pangerans_, but have now the titles of sultans, though their
+authority is not much extended by these more splendid titles. One of
+these is called the company's sultan, because always attached to the
+interests of the company, though in truth they might all get the same
+appellation, as they are all under the protection of the company, and
+freed from apprehensions of the king of Bantam, who used formerly
+to be continually at war with them, and must have reduced them under
+subjection, but for the assistance of the Dutch. Since then, both from
+gratitude for past favours, and in expectation of future protection,
+they have granted great privileges to the company in their dominions.
+The company maintains a fort at Cheribon, with a garrison of sixty
+men, and has an excellent factory.
+
+About half a league from the fort of Cheribon, the tombs of the
+princes of Cheribon stand in a vast temple, splendidly built of
+various fine kinds of stone, and are said to contain vast riches,
+yet are left unguarded, from an idea that they are protected by some
+supernatural power; and they tell strange stories of persons having
+dropt down dead, on approaching the places where these riches are
+hidden, with an intention to steal. Many people believe that the
+Javanese priests, who are Mahometans, have the power of causing sudden
+death by means of incantations; and that they are able to enchant
+crocodiles and serpents, causing the former to go into and out of the
+water at command, and the latter to remain in any posture they please.
+A great number of priests are maintained about this great temple, many
+of whom have made the pilgrimage to Mecca, and are therefore held in
+much veneration. These priests are all governed by a sovereign pontiff
+or mufti, who is even more respected than the sultans. There was
+formerly a considerable English factory at Cheribon, having a small
+town belonging to it: But the persons of the factory so provoked the
+people, by intriguing with their wives, that they rose one night and
+massacred them all. Perhaps this might have been set on foot by their
+Dutch neighbours.
+
+Another resident has the direction of the company's affairs in the
+kingdom of Siam, where the company carries on a considerable trade in
+tin, lead, elephants-teeth, gum-lac, _wool_,[1] and other commodities.
+The king of Siam is a prince of considerable power, and his dominions
+extend nearly 300 leagues. Being favourable to commerce, all nations
+are allowed to trade freely in his country; but ships of no great
+burden are forced to anchor at the distance of sixty leagues from his
+capital; because the river _Menan_, on which it is situated, is so
+rapid that they find great difficulty in getting higher up. This
+river, like the Nile and many others, overflows its banks at a certain
+season, so that most of the country is under water for half the year,
+for which reason all the houses are built on posts. The capital is a
+large city, consisting at least of 50,000 houses, with a prodigious
+number of temples.[2] The natives are all pagans, and hold this
+singular maxim, "That all religions are good, provided they tend to
+the honour of God." They think, however, that their own is the best;
+though they sometimes own that the God of the Christians is most
+powerful, because the head of their principal idol has been twice
+beaten to pieces by thunder. This is perhaps the largest idol in the
+world, and is called by the Dutch in derision, _The great blockhead of
+Lust_. He is represented sitting cross-legged like a tailor; in which
+posture he measures seventy feet high, and every one of his fingers
+is as large as the body of a man. About three leagues from the capital
+there is a temple of vast size, having an idol not quite so large as
+the other, which the priests say is his wife; and that once in seven
+years, one of these goes to visit the other. The priests also pretend
+that both of these idols are of solid gold; but the thunder-clap,
+which destroyed the head of the larger idol detected that part of the
+cheat, shewing it to be only brick and lime, very artificially gilded
+all over. One may justly wonder that this accident did not put an end
+to the adoration of so wretched a deity; but where superstition once
+prevails the plainest proofs very seldom produce any effect.
+
+[Footnote 1: Perhaps cotton, often termed _cotton-wool_, ought to have
+been here substituted.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 2: In Harris the temples are stated at 30,000.--E.]
+
+The country of Siam is very rich and fertile, and there is a
+considerable trade carried on here by the Chinese. The Dutch have here
+considerable privileges, and are the favoured nation, especially since
+the great revolution, when they got into great favour with the new
+king, because the English had been entrusted by his predecessor, whom
+he murdered, with the best places in the government, both civil and
+military. The Dutch have a factory on the side of the river, about a
+mile below the city, where they collect great numbers of deer-skins;
+which are sent annually to Japan. The Siamese are themselves much
+addicted to trade, and the Chinese who reside here still more; so that
+they send ships every year to Japan, which, considering the difficulty
+of the navigation, is not a little extraordinary. The Siamese boast of
+having used the compass above a thousand years before it was known
+in Europe: But the Jesuits very justly observe, that the Siamese and
+Chinese compasses are very imperfect.
+
+The third resident is fixed at _Mokha_, being always a merchant,
+having two factors under him. This country is under the government
+of an Arab prince, styled _Imaum_, who resides in the inland country,
+about 200 miles east from Mokha. The sea-port of his dominions was
+formerly Aden; but as that was found very inconvenient, he removed the
+trade to Mokha, then only a fishing village. Mokha is situated close
+to the sea, in a large dry sandy plain, which affords neither fruits
+nor water, except what is brackish and unwholesome, and those who are
+forced to drink it have long worms bred in their legs and feet, which
+are very troublesome and dangerous. The town is supplied with very
+good and wholesome water from _Musa_, a town at the distance of twenty
+miles; but it is so dear, being brought by land carriage; that it
+costs as much as small beer does in England. Mokha is large, and makes
+a fine appearance from the sea, the buildings being lofty, but they
+look much better without than within. The markets are well supplied
+with provisions, such as beef, mutton, goats, kid, lamb, and camels
+flesh, antelopes, poultry, guinea-fowls, partridges, and pigeons. The
+sea affords a variety of fish, but not well tasted, owing probably
+to the nature of their food. It is also furnished all the year with
+excellent fruits, as grapes, peaches, apricots, and quinces, of which
+they make great quantities of marmalade, both for their own use and
+exportation. Yet there is neither tree nor shrub to be seen near the
+town, except a few date-trees, and they seldom have above two or three
+showers of rain in a year, sometimes no rain for two or three years.
+Among the mountains, however, about twenty miles inland, seldom a
+morning passes without a moderate shower, which makes the vallies very
+fertile in such corn and fruits as suit the soil and climate. They
+have plenty of wheat and barley, but no rice.
+
+Since Mokha has been made a free port, it has become a place of great
+trade. Besides the Dutch factory, it has one belonging to the English
+East-India Company. Trade is also carried on here by English free
+merchants, by Portuguese, Banians, and Moors; also by vessels
+from Basora, Persia, and Muskat. The country itself produces few
+commodities, except coffee and some drugs, as myrrh, olibanum or
+frankincense from _Cossin_, Soccotrine aloes from Soccotora, liquid
+storax, white and yellow arsenic, some gum-arabic, mummy, and balm
+of gilead, these two last being brought down the Red Sea. The coffee
+trade brings a continual supply of gold and silver from Europe,
+particularly Spanish money, German crowns, and other European silver
+coins, with chequins and German and Hungarian gold ducats, and
+_ebramies_ and _magrabees_ of Turkey. It is a settled point here,
+though other goods may be bought and sold on credit for a certain
+time, coffee must always be paid for in ready money. The European
+shipping that comes here annually rather exceeds 20,000 tons, and that
+belonging to other nations may amount to nearly the same tonnage. The
+whole province of _Betlefackee_ is planted with coffee-trees, which
+are never allowed to grow above four or five yards high. The berries
+cling to the branches like so many insects, and are shaken off when
+ripe. They are at first green, then red, and lastly of a dark-brown
+colour.
+
+The Dutch have here a great advantage over all other nations, in
+consequence of their monopoly of the spice-trade, as these are
+consumed here in great quantities, which consequently enables them to
+procure coffee at much easier rates than other nations. Yet this trade
+of Mokha is continually falling off, owing to the vast quantities
+of coffee produced in their own plantations, especially at Batavia,
+Amboina, and the Cape of Good Hope: Even the Dutch, however,
+acknowledge that there is no comparison between the coffee raised on
+their own plantations and that brought from Mokha.
+
+The _Happy Arabia_ is divided into many small territories, under
+independent princes, styled Emirs, who all pay a kind of homage, but
+no obedience, to the Grand Signor or Emperor of the Turks. The Red Sea
+gets this name from several parts of it being of a red colour, owing
+to its bottom in these parts.
+
+
+
+SECTION XIV.
+
+_Of the Trade of the Dutch in Borneo and China._
+
+_Borneo_ is the largest island in the East Indies, perhaps the largest
+in the world, being 220 marine leagues from N. to S. and 170 leagues
+from E. to W. It is divided into many small principalities, of which
+the most powerful is the king of _Banjaar Masseen_, and after him the
+kings of _Borneo_ and _Sambas_. The air is reckoned very unwholesome
+in some places, on account of being low and marshy; and it is only
+thinly peopled, though abounding in very rich commodities. On the
+first establishment of the Dutch in India, they were very solicitous
+to have factories in this island, and accordingly fixed three, at the
+cities of Borneo, Sambas, and Succadanea; but they soon found it was
+impossible to have any dealings with the natives, who certainly
+are the basest, crudest, and most perfidious people in the world;
+wherefore they quitted the island, and though several times invited
+back, have absolutely refused to return. The commerce of Borneo is
+as rich as any in India. At Sambas and Banjaar Masseen they deal in
+diamonds, of which there is a mine in the interior country. These
+stones generally run from four to twenty-four carats each, though some
+are found as high as thirty and even forty carats; but the whole trade
+does not exceed 600 carats yearly. They always sell these stones
+for gold, though that is a commodity of the island, and there is a
+considerable trade in gold-dust at Pahang, Saya, Calantan, Seribas,
+Catra, and Melanouba. Bezoar is another principal article of their
+trade. Japan wood, fine wax, incense, mastic, and several other rich
+gums, are here met with; but the staple commodity is pepper, which
+this island produces in as great abundance as any place in India.
+A drug is met with in this island, called _piedro de porco_, or
+pork-stone, so highly esteemed as to be worth 300 crowns each; as the
+Indian physicians pretend that they can infallibly discover whether
+their patients are to live or die, by exhibiting to them the water in
+which this stone has been steeped.
+
+Before the Portuguese discovered the way by sea to India, the Chinese
+possessed the whole trade of this island, and since the Europeans
+have declined settling here, it has reverted to them again. The places
+where they are settled are Banjaar Masseen, Mampua, Teya, Lando, and
+Sambas, where they parry on a great trade, furnishing the inhabitants
+with silks, chintz, calico, and all the manufactures of China and
+Japan. It has been suggested, that a more valuable trade might be
+established in Borneo than in any other part of India, as there come
+here every year large fleets of Chinese junks, laden with all the
+commodities of that empire, which might be purchased here as cheap, or
+cheaper even than in China itself. There come also yearly some small
+vessels from the island of Celebes to Borneo, in spite of the utmost
+vigilance of the Dutch, which bring considerable quantities of cloves,
+nutmegs, and mace, so that the Dutch are unable to sell much of these
+spices to the inhabitants: Yet they send ships here frequently to load
+with pepper, endeavouring to keep up a good correspondence with the
+kings of Borneo and Sambas, for the king of Banjaar Masseen refuses to
+have any dealings with them.
+
+Considering the vast sway of the Dutch in India, it is strange that
+they should not have any factory in China. They have indeed formerly
+sent ambassadors to that country, under pretence of demanding a free
+trade, but in reality on purpose to gain a more accurate knowledge of
+the nature of trade in China, and in consequence of their discoveries
+in that manner, have been induced to decline entering upon any direct
+trade to that country. While they were possessed of the island of
+Formosa, they carried on a direct trade to China with great profit:
+But, since their expulsion from that island in 1661, they have
+not been able to make that trade turn out profitable. After the
+establishment of the Ostend East-India Company, they tried to send
+ships to China, direct from Holland; but even this came to no great
+account, the profit having seldom exceeded twenty-five per cent.
+which, considering the hazard of so long a voyage, was not considered
+a very encouraging return. It has been doubted whether the Dutch were
+able to deal with the Chinese, where both nations are upon an equal
+footing, as the latter are certainly the cunningest of men: Besides,
+the Chinese are less inclined to deal with the Dutch than with any
+other Europeans; and, when they do, always hold them to harder terms.
+The port charges also in China, and the presents they are obliged to
+make, cut deep into their gains.
+
+Besides the foregoing circumstances, as China is at a great distance
+from Batavia, and as the officers of the Dutch ships can so easily
+consign their effects into the hands of the Portuguese, English,
+and other foreign merchants, they have been found to mind their own
+affairs much more than those of the Company. But the principal
+reason of avoiding the trade to China is, that the Chinese carry on
+a prodigious trade with Batavia; and though the voyage exceeds 550
+leagues, the Chinese junks make the run in six weeks, sailing from
+Canton in the beginning of December, and arriving at Batavia in the
+middle of January. The company has in the first place a duty of four
+per cent. on all the goods brought by the Chinese, which are gold,
+silks of all sorts, tea, anniseed, musk, rhubarb, copper, quicksilver,
+vermilion, china ware, &c. For which they receive in exchange lead,
+tin, pepper, incense, camphor, cloves, nutmegs, amber, and many
+other articles, on all which the Dutch fix their own prices, and
+consequently buy much cheaper than other nations can do in China. They
+have also found by experience, that a direct trade greatly lessens
+this more profitable mode at Batavia. They have also opportunities of
+dealing with the Chinese in many other parts of India, where, after
+the Chinese merchants have completed their sales to the natives, they
+are glad to part with the remainder of their commodities to the Dutch,
+at a cheap rate. Thus, the Dutch East-India Company are able to send
+home vast quantities of the commodities of China, and purchased on
+very advantageous terms, without trading directly to China, either
+from Holland or from Batavia.
+
+
+
+SECTION XV.
+
+_Of the Dutch Trade with Japan._
+
+A Dutch chief resides at Japan, who is always a principal merchant,
+and is assisted by some writers in the Company's service. The profit
+formerly made of this establishment by the Dutch East-India Company,
+frequently amounted to 80 and even 100 per cent. but has fallen off
+to such a degree, that they rarely make now, 1721, above eight or ten.
+This has been chiefly occasioned by the Chinese, who for some time
+past have purchased every kind of goods at Canton that are in demand
+in Japan, and it is even said that they have contracted with the
+Japanese to furnish them with all kinds of merchandize at as low
+prices as the Dutch. Another cause of the low profits is, that the
+Japanese fix the prices of all the goods they buy, and if their offer
+is not accepted, they desire the merchants to take them home again.
+This may possibly have been suggested to them by the Chinese, who
+used formerly to be treated in the same manner at Batavia. There is no
+place in all India where the Dutch have so little authority, or where
+their establishments are of so little consequence, as in Japan. They
+are allowed a small island to themselves, where they have warehouses
+for their goods, and a few ordinary houses for the members of the
+factory; but this island is a prison, in which they are completely
+shut up as long as they remain in Japan, not being permitted to pass
+the bridge that joins this island to the city of Naugasaque. The only
+shadow of liberty that is allowed them is, that their chief, with two
+or three attendants, goes once a-year as ambassador to the emperor.
+One great reason of this is said to have been occasioned by their
+using too great familiarities with the Japanese women; but the true
+reason is, that the Dutch have more than once given strong indications
+of an inclination to establish themselves in the country by force.
+
+A French gentleman, Monsieur Carron, who was for some time at the head
+of their factory in Japan, and who, in several journeys to the
+court, had ingratiated himself into the favour of the emperor,
+by entertaining him with accounts of the state of Europe, got his
+permission to build a house for the factory on the little island
+allotted to them. He accordly laid the fortifications of great extent,
+and continued the work till he had completed a handsome fortification,
+in form of a regular tetragon; and as the Japanese were quite ignorant
+in the art of fortification, they suffered it to be finished, without
+any suspicion of deceit. Carron now desired the council at Batavia
+to send him some cannon, packed in casks filled with oakum or cotton,
+along with some other casks of the same form filled with spices. This
+was done accordingly, but in rolling the casks after landing, one
+of them that contained a brass gun burst open, by which accident the
+cheat was discovered. This put an entire stop to all trade till the
+pleasure of the emperor was known. The emperor, without prohibiting
+trade, gave orders that no Dutchman should presume to stir out of the
+island on pain of death, and ordered Carron up to Jeddo, to answer for
+his fault. The emperor reproached him for abusing his favour; after
+which he ordered his beard to be pulled out by the roots, and that
+he should be led, dressed in a fool's coat and cap, through all the
+streets of the city. He was thus sent back to the factory, with orders
+to leave Japan in the first ship that sailed for Batavia.
+
+The island of _Desima_, where the Dutch reside, is divided from the
+city of Naugasaki by a small creek of salt water of about forty feet
+broad, over which there is a convenient bridge, having a draw-bridge
+at one end, of which the Japanese keep possession, and no Dutchman can
+pass this without leave from the governor of the city; neither
+dare any Japanese converse with the Dutch, except the merchants and
+factors, who have a licence for that purpose. For the security of the
+factory, the island of Desima is pallisaded all round. It contains
+four streets, with large warehouses, and a spacious market-place over
+against the bridge, where at stated times the town's people have leave
+to trade with the Dutch. So great is the jealousy entertained of the
+Dutch, that they are not even allowed to have the command of their own
+ships while in Japan: For, as soon as one of them enters the harbour,
+the Japanese take entire possession of her, taking out all the arms
+and ammunition, which they lay up on shore, and return again in good
+order, when the ship is ready to sail. They also exact a complete
+account of all the men on board, whom they muster by one of their own
+commissaries.
+
+Japan is well peopled, and produces every thing necessary for human
+sustenance in great plenty; yet the Dutch pay high for every thing
+they need, and have even to purchase wood for fuel by weight. The
+mountains are rich in gold, silver, and copper, which last is the best
+in the world. Their porcelain is finer than that of China, as also
+much thicker and heavier, with finer colours, and sells much dearer
+both in India and Europe. The tea of Japan, however, is not near so
+good as that of China. Their lackered ware, usually called Japan, is
+the best in the world, and some of it will even hold boiling water
+without being injured. They have abundance of silks, both raw and
+manufactured, much stronger than what is produced in China. Their
+houses are mostly built of wood, but the palace of the emperor is
+of marble, covered with copper, so remarkably well gilded that it
+withstands the weather many years. Jeddo is the metropolis, and its
+magnitude may be guessed from this circumstance, that in a great
+fire which raged in this city for eight days, about the year 1660, it
+consumed 120,000 houses, and 500 temples.
+
+The Japanese are strict observers of moral rules, especially in
+commercial matters; insomuch that merchants of reputation put up sums
+of gold _cupangs_, always in decimal numbers, in silken bags, sealed
+with their seals; and these bags always pass current for the several
+sums indicated by the seals, without any one ever examining the
+contents of the bags for several generations. These _cupangs_ are
+broad oblong pieces of gold, of about twenty shillings value in Japan;
+but gold is there so plentiful and cheap, in relation to silver, that
+a _cupang_ passes current in Batavia for thirty-two shillings; and,
+after being stampt with the lion of the Company, it passes for forty
+shillings sterling. The Japanese also are exact observers of justice,
+and punish crimes with extreme rigour. To a man of distinction,
+when found guilty of a capital crime, the emperor writes a letter,
+commanding him to become his own executioner, on an appointed day and
+hour, on penalty of being subjected to the most exquisite tortures,
+if he survive the appointed time. On receiving this mandate, the
+delinquent invites all his friends and near relations to a sumptuous
+feast on the set day. When the feast is over, he shows them the letter
+from the emperor, and, while they are reading it, he stabs himself
+with a dagger below the navel, and cuts open his belly to the breast
+bone. The capital punishments inflicted on the inferior people are
+hanging, beheading, or being flung over a precipice; and for smaller
+faults, whipping and branding are usual.
+
+The government of Japan would be well pleased to encourage trade with
+all nations, but for two considerations. The first is, lest their
+religion should be insulted, which was frequently the case from
+misguided zeal, while there were any Christians among the Japanese.
+The other proceeds from their aversion to strange customs, or to any
+innovation in the manners of the people, from which they dread the
+worst consequences. When the Dutch were first established in this
+empire, the then prime minister explained their opinions on this
+subject in the following manner: "We are well acquainted with the
+advantages resulting from the system of government established among
+us, and will on no account run the hazard of any change. We know that
+great revolutions are often brought about by imperceptible degrees,
+and are therefore resolved to cure the itch of novelty by the rod of
+chastisement." Upon this maxim a law is established in Japan, by
+which all the subjects of the empire are prohibited from leaving the
+country; or, if any do, they must never return. They are so wedded to
+their own customs and opinions, and so jealous of the introduction
+of any new or foreign customs, that they never send any embassies to
+other countries, neither do they allow their merchants to carry on
+commerce beyond their own country. A few small junks are sent in
+summer to the land of Yedso, a country about fifty leagues from the
+northern extremity of Japan; and it is said that they bring much gold
+from thence.
+
+There is but one good harbour in Japan, all the rest of the coast
+being so guarded by steep rocks or shoals, that they have no reason to
+fear being invaded. In point of military discipline and bravery, the
+Japanese far exceed the Chinese, and are by no means of so base and
+effeminate dispositions as most of the inhabitants of that great
+empire. The government also of Japan is perfectly uniform and well
+settled, so that there cannot be any diversity of interests; for,
+though several of its provinces are denominated kingdoms, yet all
+these petty kings are under the strictest subjection to the emperor,
+and the laws of the country extend over all. These laws pay the
+strictest regard to private property, the father transmitting to his
+children not only the patrimonial estate, but all the acquisitions of
+his own industry; and this is certainly a powerful prevention of any
+desire of change. Though the emperor resides at Jeddo, thirty days
+journey from Naugasaki, yet he receives intelligence in the space
+of three days, of the number and force of every ship that arrives,
+conveyed by a chain of signal-posts, by means of flags and fire
+beacons.
+
+The forms observed in business are wonderfully exact, and the edicts
+and orders of the emperor are signified in most expressive and
+dignified terms, containing very little of the bombast and swelling
+style so common among oriental courts. Yet, amid all their good sense
+and quick parts, the religion of the Japanese is the idlest and most
+ridiculous paganism that can well be imagined, of which the following
+is a sufficient proof. Every family has a tutelary deity or idol,
+which is placed at the top of the house, and instructed to keep off
+all sickness, misfortunes, or accidents: And when any such happen, the
+idol is taken down and whipt, for not doing its duty. _Amida_ is
+the name of their favourite god, his residence in heaven is at a
+prodigious distance, insomuch that it requires three years journey
+of a departed soul to reach paradise, which is only the outskirts or
+suburbs of heaven; but when once there, the soul is sure of getting
+to heaven, and enjoys a quiet residence in that place, as none of
+the fiends dare come there to give annoyance. They have several other
+gods, to all of whom they are particularly attached devotees; and each
+god has his own particular paradise, none nearer this world than three
+years journey. On purpose to gain an easy passage to these paradises,
+some of the zealots cut their own throats, and others hang themselves.
+Their idols are often carried in procession on horseback, attended
+by bands of music; and many feasts and sacrifices are made in their
+honour, the idols being fed on the smoke and flavour, while the
+votaries regale on the substantial meats.[1]
+
+[Footnote 1: Harris here subjoins a long enquiry into the nature of
+the Dutch commerce in Japan, in the form of answers to a number of
+queries on the subject: But as we shall have an opportunity, in
+a subsequent division of this work, to give much more ample and
+satisfactory accounts of these matters, by actual travellers in Japan,
+this has been omitted, as tedious and unsatisfactory.--E.]
+
+
+
+SECTION XVI.
+
+_Account of the Colony of the Cape of Good Hope._
+
+Nothing remarkable occurred to the author of this voyage, while on the
+way from Batavia to the Cape of Good Hope, except seeing the wreck of
+the Schonenberg, a ship belonging to the Company, which had been lost
+a little before.[2] On coming in sight of the Cape, they discovered
+many French, English, and Dutch ships at anchor in the roads, some
+outward-bound and some homewards. A little way from the entrance of
+the bay is a small island, on which there is always a guard composed
+of a serjeant and a small number of men. As soon as the serjeant sees
+what number of ships a fleet consists of, he hoists a flag, and fires
+so many pieces of cannon as there are ships in sight, to give notice
+to the commandant at the Cape. They are here employed in making
+train-oil, and in raking oyster-shells to burn into lime. Into this
+island, malefactors are generally banished from the Cape, and from
+most parts of India. Here, besides the punishment of being separated
+from all their friends, they are kept to the hardest labour.
+
+[Footnote 2: This is said to have been on the coast of Africa _at the
+height of Angola_, whither they were driven by a storm. But this could
+not possibly have been the case _before_ reaching the Cape of Good
+Hope.--E.]
+
+Table Bay is very fine and large, of a semi-oval form, entering
+several leagues into the land, and may be about nine leagues in
+circuit; but the anchorage is not every where equally good, and there
+is some danger near the shore. The middle of the bay is commanded by
+a very strong fort, being a regular pentagon, and each of its fine
+bastions mounts twenty pieces of heavy cannon. This fort and the town
+are situated on the edge of a plain about three leagues in extent,
+lying at the bottom of three very high mountains. The first of these
+is _Lion Mountain_, having some resemblance to a lion couchant. The
+second is _Table Mountain_, which is much higher, and has a broad flat
+top like a table, being so high that it may be seen twenty leagues out
+at sea in clear weather. The third is called the _Devil's Mountain_,
+and is not so remarkable as either of the other two. The houses of
+Cape Town are very neat and commodious, but are only built two stories
+high, on account of the furious winds at S.E. which sometimes blow
+here.
+
+About the year 1650, the Dutch East-India Company bought a certain
+district of this country from the Hottentots, its aboriginal
+inhabitants, and took care to have it immediately planted and well
+peopled, for the convenience of their ships, both outward and homeward
+bound. All the inhabitants of this colony are Europeans, or descended
+from Europeans. Some of the planters are settled at the distance of
+three hundred leagues from the Cape; yet all are obliged to appear
+once a-year at a place called Stellenbosch, where the _Drossart_ or
+magistrate of the country resides. They have here to pass in review,
+as all the peasants, as well as the towns-men, are formed into
+companies under proper officers. After the review is over, they go
+back to their respective plantations, generally carrying home with
+them what tools or other European articles they stand in need of.
+These people cultivate the ground, raising rye, barley, beans, and
+other grains. They also plant vines, which produce excellent grapes,
+of which they make very good wine. Some of these peasants are in
+very easy circumstances, having, besides large and well-cultivated
+plantations, great flocks of sheep and cattle.
+
+Among other colonists, there is one about eight leagues from Cape
+Town, at a place called _Drakenstein_, entirely composed of French
+refugees, who have a large tract of well cultivated ground, and are
+allowed churches and ministers of their own. Part of the inhabitants
+of Cape Town are in the service of the Company, and the rest are free
+burgesses. They have regular magistrates, who decide causes of small
+importance, and regulate any little disputes that happen among them;
+but affairs of moment are carried before the governor and council,
+who determine finally and without appeal. In the interior country, the
+drossart determines in things of small consequence; but all matters of
+importance must come before the governor and council, whose sentences,
+both in civil and criminal cases, are executed without delay. The
+officer who commands here in chief, has the rank and pay of major, yet
+does the duty in all respects of a major-general. The officers under
+him are captains, lieutenants, and ensigns, who take care to keep
+their companies always complete and well disciplined; and in case of
+attack, they can draw together five thousand men at least, all well
+armed and as good as regular troops: Each peasant knows where he has
+to repair to, in order to range himself under his proper standard.
+
+It is not easy to describe the expertness with which these peasants
+manage their fire-arms, an exercise in which they are constantly
+employed, even from their infancy; and it is almost incredible how
+boldly they attack even the fiercest animals. Many among them disdain
+to shoot a sleeping lion, because, as they say, it shows neither skill
+nor courage: When, therefore, they discover a lion asleep, they throw
+stones to waken him, and do not fire till he is on his feet. A little
+before the arrival of our author at the Cape, two peasants went out
+together to hunt. One of them, seeing a lion, fired at and missed him,
+when the lion rushed upon the man, who threw away his gun, to have
+more liberty to defend himself. The other peasant, on hearing the
+report, hastened to the place, and found his companion and the lion
+closely engaged; on which he snatched up the gun, and slew the lion
+by a few blows on the head, but broke the gun in pieces. The first
+peasant, whose property the gun was, complained loudly of its
+demolition, blamed his companion for coming up uncalled for, and even
+talked of making him pay for the gun, insisting that he could have
+slain the lion himself without aid. It was formerly considered a
+wonderful deed for a man to kill a lion; but now it is so common an
+occurrence, that they make no more of killing a lion, than we do of
+shooting a hare.
+
+The country about Cape Town is full of vineyards and gardens. Two
+of these belong to the company, which are perhaps the finest in the
+world. One is at the distance of two hundred paces from the fort,
+between the town and Table Mountain, being about 1400 paces in length,
+by 235 paces broad, and having a fine rivulet from the mountain
+running through the middle of it. It is divided into quarters, in
+which they cultivate, with the utmost success, the fruits and flowers
+of the four quarters of the globe. The other garden is about two
+leagues distant from the town, in what is called the _New Country_,
+and is likewise kept in excellent order by slaves belonging to the
+company, of whom there are seldom less than five hundred. The
+country hereabout is mountainous and stony; but the vallies are very
+agreeable, and extremely fertile. The climate is perhaps the best
+in the world, neither cold nor heat being ever felt here to any
+intolerable degree. The people accordingly live to great ages, and
+have hardly any diseases except such as proceed from intemperance of
+some kind. The mountains, which contribute to the wholesomeness of the
+country, are supposed to be rich in gold and other valuable metals.
+Some trials have been made; but as yet no mines have been discovered,
+or at least none in such situations as would permit their being worked
+to advantage.
+
+Mynheer van Steel, who was lately governor of this colony, travelled
+over the country, and examined it with much attention. He caused
+gardens to be laid out, and pleasure-houses to be built, in several
+places; but the peasants who were employed in building these houses
+and cultivating these gardens, sent over a representation and
+complaint to the company, alleging that these works were prejudicial
+to their private affairs, and prevented them from being able to
+maintain their families; upon which that governor was immediately
+recalled. His discoveries, however, were of great consequence, having
+made the interior country known to the Dutch, together with the
+nations or tribes by whom it is inhabited. These, so far as yet
+discovered, consist of seven different tribes, all comprehended under
+the general denomination of _Hottentots_. The first of these, and
+least considerable, who live in the neighbourhood of the Cape, have
+no chief, and are mostly either in the service of the company, or are
+employed as servants by the townsmen, or by the peasants and farmers
+in cultivating the lands, or tending their flocks and herds. The
+second tribe inhabit the mountains, or, more properly speaking,
+dwell in the caverns of the mountains, being thieves and robbers by
+profession, and subsist entirely by plundering the other Hottentots,
+with whom they are perpetually at war; yet never rob or molest the
+Christians. The other tribes are called the _Great_ and _Little
+Maqua_, and the _Great_ and _Little Kriqua_[2], and the _Caffres_.
+The words _Maqua_ and _Kriqua_ signify king or chief, and these four
+tribes are continually engaged in war against each other; but when
+any one nation is in danger of being totally ruined, other tribes
+immediately take up its cause; and these rude tribes seem to have a
+notion of maintaining a kind of balance of power.
+
+[Footnote 2: These tribes are known in geography by the names of
+Namaquas and Briquas, the latter being also called Booshuanas. The
+second tribe in this account are named Bosjemans by the Dutch.--E.]
+
+Such of the Hottentots as have submitted to the Hollanders are called
+the Company's Hottentots. The Dutch send every year fifty or sixty
+persons to trade among the Hottentots, who purchase their cattle,
+giving them in exchange arrack, tobacco, hemp, and such other things
+as they have occasion for; by which means a good understanding is kept
+up. These Hottentots of the Company are often attacked by the other
+tribes, and, when no longer able to defend themselves, their king
+or chief comes down to the Cape, attended by a small escort of his
+subjects, to demand assistance. He goes immediately to the governor,
+having in his hand the staff of command given him by the Company,
+decorated with their arms, and holding it in his hand, demands
+assistance. If the governor does not think proper to grant his
+request, but endeavours to shift him off with fair words, he throws
+down his staff saying, in bad Dutch, _Voor my, niet meer Compagnies
+Hottentot_; that is, "For me, I will no more be the Company's
+Hottentot." The governor generally sends him home with an escort of
+troops, as it is the interest of the company to be on good terms with
+these chiefs, who are always ready to do any service required of them.
+
+The Hottentots are a very stupid and brutal people. They rub their
+bodies all over with rancid grease, which gives them a very bad smell,
+so that you may nose them at a considerable distance. Their children
+are all born perfectly white; but being constantly rubbed with grease,
+and exposed to the sun, they grow by degrees quite brown, and almost
+black. When a woman brings forth twins, one of them is immediately
+condemned to death, and is tied to a tree, where it is left to expire.
+Some of them have a custom of extirpating one testicle in their male
+children, as soon as they are able to bear the operation, in hope of
+preventing them afterwards from begetting twins. They seem to have
+little or no religion; yet they frequently look with admiration at the
+heavenly bodies, saying, "He who governs these is certainly a being of
+infinite power and wisdom." In many respects they are more like beasts
+than men, being abominably nasty in their persons, and, taking them
+altogether, they are certainly one of the meanest nations on the face
+of the earth. They are short and thick-set, with flat noses like a
+Dutch pug dog, very thick lips, and large mouths, having very white
+teeth, but very long and ill set, some of them sticking out of their
+mouths like boar's tusks. Their hair is black, and curled like
+wool. They are very nimble, and run with incredible speed. They are
+generally covered with a sheep's skin, each man having a quiver full
+of arrows on his back, and a bow in his hand. Immediately on coming in
+sight of an enemy, they set up a dreadful cry, leaping, dancing,
+and skipping about, and throwing themselves into the most frightful
+postures.
+
+The seventh nation is named the _Caffres_, who are certainly the
+_Anthropophagi_ who have made so much noise in the world[3]. The
+Hottentots are much afraid of them, and take care to keep out of their
+way as much as possible, for fear of being roasted or boiled if taken
+prisoners. This abominable nation has never entered into any kind
+of commerce with the Christians; but, on the contrary, takes all the
+pains they can to entrap and murder them, in order, as is generally
+believed, to eat them. It is reported that they have grown somewhat
+more tractable of late years, and will enter into some sort of trade
+with such as venture among them. They are a potent and warlike nation,
+strong and well-made; and though black, and having curled hair
+like other negroes, they have better faces, and a much more manly
+appearance.
+
+[Footnote 3: A very different account is now given of the Caffres,
+or Koussis rather, who are described as a half-civilized race, who
+cultivate the ground, and live under regular government.--E.]
+
+At the distance of about eighteen leagues from the Cape, there is
+another port called Saldanha Bay, which is, in all respects, an
+infinitely better harbour than Table Bay, except in wanting fresh
+water, which prevents it from being frequented. The animals of this
+country are many. The lion is common here, and in hard winters often
+comes very near the habitations of the colonists. He is reputed the
+king of beasts, because he never eats a man till he has beaten out his
+breath with his paws. Before attacking a man he roars terribly, and
+shakes his mane; and if he does not give these signals of rage, there
+is no danger in passing him. Tigers and leopards are also very common,
+and do a vast deal of mischief; and it is probable these animals would
+be much more numerous, were it not for a race of wild dogs, which hunt
+in packs, and are so bold that they often weary out and worry a lion.
+They often destroy tigers, leopards, and wolves, and it is said that
+they will allow a man to take their prey from them when they have
+killed it. Travellers are never afraid when they fall in with these
+wild dogs, but rather rejoice, because they are sure that no ferocious
+animal is in the neighbourhood. There are many elephants in this
+country, and of as great size, as any in the world, being often from
+twelve to fifteen feet high or better, their teeth weighing from sixty
+to an hundred and twenty pounds. The rhinoceros is also often met
+with. This animal is rather less than the elephant, but stronger. His
+skin is prodigiously thick, and so hard that scarcely any weapon can
+pierce it. His snout is like that of a hog, on which grows a solid
+horn, ten or twelve inches long, which is much valued, because
+esteemed an excellent medicine in convulsions.
+
+There are two animals peculiar to this country, which therefore
+deserve notice. One is a species of wild ass, which resembles the
+common ass in nothing but the length of its ears. It is as large as
+an ordinary horse, and is the most beautiful animal in the world. His
+hair is very soft, and from the ridge of the back descends in coloured
+streaks to the belly, forming so many circles. It is a brisk and
+lively creature, which runs more swiftly than any horse. It is very
+difficult to take alive, and when taken cannot be tamed; yet sells
+at a prodigious price, and is thought a fit present for a sovereign
+prince, from its rarity and exquisite beauty[4]. The other creature,
+found in no other country, is called by the Dutch the _Stinkbungsen_,
+or Stinking-Badger. This is of the size of an ordinary dog, but is
+shaped like a ferret. When pursued by man or beast, it retreats but
+slowly, and when its enemy draws near, discharges backwards a so
+intolerably fetid wind, that dogs tear up the ground and hide their
+noses in it, to avoid the smell. When killed, it stinks so abominably
+that there is no approaching the carcass, which is therefore left to
+consume where it falls.
+
+[Footnote 4: This is a very imperfect account of the Zebra, which
+exactly resembles the ass, except in colour, and is by no means
+larger. One died lately in Edinburgh, after being exhibited as a show,
+which was as quiet and gentle as any lady's donkey.--E.]
+
+It is impossible to describe all the creatures that are seen in the
+vast forests of Africa, as the inhabitants see new animals every year
+that are utterly unknown to them. They allege that, in the middle of
+summer, when the wild animals are almost raging mad with thirst, they
+resort in vast multitudes to the rivers named Salt, Elephants, and
+St John's rivers, where the males and females of different species
+intermixing, produce strange beasts that seem to be new species. The
+Hottentots in the service of the Company frequently carry the skins of
+these monsters to the governor; and our author assures us that he
+saw one of the following description, that had been killed not long
+before. It was about the size of a calf of six months old, and seemed
+to have had four eyes. The head resembled that of a lion, but the hair
+was quite smooth, and of a dark grey colour. It had tusks like a boar.
+The fore-feet resembled those of that creature; but the hind-feet were
+like those of a tiger.
+
+The birds of this country are in a manner infinite in numbers and
+sorts; and though they have not been observed often to intermingle
+species, yet hybrids are sometimes remarked among them. The largest
+and strongest birds are to be found in Africa, among which is the
+ostrich, the largest of all, being commonly seven feet high. The beak
+is short and pointed, but the neck is very long. The feathers of the
+male are white and black only, while those of the female are mixed
+white, black, and grey. Those of the former are most esteemed, as
+their large feathers are better spread, and their down much softer.
+This bird is prodigiously swift of foot, and is hunted down by hounds.
+Their wings do not serve them to fly, but assist them in running,
+especially when they have the wind with them. The common opinion of
+their being able to digest iron is totally false. They swallow pieces
+of iron indeed, but then it is only to bruise the food in their
+gizzards, just as other birds swallow stones for the same purpose.
+They are also said to leave their eggs uncovered on the sand, and to
+take no care of their young. But those of the Cape country hide their
+eggs in the sand, and are so tender of their young, that, though
+naturally timorous, if one of them is missing, they become quite
+furious, so that it is not safe to go near them. There are abundance
+of eagles of all sorts at the Cape, which are very bold, and
+frequently do a great deal of mischief. They are not very large, yet
+are incredibly strong, so that they often kill and devour cattle when
+returning home from work, when they come in great flocks. of fifty or
+an hundred at once, single out a beast as it feeds among the flock,
+and falling upon it all at once, kill and devour it.
+
+Some years before our author was at the Cape, there was seen on Table
+Mountain a bird as large in the body as a horse, having grey and black
+plumage. His beak and talons were like those of an eagle, but of a
+most dreadful size. He sat and hovered about that mountain for a long
+time, and the people were persuaded it was a griffin. It frequently
+carried off sheep and calves, and at length began to destroy the cows,
+on which orders were given to destroy it, and it was accordingly shot,
+its skin stuffed, and sent home as a curiosity to the Company. No such
+bird, has been seen since, and the oldest people of the colony do not
+remember to have heard of any such before.[5]
+
+[Footnote 5: This was probably a stray Condor, and its size an
+ordinary exaggeration, in the passage of the story, like that of _the
+three black crows_.--E.]
+
+Africa has been long famous for serpents, and there are such vast
+numbers of them in the neighbourhood of the Cape, that many of them
+have no names. Most of them are extremely venomous, and the colonists
+would suffer much more than they do from them, were it not that they
+have a specific remedy for their bites, not known in Europe. This
+remedy is the _serpent-stone_, allowed to be factitious, and is
+brought from India, where they are made by the bramins who have the
+secret of composing them, which they so carefully conceal, that no
+Europeans have hitherto been able to discover how they are made. The
+serpent-stone is about the size of a bean, white in the middle, but of
+a fine sky-blue on the outside. When a person is bitten by a serpent,
+this stone is applied to the wound, to which it soon sticks fast of
+itself, without the aid of any bandage or plaister. The part bitten
+begins immediately to swell and becomes inflamed. The stone also
+swells till it becomes full of the venom, and then drops off. It is
+then put into warm milk, where it soon purges itself from the venom,
+and resumes its natural colour, after which it is again applied to the
+wound, where it sticks as before, till a second time full, and so on
+till all the venom is extracted and the cure perfected.
+
+All the mountains of this vast country are full of minerals and
+crystal, with many things of great value, if they could be got at;
+but the natives are so fearful of being made slaves in the mines, that
+they take all imaginable pains to conceal them. There is particularly
+a mountain, about 500 leagues from the Cape, called _Copper-mountain_,
+which is supposed to contain great quantities of metals. Large
+quantities of copper have been found here, which is said to contain a
+mixture of gold. Some Europeans endeavoured to follow the natives, who
+were suspected of going to that mountain to gather gold, but were all
+massacred. The Company is so tender of the colonists, and so unwilling
+to risk a revolt, that they have even neglected a gold-mine much
+nearer the Cape, the marcasites of which gave great hopes of its
+containing abundance of gold. Perhaps the Company may have another
+reason for acting in this manner, lest, if a gold-mine was discovered
+at the Cape, it might tempt the French or English to undertake
+something to their prejudice. Under its present management, the Dutch
+colony at the Cape is a general advantage to other nations, as well
+as to the Dutch. A few years ago a cavern was discovered in a mountain
+very near Cape-Town, in which the Hottentots find the venom in which
+they dip their poisoned arrows. There have likewise been found about
+twenty leagues from the Cape, some hot springs impregnated with steel,
+which have been found to cure many diseases, by using as a bath.
+
+Considerable improvements may certainly be made on this colony, for
+the advantage both of the inhabitants and the company, which latter
+make no great gains by this establishment besides the convenience it
+affords in giving refreshments to their ships going to and returning
+from India. The Company would be glad of any means that might
+increase the value of the settlement, consistent with their maxims of
+government, and with that indulgence they find it necessary to shew
+the Hottentots, who are perhaps more tenacious of their liberty than
+any people on earth, and the most desperate in resenting any attempts
+to its prejudice.
+
+
+
+SECTION XVII.
+
+_Voyage from the Cape of Good Hope to Holland, with some Account of St
+Helena, the Island of Ascension, and the Acores_.
+
+Towards the end of March, 1723, the ship being revictualled, they
+sailed from Table-bay with a brisk wind at S.E. the fleet homewards
+bound consisting of twenty-three sail, mostly belonging to the Dutch
+East India Company. In about three weeks they reached the island of
+_St Helena_, which is in the latitude of 16 deg. 15' S. [lat. 16 deg. S. long.
+5 deg. 30' W.] This island is about seven leagues in circumference, and
+is entirely composed of rocky hills, which may be seen in a clear day
+from the distance of forty leagues. It is surprising to see so small
+an island in the midst of the ocean, at so great a distance from any
+other land, being 550 leagues from the Cape, 500 leagues from Brazil,
+and 350 from Augusta, which is the nearest land[1]; yet the sea is all
+around so very deep, that there is hardly an anchorage to be found.
+This island was first discovered by the Portuguese, on which occasion
+one of their large Indian carracks was wrecked, from the remains of
+which they built a chapel, long since decayed, but which still gives
+name to the finest valley in the island. They planted lemons, oranges,
+and pomegranates all over the island, and left here hogs and goats,
+together with partridges, pigeons, and peacocks, for the convenience
+of ships touching here. At one time a hermit chose to live here,
+killing the goats for the sake of their skins, which he sold to
+ships that stopped here; but the Portuguese removed him, as they did
+afterwards some negro slaves who had settled in the mountains. It is
+now possessed by the English, who have so good a fort that it is not
+likely any other nation should be able to drive them out. The vallies
+are exceedingly beautiful and fertile, and in these the weather is
+sometimes exceedingly hot; but as it is always cool on the mountains,
+the inhabitants can never be in want of a place of refreshment. It is
+admirably watered, having many rivulets running from the tops of the
+hills into the sea, the water of these being as clear as crystal. The
+island produces abundance of mustard, parsley, sorrel, cresses, and
+other herbs, excellent against the scurvy. It has also abundance of
+trees fit for fuel, but none that can serve as timber. All sorts of
+refreshments are to be had in plenty.
+
+[Footnote 1: Caleo Negro, in lat. 16 deg. 20' S. on the coast of Africa,
+is the nearest part of the continent, and is probably what is referred
+to in the text under the name of Augusta.--E.]
+
+They sailed from hence for the island of _Ascension_, which lies in
+lat 8 deg. N. and long. 14 deg. 20' W. about 200 leagues N.W. from St Helena.
+This is much of the same size, but the shore is excessively rocky, and
+the whole island absolutely barren, having neither trees nor grass,
+and the entire surface seems as it were rent asunder, whence some
+have conceived, and not without great show of reason, that it had been
+formerly a volcano, or burning mountain. In the middle of the island
+there is a high hill, on one side of which water has been found. At
+one season of the year, the whole surface of the island is covered
+with sea-fowl. What chiefly induces ships to put into the only harbour
+of the island, is the great plenty of excellent turtle to be found
+here. When these animals come on shore in the night to lay their eggs,
+the sailors turn them over on their backs till they have leisure to
+carry them on board. These creatures will live above a month without
+any kind of sustenance, having only a little salt water sprinkled
+over them three or four times a-day. The sailors never weary of eating
+them, believing that they make a perfect change of their juices,
+freeing them entirely from the scurvy and other diseases of the blood.
+
+As this island is a very miserable place to live in, it is common to
+leave malefactors here when they do not incline to put them to death.
+This was done not long before our author passed this way, to a Dutch
+book-keeper, who was convicted of sodomy; though perhaps this may
+be considered as a worse punishment even than death, considering the
+miseries that must be endured in the hottest climate of the world, on
+a place that does not afford even the slightest shelter. After leaving
+this island, they began to approach the line, which they crossed
+without feeling any excessive heat, as the sun was then towards the
+north, and they had the benefit of pretty fresh gales, which moderated
+the heat extremely. They now also began to see the north-star at
+night, which they had not done for a year and a half and it is
+impossible to express how much the seamen were rejoiced at this
+circumstance.
+
+Coming into the latitude of 18 deg. N. we found that part of the sea which
+is generally so covered with grass that it looks at a distance like a
+meadow. This grass has a yellowish cast, being hollow within, and on
+being pressed it yields a clammy viscous juice. In some years none
+of this grass appears, while in other years it is found in prodigious
+quantities. Some imagine that it comes from the bottom of the sea, as
+divers report that the bottom is in many places covered with grass and
+flowers. Others conceive that it comes from the coast of Africa: But
+our author disapproves both of these opinions, because, if it came
+from the bottom, there is no reason why the same appearance should not
+be found elsewhere; whereas, if it came from the coast of Africa, it
+ought to be found in other situations, especially near that coast. His
+opinion, therefore, is, that it comes from the coast of America, and
+particularly from the Gulf of Bahama, or Mexico, where it is known
+to grow in great abundance, and where, when it comes to maturity, it
+breaks off; and is carried away by the currents.[2]
+
+[Footnote 2. In the old Portuguese maps and voyages, this part of
+the Atlantic is called _Mar de Sargasso_, or the _Sea of Cresses_;
+Sargasso signifying water-cresses, which these weeds which spread over
+the sea nearly resemble.--Harris.]
+
+Nothing is more difficult than to account for the motion and course
+of currents in the ocean, which, in some places, run for six months
+in one direction, and six in another, while in other places they run
+always one way. There are instances also where they run one way for
+a day or two after full moon, and then run strongly in the opposite
+direction till next full moon. Seamen also observe, that in places
+where the trade-winds blow, the currents are generally influenced by
+them, moving the same way with the winds, but not with equal force
+in all places; neither are they so discernible in the wide ocean,
+but chiefly about islands, where their effects are more or less felt
+according as they are influenced by being more or less in the way
+of the trade-winds. It would be of great service to navigation if
+sensible men would take notice of these currents, and enquire into the
+reason of their appearances. In old books of voyages we find many more
+wonders than in those of later date, not because the course of nature
+is at all changed, but because nature was not then so well understood.
+A thousand things were prodigious a century ago, which are not now at
+all strange. Thus the storms at the Cape of Good Hope, which make so
+great a figure in the histories of the Portuguese discoveries, are now
+known to have been merely the effect of endeavouring to double that
+Cape at a wrong season of the year.
+
+In the East and West Indies, the natives are able to foretell
+hurricanes and tornadoes, not from any superior skill, but by
+observing certain signs which usually precede them. There is often so
+little apparent connection between the sign and the event, that men
+who value themselves on their wisdom are apt to slight such warnings
+as impertinent and absurd. But they had better enquire diligently into
+facts, and neither receive nor reject them too hastily. In the present
+case, it is a clear matter of fact that the sea, in the latitude of
+18 deg. N. between Africa and America, is frequently covered with weeds
+to a great extent, and there is good reason for enquiry as to whence
+these weeds come. In the first voyage made by the famous Columbus for
+the discovery of the new world, he met with this grass or sea-weed
+floating on the sea, without which he could not have prevailed on his
+sailors to continue the voyage; and it is very remarkable, that, by
+pursuing his course through these weeds, he arrived in the Gulf of
+Bahama, the place whence our present author supposes this sea-grass to
+come.[3]
+
+[Footnote 3: In his first voyage, Columbus kept the parallel of
+about 37 deg. N. but was considerably farther south in his subsequent
+voyage.--E.]
+
+Continuing their course to the north, they encountered hard gales of
+wind, by which they were driven into lat. 37 deg. N. where they fell in
+with two islands, which proved to be _Flores_ and _Corres_;[4] and as
+their fresh provisions were now nearly spent, they stopped three days
+at the larger island to procure refreshments. There are two of the
+islands named _Acores_ by the Spaniards, which signifies the _islands
+of hawks_. The Dutch call them _Vlanneische eslanders_, or _Flemish
+islands_, because Fayal was first peopled by Flemings, and their
+descendants remain in the island to this day, and are easily
+distinguished from the other inhabitants by their shape and air. They
+dwell upon a little river running down a mountain, called _Ribera dos
+Flamenas_ by the Portuguese, or river of the Flemings.
+
+[Footnote 4: Flores is in lat. 39 deg. 10', Corvo in 39 deg. 35', both N.]
+
+The nine islands of the Acores, or Wester Islands, are Tercera, San
+Michael, Santa Maria, St George, Gratiosa, Pico, Fayal, Corvo, and
+Flores. Tercera is the chief island, being fifteen or sixteen leagues
+in circumference, and so high and steep in many places that it is
+almost impregnable, and they have built forts in such places as are
+accessible. The only port is before the capital, named _Angra_, and
+as it is in the form of a half-moon, it is called the _Half-Moon of
+Angra_. At each horn of this half-moon there is a mountain, which are
+called the Brazils, which project out into the sea, appearing from a
+distance as if two islands; and these mountains are so high that one
+may see at any time ten or twelve leagues off, and fifteen in clear
+weather. Angra has a fine cathedral, and is the residence of a bishop,
+and of a governor and council, whose authority extends over all the
+nine islands. There is another town three leagues from Angra, called
+Praya, or the town of the shore, situated on a shore which cannot be
+approached by ships, so that it has no trade, and the town seems a
+kind of desert, though well built and walled round.
+
+The inhabitants raise sufficient provisions on the island for
+all their wants, being pleasant and fertile, and all covered with
+corn-fields; and so abounds with flesh, fish, and all sorts of
+victuals, that even in times of the greatest scarcity, there is enough
+for all the inhabitants. It produces wine also, but very small, and
+does not keep well, wherefore the richer people provide themselves
+from Madeira and the Canaries. They want oil, salt, lime, and potters
+ware, which they have to import from other countries. They have
+abundance of peaches, apples, pears, oranges, and lemons, with all
+sorts of vegetables and garden stuffs, and among these a plant
+called _batatas_, which grows like a vine stock, but the leaves are
+different. These produce roots, weighing a pound more or less, and
+are so plentiful that they are despised by the rich, though of a sweet
+pleasant taste and very nourishing. There is another root in this
+country as large as a man's two fists, covered over with filaments of
+a golden yellow colour, and as smooth as silk. The inhabitants
+stuff beds with this, instead of feathers, but skilful workmen could
+certainly manufacture it into fine stuffs.
+
+There are but few birds, except canaries, quails, ordinary poultry,
+and turkies, which are numerous. Several parts of this island are very
+hilly, and full of thick and almost impervious woods; and travelling
+is rendered very difficult, as you often find rocks a league in
+length, so rugged and sharp that they cut the shoes at every step;
+yet these rocks are so full of vines that they are not to be seen
+in summer, being covered over by the vine leaves. These vines spread
+their roots among the crannies and crevices of the rocks, which are
+so small and devoid of soil, that it is wonderful how they should find
+any nourishment; yet if planted in the good soil of the country, the
+vines will not grow. The corn and fruits of this island will not keep
+above a year; and unless the corn is buried under ground, it spoils in
+four months. On this account, every inhabitant has a pit without the
+town, the mouth of which is round, just large enough to admit a man,
+which is covered by a flat stone and secured by a lock. Some of these
+pits are so large as to contain two or three lasts of corn, the last
+containing 108 bushels Amsterdam measure, and each bushel weighing
+forty pounds or more. They put their corn into these pits in July,
+and cover the stone with earth to exclude the air, and take it out at
+Christmas, or considerably later, finding it then as good as when put
+in. The oxen in Tercera are the largest and finest that can be, equal
+to any in Europe, and have prodigiously wide horns. Every one has his
+name, like our dogs, and they are so familiar, that when the master
+calls one of them by his name, though among a thousand others, he will
+presently come to him.
+
+One would think the ground of this island were hollow, as the rocks
+sound like vaults when walked on; and indeed the thing is not at all
+improbable, as the island is much subject to earthquakes. In many
+places of the island of San Michael there are holes and cracks, out of
+which there comes a great smoke, and the ground seems as if burnt all
+around. This is not uncommon also in all the islands, as they all have
+sulphur mountains. There are also fountains of water so hot as to boil
+eggs. Three leagues from Angra there is a petrifying spring, which
+changes wood into stone; and there was formerly a tree having some of
+its roots in that water, which were stony and as hard as flint. This
+island produces excellent timber, especially cedar, which is so common
+that their carts and waggons are made of it, and it is even used as
+fuel. The island of _Pico_, twelve leagues from Tercera, has a sort of
+wood called _teixo_, as hard as iron, and of a shining red colour when
+wrought. It becomes always better and finer as it grows older; for
+which reason no person is allowed to cut any of these trees, unless
+for the king's use, and by virtue of a special order from the royal
+officers. The chief trade of Tercera consists in _woad_, of which they
+have great quantities. The fleets of Spain and Portugal, bound for the
+East Indies, Brazil, Cape Verd, Guinea, and other countries, usually
+come here for refreshments, to the great profit of this and the other
+islands, the inhabitants selling to them their various articles at
+good prices.
+
+The island of _San Michael_ is seven or eight leagues S.E. of Tercera,
+and is about twenty leagues in length, having several towns and
+villages. The capital of this island is _Ponta del Guda_, which drives
+a considerable trade in _woad_, sent to Tercera, producing about
+200,000 quintals[5] every year. This island also produces such
+abundance of corn, that it is transported to the other islands; but it
+has no harbours or rivers to give shelter to ships.
+
+[Footnote 5: This is perhaps an error for 2000, as the larger quantity
+would amount to 10,000 tons.--E.]
+
+_Santa Maria_, twelve leagues S. of San Michael, is ten or twelve
+leagues in circumference, its only trade being in earthen ware, with
+which the inhabitants supply the other islands. It also produces
+plenty of all manner of provisions for its own inhabitants. The island
+of _Gratiosa_, seven or eight leagues N.N.W. of Tercera, is only about
+five or six leagues in circumference, but abounds in provisions of all
+sorts. _St George_, eight or nine leagues N.W. of Tercera, is
+twelve leagues in length by two or three in breadth. This is a wild
+mountainous country, producing very little woad. The inhabitants
+subsist by cultivating the ground and keeping cattle, and export
+considerable quantities of cedar to Tercera. _Fayal_, seven German
+leagues S.S.W. of St George, is seventeen or eighteen leagues in
+circumference, and is the best of the Acores, after Tercera and San
+Michael. This island has plenty of woad, with abundance of fish,
+cattle, and other commodities, which are exported to Tercera and the
+other islands. Its chief town is called _Villa Dorta_. Most of the
+inhabitants of this island are descended from Flemings, but now speak
+the Portuguese language; yet they continue to love the Flemings, and
+use all strangers kindly.
+
+Three leagues S.E. of Fayal is the island of _Pico_, so called from
+a peaked mountain, which some believe to be higher than the Peak of
+Teneriffe. The inhabitants cultivate the soil, and have plenty of
+cattle and other provisions, growing also better wine than in any
+other island of the Acores. This island is about fifteen leagues in
+circumference. Seventy leagues W.N.W. from Tercera is the island of
+_Flores_, and to the N. of it lies _Corvo_, the former about seven,
+and the latter not above two or three leagues in circumference.
+They both produce woad, especially Flores, which also abounds in
+provisions. The winds at all these islands are so strong, and the air
+so piercing, especially at Tercera, that they in a short time spoil
+and consume the stones of the houses, and even iron.[6] They have a
+kind of stone, however, that is found within high-water mark, which
+resists the air better than the other sorts, and of which the fronts
+of their houses are generally built.
+
+[Footnote 6: This effect on the iron is obviously occasioned by
+the muriatic acid in the sea spray; and were it not that the author
+expressly says they have no lime, one would be apt to believe that the
+stones so affected were limestone. There are, however, some cilicious
+sand-stones, in which the grit, or particles of sand, are cemented
+together by a calcareous infiltration, which may be the case in these
+islands.--E.]
+
+Leaving the Acores, and getting into Spanish sea, or mouth of the bay
+of Biscay, the weather proved so bad that the _Advice-ship_ lost
+her rudder, which obliged her to go through the Channel in order to
+purchase a new one on the coast of England. The French, Danish, and
+other ships, generally go that way; but the Dutch ships generally go
+round Ireland and north about, from an idea, if they should happen
+to meet with stormy weather in the channel, so as to be obliged to go
+into an English port, that this might occasion several inconveniences.
+Such ships, however, as have sustained any damage at sea, are
+permitted to take their way through the channel. The rest of the Dutch
+fleet followed the north-about course; and after three weeks, during
+which they were involved in perpetual mists and fogs, they had sight
+at length of the Orkney islands, where some Dutch ships were still
+engaged in the herring fishery. In the latitude of 60 deg. N. they met
+some ships of war that waited for them, and convoyed them to the
+coast of Holland, where all the ships got into their destined ports
+in safety. Those on board of which were our author, and the other
+prisoners, came into the Texel on the 11th of July, 1723; and arrived
+five days afterwards at Amsterdam, the very same day two years after
+sailing on their voyage.
+
+The West-Company immediately commenced a law-suit against the
+East-India Company, in behalf of themselves and all the persons
+engaged in their service in the foregoing voyage, to obtain
+satisfaction for the injury and injustice done them at Batavia. After
+a long litigation, the States-General decreed, that the East-India
+Company should furnish the West-India Company with two new ships,
+completely fitted for sea in every respect, better than those which
+had been confiscated by their officers in India, and should pay the
+full value of their cargoes. Also, that the East-India Company should
+pay the wages of the crews of both ships, up to the day of their
+landing in Holland: Together with the entire costs of suit; besides
+a considerable sum by way of fine, as a punishment for having abused
+their authority so egregiously.[7]
+
+[Footnote 7: Harris has given a report of this law-suit at some
+length, but it did not seem necessary to give any more than the
+result, as quite uninteresting at the present day.--E.]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD, BY CAPTAIN GEORGE ANSON, IN THE YEARS
+1740-1744.[1]
+
+
+PREFACE.
+
+Though of considerable length, the importance of this narrative
+forbids all attempts to alter it in any respect; except that it has
+been necessary to leave out the explanations of several engraved
+views of coasts and harbours, inserted in the original, but which were
+greatly too large for admission, and would have been rendered totally
+useless by being reduced to any convenient use for the octavo form
+of this collection. Indeed, to have introduced all the engravings of
+plans and views, necessary for the illustration of this and many other
+voyages and travels, would have been utterly incompatible with the
+nature and circumstances of this work; as nothing less than a complete
+Atlas and entire Neptune of the whole globe could have sufficed,
+attended by an enormous expence, and at the same time inadmissible
+into octavo volumes. It has therefore been indispensably requisite,
+on all occasions, to confine our illustrations of that kind to a
+few reduced charts, merely sufficient to convey general notions of
+geographical circumstances, and occasionally sketch plans of harbours,
+straits, islands, and capes, explanatory of particular and important
+places. Such of our readers, therefore, as require more complete
+illustrations of geography, topography, and hydrography, must have
+recourse to Atlasses, Neptunes, and coasting pilots.
+
+[Footnote 1: Voyage, &c. by George Anson, Esq. afterwards Lord
+Anson; compiled from his papers and materials by Richard Walter, M.A.
+chaplain of H.M.S. Centurion in that expedition--_fifteenth edition_,
+4to, Lond. 1776.]
+
+This narrative was originally published under the name of Richard
+Walter, chaplain to H.M.S. Centurion in the expedition, dedicated by
+him to John Duke of Bedford, and said to have been compiled by that
+gentleman from papers and materials furnished for the purpose by
+Commodore Anson.
+
+As the object of this expedition was of an extensive political nature,
+intended to humble the power of Spain, in her most valuable yet most
+vulnerable possessions, by injuring and intercepting the great source
+of her public treasure, it has been thought proper, on the present
+occasion, to give a transcript of the reflections made upon the
+policy and expedience of this important voyage, very soon after
+its completion, by Dr John Harris, by way of _Introduction_ to his
+abridged account of this circumnavigation, in his Collection of
+Voyages and Travels, vol. i. p. 337.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+"It is a thing that has been generally taken for granted, ever since
+Spain has been possessed of her American dominions, and has made use
+of the riches derived from these to disturb the peace and invade the
+liberties of her neighbours, that the best way to reduce her strength,
+and to prevent the bad effects of her evil intentions, would be to
+attack her in the South Seas. This was pursued with great diligence,
+and in some measure with success, in the reign of Queen Elizabeth, [as
+has been already shewn in the circumnavigatory voyages of Drake
+and Candish, almost solely devoted to that object.] In that of her
+successor, when a new quarrel broke out with that crown, in the year
+1624, the first thing thought of by our patriots, who were equally
+willing to humble the king's enemies and to save the money of the
+nation, was an expedition to the South Seas, to be carried on at
+the expence of, and for the benefit of the people; which scheme was
+entitled _The West-India Association_.
+
+"It may be thought I look a great way back when I offer to the view
+of the reader the reasons which were then suggested in parliament in
+support of that scheme. But whoever considers that it is not only the
+most effectual, but the safest method, to instruct the present age
+from the sentiments of the last, will readily enter into the reasons
+which induce me, upon this occasion, to produce the speech of an
+eminent patriot, in which the nature and scope of that _Association_,
+as well as the motives on which it is grounded, are very fully and
+pathetically set forth; and this in such terms, as, if the reader were
+not told that this was a speech to Sir Dudley Diggs, then chairman
+of a committee of the whole house, by Sir Benjamin Rudyard, he might
+mistake it for a speech made only a few years since, so agreeable is
+it, in language and sentiments, even to our present occasions.
+
+"Sir,--I do profess that as my affections, my reason, and my judgement
+go strongly with the scope and drift of this proposition, so shall
+good part of my fortune when it comes to execution. For, to my
+understanding, there was never propounded in parliament a design more
+proper for this kingdom, nor more pregnant with advantages to it,
+whether we consider the nature of our situation or the quality of our
+enemy's forces. As we are an island, it concerns our very being to
+have store of ships to defend us, and also our well-being by their
+trade to enrich us. This Association for the West Indies, when it
+shall be regulated and established by act of parliament, and thereby
+secured from the violence and injury of any intruding hand, will
+certainly give many men encouragement and confidence voluntarily
+to bring in large and liberal contributions towards so noble and so
+profitable an enterprize; so that, in short, we shall see many new
+ships built, many brave men employed, and enabled to act for the
+service of their country. None of this money shall be carried out of
+the kingdom, but laid out in shipping, which is the defence of it, and
+bestowed upon our own men, who must be fed and maintained though they
+stay at home. For this, we shall reap the fruit of whatsoever benefit
+plantation, traffic, or purchase can procure us, besides honour and
+security.
+
+"Now, let us a little consider the enemy we have to encounter, the
+king of Spain. They are not his great territories which make him so
+powerful and so troublesome to all Christendom. For it is very well
+known that Spain itself is but weak in men, and barren of natural
+commodities, and as for his other territories, they lie divided and
+asunder, which is a weakness in itself. Besides, they are held
+by force, and maintained at an extraordinary charge; insomuch, as
+although he be a great king, yet he is like that giant who was said
+to have an hundred hands, but had fifty bellies to feed, so that,
+rateably, he had no more hands than another man. No, sir, they are
+his mines in the West Indies which minister fuel to feed his ambitious
+desire of universal monarchy. It is the money he hath from thence
+which makes him able to levy and pay soldiers in all places, and to
+keep an army on foot ready to invade and endanger his neighbours, so
+that we have no other way but to endeavour to cut him off at the root,
+and seek to impeach or to supplant him in the West Indies; by part
+of which course that famous queen, of glorious memory, had heretofore
+almost brought him to his knees. And this our undertaking, if it
+pleases God to bless it, most needs affect it sooner and quicker, the
+whole body of the kingdom being united, and concurring in a perpetual
+supply to this action, so that he shall have no free time given him to
+rest.
+
+"Moreover, this will be a means not only to save, but to fill his
+majesty's coffers, enabling the people to give him liberally and
+often. The king's ships will have little to do but to guard the
+coasts; for the sea-war will be chiefly made at the charge of the
+subjects. This I doubt not but that, in a short time, both king and
+people shall be safe at home, and feared abroad. To conclude, I shall
+be very glad to hear any man make objection against this design, so
+that he do so with an intention to refine and perfect the work; but
+if any shall speak against it with a mind to hinder and destroy it, I
+must entreat him to pardon me, if I do scarce think him to be a good
+Englishman.
+
+"That project of the West India Association had the same fate with
+most other bold and honest projects in that reign, which was, after
+being talked of a little, it sunk into oblivion. Our next difference
+with Spain was under the protectorate of Cromwell, who encouraged
+Father Gage to publish his account of the Spanish West Indies, which
+formed the foundation of his attempt upon Hispaniola, and conquest of
+Jamaica; but I do not know of any design formed by him to attack the
+Spaniards in the South Seas. After the Restoration we were upon good
+terms with Spain, as certainly was our interest. Yet Charles II. did
+not absolutely neglect this navigation, but sent Sir John Marborough,
+one of the best seamen this nation ever bred, in the Sweepstakes, in
+the latter end of the year 1669, by way of the Straits of Magellan,
+into the South Seas. To say the truth, our privateers, under the
+command of Captains Sharpe, Davis, Swan, &c. were continually in these
+seas, during all that reign and the next; so that, in those days, our
+seamen were no strangers to any of the passages into the South Seas;
+and, as the reader may have already observed, from the voyage of
+Captain Cowley, it was then no unusual thing for the traders of London
+to fit out ships for these parts, but whether with a view to traffic
+or privateering, is a point not easy to determine at this distance of
+time. But whatever the purpose they were sent upon, thither they went,
+and no complaints were ever heard of with respect to extraordinary
+hardships in the voyage, which is sufficient to shew how much
+depends upon keeping all branches of navigation open, in order to
+be constantly in a condition to secure and extend our trade, and to
+preserve our reputation as a maritime power.
+
+"After the Revolution, several proposals were made in relation to the
+establishment of a commerce in the South Sea, which were received with
+approbation; and it is certain that king William gave instructions to
+Admiral Benbow, when he went out last to the West Indies, to enquire
+how far any of these projects were feasible. After the breaking out of
+the last general war, all the world expected that the first thing the
+maritime powers would have done, would have been sending a squadron
+to these seas, either for the service of the prince whom they owned as
+king of Spain, or for their own advantage. The people of this nation,
+in particular, were so desirous of seeing the war carried on this way,
+and on this side, that, to give them hopes, and to shew, at the same
+time, that the legislature approved their sentiments, a bill was
+brought in and passed, in the House of Lords, for the better carrying
+on the war in the West Indies, which was lost, however, by a kind
+of ministerial craft, in the House of Commons; and soon after, for
+reasons which have never yet been explained to the public, all designs
+of this nature were laid aside. The only expedition of this nature,
+during the whole war, was that of the Duke and Duchess, under the
+command of Captain Woods Rogers, already related, which was fitted out
+at the expence of some private merchants of Bristol. On the change of
+ministry, a prodigious clamour was raised on this head, and all of a
+sudden a resolution was taken to secure all the advantages that could
+be wished for to this nation from the trade of the South Seas, which
+ended, however, only in erecting a company under that title.
+The nation very soon became sensible that this would not do, and
+therefore, as soon as our disputes with the king of Spain came to
+a height, in the reign of the late king, George I. a design was
+immediately set on foot for sending privateers once more into that
+part of the world, which ended in the expedition of Captain Shelvocke
+and Captain Clipperton, already related at large.
+
+"By this short deduction of facts, I think it is demonstrably proved,
+that, in the judgement of this nation, the most probable way of
+humbling Spain, in case of a war, is to send a squadron into the South
+Seas, and I will venture to say, that there is one reason why this
+is now become more expedient than ever, which is, that we are now no
+longer at liberty to send ships thither in time of peace, as we were
+before the South Sea Company was erected. It is not therefore at all
+strange, that as soon as the present war broke out with Spain, the
+general voice of the nation dictated such an expedition, or that, when
+they saw it resolved on, and a squadron actually equipped for that
+service, they very loudly testified their approbation of the scheme.
+I believe also, my readers will readily give credit to the assertion,
+when I affirm, that, during the time this squadron lay at Portsmouth,
+there was a more general expectation of its performing things of the
+highest consequence for the service of Great Britain, and reducing the
+enemy to reason.
+
+"It was in the midst of summer, in the year 1740, that this squadron
+was formed at Portsmouth, at the same time that a great embarkation
+was preparing for the West Indies, by which the siege of Carthagena
+was afterwards undertaken, which turned the eyes of the whole world
+upon that sea-port. At London, every person spoke of the intended
+expedition to the South Seas as a design that must necessarily be
+attended with highly advantageous consequences, if properly conducted;
+and of this there was not made the least doubt, when it was known that
+Captain Anson was named to the command, because he had shewn himself
+upon all occasions equally vigilant in his duty, and moderate in the
+exercise of power, more ready to correct by his own example than by
+any other sort of reproof, and who, in the course of his services,
+had acquired the respect of the officers, and the love of the sailors;
+qualities that rarely meet in one person, and qualities which, without
+the least contradiction, were ascribed to him.[2]
+
+[Footnote 2: The sequel of these observations, by Harris, are
+extracted from his supplementary reflections at the close of the
+expedition, vol. 1, p. 364, _et sequ._ In these, however, we have used
+much retrenchment, as the observations that may have been exceedingly
+applicable in 1745, when Spain was in a great manner identified with
+France, have now lost much of their force, in consequence of the
+passing events, well known to all, but which do not admit of being
+discussed in a note.--E.]
+
+"Though this expedition was not attended by so great success in the
+South Seas as was expected, yet the nation in general was far from
+believing that its comparative failure ought to deter us from
+the thoughts of such expeditions for the future, since it plainly
+appeared, that, if the whole squadron had got round along with
+the commodore into the South Seas, he would have been able to have
+performed much greater things than any of our commanders had hitherto
+done in these parts. Neither is it at all clear that the Spaniards
+are there in a better condition, their coasts better fortified,
+their garrisons more numerous, or the country in any respect better
+provided, than when our privateers had formerly so great success
+in those parts. The sacking of Payta in this expedition proves the
+contrary, since it was then actually in a worse condition, and less
+capable of making any resistance, than when formerly taken by Captain
+Shelvocke. If this expedition had never taken place, we might have
+been told that it was impracticable, that the Spaniards were grown
+wiser, that all their ports were well fortified, and any attempt of
+this kind would be only to sacrifice the lives of such as might be
+employed in the expedition. But we now know the contrary, and that the
+Spaniards remained as unguarded, and as little apprehensive as ever;
+perhaps even the fate of this expedition may have made them less
+so, insomuch, that were a new project of the same kind to be put in
+execution, either at public or private expence, there seems next to a
+moral certainty that it would succeed. Another expedition might,
+and probably would be attended by fewer difficulties; at least, it
+certainly might be undertaken at much less expence; and, besides
+all the advantages resulting to such private persons as became
+proprietors, this inestimable advantage would accrue to the public,
+that we should once more have a number of able marines, well
+acquainted with the navigation of the South Seas, which we never can
+have by any other means.
+
+"I would not be understood at all to lessen the miseries and
+distresses of these who were employed in this voyage; and all I would
+endeavour to aim at is to convince the reader that the difficulties
+and discouragements met with in this voyage are not sufficient to
+ground a decisive opinion by the few in opposition to the sentiments
+of the many, that all attempts on this side ought to be abandoned. And
+I really think that the setting the difficulties and discouragements
+encountered by the Centurion in the strongest light, will serve my
+purpose much better than lessening or extenuating them. For, if after
+being ruined in a manner by storms, diseases, and hardships, they
+landed rather skeletons than men, on the island of Juan Fernandez; if,
+after their long cruize in the South Seas, their distresses came to be
+as great when they took shelter in the island of Tinian; if the lying
+at Macao was attended with many inconveniences; if the taking of the
+Spanish galleon be a thing almost incredible, considering the small
+number of men, and the condition they were in, who attacked her in the
+Centurion; if the difficulties they afterwards met with in the river
+of Canton, and the hazards run by the commodore in visiting the
+viceroy, and thereby putting himself into the hands of such a people
+as the Chinese, who could not but be displeased with his proceedings,
+are circumstances which aggravate the matter: If so perilous a
+navigation as that from Canton, through the Straits of Sunda, and
+thence to the Cape of Good Hope, with little or no refreshment, with
+a crew that wanted it so much, is still more amazing; and if the
+bringing the ship home from thence, with a crew composed of so many
+different nations, in the midst of a French war, and without the least
+assistance from home, swell the whole into a kind of miracle, what
+does all this prove? Since all this, under God, was entirely owing to
+the prudence, moderation, and wise conduct of the commanding officer,
+it certainly proves, if a right choice be made of commanders, that
+there are no difficulties which may not be overcome, and therefore
+that the adverse circumstances attending this voyage ought not at all
+to discourage us.
+
+"For, with the help of the example afforded by Commodore Anson, I
+presume that there are many officers who would undertake and execute
+such an expedition, to the honour of their country, and to the
+advantage of their employers, supposing them to be employed by private
+persons. This is the right use that might be made of this expedition:
+an expedition difficult, dangerous, and in a manner impracticable,
+considered in one light, but equally glorious and successful
+when considered in another point of view; An expedition that has
+demonstrated to the whole world that a train of unforeseen and most
+disastrous accidents may be remedied, and even turned to advantage, by
+an honest, skilful, brave, experienced, and well-meaning officer; An
+expedition which shews that there are no hazards, no difficulties, no
+distresses capable of depressing the courage of English seamen under
+a proper commander; an expedition which makes it evident that
+discontent, sedition, and mutiny, do not arise from the restless
+tempers, intractable dispositions, and unruly behaviour of the English
+sailors, but purely from the want of prudence, and right management,
+and, in short, from the want of experience and capacity of such as
+are entrusted with the command of them; an expedition, in a word, that
+puts it beyond all doubt that the British nation is, at this day,
+as capable of undertaking as great things, and of performing them as
+successfully, as ever were done by their ancestors; and, consequently,
+an expedition that must convince not only us, but all Europe, that
+if our maritime force be not employed in undertakings of the most
+important nature, it is not owing to the degeneracy or our seamen, nor
+to be imputed to our want of able or daring commanders, which is not
+my business, and which indeed surpasses my abilities, to discover.
+
+"We are now to close this general subject of circumnavigations, which
+relates to the whole world. It is true, that all the circumnavigators
+did not propose, and that several of them did not make, any
+discoveries; yet all their voyages are of great, though not of equal
+importance, down to this last. For, by comparing that by Magellan,
+which was the first, with this by Mr Anson, we shall find them to
+differ in many respects, especially in the conclusion; that by Mr
+Anson being by far the longer of the two. Some of them, also, took
+quite a different route from others. As, for instance, Le Maire and
+Roggewein, who never ran at all into the northern latitudes, but
+sailed directly through the South Seas to the coast of New Guinea, and
+thence to the island of Java; which is a much shorter course than
+by way of California to the Philippines. From hence it very clearly
+appears, that the passage to the East Indies by the South Seas is
+shorter than that by the Cape of Good Hope;[3] of which the reader
+will be convinced by considering the following particulars. Captain
+Woods Rogers, in the Duke, sailed From the coast of Ireland and
+doubled Cape Horn in four months; and Le Maire sailed from Juan
+Fernandez to New Guinea and the Moluccas in three months; so that this
+voyage takes up but seven months in the whole; whereas the Dutch, when
+the chief emporium of their eastern commerce was fixed at Amboina,
+thought it a good passage thither from Holland, if performed in ten or
+eleven months.[4] It is from these stupendous voyages, that not only
+the greatest discoveries have been made in general geography, but
+from which all future discoveries must be expected; and therefore
+this ought to be considered as one of the strongest arguments for
+encouraging such voyages.[5]--_Harris._
+
+[Footnote 3: It is not easy to conceive how Harris should have fallen
+into this enormous error. To say nothing of the greater length and
+difficulty of passing round Cape Horn, rather than the Cape of Good
+Hope, the difference in longitudes is sufficient to establish the
+absolute contrary of the position in the text. The longitude, for
+instance, of the island of Ceylon, by the eastern passage, is only
+80 deg. E. whereas by the western passage it is 280 W. an excess of 200
+degrees. Even Canton in China, is only in 113 deg. E. but in 247 deg. W. an
+excess of 134 degrees.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 4: To say nothing of the absurdity of the partial instances
+adduced, it may be mentioned that, only a few years ago, an English
+East Indiaman performed the voyage from England to Madras, delivered
+his outward-bound cargo, took on board a new cargo, and returned to
+England, all within nine months.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 5: The remaining observations of Harris, supplementary
+to his abbreviated account of this expedition, have no manner of
+connection with the subject in hand, and are therefore omitted.]
+
+ * * * * *
+
+George Anson, the commodore on this expedition, was born in 1697,
+being the third son of William Anson, Esq. of Shuckborough, in the
+county of Stafford. Taking an early inclination for the naval service,
+and after passing through the usual inferior steps, he was appointed
+second lieutenant of the Hampshire in 1716. He was raised to the rank
+of master and commander in 1722, and obtained the rank of post captain
+in 1724, with the command of the Scarborough man-of-war. Between that
+time and the year 1733, he made three voyages to North Carolina; and
+having acquired considerable wealth, he appears to have purchased an
+estate in that colony, where he erected a small town of his own name,
+which gave the name of Anson County to the surrounding district. In
+the years 1738 and 1739, he made another voyage to America and the
+coast of Africa; and, without proceeding to hostilities, removed
+certain obstructions under which the English trade on the coast of
+Guinea had suffered from the French.
+
+In the _War of the Merchants_, as it was called by Sir Robert Walpole,
+which broke out in 1739 between Britain and Spain, Captain Anson was
+appointed to the command of the expedition, the narrative of which
+forms the subject of the present chapter. Immediately after his
+return to England from this circumnavigation, Captain Anson was
+made rear-admiral of the blue, and shortly afterwards, one of the
+commissaries of the Admiralty. In 1746 he was farther promoted to the
+rank of Vice-admiral; and in the winter of 1746-7, was entrusted with
+the command of the channel fleet. In May 1747, off Cape Finisterre,
+he captured six French ships of the line under the command of Admiral
+Jonquiere, which had been dispatched for the protection of the
+merchant ships destined for the East and West Indies. On this
+occasion, when Mons. St George, one of the French captains,
+surrendered his sword to Admiral Anson, he addressed him in the
+following terms: _Vous avez vaincu L'Invincible, et La Gloire vous
+suit._--"You have defeated the Invincible, and Glory follows you:"
+alluding to two of the French ships, the Invincible and the Gloire,
+which had surrendered to him.
+
+For this important service to his king and country, he was created a
+peer of the realm, by the title of LORD ANSON; and, in 1749, on the
+death of Admiral Norris, he was appointed Vice-admiral of England. In
+1751, he succeeded to Lord Sandwich, as first Lord Commissioner of the
+Admiralty; but, incurring censure for the loss of Minorca, he resigned
+this situation in 1756. But, having been acquitted of all blame
+relative to that disgraceful affair, after a parliamentary enquiry, he
+was reinstated in that high office, which he continued to fill, with
+honour to himself and advantage to his country, during the remainder
+of his life. While attending upon the Duke of Mecklenburgh Strelitz,
+brother to our present queen, to shew him the naval arsenal at
+Portsmouth, and the fleet which was then about to sail on the
+expedition against the Havannah, he caught a violent cold, of which he
+died, at Moor-Park in Hertfordshire, on the 6th of June 1762, in the
+sixty-fifth year of his age. Having no issue by his lady, the daughter
+of Lord Hardwicke, whom he married in 1748, he left the whole of his
+property to his brother.
+
+Lord Anson appears to have been remarkable for the coolness and
+equanimity of his temper. Amid all the dangers and successes of his
+circumnavigation of the globe, he never expressed any strong emotion,
+either of sorrow or joy, except when the Centurion hove in sight of
+Tinian. He was a man of few words, and was even reckoned particularly
+silent among English seamen, who have never been distinguished for
+their loquacity. He introduced a rigid discipline into the English
+navy, somewhat resembling that of the Prussian army; and revived
+that bold and close method of fighting, within pistol-shot, which had
+formerly been so successfully employed by Blake and Shovel, and which
+has fostered that daring courage and irresistible intrepidity in our
+British seamen, which anticipate and secure success to the most daring
+and hazardous enterprizes.
+
+In some reflexions, towards the conclusion of Betagh's
+circumnavigation, Harris,[6] a former editor of a collection of
+voyages and travels, breaks forth in the following laudatory strain:--
+
+"Happy, happy, for us, that we have still a SEAMAN left, who has shewn
+that the race of heroes is not yet extinct among us, in ADMIRAL ANSON,
+that great and fortunate commander; who enjoys the singular felicity,
+in an age of sloth, luxury, and corruption, that his _ease_ is the
+result of his _labour_, his _title_ the reward of his _merit_, and
+that his _wealth_ does _honour_ to his country."
+
+[Footnote 6: Harris, Voy. and Trav. I. 253.]
+
+How much more happy is it for us in the present day, somewhat more
+than half a century later, and while every energy is required to the
+utmost stretch, that we still have a race of transcendent heroes, who
+have annihilated the navy and trade and colonies or our arch enemy,
+have vindicated and preserved our glory and freedom and prosperity,
+and bid fair to restore the honour and independence of the civilized
+world, threatened with subversion by the modern Atilla--Ed.
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+Notwithstanding the great improvement of navigation within the last
+two centuries, a voyage round the world is still considered as an
+enterprize of so very singular a nature, that the public have never
+failed to be extremely inquisitive about the various accidents
+and turns of fortune with which this uncommon attempt is generally
+attended. And, though the amusement expected in these narratives is
+doubtless one great source of that curiosity with the bulk of readers,
+yet the more intelligent part of mankind have always agreed, that,
+from accounts of this nature, if faithfully executed, the more
+important purposes of navigation, commerce, and national interest, may
+be greatly promoted. For every authentic description of foreign coasts
+and countries will contribute to one or more of these great ends, in
+proportion to the wealth, wants, or commodities of these countries,
+and our ignorance of these coasts; and therefore, a voyage round
+the world promises a species of information, of all others, the most
+desirable and interesting; since great part of it is performed in seas
+with which we are, as yet, but very imperfectly acquainted, and in the
+neighbourhood of a country renowned for the abundance of its wealth;
+though it is, at the same time, stigmatized for its poverty in the
+necessaries and conveniences of a civilized life.
+
+These considerations have occasioned the compiling the ensuing work;
+which, in gratifying the inquisitive disposition of mankind, and
+contributing to the safety and success of future navigators, and to
+the extension of our commerce, may doubtless vie with any narration of
+this kind hitherto made public; since, as to the first of these heads,
+it may well be supposed that the general curiosity hath been strongly
+excited, by the circumstances of this undertaking already known to the
+world; for, whether we consider the force of the squadron sent on
+this service, or the diversified distresses that each single ship was
+separately involved in, or the uncommon instances of varying fortune
+which attended the whole enterprize; each of these articles must,
+I conceive, from its well-known rude outlines, appear worthy of a
+completer and more finished delineation: And, if this be allowed with
+respect to the narrative part of the work, there can be no doubt about
+the more useful and instructive parts, which are almost every where
+interwoven with it; for I can venture to affirm, without fear of being
+contradicted, on a comparison, that no voyage, hitherto published,
+furnishes such a number of views of land, soundings, draughts of
+ports, charts, and other materials, for the improvement of geography
+and navigation, as are contained in the ensuing volume; which are the
+more valuable too, as the greatest part of them relate to such islands
+or coasts as have been hitherto not at all, or erroneously described;
+and where the want of sufficient and authentic information might
+occasion future enterprizes to prove abortive, perhaps with the
+destruction of the ships and men employed therein.
+
+Besides the number and choice of these marine drawings and
+descriptions, there is another very essential circumstance belonging
+to them, which much enhances their worth; and that is the great
+accuracy with which they were executed. I shall express my opinion of
+them, in this particular, very imperfectly, when I say that they are
+not exceeded, and perhaps not equalled, by any thing of this nature
+that hath, as yet, been communicated to the world: For they were not
+copied from the works of others, or composed at home from imperfect
+accounts given by incurious and unskilful observers, a practice
+too frequent in these matters; but the greatest part of them were
+delineated on the spot, with the utmost exactness, by the direction
+and under the eye of Mr Anson himself; and where, as is the case in
+three or four of them, they have been done by less skilful hands, or
+were found in possession of the enemy, and consequently their justness
+could be less relied on, I have always taken care to apprize the
+reader of it, and to put him on his guard against giving entire credit
+to them; although I doubt not but these less authentic draughts, thus
+cautiously inserted, are to the full as correct as those which are
+usually published upon these occasions. For, as actual surveys of
+roads and harbours, and nice and critical delineations of views of
+land, take up much time and attention, and require a good degree
+of skill, both in planning and drawing, those who are defective
+in industry and ability supply these wants by bold conjectures and
+fictitious descriptions; and, as they can be no otherwise confuted
+than by going on the spot, and running the risk of suffering by their
+misinformation, they have no apprehension of being detected; and
+therefore, when they intrude their supposititious productions on the
+public, they make no conscience of boasting, at the same time, with
+how much skill and care they have been executed. But let not those who
+are unacquainted with naval affairs imagine, that the impositions of
+this kind are of an innocent nature; for, as exact views of land are
+the surest guides to a seaman, on a coast where he has never been
+before, all fictions, in so interesting a matter, must be attended
+with numerous dangers, and sometimes with the destruction of those who
+are thus unhappily deceived.[7]
+
+[Footnote 7: It must be quite obvious to all who are in the least
+degree acquainted with the nature of these draughts and views of land,
+in the nature of a coasting pilot, that it is utterly impossible to
+reduce them within the compass of an octavo size, and at the same
+time to render them of the smallest degree of usefulness; while large
+plates must have been necessary, and speedily destroyed by opening and
+refolding.--E.]
+
+Besides these draughts of such places as Mr Anson, or the ships which
+he commanded, have touched at in the course of this expedition, and
+the descriptions and directions relating thereto, there is inserted,
+in the ensuing work, an ample account, with a chart annexed to it, of
+a particular navigation, of which hitherto little more than the name
+has been known, except to those immediately employed in it: I mean
+the tract described by the Manilla ship, in her passage to Acapulco,
+through the northern part of the Pacific-ocean. This material article
+is collected from the draughts and journals met with on board the
+Manilla galleon, founded on the experience of more than an hundred and
+fifty years practice, and corroborated in its principal circumstances
+by the concurrent evidence of all the Spanish prisoners taken in that
+vessel. And as many of their journals; which I have examined, appear
+to have been not ill kept, I presume the chart of that northern ocean,
+and the particulars of their routes through it, may be very safely
+relied on by future navigators. The advantages which may be drawn from
+an exact knowledge of this navigation, and the beneficial projects
+which may be formed thereon, both in war and peace, are by no means
+proper to be discussed in this place; but they will easily offer
+themselves to the skilful in maritime affairs. However, as the Manilla
+ships are the only ones which have ever traversed this vast ocean,
+except a French straggler or two, which have been afterwards seized on
+the coast of Mexico; and as, during near two ages, in which this trade
+has been carried on, the Spaniards have secreted with the utmost
+care all accounts of their voyages from the rest of the world; these
+reasons would alone authorize the insertion of those papers, and would
+recommend them to the inquisitive, as a very great improvement in
+geography, and worthy of attention, from the singularity of many
+circumstances therein recited.
+
+I must add what, in my opinion, is far from being the least
+recommendation of these materials, that the observations of the
+variations of the compass, which are laid down in the chart from these
+Spanish journals, tend greatly to complete the general system of
+the magnetic variation, of infinite importance to the commercial and
+sea-faring part of mankind. These observations were, though in vain,
+often publicly called for by our learned countryman, the late Dr
+Halley, and to his immortal reputation they confirm, as far as they
+extend, the wonderful hypothesis he had entertained on this head,
+and very nearly correspond, in their quantity, to the predictions he
+published about fifty years since, long before he was acquainted with
+any one observation made in those seas. The ascertaining the
+variation in that part of the world is just now of more than
+ordinary consequence, as the editors of a new variation chart, lately
+published, for want of proper information, have been misled by
+an erroneous analogy, and have even mistaken the very species of
+variation in that of the northern ocean; for they make it westerly
+where it is easterly, and have laid it down 12 deg. or 13 deg. different from
+its real quantity.
+
+This much it has been thought necessary to premise, with regard to the
+hydrographical and geographical part of the ensuing work; which, it
+is hoped, the reader will find, on perusal, much ampler and more
+important than this slight sketch can well explain. But, as there
+are hereafter interspersed, occasionally, some accounts of Spanish
+transactions, and many observations relative to the dispositions
+of the American Spaniards, and to the condition of the countries
+bordering on the South Seas; and as herein I may appear to differ
+greatly from the opinions generally established; I think it behoves me
+particularly to recite the authorities I have been guided by in these
+matters, that I may not be censured as having given way, either to a
+thoughtless credulity on the one hand, or, what would be a much more
+criminal imputation, to a wilful and deliberate misrepresentation on
+the other.
+
+Mr Anson, before he set sail upon this expedition, besides the printed
+journals to these parts, took care to furnish himself with the best
+manuscript accounts he could procure of all the Spanish settlements
+upon the coasts of Chili, Peru, and Mexico. These he carefully
+compared with the examinations of his prisoners, and the informations
+of several intelligent persons who fell into his hands in the South
+Seas. He had likewise the good fortune, in some of his captures, to
+possess himself of a great number of letters and papers of a public
+nature, many of them written by the viceroy of Peru to the viceroy
+of Santa Fee, to the presidents of Panama and Chili, to Don Blass
+de Lezo, admiral of the galleons, and to divers other persons in
+considerable employments; and in these letters there was usually
+inserted a recital of those they were intended to answer, so that they
+contained no small part of the correspondence between these officers,
+for some time previous to our arrival on the coast. We took, besides,
+many letters, sent from persons entrusted by the Spanish government,
+to their friends and correspondents, which were frequently filled with
+narrations of public business, and sometimes contained undisguised
+animadversions on the views and conduct of their superiors. From these
+materials those accounts of the Spanish affairs ore drawn, which may
+appear, at first sight, the most exceptionable. In particular, the
+history of the various casualties which befel Pizarro's squadron is,
+for the most part, composed from intercepted letters; though, indeed,
+the relation of the insurrection of Orellana and his followers is
+founded on rather a less disputable authority; for it was taken from
+the mouths of an English gentleman then on board Pizarro, who often
+conversed with Pizarro; and it was, upon enquiry, confirmed in its
+principal circumstances by others who were in the ship at the same
+time: so that the fact, however extraordinary, is, I conceive, not to
+be contested.
+
+And, on this occasion, I cannot but mention, that, though I have
+endeavoured with my utmost care to adhere strictly to truth, in every
+article of the ensuing narration, yet I am apprehensive that, in so
+complicated a work, some oversights must have been committed, by the
+inattention to which, at all times, all mankind are liable. However, I
+am conscious, as yet, of none but literal and insignificant mistakes;
+and if there are others more considerable, which have escaped me, I
+flatter myself they are not of moment enough to affect any material
+transaction; and therefore I hope they may justly claim the reader's
+indulgence.
+
+After this general account of the ensuing work, it might be expected
+perhaps, that I should proceed to the work itself; but I cannot finish
+this introduction without adding a few reflections on a matter very
+nearly connected with the present subject, and, as I conceive, neither
+destitute of utility nor unworthy the attention of the public: I
+mean the animating my countrymen, both in their public and private
+stations, to the encouragement of all kinds of geographical and
+nautical observations, and of every species of mechanical and
+commercial information. It is by a settled attachment to these
+seemingly minute particulars, that our ambitious neighbours have
+established some part of that power with which we are now struggling:
+and as we have the means in our hands of pursuing these subjects more
+effectually than they can, it would be a dishonour to us longer to
+neglect so easy and beneficial a practice. For, as we have a navy much
+more numerous than theirs, great part of which is always employed in
+very distant stations, either in the protection of our colonies and
+commerce, or in assisting our allies against the common enemy, this
+gives us frequent opportunities of furnishing ourselves with such kind
+of materials as are here recommended, and such as might turn greatly
+to our advantage either in war or peace; since, not to mention what
+might be expected from the officers of the navy, if their application
+to these subjects was properly encouraged, it would create no new
+expence to the government to establish a particular regulation for
+this purpose; as all that would be requisite would be constantly to
+embark, in some of our men of war which are sent on those distant
+cruizes, a person who, with the character of an engineer, and the
+skill and talents necessary to that profession, should be employed in
+drawing such coasts, and planning such harbours, as the ship should
+touch at, and in making such other observations, of all kinds, as
+might either prove of advantage to future navigators, or might any
+ways tend to promote the public service. Persons habituated to these
+operations, which could not fail at the same time of improving them in
+their proper business, would be extremely useful in many other lights
+besides those already mentioned, and might tend to secure our fleets
+from those disgraces with which their attempts against places on
+shore have been often attended. And, in a nation like ours, where
+all sciences are more eagerly and universally pursued, and better
+understood, than in any other part of the world, proper subjects for
+these employments cannot long be wanting, if due encouragement were
+given to them.
+
+This method, here recommended, is known to have been frequently
+practised by the French, particularly in the instance of Mons.
+Frezier, an engineer, who has published a celebrated voyage to the
+South Seas: for this person was purposely sent by the French king, in
+the year 1711, into that country, on board a merchant ship, that
+he might examine and describe the coast, and take plans of all the
+fortified places; the better to enable the French to prosecute their
+illicit trade, or, on a rupture between them and the court of Spain,
+to form their enterprizes in those seas with more readiness and
+certainty. Should we pursue this method, we might hope that the
+emulation amongst those who were commissioned for these undertakings,
+and the experience which, even in the most peaceable intervals, they
+would thereby acquire, might at length procure us a proper number
+of able engineers, and might efface the national scandal which our
+deficiency in that species of men has sometimes exposed us to: and
+surely every step to encourage and improve them is of greater moment
+to the public, as no persons, when they are properly instructed, make
+better returns in war for the distinctions and emoluments bestowed
+on them in times of peace: of which, the advantages the French have
+reaped from their dexterity, too numerous and recent to be soon
+forgot, are an ample confirmation.
+
+Having mentioned engineers, or such as are skilled in drawing and the
+other usual practices of that profession, as the properest persons
+to be employed in these foreign enquiries, I cannot but lament, as
+it offers itself so very naturally to the subject in hand, how very
+imperfect many of our accounts of distant countries are rendered by
+the relators being unskilled in drawing, and in the general principles
+of surveying, even where other abilities have not been wanting. Had
+more of our travellers been initiated in these acquirements, and had
+there been added thereto some little skill in the common astronomical
+observations, all which a person of ordinary talents might attain with
+a very moderate share of application, we should, by this time, have
+seen the geography of the globe much correcter than we now find it;
+the dangers of navigation would have been considerably lessened, and
+the manners, arts, and produce of foreign countries would have been
+better known to us than they are. Indeed, when I consider the strong
+incitements that all travellers have to pursue some part at least of
+these qualifications, especially drawing; when I consider how much
+it would facilitate their observations, assist and strengthen their
+memories, and of how tedious, and often unintelligible, a load of
+description it would rid them; I cannot but wonder that any person who
+intends to visit distant countries, with a view of informing either
+himself or others, should be wanting in so necessary a piece of skill.
+And, to enforce this argument still farther, I must add, that, besides
+the uses of drawing already mentioned, there is one which, though not
+so obvious, is yet perhaps of more consequence than all that has been
+hitherto urged; I mean the strength and distinguishing power it adds
+to some of our faculties. This appears from hence, that those who are
+used to draw objects observe them with more accuracy than others who
+are not habituated to that practice. For we may easily find, by a
+little experience, that when we view any object, however simple, our
+attention or memory is scarcely at any time so strong as to enable us,
+when we have turned our eyes away from it, to recollect exactly every
+part it consisted of, and to recall all the circular stances of its
+appearance; since, on examination, it will be discovered, that in some
+we were mistaken, and others we had totally overlooked. But he who is
+accustomed to draw what he sees, is, at the same time, accustomed to
+rectify this inattention; for, by confronting his ideas, copied on
+the paper, with the object he intends to represent, he finds out
+what circumstance has deceived him in its appearance; and hence he at
+length acquires the habit of observing much more at one view than he
+could ever have done without his practice and proficiency in drawing.
+
+If what has been said merits the attention of travellers of all sorts,
+it is, I think, more particularly applicable to the gentlemen of the
+navy, since, without drawing and planning, neither charts nor views of
+land can be taken; and without these it is sufficiently evident that
+navigation is at a full stand. It is doubtless from a persuasion of
+the utility of these qualifications, that his majesty has established
+a drawing-master at Portsmouth, for the instruction of those who are
+presumed to be hereafter entrusted with the command of his royal
+navy; and though some have been so far misled as to suppose that the
+perfection of sea officers consisted in a turn of mind and temper
+resembling the boisterous element they have to deal with, and have
+condemned all literature and science, as effeminate and derogatory
+to that ferocity, which, they would falsely persuade us, was the most
+unerring characteristic of courage, yet it is to be hoped that
+such absurdities have not at any time been authorized by the public
+opinion, and that the belief daily diminishes. If those who adhere
+to these mischievous positions were capable of being influenced by
+reason, or swayed by example, I should think it sufficient for their
+conviction to observe, that the most valuable drawings inserted in
+the following work, though done with such skill that even professed
+artists can with difficulty imitate them, were taken by Mr Piercy
+Bret, one of Mr Anson's lieutenants, and since captain of the Lion
+man-of-war, who, in his memorable engagement with the Elizabeth, [for
+the importance of the service, or the resolution with which it was
+conducted, inferior to none this age has seen,] has given ample proof
+that a proficiency in the arts I have been recommending, is extremely
+consistent with the most exemplary bravery, and the most distinguished
+skill in every function belonging to a sea officer.
+
+Indeed, when the many branches of science are considered, of which
+even the common practice of navigation is composed, and the many
+improvements which men of skill have added to this practice within
+these few years, it would induce one to believe that the advantages
+of reflection and speculative knowledge were in no profession more
+eminent than in that of a naval officer; for, not to mention some
+expertness in geography, geometry, and astronomy, which it would be
+dishonourable for him to be without, as his journal and his estimate
+of the daily position of the ship are founded on particular branches
+of these sciences, it may well be supposed, that the management and
+working of a ship, the discovery of her most eligible position in the
+water, usually called her trim, and the disposition of her sails in
+the most advantageous manner, are articles in which the knowledge
+of mechanics cannot but be greatly assistant. And, perhaps, the
+application of this kind of knowledge to naval subjects may produce
+as great improvements in sailing and working a ship, as it has already
+done in many other matters conducive to the ease and convenience of
+human life; since, when the fabric of a ship and the variety of her
+sails are considered, together with the artificial contrivances for
+adapting them to her different motions, as it cannot be doubted but
+these things have been brought about by more than ordinary sagacity
+and invention; so neither can it be doubted but that, in some
+conjunctures, a speculative and scientific turn of mind may find out
+the means of directing and disposing this complicated mechanism much
+more advantageously than can be done by mere habit, or by a servile
+copying of what others may have, perhaps erroneously, practised in
+similar emergencies. But it is time to finish this digression, and to
+leave the reader to the perusal of the ensuing work, which, with how
+little art soever it may be executed, will yet, from the importance
+of the subject, and the utility and excellence of the materials, merit
+some share of the public attention.
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Of the Equipment of the Squadron, and the Incidents relating to it,
+from its first Appointment to its setting Sail from St Helens._
+
+The squadron under the command of Mr Anson, of which I here propose to
+recite the most material proceedings, having undergone many changes in
+its destination, its force, and its equipment, during the ten months
+between its original appointment and its final sailing from St Helens,
+I conceive the history of these alterations is a detail necessary to
+be made public, both for the honour of those who first planned and
+promoted this enterprize, and for the justification of those who have
+been entrusted with its execution; since it will from hence appear,
+that the accidents the expedition was afterwards exposed to, and which
+prevented it from producing all the national advantages the strength
+of the squadron and the expectation of the public seemed to presage,
+were principally owing to a series of interruptions, which delayed the
+commander in the course of his preparations, and which it exceeded his
+utmost industry either to avoid or get removed.
+
+When, in the latter end of the summer 1739, it was foreseen that a
+war with Spain was inevitable, it was the opinion of some considerable
+persons, then trusted with the administration of affairs, that the
+most prudent step the nation could take, on the breaking out of the
+war, was attacking that crown in her distant settlements; for by this
+means, as at that time there was the greatest probability of success,
+it was supposed that we should cut off the principal resources of the
+enemy, and should reduce them to the necessity of sincerely desiring
+a peace, as they would be deprived of the returns of that treasure by
+which alone they could be enabled to carry on a war.
+
+In pursuance of these sentiments, several projects were examined,
+and several resolutions were taken by the council. And, in all these
+deliberations, it was from the first determined, that George
+Anson, Esq. then captain of the Centurion, should be employed as
+commander-in-chief of an expedition of this kind: and, he at that time
+being absent on a cruize, a vessel was dispatched to his station so
+early as the beginning of September, to order him to return with his
+ship to Portsmouth. And soon after he came there, that is, on the
+10th November following, he received a letter from Sir Charles
+Wager, directing him to repair to London, and to attend the board of
+Admiralty; where, when he arrived, he was informed by Sir Charles,
+that two squadrons would be immediately fitted out for two secret
+expeditions, which, however, would have some connection with each
+other; and that he, Mr Anson, was intended to command one of them; and
+that Mr Cornwall, who hath since lost his life gloriously in defence
+of his country's honour, was to command the other; that the squadron
+under Mr Anson was to take on board three independent companies of an
+hundred men each, and Bland's regiment of foot; that Colonel Bland was
+likewise to embark with his regiment, and to command the land-forces;
+and that, as soon as this squadron could be fitted for sea, they were
+to sail, with express orders to touch at no place till they came to
+Java-Head in the East-Indies; that they were there only to stop to
+take in water, and thence to proceed directly to the city of Manilla
+in Luconia, one of the Philippine islands; that the other squadron,
+of equal force with this commanded by Mr Anson, was intended to pass
+round Cape Horn into the South Seas, to range along that coast; and,
+after cruizing upon the enemy in those parts, and attempting their
+settlements, this squadron, in its return, was to rendezvous at
+Manilla, there to join the squadron under Mr Anson, where they were
+to refresh their men, and to refit their ships, and perhaps receive
+orders for other considerable enterprizes.
+
+This scheme was doubtless extremely well projected, and could not
+but have greatly advanced the public service, and the reputation
+and fortune of those concerned in its execution; for, had Mr Anson
+proceeded to Manilla at the time and in the manner proposed by Sir
+Charles Wager, he would in all probability have arrived there before
+they had received any advice of the war between us and Spain, and
+consequently before they had been in the least prepared for the
+reception of an enemy, or had any apprehensions of their danger. The
+city of Manilla might well be supposed to have been at that time in
+the same defenceless condition with all the other Spanish settlements,
+just at the breaking out of the war; that is, their fortifications
+neglected, and in many places decayed; their cannon dismounted, or
+rendered useless by the mouldering of their carriages; their magazines
+both of military stores and provisions, all empty; their garrisons
+unpaid, and consequently thin, ill affected, and dispirited; and the
+royal chests of Peru, whence alone all these disorders could receive
+redress, drained to the very bottom. This, from the intercepted
+letters of their viceroys and governors, is well known to have been
+the defenceless state of Panama, and the other places on the coast of
+the South Sea, for near a twelvemonth after our declaration of war.
+And it cannot be supposed that the city of Manilla, removed still
+farther by almost half the circumference of the globe, should have
+experienced from the Spanish government a greater share of attention
+for its security than Panama, and the other important ports in Peru
+and Chili, on which their possession of that immense empire depends.
+Indeed, it is now well known that Manilla was at that time incapable
+of making any considerable defence, and, in all probability, would
+have surrendered only on the appearance of our squadron before it. The
+consequence of this city, and the island it stands on, may, in some
+measure, be estimated from the known healthiness of its air,
+the excellence of its port and bay, the number and wealth of its
+inhabitants, and the very extensive and beneficial commerce it carries
+on to the principal ports in the East-Indies and China, and its
+exclusive trade to Acapulco; the returns for which alone, being made
+in silver, are, upon the lowest calculation, not less than three
+millions of dollars yearly.
+
+On this scheme Sir Charles Wager was so intent, that, on the 18th
+December, a few days only before this first conference, Mr Anson
+received an order to take under his command the Argyle, Severn, Pearl,
+Wager, and Tryal sloop; and other orders were issued to him, in
+the same month and in December, relating to the victualling of this
+squadron. But, on attending the Admiralty in the beginning of January,
+1740, Mr Anson was informed by Sir Charles Wager, that, for reasons
+with which he was not acquainted, the expedition to Manilla was laid
+aside. It may well be conceived that Mr Anson was extremely chagrined
+at losing the command of so infallible, so honourable, and in every
+respect so desirable an enterprize; especially as he had already, at
+a very great expence, made the necessary provision for his own
+accommodation in this voyage, which he had reason to expect would
+prove very long. However, to render this appointment more tolerable,
+Sir Charles Wager informed him that the expedition to the South Sea
+was still intended; and that he, Mr Anson, and his squadron, as their
+first destination was now countermanded, should be employed in that
+service. And, on the 10th January, 1740, he received his commission,
+appointing him Commander-in-chief of the before-mentioned squadron,
+the Argyle being in the course of preparation exchanged for the
+Gloucester, with which he sailed above eight months afterwards from St
+Helens. On this change of destination, the equipment of the squadron
+was still prosecuted with as much vigour as ever; and the victualling,
+and whatever depended on the commodore, was soon so far advanced, that
+he conceived the ships might be capable of putting to sea the
+instant he should receive his final orders, of which he was in daily
+expectation.
+
+At length, on the 28th June, 1740, the Duke of Newcastle, principal
+secretary of state, delivered to him his majesty's instructions, dated
+on the 31st of January preceding, with an additional instruction from
+the lords justices, dated 19th June. On the receipt of these, Mr Anson
+immediately repaired to Spithead, with a resolution to sail with the
+first fair wind, flattering himself that all his difficulties were now
+at an end: for though he knew by the muster that his squadron wanted
+three hundred men of their complement, a deficiency he had not, with
+all his assiduity, been able to get supplied, yet as Sir Charles Wager
+had informed him that an order from the board of Admiralty was sent to
+Sir John Norris to spare him the numbers which he wanted; he doubted
+not of its being complied with. But, on his arrival at Portsmouth, he
+found himself greatly mistaken and disappointed in this persuasion:
+for, on application, Sir John Norris told him he could spare him none,
+as he wanted men for his own fleet. This occasioned an inevitable
+and very considerable delay, and it was the end of July before this
+deficiency was by any means supplied, and all that was then done
+was extremely short of his necessities and expectation; for Admiral
+Balchen, who succeeded to the command at Spithead, after Sir John
+Norris had sailed to the westward, instead of three hundred sailors
+which Mr Anson wanted of his complement, ordered on board the squadron
+an hundred and seventy men only, of which thirty-two were from the
+hospital and sick-quarters, thirty-seven men from the Salisbury, with
+three officers and ninety-eight marines of Colonel Lowther's regiment;
+and these were all that were ever granted to make up the forementioned
+deficiency.
+
+But the commodore's mortification did not end here. It has been
+already observed, that it was at first intended that Colonel Bland's
+regiment, and three independent companies of an hundred men each,
+should embark as land-forces on board the squadron. But this
+disposition was now changed; and all the land-forces that were to
+be allowed were five hundred invalids, to be collected from the
+out-pensioners of Chelsea College. As these consisted of soldiers,
+who, from their age, wounds, and other circumstances, were incapable
+of serving in marching regiments, Mr Anson was much chagrined at
+having such a decrepid detachment allotted to him; for he was fully
+persuaded that the greatest part of them would perish long before they
+could arrive at the scene of action, since the delays he had already
+experienced necessarily confined his passage round Cape Horn to the
+most rigorous season of the year. Sir Charles Wager joined in opinion
+with the commodore, that invalids were by no means proper for this
+service, and strenuously solicited to have them, exchanged. But he was
+told, that persons who were considered better judges of soldiers than
+he or Mr Anson, thought them the properest men that could be employed
+on this occasion; and, upon this determination, they were ordered on
+board the squadron on the 5th of August. But, instead of five hundred,
+there came no more on board than two hundred and fifty-nine; for all
+those who had limbs and strength to walk out of Portsmouth deserted,
+leaving only those behind who were literally invalids, most of them
+being sixty years of age, and some upwards of seventy. Indeed, it
+is difficult to conceive a more moving scene than the embarkation of
+these unhappy veterans: they were themselves extremely averse from
+the service in which they were engaged, and fully apprized of all the
+disasters they were afterwards exposed to, the apprehensions of
+which were strongly marked by the concern which appeared in their
+countenances, which was mixed with no small degree of indignation to
+be thus hurried from their repose into a fatiguing employ, to which
+neither the strength of their bodies, nor the vigour of their minds,
+were any way proportioned; and in which, without seeing the face of an
+enemy, or in the least promoting the success of the enterprize, they
+would in all probability uselessly perish by lingering and painful
+diseases; and this, too, after they had spent the activity and
+strength of their youth in the service of their country.
+
+I cannot but observe, on this melancholy incident, how extremely
+unfortunate it was, both to this aged and diseased detachment, and
+to the expedition in which they were engaged, that, amongst all the
+out-pensioners of Chelsea College, which were supposed to amount to
+two thousand men, the most crazy and infirm only should be called out
+for so laborious and perilous an undertaking; for it was well known,
+however unfit invalids in general might be for this service, yet, by a
+prudent choice, there might have been found amongst them five hundred
+men who had some remains of vigour; and Mr Anson fully expected that
+the best of them would have been allotted to him; whereas the
+whole detachment sent seemed to be made up of the most decrepid and
+miserable objects that could be collected out of the whole body; and
+by the desertion already mentioned, even these were cleared of the
+little strength and health which were to be found among them, and he
+had to take up with such as were much fitter for an infirmary than for
+any military duty.
+
+It is here also necessary to mention another material particular in
+the equipment of this squadron. After it was determined that Mr Anson
+should be sent to the South Sea, it was proposed to Mr Anson to take
+with him two persons under the denomination of agent-victuallers.
+Those mentioned for this employment had been formerly in the Spanish
+American colonies, in the service of the South-Sea Company, and it
+was supposed, that, by their knowledge and intelligence on that coast,
+they might often procure provisions for the squadron by compact with
+the inhabitants, when they were not to be got by force of arms. These
+agent-victuallers were, for this purpose, to be allowed to carry
+to the value of fifteen thousand pounds in merchandize on board the
+squadron, as they represented that it would be much easier to procure
+provisions in exchange for goods, than for the value of the same goods
+in money. Whatever colours were given to this scheme, it was difficult
+to persuade the generality of mankind that it was not principally
+intended for the enrichment of the agents, by the beneficial commerce
+they proposed to carry on upon that coast. From the beginning, Mr
+Anson objected both to the appointment of agent-victuallers and to
+allowing them to carry a cargo on board the squadron; for he conceived
+that in those few amicable ports where the squadron might touch,
+he needed not their assistance to contract for any provisions these
+places afforded; and, when on the enemy's coast, he did not imagine
+they could ever procure him the necessaries he should want, unless
+the military operations of his squadron were to be regulated by the
+ridiculous views of their trading projects, with which he was resolved
+not to comply. All that he thought the government ought to have
+done, of this kind, was to put on board, to the value of two or three
+thousand pounds, of such goods only as were suitable for the Indians,
+or the Spanish planters on the less cultivated parts of the coast, as
+it was in such places only that he considered it might be worth
+while to truck with the enemy for provisions, and it was sufficiently
+evident that a very small cargo would suffice for such places.
+
+Although the commodore objected both to the appointment of these
+officers and to their project, of the ill success of which he had
+no question, yet, as they had insinuated that their scheme, besides
+victualling the squadron, might contribute to the settling a trade on
+that coast which might afterwards be carried on without difficulty,
+and might become of very considerable national advantage, they were
+much listened to by several considerable persons; and, of the fifteen
+thousand pounds, which was to be the amount of their cargo, the
+government agreed to advance them ten thousand pounds upon imprest,
+and the remaining five thousand they raised on bottomry bonds, and the
+goods purchased with this latter sum were all that were put on
+board the squadron, how much soever their amount might be afterwards
+magnified by common report. This cargo was shipped at first in the
+Wager store-ship, and one of the victuallers, no part of it being
+admitted on board the men-of-war; but, when the commodore was at St
+Catharine's, he considered, in case the squadron might be separated,
+that it might be pretended that some of the ships were disappointed of
+provisions for want of a cargo to truck with, wherefore he distributed
+some of the least bulky commodities on board the men-of-war, leaving
+the remainder principally on board the Wager, in which it was lost,
+and more of the goods perishing, by various accidents to be recited
+afterwards, and as no part of them being disposed of on the coast,
+the few that came home to England, when sold, did not produce above a
+fourth part of the original cost. So true was the commodore's judgment
+of the event of this project, which had been considered by many as
+infallibly productive of immense gain.
+
+We return to the transactions at Portsmouth. To supply the place
+of the two hundred and forty invalids who had deserted, there were
+ordered on board two hundred and ten marines, drafted from different
+regiments. These were raw and undisciplined men, just raised, and had
+scarcely any thing more of the soldier than their regimentals, none of
+them having been so far trained as to be permitted to fire. The last
+of these detachments came on board on the 8th August, and on the 10th
+the squadron dropped down from Spithead to St Helen's, there to wait
+for a wind to proceed on the expedition. The delays we had already
+suffered had not yet spent all their influence; for we were now
+advanced to that season of the year when the westerly winds are
+usually very prevalent and violent; and it was thought proper that
+we should put to sea in company with the fleet commanded by Admiral
+Balchen, and the expedition under Lord Cathcart. As we now made up
+in all twenty-one sail of men-of-war, and one hundred and twenty-four
+sail of merchant ships and transports, we had no hopes of getting out
+of the channel with so large a fleet, without the continuance of a
+fair wind for a considerable time, and this was what we had every day
+less and less reason to expect, as the time of the equinox drew near;
+wherefore our golden dreams and ideal possession of the Peruvian
+treasures grew every day more faint, and the difficulties and dangers
+of the passage round Cape Horn, in the winter season, filled our
+imaginations in their room. It was forty days from our arrival at St
+Helens to our final departure from that place; and even then, having
+orders to proceed without Lord Cathcart, we tided down the channel
+with a contrary wind. But this interval of forty days was not free
+from the displeasing fatigue of often setting sail, and being as often
+obliged to return, nor exempt from dangers greater than have been
+sometimes undergone in surrounding the globe. For the wind coming fair
+for the first time on the 23d August, we got under sail, and Admiral
+Balchen shewed himself truly solicitous to have proceeded to sea; but
+the wind soon returned to its old quarter, and obliged us to put
+back to St Helens, not without considerable hazard, and some damage
+received by two of the transports, which ran foul of each other when
+tacking. We made two or three other attempts to sail, but without any
+better success; and, on the 6th September, being returned to anchor
+at St Helens, after one of those fruitless attempts, the wind blew so
+fresh that the whole fleet had to strike yards and topmasts to prevent
+drifting: Yet, notwithstanding this precaution, the Centurion drove
+next evening, and brought both cables a-head, when we were in no small
+danger of getting foul of the Prince Frederick, a seventy-gun ship,
+which was moored only a small distance under our stern, but we happily
+escaped, in consequence of her drifting at the same time, by which she
+preserved her distance, yet we did not think ourselves safe till we at
+last let go our sheet anchor, which fortunately brought us up.
+
+We were in some measure relieved from this lingering and vexatious
+situation on the 9th September, by an order then received by
+Commodore Anson, from the lords justices, to put to sea on the first
+opportunity, with his own squadron only, if Lord Cathcart should not
+be ready. Being thus freed from the troublesome company of so large
+a fleet, our commodore resolved to weigh and tide it down channel,
+as soon as the weather should become sufficiently moderate, and this
+might easily have been done by our squadron full two months sooner,
+had the orders of the Admiralty for supplying us with seamen been
+punctually complied with, and had we met with none of those other
+delays mentioned in this narration. Even now, our hopes of a speedy
+departure were somewhat damped, by a subsequent order which Mr Anson
+received on the 12th September, by which he was required to take under
+his convoy the St Albans and the Turkey fleet, and to join the Dragon
+and the Winchester, with the Straits and American trade, at Torbay or
+Plymouth, and to proceed with them to sea as far as their way and
+ours lay together. This encumbrance of convoy gave us some uneasiness,
+fearing it might lengthen our passage to Madeira: However, having now
+the command to himself, Mr Anson resolved to tide down channel with
+the first moderate weather; and, that the junction of the convoy
+might occasion as little loss of time as possible, he immediately sent
+directions to Torbay that the fleet he was there to take charge of
+should be in readiness to join him instantly on his approach. And at
+last, on the 18th September, he weighed from St Helens, and, though
+the wind was at first contrary, had the good fortune to get clear of
+the channel in four days, as will be more particularly related in the
+ensuing section.
+
+Having thus gone through the respective steps taken in the equipment
+of this squadron, it must be sufficiently obvious how different an
+aspect the expedition bore at its first appointment in the beginning
+of January, from what it did in the latter end of September, when
+it left the channel, and how much its numbers, its strength, and the
+probability of its success were diminished by the various incidents
+which took place in that interval. For, instead of having all our old
+and ordinary seamen exchanged for such as were young and able,
+which the commodore was at first promised, and having our complement
+complete to its full number, we were obliged to retain our first
+crews, which were very indifferent; and a deficiency of three hundred
+men in our numbers was no otherwise made up than by sending on board
+an hundred and seventy men, the greatest part of whom were discharged
+from hospitals, or new-raised marines who had never been at sea
+before. In the land-forces allotted to us, the change was still more
+disadvantageous; as, instead of Bland's regiment of foot, which was
+an old one, and three independent companies of an hundred men each,
+we had only four hundred and seventy invalids and marines, one part of
+whom were incapable of action, by their age and infirmities, and the
+other part useless, by ignorance of their duty. But the diminution of
+the strength of the squadron was not the greatest inconveniency which
+attended these alterations; for the contests, representations, and
+difficulties which they continually produced, as we have seen above
+that the authority of the Admiralty in these cases was not always
+submitted to, occasioned a delay and waste of time, which, in its
+consequences, was the source of all the disasters to which the
+enterprize was afterwards exposed. For, owing to these circumstances,
+we were forced to make our passage round Cape Horn at the most
+tempestuous season of the year, whence proceeded the separation of our
+squadron, the loss of numbers of our men, and the imminent hazard of
+oar total destruction. By this delay also, the enemy had been so well
+informed of our designs, that a person who had been employed in the
+service of the South-Sea Company, and arrived from Panama three or
+four days before we left Portsmouth, was able to relate to Mr Anson
+most of the particulars of the destination and strength of our
+squadron, from what he had learnt from the Spaniards before he
+left them. This was afterwards confirmed by a more extraordinary
+circumstance; for we shall find, that when the Spaniards, fully
+satisfied of our expedition being intended for the South Seas, had
+fitted out a squadron before us, which had so far got the start as
+to arrive before us at the island of Madeira, the commander of this
+squadron was so well instructed in the form and make of Mr Anson's
+broad pendant, and had imitated it so exactly, that he thereby decoyed
+the Pearl, one of our squadron, within gun-shot of him, before the
+captain of the Pearl was able to discover the deception.
+
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_The Passage from St Helens to the Island of Madeira, with a short
+Account of that Island, and of our Stay there._
+
+As observed in the preceding section, the squadron weighed from
+St Helens with a contrary wind on the 18th of September, 1740, our
+commodore proposing to tide down the channel, as he less dreaded the
+inconveniences we might have thereby to struggle with, than the risk
+he should run of ruining the enterprize by an uncertain, and, in
+all probability, a tedious attendance for a fair wind. The squadron
+allotted for this expedition consisted of five men-of-war, a sloop of
+war, and two victuallers. These were, the Centurion of 60 guns, and
+400 men, George Anson, Esq. commander; the Gloucester, of 50 guns, and
+300 men, Richard Norris, commander; the Severn, of 50 guns, and 300
+men, the Honourable Edward Legg, commander; the Pearl, of 40 guns, and
+250 men, Matthew Mitchell, commander; the Wager, of 28 guns, and 160
+men, Dandy Kidd, commander; the Tryal sloop, of 8 guns, and 100 men,
+the Honourable John Murray, commander. The two victuallers were pinks,
+the largest of about four hundred tons burden; and these were to
+attend us till the provisions we had on board were so far consumed as
+to make room for the additional quantity they carried, which was then
+to be taken into our ships, and they were to be discharged. Besides
+the before-mentioned complements of men borne by the ships as their
+crews, there were embarked in our squadron about 470 invalids
+and marines, as particularly mentioned in last section, under
+the denomination of land-forces, which were commanded by
+Lieutenant-Colonel Cracherode.
+
+With this squadron, together with the St Albans and Lark, and the
+Turkey trade under their convoy, we tided down channel for the first
+forty-eight hours. In the morning of the 20th, we discovered the
+Dragon, Winchester, South-Sea Castle, and Rye, with a number of
+merchantmen under their convoy, waiting for us off the Ram-head. We
+joined there the same day about noon, the commodore having orders to
+see them, together with the convoy of the St Albans and Lark, as far
+as their course and ours lay together. When we came in sight of this
+last-mentioned ship, Mr Anson first hoisted his broad pendant, and
+was saluted by all the men-of-war in company. After joining this last
+convoy, we made up eleven men-of-war, and about 150 sail of merchant
+ships, consisting of the Turkey, the Straits, and the American trades.
+The same day Mr Anson made a signal for all captains of men-of-war
+to come on board, when he delivered them their fighting and sailing
+instructions, and then we all stood to the S.W. with a fair wind; so
+that next day at noon, being the 21st, we had run forty leagues beyond
+the Ram-head. Being now clear of the land, our commodore, to render
+our view more extensive, ordered Captain Mitchell, in the Pearl, to
+make sail two leagues a-head of the fleet every morning, and to repair
+to his station every evening. Thus we proceeded till the 25th, when
+the Winchester, with the American convoy, made the concerted signal
+for leave to separate, and this being answered by the commodore, they
+left us, which, was done by the St Albans and the Dragon on the 24th,
+with the Turkey and Straits convoys.
+
+There now remained only our own squadron and the two victuallers, with
+which we stood on our course for the island of Madeira. But the winds
+were so contrary, that we had the mortification to be forty days on
+our passage to that island from St Helens, though it is often known
+to be done in ten or twelve. This delay was most unpleasant, and was
+productive of much discontent and ill humour among our people, of
+which these only can have an adequate idea who have experienced a
+similar situation: For, besides the peevishness and despondency, which
+foul and contrary winds, and a lingering voyage, never fail to produce
+on all occasions, we in particular had substantial reasons for being
+greatly alarmed at this unexpected impediment; since, as we departed
+from England much later than we ought to have done, we had placed
+almost all our hope of success on the chance of retrieving in some
+measure at sea, the time we had so unhappily wasted at Spithead and St
+Helens. At last, on Monday the 25th October, at five in the morning,
+we made the land to our great joy, and came to anchor in the afternoon
+in Madeira road, in forty fathoms, the Brazen Head bearing from us E.
+by S. the Loo N.N.W. and the Great Church N.N.E. We had hardly let go
+our anchor when an English privateer sloop ran under our stern, and
+saluted the commodore with nine guns, which we returned with five.
+Next day the English consul visited the commodore, and was saluted
+with nine guns on coming on board.
+
+The island of Madeira, where we now arrived, is famous through all our
+American settlements for its excellent wines, which seem designed by
+Providence for the refreshment of the inhabitants of the torrid zone.
+It is situated in a fine climate, in lat. 32 deg. 27' N. and long. from
+London 18 deg. 30' to 19 deg. 30' W. by our different reckonings, though laid
+down in the charts in 47 deg..[1] The whole island is composed of one
+continued hill of considerable height, extending from east to
+west; the declivity of which, on the south side, is cultivated and
+interspersed with vineyards. In the middle of this slope the merchants
+have their country seats, which contribute to form a very agreeable
+prospect. There is but one considerable town, named Fonchiale, on
+the south part of the island, situated at the bottom of a large
+bay. Towards the sea it is defended by a high wall with a battery of
+cannon, besides a castle on the Loo, which is a rock standing in the
+water at a small distance from the shore. Tonchiale is the only place
+of trade, and indeed the only place where it is possible for a boat to
+land; and even there the beach is so covered with great stones, and so
+violent a surf beats continually upon it, that the commodore did not
+care to venture the long-boats of our ships in fetching off water,
+and therefore ordered the captains to employ Portuguese boats on that
+service.
+
+[Footnote 1: The charts are however the most accurate, as that is the
+long. of the centre of Madeira, in our best modern maps.--E.]
+
+We continued about a week at this island, watering our ships, and
+providing the squadron with wine and other refreshments. While here,
+on the 3d November, Captain Richard Norris signified to the commodore,
+by letter, his desire to quit the command of the Gloucester, in order
+to return to England for the recovery of his health. The commodore
+complied with this request, and was pleased to appoint Captain Matthew
+Mitchell to command the Gloucester in his room, to remove Captain Kidd
+from the Wager to the Pearl, and Captain Murray from the Tryal sloop
+to the Wager, giving the command of the Tryal to Lieutenant
+Cheap. These promotions being settled, with other changes in the
+lieutenancies, the commodore, on the 4th November, gave to the
+captains their orders, appointing St Jago, one of the Cape Verd
+islands, to be the first place of rendezvous in case of separation;
+and, if they did not meet the Centurion there, directing them to make
+the best of their way to the island of St Catharine on the coast of
+Brazil. The water for the squadron being that day completed, and each
+ship supplied with as much wine and other refreshments as they
+could take in, we weighed anchor in the afternoon, and took leave of
+Madeira. But, before continuing the narrative of our transactions,
+I think it necessary to give some account of the proceedings of the
+enemy, and of the measures they had taken to render all our designs
+abortive.
+
+On visiting the governor of Madeira, Mr Anson was informed by him,
+that for three or four days in the latter end of October, there had
+appeared to the westward of the island seven or eight ships of the
+line and a _patache_, which last was sent close in with the land every
+day. The governor assured our commodore, upon his honour, that no
+person on the island had either given them intelligence, or had any
+sort of communication with them. He believed them to be either French
+or Spanish, but was rather inclined to suppose the latter. On this
+intelligence, Mr Anson sent an officer in a clean sloop eight leagues
+to the westwards, to reconnoitre them, and, if possible, to discover
+what they were: But the officer returned without having seen them, so
+that we still remained in uncertainty; yet we could not but conjecture
+that this fleet was intended to put a stop, if possible, to our
+expedition; and, had they cruized to the eastward of the island,
+instead of the westward, they could not have failed in doing so: for,
+as in that case they must infallibly have fallen in with us, we should
+have been under the necessity of throwing overboard vast quantities of
+provisions, to clear our ships for action; and this alone, independent
+of the event of the action, would have effectually prevented our
+progress. This was so obvious a measure, that we could not help
+imagining reasons which might have prevented them from pursuing it.
+We supposed, therefore, that this French or Spanish squadron, having
+advice that we were to sail in company with Admiral Balchen and Lord
+Cathcart's expedition, might not think it adviseable to meet with us
+till we had parted company, from apprehension of being over-matched,
+and supposed we might not separate before our arrival at this island.
+These were our speculations at the time, from which we had reason to
+suppose we might still fall in with them, in our way to the Cape
+de Verd islands. We were afterwards persuaded, in the course of our
+expedition, that this was the Spanish squadron commanded by Don Joseph
+Pizarro, sent out purposely to traverse the views and enterprizes of
+our squadron, to which they were greatly superior in strength. As this
+Spanish armament was so nearly connected with our expedition, and as
+the catastrophe, if underwent, though not effected by our force, was
+yet a considerable advantage to this nation produced in consequence
+of our equipment; I have, in the following section, given a summary
+account of their proceedings, from their first setting out from Spain
+in 1740, till the Asia, the only ship of the whole squadron that
+returned to Europe, got back to Corunna in the beginning of the year
+1746.
+
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_History of the Spanish Squadron commanded by Don Joseph Pizarro._
+
+The squadron fitted out by the court of Spain, to attend our motions,
+and traverse our projects, we supposed to have been the ships seen
+off Madeira. As this force was sent out particularly against our
+expedition, I cannot but imagine that the following history of its
+casualties, so far as has come to my knowledge, by intercepted letters
+and other information, is an essential part of the present work. For
+it will from hence appear, that we were the occasion of a considerable
+part of the Spanish naval power being diverted from prosecuting the
+ambitious views of that court in Europe; and whatever men and ships
+were lost by the enemy in this undertaking, were lost in consequence
+of the precautions they took to secure themselves against our
+expedition.
+
+This squadron, besides two ships bound for the West Indies, which did
+not part company till after they left Madeira, was composed of the
+following men-of-war, commanded by Don Joseph Pizarro. The Asia of 66
+guns and 700 men, the admiral's ship; the Guipuscoa of 74 guns and 700
+men; the Hermiona of 54 guns and 500 men; the Esperanza of 50 guns and
+450 men; the St Estevan of 40 guns and 350 men; and a patache of 20
+guns.
+
+Over and above their complements of sailors and marines, these ships
+had on board an old Spanish regiment of foot, intended to reinforce
+the garrisons on the coast of the South-Sea. Having cruised some days
+to leeward of Madeira, as formerly mentioned, they left that station
+in the beginning of November, and steered for the Rio de la Plata,
+where they arrived on the 5th of January O.S. and coming to anchor in
+the bay of Maldonado, at the mouth of that river, their admiral sent
+immediately to Buenos Ayres for a supply of provisions, having left
+Spain with only four months provisions on board. While waiting this
+supply, they received intelligence, by the treachery of the Portuguese
+governor of St Catharines, of Mr Anson having arrived at that island
+on the 21st December preceding, and that he was preparing to put to
+sea again with the utmost expedition. Notwithstanding his superior
+force, Pizarro had his reasons, and some say his orders, for avoiding
+our squadron any where short of the South-Sea. He was, besides,
+extremely desirous of getting round Cape Horn before us, imagining
+that alone would effectually baffle all our designs; wherefore,
+hearing that we were in his neighbourhood, and that we should be soon
+ready to proceed for Cape Horn, he weighed anchor with his five large
+ships, the Patache being disabled and condemned, and the men taken
+out of her; and, after a stay of seventeen days only, got under sail
+without his provisions, which arrived at Maldonado within a day or two
+after his departure. Notwithstanding this precipitation, we put to sea
+from St Catharines four days before he did from Maldonado; and at one
+part of our passage to Cape Horn the two squadrons were so near, that
+the Pearl, one of our ships, being separated from the rest, fell in
+with the Spanish fleet, and, mistaking the Asia for the Centurion,
+got within gun-shot of the Asia before the mistake was discovered, and
+narrowly escaped being taken.
+
+As it was the 22d January when the Spaniards weighed from Maldonado,
+they could not expect to get into the latitude of Cape Horn before the
+equinox; and, as they had reason to apprehend very tempestuous weather
+in doubling it at that season, while the Spanish sailors, for the most
+part accustomed to a fair-weather country, might be supposed averse
+from so dangerous and fatiguing a navigation, the better to encourage
+them, some part of their pay was advanced to them in European goods,
+which they were to have leave to dispose of in the South-Seas, that
+so the hopes of the great profits they were to make of their ventures,
+might animate them in their duty, and render them less disposed
+to repine at the labours, hardships, and perils they might in all
+probability meet with, before their arrival on the coast of Peru.
+
+Towards the latter end of February, Pizarro and his squadron got into
+the latitude of Cape Horn, and then stood to the westwards in order
+to double that southern promontory. But, in the night of the last of
+February O.S. while turning to windward with this view, the Guipuscoa,
+Hermiona, and Espranza were separated from the admiral. On the 6th
+March following, the Guipuscoa was separated from the other two; and
+next day, being that after we passed the Straits of Le Maire, there
+came on a most furious storm at N.W. which, in spite of all their
+efforts, drove the whole squadron to the eastward, and, after several
+fruitless attempts, obliged them to bear away for the river of Plate.
+Pizarro arrived there in the Asia about the middle of May, and was
+followed a few days after by the Esperanza and Estevan. The Hermiona
+was supposed to have foundered, as she was never more heard of; and
+the Guipuscoa was run on shore and destroyed on the coast of Brazil.
+The calamities of all kinds which this squadron underwent in their
+unsuccessful attempt to double Cape Horn, can only be paralleled by
+what we ourselves experienced in the same climate, when buffeted by
+the same storms. There was indeed some diversity in our distresses,
+rendering it difficult to decide whose situation was most worthy of
+commiseration; for, to all the miseries and misfortunes we experienced
+in common, as shattered rigging, leaky ships, and the fatigues and
+despondency necessarily attendant on these disasters, there was
+superadded on board our squadron the ravages of a most destructive
+and incurable disease; and in the Spanish squadron the devastation of
+famine.
+
+It has been already observed, that this squadron left Spain with only
+four months provisions on board, and even that, it is said, at short
+allowance, either owing to the hurry of their outfit, or presuming
+upon a supply at Buenos Ayres; so that, when their continuance at sea
+was prolonged, by the storms they met with off Cape Horn, a month
+or more beyond their expectation, they were reduced to such infinite
+distress, that rats, when they could be caught, sold for four dollars
+a-piece; and a sailor who died in one of the ships, had his death
+concealed by his brother for some days, who lay all that time in
+the hammock with the corpse, that he might receive the dead man's
+allowance of provisions. In this dreadful situation, if their horrors
+were capable of augmentation, they were alarmed by discovering
+a conspiracy among the marines on board the Asia, who proposed
+massacring the officers and whole crew, their sole motive for this
+bloody resolution appearing to be the desire of relieving their
+hunger, by appropriating the whole provisions in the ship to
+themselves. This design was prevented, when just on the point of
+execution, by means of one of their confessors, and three of the
+ringleaders were immediately put to death. By the complicated
+distresses of fatigue, sickness, and famine, the three ships that
+escaped lost the greatest part of their men. The admiral's ship, the
+Asia, arrived at Monte Video in the Rio Plata with only half her crew.
+The Estevan, when she anchored in the bay of Barragan had also lost
+half her men. The Esperanza was still more unfortunate, for of 450
+hands she brought with her from Spain, only 58 remained alive. The
+whole regiment of foot perished except sixty men. To give a more
+distinct idea of what they underwent upon this occasion, I shall
+present a short account of the fate of the Guipuscoa, extracted from a
+letter written by Don Joseph Mindinuetta, her captain, to a person of
+distinction at Lima, a copy of which fell into our hands when in the
+South-Sea.
+
+Having separated on the 6th March in a fog from the Hermiona and
+Esperanza, being then, as I suppose, to the S.E. of States Land, and
+plying to the westward, it blew a furious storm at N.W. the succeeding
+night, which, at half past ten, split his main-sail, and obliged him
+to bear away with his foresail. The ship now went ten knots an hour
+with a prodigious sea, and often ran her gangway under water. He
+likewise sprung his main-mast, and the ship made so much water that
+she could not be freed by four pumps assisted by bailing. On the 9th
+the wind became calm, but the sea continued so high that the ship, in
+rolling, opened all her upper works and seams, and started the butt
+ends of her planks, and the greatest part of her top-timbers, the
+bolts being drawn by the violence of the roll. In this condition, with
+additional disasters to the hull and rigging, they continued beating
+westward to the 12th, when they were in lat. 60 deg. S. and in great want
+of provisions, numbers perishing daily by the fatigue of pumping, and
+the survivors quite dispirited by labour, hunger, and the severity
+of the weather, their decks being covered with snow above a foot in
+depth. Finding the wind fixed in the west and blowing strong, and
+their passage that way impossible, they resolved to bear away for the
+Rio Plata. On the 22d they had to throw overboard all their upper-deck
+guns and an anchor, and were obliged to take six turns of the cable
+round the ship to prevent her from opening and falling to pieces. On
+the 4th of April, in calm weather, but with a very heavy sea, the
+ship rolled so much that her main-mast came by the board, and was soon
+after followed by the fore and mizen masts, after which they had
+to cut away the boltsprit, to diminish, if possible, the leakage
+forwards. By this time two hundred and fifty of the men had perished
+by hunger and fatigue. Those who were capable of working at the pumps,
+at which every officer took his turn without exception, were only
+allowed an ounce and a half of biscuit daily; while those who were
+weak and sickly, so that they could not assist in this necessary
+labour, had no more than one ounce of wheat. It was common for the men
+to fall down dead at the pumps, and all they could muster for duty,
+including the officers, was from eighty to an hundred men.
+
+The S.W. wind blew so fresh for some days after they lost their masts,
+that they could not set up jury-masts; so that they were obliged to
+drive like a wreck, between the latitude of 32 deg. and 38 deg. S. till the
+24th of April, when they made the coast of Brazil at Rio de Patas,
+ten leagues to the southward of the island of St Catharines. They came
+here to an anchor, the captain being very desirous of proceeding to St
+Catharines, in order to save the hull of the ship, with her guns and
+stores: But the crew instantly left off pumping, and all in one voice
+cried out, _On shore! on shore!_ enraged at the hardships they had
+suffered and the numbers they had lost, there being at this time
+thirty dead bodies lying on the deck. Thus the captain was obliged to
+run the ship directly to the land, where she parted and sunk five days
+after, with all her stores and furniture; but the remainder of the
+crew, whom hunger and fatigue had spared, to the number of four
+hundred, got safe on shore.
+
+From this account of the adventures and catastrophe of the Guiapuscoa,
+we may form some conjecture of the manner in which the Hermiona was
+lost, and of the distresses endured by the three remaining ships of
+the squadron which got into the Rio Plata. These last being in great
+want of masts, yards, rigging, and all kinds of naval stores,
+and having no supply at Buenos Ayres or any of the neighbouring
+settlements, Pizarro dispatched an advice-boat with a letter of credit
+to Rio de Janeiro, to purchase what was wanting from the Portuguese.
+He sent at the same time an express across the continent to St Jago de
+Chili, to be thence forwarded to the viceroy of Peru, informing him
+of the disasters that had befallen his squadron, and desiring a
+remittance of two hundred thousand dollars from the royal chest at
+Lima, to enable him to refit and victual his remaining ships, that he
+might be again in condition to attempt the passage to the South-Sea
+as soon as the season of the year should be more favourable. It is
+mentioned by the Spaniards, as a most extraordinary circumstance,
+that, though then the depth of winter, when the Cordilleras are
+esteemed impassable on account of the snow, the Indian who was charged
+with this express was only thirteen days on his journey from Buenos
+Ayres to St Jago in Chili, though the distance is three hundred
+Spanish leagues, near forty of which are among the snows and
+precipices of the Cordilleras.
+
+The return to this dispatch of Pizarro from the viceroy was by no
+means favourable. Instead of two hundred thousand dollars, the sum
+demanded, the viceroy remitted him only one hundred thousand, telling
+him that it was with great difficulty he was able to procure even
+that sum. But the inhabitants of Lima, who considered the presence
+of Pizarro as absolutely necessary to their security, were much
+discontented at this procedure, and did not scruple to assert, that
+it was not the want of money, but the interested views of some of the
+viceroy's confidants, that prevented Pizarro from getting the whole
+sum.
+
+The advice-boat sent to Rio Janeiro also executed her commission but
+imperfectly; for, though she brought back a considerable quantity of
+pitch, tar, and cordage, she could not procure either masts or yards;
+and, as an additional misfortune, Pizarro was disappointed of some
+masts he expected from Paraguay, as a carpenter whom he entrusted
+with a large sum of money, and sent there to cut masts, instead of
+prosecuting the business he was sent upon, married in the country,
+and refused to return. However, by removing the masts of the Esperanza
+into the Asia, and using what spare masts and yards they had on board,
+they made a shift to refit the Asia and Estevan: And, in the October
+following, Pizarro was prepared to put to sea with these two ships,
+in order to attempt the passage round Cape Horn a second time; but, in
+coming down the Rio Plata, the Estevan ran upon a shoal and beat off
+her rudder, and Pizarro proceeded to sea in the Asia without her.
+Having now the antarctic summer before him, and the winds favourable,
+no doubt was made of his having a fortunate and speedy passage: But,
+when off Cape Horn and going right before the wind, it being moderate
+weather, though in a swelling sea, the ship rolled away her masts, by
+some misconduct of the officer having the watch, and was a second time
+obliged to put back in great distress to the Rio Plata.
+
+As the Asia had suffered considerably in this second unfortunate
+expedition, the Esperanza was now ordered to be refitted, the command
+of her being given to Mindinuetta, who was formerly captain of the
+Guipuscoa. In November 1742, he sailed from the Rio Plata for the
+south, and arrived safe on the coast of Chili, where he was met by
+his commodore, Pizarro, who passed over-land from Buenos Ayres. Great
+animosities and contests took place between these two officers, owing
+to the claim of Pizarro to command the Esperanza, which Mindinuetta
+had brought round, and now refused to resign; insisting, as he had
+come round the South Sea alone and under no superior, it was not now
+in the power of Pizarro to resume the authority he had once parted
+with. But, after a long and obstinate struggle, as the president of
+Chili interposed and declared for Pizarro, Mindinuetta was obliged to
+submit.
+
+Pizarro had not yet completed the series of his misfortunes. When
+he and Mindinuetta returned over-land, in 1745, from Chili to Buenos
+Ayres, they found the Asia still at Monte Video, and resolved, if
+possible, to carry her to Europe. With this view they refitted her in
+the best manner they could, but had great difficulty in procuring
+a sufficient number of hands to navigate her, as all the remaining
+sailors of the squadron, then to be met with in the neighbourhood of
+Buenos Ayres, did not amount to an hundred men. They endeavoured to
+supply this defect, by pressing many of the inhabitants of Buenos
+Ayres, and putting on board all the English prisoners then in their
+custody, together with a number of Portuguese smugglers they had taken
+at different times, and some of the Indians of the country. Among
+these last there was a chief and ten of his followers, who had been
+surprised by a party of Spanish soldiers about three months before.
+The name of this chief was Orellana, and he belonged to a very
+powerful tribe, which had committed great ravages in the neighbourhood
+of Buenos Ayres. With this motley crew, all of them except the
+European sailors averse from the voyage, Pizarro set sail from Monte
+Video about the beginning of November 1745: and the native Spaniards,
+being no strangers to the dissatisfaction of their forced men, treated
+them, the English prisoners and the Indians, with great insolence and
+barbarity, particularly the Indians; for it was common in the meanest
+officers in the ship to beat them cruelly on the slightest pretence,
+and often merely to shew their superiority.
+
+Orellana and his followers, though in appearance sufficiently patient
+and submissive, meditated a severe revenge for all these inhumanities.
+As these Indians have great intercourse with Buenos Ayres in time of
+peace, Orellana understood Spanish, and affected to converse with such
+of the English prisoners as could speak that language, seeming very
+desirous of being informed how many Englishmen there were on board,
+and of having them pointed out to him. As he knew the English were as
+much enemies to the Spaniards as he was, he had doubtless an intention
+of disclosing his purposes to them, and making them partners in the
+scheme he had projected for revenging his wrongs and recovering his
+liberty; but, having sounded them at a distance, and not finding them
+so precipitate and vindictive as he expected, he proceeded no farther
+with them, but resolved to trust alone to the resolution of his ten
+faithful followers, who readily engaged to observe his directions and
+to execute his commands. Having agreed on the measures to be pursued,
+they contrived to provide themselves with Dutch knives, sharp at the
+point, which, being the common knives used in the ship, they procured
+without difficulty. They also employed their leisure in secretly
+cutting thongs from raw hides, of which there were great numbers on
+board, and in fixing to each end of these thongs the double-headed
+shot of the small quarter-deck guns; by which they formed most
+mischievous weapons, in the use of which, by swinging round the head,
+the Indians about Buenos Ayres are extremely expert, being trained to
+it from their infancy. When these things were in good forwardness,
+the execution of their scheme was perhaps precipitated by a particular
+outrage committed upon Orellana, who was ordered aloft by one of the
+officers, and being incapable of doing so, the officer, who was
+a brutal fellow, beat him with such violence, under pretence of
+disobedience, that he left him bleeding on the deck, and quite
+stupified with wounds and bruises. This certainly increased his thirst
+of revenge, so that within a day or two he and his followers began to
+execute their desperate resolves in the following manner.
+
+About nine in the evening, when many of the principal officers were
+on the quarter-deck indulging in the freshness of the night air, the
+forecastle being manned with its customary watch, Orellana and his
+companions, having prepared their weapons, and thrown off their
+trowsers and other cumbrous parts of their dress, came all together
+on the quarter-deck, and drew towards the door of the great cabin. The
+boatswain reprimanded them for their presumption, and ordered them
+to be gone; on which Orellana spoke to his followers in their native
+language, when four of them drew off, two towards each gangway, and
+the chief and six remaining Indians seemed to be slowly quitting the
+quarter-deck. When the detached Indians had taken possession of the
+gangways, Orellana placed his hands hollow to his mouth, and bellowed
+out the war-cry of the savages, said to be the harshest and most
+terrifying of sounds. This hideous yell was the signal for beginning
+the massacre; upon which all the Indians drew their knives and
+brandished their prepared double-headed shot. The chief, and the six
+who remained with him on the quarter-deck, fell immediately on the
+Spaniards with whom they were intermingled, and in a very short space
+laid forty of them at their feet, above twenty of whom were killed on
+the spot, and the rest disabled.
+
+In the beginning of the tumult, many of the officers rushed into the
+great cabin, where they put out the lights and barricadoed the door;
+while of the others, who had escaped the first fury of the Indians,
+some endeavoured to escape along the gangways to the forecastle, where
+the Indians, placed there on purpose, stabbed the greater part of them
+as they attempted to pass, or forced them off the gangways into the
+waste of the ship, which was filled with live cattle. Some threw
+themselves voluntarily over the barricades into the waste, and thought
+themselves fortunate to lie concealed among the cattle; but the
+greatest part escaped up the main-shrouds, and took shelter in the
+tops and rigging of the ship. Although the Indians only attacked
+the quarter-deck, yet the watch in the forecastle, finding their
+communication cut off, and terrified by a few of the wounded who had
+been able to force their passage, and not knowing either who were
+their enemies, or what were their numbers, they also gave all over for
+lost, and in great confusion ran up into the rigging of the foremast
+and boltsprit.
+
+Thus these eleven Indians, with a resolution perhaps without example,
+possessed themselves almost in an instant of the quarter-deck of a
+ship mounting sixty-six guns, and manned by near five hundred hands,
+and even continued in peaceable possession of this part for some time.
+During a considerable space, the officers in the great cabin, among
+whom were Pizarro and Mindinuetta, the crew between decks, and those
+who had escaped into the tops and rigging, were merely anxious for
+their own safety, and were incapable of forming any project for
+suppressing the insurrection and recovering the possession of the
+ship. The yells of the Indians, the groans of the wounded, and the
+confused clamours of the crew, all heightened by the darkness of the
+night, had at first greatly magnified the danger, and filled them with
+imaginary terrors. The Spaniards were sensible of the dissatisfaction
+of their impressed hands, and were conscious of their barbarity to
+their prisoners, wherefore they concluded that the conspiracy was
+general, and considered their own destruction as infallible; insomuch,
+that some are said to have designed to leap into the sea, but were
+prevented by their companions.
+
+When the Indians had entirely cleared the quarter-deck, the tumult in
+a great measure subsided; for those who had escaped were kept silent
+by their fears, and the Indians were incapable of pursuing them.
+Orellana, when master of the quarter-deck, broke open the arm-chest,
+which had been ordered there a few days before, on a slight suspicion
+of mutiny. He there expected to find cutlasses wherewith to arm
+himself and his followers, who were all well skilled in the use of
+that weapon, and with these it is imagined they proposed to have
+forced the great cabin: But on opening the chest, there appeared
+nothing but fire-arms, which to them were of no use. There were indeed
+abundance of cutlasses in the chest, but they were hidden by the
+fire-arms being laid uppermost. This was a sensible disappointment to
+Orellana and his Indians. By this time Pizarro and his companions in
+the great cabin had been able to communicate with those below in the
+gun-room and between decks, by conversing aloud through the cabin
+windows; by which means they learnt that the English prisoners, whom
+they chiefly suspected, were all safe below, and had not participated
+in the mutiny; and by other circumstances they were at last made
+sensible that Orellana and his people only were concerned in it. Upon
+this information, Pizarro and the officers resolved to attack them on
+the quarter-deck, before any of the discontented on board had so far
+recovered from their surprise as to reflect on the facility of
+seizing the ship by joining with the Indians. With this view, Pizarro
+collected what arms were in the cabin and distributed them to those
+who were with him. There were no fire-arms except pistols, and
+for these they had neither powder nor ball; but having now a
+correspondence with the gun-room, they lowered a bucket from the cabin
+window, into which the gunner put a quantity of pistol cartridges out
+of one of the gun-room ports. Having thus procured ammunition, and
+loaded their pistols, they partly opened the cabin door, and fired
+several shots among the Indians on the quarter-deck, though at first
+without effect. At last Mindinuetta had the good fortune to shoot
+Orellana dead; on which his faithful companions, abandoning all
+thoughts of farther resistance, instantly leaped into the sea, where
+they all perished. Thus was this insurrection quelled, and possession
+of the quarter-deck regained, after it had been fully two hours in the
+power of this great and daring chief, and his small band of gallant
+unhappy countrymen.
+
+Having thus escaped from imminent peril, Pizarro continued his
+voyage for Europe, and arrived safely on the coast of Gallicia in the
+beginning of the year 1746, after an absence of between four and five
+years, and having, by attendance on our expedition, diminished the
+royal power of Spain by above three thousand of their prime sailors,
+and by four considerable ships of war and a patache. For we have seen
+that the Hermione foundered at sea, the Guipuscoa was stranded and
+destroyed on the coast of Brazil, the St Estevan was condemned and
+broken up in the Rio Plata, and the Esperanza, being left in the South
+Sea, is doubtless by this time incapable of returning to Spain:
+So that the Asia alone, with less than an hundred hands, may be
+considered as all that remains of the squadron with which Pizarro put
+forth to sea; and whoever considers the very large proportion which
+this squadron bore to the whole navy of Spain, will no doubt confess
+that, even if our undertaking had been attended with no other
+advantages, than that of ruining so great a part of the naval force of
+so dangerous an enemy, this alone would be a sufficient equivalent
+for our equipment, and an incontestable proof of the service which the
+nation has thence received. Having thus given a summary of Pizarro's
+adventures, I return to the narrative of our own transactions.
+
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Passage from Madeira to St Catharines._
+
+I have already mentioned that we weighed from Madeira on the 3d
+November, after orders being given to rendezvous at St Jago, one of
+the Cape Verd islands, in case of a separation. But next day, when we
+were got to sea, the commodore, considering that the season was far
+advanced, and that touching at St Jago would create additional delay,
+thought proper for this reason to alter the rendezvous, and appointed
+the island of St Catharines, on the coast of Brazil, to be the first
+place to which the ships of the squadron were to repair, in case of
+separation.
+
+In our passage to the island of St Catharines, we found the direction
+of the trade winds to differ considerably from what we had reason to
+expect, both from the general histories given of these winds, and the
+experience of former navigators. For the learned Dr Halley, in his
+account of the trade-winds which prevail in the Ethiopic and Atlantic
+Oceans, tells us that, from the lat. of 28 deg. N. to 10 deg. N. there is
+generally a fresh gale of N.E. wind, which, towards the African
+coasts, rarely comes to the eastward of E.N.E. or passes to the
+northward of N.N.E. but on the American side the wind is somewhat
+more easterly; though even there it is commonly a point or two to the
+northward of east; that from 10 deg. N. to 4 deg. N. the calms and tornadoes
+take place; and from 4 deg. N. to 30 deg. S. the winds are generally and
+perpetually between the south and east. We expected to find this
+account of the matter confirmed by our experience; but we found
+considerable variations from it, both in regard to the steadiness of
+the winds, and the quarters from whence they blew. For though we met
+with a N.E. wind about lat. 28 deg. N. yet, from lat. 25 deg. N. to 18 deg. N the
+wind was never once to the northward of E. but almost constantly to
+the southward of it. From thence, however, to 6 deg. 20' N. we had it
+usually to the northward of E. though not always, as it changed for a
+short time to E.S.E. From 6 deg. 20' N. to about 4 deg. 46' N. the weather was
+very unsettled, the wind being sometimes N.E. then changing to S.E.
+and sometimes we had a dead calm, with small rain and lightning. After
+this, to the lat. of 7 deg. 30' S. the wind continued almost invariably
+between S. and E. and then again as invariably between N. and E. till
+we came to 15 deg. 30' S. then E. and S.E. to 21 deg. 37' S. After this, even
+to 27 deg. 44' S. the wind was never once between S. and E. though we
+had it in all the other quarters of the compass; though this last
+circumstance may be in some measure accounted for from our approach to
+the coast of Brazil.
+
+I do not mention these particulars with a view of cavilling at the
+received accounts of these trade-winds, which, I doubt not, are
+sufficiently accurate; but I thought it worthy of public notice, that
+such deviations from the established rules do sometimes take place.
+This observation may not only be of service to navigators, by putting
+them on their guard against these hitherto unexplained and unnoticed
+irregularities, but it is also a circumstance that requires to be
+attended to in the solution of the great question about the causes
+of trade-winds and monsoons; a question which, in my opinion, has not
+been hitherto discussed with that clearness and accuracy which
+its importance demands, whether it be considered in a naval or a
+philosophical point of view.
+
+On the 16th November, one of our victuallers made a signal to speak
+with the commodore, and we shortened sail for her to come up with us.
+The master came on board, and represented to Mr Anson, that, having
+complied with the terms of his charter-party, he now desired to be
+unloaded and discharged. On consulting the captain of the squadron,
+it was found all the ships had still such quantities of provisions
+between their decks, and were also so deep, that they could only take
+in their proportions of brandy from the Industry pink, one of the
+victuallers; and consequently the commodore had to continue the other,
+the Ann pink, in the service of attending the squadron. Accordingly, a
+signal was made next day for the ships to bring to, and the long-boats
+were employed that and the three following days, till the 19th in the
+evening, to take their proportions of the brandy in the Industry to
+the several ships of the squadron. Being then unloaded, she parted
+company, intending for Barbadoes; and there to take in a freight for
+England. Most of the officers in the squadron took the opportunity of
+this ship, to write to their friends at home; but I have been informed
+she was taken by the Spaniards.
+
+On the 20th November, the captains of the squadron represented to the
+commodore, that their ships companies were very sickly; and that,
+both in their own opinions and of their surgeons, it would tend to the
+health of the men to let in more air between decks; but that the
+ships were so deep in the water, that the lower-deck ports could not
+possibly be opened. On this representation, the commodore ordered
+six air-scuttles to be cut in each ship, in such places as had least
+tendency to weaken them. On this occasion, I cannot but observe how
+much it is the duty of all who have any influence in the direction
+of our naval affairs, to attend to the preservation of the lives and
+health of our seamen. If it could be supposed that motives of humanity
+were insufficient for this purpose, yet policy, a regard to the
+success of our arms, and the honour and interest of each individual
+commander, all should lead to a careful and impartial examination of
+every probable method proposed for preserving the health and vigour of
+seamen. But hath this been always done? Have the late invented,
+plain, and obvious methods for keeping our ships sweet and clean, by
+a constant supply of fresh air, been considered with that candour
+and temper which the great benefits they promise to produce ought
+naturally to have inspired? On the contrary, have not these salutary
+schemes been often treated with neglect and contempt? And have not
+some, who have been entrusted with experimenting their effects, been
+guilty of the most indefensible partiality in the accounts they have
+given of these trials? It must, however, be confessed, that many
+distinguished persons, both in the direction and command of our
+fleets, have exerted themselves on these occasions with a judicious
+and dispassionate examination, becoming the interesting nature of the
+enquiry: But the wonder is, that any one should have been found so
+irrational as to act a contrary part, in despite of the strongest
+dictates of prudence and humanity. I cannot, however, believe
+this conduct to have arisen from such savage motives as the first
+reflection seems naturally to suggest; but am apt rather to impute
+it to an obstinate, and, as it were, superstitious attachment to
+long-established practices, and to a settled contempt and hatred to
+all innovations, especially such as are projected by landsmen, or
+persons residing on shore.
+
+We crossed the equinoctial, with a fine fresh gale at N.E. on Friday,
+the 28th November, at four in the morning, being thus, by estimation,
+in long. 27 deg. 59' W. from London. In the morning of the 2d December, we
+saw a sail in the N.W. and made the Gloucester's and Tryal's signals
+to chase; and half an hour after, let out our reefs, and chased with
+the rest of the squadron. About noon a signal was made for the Wager
+to take our remaining victualler, the Ann pink, in tow; but, at seven
+in the evening, finding we did not near the chase, and that the Wager
+was very far astern, we shortened sail, and recalled the chasing
+ships. Next day but one we again discovered a sail, which, on a nearer
+approach, we judged to be the same vessel. We chased her the whole
+day, and though we rather gained upon her, night came on before
+we could overtake her, which obliged us to give over the chase, to
+collect the scattered squadron. We were much chagrined at the escape
+of this vessel, supposing her to have been an advice-boat from Old
+Spain to Buenos Ayres, sent to give notice of our expedition: But we
+have since learnt that it was our East-India Company's packet, bound
+to St Helena.
+
+On the 10th December, being by our reckoning in lat. 20 deg. S. and long.
+36 deg. 30' W. from London, the Tryal fired a gun to denote soundings. We
+immediately tried, and found sixty fathoms, the bottom coarse ground
+with broken shells. The Tryal, which was a-head of us, had at one
+time thirty-seven fathoms, which afterwards increased to ninety,
+after which she had no bottom; which happened to us also at our second
+trial, though we sounded with a line of 150 fathoms. This is the shoal
+laid down in most charts by the name of the _Abrollos_,[1] and
+it appeared we were upon its verge; perhaps farther in it may be
+extremely dangerous. We were then, by our different accounts, from
+sixty to ninety leagues east of the coast of Brazil. Next day but one
+we spoke a Portuguese brigantine from Rio Janeiro bound to _Bahia de
+todos los Santos_, by which we learnt that we were thirty-four leagues
+from Cape St Thomas, and forty from Cape Frio; which latter bore from
+us W.S.W. By our own accounts we were nearly eight leagues from Cape
+Frio; and though, on the information of this brig, we altered our
+course, standing more southerly, yet, by our coming in with the land
+afterwards, we were fully convinced that our own reckoning was more
+correct than that of the Portuguese. After passing lat. 16 deg. S. we
+found a considerable current setting to the southward. The same took
+place all along the coast of Brazil, and even to the southward of the
+Rio Plata, amounting sometimes to thirty miles in twenty-four hours,
+and once to above forty miles. If, as is most probable, this current
+be occasioned by the running off of the water which is accumulated on
+the coast of Brazil by the constant sweeping of the eastern trade-wind
+over the Ethiopic Ocean, it were then most natural to suppose that
+its general course must be determined by the bearings of the adjacent
+shores. Perhaps in every instance of currents the same may hold true,
+as I believe there are no examples of any considerable currents at any
+great distance from land. If this could be ascertained as a general
+principle, it might be easy by their assistance and the observed
+latitude, to correct the reckoning. But it were much to be wished, for
+the general interests of navigation, that the actual settings of the
+different currents in various parts of the world were examined
+more frequently and more accurately than appears to have been done
+hitherto.
+
+[Footnote 1: In the map of the world by Arrowsmith, the Abrolhos are
+made a cluster of islands off the coast of Brazil, in lat. 18 deg. 10' S.
+long. 39 deg. W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+We began now to grow impatient for a sight of land, both for the
+recovery of our sick, and for the refreshment and security of those
+who still continued in health. When we left. St Helens, we were in
+so good a condition that we only lost two men in the Centurion in our
+long run to Madeira. But in this run, from Madeira to St Catharines,
+we were remarkably sickly, so that many died, and great numbers were
+confined to their hammocks, both in our ship and the others, and
+several of these past all hopes of recovery. The disorders they in
+general laboured under were those common to hot climates, and which
+most ships bound to the south experience in a greater or less degree.
+These were the fevers usually called _calentures_, a disease not only
+terrible in its first instance, but of which the remains often proved
+fatal to those who considered themselves as recovered; for it always
+left them in a very weak and helpless condition, and usually
+afflicted with fluxes or tenesmus. By our continuance at sea all these
+complaints were every day increasing; so that it was with great joy we
+discovered the coast of Brazil on the 18th December, at seven in the
+morning.
+
+The coast of Brazil appeared high and mountainous, extending from W.
+to W.S.W. and when we first saw it, the distance was about seventeen
+leagues. At noon we could perceive a low double land, bearing W.S.W.
+about ten leagues distant, which we took to be the island of St
+Catharines. That afternoon and the next morning, the wind being N.N.W.
+we gained very little to windward, and were apprehensive of being
+driven to leeward of the island: But next day, a little before noon,
+the wind came about to the southward, and enabled us to steer in
+between the N. point of St Catharines and the neighbouring island
+of Alvoredo. As we stood in for the land we had regular soundings,
+gradually decreasing from thirty-six to twelve fathoms, all muddy
+ground. In this last depth of water we let go our anchor at five in
+the evening of the 18th,[2] the N.W. part of St Catharines bearing
+S.S.W. three miles off; and the island of Alvoredo N.N.E. distant two
+leagues. Here we found the tide to set S.S.E. and N.N.W. at the rate
+of two knots, the tide of flood coming from the southward.
+
+[Footnote 2: There is an error in date here, as it has been already
+said they first got sight of the coast of Brazil on the 18th,
+obviously two days before. Hence, if the former date be right, this
+ought to be the 20th.--E.]
+
+We could perceive from our ships two fortifications at a considerable
+distance from us, which seemed intended to prevent the passage of an
+enemy between the island of St Catharines and the main. We could also
+soon see that our squadron had alarmed the coast, as the two forts
+hoisted their colours and fired several guns, signals, as we supposed,
+for assembling the inhabitants. To prevent any confusion, the
+commodore immediately sent an officer to compliment the governor, and
+to request a pilot to conduct our ships into the road. The governor
+returned a very civil answer, and ordered us a pilot. On the morning
+of the 20th we weighed and stood in, and the pilot came aboard of us
+about noon, and the same afternoon brought us to anchor in five and
+a half fathoms, in a commodious bay on the continent, called by the
+French Bon-port. From our last anchorage to this, we found every where
+an oozy bottom, the water first regularly decreasing to five fathoms,
+and then increasing to seven, after which we had five and six fathoms
+alternately. The squadron weighed again next morning, in order to run
+above the two fortifications formerly mentioned, which are called the
+castles of Santa Cruiz and St Joam. Our soundings between the island
+and the main were four, five, and six fathoms, with muddy ground. We
+saluted the castle of Santa Cruiz in passing with eleven guns, and
+were answered with an equal number. At one in the afternoon of the
+21st December, the squadron came to anchor in five fathoms and a half,
+Governor's Isle bearing N.N.W. St Joam's castle N.E. 1/2 E. and the
+island of St Antonio S. At this time the squadron was sickly, and in
+great want of refreshments, both of which we hoped to have speedily
+remedied at this settlement, celebrated by former navigators for
+its healthiness and abundance of provisions, and for the freedom,
+indulgence, and friendly assistance given here to all the ships of
+nations in amity with the crown of Portugal.
+
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Proceedings at St Catharines, and a Description of that Place, with a
+short Account of Brazil._
+
+Our first care after mooring the ships was to get our sick men on
+shore; preparatory for which each ship was ordered by the commodore to
+erect two tents, one for the reception of the sick, and the other for
+the surgeon and his assistants. We sent eighty sick on shore from the
+Centurion, and I believe the other ships sent as many in proportion
+to the number of their hands. As soon as this necessary duty was
+performed, we scraped our decks, and gave our ship a thorough
+cleansing, then smoaked it between decks, and lastly washed every part
+with vinegar. These operations were extremely necessary for correcting
+the noisome stench on board, and destroying the vermin; for, from the
+number of our men and the heat of the climate, both these nuisances
+had increased upon us to a very loathsome degree, and, besides being
+most intolerably offensive, were doubtless in some sort productive of
+the sickness we had laboured under for a considerable time before our
+arrival at this island.[3]
+
+[Footnote 3: This matter is now infinitely better regulated in
+the British navy, and with most admirable and infinitely important
+advantages. By the most minute, sedulous, and perpetual attention to
+cleanliness, all noisome stench and all vermin are prevented, by which
+doubtless diseases are in a great measure lessened.--E.]
+
+Our next employment was wooding and watering the squadron, caulking
+the sides and decks of the ships, overhawling the rigging, and
+securing our masts against the tempestuous weather we were, in all
+probability, to meet with in going round Cape Horn at so advanced
+and inconvenient a season. Before proceeding in the narrative of our
+voyage, it may be proper to give some account of the present state of
+the island of St Catharines and the neighbouring country; both because
+the circumstances of the place have materially changed from what they
+were in the time of former writers, and as these changes laid us under
+many more difficulties and perplexities than we had reason to expect,
+or than other British ships, bound hereafter to the South Sea, may
+perhaps think it prudent to struggle with.
+
+This island is nine leagues from N. to S. and two from E. to W. It
+extends from lat. 27 deg. 35' to 28 deg. both S. and is in long. 49 deg. 45'
+W. from London.[4] Although of considerable height, it is scarcely
+discernible at the distance of ten leagues, being obscured under the
+continent of Brazil, the mountains of which are exceedingly high; but
+on a nearer approach is easily distinguished, and may be readily known
+by having a number of small islands at each end.[5] Frezier has given
+a draught of the island of St Catharines and the neighbouring coast,
+with the smaller adjacent isles; but has, by mistake, called the
+island of Alvoredo St Gal; whereas the true island of St Gal is seven
+or eight miles northward of Alvoredo, and much smaller. He has also
+called an island to the southward of St Catharines Alvoredo, and
+has omitted the island of Masaquara. In other respects his plan is
+sufficiently exact. The best entrance to the harbour is between the
+N.E. point of the island of St Catharines and the island of Alvoredo,
+where ships may pass under the guidance of the lead, without the least
+apprehensions of danger. The north entrance is about five miles broad,
+the distance from thence to the island of St Antonio is eight miles,
+and the coarse to that island is S.S.W. 1/2 W. About the middle of the
+island the harbour is contracted to a narrow channel by two points of
+land, not more than a quarter of a mile separate, and at this time a
+battery was erecting on the point on the island side to defend this
+passage. This seemed, however, a very useless work, as this channel
+had only two fathoms water, and is consequently only navigable for
+barks and boats, wherefore an enemy could have no inducement to
+attempt this passage, more especially as the northern one is so broad
+and safe that no squadron can be prevented from coming in by any
+fortifications whatever, when the sea-breeze makes. The brigadier Don
+Jose Sylva de Paz, who is governor of this settlement, has a different
+opinion; for, besides the above-mentioned battery, there were three
+other forts carrying on for the defence of the harbour, none of which
+were completed when we were there. The first of these, called St Joam,
+was building on a point of the island of St Catharines, near Parrot
+Island. The second, in form of a half-moon, was on the island of
+St Antonio; and the third, which seemed the chief, and had some
+appearance of a regular fortification, is on an island near the
+continent, where the governor resides. Don Jose Sylva de Paz was
+esteemed an expert engineer; and he doubtless understood one branch of
+his business very well, which is the advantages which new works bring
+to those who have charge of their erection.
+
+[Footnote 4: This account of the matter is very erroneous. The
+latitudes are between 28 deg. 5' and 28 deg. 30' both S. and the longitude is
+49 deg. 10' W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 5: The more elaborate nautical description of this island
+is necessarily omitted, as referring to two extensive views, without
+which the description would be unintelligible.--E.]
+
+The soil of this island is truly luxuriant, producing many kinds of
+fruits spontaneously, and is covered over with one continued forest of
+trees, in perpetual verdure, and which, from the exuberant fertility
+of the soil, are so entangled with thorns, briars, and underwood,
+as to form an absolutely impenetrable thicket, except by some narrow
+paths which the inhabitants have opened for their own convenience; and
+these, with a few spots cleared for plantations, along that side of
+the island which faces the continent, are the only uncovered parts of
+the island. The woods are extremely fragrant, from the many aromatic
+trees and shrubs with which they abound, and here the fruits and
+vegetables of all climates thrive, almost without culture, and are
+to be had in great plenty, so that there is no want of pine-apples,
+peaches, grapes, oranges, lemons, citrons, melons, apricots, and
+plantains; there is also abundance of onions and potatoes, two
+productions of no small consideration for sea-stores. The flesh
+provisions are, however, much inferior to the vegetables. There are,
+indeed, small wild cattle to be purchased, something like buffaloes,
+but these are very indifferent food, their flesh being of a loose
+texture, and generally of a disagreeable flavour, probably owing to
+their feeding on wild calabash. There are also abundance of pheasants,
+but they are not to be compared in taste to those we have in England.
+The other provisions of the place are monkeys, parrots, and, above
+all, fish of various sorts: These abound in the harbour, and are both
+exceedingly good and easily caught, as there are numerous sandy bays,
+very convenient for haling the seyne.
+
+The water, both on the island and the opposite continent, is
+excellent, and preserves at sea as well as that of the Thames. After
+it has been a day or two in the cask, it begins to purge itself,
+stinks most abominably, and is soon covered over with a green
+scum, which subsides in a few days to the bottom, leaving the water
+perfectly sweet, and as clear as crystal. The French first brought
+this place into repute during their South-Sea trade in the reign
+of Queen Anne, and usually wooded and watered in Bon-port, on the
+continental side of the harbour, where they anchored in great safety
+in six fathoms, and this is doubtless the most commodious station
+for ships that are meant only for a short stay. We watered on the
+St Catharine's side, at a plantation opposite to the island of St
+Antonio.
+
+Such are the advantages of this island; but it has its inconveniences
+also, partly proceeding from its climate, but more particularly
+from its new regulations and the form of its government, as lately
+established. In regard to the climate, it must be remembered that the
+woods and hills which surround the harbour prevent a free circulation
+of air, and the continual vigorous vegetation furnishes such a
+prodigious quantity of vapour, that a thick fog covers the whole
+country all night, and a great part of the morning, continuing till
+either the sun gathers strength to dissipate it, or it is dispersed
+by a brisk sea-breeze. This renders the place close and humid, and
+probably occasioned the many fevers and fluxes we were there afflicted
+with. I must not omit to add, that we were pestered all day by vast
+numbers of mosquetoes, which are not much unlike the gnats in England,
+but much more venomous in their stings. At sunset, when the musquetoes
+retired, they were succeeded by an infinity of sand-flies, which
+made a mighty buzzing, though scarcely discernable by the naked eye;
+wherever these bite, they raise a small lump attended by painful
+itching, like that arising from the bite of an English harvest bug.
+The only light in which this place deserves our consideration is its
+favourable situation for supplying and refreshing our cruizers bound
+for the South Sea, and in this view its greatest inconveniences remain
+to be related, to do which more distinctly, it may not be amiss
+to consider the changes which it has lately undergone, both in its
+inhabitants, its police, and its governor.
+
+In the time of Frazier and Shelvocke, this place served only as a
+retreat to vagabonds and outlaws, who fled hither from all parts of
+Brazil. It is true, that they acknowledged their subjection to the
+crown of Portugal, and had a person among them whom they called their
+captain, and who was considered as a kind of governor; but both their
+allegiance to their king, and their obedience to the captain, were
+merely verbal; for, as they had plenty of provisions and no money,
+they were in a condition to support themselves without aid from any
+neighbouring settlements, and had nothing among them to tempt any
+neighbouring governor to interpose his authority among them. In this
+situation they were extremely hospitable and friendly to such foreign
+ships as came among them; for, as these ships wanted only provisions,
+of which the natives had great store, while the natives wanted
+clothes, for they often despised money, and refused to take it, the
+ships furnished them with apparel in exchange for their provisions,
+both sides finding their account in this traffic, and their captain
+had neither interest nor power to tax or restrain it.
+
+Of late, for reasons which will afterwards appear, these honest
+vagabonds have been obliged to receive a new colony among them, and
+to submit to new laws and a new form of government. Instead of their
+former ragged and bare-legged captain, whom they took care, however,
+to keep innocent, they have now the honour of being governed by Don
+Jose Sylva de Paz, a brigadier of the armies of Portugal, who is
+accompanied by a garrison of soldiers, and has consequently a more
+extensive and better supported power than any of his predecessors:
+And as he wears better cloaths, lives more splendidly, and has a much
+better knowledge of the importance of money than any of them could
+ever pretend to, so he puts in practice certain methods for procuring
+it with which they were utterly unacquainted; yet it may be much
+doubted if the inhabitants consider these methods as tending to
+promote either their interests, or that of their sovereign, the king
+of Portugal. This much is certain, that his behaviour cannot but be
+extremely embarrassing to such British ships as touch here in their
+way to the South Seas.
+
+One of his practices was, that he placed centinels at all the avenues,
+to prevent the people from selling us any refreshments, except at such
+exorbitant rates as we could not afford to give. His pretence for this
+extraordinary stretch of power was, that he was obliged to preserve
+their provisions for upwards of an hundred families, which were daily
+expected as a reinforcement to the colony. Thus he seems no novice in
+his profession, by his readiness at inventing a plausible pretence
+for his interested management. This circumstance, however, though
+sufficiently provoking, was far from being the most exceptionable
+part of his conduct; for, as by the neighbourhood of the Rio Plata, a
+considerable smuggling trade is carried on between the Portuguese and
+Spaniards, especially in exchanging gold for silver, by which both
+princes are defrauded of their fifths; and as Don Jose was deeply
+engaged in this prohibited commerce, in order to ingratiate himself
+with his Spanish correspondents, he treacherously dispatched an
+express to Buenos Ayres, where Pizarro then lay, with an account of
+our arrival, our strength, the number, of our ships, guns, men,
+and every circumstance he could suppose our enemy desirous of being
+acquainted with.
+
+This much, and what we shall have to relate in the course of our own
+proceedings, may suffice as to the present state of St Catharines and
+the character of its governor. But as the reader may wish to know
+the reasons for the late new modelling of this settlement, it will
+require, to explain this circumstance, to give a short account of the
+adjacent continent of Brazil, and of the wonderful discoveries which
+have been made within the last forty years, which, from a country of
+but mean estimation, has rendered it now perhaps the most considerable
+colony on the face of the earth.
+
+This country was first discovered by Americus Vesputio, a Florentine,
+who had the good fortune to be honoured by giving his name to the
+immense continent found out some time before by Columbus. As Vesputio
+was in the service of Portugal, this discovery was settled and planned
+by that nation, and afterwards devolved to the crown of Spain along
+with the rest of the Portuguese dominions. During the long war between
+Spain and the states of Holland, the Dutch possessed themselves of the
+northermost parts of Brazil, and kept it for some years; but, when
+the Portuguese revolted from the Spanish government, this country
+took part in the revolt, and the Dutch were soon driven out of their
+acquisitions; since which time it has continued without interruption
+under the crown of Portugal. Till the beginning of the present
+century, it was only productive of sugar and tobacco, and a few other
+commodities of very little importance; but has been lately discovered
+to abound in the two mineral productions, gold and diamonds, which
+mankind hold in the highest estimation, and which they exercise their
+utmost art and industry in acquiring.
+
+Gold was first found in the mountains adjacent to the city of Rio
+Janeiro. The occasion of its discovery is variously related, but the
+most common account is, that the Indians dwelling on the back of the
+Portuguese settlements were observed, by the soldiers employed in an
+expedition against them, to use this metal for fish-hooks; and,
+on enquiry into their manner of procuring this precious metal, it
+appeared that great quantities of it were annually washed from the
+hills, and left among the sand and gravel which remained in the
+vallies after the running off or evaporation of the water. It is now
+[in 1740] little more than forty years since any quantities of gold,
+worth notice, have been imported from Brazil to Europe; but, since
+that time, the annual imports have been continually augmented by the
+discovery of places in other provinces, where it is to be met with
+as plentifully as at first about Rio Janeiro. It is alleged that a
+_slender vein_[3] of gold spread through all the country, at about
+twenty-four feet below the surface, but that this vein is too thin and
+poor to answer the expence of digging.[4] However, where the rivers
+or rains have had any course for a considerable time, there gold is
+always to be collected, the water having separated the metal from the
+earth, and deposited it in the sands, thereby saving the expence of
+digging; hence it is esteemed an infallible gain to be able to divert
+a stream from its channel, and ransack its bed. From this account of
+the manner of gathering gold, it should follow that there are no mines
+of this metal in Brazil, and this the governor of Rio Grande, who
+happened to be at St Catharines, and frequently visited Mr Anson, did
+most confidently affirm, assuring us that all the gold was collected
+from rivers, or from the beds of torrents after floods. It is indeed
+asserted that large rocks are found in the mountains abounding in
+gold, and I have seen a fragment of one of these rocks having a
+considerable lump of gold entangled in it; but, even in this case, the
+workmen only break off the rocks, and do not properly mine into them;
+and the great expence of subsisting among these mountains, and in
+afterwards separating the metal from the stone, occasions this method
+of procuring gold to be but rarely put in practice.
+
+[Footnote 3: The author ought here to have said, _a thin layer_, or
+_stratum_, to express the obvious meaning intended in the text.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 4: The editor was informed, many years ago, by an
+intelligent native of Rio Janeiro, that the search for gold is
+confined by law to certain districts, on purpose to secure the royal
+fifth; and that all over the country round Rio Janeiro, where the
+search is prohibited, gold, emeralds, and aqua-marines are found in
+small quantities, on every occasion of digging to any depth into the
+earth, as for the purpose of a pit-well.--E.]
+
+The examining the bottom of rivers and beds of torrents, and the
+washing the gold there found, from the sand and dirt with which it is
+always mixed, are performed by slaves, who are principally negroes,
+kept in great numbers by the Portuguese for this purpose. The
+regulation of the duty of these slaves is singular, as they are each
+of them obliged to furnish their master with the eighth part of an
+ounce of gold daily.[5] If they are either so fortunate or industrious
+as to collect a greater quantity, the surplus becomes their own
+property, and they may dispose of it as they think fit; so that some
+negroes, who have accidentally fallen upon rich washing-places, are
+said to have themselves purchased slaves, and to have lived afterwards
+in great splendour, their original master having no other demand upon
+them than the daily supply of the before-mentioned eighths; which,
+as the Portuguese ounce is somewhat lighter than our troy ounce, may
+amount to about nine shillings sterling.
+
+[Footnote 5: On the data of the text, and allowing sixty-five days
+in the year for Sundays and high festivals, the yearly profit of one
+slave to his master would be L. 135 sterling.--E.]
+
+The quantity of gold thus collected in the Brazils and returned
+annually to Lisbon, may be estimated, in some degree, from the amount
+of the royal fifth. This has been of late computed, one year with
+another, at one hundred and fifty _aroues_, of thirty-two Portuguese
+pounds each, which, valued at L. 4 sterling the troy ounce, make very
+nearly three hundred thousand pounds sterling; and consequently the
+capital, of which this is the fifth, is about a million and a half
+sterling. It is obvious that the annual return of gold to Lisbon
+cannot be less than this, though it may be difficult to guess how much
+more it may be. Perhaps we may not be much mistaken in conjecturing
+that the gold exchanged with the Spaniards at Buenos Ayres for silver,
+and what is privately brought to Europe without paying the duty, may
+amount to near half a million more, which will make the entire yearly
+produce of Brazilian gold nearly two millions sterling; a prodigious
+sum to be found in a country which only a few years since was not
+known to furnish a single grain.
+
+Besides gold, this country also affords diamonds, as already
+mentioned. The discovery of these valuable stones is much more recent
+even than that of gold, as it is scarcely twenty years since the first
+were brought to Europe.[6] They are found in the same manner as gold,
+in the gullies of torrents and beds of rivers, but only in particular
+places, and by no means so universally spread throughout the country.
+They were often found while washing for gold, before they were known
+to be diamonds, and were consequently thrown away along with the
+sand and gravel; and it is well remembered that numbers of very large
+stones, which would have made the fortunes of the possessors, have
+passed unregarded through the hands of those who now impatiently
+support the mortifying reflection. However, about twenty years since,
+[that is, in 1720,] a person acquainted with the appearance of rough
+diamonds, conceived that these pebbles, as they were then called, were
+of the same kind; yet it is said there was a considerable interval
+between the first stating of this opinion and its confirmation, by
+proper examination, as it was difficult to persuade the inhabitants
+that what they had been long accustomed to despise, could be of such
+amazing importance; and in this interval, as I was told, a governor of
+one of these places procured a good number of these stones, which
+he pretended to make use of as markers at cards. The truth of the
+discovery was at last confirmed by skilful jewellers in Europe, who
+were consulted on the occasion, and who declared that these Brazilian
+pebbles were true diamonds, many of which were not inferior in lustre,
+or other qualities, to those of the East Indies. On this being made
+known, the Portuguese in the neighbourhood of the places where these
+had been first discovered, set themselves to search for diamonds with
+great assiduity, and were hopeful of discovering them in considerable
+quantities, as they found large rocks of crystal in many of the
+mountains whence the streams proceeded that washed down the diamonds.
+
+[Footnote 6: The author writes as of the year 1740.--E.]
+
+Soon after this discovery, it was represented to the king of Portugal,
+that if diamonds should be met with in such abundance as their
+sanguine expectations seemed to indicate, their value and estimation
+would be so debased as to ruin all the Europeans who had any quantity
+of East India diamonds in their possession, and would even render
+the discovery itself of no importance, and prevent his majesty from
+deriving any advantages from it. On these considerations, his majesty
+thought proper to restrain the general search for diamonds, and
+erected a diamond company, with an exclusive charter for this purpose;
+in which company, in consideration of a sum of money paid to the king,
+the property of all diamonds found in Brazil is vested: But, to hinder
+them from collecting too large quantities, and thereby reducing their
+value in the market, they are prohibited from employing above eight
+hundred slaves in this search. To prevent any of his other subjects
+from continuing the search, and to secure the company against
+interlopers, a large town, and considerable surrounding district, has
+been depopulated; and all the inhabitants, said to have amounted
+to six thousand, have been obliged to remove to another part of the
+country: For as this town and district were in the neighbourhood of
+the diamonds, it was thought impossible to prevent such a number of
+people from frequently smuggling, if allowed to reside on the spot.
+
+In consequence of these important discoveries in Brazil, new laws, new
+governments, and new regulations, have been established in many parts
+of the country. Not long ago there was a considerable track of country
+possessed by a set of inhabitants called Paulists, from the name of
+their principal settlement, who were almost independent of the
+crown of Portugal, to which it scarcely ever acknowledged a nominal
+allegiance. These Paulists are said to be descendants from the
+Portuguese who retired from the northern part of Brazil when it was
+invaded and possessed by the Dutch. Being long neglected by their
+superiors, owing to the confusions of the times, and obliged to
+provide for their own security and defence, the necessity of their
+affairs produced a kind of government among themselves, which sufficed
+for their mode of life. Thus habituated to their own regulations, they
+became fond of independence, so that, rejecting the mandates of the
+court of Lisbon, they were often engaged in a state of downright
+rebellion; and, owing to the mountains surrounding their country, and
+the difficulty of clearing the few passes leading towards it, they
+were generally able to make their own terms before they submitted. But
+as gold was found in this country of the Paulists, the present king of
+Portugal, in whose reign almost all these great discoveries have been
+made, thought it necessary to reduce this province, now become of
+great importance, under the same dependence and obedience with the
+rest of the country, which was at length effected, though, as I was
+informed, with great difficulty.
+
+The same motives which induced his majesty to reduce the Paulists,
+have also occasioned the changes which I have mentioned as having
+taken place at the island of St Catharines: For, as we were assured
+by the governor of Rio Grande, there are considerable rivers in this
+neighbourhood that are found to be extremely rich in gold, for which
+reason a military governor with a garrison have been placed here,
+along with a new colony; and, as the harbour at this island is by much
+the largest and most secure of any on the coast, it is not improbable,
+if the riches of the neighbourhood answer their present expectation,
+that it may become in time the principal settlement in Brazil, and the
+most considerable port in all South America.
+
+This much I thought necessary to insert, in relation to the present
+state of Brazil and of the island of St Catharines; for, as this last
+place has been generally recommended as the most eligible place for
+our cruizers to refresh at when bound to the South Sea, I believed it
+to be my duty to instruct my countrymen in the hitherto unsuspected
+inconveniences which attend that place. And, as the Brazilian gold and
+diamonds are subjects of novelty, of which very few particulars have
+hitherto been published, I considered that the account I have been
+able to collect respecting them might not be regarded either a
+trifling or useless digression.
+
+When we first arrived at St Catharines, we were employed in refreshing
+our sick on shore, in wooding and watering the squadron, in cleaning
+our ships, and in examining and securing our masts and rigging, as
+formerly mentioned. At the same time Mr Anson gave orders that the
+ships companies should be supplied with fresh meat, and have a full
+allowance of all kinds of provisions. In consequence of these orders
+we had fresh meat sent on board continually for our daily expenditure;
+and every thing else that was wanting to make up our allowances, was
+received from the Anna Pink, our victualler, in order to preserve the
+provisions on board the ships of the squadron as entire as possible
+for future service. As the season of the year grew every day less
+favourable for our passage round Cape Horn, Mr Anson was very anxious
+to leave St Catharines as soon as possible, and we were at first in
+hopes that all our business would be concluded, and we should be in
+readiness to sail, in about a fortnight from our arrival; but, on
+examining the masts of the Tryal, we found, to our no small vexation,
+inevitable employment for twice that time; for, on a survey, her
+main-mast was sprung at the upper woulding, though that was thought
+capable of being secured by means of two fishes; but the fore-mast was
+reported entirely unfit for service, on which the carpenters were sent
+into the woods in search of a stick proper for a new foremast. After
+a search of four days, nothing could be found fit for the purpose;
+wherefore, on a new consultation, it was agreed to endeavour to secure
+the mast by three fishes, in which work the carpenters were employed
+till within a day or two of our departure. In the meantime, thinking
+it necessary to have a clean vessel, on our arrival in the South Sea,
+the commodore ordered the Tryal to be hove down, which occasioned
+no loss of time, as it might be completed while the carpenters were
+refitting her masts on shore.
+
+A sail being discovered in the offing on the 27th December, and not
+knowing but she might be Spanish, the eighteen-oared boat was manned
+and armed, and sent under the command of our second lieutenant, to
+examine her before she got within the protection of the forts. She
+proved to be a Portuguese brigantine from Rio Grande; and, though
+our officer behaved with the utmost civility to the master, and even
+refused to accept a calf which the master pressed him to accept, the
+governor took great offence at the sending our boat, talking of it
+in a high strain, as a violation of the peace subsisting between
+the crowns of Great Britain and Portugal. We thus attributed this
+blustering to no deeper cause than the natural insolence of Don Jose;
+but when he charged our officer with behaving rudely, and attempting
+to take by violence the calf which he had refused as a present, we had
+reason to suspect that he purposely sought this quarrel, and had more
+important objects in view than the mere captiousness of his temper.
+What these motives might be we had then no means of determining, or
+even guessing at; but we afterwards found, by letters which fell into
+our hands when in the South-Seas, that he had dispatched an express to
+Pizarro, who then lay in the Rio Plata, with an account of our arrival
+at St Catharines, together with a most ample and circumstantial
+account of our force and condition. We then conceived, that Don Jose
+had raised this groundless clamour on purpose to prevent us from
+visiting the brigantine when she should go away again, lest we might
+have found proofs of his perfidy, and perhaps have discovered
+the secret of his smuggling correspondence with his neighbouring
+governors, and with the Spaniards at Buenos Ayres.
+
+It was near a month before the Tryal was refitted; for not only were
+her lower-masts defective, but her main-topmast and fore-yard were
+likewise found rotten. While this work was going on, the other
+ships of the squadron set up new standing-rigging, together with a
+sufficient number of preventer shrowds to each mast, to secure them in
+the most effectual manner. Also, in order to render the ships stiffer,
+to enable them to carry more sail abroad, and to prevent them from
+straining their upper works in hard gales of wind, the several
+captains were ordered to put some of their great guns into their
+holds. These precautions being complied with, and all the ships having
+taken in as much wood and water as there was room for, the Tryal was
+at last completed, and the whole squadron was ready for sea: On which
+the tents on shore were struck, and all the sick removed on board. We
+had here a melancholy proof how much the healthiness of this place
+was over-rated by former writers; for, though the Centurion had alone
+buried no less than twenty-eight of her men since our arrival, yet, in
+the same interval, the number of her sick had increased from eighty to
+ninety-six.
+
+All being embarked, and every thing prepared for our departure, the
+commodore made the signal for all captains, and delivered them their
+orders, containing the successive places of rendezvous from hence to
+the coast of Chili. Next day, being the 18th of January, 1741, the
+signal was made for weighing, and the squadron put to sea; leaving
+this island of St Catharines without regret, as we had been extremely
+disappointed in our accommodations and expectatations of refreshment,
+and in the humane and friendly offices we had been taught to look
+for, in a place so much celebrated for its hospitality, freedom, and
+convenience.
+
+
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_The Run from St Catharines to Port St Julian; with some Account of
+that Port, and of the Country to the South of the Rio Plata._
+
+In quitting St Catharines, we left the last amicable port we proposed
+to touch at, and were now proceeding to a hostile, or at best a desert
+and inhospitable coast. As we were to expect a more boisterous climate
+to the southward than any we had yet experienced, not only our
+danger of separation would by this means be much augmented, but other
+accidents of a more mischievous nature were also to be apprehended,
+and as much as possible provided against. Mr Anson, therefore, in
+appointing the various stations at which the ships of the squadron
+were to rendezvous, had considered that his own ship might be disabled
+from getting round Cape Horn, or might be lost, and gave therefore
+proper directions, that, even in that case, the expedition might not
+be abandoned. The orders delivered to the captains, the day before
+sailing from St Catharines, were, in case of separation, which they
+were to endeavour to avoid with the utmost care, that the first place
+of rendezvous was to be Port St Julian, describing the place from Sir
+John Narborough's account of it. They were there to provide as much
+salt as they could take on board, both for their own use and that of
+the other ships of the squadron; and, if not joined by the commodore
+after a stay of ten days, they were then to pass through the straits
+of Le Maire and round Cape Horn into the South-Seas, where the next
+place of rendezvous was to be the island of Nostra Senora del Socoro,
+in lat. 45 deg. S. long. 71 deg. 12' W. from the Lizard.[1] They were to bring
+this island to bear E.N.E. and to cruize from five to twelve leagues
+distance from it, as long as their store of wood and water would
+permit, both of which they were directed to expend with the utmost
+frugality. When under the necessity of procuring a fresh supply, they
+were to stand in, and endeavour to find an anchorage; and in case they
+could not, and the weather made it dangerous to supply the ships by
+standing off and on, they were then to make the best of their way to
+the island of Juan Fernandez in lat. 33 deg. 37' S. at which island, after
+recruiting their wood and water, they were to cruize off the anchorage
+for fifty-six days; and, if not joined by the commodore in that time,
+they were to conclude that some accident had befallen him, and were
+forthwith to put themselves under the command of the senior officer,
+who was to use his utmost endeavour to annoy the enemy both by sea and
+land. In this view, the new commander was urged to continue in these
+seas as long as provisions lasted, or as they could be supplied by
+what could be taken from the enemy, reserving only a sufficiency to
+carry the ships to Macao, at the entrance of the river of Canton
+on the coast of China; whence, being supplied with a new stock of
+provisions, they were to make the best of their way to England. As it
+was found still impossible to unload the Anna Pink, our victualler,
+the commodore gave her master instructions for the same rendezvouses,
+and similar orders to put himself under the command of the remaining
+senior officer.
+
+[Footnote 1: The centre of the island of Socoro, or Guayteca, on the
+western coast of Patagonia, is in lat. 43 deg. 10' S. and long. 73 deg. 40' W.
+from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+Under these orders, the squadron sailed from St Catharines on Sunday
+the 18th of January, 1741. Next day we had very squally weather,
+attended with rain, lightning, and thunder; but it soon cleared up
+again, with light breezes, and continued so to the evening of the
+21st, when it again blew fresh, and, increasing all night, it became a
+most violent storm by next morning, accompanied by so thick a fog that
+it was impossible for us to see to the distance of two ships lengths,
+and we consequently lost sight of all the squadron. On this a signal
+was made, by firing guns, to bring to with the larboard tacks, the
+wind being due east. We in the Centurion handed the top-sails, bunted
+the main-sail, and lay to under a reefed-mizen till noon, when the
+fog dispersed, and we soon discovered all the ships of the squadron,
+except the Pearl, which did not join till near a month afterwards.
+The Tryal was a great way to leeward, having lost her main-mast in
+the squall, and having been obliged to cut away the wreck, for fear of
+bilging. We therefore bore down with the squadron to her relief, and
+the Gloucester was ordered to take her in tow, as the weather did not
+entirely abate till next day, and even then a great swell continued
+from the eastward, in consequence of the preceding storm. After this
+accident we continued to the southward with little interruption,
+finding the same setting of the current we had observed before our
+arrival at St Catharines; that is, we generally found ourselves about
+twenty miles to the southward of our reckoning by the log every day.
+This, with some inequality, lasted till we had passed the latitude of
+the Rio Plata, and even then the same current, however difficult to
+be accounted for, undoubtedly continued; for we were not satisfied in
+attributing this appearance to any error in our reckoning, but tried
+it more than once, when a calm rendered it practicable.
+
+Immediately on getting to the south of the latitude of the Rio Plata
+we had soundings, which continued all along the coast of Patagonia.
+These soundings, when well ascertained, being of great use in
+determining the position of a ship on this coast, and as we tried them
+more frequently, in greater depths, and with more attention, than I
+believe had ever been done before, I shall recite our observations
+on this subject as succinctly as I can. In lat. 36 deg. 52' S. we had 60
+fathoms on a bottom of fine black and grey sand: From thence to 39 deg.
+55' S. we varied our depths from 50 to 80 fathoms, but always with the
+same bottom: Between the last-mentioned latitude and 43 deg. 16' S. we had
+only fine grey sand with the same variation of depths, except that
+we once or twice lessened the water to 40 fathoms. After this we
+continued in 40 fathoms for about half a degree, having a bottom of
+coarse sand and broken shells, at which time we were in sight of land
+at not above seven leagues distance. As we edged from the land we had
+a variety of soundings; first black sand, then muddy, and soon after
+rough ground with stones: But when we had increased our depth to
+forty-eight fathoms, we had a muddy bottom to the lat. of 46 deg. 10' S.
+Hence drawing near the shore, we had at first thirty-six fathoms,
+and still kept shoaling till we came into twelve fathoms, having
+constantly small stones and pebbles at the bottom.
+
+Part of this time we had a view of Cape Blanco, in about lat. 47 deg.
+10' S. and long. 69 deg. W. from London.[2] Steering from hence S. by
+E. nearly, we deepened our water to fifty fathoms in a run of about
+thirty leagues, without once altering the bottom; and then drawing
+towards the shore, with a S.W. course, varying rather westward, we had
+constantly a sandy bottom till we came to thirty fathoms, when we had
+again a sight of land in about lat. 48 deg. 31' S. We made this land on
+the 17th February, and came to anchor at five that afternoon in lat.
+48 deg. 58' S. with the same soundings as before; the southermost land
+then in view bearing S.S.W. the northermost N.E. a small island N.W.
+and the westermost hummock W.S.W. At this anchorage we found the tide
+to set S. by W.
+
+[Footnote 2: Cape Blanco is in lat 47 deg. 20' S. long. 64 deg. 30' W. from
+Greenwich. At this place, instead of a description of Cape Blanco, the
+original gives two views of the coast in different directions, as seen
+from sea; here omitted for reasons already assigned.--E.]
+
+We weighed anchor at five next morning, and an hour afterwards
+descried a sail, which was soon found to be the Pearl, which had
+separated from us a few days after leaving St Catharines. Yet she
+increased her sail and stood away from the Gloucester; and when she
+came up, the people of the Pearl had their hammocks in their netting,
+and every thing ready for an engagement. The Pearl joined us about
+two in the afternoon, and running up under our stern, Lieutenant
+Salt informed the commodore that Captain Kidd had died on the 31st
+of January. He likewise said that he had seen five large ships on
+the 10th of this month, which he for some time imagined had been our
+squadron, insomuch that he suffered the commanding ship, which wore a
+red broad pendant exactly resembling that of our commodore at the
+main top-mast head, to come within gun-shot of the Pearl before he
+discovered the mistake; but then, finding it was not the Centurion,
+he haled close upon a wind and crowded from theirs with all sail; and
+standing across a rippling, where they hesitated to follow, he happily
+escaped. He had made them out to be five Spanish ships of war, one of
+which was so exceedingly like the Gloucester that he was under great
+apprehension when chased now by the Gloucester. He thought they
+consisted of two seventy-gun ships, two of fifty, and one of forty;
+the whole of which squadron chased him all that day, but at night,
+finding they could not get near, they gave over the chase and stood
+away to the southward.
+
+Had we not been under the necessity of refitting the Tryal, this
+intelligence would have prevented our making any stay at St Julians;
+but as it was impossible for that sloop to proceed round Cape Horn
+in her present condition, some stay there became inevitable; and
+therefore we came to an anchor again the same evening in twenty-five
+fathoms, the bottom a mixture of mud and sand, a high hummock bearing
+from us S.W. by W. Weighing at nine next morning, we sent the cutters
+of the Centurion and Severn in shore to discover the harbour of St
+Julian, while the ships kept standing along the coast about a league
+from the land. At six in the evening we anchored in the bay of St
+Julian, in nineteen fathoms, the bottom muddy ground with sand, the
+northermost land in sight bearing N. by E. the S. 1/2 E. and the
+high hummock, called Wood's Mount by Sir John Narborough, W.S.W. The
+cutters returned soon after, having discovered the harbour, which did
+not appear to us where we lay, the northermost point shutting in upon
+the southermost, and closing the entrance in appearance.
+
+Our principal object in coming to anchor in this bay was to refit the
+Tryal, in which business the carpenters were immediately employed. Her
+main-mast had been carried away about twelve feet below the cap, but
+they contrived to make the remainder of the mast serve. The Wager
+was directed to supply her with a spare main-top-mast, which
+the carpenters converted into a new fore-mast. And I cannot help
+observing, that this accident to the Tryal's masts, which gave us so
+much uneasiness at the time on account of the delay it occasioned, was
+the means, in all probability, of preserving this sloop and all her
+crew. For her masts before this were much too lofty for the high
+southern latitudes we were proceeding into, so that, if they had
+weathered the preceding storm, it would have been impossible for them
+to have stood against the seas and tempests we afterwards encountered
+in passing round Cape Horn; and the loss of masts, in that boisterous
+climate, would scarcely have been attended with less than the loss of
+the vessel and all on board, as it would have been impracticable for
+the other ships to have given them any assistance whatever, during the
+continuance of these impetuous storms.
+
+While at this place, the commodore appointed the honourable Captain
+Murray to succeed to the Pearl, and Captain Cheap to the Wager. He
+promoted Mr Charles Saunders, first lieutenant of the Centurion, to
+the command of the Tryal sloop; but, as Mr Saunders lay dangerously
+ill of a fever in the Centurion, and the surgeons considered his
+removal to his own ship might hazard his life, Mr Saumarez had
+orders to act as commander of the Tryal during the illness of Captain
+Saunders.
+
+At this place, the commodore held a consultation with his captains
+about unloading and discharging the Anna pink; but they represented
+that, so far from being in a condition for taking her loading on
+board, their ships still had great quantities of provisions in the way
+of their guns between decks, and that their ships were so deep and so
+lumbered that they would not be fit for action without being cleared.
+It was therefore necessary to retain the pink in the service; and, as
+it was apprehended that we should meet with the Spanish squadron in
+passing the cape, Mr Anson ordered all the provisions that were in
+the way of the guns to be put on board the Anna pink, and that all the
+guns which had been formerly lowered into the holds, for the ease of
+the ships, should be remounted.
+
+As this bay and harbour of St Julian is a convenient rendezvous, in
+case of separation, for all cruizers bound to the southwards, or to
+any part of the coast of Patagonia, from the Rio Plata to the Straits
+of Magellan, as it lies nearly parallel to their usual route, a
+short account of the singularity of this country, with a particular
+description of Port St. Julian, may perhaps be neither unacceptable to
+the curious, nor unworthy the attention of future navigators, as some
+of them, by unforeseen accidents, may be obliged to run in with the
+land and to make some stay on this coast; in which case a knowledge of
+the country, and of its productions and inhabitants, cannot fail to be
+of the utmost consequence to them.
+
+The tract of country usually called Patagonia, or that southern
+portion of South America, not possessed by the Spaniards, extends
+from their settlements to the Straits of Magellan. This country on its
+eastern side, along the Atlantic ocean, from the Rio Plata southwards,
+is remarkable for having no trees of any kind, except a few peach
+trees planted by the Spaniards in the neighbourhood of Buenos Ayres;
+so that the whole eastern coast of Patagonia, extending near four
+hundred leagues from north to south, and as far back into the interior
+as any discoveries have yet been made, contains nothing that can be
+called by the name of wood, and only a few insignificant shrubs
+in some places. Sir John Narborough, who was sent out expressly by
+Charles II to examine this country, wintered upon this coast in Port
+St Julian and Port Desire, in the year 1670, and declares that he did
+not see a stick in the whole country large enough to make the handle
+of a hatchet. But, although this country be destitute of wood, it
+abounds in pasture, as the whole land seems made up of downs of a
+light dry and gravelly soil, producing great quantities of long grass,
+which grows in tufts, interspersed with large spots of barren gravel.
+In many places this grass feeds immense herds of cattle, all derived
+from a few European cattle brought over by the Spaniards at their
+first settling, which have thriven and multiplied prodigiously, owing
+to the abundance of herbage which they every where met with, and
+are now so increased and extended so far into different parts of
+Patagonia, that they are not considered as private property; thousands
+of them being slaughtered every year by the hunters, only for their
+hides and tallow.
+
+The manner of killing these cattle, being peculiar to that part of the
+world, merits a circumstantial description. Both Spaniards and Indians
+in that country are usually most excellent horsemen; and accordingly
+the hunters employed on this occasion are all mounted on horseback,
+armed with a kind of spear, which, instead of the usual point or blade
+in the same line with the shaft, has its blade fixed across. Armed
+with this instrument, they ride at a beast and surround him, when the
+hunter that is behind hamstrings him, so that he soon falls, and
+is unable to rise from the ground, where they leave him and proceed
+against others, whom they serve in the same manner. Sometimes there is
+a second party attending the hunters, on purpose to skin the cattle as
+they fall; but it is said that the hunters sometimes prefer to leave
+them to languish in torment till next day, from an opinion that the
+lengthened anguish bursts the lymphatics, and thereby facilitates the
+separation of the skin from the carcass. Their priests have loudly
+condemned this most barbarous practice, and have even gone so far, if
+my memory do not deceive me, as to excommunicate such as persist to
+follow it, yet all their efforts to put an entire stop to it have
+hitherto proved ineffectual.
+
+Besides great numbers of cattle which are slaughtered every year in
+this manner, for their hides and tallow, it is often necessary, for
+the uses of agriculture, and for other purposes, to catch them alive,
+and without wounding them. This is performed with a most wonderful
+and most incredible dexterity, chiefly by means of an implement or
+contrivance which the English who have resided at Buenos Ayres usually
+denominate a lash. This consists of a very strong thong of raw hide,
+several fathoms in length, with a running noose at one end. This the
+hunter, who is on horseback, takes in his right hand, being properly
+coiled up, and the other end fastened to the saddle: Thus prepared,
+the hunters ride at a herd of cattle, and when arrived within a
+certain distance of a beast, they throw their thong at him with such
+exactness, that they never fail to fix the noose about his horns.
+Finding himself thus entangled, the beast usually endeavours to run
+away, but the hunter attends his motions, and the horse being swifter,
+the thong is prevented from being so much straitened as to break, till
+another hunter throws another noose about one of his hind-legs. When
+this is done, the horses being trained to the sport, instantly turn in
+opposite directions, straining the two thongs contrary ways, by which
+the beast is overthrown. The horses then stop, keeping both thongs
+on the stretch, so that the beast remains on the ground incapable of
+resistance; and the two hunters alight from their horses and secure
+the beast in such a manner that they afterwards easily convey him to
+wherever they please.
+
+They catch horses by means of similar nooses, and are even said to
+catch tigers in the same manner, which, however strange it may appear,
+is asserted by persons of credit. It must be owned, indeed, that the
+address both of Spaniards and Indians in this part of the world, in
+the use of this lash or noose, and the certainty with which they throw
+and fix it on any intended part of a beast, even at a considerable
+distance, is so wonderful as only to be credited and repeated on the
+concurrent testimony of all who have frequented this country. The
+cattle killed in the before-mentioned manner are slaughtered only for
+their hides and tallow, and sometimes their tongues also are taken
+out; but the rest of the flesh is left to putrify, or to be devoured
+by birds of prey and wild beasts. The greatest part of it falls to the
+share of the wild-dogs, of which there are immense numbers to be found
+in the country. These are all supposed to be descended of Spanish dogs
+from Buenos Ayres, which had left their masters, allured by the great
+quantity of carrion, and had run wild where they had such facility
+of subsisting, for they are plainly of the European breed of dogs.
+Although these dogs are said to prowl in vast packs, even some
+thousands together, they do not diminish the number, nor prevent the
+increase of the cattle, as they dare not attack the herds, by reason
+of the vast numbers that feed together, but content themselves with
+the carrion left by the hunters, and perhaps now and then meet with
+a few stragglers, separated accidentally from the herds to which they
+belong.
+
+This country, to the southward of Buenos Ayres, is also stocked with
+great numbers of wild-horses, brought also originally from Spain, and
+prodigiously increased, and extending to a much greater distance than
+the cattle. Though many of these are excellent, their numbers
+make them of very little value, the best of them being sold in the
+neighbouring settlements, where money is plenty and commodities very
+dear, for not more than a dollar a piece. It is not certain how far to
+the southwards these herds of wild cattle and horses extend; but there
+is reason to believe that stragglers of both are to be met with very
+near the Straits of Magellan, and they will doubtless in time fill
+all the southern part of the continent with their breeds, which cannot
+fail to be of vast advantage to such ships as may touch on the coast.
+The horses are said to be very good eating, and are even preferred by
+some of the Indians before the cattle. But however plentiful Patagonia
+may hereafter become in regard to flesh, this eastern coast of that
+extensive country seems very defective in regard to fresh water; for
+as the land is generally of a nitrous and saline nature, the ponds
+and streams are frequently brackish. However, as good water has been
+found, though in small quantities, it is not improbable but this
+inconvenience may be removed, on a farther search.
+
+There are also in all parts of this country a good number of
+_Vicunnas_, or Peruvian sheep, but these, by reason of their
+swiftness, are very difficultly killed. On the eastern coast, also,
+there are immense quantities of seals, and a vast variety of sea-fowl,
+among which the most remarkable are the penguins. These are, in size
+and shape, like a goose, but have short stumps like fins instead of
+wings, which are of no use to them except when in the water. Their
+bills are narrow, like that of the albatross, and they stand and walk
+quite erect, from which circumstance, and their white bellies, Sir
+John Narborough has whimsically likened them to little children
+standing up in white aprons.
+
+The inhabitants of this eastern coast, to which hitherto I confine my
+observations, appear to be but few, and rarely have more than two or
+three of them been seen at a time by any ships that have touched here.
+During our stay at Port St Julian we did not see any. Towards
+Buenos Ayres, however, they are sufficiently numerous, and are very
+troublesome to the Spaniards: But there the greater breadth and
+variety of the country, and a milder climate, yield them greater
+conveniences. In that part the continent is between three and four
+hundred leagues in breadth, while at Port St Julian it is little more
+than one hundred. I conceive, therefore, that the same Indians who
+frequent the western coast of Patagonia, and the northern shore of the
+Straits of Magellan, often ramble to this eastern side. As the Indians
+near Buenos Ayres are more numerous than those farther south, they
+also greatly excel them in spirit and activity, and seem nearly allied
+in their manners to the gallant Chilese Indians, [Araucanians] who
+have long set the whole Spanish power at defiance, have often ravaged
+their country, and remain to this hour independent. The Indians about
+Buenos Ayres have learned to be excellent horsemen, and are extremely
+expert in the management of all cutting weapons, though ignorant of
+fire-arms, which the Spaniards are exceedingly solicitous to keep from
+them. Of the vigour and resolution of these Indians, the behaviour
+of Orellana and his followers, formerly mentioned, is a memorable
+instance.
+
+This much may suffice respecting the eastern coast of Patagonia. The
+western coast is of less extent; and, by reason of the Andes which
+skirt it, and stretch quite down to the sea side, the shore is very
+rocky and dangerous. As I shall hereafter have occasion to take
+farther notice of that coast, I shall not enlarge any farther
+respecting it in this place, but shall conclude this account with a
+short description of the harbour of St Julian, the general form of
+which may be conceived from the annexed sketch. It must however be
+noticed, that the bar there marked at the entrance has many holes in
+it, and is often shifting. The tide flows here N. and S. and at full
+and change rises four fathoms. On our first arrival, an officer was
+sent on shore to the salt pond marked D. in the sketch, in order to
+procure a quantity of salt for the use of the squadron; for Sir John
+Narborough had observed, when he was here, that the salt was very
+white and good, and that in February there was enough to have loaded a
+thousand ships. But our officer returned with a sample which was very
+bad, and said that even of this very little was to be had: I suppose
+the weather had been more rainy this year than ordinary, and had
+destroyed the salt, or prevented its fermentation.
+
+
+
+SECTION VII.
+
+_Departure from the Bay of St Julian, and Passage from thence to the
+Straits of Le Maire._
+
+The Tryal being nearly refitted, which was our principal occupation
+at this bay, and sole occasion of our stay, the commodore thought
+it necessary to fix the plan of his first operations, as we were
+now directly bound for the South Seas and the enemy's coasts; and
+therefore, on the 24th February, a signal was made for all captains,
+and a council of war was held on board the Centurion. There were
+present on this occasion the Honourable Edward Legg, Captain Matthew
+Mitchell, the Honourable George Murray, Captain David Cheap, and
+Colonel Mordaunt Cracherode, commander of the land-forces. At this
+council, it was proposed by Commodore Anson, that their first attempt,
+after arriving in the South Seas, should be against the town and
+harbour of Baldivia, the principal frontier place in the south of
+Chili, informing them, as an inducement for this enterprize, that it
+formed part of his majesty's instructions to endeavour to secure
+some port in the South Seas where the ships of the squadron might be
+careened and refitted. The council readily and unanimously agreed
+to this proposal; and, in consequence of this resolution, new
+instructions were issued to the captains, by which, though still
+directed, in case of separation, to make the best of their way to the
+island of Socoro, they were only to cruize off that island for ten
+days; from whence, if not then joined by the commodore, they were to
+proceed off Baldivia, making the land between the latitudes of 40 deg. and
+40 deg. 30' S. and taking care to keep to the southward of the port. If
+not there joined in fourteen days by the rest of the squadron, they
+were then to direct their course for the island of Juan Fernandez;
+after which they were to regulate their farther proceedings by the
+former orders given out at St Catharines. The same orders were also
+given to the master of the Anna pink, who was enjoined to answer and
+obey the signals made by any ship of the squadron, in absence of the
+commodore; and, if he should be so unfortunate as to fell into the
+hands of the enemy, he was directed to destroy his orders and papers
+with the utmost care. Likewise, as the separation of the squadron
+might prove highly prejudicial to the service, each captain was
+ordered to give it in charge to the respective officers of the watch,
+on all occasions, never to keep their respective ships at a greater
+distance from the Centurion than two miles, as they should answer
+at their peril; and if any captain should find his ship beyond the
+specified distance, he was to acquaint the commodore with the name of
+the officer who thus neglected his duty.
+
+These necessary regulations established, and the repairs of the Tryal
+sloop completed, the squadron weighed from Port St Julians on Friday
+the 27th February, 1741, at seven in the morning, and stood to sea.
+The Gloucester found such difficulty in endeavouring to purchase her
+anchor, that she was left a great way astern, so that we fired several
+guns in the night as signals for her to make more sail: But she did
+not rejoin us till next morning, when we learnt that she had been
+obliged to cut her cable, leaving her best bower anchor behind. At ten
+in the morning of the 28th, Wood's Mount, the high land over Port
+St Julian, bore from us N. by W. distant ten leagues, and we had
+fifty-two fathoms water. Standing now to the southward, we had great
+expectations of falling in with the Spanish squadron under Pizarro;
+as, during our stay at Port St Julian, there had generally been hard
+gales between W.N.W. and S.W. so that we had reason to conclude that
+squadron, had gained no ground upon us in that interval. Indeed, it
+was the prospect of meeting them that had occasioned our commodore to
+be so very solicitous to prevent the separation of our ships; for, had
+he been solely intent on getting round Cape Horn in the shortest time,
+the most proper method for this purpose would have been, to order each
+ship to make the best of her way to the rendezvous, without waiting
+for the rest.
+
+From the time of leaving Port St Julian to the 4th March, we had
+little wind with thick hazy weather and some rain, and our soundings
+were generally from forty to fifty fathoms, with a bottom of black
+and gray sand, sometimes mixed with pebble stones. On the 4th March
+we were in sight of Cape Virgin Mary, and not more than six or seven
+leagues distant, the northern boundary of the eastern entrance of
+the Straits of Magellan, in lat 52 deg. 21' S. long. 71 deg. 44' W. from
+London.[1] It seemed a low flat land, ending in a point.[2] Off this
+cape the depth of water was from thirty-five to forty-eight fathoms.
+The afternoon of this day was bright and clear, with small breezes
+of wind, inclining to a calm; and most of the captains took the
+opportunity of this fine weather to visit the commodore. While all
+were on board the Centurion, they were greatly alarmed by a sudden
+flame bursting out in the Gloucester, followed by a cloud of
+smoke; but were soon relieved of their apprehensions, by receiving
+information that the blast had been occasioned by a spark of fire from
+the forge lighting on some gun-powder, and other combustibles, which
+an officer was preparing for use, in case of falling in with the
+Spanish squadron, and which had exploded without any damage to the
+ship.
+
+[Footnote 1: The longitude of Cape Virgin Mary, is only 67 deg. 42' W.
+from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 2: By the draught in the original, omitted here for
+substantial reasons already repeatedly stated, the coast at this
+southern extremity of Patagonia is represented as a high bluff flat on
+the top, and ending abruptly at this cape.--E.]
+
+We here found, what was constantly the case in these high southern
+latitudes, that fair weather was always of exceedingly short
+continuance, and that when remarkably fine it was a certain presage of
+a succeeding storm: For the calm and sunshine of this afternoon ended
+in a most turbulent night; the wind freshening from the S.W. as the
+night came on; and increasing continually in violence till nine next
+morning. It then blew so hard that we were forced to bring to with the
+squadron, and to continue under a reefed mizen till eleven at night,
+having in that time from forty-three to fifty-seven fathoms water
+on black sand and gravel; and, by an observation we had at noon, we
+concluded that a current had set us twelve miles to the southward
+of our reckoning. Toward midnight the wind abated, and we again made
+sail, steering S. In the morning we discovered the southern land
+beyond the Straits of Magellan, called Terra del Fuego, stretching
+from S. by W.S.E. 1/2 E. This country afforded a very uncomfortable
+prospect, appearing of stupendous height, every where covered with
+snow, and shewing at its southern extremity the entrance into the
+Straits of Le Maire at Cape St Diego.[3] We steered along this
+uncouth and rugged coast all day, having soundings from forty to fifty
+fathoms, on stones and gravel.
+
+[Footnote 3: The western side of the entrance into the Straits of Le
+Maire is formed by the Capes of St Vincent and St Diego; the former in
+lat. 54 deg. 30', the latter in 54 deg. 40', both S. and long. 65 deg. 40' W.]
+
+Intending to pass through the straits of Le Maire next day, we lay to
+at night that we might not overshoot them, and took this opportunity
+to prepare ourselves for the tempestuous climate in which we were soon
+to be engaged, with which view we were employed good part of the night
+in bending an entire new suit of sails to the yards. At four next
+morning, being the 7th of March, we made sail, and at eight saw land,
+and soon after began to open the straits, at which time Cape St Diego
+bore E.S.E. Cape St Vincent S.E. 1/2 E. the middlemost of the Three
+Brothers, hills so called on Terra del Fuego S. by W. Montegorda, a
+high land up the country appearing over the Three Brothers; S. and
+Cape St Bartholomew, the southernmost point of Staten Land, E.S.E. I
+must observe here that, though Frezier has given a very correct view
+of that part of Terra del Fuego which borders on these straits to the
+westwards, he has omitted the draught of Staten Land, which forms
+the opposite shore of these straits, whence we found it difficult to
+determine exactly where the straits lay until they began to open upon
+our view; and hence, had we not coasted a considerable way along the
+shore of Terra del Fuego, we might have missed the straits, and have
+gone to the eastward of Staten Land before discovering it. This has
+happened to many ships; particularly, as mentioned by Frezier, to the
+Incarnation and Concord, which, intending to pass through the Straits
+of Le Maire, were deceived by three hills on Staten Land, and some
+creeks, resembling the Three Brothers and coves of Terra del Fuego, so
+that they overshot the straits.
+
+Though Terra del Fuego presented an aspect exceedingly barren and
+desolate, yet this island of Staten Land far surpasses it in the
+wildness and horror of its appearance, seeming to be entirely composed
+of inaccessible rocks, without the smallest apparent admixture of
+earth or mould, upon or between them. These rocks terminate in a vast
+number of rugged points, which spire up to a prodigious height,
+and are all covered with everlasting snow; their pointed summits or
+pinnacles being every way surrounded by frightful precipices, and
+often overhanging in a most astonishing manner. The hills which are
+crowned by the rugged rocks, are generally separated from each other
+by narrow clifts, appearing as if the country had been frequently rent
+by earthquakes; for these chasms are nearly perpendicular, and extend
+through the substance of the main rocks almost to their bases; so that
+nothing can be imagined more savage and gloomy than the whole aspect
+of this coast.
+
+Having opened the Straits of Le Maire on the morning of the 7th March,
+as before mentioned, the Pearl and Tryal, about ten o'clock,
+were ordered to keep a-head of the squadron and lead the way. We
+accordingly entered the straits with fair weather and a brisk gale,
+and were hurried through by the rapidity of the tide in about two
+hours, though they are between seven and eight leagues in length. As
+these straits are often esteemed the boundary between the Atlantic and
+Pacific oceans, and as we presumed that we had nothing now before us
+but an open sea, till we should arrive on the opulent coasts where all
+our hopes and wishes centered, we could not help flattering ourselves
+that the greatest difficulty of our voyage was now at an end, and
+that our most sanguine dreams were on the point of being realized. We
+indulged ourselves, therefore, in the romantic imaginations which
+the fancied possession of the gold of Chili and silver of Peru might
+readily be conceived to inspire. These joyous ideas were considerably
+heightened, by the brightness of the sky and serenity of the weather,
+which indeed were both most remarkably delightful: For, though the
+antarctic winter was now advancing with hasty strides, the morning of
+this day, in mildness and even brilliancy, gave place to none that
+we had seen since our departure from England. Thus, animated by these
+flattering delusions, we passed those memorable straits, ignorant of
+the dreadful calamities then impending, and ready to burst upon us;
+ignorant that the moment was fast approaching when our squadron was to
+be separated, never again to unite; and that this day of our passage
+was the last cheerful day that the greatest part of us was ever to
+enjoy in this world.
+
+
+
+SECTION VIII.
+
+_Course from the Straits of Le Maire to Cape Noir._
+
+We had scarcely reached the southern extremity of the Straits of Le
+Maire, when our flattering hopes were almost instantly changed to the
+apprehension of immediate destruction. Even before the sternmost ships
+of the squadron were clear of the straits, the serenity of the sky was
+suddenly obscured, and we observed all the presages of an impending
+storm. The wind presently shifted to the southward, and blew in
+such violent squalls that we had to hand our top-sails and reef our
+main-sail; while the tide, which had hitherto favoured us, turned
+furiously adverse, and drove us to the eastward with prodigious
+rapidity, so that we were in great anxiety for the Wager and Anna
+pink, the two sternmost vessels, fearing they might be dashed to
+pieces upon the shore of Staten Land; nor were our apprehensions
+without foundation, as they weathered that coast with the utmost
+difficulty. Instead of pursuing our intended course to the S.W. the
+whole squadron was now drifted to the eastward, by the united force of
+the storm and current; so that next morning we found ourselves nearly
+seven leagues eastward of the straits, which then bore from us N.W.
+
+The violence of the current, which had set us with so much
+precipitation to the eastward, together with the fierceness and
+constancy of the westerly winds, soon taught us to consider the
+doubling of Cape Horn as an enterprize that might prove too mighty
+for all our efforts; though some among us had so lately treated the
+difficulties which former voyagers were said to have encountered in
+this undertaking as little better than chimerical, and had supposed
+them to have arisen from timidity and unskilfulness, rather than
+from the real embarrassments of the winds and seas. But we were now
+convinced, from severe experience, that these censures were rash and
+ill founded; for the distresses with which we struggled during the
+three succeeding months, will not be easily paralleled in the relation
+of any former naval expedition; which, I doubt not, will be readily
+allowed by those who shall carefully peruse the ensuing narration.
+
+From this storm, which came on before we were well clear of the
+straits of Le Maire, we had a continual succession of such tempestuous
+weather as surprised the oldest and most experienced mariners on
+board, and obliged them to confess, that what they had hitherto called
+storms were inconsiderable gales, when compared with those winds
+we now encountered; which raised such short, and at times such
+mountainous waves, as greatly surpassed in danger all seas known
+in other parts of the globe, and, not without reason, this unusual
+appearance filled us with continual terror; for, had any one of these
+waves broken fairly over us, it must almost inevitably have sent us
+instantly to the bottom. Neither did we escape with terror only:
+for the ship, rolling incessantly gunwale-to, gave us such quick and
+violent jerking motions, that the men were in perpetual danger of
+being dashed to pieces against the decks and sides of the ship; and,
+though we were extremely careful to secure ourselves against these
+shocks, by grasping some fixed body, yet many of our people were
+forced from their holds, some of whom were actually killed, and others
+greatly injured. In particular, one of our best seamen was canted
+overboard and drowned; another dislocated his neck; a third was thrown
+down the main hatchway into the hold and broke his thigh; one of our
+boatswain's mates broke his collar-bone twice; not to mention many
+other similar accidents.
+
+These tempests, so dreadful in themselves, though unattended by any
+other unfavourable circumstances, were yet rendered more mischievous
+to us by their inequality, and by the deceitful intervals that at
+times occurred; for, although we had often to lie-to for days together
+under a reefed mizen, and were frequently reduced to drive at the
+mercy of the winds and waves under bare poles, yet now and then we
+ventured to make sail under double-reefed courses; and occasionally,
+the weather proving more moderate, were perhaps encouraged to set our
+top-sails; after which, without any previous notice, the wind would
+return with redoubled force, and would in an instant tear our sails
+from the yards. And, that no circumstance might be wanting which could
+aggravate our distress, these blasts generally brought with them a
+great quantity of snow and sleet, which cased our rigging in ice, and
+froze our sails, rendering them and our cordage so brittle as to tear
+and snap with the least strain; adding thereby great difficulty and
+labour to the working of the ship, benumbing the hands and limbs of
+our people, and rendering them incapable of exerting themselves
+with their accustomed activity, and even disabling many of them, by
+inducing mortification of their toes and fingers. It were, indeed,
+endless to enumerate the various disasters of different kinds which
+befel us, and I shall only mention the most material, which will
+sufficiently evince; the calamitous condition of the whole squadron,
+during this part of our navigation.
+
+As already observed, it was on the 7th of March that we passed the
+Straits of Le Maire, and were immediately afterwards driven to the
+eastwards, by a violent storm, and by the force of the current setting
+in that direction. During the four or five succeeding days, we had
+hard gales of wind from the same western quarter, attended by a most
+prodigious swell; insomuch that, although we stood all that time
+towards the S.W. we had no reason to imagine we had made any way to
+the westwards. In this interval we had frequent squalls of rain and
+snow, and shipped great quantities of water. After this, for three
+or four days, though the sea ran mountains high, yet the weather was
+rather more moderate; but, on the 18th; we had again strong gales of
+wind with excessive cold, and at midnight the main top-sail split, and
+one of the straps of the main dead-eyes broke. From the 18th to the
+23d the weather was more moderate, though, often intermixed with rain
+and sleet and some hard gales; but, as the waves did not subside,
+the ship, by labouring sore in this lofty sea, became so loose in her
+upper-works that she let in water at every seam, so that every part of
+her within board was constantly exposed to the sea-water, and scarcely
+any even of the officers ever lay dry in their beds. Indeed, hardly
+did two nights pass without many of them being driven from their beds
+by deluges of water.
+
+On the 23d we had a most violent storm of wind, hail, and rain, with a
+prodigious sea; and, though we handed the main-sail before the height
+of the squall, yet we found the yard spring; and soon after, in
+consequence of the foot-rope of the main-sail breaking, the main-sail
+itself split instantly into rags, and much the greater part of it
+was blown away, in spite of every endeavour to save it. On this the
+commodore made the signal for the squadron to bring to; and as
+the storm lulled into a calm, we had an opportunity to lower the
+main-yard, and set the carpenters to work upon it, while we also
+repaired our rigging; after which, having bent a new main-sail, we got
+again under way with a moderate breeze. But, in less than twenty-four
+hours, we had another storm, still more furious than the former, which
+blew a perfect hurricane, and obliged us to lie-to under bare poles.
+As our ship kept the wind better than any of the rest, we were obliged
+in the afternoon to wear, in order to join the squadron to leeward, as
+otherwise we had been in danger of parting from them in the night. On
+this occasion, as we dared not venture to show any sail to the gale,
+we had to use an expedient, which answered the purpose: This was
+putting the helm a-weather and manning the fore-shrouds: But, though
+this answered the end in view, yet in its execution one of our ablest
+seamen was canted overboard. Notwithstanding the prodigious agitation
+of the waves, we could perceive that he swam very vigorously, yet we
+found ourselves, to our excessive concern, incapable of giving him the
+smallest assistance; and were the more grieved at his unhappy fate, as
+we lost sight of him struggling with the waves, and conceived that
+he might continue long sensible of the horror of his irretrievable
+situation.
+
+Before this storm was quite abated, we found that two of our
+main-shrouds and one of our mizen-shrouds were broken, all of which
+we knotted and replaced immediately. After this we had an interval of
+three or four days less tempestuous than usual, but accompanied by so
+thick a fog, that we had to fire guns almost every half hour to keep
+our squadron together. On the 31st we were alarmed by a gun from the
+Gloucester, and a signal to speak the commodore. We immediately bore
+down to her, prepared to learn some terrible disaster, of which we
+were apprised before we came down, by seeing that her main-yard was
+broken in the slings. This was a grievous misfortune to us all, at
+this juncture, as it was evident that it must prove a hinderance to
+our sailing, and would detain us the longer in these inhospitable
+latitudes. Our future safety and success was not to be promoted by
+repining, but by resolution and activity; and therefore, that this
+unhappy incident might delay us as short as possible, the commodore
+ordered several carpenters to be put on board the Gloucester from the
+other ships of the squadron, in order to repair her damage with
+the utmost expedition. At this time also, the captain of the Tryal
+represented that his pumps were so bad, and his ship made so much
+water, that he was scarcely able to keep her free; wherefore the
+commodore ordered him a pump, ready fitted, from the Centurion. It was
+very fortunate, both for the Gloucester and Tryal, that the weather
+proved more favourable that day, than for many days both before and
+after; since by this means they were enabled to receive the assistance
+which seemed so essential for their preservation, and which they
+could scarcely have procured at any other time, as it would have been
+extremely hazardous to have ventured a boat on board.
+
+Next day, being the 1st of April, the weather returned to its
+customary bias; the sky looking dark and gloomy, and the wind
+beginning to freshen and to blow in squalls; yet it was not so
+boisterous as to prevent us carrying our top-sails close reefed,
+but its appearance evidently prognosticated that a still more severe
+tempest was at hand. Accordingly, on the 3d of April, there came on a
+storm, which, both in its violence and duration, for it lasted three
+days, exceeded all we had hitherto experienced. In its first onset,
+we received a furious shock from a sea, which broke upon our larboard
+quarter, where it stove in the quarter gallery, and rushed into the
+ship like a deluge. Our rigging suffered also extremely from the blow;
+among the rest, one of the straps of the main dead-eyes was broken, as
+were likewise a main shroud and a puttock shroud; so that, to ease the
+stress upon the masts and shrouds, we had to lower both our main and
+fore yards, and to furl all our sails. We lay in this posture for
+three days, when, the storm somewhat abating, we ventured to make sail
+under our courses only. Even this would not avail us long; for
+next day, being the 7th, we had another hard gale, accompanied with
+lightning and rain, which obliged as to lie-to all night.
+
+It was really wonderful, notwithstanding the severe weather we
+endured, that no extraordinary accident had happened to any of the
+squadron since the Gloucester broke her main-yard. But this good
+fortune now no longer attended us, for, at three next morning, several
+guns were fired to leeward as signals of distress, on which the
+commodore made the signal for the squadron to bring to. At day-break
+we saw the Wager a considerable way to leeward of any of the other
+ships, and soon perceived that she had lost her mizen-mast, and main
+topsail-yard. We immediately bore down towards her, and found that
+this disaster had arisen from the badness of her iron-work, as all the
+chain plates to windward had given way, in consequence of her having
+fetched a deep roll. This accident proved the more unfortunate for the
+Wager, as her captain had been on board the Gloucester ever since
+the 31st March, and the weather was now too severe to permit of his
+return. Nor was the Wager the only ship in the squadron that suffered
+in this tempest; for next day, a signal of distress was made by the
+Anna pink, and on speaking her, we found she had broken her fore-stay
+and the gammon of her boltsprit, and was in no small danger of all her
+masts coming by the board; so that the whole squadron had to bear away
+to leeward till she made all fast, after which we again hauled upon a
+wind.
+
+After all our solicitude, and the numerous ills of every kind, to
+which we had been incessantly exposed for near forty days, we now
+had great consolation in the hope that our fatigues were drawing to
+a close, and that we should soon arrive in a more hospitable
+climate, where we should be amply rewarded for all our past toils and
+sufferings; for, towards the latter end of March, by our reckoning, we
+had advanced near ten degrees to the west of the westermost point
+of Terra del Fuego; and, as this allowance was double what former
+navigators had thought necessary to compensate the drift of the
+western current, we esteemed ourselves to be well advanced within
+the limits of the Southern Pacific, and had been, ever since then,
+standing to the northward, with as much expedition as the turbulence
+of the weather and our frequent disasters would permit. On the 13th of
+April, in addition to our before-mentioned westing, we were only one
+degree of latitude to the southward of the western entrance into the
+Straits of Magellan, so that we fully expected in a very few days to
+experience the celebrated tranquillity of the Pacific Ocean. But these
+were only delusions, which served to render our disappointment more
+terrible. On the morning of the 14th, between two and three o'clock,
+the weather, which till then had been hazy, fortunately cleared up,
+and the pink made a signal for seeing the land right a-head; and, as
+it was only two miles distant, we were all under the most dreadful
+apprehensions of running on shore; which, had either the wind blown
+from its usual quarter, with its wonted violence, or had not the moon
+suddenly shone out, not a ship of the whole squadron could possibly
+have avoided. But the wind, which some hours before blew in squalls
+from the S.W. had fortunately shifted to W.N.W. by which we were
+enabled to stand to the southward, and to clear ourselves of this
+sudden and unexpected danger, and were fortunate enough by noon to
+have gained an offing of near twenty leagues.
+
+By the latitude of this land we fell in with, it was agreed to be that
+part of Terra del Fuego, near the south-western outlet of the Straits
+of Magellan, described in Frezier's chart, and was supposed to be that
+point which he calls Cape Noir.[1] It was indeed wonderful that the
+current should have driven us to the eastward with so much strength,
+for the whole squadron computed that we were ten degrees to the
+westward of this land; so that in turning, by our reckoning, about
+nineteen degrees of longitude, we had not in reality advanced half
+that distance: And now, instead of having our labours and anxieties
+relieved by approaching a warmer climate, and more tranquil seas, we
+were forced again to steer southwards, and had again to combat those
+western blasts which had already so often terrified us; and this
+too, when we were greatly enfeebled by our men falling sick and dying
+apace, and when our spirits, dejected by long continuance at sea
+and by this severe disappointment, were now much less capable of
+supporting us through the various difficulties and dangers, which we
+could not but look for in this new and arduous undertaking. Added to
+all this, we were sore discouraged by the diminution in the strength
+of the squadron; for, three days before this, we had lost sight of the
+Severn and Pearl in the morning, and, though we spread our ships, and
+beat about for them for some time, we never saw them more; whence we
+apprehended that they also had fallen in with this land in the night,
+and being less favoured by the wind and the moon, might have perished
+by running on shore. Full of these desponding thoughts and
+gloomy presages, we stood away to the S.W. prepared, by our late
+disappointment, how large an allowance soever we made in our westing
+for the drift of the current from the westward, that we might still
+find it insufficient upon a second trial.
+
+[Footnote 1: Cape Noir, is a small island off the western coast of
+Terra del Fuego, is in lat. 54 deg. 28' S. long, 78 deg. 40' W.--E.]
+
+
+
+SECTION IX.
+
+_Observations and Directions for facilitating the Passage of future
+Navigators round Cape Horn._
+
+The improper season of the year in which we attempted to double Cape
+Horn, and to which is to be imputed the before-recited disappointment,
+in falling in with Terra del Fuego, when we reckoned ourselves above
+an hundred leagues to the westward of that coast, and consequently
+well advanced into the Pacific Ocean, to which we were necessitated by
+our too late departure from England, was the fatal source of all the
+misfortunes we afterwards experienced. For, from hence proceeded the
+separation of our ships, the destruction of so many of our people, the
+ruin of our project against Baldivia, and of all our other views on
+the Spanish settlements, and the reduction of our squadron, from the
+formidable condition in which it passed the Straits of Le Maire, to a
+couple of shattered half-manned cruizers and a sloop, so exceedingly
+disabled that, in many climates, they scarcely durst have put to
+sea. To prevent, therefore, as much as in me lies, the recurrence of
+similar calamities to all ships bound hereafter to the South Seas,
+I think it my duty to insert in this place such observations and
+directions, as either my own experience and reflection, or the
+conversation of the most skilful navigators on board the squadron,
+could furnish me with, as to the most eligible manner of doubling Cape
+Horn, whether in regard to the season of the year, the course proper
+to be steered, or the places of refreshment both on the eastern and
+western sides of South America.
+
+To begin with the proper place for refreshment on the eastern side of
+South America. For this purpose the island of St Catharines has been
+usually recommended by former writers, and on their authority we put
+in there; but the treatment we experienced, and the small store of
+refreshments we could procure their are sufficient reasons to render
+all ships very cautious in future how they trust to the government of
+Don Jose Sylva de Paz; for they may assuredly depend on having their
+strength, condition, and designs betrayed to the Spaniards, as far as
+the knowledge the governor can procure of these particulars may enable
+him. As this treacherous conduct was inspired by the views of private
+gain, in the illicit commerce carried on to the river Plate, rather
+than by any natural affection between the Portuguese and Spaniards,
+the same perfidy may perhaps be expected from most of the governors on
+the coast of Brazil, since these smuggling engagements are doubtless
+very general and extensive; and, though the governors themselves
+should detest so faithless a procedure, yet, as ships are perpetually
+passing from one or other of the Brazilian ports to the Rio Plata,
+the Spaniards could scarcely fail of receiving intelligence, by this
+means, of any British ships being on the coast; and, however imperfect
+such intelligence might be, it might prove injurious to the views and
+interests of cruizers thus discovered.
+
+As the Spanish trade in the South Seas is all in one direction, from
+north to south, or the direct reverse, with very little deviation
+to the eastward or westward, it is in the power, of two or three
+cruisers, properly stationed on different parts of this track, to
+possess themselves of every ship that puts to sea. This, however,
+can only be the case so long as they continue concealed from the
+neighbouring coast; for, the moment that an enemy is known to be in
+these seas, all navigation is prohibited, and all chance of capture
+is consequently at an end; as the Spaniards, well aware of these
+advantages to an enemy, send expresses all along the coast, and lay
+a general embargo on all trade; which measure they know will not
+only prevent their vessels from being taken, but must soon oblige
+all cruisers, that have not sufficient strength to attempt their
+settlements on shore, to quit these seas for want of provisions. Hence
+the great importance of carefully concealing all expeditions of this
+kind is quite evident; and hence too it is obvious how extremely
+prejudicial such intelligence must prove as that communicated by the
+Portuguese to the Spaniards in our case, in consequence of touching at
+the ports of Brazil. Yet it will often happen that ships, bound beyond
+Cape Horn, may be obliged to call there for wood, water, and other
+refreshments; in which case, St Catharines is the very last place I
+would recommend; both because the proper animals for a live stock at
+sea, as hogs, sheep, and fowls, are not to be procured there, for want
+of which we found ourselves greatly distressed, being reduced to live
+almost entirely on salt provisions; and because, from that port being
+nearer the Rio Plata than many others of the Portuguese settlements,
+the inducements and conveniences for betraying us to the Spaniards
+were so much the stronger. The place I would recommend is Rio Janeiro,
+where two of our squadron put in, after separating from us in passing
+Cape Horn. At this place, as I was informed by a gentleman on board
+one of these ships, any quantity of hogs and poultry can be procured;
+and as it is more distant from the Rio Plata, the difficulty of
+sending intelligence to the Spaniards is somewhat increased, and
+consequently the chance of continuing there undiscovered is so much
+the greater. Other measures, which may effectually obviate all these
+embarrassments, will be considered more at large hereafter.
+
+I proceed, in the next place, to consider of the proper measures to
+be pursued for doubling Cape Horn: And here, I think I am sufficiently
+authorized, by our own fatal experience, and by a careful comparison
+and examination of the journals of former navigators, to give the
+following advice, which ought never, in prudence, to be departed from:
+Which is, That all ships bound to the South Seas, instead of passing
+through the Straits of Le Maire, should constantly pass by the
+eastward of Staten-Land, and should be invariably bent on running as
+far as the latitude of 61 deg. or 62 deg. S. before they endeavour to stand to
+the westwards; and ought then to make sure of a sufficient westing
+in or about that latitude, before commencing a northern course. But,
+since directions diametrically opposite to these have been formerly
+given by other writers, it is incumbent on me to produce my reasons
+for each part of this maxim.
+
+First then, as to the propriety of passing to the eastward of
+Staten-Land. Those who have attended to the risk we ran in passing
+the Straits of Le Maire, the danger we were in of being driven upon
+Staten-Land by the current, when, though we happily escaped being
+driven on shore, we were yet carried to the eastward of that island:
+those, I say, who reflect on this and the like accidents which have
+happened to other ships, will surely not esteem it prudent to
+pass through these straits and run the risk of shipwreck, and find
+themselves, after all, no farther to the westward, the only reason
+hitherto given for this practice, than they might have been, in the
+same time, by a more secure navigation in an open sea. And next, as
+to the directions I have given for running into the latitude of 61 deg.
+or 62 deg. S. before any endeavour is made to stand to the westward. The
+reasons for this precept are, that, in all probability, the violence
+of the current setting from the westward will be thereby avoided,
+and the weather will prove less tempestuous and uncertain. This
+last circumstance we experienced most remarkably; for after we had
+unexpectedly fallen in with the land at Cape Noir, we stood away
+southward to get clear of it; and were no sooner advanced into the
+lat. of 60 deg. S. or upwards, than we met with much better weather and
+smoother water than in any other part of this whole passage. The air
+indeed was very sharp and cold, and we had strong gales, but they were
+steady and uniform, and we had at the same time sunshine and a clear
+sky: whereas in the lower latitudes, the wind every now and then
+intermitted, as it were, to recover new strength, and then returned
+suddenly in the most violent gusts, threatening at every blast to blow
+away our masts, which must have proved our inevitable destruction.
+
+Also, that the currents in this high latitude would be of much
+less efficacy than nearer the land, seems to be evinced by these
+considerations: That all currents run with greater violence near the
+shore than out at sea, and that at great distances from the land
+they are scarcely perceptible. The reason of this seems sufficiently
+obvious, if we consider that constant currents, in all probability,
+are produced by constant winds; the wind, though with a slow and
+imperceptible motion, driving a large body of water continually before
+it, which, being accumulated on any coast that it meets with in its
+course, must escape along the shore by the endeavours of the surface
+to reduce itself to the level of the rest of the ocean. It is likewise
+reasonable to suppose, that those violent gusts of wind which we
+experienced near the shore, so very different from what we found in
+the lat. of 60 deg. S. and upwards, may be owing to a similar cause; for a
+westerly wind almost perpetually prevails in the southern part of
+the Pacific Ocean, and this current of air being interrupted by the
+enormously high range of the Andes, and by the mountains on Terra del
+Fuego, which together bar up the whole country as far south as Cape
+Horn, a part only of the wind can force its way over the top of
+these prodigious precipices, while the rest must naturally follow the
+direction of the coast, and must range down the land to the southward,
+and sweep with an impetuous and irregular blast round Cape Horn, and
+the southermost part of Terra del Fuego. Without placing too
+much reliance on these speculations, we may assume, I believe, as
+incontestable facts, that both the rapidity of the currents, and the
+violence of the western gales, are less sensible in lat. 61 deg. or 62 deg. S.
+than nearer the coasts of Terra del Fuego.
+
+Though satisfied, both from our own experience and the relations of
+other navigators, of the importance of the precept here insisted on,
+of proceeding to lat. 61 deg. or 62 deg. S. before any endeavours are made to
+stand to the westwards, yet I would also advise all ships hereafter
+not to trust so far to this management as to neglect another most
+essential maxim: Which is, to make this passage in the height of the
+_antarctic summer_, or, in other words, in the months of December and
+January, which correspond exactly to the months of June and July in
+our northern or arctic hemisphere: and the more distant the time
+of passing may be from this season, so much the more disastrous the
+passage may reasonably be expected to prove. Indeed, if the mere
+violence of the western winds be considered, the time of our passage,
+which was about the antarctic autumnal equinox, was perhaps the most
+favourable period of the whole year. But then it must be considered
+that there are, independent of the winds, many other inconveniences to
+be apprehended in the depth of winter, which are almost insuperable.
+For, at that season, the severity of the cold, and the shortness of
+the days, would render it impracticable to run so far to the southward
+as is here recommended. The same reasons would also greatly augment
+the danger and alarm of sailing, at that season, in the neighbourhood
+of an unknown shore, dreadful in its appearance, even in the midst of
+summer, and would render a winter navigation on this coast, beyond all
+others, most dismaying and terrible. As I would, therefore, advise all
+ships to make their passage, if possible, in December and January,
+so I would warn them never to attempt doubling Cape Horn, from the
+eastward, after the month of March, which is equivalent to our August.
+As to the remaining consideration, in regard to the most proper place
+for cruizers to refit at, on their first arrival in the South Seas,
+there is scarcely any choice, the island of Juan Fernandez being the
+only place that can be prudently recommended for that purpose. For,
+although there are many ports on the western side of Patagonia,
+between the Straits of Magellan, one of which I shall particularly
+notice in the sequel, in which ships may ride in great safety, and may
+also recruit their wood and water, and procure some few refreshments,
+yet that coast is in itself so extremely dangerous, owing to its
+numerous rocks and breakers, and to the violence of the western winds,
+which blow upon it continually, that it is by no means advisable
+to fall in with that coast, at least till the roads, channels, and
+anchorages in each part of it have been accurately surveyed, and both
+the perils and shelters with which it abounds are more distinctly
+known.
+
+Having thus given the best directions in my power, for the success of
+our cruizers that may be hereafter bound to the South Seas, it might
+be expected that I should now resume the narrative of our voyage. Yet
+as, both in the preceding and subsequent parts of this work, I have
+thought it my duty not only to recite all such facts, and to inculcate
+such maxims, as had even the least appearance of proving beneficial to
+future navigators, and also to recommend such measures to the public
+as seemed adapted to promote the same laudable purpose, I cannot
+desist from the present subject without beseeching those persons to
+whom the conduct of our naval affairs is confided, to endeavour
+to remove the many perplexities and embarrassments with which the
+navigation to the South Sea is at present encumbered. An effort of
+this kind could not fail of proving highly honourable to themselves,
+and extremely beneficial to their country; for it is sufficiently
+evident, that whatever improvements navigation shall receive, either
+by the invention of methods by which its practice may be rendered less
+hazardous, or by the more accurate delineation of the coasts, roads,
+and harbours already known, or by the discovery of new countries and
+nations, or of new species and sources of commerce, the advantages
+thence arising must ultimately redound to the emolument of Great
+Britain. Since, as our fleets are at present superior to those of the
+whole world united, it must be a matchless degree of supineness or
+meanness of spirit, if we permit any of the advantages deriveable from
+new discoveries, or from a more extended navigation, to be ravished
+from us.
+
+Since it appears, from what has been already said, that all our future
+expeditions to the South Seas must run a considerable risk of proving
+abortive, while we remain under the necessity of touching at Brazil
+in our passage thither, the discovery of some place more to the
+southward, where ships might refresh, and supply themselves with the
+necessary sea stock for their passage round Cape Horn, would relieve
+us from this embarrassment, and would surely be a matter worthy of
+the attention of the public. Neither does this seem difficult to be
+effected, as we already have an imperfect knowledge of two places,
+which might perhaps prove, on examination, extremely convenient for
+this purpose. One of these is Pepy's Island, in the latitude of 47 deg.
+S. and laid down by Dr Bailey about eighty leagues to the eastward
+of Cape Blanco, on the coast of Patagonia.[1] The other is Falkland's
+Islands, in lat. 51 deg. 30' S.[2] nearly south of Pepy's Island.
+
+[Footnote 1: Isla Grande, supposed to be the Pepy's Island discovered
+by Cowley, is in lat. 46 deg. 34' S. and is placed by Mr Dalrymple in
+long. 46 deg. 40' W. while the illustrious navigator Cook makes its long.
+35 deg. 40' W. a difference of longitude of no less than eleven degrees.]
+
+[Footnote 2: The centre of Falkland's Islands is in 51 deg. 45' S.
+Janson's Islands, the most north-westerly of the group, or the
+Sebaldines, is in 51 deg.; and Beauchene's Isle, the most southerly, in
+53 deg. S.--E.]
+
+The first of these was discovered by Captain Cowley in 1683, during
+his voyage round the world, and is represented by that navigator as a
+commodious place for ships to wood and water at, being provided with a
+good and capacious harbour, where a thousand sail of ships might ride
+at anchor in great safety, being also the resort of vast numbers of
+fowls; and as its shores consist of either rocks or sands, it seems
+to promise great plenty of fish. Falkland's Islands have been seen by
+many navigators, both French and English. It is laid down by Frezier,
+in his chart of the extremity of South America, under the name of
+the New Islands. Woods Rogers, who ran along the N.E. coasts of these
+islands in 1708, says they extend about two degrees in length,[3] and
+appeared with gentle descents from hill to hill, seeming to be good
+ground, interspersed with woods, and not destitute of harbours.
+
+[Footnote 3: The west extremity of this group is in long. 62 deg. W. and
+the east extremity in 56 deg. 43' W. so that their extent is 5 deg. 12' in
+difference of longitude.--E.]
+
+Either of these places, being islands at a considerable distance from
+the continent, may be supposed, from their latitude, to be situated
+in a sufficiently temperate climate. They are both, it is true, too
+little known at present to be recommended as the most eligible
+places of refreshment for ships bound to the South Seas: But, if the
+admiralty should think proper to order them to be surveyed, which
+might be done at a very small expence, by a vessel fitted out on
+purpose; and if, on examination, either one or both should appear
+proper for serving the end in view, it is scarcely possible to
+conceive how exceedingly important so convenient a station might
+prove, so far to the southward, and so near Cape Horn. The Duke and
+Duchess of Bristol, under Woods Rogers, were only thirty-five days
+from losing sight of Falkland's Islands to their arrival at Juan
+Fernandez, in the South Sea; and, as the return back is much
+facilitated by the western winds, a voyage might doubtless be made
+from Falkland's Islands to Juan Fernandez and back again in little
+more than two months. Even in time of peace, this station might be of
+great consequence to the nation; and in time of war, would render us
+masters of those seas.
+
+As all discoveries of this kind, though extremely honourable to
+those who direct and promote them, may yet be carried on at an
+inconsiderable expence, since small vessels are much the most proper
+to be employed in this service, it were greatly to be wished that
+the whole coasts of Patagonia, Terra del Fuego, and Staten-Land, were
+carefully surveyed, and the numerous channels, roads, harbours, and
+islands, in which they abound, accurately examined, described, and
+represented. This might open to us vast facilities for passing into
+the South Seas, such as hitherto we have no knowledge of, and would
+render the whole of that southern navigation greatly more secure than
+it is at present: Particularly as exact draughts of the western coast
+of Patagonia, from the Straits of Magellan to the Spanish settlements,
+might furnish us with better and more convenient ports for
+refreshment, and better situated, both for the purposes of war and
+commerce, than Juan Fernandez, as being above a fornight's sail nearer
+to Falkland's Islands.
+
+The discovery of this coast was formerly thought of so much
+importance, by reason of its neighbourhood to the _Araucos_ and other
+Indians of Chili, who are generally at war, or at least on ill
+terms, with the Spaniards, that, in the reign of Charles II. Sir John
+Narborough was purposely fitted out to survey the Straits of Magellan,
+the neighbouring coast of Patagonia, and the Spanish ports on that
+frontier, with directions, if possible, to procure some intercourse
+with the Chilese Indians, and to establish a commerce and lasting
+correspondence with them. His majesty's views, on this occasion, were
+not solely directed to the advantage he might hope to receive from an
+alliance with these savages, in restraining and intimidating the king
+of Spain, but he even conceived, independent of these considerations,
+that an immediate traffic with these Indians might prove highly
+advantageous to the nation; for it is well known that Chili, at its
+first discovery by the Spaniards, abounded in vast quantities of
+gold, much beyond what it has ever produced since it came into their
+possession. Hence it has been generally believed, that the richest
+mines are carefully concealed by the Indians, as well knowing that
+their discovery would excite in the Spaniards a greater thirst for
+conquest and tyranny, and would render their own independence more
+precarious. But, in regard to their commerce with the English, could
+that be established, these reasons would no longer influence them;
+since it would be in our power to supply them with arms and ammunition
+of all kinds, together with many other conveniences, which their
+intercourse with the Spaniards has taught them to relish. They would
+then, in all probability, open their mines, and gladly embrace a
+traffic of such mutual advantage to both nations: For their gold,
+instead of proving an incitement to enslave them, would then procure
+them weapons with which to assert their liberty, to chastise their
+tyranny, and to secure themselves for ever from falling under the
+Spanish yoke; while, with our assistance, and under our protection,
+they might become a considerable people, and might secure to us that
+wealth, which was formerly most mischievously lavished by the house of
+Austria, and lately by the house of Bourbon, in pursuit of universal
+monarchy.
+
+It is true, that Sir John Narborough did not succeed in opening this
+commerce, which promised, in appearance, so many advantages to
+the nation: But his disappointment was merely accidental; and his
+transactions on that coast, besides the many advantages he furnished
+to geography and navigation, are rather an encouragement for future
+trials of this kind, than any objection against them. His principal
+misfortune was in losing a small bark that accompanied him, and having
+some of his people trepanned at Baldivia. It even appeared, by the
+fears and precautions of the Spaniards, that they were fully convinced
+of the practicability of the scheme he was sent to execute, and were
+extremely alarmed with apprehensions for its consequences. It is
+said that Charles II. was so far prepossessed with the belief of the
+advantages that might redound to the public from this expedition, and
+was so eager to be informed of the event, on receiving intelligence of
+Sir John Narborough passing through the Downs on his return, that he
+had not patience to wait till his arrival at court, but went himself
+in his barge to meet him at Gravesend.
+
+The two most famous charts hitherto published, [i.e. in 1745,] of
+the southern parts of South America, are those of Dr Halley, in his
+General Chart of the Magnetic Variation, and of Frezier, in his Voyage
+to the South Seas. Besides these, there is a chart of the Straits of
+Magellan and some parts of the adjacent coast, by Sir John Narborough,
+which is doubtless infinitely more exact in that part than Frezier's,
+and even in some parts superior to Halley's, particularly in regard to
+the longitudes of different places in these straits. We were in some
+measure capable of correcting, by our own observations, the coast from
+Cape Blanco to Terra del Fuego, and thence to the Straits of Le
+Maire, as we ranged along that coast, generally in sight of land. The
+position of the land to the northward of the Straits of Magellan, on
+the western side of Patagonia, is doubtless laid down very imperfectly
+in our charts; and yet I believe it to be much nearer the truth than
+any hitherto published; as it was drawn from the information of some
+of the crew of the Wager, which was shipwrecked on that coast; and
+as it pretty nearly agrees with what I have seen in some Spanish
+manuscripts. The channel, called Whale Sound, dividing Terra del
+Fuego, towards the western extremity of the Straits of Magellan, was
+represented by Frezier; but Sir Francis Drake, who first discovered
+Cape Horn, and the south-west parts of Terra del Fuego, observed that
+the whole coast was indented by a great number of inlets, all of which
+he conceived to communicate with the Straits of Magellan: And I do
+not doubt, when this country shall be thoroughly examined, that this
+conjecture will be verified, and that Terra del Fuego will be found to
+consist of several islands.
+
+I must not omit warning all future navigators against relying on the
+longitude of the Straits of Le Maire, or of any part of that coast,
+as laid down by Frezier; the whole being from eight to ten degrees
+too far to the eastward, if any faith can be given to the concurrent
+evidences of a great number of journals, verified, in some
+particulars, by astronomical observations. For instance, Sir John
+Narborough places Cape Virgin Mary in long. 65 deg. 42' W. from the
+Lizard, or about 71 deg. 20' from London. The ships of our squadron,
+taking their departure from St Catharines, where the longitude was
+rectified by an observation of an eclipse of the moon, found Cape
+Virgin Mary to be from 70 deg. 15' to 72 deg. 30' W. from London, according to
+their different reckonings; and, as there were no circumstances in
+our run that could Tender it considerably erroneous, it cannot be
+estimated in less than 71 deg. W. from London;[4] whereas Frezier makes
+it only 66 deg. W. from Paris, which is little more than 63 deg. from London.
+Again, our squadron found the difference of longitude between Cape
+Virgin Mary and the Straits of Le Maire to be not more than 2 deg. 30',
+while Frezier makes the difference nearly 4 deg.,[5] by which he enlarged
+the coast, from the Straits of Magellan to the Straits of Le Maire, to
+near double its real extent.[6]
+
+[Footnote 4: Only 67 deg. 40' W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 5: The Straits of Le Maire are in long. 65 deg. 30' W. so that
+the difference is 2 deg. 10'.]
+
+[Footnote 6: Some farther critical observations on the geographical
+positions, as laid down by Frezier, Sir John Narborough, and Dr
+Halley, are here omitted, as tending to no use or information; these
+things having been since ascertained with much more accuracy.--E.]
+
+
+
+SECTION X.
+
+_Course from Cape Noir to the Island of Juan Fernandez._
+
+After the mortifying disappointment of falling in with the coast of
+Terra del Fuego, at Cape Noir, when we reckoned ourselves ten degrees
+to the westward of it, as formerly mentioned to have happened on the
+14th of April, we stood away to the S.W. till the 22d of that month,
+when we were in upwards of 60 deg. S. and, by our reckoning, 6 deg. westwards
+of Cape Noir. In this run, we had a series of as favourable weather
+as could well be expected in that part of the world, even in a
+better season of the year; so that this interval, setting aside our
+disquietudes on various accounts, was by far the most eligible of any
+we had enjoyed since passing the Straits of Le Maire. This moderate
+weather continued, with little variation, till the evening of the
+24th, when the wind began to blow fresh, and soon increased to a
+prodigious storm. About midnight, the weather being very thick, we
+lost sight of the other ships of the squadron, which had hitherto
+kept us company, notwithstanding the violence of the preceding
+storms. Neither was this our sole misfortune, for next morning, while
+endeavouring to hand the top-sails, the clew-lines and bunt-lines
+broke, and the sheets being half flown, every seam in the top-sails
+was soon split from top to bottom. The main top-sail shook so
+violently in the wind, that it carried away the top lanthorn, and
+even endangered the head of the mast. At length, however, some of the
+boldest of our men ventured upon the yard, and cut the sail away close
+to the reefs, with the utmost hazard of their lives. At the same time,
+the fore top-sail beat about the yard with so much fury, that it was
+soon blown to pieces. The main-sail also blew loose, which obliged
+us to lower down the yard to secure the sail; and the fore-yard also
+being lowered, we lay-to under a mizen. In this storm, besides the
+loss of our top-sails, we had much of our rigging broken, and lost a
+main studding-sail boom out of the chains.
+
+The weather became more moderate on the 25th at noon, which enabled us
+to sway up our yards, and to repair our shattered rigging in the
+best manner we could; but still we had no sight of the rest of our
+squadron, neither did any of them rejoin us till after our arrival
+at Juan Fernandez; nor, as we afterwards learnt, did any two of them
+continue in company together. This total, and almost instantaneous
+separation was the more wonderful, as we had hitherto kept together
+for seven weeks, through all the reiterated tempests of this turbulent
+climate. It must be owned, indeed, that we had hence room to expect
+we might make our passage in a shorter time than if we had continued
+together, because we could now make the best of our way, without being
+retarded by the misfortunes of the other ships; but then we had the
+melancholy reflection, that we were thereby deprived of the assistance
+of others, and our safety depended solely on our single ship; so that,
+if a plank started, or any other important accident occurred, we must
+all irrecoverably perish. Or, should we happen to be driven on shore,
+we had the uncomfortable prospect of ending our days on some desolate
+coast, without any reasonable hope of ever getting off again; whereas,
+with another ship in company, all these calamities are much less
+formidable, as in every kind of danger there would always be some
+probability that one ship at least might escape, and be capable of
+preserving or relieving the crew of the other.
+
+During the remainder of April, we had generally hard gales, though
+every day, since the 22d, edging to the northward. On the last day
+of the month, however, we flattered ourselves with the expectation of
+soon terminating our sufferings, as we then found ourselves in lat.
+52 deg. 13' S. which, being to the northward of the Straits of Magellan,
+we were now assured that we had completed our passage, and were
+arrived on the confines of the South Sea: And, as this ocean is
+denominated the _Pacific_, from the equability of the seasons said to
+prevail there, and the facility and security with which navigation is
+there carried on, we doubted not that we should be speedily cheered
+with the moderate gales, the smooth water, and the temperate air, for
+which that portion of the globe is so renowned. Under the influence of
+these pleasing circumstances, we hoped to experience some compensation
+for the complicated sufferings, which had so constantly beset us for
+the last eight weeks. Yet here we were again miserably disappointed;
+for, in the succeeding month of May, our sufferings rose even to a
+much higher pitch than they had ever yet done, whether we consider the
+violence of the storms, the shattering of our sails and rigging, or
+the diminution and weakening of our crew by deaths and sickness, and
+the even threatening prospect of our utter destruction. All this will
+be sufficiently evident, from the following circumstantial recital of
+our diversified misfortunes.
+
+Soon after we had passed the Straits of Le Maire, the scurvy began
+to make its appearance among us, and our long continuance at sea, the
+fatigue we underwent, and the various disappointments we met with, had
+occasioned its spreading to such a degree, that there were but few on
+board, by the latter end of April, that were not afflicted with it in
+some degree; and in that month no less than forty-three died of it in
+the Centurion. Although we thought the distemper had then risen to
+an extraordinary height, and were willing to hope that its malignity
+might abate as we advanced to the northward, we yet found, on the
+contrary, that we lost near double that number in the month of May;
+and, as we did not get to land till the middle of June, the mortality
+went on increasing, and so prodigiously did the disease extend, that,
+after the loss of above 200 men, we could not muster at the last above
+six foremast-men in a watch that were capable of duty.
+
+This disease, so frequent in long voyages, and so particularly
+destructive to us, is surely the most singular and unaccountable of
+any that affects the human body. Its symptoms are innumerable and
+inconstant, and its progress and effects singularly irregular, for
+scarcely have any two persons complaints exactly resembling each
+other; and where there have been, some conformity in the symptoms,
+the order of their appearance has been totally different. Though
+it frequently puts on the form of many other diseases, and is not
+therefore to be described by any exclusive and infallible criterions,
+yet there are some symptoms which are more general than the rest, and
+of more frequent and constant occurrence, and which therefore deserve
+a more particular enumeration. These common appearances are large
+discoloured spots dispersed over the whole surface of the body,
+swelled legs, putrid gums, and, above all, an extraordinary
+lassitude of the whole body, especially after any exercise, however
+inconsiderable and this lassitude at last degenerates into a proneness
+to swoon, and even to die, on the least exertion of strength, or even
+on the least motion. This disease is usually attended, also, by a
+strange dejection of spirits, with shiverings, tremblings, and
+a disposition to be seized with the most dreadful terrors on the
+slightest accident. Indeed it was most remarkable, in all our
+reiterated experience of this malady, that whatever discouraged our
+people, or at any time damped their hopes, never failed to add new
+vigour to the distemper, for such usually killed those who were in the
+last stages of the disease, and confined those to their hammocks who
+were before capable of some kind of duty, so that it seemed as if
+alacrity of mind and sanguine hopes were no small preservatives from
+its fatal malignity.
+
+But it is not easy to complete the long roll of the various
+concomitants of this disease; for it often produced putrid fevers,
+pleurisies, jaundice, and violent rheumatic pains, and sometimes
+occasioned obstinate costiveness, which was generally attended with a
+difficulty of breathing, and this was esteemed the most deadly of
+all the scorbutic symptoms. At other times the whole body, but
+more especially the legs, were subject to ulcers of the worst kind,
+attended by rotten bones, and such a luxuriance of fungous flesh as
+yielded to no remedy. The most extraordinary circumstance, and which
+would scarcely be credible upon any single evidence, was, that the
+scars of wounds that had been healed for many years, were forced open
+again by this virulent distemper. There was a remarkable instance
+of this in the case of one of the invalid soldiers on board the
+Centurion, who had been wounded above fifty years before, at the
+battle of the Boyne; and though he was cured soon after, and had
+continued well for a great many years, yet, on being attacked by the
+scurvy, his wounds broke out afresh in the progress of the disease,
+and appeared as if they had never been healed. What is even still more
+extraordinary, the callus of a broken bone, which had been completely
+formed for a long time, was dissolved in the course of this disease,
+and the fracture seemed as if it had never been consolidated. The
+effects, indeed, of this disease, were in almost every instance
+wonderful, for many of our people, though confined to their hammocks,
+appeared to have no inconsiderable share of health, as they eat and
+drank heartily, were even cheerful, talking with much seeming vigour
+with a loud strong voice; and yet, on being in the least moved, though
+only from one part of the ship to another, and that too in their
+hammocks, they would instantly expire. Others, who have confided
+in their seeming strength, and have resolved to get out of their
+hammocks, have died before they could well reach the decks; neither
+was it uncommon for such as were able to walk the deck, and even to
+perform some kind of duty, to drop down dead in an instant, on any
+attempt to act with their utmost effort; many of our people having
+perished in this manner in the course of our voyage.
+
+We struggled under this terrible disease during the greatest part of
+the time of our beating round Cape Horn; and though it did not then
+rage with its utmost violence, yet we buried no less than forty-three
+men in the month of April, as formerly observed. We were still,
+however, in hopes of seeing a period to this cruel malady, and to all
+the other evils which had so constantly pursued us, when we should
+have secured our passage round the Cape: but we found, to our
+heavy misfortune, that the (so-called) Pacific Ocean was to us less
+hospitable even than the turbulent neighbourhood of Terra del Fuego
+and Cape Horn. On the 8th of May, being arrived of the island of
+Socoro, on the western coast of Patagonia, [in lat. 44 deg. 50' S. long.
+73 deg. 45' W.] the first rendezvous appointed for the squadron, and where
+we hoped to have met with some of our consorts, we cruized for them in
+that station several days. We were here not only disappointed in
+our expectations of meeting our friends, which induced the gloomy
+apprehensions of their having all perished, but were also perpetually
+alarmed with the fear of being driven on this coast, which appeared
+too craggy and irregular to give us the least prospect, in such a
+case, that any of us could possibly escape immediate destruction. The
+land, indeed, had a most tremendous aspect. The most distant part, far
+within the country, being the mountains of the Andes, or Cordelieras,
+was extremely high, and covered with snow; while the coast seemed
+quite rocky and barren, and the edge of the water skirted with
+precipices. In some places, indeed, we observed several deep bays
+running; into the land; but their entrances were generally blocked
+up by numbers of small islands; and though it was not improbable but
+there might be convenient shelter in some of the bays, and proper
+channels leading to them, yet, as we were utterly ignorant of the
+coast, had we been driven ashore by the westerly winds, which blew
+almost incessantly we could not well have avoided the loss both of the
+ship and of our lives.
+
+This continued peril which lasted above a fortnight, was greatly
+aggraved by the difficulties we found in working the ship; as the
+scurvy, by this time, had destroyed so great a number of our hands,
+and had in some degree infected almost the whole crew. Neither did
+we, as we hoped, find the winds less violent as we advanced to the
+northward; for we had often prodigious squalls of wind, which split
+our sails, greatly damaged our rigging, and endangered our masts.
+Indeed, during much the greatest part of the time we were upon this
+coast, the wind blew so hard that, in any other situation where we
+had sufficient sea-room, we should certainly have lain-to; but, in the
+present exigency, we were necessitated to carry both our courses and
+top-sails, in order to keep clear of this lee-shore. In one of these
+squalls, which was attended by several violent claps of thunder, a
+sudden flash of fire darted along our decks, which dividing, exploded
+with a report like that of several pistols, and wounded many of our
+men and officers, marking them in different parts of their bodies.
+This flame was attended by a strong, sulphurous stench, and was
+doubtless of the same nature with the larger and more violent flashes
+of lightning which then filled the air.
+
+It were endless to recite minutely the various disasters, fatigues,
+and terrors, which we encountered on this coast, all of which went
+on increasing till the 22d of May; at which time the fury of all the
+storms we had hitherto encountered seemed to have combined for our
+destruction. In this hurricane almost all our sails were split, and a
+great part of our standing rigging broken. About eight in the evening,
+an overgrown mountainous wave took us upon our star-board quarter, and
+gave us so prodigious a shock that several of our shrouds broke with
+the jerk, to the great danger of our masts giving way, and our ballast
+and stores were so strangely shifted, that the ship heeled afterwards
+two streaks to port. This was a most tremendous blow, and we were
+thrown into the utmost consternation, having the dismal apprehension
+of instantly foundering. Though the wind abated in a few hours, yet,
+having no sails left in a condition to bend to the yards, the ship
+laboured exceedingly in a hollow sea, rolling gunwale too, for want
+of sail to keep her steady, so that we every moment expected that our
+masts, now very slenderly supported, would have come by the board. We
+exerted ourselves, however, the best we could, to stirrup our shrouds,
+to reeve new lanyards, and to mend our sails: But, while these
+necessary operations were going on, we ran great risk of being driven
+ashore on the island of Chiloe, which was not far from us. In the
+midst of our peril, the wind happily shifted to the southward, and we
+steered off the land with the main-sail only; at which time the master
+and I undertook the management of the helm, while every one else,
+capable of acting, were busied in securing the masts, and bending the
+sails as fast as they could be repaired. This was the last effort of
+that stormy climate; for, in a day or two after, we got clear of the
+land, and found the weather more moderate than we had yet experienced
+since passing the Straits of Le Maire.
+
+Having now cruized in vain, for the other ships of the squadron,
+during more than a fortnight, it was resolved to take advantage of
+the present favourable weather, and the offing we had made from this
+terrible coast, and to make the best of our way for the island of
+Juan Fernandez. It is true that our next rendezvous was appointed off
+Baldivia; yet, as we had seen none of our companions at this first
+rendezvous, it was not to be supposed that any of them would be found
+at the second, and indeed we had the greatest reason to suspect that
+all but ourselves had perished. Besides, we were now reduced to so low
+a condition, that, instead of pretending to attack the settlements
+of the enemy, our utmost hopes could only suggest the possibility
+of saving the ship, and some part of the remaining crew, by a speedy
+arrival at Juan Fernandez; as that was the only place, in this part of
+the world, where there was any probability of recovering our sick or
+refitting our ship, and consequently our getting thither was the only
+chance we had left to avoid perishing at sea.
+
+Our deplorable situation allowing no room for deliberation, we stood
+for the island of Juan Fernandez; and, to save time, which was now
+extremely precious, as our men were dying by four, five, and six of
+a day, and likewise to avoid being again engaged on a lee shore, we
+resolved to endeavour to hit that island upon a meridian. On the 28th
+of May, being nearly in the parallel on which it is laid down, we had
+great expectations of seeing that island; but, not finding it in the
+position laid down in our charts, we began to fear that we had got too
+far to the westward; and therefore, though the commodore was strongly
+persuaded that he saw it in the morning of the 28th, yet his officers
+believing it to have been only a cloud, to which opinion the
+haziness of the weather gave some countenance, it was resolved, on
+consultation, to stand to the eastward in the parallel of the island;
+as, by this course, we should certainly fall in with the island, if we
+were already to the westward of it, or should at least make the main
+land of Chili, whence we could take a new departure, so as not to miss
+it a second time in running to the westward.
+
+Accordingly, on the 30th May, we had sight of the continent of Chili,
+distant about twelve or thirteen leagues, the land appearing very low
+and uneven, and quite white; what we saw being doubtless a part of the
+Cordilleras, which are always covered with snow. Though by this
+view of the land we ascertained our position, yet it gave us great
+uneasiness to find that we had so needlessly altered our course, when
+we had been, in all probability, just upon the point of making
+the island: For the mortality among us was now increased to a most
+frightful degree, and those who remained were utterly dispirited by
+this new disappointment, and the prospect of their longer continuance
+at sea. Our water, too, began to grow scarce, and a general dejection
+prevailed among us, which added much to the virulence of the disease,
+and destroyed numbers of our best men. To all these calamities, there
+was added this vexatious circumstance, after getting sight of the main
+land, that we were so much delayed by calms and contrary winds, while
+tacking westwards in quest of the island, that it took us nine days
+to regain the westing, which we ran down in two when standing to the
+eastward.
+
+In this desponding condition, and under these disheartening
+circumstances, we stood to the westward, with a crazy ship, a great
+scarcity of fresh water, and a crew so universally diseased, that
+there were not above ten foremast men in a watch capable of doing
+duty, and even some of these lame and unable to go aloft. At last, at
+day-break on the 9th of June, we discovered the long-wished-for island
+of Juan Fernandez. Owing to our suspecting ourselves to be to the
+westward of this island on the 28th of May, and in consequence of the
+delay occasioned by our standing in for the main and returning, we
+lost between seventy and eighty of our men, whom we had doubtless
+saved, if we had made the island on that day, which we could not
+have failed to do, if we had kept on our course only for a few hours
+longer.
+
+
+
+SECTION XI.
+
+_Arrival of the Centurion at Juan Fernandez, with a Description of
+that Island._
+
+As mentioned in the preceding section, we descried the island of
+Juan Fernandez at day-break on the 9th June, bearing N. by E. 1/2
+E. distant eleven or twelve leagues. Though on this first view it
+appeared very mountainous, ragged, and irregular, yet it was land,
+and the land we sought for, and was therefore a most agreeable sight:
+because here only we could hope to put a period to those terrible
+calamities with which we had so long struggled, which had already
+swept away above half of our crew, and which, had we continued only
+a few days longer at sea, must inevitably have completed our
+destruction. For we were now reduced to so helpless a condition, that,
+out of two hundred and odd men who remained alive, taking all our
+watches together, we could not muster hands now to work the ship on
+any emergency, even including the officers, the servants, and the
+boys.
+
+The wind being northerly when we first made the island, we kept plying
+to windward all that day, and the ensuing night, in order to get in
+with the land; and, while wearing ship in the middle watch, we had a
+melancholy instance of the almost incredible debility of our people;
+for the lieutenant could muster no more than two quarter-masters and
+six foremast men capable of working; so that, without the assistance
+of the officers, servants, and boys, it might have been impossible for
+us to have reached the island after we got sight of it; and even
+with their assistance, we were two hours in trimming the sails; to so
+wretched a condition were we reduced, in a sixty-gun ship, which had
+passed the Straits of Le Maire only three months before with between
+four and five hundred men, most of them then in health and vigour.
+
+In the afternoon of the 10th, we got under the lee of the island, and
+kept ranging along its coast at the distance of about two miles, in
+order to look out for the proper anchorage, which was described to
+be in a bay on its north side. Being now so near the shore, we could
+perceive that the broken craggy precipices, which had appeared so
+very unpromising from a distance, were far from barren, being in most
+places covered by woods; and that there were every where the finest
+vallies interspersed between them, cloathed with a most beautiful
+verdure, and watered by numerous streams and cascades, every valley of
+any extent being provided with its own rill; and we afterwards found
+that the water was constantly clear, and not inferior to any we had
+ever met with. The aspect of a country thus beautifully diversified
+would at any time have been extremely delightful; but, in our
+distressed situation, languishing as we were for the land and its
+vegetable productions, an indication constantly attending every stage
+of the sea-scurvy, it is scarcely credible with what eagerness and
+transport we viewed the shore, and with how much impatience we longed
+for the greens and other refreshments which were in sight. We were
+particularly anxious for the water, as we had been confined to a very
+sparing allowance for a considerable time, and had then only five
+tons remaining on board. Those only who have endured a long series of
+thirst, and who can readily recall the desire and agitation which
+even the ideas alone of springs and brooks have at that time raised
+in their minds, can judge of the emotion with which we viewed a large
+cascade of the purest water, which poured into the sea at a short
+distance from the ship, from a rock near a hundred feet high.
+Even those of the sick who were not in the very last stage of the
+distemper, though they had been long confined to their hammocks,
+exerted their small remains of strength, and crawled up to the deck,
+to feast their eyes with this reviving prospect.
+
+We thus coasted along the island, fully occupied in contemplating this
+enchanting landscape, which still improved as we proceeded. But at
+last the night closed upon us, before we could determine upon the
+proper bay in which to anchor. It was resolved, therefore, to keep in
+soundings all night, having then from sixty-four to seventy fathoms,
+and to send our boat next morning to discover the road. The current
+shifted, however, in the night, and set us so near the land that we
+were obliged to let go our best bower in fifty-six fathoms, not half
+a mile from shore. At four next morning, the cutter was dispatched,
+under our third-lieutenant, to find out the bay of which we were in
+search. The boat returned at noon, full of seals and grass; for though
+the island abounded with better vegetables, the boat's crew, during
+their short stay, had not met any other, and thought even this would
+be acceptable as a dainty, and indeed it was all speedily and eagerly
+devoured. The seals, too, were considered as fresh provision, but were
+not much admired, though they afterwards came into more repute; but we
+had taken a prodigious quantity of excellent fish during the absence
+of the boat, which rendered the seals less valuable at this time.
+
+The cutter had discovered the bay in which we intended to anchor,
+which was to the westward of our present station; and next morning,
+the weather proving favourable, we endeavoured to weigh, in order to
+proceed thither, mustering all the strength we could, obliging even
+the sick, who could hardly stand on their legs, to assist; yet the
+capstan was so weakly manned, that it was near four hours before we
+could heave the cable right up and down: after which, with our utmost
+efforts, though with many surges and some additional purchases to
+increase our strength, we found it utterly impossible to start the
+anchor out of the ground. At noon, however, as a fresh gale blew
+towards the bay, we were induced to set the sails, which fortunately
+tripped the anchor. We then steered along shore, till we came abreast
+of the point forming the eastern part of the bay: But on opening the
+bay, the wind, which had hitherto favoured us, chanced to shift, and
+blew from the bay in squalls; yet, by means of the head-way we had
+got, we luffed close in, till the anchor, which still hung at our bow,
+brought us up in fifty-six fathoms.
+
+Soon after we had thus got to anchor in the mouth of the bay, we
+discovered a sail making toward us, which we had no doubt was one
+of our squadron, and which, on a nearer approach, we found to be the
+Tryal sloop; whereupon, we immediately dispatched some of our hands
+to her assistance, by whose means she was brought to anchor between
+us and the land. We soon learnt that she had by no means been exempted
+from the same calamities by which we had been so severely afflicted;
+for Captain Saunders, her commander, waiting on the commodore,
+informed him, that he had buried thirty-four men out of his small
+complement, and those that remained alive were so universally
+afflicted with the scurvy, that only himself, his lieutenant, and
+three of the men were able to stand by the sails.
+
+It was on the 12th about noon that the Tryal came to anchor within us,
+when we carried our hawsers on board her, in order to warp our ship
+nearer the shore; but the wind coming off the land in violent gusts,
+prevented our mooring in the intended birth. Indeed our principal
+attention was now devoted to a business of rather more importance, as
+we were now anxiously employed in sending on shore materials to
+erect tents for the reception of the sick, who died rapidly on board.
+Doubtless the distemper was considerably augmented by the stench and
+filthiness in which they lay; for the number of the sick was so great,
+and so few of them could be spared from the necessary duty of the
+sails to look after them, that it was impossible to avoid a great
+relaxation in regard to cleanliness, so that the ship was extremely
+loathsome between decks. Notwithstanding our desire to free the sick
+from their present hateful situation, and their own extreme eagerness
+to get on shore, we had not hands enough to prepare the tents
+for their reception sooner than the 16th; but on that and the two
+following days we got them all on shore, to the number of an hundred
+and sixty-seven persons, besides twelve or fourteen who died in the
+boats on being exposed to the fresh air. The greatest part of our sick
+were so infirm, that we had to carry them out of the ship in their
+hammocks, and to convey them afterwards in the same manner from
+the water-side to the tents, over a stony beach. This was a work of
+considerable fatigue to the few who remained healthy; and therefore
+our commodore, according to his accustomed humanity, not only
+assisted in this himself, but obliged all his officers to give their
+helping-hand.
+
+The extreme weakness of our sick may be collected, in some measure,
+from the numbers that died after they got on shore. It has generally
+been found that the land, and the refreshments it affords, very
+soon produce recovery in most stages of the scurvy, and we flattered
+ourselves that those who had not perished on their first exposure to
+the open air, but had lived to be placed in the tents, would have
+been speedily restored to health and vigour. Yet to our great
+mortification, it was nearly twenty days after they landed, before
+the mortality entirely ceased, and for the first ten or twelve days we
+rarely buried less than six each day, and many of those who survived
+recovered by very slow and insensible degrees. Those, indeed, who had
+sufficient strength, at their first getting on shore, to creep out
+of the tents, and to crawl about, were soon relieved, and speedily
+recovered their health and strength: But, in the rest, the disease
+seemed to have attained a degree of inveteracy altogether without
+example.
+
+Before proceeding to any farther detail of our proceeding, I think it
+necessary to give a distinct account of this island of Juan Fernandez,
+including its situation, productions, and conveniences. We were well
+enabled to be minutely instructed in these particulars, during our
+three months stay at this island; and its advantages will merit a
+circumstantial description, as it is the only commodious place in
+these seas, where British cruizers can refresh and recover their men,
+after passing round Caps Horn, and where they may remain for some
+time without alarming the Spanish coast. Commodore Anson, indeed, was
+particularly industrious, in directing the roads and coasts of this
+island to be surveyed, and other observations of all kinds to be made;
+knowing, from his own experience, of how great benefit these materials
+might prove hereafter, to any British cruizers in these seas. For the
+uncertainty we were in of its position, and our standing in for
+the main on the 28th May, as formerly related, cost us the lives of
+between seventy and eighty of our men; from which fatal loss we might
+have been saved, had we possessed such an account of its situation as
+we could have fully depended upon.
+
+The island of Juan Fernandez is in lat. 33 deg. 40'S. [long. 77 deg. 30'
+W.] one hundred marine leagues or five degrees of longitude from
+the continent of Chili. It is said to have received its name from a
+Spaniard who formerly procured a grant of it, and resided there for
+some time with the view of forming a settlement, but abandoned it
+afterwards.[1] On approaching its northern side from the east, it
+appears a large congeries of lofty peaked mountains, the shore in
+most places being composed of high precipitous rocks, presenting three
+several bays, East bay, Cumberland bay, and West bay, the second only
+being of any extent, and is by far the best, in which we moored. The
+island itself is of an irregular triangular figure; one side of which,
+facing the N.E. contains these three bays. Its greatest extent is
+between four and five leagues, and its greatest breadth something
+less than two. The only safe anchorage is on the N.E. side, where, as
+already mentioned, are the three bays; the middlemost of which, named
+Cumberland bay, is the widest and deepest, and in all respects by much
+the best; for the other two, named East and West bays, are scarcely
+more than good landing places, where boats may conveniently put casks
+on shore for water. Cumberland bay is well secured to the southward,
+and is only exposed from the N. by W. to the E. by S. and as the
+northerly winds seldom blow in that climate, and never with any
+violence, the danger from that quarter is not worth attending to. This
+last-mentioned bay is by far the most commodious road in the island,
+and it is advisable for all ships to anchor on its western side,
+within little more than two cables length of the beach, where they may
+ride in forty fathoms, and be sheltered, in a great measure, from a
+large heavy sea which comes rolling in, whenever the wind blows from
+eastern or western quarters. It is expedient, however, to _cackle_ or
+arm the cables with an iron chain, or with good rounding, for five or
+six fathoms from the anchor, to secure them from being rubbed by the
+foulness of the ground.[2]
+
+[Footnote 1: In the original, the description given of this island
+refers to large engraved views, which could not be inserted in our
+octavo form, so as to be of the smallest utility.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 2: Cumberland bay is called _La Baya_ by the Spaniards, who
+seem now to have established a fort here. East bay is by them called
+_Puerta de Juan Fernandez_. There is yet a fourth bay, or small
+indentation of the coast, with a landing place and stream of water,
+named _Puerta Ingles_, or Sugar-loaf bay, between West bay and the
+north point of the island.--E.]
+
+I have already observed that a northerly wind, to which alone this bay
+is directly exposed, very seldom blew while we were there; and, as it
+was then winter, such may be supposed less frequent in other seasons.
+In those few instances when the wind was in that quarter, it did not
+blow with any great force, which might be owing to the high lands,
+south of the bay, giving a check to its force; for we had reason to
+believe that it blew with considerable force a few leagues out at
+sea, since it sometimes drove a prodigious sea before it into the bay,
+during which we rode forecastle in. Though the northerly winds are
+never to be apprehended in this bay, yet the southerly winds, which
+generally prevail here, frequently blow off the land in violent gusts
+and squalls, which seldom lasted, however, longer than two or
+three minutes. This seems to be owing to the high hills, in the
+neighbourhood of the bay, obstructing the southern gale; as the wind,
+collected by this means, at last forces its passage through the narrow
+vallies; which, like so many funnels, both facilitate its escape,
+and increase its violence. These frequent and sudden guests make it
+difficult for a ship to work in with the wind offshore, or to keep a
+clear hawse, when anchored.
+
+The northern part of this island is composed of high craggy hills,
+many of them inaccessible, though generally covered with trees. The
+soil of this part is loose and shallow, so that very large trees in
+the hills frequently perish for want of root, and are then easily
+overturned. This circumstance occasioned the death of one of our men,
+who, being on the hills in search of goats, caught hold of a tree
+upon a declivity to assist him in his ascent, and this giving way, he
+rolled down the hill; and though, in his fall, he fastened on another
+tree of considerable bulk, this also gave way, and he fell among the
+rocks, where he was dashed to pieces. Mr Brett, also, having rested
+his back against a tree, near as large about as himself, which grew on
+a slope, it gave way with him, and he fell to a considerable distance,
+though without receiving any injury. Our prisoners, whom, as will
+appear in the sequel, we afterwards brought to this island, remarked
+that the appearance of the hills in some parts resembled that of the
+mountains in Chili where gold is found; so that it is not impossible
+that mines might be discovered here. In some places we observed
+several hills of a peculiar red earth, exceeding vermillion in colour,
+which perhaps, on examination, might prove useful for many purposes.
+The southern, or rather S.W. part of the island, is widely different
+from the rest; being destitute of trees, dry, stony, and very flat and
+low, compared, with the hills on the northern part. This part of
+the island is never frequented by ships, being surrounded by a steep
+shore, and having little or no fresh water; besides which, it is
+exposed to the southerly winds, which generally blow here the whole
+year round, and with great violence in the antarctic winter.
+
+The trees, of which the woods in the northern part of the island are
+composed, are mostly aromatic, and of many different sorts. There are
+none of them of a size to yield any considerable timber, except those
+we called myrtle-trees, which are the largest on the island, and
+supplied us with all the timber we used; yet even these would not
+work to a greater length than forty feet. The top of the myrtle is
+circular, and as uniform and regular as if clipped round by art. It
+bears an excrescence like moss on its bark, having the taste and smell
+of garlic, and was used instead of it by our people. We found here
+the pimento, and the cabbage-tree, but in no great quantity. Besides
+these, there were a great number of plants of various kinds, which
+we were not botanists enough to describe or attend to. We found
+here, however, almost all the vegetables that are usually esteemed
+peculiarly adapted to the cure of those scorbutic disorders which are
+contracted by salt diet and long voyages, as we had great quantities
+of water-cresses and purslain, with excellent wild sorrel, and a vast
+profusion of turnips and Sicilian radishes, which two last, having a
+strong resemblance to each other, were confounded by our people under
+the general name of turnips. We usually preferred the tops of the
+turnips to the roots, which we generally found stringy, though some
+of them were free from that exception, and remarkably good.
+These vegetables, with the fish and flesh we got here, to be more
+particularly described hereafter, were not only exceedingly grateful
+to our palates after the long course of salt diet to which we had
+been confined, but were likewise of the most salutary consequence in
+recovering and envigorating our sick, and of no mean service to us who
+were well, by destroying the lurking seeds of the scurvy, from which
+none of us, perhaps, were totally exempted, and in refreshing and
+restoring us to our wonted strength and activity. To the vegetables
+already mentioned, of which we made perpetual use, I must add that we
+found many acres of ground covered with oats and clover. There were
+some few cabbage-trees, as before observed, but these grew generally
+on precipices and in dangerous situations, and as it was necessary to
+cut down a large tree to procure a single cabbage, we were rarely able
+to indulge in this dainty.
+
+The excellence of the climate, and the looseness of the soil, renders
+this island extremely proper for all kinds of cultivation: for, if
+the ground be any where accidentally turned up, it becomes immediately
+overgrown with turnips and Sicilian radishes. Our commodore,
+therefore, having with him garden-seeds of all kinds, and stones of
+different kinds of fruits, sowed here lettuces, carrots, and other
+garden-plants, and set in the woods great numbers of plumb, apricot,
+and peach-stones, for the better accommodation of our countrymen who
+might hereafter touch at this island. These last have since thriven
+most remarkably, as has been since learnt by Mr Anson. For some
+Spanish gentlemen having been taken on their passage from Lima to
+Spain, and brought to England, having procured leave to wait upon him,
+to thank him for his generosity and humanity to his prisoners, some
+of whom were their relations, and foiling into discourse about his
+transactions in the South Seas, asked if he had not planted a great
+number of fruit-stones on the island of Juan Fernandez, as their late
+navigators had discovered there a great many peach and apricot trees,
+which, being fruits not observed there before, they supposed to have
+been produced from kernels set by him.
+
+This may suffice in general as to the soil and vegetable productions
+of Juan Fernandez; but the face of the country, at least of its
+northern part, is so extremely singular as to require a particular
+consideration. I have already noticed the wild and inhospitable
+appearance of it to us at first sight, and the gradual improvement
+of its uncouth landscape as we drew nearer, till we were at last
+captivated by the numerous beauties we discovered on landing. During
+our residence, we found the interior to fall no ways short of the
+sanguine prepossessions we at first entertained. For the woods, which
+covered most of even the steepest hills, were free from all bushes and
+underwood, affording an easy passage through every part of them; and
+the irregularities of the hills and precipices, in the northern part
+of the island, traced out, by their various combinations, a great
+number of romantic vallies, most of which were pervaded by streams
+of the purest water, which tumbled in beautiful cascades from rock to
+rock, as the bottoms of the vallies happened to be broken into sudden
+descents by the course of the neighbouring hills. Some particular
+spots occurred in these vallies where the shade and fragrance of the
+contiguous woods, the loftiness of the overhanging rocks, and the
+transparency and frequent cascades of the streams, presented scenes of
+such elegance and dignity, as would with difficulty be rivalled in
+any other part of the globe. Here, perhaps, the simple productions of
+unassisted nature may be said to excel all the fictitious descriptions
+of the most fertile imagination.
+
+The piece of ground which the commodore chose in which to pitch his
+tent, was a small lawn on a gentle ascent, about half a mile from
+the sea. In front of the tent was a large avenue, opening through the
+woods to the shore, and sloping with a gentle descent to the water,
+having a prospect of the bay and the ships at anchor. This lawn was
+screened behind by a wood of tall myrtle trees, sweeping round in a
+crescent form, like a theatre, the slope on which the wood grew rising
+more rapidly than the open lawn, yet not so much but that the hills
+and precipices of the interior towered considerably above the tops of
+the trees, and added greatly to the beauty and grandeur of the view.
+There were also two streams of water, pure as the finest crystal,
+which ran to the right and left of the tent within the distance of an
+hundred yards, and which, shaded by trees skirting either side of the
+lawn, completed the symmetry of the whole.
+
+It only now remains that we should mention the animals and provisions
+which we met with at this island. Former writers have related that
+this island abounded with vast numbers of goats, and their accounts
+are not to be questioned, as this place was the usual resort of the
+buccaneers and privateers who used formerly to frequent these seas.
+There are two instances, one of a _musquito_ Indian, and the other of
+Alexander Selkirk, a Scotsman, who were left here by their respective
+ships, and lived alone upon the island for some years, and were
+consequently no strangers to its productions. Selkirk, who was here
+the last, after a stay of between four and five years, was taken off
+by the Duke and Duchess privateers, of Bristol, as may be seen at
+large in the journal of their voyage. His manner of life, during his
+solitude, was very remarkable in most particulars; but he relates one
+circumstance, which was so strongly verified by our own experience,
+that it seems worthy of being mentioned. He tells us, as he often
+caught more goats than he had occasion for, that he sometimes marked
+their ears, and let them go. This was about thirty-two years before
+our arrival, yet it happened that the first goat killed by our people
+after they landed, had its ears slit; whence we concluded that it had
+doubtless been formerly caught by Selkirk. This was indeed an animal
+of a most venerable aspect, dignified with a most majestic beard, and
+bearing many other marks of great age. During our residence, we
+met with others marked in the same manner, all the males being
+distinguished by exuberant beards, with every other characteristic of
+extreme age.
+
+The great number of goats, which former writers describe as having
+been found on this island, were very much diminished before our
+arrival. For the Spaniards, aware of the advantages derived by the
+buccaneers and pirates from the goats-flesh they here procured,
+have endeavoured to extirpate the breed, on purpose to deprive their
+enemies of this resource. For this purpose, they put on shore
+great numbers of large dogs, which have greatly increased, and have
+destroyed all the goats in the accessible pans of the country; so
+that there were only, when we were there, a few among the crags and
+precipices, where the dogs cannot follow them. These remaining goats
+are divided into separate flocks, of twenty or thirty each, which
+inhabit distinct fastnesses, and never mingle with each other, so
+that we found it exceedingly difficult to kill them; yet we were so
+desirous of their flesh, which we all agreed resembled venison, that
+we came, I believe, to the knowledge of all their haunts and flocks;
+and, by comparing their numbers, it was conceived that they scarcely
+exceeded two hundred on the whole island. I once witnessed a
+remarkable contest between a flock of goats and a number of dogs.
+Going in our boat into the East bay, we perceived some dogs running
+very eagerly upon the foot, and willing to see what game they were in
+pursuit of, we rested some time on our oars to observe them, when
+at last they took to a hill, on the ridge of which we saw a flock
+of goats drawn up for their reception. There was a very narrow path
+leading to the ridge, skirted on each side by precipices; and here
+the master he-goat of the flock posted himself fronting the enemy, the
+rest of the goats being all behind him, on more open ground. As the
+ridge was inaccessible by any other path, except where this champion
+stood, though the dogs ran up the hill with great alacrity, yet, when
+they came within twenty yards, not daring to encounter him, as he
+would infallibly have driven them down the precipice, they gave over
+the chase, and lay down at that distance, panting at a great rate.
+
+These dogs, which are masters of all the accessible parts of the
+island, are of various kinds, some of them very large, and have
+multiplied to a prodigious degree. They sometimes came down to our
+habitations under night, and stole our provisions; and once or twice
+they set upon single persons, but, assistance being at hand, they were
+driven away, without doing any mischief. As it is now rare for any
+goats to fall in their way, we conceived that they lived principally
+on young seals; and some of our people, having the curiosity to kill
+dogs sometimes, and dress them, seemed to agree that they had a fishy
+taste.
+
+Goats-flesh being scarce, as we were rarely able to kill above one in
+a day, and our people growing tired of fish, which abounded at this
+place, they at last condescended to eat seals, which they came by
+degrees to relish, calling it _lamb_. As the seal, of which numbers
+haunt this island, has been often mentioned by former writers, it
+seems unnecessary to say any thing particular respecting that animal
+in this place. There is, however, another amphibious animal to be met
+with here, called the _sea-lion_, having some resemblance to a seal,
+but much larger, which I conceive may merit a particular description.
+This too we eat, under the denomination of beef. When arrived at full
+size, the sea-lion is between twelve and twenty feet in length, and
+from eight to fifteen feet in circumference. They are extremely fat,
+so that, below the skin, which is an inch thick, there is at least
+a foot deep of fat, before coming to the lean or bones, and we
+experienced more than once, that the fat of some of the largest
+afforded us a butt of oil. They are also very full of blood; for, if
+deeply wounded in a dozen places, there will instantly gush out as
+many fountains of blood, spouting to a considerable distance. To try
+what quantity of blood one of them might contain, we shot one first,
+and then cut its throat, measuring the blood which flowed, and found
+that we got at least two hogsheads, besides a considerable quantity
+remaining in the vessels of the animal.
+
+Their skins are covered with short hair of a light dun colour; but
+their tails and fins, which serve them for feet on shore, are almost
+black. These fore-feet, or fins, are divided at the ends like fingers,
+the web which joins them not reaching to the extremities, and each
+of these fingers is furnished with a nail. They have a distant
+resemblance to an overgrown seal; though in some particulars there
+are manifest differences between these two animals, besides the vast
+disproportion in size. The males especially are remarkably dissimilar,
+having a large snout, or trunk, hanging down five or six inches beyond
+the extremity of the upper jaw, which renders the countenances of the
+male and female easily distinguishable from each other. One of the
+largest of these males, who was master of a large flock of females,
+and drove off all the other males, got from our sailors the name of
+the bashaw, from that circumstance. These animals divide their time
+between the sea and the land, continuing at sea all summer, and coming
+on shore at the setting in of winter, during all which season they
+reside on the land. In this interval they engender and bring forth
+their young, having generally two at a birth, which are suckled by the
+dams, the young at first being as large as a full-grown seal.
+
+During the time they continue on shore, they feed on the grass and
+other plants which grow near the banks of fresh-water streams; and,
+when not employed in feeding, sleep in herds in the most miry places
+they can find. As they seem of a very lethargic disposition, and are
+not easily awakened, each herd was observed to place some of their
+males at a distance, in the nature of centinels, who never failed to
+alarm them when any one attempted to molest, or even to approach them.
+The noise they make is very loud, and of different kinds; sometimes
+grunting like hogs, and at other times snorting like horses in full
+vigour. Especially the males have often furious battles, principally
+about their females; and we were one day extremely surprised at seeing
+two animals, which at first appeared quite different from any we
+had before observed; but on a nearer approach, they proved to be two
+sea-lions, which had been goring each other with their teeth, and
+were all covered over with blood. The bashaw, formerly mentioned, who
+generally lay surrounded by a seraglio of females, to which no other
+male dared approach, had not acquired that envied pre-eminence without
+many bloody contests, of which the marks remained in numerous scars in
+every part of his body.
+
+We killed many of these animals for food, particularly for their
+hearts and tongues, which we esteemed exceeding good eating, and
+preferable even to those of bullocks. In general there was no
+difficulty in killing them, as they are incapable either of flight or
+resistance, their motion being the most unwieldy that can be imagined,
+and all the time they are in motion, their blubber is agitated
+in large waves under the skin. One day, a sailor being carelessly
+employed in skinning a young sea-lion, the female from whom he had
+taken it, came upon him unperceived, and getting his head into her
+mouth, scored his skull in notches with her teeth in many places,
+and wounded him so desperately that he died in a few days, though all
+possible care was taken of him.[3]
+
+[Footnote 3: There are two species of the seal tribe which have
+received the name of sea-lion; the phoca leonina, or bottle-nosed
+seal, which is that of the text; and the phoca jubata, or maned seal,
+which is the sea-lion of some other writers. These two species are
+remarkably distinguishable from each other, especially the moles: The
+bottle-nosed seal having a trunk, snout, or long projection, on the
+upper jaw; while the male of the maned seal has his neck covered
+with a long flowing mane. The latter is also much larger, the males
+sometimes reaching twenty-five feet in length, and weighing fifteen
+or sixteen hundred weight. Their colour is reddish, and their voice
+resembles the bellowing of bulls. The former are chiefly found in the
+Southern Pacific; while the latter frequent the northern parts of the
+same ocean.--E.]
+
+These are the principal animals which we found upon the island of
+Juan Fernandez. We saw very few birds, and these were chiefly hawks,
+blackbirds, owls, and hummingbirds. We saw not the _paradela_,[4]
+which burrows in the ground, and which former writers mention to be
+found here; but as we often met with their holes, we supposed that the
+wild dogs had destroyed them, as they have almost done the cats; for
+these were very numerous when Selkirk was here, though we did not see
+above two or three during our whole stay. The rats, however, still
+keep their ground, and continue here in great numbers, and were very
+troublesome to us, by infesting our tents in the night.
+
+[Footnote 4: This name is inexplicable; but, from the context, appears
+to refer to some animal of the cavia genus, resembling the rabbit:
+Besides, a small islet, a short way S.W. of Juan Fernandez, is named
+Isla de Conejos, or Rabbit Island.--E.]
+
+That which furnished us with the most delicious of our repasts, while
+at this island, still remains to be described. This was the fish, with
+which the whole bay was most abundantly stored, and in the greatest
+variety. We found here cod of prodigious size; and by the report of
+some of our crew, who had been formerly employed in the Newfoundland
+fishery, not less plentiful than on the banks of that island. We had
+also cavallies, gropers, large breams, maids, silver-fish, congers of
+a particular kind; and above all, a black fish which we esteemed most,
+called by some the chimney-sweeper, in shape somewhat resembling a
+carp. The beach, indeed, was every where so full of rocks and loose
+stones, that there was no possibility of hauling the seyne; but with
+hooks and lines we caught what numbers we pleased, so that a boat with
+only two or three lines, would return loaded with fish in two or
+three hours. The only interruption we ever met with arose from great
+quantities of dog-fish and large sharks, which sometimes attended our
+boats, and prevented our sport.
+
+Besides these fish, we found one other delicacy in greater perfection,
+both as to size, quantity, and flavour, than is to be met with perhaps
+in any other part of the world. This was sea craw-fish, usually
+weighing eight or nine pounds each, of a most excellent taste, and
+in such vast numbers near the edge of the water, that our boat-hooks
+often struck into them in putting the boats to and from the shore.
+
+These are the most material articles relating to the accommodations,
+soil, vegetables, animals, and other productions of the island of Juan
+Fernandez, by which it will distinctly appear how admirably this place
+was adapted for recovering us from the deplorable situation to which
+we had been reduced by our tedious and unfortunate navigation round
+Cape Horn. Having thus given the reader some idea of the situation and
+circumstances of this island, in which we resided for six months, I
+shall now proceed to relate all that occurred to us in that period,
+resuming the narrative from the 18th of June, on which day the Tryal
+sloop, having been driven out by a squall three days before, came
+again to her moorings, on which day also we finished sending our sick
+on shore, being about eight days after our first anchoring at this
+island.
+
+
+
+SECTION XII.
+
+_Separate Arrivals of the Gloucester, and Anna Pink, at Juan
+Fernandez, and Transactions at that Island during the Interval._
+
+The arrival of the Tryal sloop at this island, so soon after we
+came there ourselves in the Centurion, gave us great hopes of being
+speedily joined by the rest of the squadron; and we were accordingly
+for some days continually looking out, in expectation of their coming
+in sight. After near a fortnight had elapsed without any of them
+appearing, we began to despair of ever meeting them again, knowing, if
+our ship had continued so much longer at sea, that we should every
+man of us have perished, and the vessel, occupied only by dead bodies,
+must have been left to the caprice of the winds and waves; and this we
+had great reason to fear was the fate of our consorts, as every hour
+added to the probability of these desponding suggestions. But, on the
+21st of June, some of our people, from an eminence on shore, discerned
+a ship to leeward, with her courses even with the horizon. They could,
+at the same time, observe that she had no sails aboard, except her
+courses and main-topsail. This circumstance made them conclude that it
+must be one of our squadron, which had probably suffered as severely
+in her sails and rigging as we had done. They were prevented, however,
+from forming more definite conjectures concerning her; for, after
+viewing her a short time, the weather grew thick and hazy, and she was
+no longer to be seen.
+
+On this report, and no ship appearing for some days, we were all under
+the greatest concern, suspecting that her people must be under the
+utmost distress for want of water, and so weakened and diminished in
+numbers by sickness, as to be unable to ply up to windward, so that we
+dreaded, after having been in sight of the island, that her whole crew
+might yet perish at sea. On the 21st, at noon, we again discerned a
+ship at sea in the N.E. quarter, which we conceived to be the same
+that had been seen before, and our conjecture proved true. About one
+o'clock she had come so near that we could plainly distinguish her
+to be the Gloucester; and as we had no doubt of her being in great
+distress, the commodore immediately ordered out his boat to our
+assistance, laden with fresh water, fish, and vegetables, which was
+a most comfortable relief to them; for our apprehensions of their
+calamitous situation were only too well founded, as there never
+was, perhaps, a crew in greater distress. They had already thrown
+two-thirds of their complement overboard; and of those who remained
+alive, scarcely any were capable of doing duty, except the officers
+and their servants. They had been a considerable time at the small
+allowance of a pint of water to each man in twenty-four hours, and yet
+had so very little left, that they must soon have died of thirst, had
+it not been for the supply sent them by our commodore.
+
+The Gloucester plied up within three miles of the bay, but could not
+reach the road, both wind and currents being contrary. She continued,
+however, in the offing next day; and as she had no chance of being
+able to come to anchor, the commodore repeated his assistance, sending
+off the Tryal's boat, manned with the people of the Centurion, with a
+farther supply of water, and other refreshments. Captain Mitchell of
+the Gloucester was under the necessity of detaining both this boat and
+that sent the preceding day, as he had no longer strength to navigate
+his ship without the aid of both their crews. The Gloucester continued
+near a fortnight in this tantalizing situation, without being able
+to fetch the road, though frequently making the attempt, and even at
+times bidding fair to effect the object in view. On the 9th July,
+we observed her stretching away to the eastward, at a considerable
+distance, which we supposed was with a design to get to the southward
+of the island; but, as she did not again appear for near a week, we
+were prodigiously alarmed for her safety, knowing that she must be
+again in extreme distress for want of water. After great impatience
+about her, we again discovered her on the 16th, endeavouring to come
+round the eastern point of the island, but the wind still blowing
+directly from the bay, prevented her from getting nearer than within
+four miles of the land.
+
+Captain Mitchell now made signals of distress, and our long-boat, was
+sent off with a good supply of water, and plenty of fish and other
+refreshments: And, as the long-boat could not be wanted, the cockswain
+had positive orders from the commodore to return immediately. But next
+day proving stormy, and the boat not appearing, we much feared she was
+lost, which would have been an irretrievable misfortune to us all. We
+were relieved, however, from this anxiety on the third day after, by
+the joyful appearance of her sails on the water, on which the cutter
+was sent to her assistance, and towed her alongside in a few hours,
+when we found that the long-boat had taken in six of the Gloucester's
+sick men, to bring them on shore, two of whom had died in the boat.
+We now learnt that the Gloucester was in a most dreadful condition,
+having scarcely a man in health on board, except the few she had
+received from us. Numbers of their sick were dying daily, and it
+appeared, had it not been for the last supply sent by our long-boat,
+that both the healthy and diseased must all have perished for want
+of water. This calamitous situation was the more terrifying, as it
+appeared to be without remedy; for the Gloucester had already spent a
+month in fruitless endeavours to fetch the bay, and was now no farther
+advanced than when she first made the island. The hopes of her
+people of ever succeeding were now worn out, by the experience of
+its difficulty; and, indeed, her situation became that same day more
+desperate than ever, as we again lost sight of her, after receiving
+our last supply of refreshments, so that we universally despaired of
+her ever coming to anchor.
+
+Thus was this unhappy vessel bandied about, within a few leagues of
+her intended harbour, while the near neighbourhood of that place, and
+of these circumstances which could alone put an end to the calamities
+under which her people laboured, served only to aggravate their
+distress, by torturing them with a view of the relief they were unable
+to reach. She was at length delivered from this dreadful situation at
+a time when we least expected it: For, after having lost sight of her
+for several days, we were joyfully surprised, in the morning of the
+23d July, to see her open the N.W. point of the bay with a flowing
+sail, when we immediately dispatched what boats we had to her
+assistance, and within an hour from our first perceiving her, she
+anchored safe within us in the bay.
+
+We were now more particularly convinced of the importance of the
+assistance and refreshments we had repeatedly sent her, and how
+impossible it must have been for a single man of her crew to
+have survived, had we given less attention to their wants. For,
+notwithstanding the water, vegetables, and fresh provisions with
+which we had supplied them, and the hands we had sent to assist in
+navigating the ship, by which the fatigue of her own people had been
+greatly diminished, their sick relieved, and the mortality abated;
+notwithstanding this provident care of our commodore, they yet buried
+above three-fourths of their crew, and a very small proportion of the
+survivors remained capable of assisting in the duty of the ship. On
+getting to anchor, our first care was to assist them in mooring,
+and the next to get their sick on shore. These were now reduced, by
+numerous deaths, to less than fourscore, of which we expected the
+greatest part to have died; but whether it was that those farthest
+advanced in the cruel distemper had already perished, or that the
+vegetables and fresh provisions we had sent had prepared those who
+remained alive for a more speedy recovery, it so happened, contrary to
+our fears, that their sick, in general, were relieved and restored to
+health in a much shorter time than our own had been when we first came
+to the island, and very few of them died on shore.
+
+Having thus given an account of the principal events relating to the
+arrival of the Gloucester, in one continued narration, I shall only
+add, that we were never joined by any other of our ships, except our
+victualler, the Anna pink, which came in about the middle of August,
+and whose history I shall defer for the present, as it is now high
+time, to return to our own transactions, both on board and ashore,
+during the anxious interval of the Gloucester making frequent and
+ineffectual attempts to reach the island.
+
+Our next employment, after sending our sick on shore from the
+Centurion, was cleansing our ship, and filling our water casks. The
+former of these measures was indispensably necessary to our future
+health, as the number of our sick, and the unavoidable negligence
+arising from our deplorable situation at sea, had rendered the decks
+most intolerably loathsome. The filling our water was also a caution
+that appeared essential to our security, as we had reason to apprehend
+that accidents might intervene which would oblige us to quit the
+island at a very short warning, as some appearances we had discovered
+on shore, at our first landing, gave us grounds to believe that there
+were Spanish cruizers in these seas, which had left the island only a
+short time before our arrival, and might possibly return again, either
+for a supply of water, or in search of us. For we could not doubt that
+the sole purpose they had at sea was to intercept us, and we knew that
+this island was the likeliest place, in their opinion, to meet with
+us. The circumstances which gave rise to these reflections, in part
+of which we were not mistaken, as will appear more at large hereafter,
+were our finding on shore several pieces of earthen jars, made use
+of in these seas for holding water and other liquids, which appeared
+fresh broken. We saw also many heaps of casks, near which were fish
+bones and pieces of fish, besides whole fish scattered here and there,
+which plainly appeared to have been only a short time out of the
+water, as they were but just beginning to decay.
+
+These were infallible indications that there had been a ship or
+ships at this place only a short time before our arrival; and, as all
+Spanish merchant ships are instructed to avoid this island, on account
+of its being the common rendezvous of their enemies, we concluded that
+those which had touched here must have been ships of force; and, as we
+knew not that Pizarro had returned to the Rio Plata, and were ignorant
+what strength might have been fitted out at Calao, we were under
+considerable apprehensions for our safety, being in so wretched and
+enfeebled a condition, as, notwithstanding the rank of our ship, and
+the sixty guns with which she was armed, there was hardly a privateer
+sent to sea that was not an overmatch for us. Our fears on this head,
+however, fortunately proved imaginary, and we were not exposed to the
+disgrace which must unavoidably have befallen us, had we been reduced
+to the necessity, by the appearance of an enemy, of fighting our
+sixty-gun ship with no more than thirty hands.
+
+While employed in cleaning our ship, and filling our water casks, we
+set up a large copper oven on shore, near the sick tents, in which
+fresh bread was baked every day for the ship's company, as, being
+extremely desirous of recovering our sick as soon as possible, we
+believed that new bread, added to their green vegetables and fresh
+fish, might prove powerfully conducive to their relief. Indeed, we
+had all imaginable inducements to endeavour at augmenting our present
+strength, as every little accident, which to a full crew would have
+been insignificant, was extremely alarming in our present helpless
+condition. Of this we had a troublesome instance, on the 30th of June,
+at five in the morning, when we were alarmed by a violent gust of
+wind directly off shore, which instantly parted our small bower cable,
+about ten fathoms from the ring of the anchor. The ship at once swung
+off to the best bower, which happily stood the violence of the jerk,
+and brought us up, with two cables on end, in eighty fathoms.
+
+At this time we had not above a dozen seamen in the ship, and were
+apprehensive, if the squall continued, that we might be driven out to
+sea in this helpless condition. We sent, therefore, the boat on shore,
+to bring off all who were capable of acting; and the wind soon abating
+of its fury, gave us an opportunity of receiving the boat back with a
+reinforcement. With this additional strength, we went immediately to
+work, to have in what remained of the broken cable, which we suspected
+to have received some injury from the ground before it parted, and
+accordingly we found that seven fathoms and a half had been chaffed
+and rendered unserviceable. In the afternoon, we bent this cable to
+the spare anchor, and got it over the bows. Next morning, the 1st of
+July, being favoured by the wind in gentle breezes, we warped the
+ship in again, and let go the anchor in forty-one fathoms; the eastern
+point of the bay now bearing from us E. 1/2 S. the western point N.W.
+by W. and the bottom of the bay S.S.W. as before. We were, however,
+much concerned for the loss of our anchor, and swept frequently to
+endeavour its recovery; but the buoy having sunk at the instant when
+the cable parted, we could never find it again.
+
+As the month of July advanced, and some of our sick men were tolerably
+recovered, the strongest of them were set to cut down trees, and
+to split them into billets, while others, too weak for this work,
+undertook to carry the billets, by one at a time, to the water
+side. This they performed, some by the help of crutches, and others
+supported by a single stick. We next set up the forge on shore, and
+employed our smith, who was just capable of working, to repair our
+chain-plates, and other broken and decayed iron-work. We began also
+the repair of our rigging; but as we had not enough of junk to make
+spun-yarn, we deferred the general overhaul in the daily hope of the
+Gloucester arriving, which was known to have a great quantity of junk
+on board. That we might dispatch our refitting as fast as possible,
+we set up a large tent on the beach for the sail-makers, who were
+employed diligently in repairing our old sails and making new ones.
+These occupations, with cleansing and watering our ship, now pretty
+well completed, together with attending our sick, and the frequent
+relief sent to the Gloucester, were the principal transactions of our
+infirm crew, till the arrival of the Gloucester at anchor in the bay.
+
+Captain Mitchell immediately waited on the commodore, whom he
+informed, that, in his last absence, he had been forced as far as
+the small island of _Masefuero_, nearly in the same latitude with the
+larger island of Juan Fernandez, and thirty leagues farther W. That he
+had endeavoured to send his boat on shore there for water, of which he
+observed several streams; but the wind blew so strong upon the shore,
+and caused so great a surf, that it was impossible to get to land.
+The attempt, however, was not entirely useless, as the boat came
+back loaded with fish. This island had been represented, by former
+navigators, as a mere barren rock, but Captain Mitchell assured the
+commodore, that it was almost every where covered with trees and
+verdure, and was nearly four miles in length. He believed also,
+that some small bay might possibly be found in it which might afford
+sufficient shelter to any ship desirous of procuring refreshments.
+
+As four ships of our squadron were still missing, this description of
+Masefuero gave rise to a conjecture, that some of them might possibly
+have fallen in with that island, mistaking it for the true place of
+rendezvous. This suspicion was the more reasonable, that we had no
+draught of either island that could be relied upon; wherefore the
+commodore resolved to send the Tryal sloop thither, as soon as she
+could be made ready for sea, in order to examine all its creeks and
+bays, that it might be ascertained whether any of our missing ships
+were there or not. For this purpose, some of our best hands were sent
+on board the Tryal next morning, to overhaul and fix her rigging,
+and our long-boat was employed to complete her water; what stores and
+necessaries she wanted, being immediately supplied from the Centurion
+and Gloucester. It was the 4th of August before the Tryal was in
+readiness to sail. When, having weighed, it soon after fell calm,
+and the tide set her very near the eastern shore of the bay. Captain
+Saunders immediately hung out lights, and fired several guns, to
+apprise us of his danger; upon which all the boats were sent to his
+aid, which towed the sloop into the bay, where she anchored till next
+morning, and then proceeded with a fair breeze.
+
+We were now busily employed in examining and repairing our rigging,
+and that of the Gloucester; but, in stripping our fore-mast, we were
+alarmed by discovering that it was sprung just above the partners
+of the upper deck. This spring was two inches in depth and twelve in
+circumference; but the carpenters, on inspection, gave it as their
+opinion, that fishing it with two leaves of an anchor-stock would
+render it as secure as ever. Besides this defect in our mast, we had
+other difficulties in refitting, from the want of cordage and canvass;
+for, although we had taken to sea much greater quantities of both than
+had ever been done before, yet the continued bad weather we had met
+with, after passing the straits of Le Maire, had occasioned so great
+a consumption of these stores, that we were reduced to great straits;
+as, after working up all our junk and old shrouds, to make twice laid
+cordage, we were at last reduced to the necessity to unlay a cable, to
+work up into running rigging; and, with all the canvass and remnants
+of old sails, that could be mustered, we could only make up one
+complete suit.
+
+Towards the middle of August, our men being indifferently recovered,
+they were permitted to quit the sick tents, and to build separate huts
+for themselves; as it was imagined, by living apart, that they might
+be much cleanlier, and consequently likely to recover their strength
+the sooner: But strict orders were given, at the same time, that they
+were instantly to repair to the water-side, on the firing of a
+gun from the ship. Their employment now on shore, was either the
+procurement of refreshments, the cutting of wood, or the procurement
+of oil from the blubber of sea-lions. This oil served for several
+purposes; as burning in lamps, mixing with pitch to pay the sides of
+our ships, or, when worked up with wood-ashes, to supply the place of
+tallow, of which we had none left, to give the ship boat-hose tops.
+Some of the men were also occupied in salting cod; for, having two
+Newfoundland fishermen in the Centurion, the commodore set them to
+work in providing a considerable quantity of salted cod for sea-store;
+though very little of it was used, as it was afterwards thought to be
+equally productive of scurvy with any other kind of salted provisions.
+
+It has been before mentioned, that we set up a copper oven on shore,
+to bake bread for the sick: But it happened that the greatest part of
+the flour, for the use of the squadron, was on board the Anna pink. It
+should also have been mentioned, that the Tryal sloop informed us, on
+her arrival, that she had fallen in with our victualler, on the 9th
+of May, not far from the coast of Chili, and had kept company with her
+for four days, when they were parted in a gale of wind. This gave us
+some room to hope that she was safe, and might rejoin us: But, all
+June and July having passed without any news of her, we gave her over
+for lost; and the commodore, at the end of July, ordered all the ships
+on a short allowance of bread. Neither was it in bread alone that we
+feared a deficiency: For, since our arrival at Juan Fernandez, it was
+discovered that our former purser had neglected to take on board large
+quantities of several kinds of provisions, which the commodore had
+expressly ordered him to receive; so that the supposed loss of our
+victualler was, on all accounts, a most mortifying circumstance.
+
+About noon on Thursday the 16th of August, after we had given over all
+hopes of the Anna pink, a sail was espied in the northern quarter, on
+which a gun was immediately fired from the Centurion, to call off the
+people from the shore, who readily obeyed the summons, by repairing
+to the beach, where the boats waited to fetch them on board. Being
+now prepared for the reception of the ship in view, whether friend or
+enemy, we had various speculations respecting her, many supposing at
+first, that it was the Tryal sloop returning from the examination of
+Masefuero. As she drew nearer, this opinion was confuted, by observing
+that she had three masts, when other conjectures were eagerly
+canvassed; some judging the vessel in sight to be the Severn and
+others the Pearl, while several affirmed that she did not belong to
+our squadron. But, about three in the afternoon, all speculations were
+ended by the unanimous persuasion that it was our victualler, the
+Anna pink. And, though, this ship had fallen in with the island to the
+northward like the Gloucester, she yet had the good fortune to come
+to anchor in the bay at five in the afternoon. Her arrival gave us
+all the utmost satisfaction, as the ship's companies were immediately
+restored to their full allowance of bread, and we were now relieved
+from the apprehensions of our provisions falling short before we could
+reach some friendly port,--a calamity, in these seas, of all others
+the most irretrievable. This was the last ship that joined us; and,
+as the dangers she encountered, and the good fortune she afterwards
+experienced, are worthy of a separate narration, I shall refer them,
+together with a short account of the other missing ships, to the
+ensuing section.
+
+
+
+SECTION XIII.
+
+_Short Account of what befell the Anna Pink before she rejoined;
+with an Account of the Loss of the Wager, and the putting back of the
+Severn and Pearl._
+
+On the first recognition of the Anna pink, it seemed quite wonderful
+to us how the crew of a vessel, which had thus come to the rendezvous
+two months after us, should be capable of working their ship in
+the manner they did, and with so little appearance of debility and
+distress. This difficulty, however, was soon solved after she came
+to anchor; for we then found that she had been in harbour since the
+middle of May, near a month before our arrival at Juan Fernandez,
+so that their sufferings, excepting the risk they had run of being
+shipwrecked, were greatly short of what had been undergone by the rest
+of the squadron.
+
+They fell in with the land on the 16th of May, in lat. 45 deg. 15' S.
+being then about four leagues from shore. On the first sight of
+it, they wore ship and stood to the southward; but their fore-sail
+splitting, and the wind being strong at W.S.W. they drove towards the
+shore. The captain, either unable to clear the land, or, as others
+say, resolved to keep the sea no longer, steered now for the coast,
+in order to look out for some shelter among the many islands which
+appeared in sight, and had the good fortune to bring the ship to
+anchor to the eastward of the island of _Inchin_[1]. But, as they did
+not run sufficiently near the east shore of that island, and had not
+hands enough to veer away the cable briskly, they were soon driven to
+the eastwards, deepening their water from twenty-five to thirty-five
+fathoms. Still continuing to drive, they next day, being the 17th May,
+let go their sheet anchor, which brought them up for a short time: but
+on the 18th they drove again, till they came into sixty-five fathoms;
+and, being now within a mile of the land, they expected every moment
+to be forced on shore in a place where the coast was so very high and
+steep, that there was not the smallest prospect of saving the ship and
+cargo. As their boats were very leaky, and there was no appearance of
+a landing place, the whole crew, consisting of sixteen men and boys,
+gave themselves up for lost, believing, if even any of them happened
+to get on shore by some extraordinary chance, that they would be
+almost certainly massacred by the savages; as these people, knowing
+no other Europeans except Spaniards, might be expected to treat all
+strangers with the same cruelty which they have so often, and so
+signally, exercised against their Spanish neighbours.
+
+[Footnote 1: The island of Inchin and the bay in which the Anna pink
+took shelter is in lat. 46 deg. 30' S. long. 74 deg. 30' in what is called the
+Peninsula de tres Montes, to the N. of the Golfo de Penas.--E.]
+
+Under these terrifying circumstances, the Anna continued to drive
+towards the rocks which formed the shore; and at last, when expecting
+every instant to strike, they perceived a small opening in the land,
+which raised their hopes of safety. Wherefore, immediately cutting
+away their two anchors, they steered for this opening, which they
+found to be a narrow opening between an island and the main, which led
+them into a most excellent harbour; which, for its security against
+all winds and swells, and the consequent smoothness of its water, may
+perhaps vie with any in the known world: And this place being
+scarcely two miles from the spot where they deemed their destruction
+inevitable, the horrors of shipwreck and immediate death, with which
+they had been so long and strongly possessed, vanished almost in
+an instant, giving place to the most joyous ideas of security,
+refreshment, and repose.
+
+In this harbour, discovered almost by miracle, the Anna came to anchor
+in twenty-five fathoms, with only a hawser and small anchor of about
+three hundred weight. Here she continued for near two months, and her
+people, who were many of them ill of the scurvy, were soon restored
+to perfect health by the fresh provisions, which they procured in
+abundance, and the excellent water which they found in plenty on the
+adjacent shore. As this place may prove of the greatest importance to
+future navigators forced upon this coast by the western winds, which
+are almost perpetual in that part of the world, it may be proper to
+give the best account that could be collected of this port, as to
+its situation, conveniences, and productions, before continuing the
+adventures of the Anna pink. To facilitate, also, the knowledge of
+this place, to such as may be desirous hereafter of using it, there
+is annexed a plan both of the harbour and the large bay before it,
+through which the Anna drifted. This plan, perhaps, may not be in
+all respects as accurate as could be wished, being composed from the
+memorandums and rude sketches of the master and surgeon, who were not
+the most able draughtsmen; but, as the principal parts were laid down
+by their estimates of their distances from each other, in which kind
+of computation seamen are commonly very dextrous, the errors are
+probably not very considerable.
+
+The latitude, which certainly is a very material point, was not very
+accurately ascertained, as the Anna had no observation either on the
+day she got there, or within a day of leaving the bay; but is supposed
+to be not very distant from 45 deg. 30' S.[2] But the large extent of
+the bay, at the bottom of which the harbour is situated, renders this
+uncertainty of the less importance. The island lying before this bay,
+called _Inchin_ by the Indians, is supposed to be one of the islands
+named _Chonos_ by the Spanish accounts, and said to spread along all
+this coast,[3] being inhabited by a barbarous people, famous for their
+hatred to the Spaniards, and their cruelty to such of that nation as
+have fallen into their hands. It is even possible that the land in
+which this harbour is situated may be one of these islands, while the
+continent may be considerably to the eastward. This harbour, besides
+its depth of water and complete shelter, has two coves, where ships
+may very conveniently be hove down, as the water is constantly smooth.
+There are also several fine runs of excellent fresh water, which fall
+into the harbour, some so conveniently situated that the casks may
+be filled in the long-boat by means of a hose. The most remarkable of
+these is a stream in the N.E. part of the harbour, being a fresh-water
+river, where the crew of the Anna caught a few mullets of excellent
+flavour, and they were persuaded that it would be found to have plenty
+of fish in the proper season, it being winter when they were there.
+
+[Footnote 2: This has already, on the authority of Arrowsmith, been
+stated at 46 deg. 30' S.]
+
+[Footnote 3: The gulf and archipelago of Chonos, or Guaytecas, one of
+the islands of which is Socora, or Guayteca, is considerably to the
+N. of Inchin, between the peninsula de tres Montes and the island of
+Chiloe, the centre of that archipelago being in lat. 45 deg. S.--E.]
+
+The principal refreshments of green vegetables met with at this port
+were wild cellery, nettle-tops, and the like, which, after so long
+a continuance at sea, were highly acceptable. We got abundance
+of shell-fish, as cockles and muscles of great size and delicious
+flavour, with plenty of geese, shags, and penguins. Though in the
+depth of winter the climate was by no means extremely rigorous,
+neither were the trees or the face of the country destitute of
+verdure; whence it may be concluded, that many other kinds of fresh
+provisions would doubtless be found there in summer. Notwithstanding
+the relations of the Spaniards respecting the violence and barbarity
+of the inhabitants, it does not appear that their numbers are
+sufficient to excite any apprehensions in the crew of a ship of any
+size, or that their dispositions are by any means so mischievous or
+merciless as has been represented. With all these advantages, this
+place is so far from the frontiers of the Spanish settlements, and
+so little known to the Spaniards themselves, that, with proper
+precautions, there is reason to believe a ship might remain here
+a long time undiscovered. It is also capable of being made a very
+defensible port; as, by possessing the island that closes tip the
+port or inner harbour, which island is only accessible in a very few
+places, a small force might easily secure this port against all the
+force which the Spaniards could muster in that part of the world. For
+this island is so steep towards the harbour, having six fathoms close
+to the shore, that the Anna anchored within forty yards of its coast;
+whence it is obvious how difficult it would prove, either to board
+or cut out any vessel protected by a force posted on shore within
+pistol-shot, and where those thus posted could not be themselves
+attacked. All these circumstances seem to render this port worthy of
+a more accurate examination; and it is to be hoped that this rude
+attempt to suggest, may hereafter recommend it to the consideration
+of the public, and the attention of those who are more immediately
+entrusted with the conduct of our naval affairs.
+
+After this account of the place where the Anna lay for two months, it
+may be expected that I should relate the discoveries made by her crew
+upon the adjacent coast, and the principal incidents that occurred
+during their stay here. But, as they were only a few in number, they
+durst not venture to detach any of their people on distant searches,
+being under continual apprehensions of being attacked either by the
+Spaniards or Indians, so that their excursions were generally confined
+to the tract of land surrounding the port, where they were never out
+of view of the ship: Even if they had known from the first how little
+grounds there were for these fears, yet the neighbouring country
+was so overgrown with wood, and so traversed by mountains, that
+it appeared impracticable to penetrate to any distance, so that no
+account of the interior could be expected. They were, however, in a
+condition to disprove the relations given by Spanish writers, who have
+represented this coast as inhabited by a fierce and powerful people,
+as no such inhabitants were to be found, at least in the winter
+season; for, during the whole time of their continuance here, they
+never saw any more than one small Indian family, which came into the
+harbour in a periagua, or canoe, about a month after the arrival of
+the Anna, and consisted only of one Indian man, near forty years of
+age, his wife, and two children, one about three years of age, and
+the other still on the breast. They seemed to have with them all their
+property, consisting of a dog and cat, a fishing net, a hatchet, a
+knife, a cradle, some bark of trees, intended for covering a hut, a
+reel with some worsted, a flint and steel, and a few roots of a yellow
+hue, and very disagreeable taste, which served them for bread.
+
+As soon as these were perceived, the master of the Anna sent his yawl
+and brought them on board; and, lest they might discover him to the
+Spaniards if permitted to go away, he took proper precautions, as he
+conceived, for securing them, but without violence or ill usage, as
+they were permitted to go about the ship where they pleased in the day
+time, but were locked up in the forecastle at night. As they were fed
+in the same manner with the crew, and were often indulged with brandy,
+which they seemed greatly to relish, it did not appear at first that
+they were much dissatisfied with their situation. The master took
+the Indian on shore when he went to shoot, and he seemed always much
+delighted on seeing the game killed. The crew also treated them with
+great humanity; but it was soon apparent, though the woman continued
+easy and cheerful, that the man grew pensive and discontented at his
+confinement. He seemed to have good natural parts, and though utterly
+unable to converse with our people otherwise than by signs, was yet
+very curious and inquisitive, and showed great dexterity in his manner
+of making himself understood. Seeing so few people on board so large
+a ship, he seemed to express his opinion that they had once been more
+numerous, and, by way of representing what he imagined had become of
+their companions, he laid himself on the deck, closing his eyes, and
+stretching himself out motionless, as if to imitate the appearance of
+a dead body.
+
+The strongest proof of his sagacity was the manner of his getting
+away. After having been on board the Anna for eight days, the scuttle
+of the forecastle, where he and his family were locked up every night,
+happened to be left unnailed, and on the following night, which
+was extremely dark and stormy, he contrived to convey his wife and
+children through the scuttle, and then over the ship's side into the
+yawl, and immediately rowed on shore, using the precaution to cut
+away the long-boat and his own periagua, which were towing astern, to
+prevent being pursued. He conducted all this with so much silence
+and secrecy, that, though there was a watch on the quarter-deck with
+loaded arms, he was not discovered by them till the noise of his oars
+in the water gave notice of his escape, after he had put off from the
+ship, when it was too late either to prevent or pursue him. Besides,
+as their boats were all adrift, it was some time before they could
+contrive the means of getting on shore to search for their boats. By
+this effort, besides regaining his liberty, the Indian was in some
+measure revenged on those who had confined him, both by the perplexity
+they were in for the loss of their boats, and by the terror occasioned
+by his departure; for, on the first alarm of the watch, who cried,
+"The Indians," the whole crew were in the utmost confusion, believing
+that the ship had been boarded by a whole fleet of armed canoes.
+
+Had the resolution and sagacity with which this Indian behaved on
+this occasion, been exerted on a more extensive object, it might have
+immortalized the exploit, and given him a rank among the illustrious
+names of antiquity. The people of the Anna, indeed, allowed that it
+was a most gallant enterprise, and were grieved at having thus been
+under the necessity, from attention to their own safety, to abridge
+the liberty of one who had now given so distinguished a proof of
+courage and prudence. As he was supposed still to continue in the
+woods near the port, where he might suffer for want of provisions,
+they easily prevailed on the master to leave a quantity of such food
+as they thought would be most agreeable to him in a place where he
+was likely to find it, and there was reason to believe this was not
+altogether without its use, for, on visiting the place afterwards, the
+provisions were gone, and in a manner that made them conclude they had
+fallen into his hands.
+
+Although many of the crew of the Anna believed that this Indian still
+continued in the neighbourhood, there were some who strongly suspected
+he might have gone off to the island of Chiloe, where they feared
+he would alarm the Spaniards, and would soon return with a force
+sufficient to surprise or overpower the Anna. The master was therefore
+prevailed upon to discontinue firing the evening gun, and there is a
+particular reason for attending to this circumstance, to be explained
+hereafter; for he had hitherto, from an ostentatious imitation of
+the men-of-war, fired a gun every evening at setting the night watch.
+This, as he pretended, was to awe the enemy, if there were any within
+hearing, and to convince them that his ship was always on her
+guard. The crew being now well refreshed, and their wood and water
+sufficiently replenished, he put to sea a few days after the escape
+of the Indian, and had a fortunate passage to the rendezvous at
+Juan Fernandez, where he arrived on the 16th of August, as already
+mentioned.
+
+The remaining ships of the squadron, none of which rejoined the
+commodore, were the Severn, Pearl, and Wager, of the fate of which
+it may be proper to make mention. The Severn and Pearl parted company
+from the commodore off Cape Voir; and, as we afterwards learnt, put
+back to Brazil. The Wager had on board a few field-pieces, and some
+coehorn-mortars, mounted for land service, with several kinds of
+artillery stores and pioneers tools, intended for operations on shore.
+And, as an enterprise had been planned against Baldivia, for the first
+operation of the squadron, Captain Cheap was extremely solicitous
+that these articles might be forthcoming, and determined to use his
+endeavours for that purpose, that no delay or disappointment might
+be imputed to him, not knowing the state the squadron was reduced
+to. While making the best of his way, with these views, to the first
+appointed rendezvous, off Socoro, whence he proposed to proceed
+for Baldivia, the Wager made the land on the 14th of May, about the
+latitude of 47 deg. S. and while Captain Cheap was exerting himself in
+order to get clear of the land, he had the misfortune to fall down the
+after-ladder, by which he dislocated his shoulder, and was rendered
+incapable of acting. This accident, together with the crazy condition
+of the ship, which was little better than a wreck, prevented her from
+getting off to sea, and entangled her more and more with the land;
+insomuch, that at day-break next morning, the 15th May, she struck on
+a sunken rock, and soon afterwards bilged, and grounded between two
+small islands, about musket-shot from the shore.
+
+In this situation the ship continued entire a long time, so that all
+the crew might have got safe on shore. But a general confusion ensued;
+many of them, instead of consulting their safety, or reflecting
+on their calamitous condition, fell to pillaging the ship, arming
+themselves with the first weapons that came to hand, and threatening
+to murder all who should oppose their proceedings. This frenzy was
+greatly heightened by the liquors they found on board, with which they
+made themselves so excessively intoxicated, that some fell down into
+the hold, where they were drowned, as the water flowed into the wreck.
+Having done his utmost, ineffectually, to get the whole crew on shore,
+the captain was at last obliged to leave the mutineers behind, and to
+follow his officers on shore, with such few men as he could prevail
+upon to accompany him; but did not fail to send back the boats, with a
+message to those who remained, entreating them to have some regard to
+their own preservation. All his efforts, however, were for some time
+in vain; but next day, the weather proving stormy, and there being
+great danger of the ship going to pieces, the refractory part of the
+crew began to be afraid of perishing, and were desirous of getting to
+land; and, in their madness, as the boat did not come to fetch them
+off so soon as they wished, they pointed a four-pounder from the
+quarter-deck, against the hut in which the captain resided on shore,
+and fired two shots, which passed just over its roof.
+
+From this specimen of the behaviour of part of the crew, some idea
+may be formed of the disorder and anarchy which prevailed when they at
+length got all on shore. For the men conceived that the authority of
+their officers was at an end, in consequence of the loss of the ship;
+and, as they were now upon an inhospitable coast, where scarcely any
+other provisions could be got beyond what could be saved from the
+wreck, this was another insurmountable source of discord: for the
+working upon the wreck, and securing the provisions on shore, so that
+they might be preserved as much as possible for future exigencies,
+and that they might be sparingly and equally distributed for present
+subsistence, were matters, however important, that could not be
+brought about unless by means of discipline and subordination. At the
+same time, the mutinous disposition of the people, stimulated by the
+immediate impulses of hunger, rendered every regulation attempted for
+these indispensable purposes, quite unavailing; so that there were
+continual frauds, concealments, and thefts, which animated every one
+against his neighbour, and produced infinite contentions and perpetual
+quarrels. Hence a perverse and malevolent disposition was constantly
+kept up among them, which rendered them utterly ungovernable.
+
+Besides these heart-burnings, occasioned by petulance and hunger,
+there was another important point which set the greatest part of the
+people at variance with the captain. This was their difference in
+opinion from him, on the measures proper to be pursued on the present
+emergency; for the captain was determined, if possible, to fit out
+the boats in the best manner he could, and to proceed with them to
+the northward, as, having above two hundred men in health, and having
+saved some fire-arms and ammunition from the wreck, he had no doubt
+of being able to master any Spanish, vessel they might fall in with in
+these seas, and he thought that he could not fail of meeting with one
+in the neighbourhood of Chiloe or Baldivia, in which, when taken,
+he proposed to proceed to the rendezvous at Juan Fernandez. He also
+insisted, should they even meet with no prize by the way, that the
+boats alone could easily carry them to Juan Fernandez. But this
+scheme, however prudent and practicable, was by no means relished by
+the generality of the people; for, quite jaded and disgusted with the
+fatigues, dangers, and distresses they had already encountered, they
+could not be persuaded to prosecute an enterprize which had hitherto
+proved so disastrous. The common resolution, therefore, was to
+lengthen the long-boat, and, with her and the other boats, to steer to
+the southwards, to pass through the Straits of Magellan, and to range
+along the eastern coast of South America, till they came to Brazil,
+where they had no doubt of being well received, and procuring a
+passage to Britain.
+
+This project was evidently a vast deal more tedious, and infinitely
+more hazardous, than that proposed by the captain; but, as it had the
+air of returning home, and flattered them with the hope of getting
+once more to their native country, that circumstance rendered them
+blind to all its inconveniences, and made them adhere to it with
+insurmountable obstinacy. The captain was therefore obliged to give
+way to the torrent, though he never changed his opinion, and had, in
+appearance, to acquiesce in this resolution, though he gave it all
+the obstruction he could, particularly in regard to lengthening the
+long-boat, which he contrived should be of such a size, as, though
+it might carry them to Juan Fernandez, he yet hoped might appear
+incapable of so long a navigation as that to the coast of Brazil.
+But the captain, by his steady opposition at first to this favourite
+project, had much embittered the people against him, to which, also,
+the following unhappy accident greatly contributed.
+
+A midshipman, named Cozens, had appeared the foremost in all the
+refractory proceedings of the crew, had involved himself in brawls
+with most of the officers who had adhered to the authority of the
+captain, and had even treated the captain himself with much insolence
+and abuse. As his turbulence and brutality grew every day more and
+more intolerable, it was not in the least doubted that some violent
+measures were in agitation, in which Cozens was engaged as the
+ringleader; for which reason the captain, and those about him,
+constantly kept themselves on their guard. One day the purser having
+stopped, by order of the captain, the allowance of a fellow who
+would not work, Cozens, though the man had not complained to him,
+intermeddled in the affair with great bitterness, and grossly insulted
+the purser, who was then delivering out the provisions close by the
+captain's tent, and was himself sufficiently violent. Enraged by his
+scurrility, and perhaps piqued by former quarrels, the purser cried
+out, _A mutiny_; adding, _the dog has pistols_, and then immediately
+fired himself a pistol at Cozens, but missed him. On hearing this
+outcry, and the report of the pistol, the captain rushed out from
+his tent, and not doubting that it had been fired by Cozens as the
+commencement of a mutiny, immediately shot him in the head without
+farther enquiry. Though he did not die on the spot, the wound proved
+mortal in about a fortnight.
+
+Though this accident was sufficiently displeasing to the people, it
+yet awed them for a considerable time to their duty, and rendered them
+more submissive to the authority of the captain. But at last, towards
+the middle of October, when, the long-boat was finished, and they were
+preparing to put to sea, the additional provocation given them, by
+covertly traversing their project of proceeding through the Straits of
+Magellan, and their fears that he might at length engage a sufficient
+party to overturn this favourite measure, made them resolve to take
+advantage of the death of Cozens as a reason for depriving him of his
+command, under pretence of carrying him a prisoner to England to be
+tried for murder, and he was accordingly confined under a guard. Yet
+they never meant to carry him with them, as they too well knew what
+they might expect on their return to England, if their commander
+should be present to confront them; and therefore, when just ready to
+depart, they set him at liberty, leaving him, and the few who chose to
+take their fortunes along with him, no other embarkation but the yawl,
+to which the barge was afterwards added, by the people on board her
+being prevailed upon to turn back.
+
+When the ship was wrecked, there were about one hundred and thirty
+persons alive on board; above thirty of whom died on the place where
+they landed, and nearly eight went off in the long-boat and cutter
+to the southward; after whose departure, there remained no more than
+nineteen persons along with the captain, which were as many,
+however, as the barge and yawl could well carry, these being the only
+embarkations left them. It was on the 13th of October, five months
+after the shipwreck, that the long-boat, converted into a schooner,
+weighed and sailed to the southwards, giving three cheers at their
+departure to the captain and Lieutenant Hamilton of the land-forces,
+and the surgeon, who were then standing on the beach. On the 29th of
+January, 1742, they arrived at Rio Grande, on the coast of Brazil;
+but having, by various accidents, left about twenty of their people on
+shore at the different places where they touched, and a still greater
+number having perished of famine in the course of their navigation,
+there were not more than thirty of them remaining, when they arrived
+at that port. This undertaking was certainly most extraordinary in
+itself; for, not to mention the great length of the voyage, the vessel
+was scarcely able to contain the number that first put to sea in her;
+and their stock of provisions, being only what they saved from the
+ship, diminished by five months expenditure on shore, was extremely
+slender. They had also this additional misfortune, that the cutter,
+the only boat they had along with them, broke loose from their stern,
+and was staved to pieces, so that, when their provisions and water
+failed, they had frequently no means of getting on shore in search of
+a supply.
+
+The captain and those who remained with him, now proposed to proceed
+to the northward in the barge and yawl; but the weather was so bad,
+and the difficulty of subsisting so great, that it was two months
+after the departure of the long boat, before they were able to put to
+sea. It seems that the place where the Wager was lost, was not a
+part of the continent, but an island at some distance from the main,
+affording no other sort of provisions besides shell-fish, and a few
+herbs; and, as the greatest part of what they had saved out of the
+wreck had been carried off in the long-boat, the captain and his
+people were often in extreme want of food, especially as they chose
+to preserve what little remained to them of the ship's provisions, to
+serve them as sea-store, when they should proceed to the northward.
+During their residence at this place, which was called Wager Island
+by the seamen, they were now and then visited by a straggling canoe or
+two of Indians, who came and bartered their fish and other provisions
+with our people. This was some little relief to their necessities,
+and might perhaps have been greater at another season; for there were
+several Indian huts on the shore, whence it was supposed that, in some
+years, many of these savages might resort thither in the height of
+summer, to catch fish. Indeed, from what has been related in the
+account of the Anna pink, it would seem to be the general practice of
+these Indians, to frequent this coast in the summer season, for the
+purpose of fishing, and to retire more to the northwards in winter,
+into a better climate.
+
+It is worthy of remark, how much it is to be lamented that the people
+of the Wager had no knowledge of the Anna pink being so near them on
+the coast;[4] for, as she was not above thirty leagues from them at
+the most, and came into that neighbourhood about the same time that
+the Wager was lost, and was a fine roomy ship, she could easily have
+taken them all on board, and have carried them to Juan Fernandez.
+Indeed, I suspect that she was still nearer them than is here
+estimated; for, at different times, several of the people belonging to
+the Wager heard the report of a cannon, which could be no other
+than the evening gun fired by the Anna, as formerly mentioned, more
+especially as the gun heard at Wager Island was at that time of the
+day.
+
+[Footnote 4: Inchin island, where the Anna pink lay, has been formerly
+stated to be in lat. 46 deg. 30' S. the supposed latitude in which the
+Wager was lost, stated in the text at 47 deg. S. is only _ten_ marine
+leagues to the southward, instead of _thirty_, and must therefore
+have been on some one of the islands toward the southern coast of the
+peninsula de Tres Montes, on the north of the Golfo de Penas.--E.]
+
+Captain Cheap and his people embarked in the barge and yawl, on the
+14th of December, in order to proceed to the northward, taking on
+board along with them all the provisions they could gather from the
+wreck of the ship; but they had scarcely been an hour at sea, when the
+wind began to blow hard, and the sea to run so high, that they were
+obliged to throw the greatest part of their provisions overboard, to
+avoid immediate destruction. This was a terrible misfortune, in a part
+of the world where food was so difficult to be got; yet they persisted
+in their design, going on shore as often as they could, in search
+of subsistence. About a fortnight after their departure from Wager
+island, another dreadful accident befel them, as the yawl sunk at
+an anchor, and one of her hands was drowned; and, as the barge was
+incapable of carrying the whole company, they were reduced to the hard
+necessity of leaving four marines behind them, on that desolate
+coast. They still, however, kept their course to the northward; though
+greatly delayed by cross winds, and by the frequent interruptions
+occasioned by the necessity of searching for food on shore, and
+constantly struggling with a series of the most sinister events. At
+length, about the end of January, 1742, having made three unsuccessful
+attempts to double a head-land, which they supposed to be that called
+Cape _Tres Montes_ by the Spaniards, and finding the difficulty
+insurmountable, they unanimously resolved to return to Wager Island,
+which they effected about the middle of February, quite disheartened
+and desponding, through their reiterated disappointments, and almost
+perishing with hunger and fatigue.
+
+On their return, they had the good fortune to fall in with several
+pieces of beef, swimming in the sea, which had been washed out of
+the wreck, which afforded them a most seasonable relief, after the
+hardships they had endured. To complete their good fortune, there came
+shortly afterwards to the place two canoes with Indians, among whom
+there happened to be a native of Chiloe, who spoke a little Spanish.
+The surgeon who accompanied Captain Cheap understood that language,
+and made a bargain with the Chiloe Indian, that, if he would carry the
+captain and his people in the barge to Chiloe, he should have her and
+all her furniture for his reward. Accordingly, on the 6th of March,
+the eleven persons, to which the company was now reduced, embarked
+again in the barge on this new expedition. After having proceeded
+a few days, the captain and four of his principal officers being on
+shore, the six, who remained in the barge along with an Indian, shoved
+her off and put to sea, and never returned again.
+
+Captain Cheap, together with Mr Hamilton, lieutenant of marines, the
+honourable Mr Byron and Mr Campbell, midshipmen, and Mr Elliot, the
+surgeon, were thus left on shore in the most deplorable situation
+imaginable. It might be thought that their distresses, long before
+this time, were hardly capable of being increased: Yet they found
+their present situation much more dismaying than any thing they had
+hitherto experienced; being left on a desert coast, far from the
+haunts of men, without provisions, or the means of procuring any, and
+with no visible prospect of relief; for their arms and ammunition, and
+every convenience that had hitherto remained to them, except the few
+tattered garments they had on, were all carried away in the barge.
+While revolving the various circumstances of this new and unlooked-for
+calamity, and sadly persuaded that they had no possible relief to hope
+for, they perceived a canoe at a distance, which proved to be that
+belonging to the Indian of Chiloe, who had undertaken to convey them
+to that island. He it seems had left Captain Cheap and his people,
+only a little before, to go a fishing in his canoe, accompanied by his
+family, leaving the barge in the mean time under the care of the other
+Indian, whom the sailors had carried with them to sea. When he came
+on shore, and found the barge and his companion gone, he was much
+concerned, and was with difficulty persuaded that his companion had
+not been murdered; yet, being at last satisfied with the account that
+was given him by Mr Elliot, he still undertook to carry them to the
+Spanish settlements, and, being well skilled in fishing and fowling,
+he undertook also to provide them in provisions by the way.
+
+About the middle of March, Captain Cheap and his four remaining
+companions set out for Chiloe; their Indian conductor having provided
+several canoes, and gathered many of his countrymen together for that
+purpose. Mr Elliot, the surgeon, soon afterwards died, so that there
+now only remained four of the whole company. At last, after a very
+complicated passage, partly by sea and partly by land, Captain Cheap,
+Mr Byron, and Mr Campbell, arrived at the island of Chiloe, where they
+were received by the Spaniards with great humanity; but, on account of
+some quarrel among the Indians, Mr Hamilton did not get there till two
+months later. It was thus above a twelvemonth, from the loss of the
+Wager, before this fatiguing peregrination terminated. The four who
+now remained were brought so extremely low, by their fatigues and
+privations, that in all probability none of them would have survived,
+had their distresses continued only a few days longer. The captain was
+with difficulty recovered; and the rest were so reduced by labour, the
+severity of the weather, scantiness of food, and want of all kinds of
+necessaries, that it was wonderful how they had supported themselves
+so long.
+
+After some stay at Chiloe, the captain and the other three who were
+with him, were sent to Valparaiso, and thence to St Jago, the capital
+of Chili, where they continued above a year, and where they were
+joined by Mr Hamilton. News arriving that a cartel had been settled
+between Great Britain and Spain, Captain Cheap, Mr Byron, and Mr
+Hamilton, were permitted to return to Europe in a French ship. Mr
+Campbell, the other midshipman, having changed his religion while at
+St Jago, chose to go from thence to Buenos Ayres along with Pizarro
+and his officers, overland, and went with them afterwards to Spain in
+the Asia: But failing in his endeavours to procure a commission from
+the court of Spain, he returned to England, and attempted in vain to
+get reinstated in the British navy. He has since published a narration
+of his adventures in which he complains of the injustice that has
+been done him and strongly disavows having ever been in the Spanish
+service: but, as the change of his religion and his offering himself
+to the court of Spain, though he was not accepted, are matters which
+he must be conscious can be incontestably proved, he has been entirely
+silent on these two heads.[5]
+
+[Footnote 5: The circumstances connected with the loss of the Wager,
+and of the separation of the Severn and the Pearl, will be given more
+at large, by way of supplement to the circumnavigation. The incidents
+which occur to bold and unfortunate navigators are certainly curious
+and interesting; but the author of Anson's Voyage seems to have
+forgotten, that the circumstances respecting the countries they
+visited, especially such of these which are so little known, are of
+infinitely greater utility.--E.]
+
+
+
+SECTION XIV.
+
+_Conclusion of Proceedings at Juan Fernandez, from the Arrival of the
+Anna Pink, to our final Departure from thence._
+
+About a week after the arrival of the Anna pink, the Tryal sloop,
+which had been sent to examine the island of Masefuero, returned to
+an anchor at Juan Fernandez, having gone entirely round that island,
+without seeing any one of our squadron. As, on this occasion, the
+island of Masefuero was more particularly examined, I have no doubt,
+than it had ever been before, or perhaps ever may be again, and as the
+knowledge of it may be of great consequence hereafter, under peculiar
+circumstances, I think it incumbent to insert the accounts given of it
+by the officers of the Tryal.
+
+The Spaniards have generally mentioned two islands, under the same of
+Juan Fernandez, naming them the greater and the less;[1] the greater
+being that island, where we anchored, and the less that we are
+now about to describe; which, because it is more distant from the
+continent, they call Masefuero. The Tryal found that it bore from the
+greater Juan Fernandez, W. by S. about twenty-two leagues distant.
+It is much larger and better than has been usually represented, being
+reported by former writers as a small barren rock, destitute of wood
+and water, and altogether inaccessible. Whereas our people found that
+it was covered with trees, and that there were several fine falls
+of water pouring down its sides into the sea. They found, also, that
+there is a place on its north side, where a ship might come to an
+anchor, though indeed the anchorage be inconvenient; for the bank is
+steep, and extends only a little way, and has very deep water, so
+that she must anchor very near the shore, and be there exposed to all
+winds, except those from the southward. Besides the inconvenience
+of the anchorage, there is also a reef of rocks, about two miles in
+length, running off the eastern point of the island, though these are
+little to be feared, because always to be seen, by the sea breaking
+over them. This island has at present one advantage beyond Juan
+Fernandez, as it abounds in goats; and as these are not accustomed to
+be disturbed, they were no way shy till they had been frequently fired
+at. These animals reside here in great tranquillity, as the Spaniards,
+not thinking this island sufficiently considerable to be frequented by
+their enemies, have not been solicitous to destroy the provisions
+it contains, so that no dogs have hitherto been put on shore there.
+Besides goats, the people of the Tryal found there vast numbers of
+seals and sea lions; and upon the whole, though they did not consider
+it as the most eligible place for ships to refresh at, yet, in case
+of necessity, it might afford some sort of shelter, and prove of
+considerable use, especially to a single ship, apprehensive of meeting
+an enemy at Juan Fernandez.
+
+[Footnote 1: They also distinguish the greater by the name of Isla de
+Tierra, as being nearer the main land of Chili. There is yet a third
+and smallest island, a little way from the S.W. extremity of the
+largest, called J. de Cabras or Conejos, Goat or Rabbit island.--E.]
+
+The latter end of the month of December was spent in unloading the
+provisions from the Anna pink; when we had the mortification to find,
+that great quantities of our provisions, as bread, rice, groats, &c.
+were decayed and unfit for use. This had been occasioned by the Anna
+taking in water, by her working and straining in bad weather; owing
+to which several of her casks had rotted, and many of her bags were
+soaked through. Having now no farther occasion for her services, the
+commodore, pursuant to his orders from the admiralty, sent notice
+to her master, Mr Gerard, that he now discharged the Anna pink from
+attending the squadron, and gave him a certificate at the same time,
+specifying how long she had been employed. In consequence of this
+dismission, her master was left at liberty, either to return directly
+to England, or to make the best of his way to any port where he
+thought he could take in such a cargo as might serve the interest of
+his owners. But, sensible of the bad condition of his ship, and
+her unfitness for any such voyage, the master wrote next day to the
+commodore, stating, that he had reason to apprehend the bottom of the
+Anna to be very much decayed, from the great quantity of water she
+had let in on her passage round Cape Horn, and ever since, in the
+tempestuous weather she had experienced on the coast of Patagonia;
+that her upper decks were rotten abaft; that she was extremely leaky;
+that her fore-beam was broken; and, in short, that, in his opinion, it
+was impossible to proceed with her to sea, unless she were thoroughly
+repaired. He therefore requested of the commodore, that the carpenters
+of the squadron might be directed to survey her, so that their
+judgment of her condition might be known. In compliance with this
+request, the carpenters were ordered to make a careful and accurate
+survey of the Anna, and to give in a faithful report to the commodore
+of her condition; directing them to proceed with such circumspection,
+that they might be able, if hereafter called upon, to confirm the
+veracity of their report upon oath. Pursuant to these orders, the
+carpenters immediately set about the examination, and made their
+report next day. This was in substance, That the Anna had no less than
+fourteen knees and twelve beams broken, and decayed; one breast-hook
+broken, and another decayed; her water-ways open and decayed; two
+standards and several clamps broken, besides others much rotten; all
+her iron-work greatly decayed; her spirkiting and timbers very rotten;
+that, having ripped off part of her sheathing, her wales and outside
+planks were extremely defective; and her bows and decks were very
+leaky. From all these defects and decays, they certified that, in
+their opinion, the vessel could not depart from Juan Fernandez,
+without great hazard, unless previously thoroughly repaired.
+
+In our present situation, this thorough repair was impracticable,
+all the plank and iron in the squadron being insufficient for that
+purpose. Wherefore, the opinion of the master being confirmed by this
+report, he presented a petition to the commodore, in behalf of his
+owners, praying, as his vessel was incapable of leaving the island,
+that her hull, materials, and furniture, might be purchased for the
+use of the squadron. The commodore, therefore, ordered an inventory
+to be taken of every thing belonging to the pink, with its just value;
+and as many of her stores might become useful in repairing the other
+ship, these articles having become very scarce, in consequence of
+the great quantities already expended, he agreed with Mr Gerard to
+purchase the whole for L300. The pink was now broken up, Mr Gerard and
+her hands being sent on board the Gloucester, as that ship had buried
+the greatest number of men in proportion to her complement. Two or
+three of them were afterwards received into the Centurion on their
+petition, as they were averse from sailing in the same ship with
+their old master, on account of some ill usage they alledged to have
+suffered from him.
+
+This transaction brought us down to the beginning of September, by
+which time our people were so far recovered from the scurvy, that
+there was little danger of burying any more for the present. I shall
+therefore now sum up the whole of our loss since our departure from
+England, the better to convey some idea of our past sufferings and our
+then remaining strength. In the Centurion, since leaving St Helens, we
+had buried 292 men, and had 214 remaining. This will doubtless appear
+a most extraordinary mortality, yet that in the Gloucester had been
+much greater; as, out of a much smaller crew than ours, she had lost
+the same number, and had only 82 remaining alive. It might have been
+expected that the mortality would have been the most terrible in the
+Tryal, as her decks were almost constantly knee deep in water: But
+it happened otherwise, for she escaped more favourably than the other
+two, having only buried 42, and had 39 remaining alive. The havoc of
+this cruel disease had fallen still more severely on the invalids
+and marines, than on the sailors. For, in the Centurion, out of 50
+invalids and 79 marines, there only remained four invalids, including
+officers, and 11 marines. In the Gloucester every invalid perished;
+and of 48 marines, only two escaped. It appears from this account,
+that the three ships departed from England with 961 men on board, of
+whom 626 were dead, and 335 men and boys only remained alive; a number
+greatly insufficient for manning the Centurion alone, and barely
+capable of navigating all the three with the utmost exertion of their
+strength and vigour.
+
+This prodigious reduction of our men was the more alarming, as we were
+hitherto unacquainted with the fate of the squadron under Pizarro, and
+had reason to suppose that some part of it, at least, had got round
+into the South Seas. We were, indeed, much of opinion, from our own
+sad experience, that they must have suffered greatly in the passage:
+but then every port in the South Sea was open to them, and the whole
+power of Peru and Chili would be exerted for their refreshment and
+repair, and for recruiting their loss of men. We had, also, some
+obscure information of a force to be fitted out against us from Paluo;
+and, however contemptible the ships and sailors of this part of the
+world may have been generally esteemed, it was hardly possible for
+any thing bearing the name of a ship of war, to be feebler or less
+considerable than ourselves. Even if there had been nothing to
+apprehend from the naval power of the Spaniards in these seas, yet our
+enfeebled situation necessarily gave us great uneasiness, as we were
+incapable of making an attempt against any of their considerable
+places; for, in our state of weakness, the risking even of twenty
+men, would have put the safety of the whole in hazard. We conceived,
+therefore, that we should be forced to content ourselves with what
+prizes we might be able to fall in with at sea, before we were
+discovered, and then to depart precipitately, and esteem ourselves
+fortunate to regain our native country; leaving our enemies to triumph
+on the inconsiderable mischief they had suffered from a squadron which
+had filled them with such dreadful apprehensions. We had reason to
+imagine the Spanish ostentation would remarkably exert itself on
+this subject, though our disappointment and their security neither
+originated in their valour nor our misconduct. Such were the
+desponding reflections which at this time arose, on the review and
+comparison of our remaining weakness with our original strength: And,
+indeed, our fears were far from being groundless, or disproportionate
+to our feeble and almost desperate condition: For, though the final
+event proved more honourable than we foreboded, yet the intermediate
+calamities did likewise surpass our most gloomy apprehensions; and,
+could these have been predicted to us while at Juan Fernandez, they
+would doubtless have appeared insurmountable.
+
+In the beginning of September, as already mentioned, our men being
+tolerably well recovered, and the season of navigation in these seas
+drawing nigh, we exerted ourselves in getting our ships ready for sea.
+We converted the foremast of the Anna into a new main-mast for the
+Tryal; and, still flattering ourselves with the possible hope of
+some other ships of our squadron arriving, we intended to leave the
+main-mast of the Anna, to make a new mizen-mast for the Wager. All
+hands being thus employed in preparing for our departure, we espied
+a sail to the N.E. about eleven a.m. of the 18th September, which
+continued to approach us till her courses appeared even with the
+horizon. While advancing, we had great hopes that this might prove
+one of our squadron; but she at length steered away to the eastward,
+without hauling in for the island, on which we concluded that she must
+be Spanish. Great differences of opinion now took place, as to the
+possibility of her people having discovered our tents on shore; some
+of us strongly insisting, that she certainly had been near enough to
+have seen something that had given them a jealousy to an enemy, which
+had occasioned her standing away to the eastwards. Leaving these
+contests to be settled afterwards, it was resolved to pursue her; and,
+as the Centurion was in the greatest forwardness, all her hands were
+got immediately on board, her rigging set up, and her sails bent with
+all possible expedition, and we got under sail by five in the evening.
+
+At this time we had so very little wind, that all the boats were
+employed to tow us out of the bay, and what wind there was lasted only
+long enough to give us an offing of two or three leagues, when it
+fell dead calm. As night came on we lost sight of the chase, and were
+extremely impatient for the return of light, in hopes to find that she
+had been becalmed, as well as we; yet her great distance from the land
+was 3 reasonable ground for suspecting the contrary, as we actually
+found in the morning, to our great mortification; for, though the
+weather was then quite clear, we had no sight of the chase from the
+mast-head. But, being now quite satisfied that she was an enemy, and
+the first we had seen in these seas, we resolved not to give over the
+chase lightly; and, on a small breeze springing up from the W.N.W. we
+got up our top-gallant masts and yards, set all the sails, and steered
+S.E. in hopes of retrieving the chase, which we imagined might be
+bound for Valparaiso. We continued on this course all that day and the
+next; and then, seeing nothing of the chase, gave over the pursuit,
+believing that she had, in all probability, reached her port.
+
+Resolving to return to Juan Fernandez, we hauled up to the S.W. having
+very little wind till the 12th, at three a.m. when a gale sprung up at
+W.S.W. which obliged us to tack and stand to the N.W. At day-break,
+we were agreeably surprised by the appearance of a sail on our
+weather-bow, between four and five leagues distant, on which we
+crowded all sail and stood towards her, soon perceiving she was a
+different vessel from that we had chased before. She at first bore
+down towards us, shewing Spanish colours, and making a signal as to
+a consort; but, seeing we did not answer her signal, she instantly
+loofed close to the wind and stood to the southward. Our people were
+now all in high spirits, and put about ship with great briskness;
+and, as the chase appeared a large ship, and had mistaken us for
+her consort, we imagined that she must be a man of war, and probably
+belonged to the squadron of Pizarro. This induced the commodore to
+order all the officers cabins to be knocked down and thrown overboard,
+along with several casks of water and provisions, that stood between
+the guns; so that we had a clear ship, ready for action. About nine
+a.m. it came on thick hazy weather, with a shower of rain, during
+which we lost sight of the chase, and were apprehensive, if this
+weather should continue, she might escape us, by going on the other
+tack, or some other device. The weather cleared up, however, in
+less than an hour, when we found that we had both weathered and
+fore-reached upon her considerably, and were then near enough to
+perceive that she was only a merchant ship, without a single tire of
+guns. About half an hour after twelve noon, being within reasonable
+distance, we fired four shot among her rigging; on which they lowered
+their top-sails and bore down to us, but in very great confusion,
+their top-gallant-sails and stay-sails all fluttering in the wind.
+This was owing to their having let run their sheets and halyards, just
+as we fired at them; after which not a man among them would venture
+aloft to take them in, as our shot had passed there just before.
+
+As soon as the vessel came within hail of us, the commodore ordered
+her to bring to under his lee quarter; and having the boat hoisted
+out, sent our first lieutenant, Mr Saumarez, to take possession of the
+prize, with orders to send all the prisoners on board the Centurion,
+the officers and passengers first. When Mr Saumarez boarded the prize,
+he was received by her people at the side with the most abject tokens
+of submission; as they were all, especially the passengers, who were
+twenty-five in number, extremely terrified, and under the greatest
+apprehensions of meeting with very severe and cruel usage. But the
+lieutenant endeavoured, with great courtesy, to dissipate their
+terror, assuring them that their fears were altogether groundless,
+and that they would find a generous enemy in the commodore, who was
+no less remarkable for his lenity and humanity, than for courage and
+resolution. The prisoners who were first sent on board the Centurion,
+informed us, that the prize was called _Neustra Lenora del Monte
+Carmelo_, and her commander Don Manuel Zamorra. Her cargo consisted
+chiefly of sugar, and a great quantity of blue cloth, made in the
+province of Quito, somewhat resembling our coarse English broad cloth,
+but inferior. They had also several bales of a coarser cloth, of
+different colours, somewhat like Colchester baize, called by them
+_Panniada Tierra_; with a few bales of cotton, and some tolerably
+well-flavoured tobacco, though strong. These were her principal goods;
+but we found besides, what was much more valuable than the rest of
+her cargo, some trunks full of wrought silver plate, and twenty-three
+serons of dollars, each weighing upwards of two hundred pounds.[2]
+This ship was of about 450 tons burden, having on board 53 sailors,
+including whites and blacks. She came from Calao, bound for
+Valparaiso, and had been twenty-seven days at sea. Her return cargo
+from Chili was to have been corn and Chili wine, with some gold, dried
+beef, and small cordage, which is afterwards converted at Calao into
+larger rope. This vessel had been built thirty years before; yet,
+as they lie in harbour all winter, and the climate is remarkably
+favourable, she was not considered as very old. Her rigging and sails
+were very indifferent, the latter being of cotton. She had only three
+four-pounders, which were quite unserviceable, as their carriages
+could scarcely support them; and they had no small arms on board,
+except a few pistols belonging to the passengers. They had sailed from
+Callao in company with two other ships, which they had parted from
+a few days before, and had at first taken our ship for one of their
+consorts; and, by the description we gave of the ship we had chased
+from Juan Fernandez, they assured us that she was one of their number;
+although the coming in sight of that island is directly contrary to
+the merchant's instructions, as knowing, if any English ships should
+be in these seas, that this island is most likely to be their place of
+rendezvous.
+
+[Footnote 2: A seron is a species of package made and used in Spanish
+America, consisting of a piece of raw bullock's hide with the hair on,
+formed while wet into the shape of a small trunk, and sewed together.
+The quantity of dollars taken on this occasion may have been between
+seventy and eighty thousand.--E.]
+
+We met with very important intelligence in this prize, partly from
+the prisoners, and partly from letters and papers that fell into
+our hands. By these we first learnt with certainty the force and
+destination of that squadron which cruised off Madeira at our arrival
+there, and had afterwards chased the Pearl in our passage to Port St
+Julian. This squadron we now knew to be composed of five large Spanish
+ships, commanded by Admiral Pizarro, and purposely fitted out to
+traverse our designs, as has been already more amply related in our
+third section. We had now the satisfaction to find, that Pizarro,
+after his utmost endeavours to get round into these seas, had been
+forced back to the Rio Plata, after losing two of his largest
+ships; which, considering our great weakness, was no unacceptable
+intelligence. We also learnt, that, though an embargo had been laid on
+all shipping in the ports of South America, by the viceroy of Peru,
+in the preceding month of May, on the supposition that we might then
+arrive on the coast, yet it now no longer subsisted: For, on receiving
+the account overland of the distresses of Pizarro, part of which they
+knew we must also have suffered; and, on hearing nothing of us for
+eight months after we were known to have left St Catharines, they were
+fully satisfied we must either have been shipwrecked, have perished
+at sea, or have been obliged to put back again; as they conceived
+it impossible for any ships to have continued at sea for so long an
+interval, and therefore, on the application of the merchants, and the
+persuasion that we had miscarried, the embargo had been lately taken
+off.
+
+This intelligence made us flatter ourselves, as the enemy was still
+ignorant of our having got round Cape Horn, and as navigation was
+restored, that we might meet with some valuable captures, and might
+indemnify ourselves in that way, of our incapacity to attempt any of
+their considerable settlements on shore. This much at least we were
+certain of, from the information of our prisoners, that, whatever
+might be our success in regard to prizes, we had nothing to fear, weak
+even as we were, from the Spanish force in that part of the world,
+though we discovered that we had been in most imminent peril, when we
+least apprehended any, when our other distresses were at the greatest
+height. As we found, by letters in the prize, that Pizarro, in the
+dispatch he sent by express to the viceroy of Peru overland, after
+his own return to the Rio Plata, had intimated the possibility of some
+part of our squadron getting round; and as, from his own experience,
+he was certain any of our ships that might arrive in the South Seas
+must be in a very weak and defenceless condition, he advised the
+viceroy to send what ships of war he had to the southwards, in order
+to be secure at all events, where, in all probability, they would
+intercept us singly, before we had an opportunity of touching any
+where for refreshment; in which case he had no doubt of our proving an
+easy conquest. The viceroy approved this advice, and as he had already
+fitted out four ships of force at Callao, one of 50 guns, two of 40
+each, and one of 24, which were intended to have joined Pizarro, three
+of these were stationed off the port of Conception, and one at the
+island of Juan Fernandez, where they continued cruising for us till
+the 6th of June; and then, conceiving it impossible that we could
+have kept the sea so long, they quitted this station and returned to
+Callao, fully persuaded we must either have perished, or been driven
+back.
+
+Now, as the time when they left Juan Fernandez was only a few days
+before our arrival at that island, it is evident, if we had made it
+on our first search, without hauling in for the main to secure our
+easting, a circumstance we then considered as very unfortunate, on
+account of the many men we lost by our long continuance at sea; had
+we made the island 28th of May, when we first expected to see it, and
+were in reality very near to have so done, we had inevitably fallen in
+with some part of the squadron from Callao; and in our then distressed
+condition, the encounter of a healthy and well-provided enemy might
+have proved fatal, not only to us in the Centurion, but also to the
+Tryal, Gloucester, and Anna pink, which separately joined us, and were
+each less capable to have resisted than we. I may also add, that these
+Spanish ships, sent out to intercept us, had been greatly shattered by
+a storm during their cruise, and had been laid up after their
+return to Callao; and we were assured by our prisoners, that, when
+intelligence might be received at Lima of our being in the South Seas,
+it would require two months at least, before this armament could
+be refitted for going to sea. The whole of this intelligence was as
+favourable as we, in our reduced circumstances, could wish for; and
+we were now at no loss to account for the broken jars, ashes, and fish
+bones, which we had observed at Juan Fernandez on our first landing;
+these things having been doubtless the relics of the cruisers
+stationed at that island. Having thus satisfied ourselves in the most
+material articles of our enquiry, got all the silver on board the
+Centurion, and most of the prisoners, we made sail to the northward
+at eight that same evening, in company with our prize. We got sight of
+Juan Fernandez at six next morning, and the day following both we and
+our prize got safe there to anchor. When the prize and her crew came
+into the bay, in which the rest of our squadron lay, the Spaniards,
+who had been sufficiently informed of the distresses we had gone
+through, and were astonished we had been able to surmount them, were
+still more surprised when they saw the Tryal sloop, that, after all
+our fatigues, we should have had the industry to complete such a
+vessel in so short a time, besides refitting our other ships, as they
+concluded we had certainly built her there; nor was it without great
+difficulty they could be brought to believe that she came from England
+with the rest of the squadron; for they long insisted, that it was
+impossible for such a bauble as she was to have passed round Cape
+Horn, when the best ships of Spain were forced to put back.
+
+By the time of our arrival at Juan Fernandez, the letters found on
+board our prize were more minutely examined, and it appeared from
+them, and from the examination of our prisoners, that several other
+merchant-ships were bound from Callao to Valparaiso. Whereupon, the
+commodore dispatched the Tryal sloop, the very next morning, to cruise
+off the port of Valparaiso, reinforcing her crew with ten men from the
+Centurion. The commodore resolved also, on the above intelligence,
+to employ the ships under his command in separate cruises, as by this
+means he might increase the chance of taking prizes, and should run
+less risk of being discovered, and alarming the coast. The spirits of
+our people were now greatly raised, and their despondency dissipated,
+by this earnest of success, so that they forgot all their past
+distresses, resumed their wonted alacrity, and laboured incessantly in
+completing our water, receiving our lumber, and preparing to leave the
+island.
+
+These necessary occupations took us up four or five days, with all our
+industry and exertions; and in this interval, the commodore
+directed the guns of the Anna pink, being four six-pounders and four
+four-pounders, with two swivels, to be mounted in the Carmelo, our
+prize. He sent also on board the Gloucester, six Spanish passengers
+and twenty-three captured seamen, to assist in navigating that ship,
+and directed Captain Mitchell to leave the island as soon as possible,
+the service demanding the utmost despatch, giving him orders to
+proceed to the latitude of 5 deg. S. and there to cruise off the high-land
+of Payta, at such distance from shore as should prevent his being
+discovered. He was to continue on this station till joined by the
+Centurion; which was to be whenever it should be known that the
+viceroy had fitted out the ships of war at Callao, or on the commodore
+receiving any other intelligence that should make it necessary to
+divide our strength. These orders being delivered to Captain Mitchell
+of the Gloucester, and all our business completed, we weighed anchor
+in the Centurion, on Saturday the 19th of September, in company with
+our prize the Carmelo, and got out of the bay, taking our last leave
+of Juan Fernandez, and steering to the eastward, with the intention
+of joining the Tryal sloop, on her station off Valparaiso, leaving the
+Gloucester still at anchor.
+
+
+
+SECTION XV.
+
+_Our Cruise, from leaving Juan Fernandez, to the taking of Payta._
+
+Although we left the bay on the 19th of September, yet, by the
+irregularity and fluctuation of the wind in the offing, it was the 22d
+of that month, in the evening, before we lost sight of Juan Fernandez;
+after which we continued our course to the eastward, in order to join
+the Tryal off Valparaiso. Next night the weather proved squally, and
+we split our main top-sail, which we then handed; but got it repaired
+and set again by next morning. In the evening, a little before sunset,
+we saw two sail to the eastward, on which our prize stood directly
+from us, to avoid any suspicion of our being cruisers, while we made
+ready for an engagement, and steered with all our canvass towards the
+two ships we had descried. We soon perceived, that one of them, which
+seemed a very stout ship, stood directly for us, while the other kept
+at a great distance. By seven o'clock we were within pistol-shot of
+the nearest, and had a broadside ready to pour into her, the gunners
+having their lighted matches in their hands, only waiting orders to
+fire. But, as the commodore knew that she could not now escape,
+he ordered the master to hail the ship in Spanish; on which her
+commanding officer, who happened to be Mr Hughes, lieutenant of the
+Tryal, answered us in English, that she was a prize, taken by the
+Tryal a few days before, and that the other vessel at a distance was
+the Tryal, disabled in her masts.
+
+We were soon after joined by the Tryal, when her commander, Captain
+Saunders, came on board the Centurion. He acquainted the commodore,
+that he had taken this ship on the 18th, being a prime sailor, which
+had cost him thirty-six hours chase before he could get up with her,
+and that for some time he gained so little upon her, that he almost
+despaired of ever making up with the chase. The Spaniards were at
+first alarmed, by seeing nothing but a cloud of sail in pursuit of
+them, as the hull of the Tryal lay so low in the water, that no part
+of it appeared; yet knowing the goodness of their ship, and finding
+how little the Tryal neared them, they at last laid aside their fears,
+and, recommending themselves to the protection of the blessed Virgin,
+they began to think themselves quite secure. Indeed, their success was
+near doing honour to their _Ave Marias_; for, altering their course
+in the night, and shutting close their cabin windows to prevent any of
+their lights from being seen, they had some chance of escaping: But a
+small crevice in one of their shutters rendered all their invocations
+of no avail; as the people of the Tryal perceived a light through this
+crevice, which they chased till they got within gun-shot; and then
+Captain Saunders alarmed them with a broadside, when they flattered
+themselves they were beyond his reach. For some time, however, the
+chase still kept the same sail abroad, and it was not observed that
+this first salute had made any impression; but, just as the Tryal was
+about to repeat her broadsides the Spaniards crept from their holes,
+lowered their sails, and submitted without opposition. She was named
+the _Arranzazu_, being one of the largest merchantmen employed in
+these seas, of about 600 tons burden, bound from Calao to Valparaiso,
+having much the same cargo with the Carmelo, our former prize, except
+that her silver amounted only to about 5000l. sterling.
+
+To balance this success, we found that the Tryal had sprung her
+main-mast, and that her main-top-mast had come by the board; and next
+morning, as we were all standing to the eastward in a fresh gale at S.
+she had the additional misfortune to spring her fore-mast, so that now
+she had not a mast left on which she could carry sail. These unhappy
+circumstances were still further aggravated, by the impossibility
+of our being then able to assist her, for the wind blew so hard, and
+raised such a hollow sea, that we could not venture to hoist out a
+boat, and consequently could not have any communication with her; so
+that we were obliged to lie-to for the greatest part of forty-eight
+hours to attend upon her, as we could not possibly leave her in such a
+condition of distress. It was no small addition to our misfortunes,
+on this occasion, that we were all the while driving to leeward of our
+intended station, and at the very time, when, by our intelligence, we
+had reason to expect several of the enemy's ships would appear on the
+coast, and would now get into the port of Valparaiso unobstructed;
+and, I am convinced, the embarrassment we suffered by the dismasting
+of the Tryal and our consequent absence from our intended station,
+deprived, us of some very considerable captures.
+
+The weather proved somewhat more moderate on the 27th, when we sent
+our boat for Captain Saunders, who came on board the Centurion, where
+he produced an instrument, signed by himself and all his officers,
+representing that the Tryal, besides being dismasted, was so very
+leaky in her hull, that it was necessary to ply the pumps continually,
+even in moderate weather, and that they were then scarcely able
+to keep her free; insomuch that, in the late gale, though all the
+officers even had been engaged in turns at the pumps, yet the water
+had increased upon them; and that, on the whole, they apprehended her
+present condition to be so defective, that they must all inevitably
+perish if they met with much bad weather: For all which reasons,
+he petitioned the commodore to take measures for their safety. The
+refittal of the Tryal, and the repair of her defects, were utterly
+beyond our power on the present conjuncture, for we had no masts to
+spare, no stores to complete her rigging, and no port in which she
+could be hove down, to examine and repair her bottom. Even had we
+possessed a port, and proper requisites for the purpose it would yet
+have been extremely imprudent, in so critical a conjuncture to have
+loitered away so much time as would have been necessary for these
+operations. The commodore, therefore, had no choice left, but was
+under the necessity of taking out her people and destroying her. Yet,
+as he conceived it expedient to keep up the appearance of our force,
+he appointed the Tryal's prize, which had often been employed by the
+viceroy of Peru as a man-of-war, to be a frigate in his majesty's
+service, manning her with the crew of the Tryal, and giving
+commissions to the captain and all the inferior officers accordingly.
+This new frigate, when in the Spanish service, had mounted thirty-two
+guns; but she was now to have only twenty, which were the twelve that
+belonged to the Tryal and eight that had been on board the Anna pink.
+
+This affair being resolved on, the commodore gave orders to Captain
+Saunders to carry it into execution, directing him to take all the
+arms, stores, ammunition, and every thing else that could be of use
+from the sloop, and then to scuttle and sink her. After all this was
+done, Captain Saunders was to proceed with his new frigate, now
+called the _Tryal's prize_, to cruise off the high-land of Valparaiso,
+keeping it from him N.N.W. at the distance of twelve or fourteen
+leagues: for, as all ships from Valparaiso bound to the northward,
+steer that course, the commodore proposed, by this means, to stop any
+intelligence that might be dispatched to Callao, of two of their ships
+being amissing, which might give them apprehensions of the English
+squadron being in their neighbourhood. The Tryal's prize was to
+continue on this station for twenty-four days, and, if not joined by
+the commodore before the expiration of that time, was then to proceed
+along the coast to Pisco, or Nasca, where she would be certain to find
+the Centurion. The commodore also ordered Lieutenant Saumarez,
+who commanded the Centurion's prize, to keep company with Captain
+Saunders, both to assist in unloading the Tryal, and that, by
+spreading in their cruise off Valparaiso, there might be less danger
+of any ships of the enemy slipping past unobserved. These orders being
+dispatched, the Centurion parted from the other vessels at eleven at
+night of the 27th September, directing her course towards Valparaiso,
+with the view of cruising for some days to windward of that port. By
+this distribution of our ships, we flattered ourselves that we had
+taken all the advantages we possibly could of the enemy with our small
+force, as our disposition was certainly the most prudent that could
+be devised: For, as we might suppose the Gloucester to be now drawing
+nigh the high-land of Payta, we were thus enabled, by our separate
+stations, to intercept all vessels employed either between Peru and
+Chili to the southward, or between Panama and Peru to the northward,
+since the principal trade from Peru to Chili being carried on with the
+port of Valparaiso, the Centurion, cruising to windward of that port,
+would probably meet with them, as it is the constant practice of these
+ships to fall in with land to windward of that place. The Gloucester,
+also, would be in the way of all ships bound from Panama, or any other
+place to the northward, to any port in Peru, since the highland, off
+which she was ordered to cruise, is constantly made by every ship on
+that voyage. While the Centurion and Gloucester were thus conveniently
+situated for intercepting the trade of the enemy, the Tryal's prize,
+and Centurion's prize, were as conveniently stationed for preventing
+the communication of intelligence, by intercepting all vessels bound
+from Valparaiso to the northward; as by such vessels it was to be
+feared that some account of us might be transmitted to Peru.
+
+But the most judicious dispositions only produce a probability of
+success, and cannot command certainty; since those chances, which may
+reasonably enough be overlooked in deliberation, are sometimes of most
+powerful influence in execution. Thus, in the present instance, the
+distress of the Tryal, and our necessary quitting our station to
+assist her, which were events that no degree of prudence could either
+foresee or obviate, gave an opportunity to all the ships bound for
+Valparaiso to reach that port without molestation during this unlucky
+interval: so that, after leaving Captain Saunders, we used every
+expedition in regaining our station, which we reached on the 29th at
+noon; yet, in plying on and off till the 6th of October, we had not
+the good fortune to fall in with a sail of any sort. Having lost all
+hope of meeting with any better fortune by longer stay, we then made
+sail to leeward of the port, in order to rejoin our prizes; but when
+we arrived off the high-land, where they were directed to cruise, we
+did not find them, though we continued there three or four days. It
+was supposed, therefore, that some chase had occasioned them to
+quit their station, wherefore we proceeded to the northward to the
+high-land of Nasca, in lat. 15 deg. 20' S. being the second rendezvous
+appointed for Captain Saunders to join us. We got there on the 21st of
+October, and were in great expectation of falling in with some of
+the enemy's vessels, as both the accounts of former voyagers, and
+the information of our prisoners, assured us, that all ships bound to
+Callao consequently make this land to prevent the danger of falling to
+leeward of the port.
+
+Notwithstanding the advantages of this station, we saw no sail
+whatever till the 2d November, when two ships appeared together, to
+which we immediately gave chase, and soon perceived that they were the
+Tryal's and Centurion's prizes. As they were to windward, we brought
+to and waited their coming up; when Captain Saunders came on board
+the Centurion, and acquainted the commodore that he had cleared and
+scuttled the Tryal according to his orders, and remained by her till
+she sunk. It was, however, the 4th of October before this could be
+effected; for there ran so large and hollow a sea that the sloop,
+having neither masts nor sails to steady her, rolled and pitched so
+violently, that, for the greatest part of the time, it was impossible
+for a boat to lie alongside of her; and, during this attendance on
+the sloop, they were all driven so far to the N.W. that they were
+afterwards obliged to stretch a long way to the westward, in order to
+regain the ground they had lost, which was the reason we had not met
+them on their station. They had met with no better fortune on their
+cruise than ourselves, never having seen a single vessel since we left
+them.
+
+This want of success, and our certainty if any ships had been stirring
+in these seas for some time past, that we must have fallen in with
+them, made us believe that the enemy at Valparaiso, on missing the
+two ships we had taken, had suspected us to be in these seas, and had
+consequently laid an embargo on all trade in the southern parts. We
+likewise apprehended they might, by this time, be fitting out the
+ships of war at Callao; as we knew that it was not uncommon for an
+express to reach Lima from Valparaiso in twenty-nine or thirty days,
+and it was now more than fifty since we had taken the first prize.
+These apprehensions of an embargo on the coast, and of the equipment
+of the Spanish squadron at Callao, determined the commodore to hasten
+down to the leeward of Callao, to join the Gloucester as soon as
+possible off Payta, that, our strength being united, we might be
+prepared to give the ships from Callao a warm reception, if they dared
+to put to sea. With this view we bore away that same afternoon, taking
+particular care to keep at such a distance from the shore that there
+might be no danger of our being discovered from thence; for we knew
+that all the ships of that country were commanded, under the severest
+penalties, not to sail past the harbour of Callao without stopping: as
+this order is always complied with, we should undoubtedly be known for
+enemies if we were seen to act contrary to that regulation. In this
+new navigation, being uncertain if we might not meet the Spanish
+squadron on the way, the commodore took back a part of the crew of the
+Centurion which had been for some time on board the Carmelo.
+
+While standing to the northward, we had sight of the small island of
+St Gallan[1] before night, bearing from us N.N.E. 1/2 E. about seven
+leagues distant. This island lies in about the latitude of 14 deg. S. and
+about five miles to the northward of a high-land called Morro Viejo,
+or the Old-man's Head, which island and high-land near it are here
+more particularly mentioned, because between them is perhaps the most
+eligible station on all this coast for cruising against the enemy, as
+hereabouts all ships bound for Callao, whether from the northward or
+southward, run well in with the land. By the 5th November, at 3 p.m.
+we were within sight of the high-land of _Barranca_, in lat. 10 deg. 36'
+S. bearing from us N.E. by E. eight or nine leagues distant; and an
+hour and a half afterwards we had the satisfaction, so long wished
+for, of seeing a sail. She appeared to leeward, and we all immediately
+gave chase; but the Centurion so much outsailed the two prizes that
+we soon ran them both out of sight, and gained considerably upon the
+chase. Night, however, came on before we could make up with her, and
+about seven o'clock the darkness concealed her from our view, and
+we were in some perplexity what course to steer; but our commodore
+resolved, being then before the wind, to keep all his sails set and
+not to change his course: For, although there was no doubt the chase
+would alter her course in the night, as it was quite uncertain what
+tack she might go upon, he thought it more prudent to continue the
+same course, rather than change it on conjecture, as, should we
+mistake, she would certainly get away. Continuing the chase about
+an hour and a half after dark, one or other of our people constantly
+believing they saw her sails right a-head of us, our second
+lieutenant, Mr Brett, at length actually discovered her about four
+points on the larboard bow, steering off to seawards, on which we
+immediately clapped the helm a-weather, standing right towards her,
+and came up with her in less than an hour, and, having fired fourteen
+shots at her, she struck. Mr Dennis, our third lieutenant, was sent
+in the boat with sixteen men to take possession of the prize, and to
+shift the prisoners to our ship.
+
+[Footnote 1: This island of San Gallan is in lat. 14 deg. S. long. 76 deg. W.
+about twelve miles S.W. of Pisco.--E.]
+
+This vessel was named the _Santa Teresa de Jesus_, built at Guayaquil,
+of about 300 tons burden, commanded by Bartolome Urrunaga, a Biscayan.
+She was bound from Guayaquil to Callao, her loading consisting of
+timber, cocoa, cocoa-nuts, tobacco, hides, _Pito_ thread, (which is
+made of a kind of grass and is very strong,) Quito cloth, wax,
+and various other articles; but the specie on board was very
+inconsiderable, being principally small silver coin, not exceeding
+170l. sterling in value. Her cargo, indeed, was of great value, if
+we could have sold it; but the Spaniards have strict orders never to
+ransom their ships, so that all the goods we captured in the South
+Seas, except what little we had occasion for ourselves, were of no
+advantage to us; yet it was some satisfaction to consider, that it
+was so much real loss to the enemy, and that despoiling them was no
+contemptible part of the service in which we were employed, and was so
+far beneficial to our country. Besides her crew of forty-five hands,
+she had on board ten passengers, consisting of four men and three
+women, who were natives of the country, but born of Spanish parents,
+together with three negro slaves who attended them. The women were a
+mother and two daughters, the elder about twenty-one, and the younger
+about fourteen. It is not to be wondered that women of these years
+should be excessively alarmed at falling into the hands of an enemy
+whom they had been taught to consider as the most lawless and brutal
+of all mankind, owing to the former excesses of the buccaneers, and
+by the artful insinuations of their priests. In the present instance
+these apprehensions were much augmented by the singular beauty of
+the youngest of the women, and the riotous disposition they might
+naturally enough expect to find in a set of sailors who had not seen a
+woman for near a twelvemonth.
+
+Full of these terrors, the women all hid themselves on the lieutenant
+coming on board, and, when found out, it was with difficulty he could
+persuade them to come to the light. But he soon satisfied them, by the
+humanity of his conduct, and by his assurances of their future
+safety and honourable treatment, that they had nothing to fear. The
+commodore, also, being informed of their fears, sent directions that
+they should continue in their own ship, with the use of the same
+apartments and all other conveniences they had before enjoyed,
+giving strict orders that they should experience no inquietude or
+molestation; and, that they might be the more certain of having these
+orders complied with, or having the means of complaining if they were
+not, the commodore appointed the pilot, who is generally the second
+person in Spanish ships, to remain with them as their guardian and
+protector. He was particularly chosen on this occasion, as he seemed
+extremely interested in all that concerned these women, and had
+at first declared that he was married to the youngest; though it
+afterwards appeared that he had asserted this merely with the view of
+securing them from the insults they dreaded on falling into our hands.
+By this compassionate and indulgent behaviour of the commodore, the
+consternation of our female prisoners entirety subsided, and they
+continued easy and cheerful during the time they were with us.
+
+I have before mentioned that the Centurion ran her two consorts out
+of sight at the commencement of this chase, on which account we lay to
+for them all the night after we had taken the prize, firing guns and
+shewing false fires every half hour, to prevent them from passing us
+unobserved. But they were so far astern, that they neither heard nor
+saw any of our signals, and were not able to come up with us till
+broad day. When they had joined, we proceeded together to the
+northward, being now four sail in company. We here found the sea
+for many miles of a beautiful red colour, owing, as we found upon
+examination, to an immense quantity of spawn floating on its surface:
+For, taking some of the water in a glass, it soon changed from a dirty
+aspect to be perfectly clear, with some red globules of a slimy nature
+floating on the top. Having now a supply of timber in our new prize,
+the commodore ordered all our boats to be repaired, and a swivel-stock
+to be fitted in the bow of the barge and pinnace, in order to increase
+their force, in case we should have occasion to use them in boarding
+ships, or making any attempt on shore.
+
+Continuing our course to the northward, nothing remarkable occurred
+for two or three days, though we spread our ships in such a manner
+that it was not probable any vessel of the enemy should escape us.
+During our voyage along this coast, we generally observed that a
+current set us to the northward, at the rate of ten or twelve miles
+every day. When in about the latitude of 8 deg. S. we began to be attended
+by vast numbers of flying fish and bonitos, which were the first we
+had seen after leaving the coast of Brazil. It is remarkable that
+these fish extend to a much higher latitude on the east side of
+America than on the west, as we did not lose them on the coast of
+Brazil till near the southern tropic. The reason, doubtless, of this
+diversity, is owing to the different degrees of heat obtaining on
+different sides of the continent in the same latitude; and, on this
+occasion, I use the freedom to make a short digression on the heat and
+cold of different climates, and on the variations which occur in the
+same places at different times of the year, and in different places in
+the same degree of latitude.
+
+The ancients conceived that of the five zones into which they divided
+the surface of the globe, two only were habitable; supposing that the
+heat between the tropics, and the cold within the polar circles, were
+too intense to be supported by mankind. The falsehood of this idea has
+been long established; but the particular comparison of the heat
+and cold of these various climates have as yet been very imperfectly
+considered. Enough is known, however, safely to determine this
+position, that all the places within the tropics are far from being
+the hottest on the globe, as many within the polar circle are far from
+enduring that extreme degree of cold to which their situation seems to
+subject them; that is to say, that the temperature of a place depends
+much more upon other circumstances, than upon its distance from the
+pole, or its proximity to the equinoctial line.
+
+This proposition relates to the general temperature of places taking
+the whole year round, and, in this sense, it cannot be denied that
+the city of London, for instance, enjoys much warmer seasons than
+the bottom of Hudson's Bay, which is nearly in the same latitude, but
+where the severity of the winter is so great as scarcely to permit
+the hardiest of our garden plants to live. If the comparison be made
+between the coast of Brazil and the western shore of South America,
+as, for example, between Bahia and Lima, the difference will be found
+still more considerable; for, though the coast of Brazil is extremely
+sultry, yet the coast of the South Sea, in the same latitude, is
+perhaps as temperate and tolerable as any part of the globe; since we,
+in ranging it along, did not once meet with such warm weather as is
+frequently felt in a summer day in England, which was still the more
+remarkable, as there never fell any rain to refresh and cool the air.
+
+The causes of this lower temperature in the South Sea are not
+difficult to be assigned, and shall be mentioned hereafter. I am now
+only solicitous to establish the truth of this assertion, that the
+latitude of a place alone is no rule by which to judge of the degree
+of heat and cold which obtains there. Perhaps this position might be
+more briefly confirmed by observing that on the tops of the Andes,
+though under the equator, the snow never melts the whole year round;
+a criterion of cold stronger than is known to take place in many parts
+far within the polar circle.
+
+Hitherto I have considered the temperature of the air all the year
+through, and the gross estimations of heat and cold which every one
+makes from his own sensations. But if this matter be examined by means
+of thermometers, which are doubtless the most unerring evidences in
+respect to the absolute degrees of heat and cold, the result will be
+indeed most wonderful; since it will appear that the heat in very high
+latitudes, as at Petersburgh for instance, is, at particular times,
+much greater than any that has been hitherto observed between the
+tropics. Even at London in the year 1746, there was a part of one day
+considerably hotter than was at any time felt in one of the ships
+of our squadron in the whole voyage out and home, though four times
+passing under the equator; for, in the summer of that year, the
+thermometer in London, graduated according to the scale of Fahrenheit,
+stood at 78 deg., and the greatest observed heat, by a thermometer of the
+same kind in the same ship, was 76 deg., which was at St Catharines in
+the latter end of December, when the sun was within about 3 deg. of the
+vertex. At St Petersburgh, I find by the acts of the Academy, in the
+year 1734, on the 20th and 25th of July, that the thermometer rose
+to 98 deg. in the shade, or 22 deg. higher than it was found to be at
+St Catharines; which extraordinary degree of heat, were it not
+authenticated by the regularity and circumspection with which the
+observations appear to have been conducted, would appear altogether
+incredible.
+
+If it should be asked, how it comes then to pass, that the heat,
+in many places between the tropics, is esteemed so violent and
+insufferable, when it appears, by these instances, that it is
+sometimes rivalled, and even exceeded, in very high latitudes, not far
+from the polar circle? I shall answer, That the estimation of heat,
+in any particular place, ought not to be founded upon that particular
+degree of it which may now and then obtain there; but is rather to be
+deduced from the medium observed during a whole season, or perhaps in
+a whole year; and in this light, it will easily appear how much more
+intense the same degree of heat may prove, by being long continued
+without remarkable variation. For instance, in comparing together St
+Catharines and St Petersburg, we shall suppose the summer heat at St
+Catharines to be 76 deg., and the winter heat to be only 56 deg.. I do not
+make this last supposition upon sufficient authority, but am apt to
+suspect the allowance is full large. Upon this supposition, therefore,
+the medium heat all the year round will be 66 deg.; and this perhaps by
+night as well as by day, with no great variation. Now, those who have
+attended to thermometrical observation will readily allow, that a
+continuance of this degree of heat for a length of time, would be
+found violent and suffocating by the generality of mankind. But at
+Petersburg, though the heat, as measured by the thermometer, may
+happen to be a few times in the year considerably higher than at St
+Catharines, yet, at other times, the cold is intensely sharper, and
+the medium for a year, or even for one season only, would be far
+short of 60 deg.. For I find, that the variation of the thermometer at
+Petersburgh, is at least five times greater, from its highest to its
+lowest point, than I have supposed it to be at St Catherines.[2]
+
+[Footnote 2: On his own principles, the lowest heat of Petersburg
+ought to be -2 deg., and the medium temperature of the year 48 deg.; but the
+data are loosely expressed and quite unsatisfactory, as indeed is the
+whole reasoning on the subject.--E.]
+
+Besides this estimation of the heat of a place, by taking the medium
+for a considerable time together, there is another circumstance which
+will still farther augment the apparent heat of the warmer climates,
+and diminish that of the colder, though I do not remember to have seen
+it remarked by any author. To explain myself more distinctly upon this
+head, I must observe, that the measure of absolute heat, marked by
+the thermometer, is not the certain criterion of the sensation of
+heat with which human bodies are affected; for, as the presence and
+perpetual succession of fresh air is necessary to our respiration, so
+there is a species of tainted or stagnated air often produced by the
+continuance of great heats, which, being less proper for respiration,
+never fails to excite in us an idea of sultriness and suffocating
+warmth, much beyond what the heat of the air alone would occasion,
+supposing it pure and agitated. Hence it follows, that the mere
+inspection of the thermometer will never determine the heat which the
+human body feels from this cause; and hence also, the heat, in most
+places between the tropics, must be much more troublesome and uneasy,
+than the same degree of absolute heat in a high latitude. For the
+equability and duration of the tropical heat contribute to impregnate
+the air with a multitude of steams and vapours from the soil and
+water; and many of these being of an impure and noxious kind, and
+being not easily removed, by reason of the regularity of the winds
+in those parts, which only shift the exhalations from place to place,
+without dispersing them, the atmosphere is by this means rendered
+less capable of supporting the animal functions, and mankind are
+consequently affected by what they call a most intense and stifling
+heat. Whereas, in the higher latitudes, these vapours are probably
+raised in smaller quantities, and are frequently dispersed by the
+irregularity and violence of the winds; so that the air, being in
+general more pure and less stagnant, the same degree of absolute heat
+is not attended by that uneasy and suffocating sensation.
+
+This may suffice, in general, with respect to the present speculation;
+but I cannot help wishing, as it is a subject in which mankind are
+very much interested, especially travellers of all sorts, that it were
+more thoroughly and accurately examined, and that all ships bound
+to the warmer climates were furnished with thermometers of a known
+fabric, and would observe them daily, and register their observations.
+For, considering the turn to philosophical enquiries which has
+obtained in Europe since the beginning of the eighteenth century, it
+is incredible how very rarely any thing of this kind has been
+attended to. For my own part, I do not remember to have ever seen any
+observations of the heat and cold, either in the East or West Indies,
+which were made by marines or officers of vessels, excepting those
+made by order of Commodore Anson on board the Centurion, and those by
+Captain Legg on board the Severn, another ship of our squadron.
+
+I have been in some measure drawn into this digression, by the
+consideration of the fine weather we experienced on the coast of
+Peru, even under the equinoctial, but I have not yet described the
+particularities of this weather. I shall now therefore observe, that
+every circumstance concurred, in this climate, that could render the
+open air and the day-light desirable: For, in other countries, the
+scorching heat of the sun in summer renders the greater part of the
+day unapt either for labour or amusement, and the frequent rains are
+not less troublesome in the more temperate parts of the year: But, in
+this happy climate, the sun rarely appears. Not that the heavens
+have at any time a dark or gloomy aspect; for there is constantly a
+cheerful gray sky, just sufficient to screen the sun, and to mitigate
+the violence of its perpendicular rays, without obscuring the air, or
+tinging the light of day with an unpleasant or melancholy hue. By this
+means, all parts of the day are proper for labour or exercise in
+the open air; nor is there wanting that refreshing and pleasing
+refrigeration of the air which is sometimes produced by rains in
+other climates; for here the same effect is brought about by the fresh
+breezes from the cooler regions to the southward. It is reasonable to
+suppose, that this fortunate complexion of the heavens is principally
+owing to the neighbourhood of those vast mountains called the Andes,
+which, running nearly parallel to the shore, and at a small distance
+from it, and extending immensely higher than any other mountains upon
+the globe, form upon their sides and declivities a prodigious tract of
+country, where, according to the different approaches to the summit,
+all kinds of climates may be found at all seasons of the year.
+
+These mountains, by intercepting great part of the eastern winds,
+which generally blow over the continent of South America, and by
+cooling that part of the air which forces its way over their tops, and
+by keeping besides a large portion of the atmosphere perpetually cool,
+from its contiguity to the snows by which they are always covered,
+and thus spreading the influence of their frozen crests to the
+neighbouring coasts and seas of Peru, are doubtless the cause of the
+temperature and equability which constantly prevail there. For, when
+we had advanced beyond the equinoctial to the north, where these
+mountains left us, and had nothing to screen us to the eastward but
+the high lands on the Isthmus of Darien, which are mere mole-hills
+compared to the Andes, we then found that we had totally changed
+our climate in a short run; passing, in two or three days, from the
+temperate air of Peru, to the sultry and burning atmosphere of the
+West Indies.
+
+To return to our narration. On the 10th of November we were three
+leagues south of the southern island, of _Lobos_, in lat. 6 deg. 27'
+S. This is called _Lobos de la Mar_; and another, which is to the
+northward of it, and resembles it so much in shape and appearance as
+to be often mistaken for it, is called _Lobos de Tierra_.[3] We
+were now drawing near the station that had been appointed for the
+Gloucester, and fearing to miss her, we went under easy sail all
+night. At day-break next morning, we saw a ship in shore and to
+windward, which had passed us unseen in the night, and soon perceiving
+that she was not the Gloucester, we got our tacks on board and gave
+her chase. But as there was very little wind, so that neither we
+nor the chase had made much way, the commodore ordered his barge
+and pinnace, with the pinnace of the Tryal's prize, to be manned
+and armed, and to pursue and board the chase. Lieutenant Brett, who
+commanded our barge, came up with her first about nine o'clock, a.m.
+and, running alongside, fired a volley of small shot between her
+masts, just over the heads of her people, and then instantly boarded
+with the greatest part of his men. But the enemy made no resistance,
+being sufficiently intimidated by the dazzling of the cutlasses, and
+the volley they had just received. Lieutenant Brett now made the sails
+of the prize be trimmed, and bore down towards the commodore, taking
+up the other two boats in his way. When within about four miles of us,
+he put off in the barge, bringing with him a number of the prisoners,
+who had given him some material intelligence, which he was desirous of
+communicating to the commodore as soon as possible. On his arrival, we
+learnt that the prize was called _Nuestra Senora del Carmin_, of
+about 270 tons burden, commanded by Marcos Moreno, a native of Venice,
+having on board forty-three mariners. She was deeply laden with
+steel, iron, wax, pepper, cedar plank, snuff, _rosarios_, European
+bale-goods, powder-blue, cinnamon, papal indulgences, and other kinds
+of merchandize; and, though this cargo was of little value to us, in
+our present circumstances, it was the most considerable capture we
+had made, in respect to the Spaniards, as it amounted to upwards of
+400,000 dollars, prime cost at Panama. This ship was bound from Panama
+to Callao, and had stopped at Payta on her way, to take on board a
+recruit of water and provisions, and had not left that place above
+twenty-four hours when she fell into our hands.
+
+[Footnote 3: The Southern Lobos, or Lobos de la Mar, is in fact two
+contiguous islands, N. and S. from each other, in lat. 6 deg. 57' S. and
+long. 80 deg. 43' W. _Lobos de Tierra_, called also _Inner Lobos_, from
+being nearer the land, lying in the same longitude, is in lat. 6 deg. 28'
+S. There is still a third, or Northern Lobos, in lat. 5 deg. 10' S. long.
+81 deg. W.]
+
+The important intelligence received by Mr Brett, which he was so
+anxious to communicate to the commodore, he had learnt from one John
+Williams, an Irishman, whom he found in the prize, and which was
+confirmed by examination of the other prisoners. Williams was a
+papist, who had worked his passage from Cadiz, and had travelled over
+the whole of the kingdom of Mexico as a pedlar. He pretended that,
+by this business, he had at one time cleared four or five thousand
+dollars, but at length got entangled by the priests, who knew he had
+money, and was stripped of every thing. At present he was all in rags,
+having just got out of Payto gaol, where he had been confined for some
+misdemeanour. He expressed great joy in thus meeting his countrymen,
+and immediately informed them, that a vessel had come into Payta, only
+a few days before, the master of which had informed the governor, that
+he had been chased in the offing by a very large ship, which he was
+persuaded, from her size and the colour of her sails, must be one of
+the English squadron. This we conjectured to have been the Gloucester,
+as we found afterwards was the case. On examining the master, and
+being fully satisfied of his account, the governor sent off an express
+with all expedition to the viceroy at Lima; and the royal officer
+residing at Payta, apprehensive of a visit from the English, had been
+busily employed, from his first hearing of this news, in removing the
+king's treasure and his own to Piura, a town in the interior, about
+fourteen leagues distant.[4] We learnt farther, from our prisoners,
+that there was at this time a considerable sum of money in the
+custom-house of Payta, belonging to some merchants of Lima, which
+was intended to be shipped on board a vessel, then in the harbour of
+Payta, and was preparing to sail for the bay of _Sansonnate_, on
+the coast of Mexico, in order to purchase a part of the cargo of the
+Manilla ship.
+
+[Footnote 4: San Migual de Piura is about 50 English miles E. by S.
+from Payta, and nearly the same distance from the mouth of the Piura
+river.--E.]
+
+As the vessel in which this money was to be shipped was reckoned
+a prime sailer, and had just received a new coat of tallow on her
+bottom, and might, in the opinion of the prisoners, be able to sail
+the succeeding morning, we had little reason to expect that our ship,
+which had been nearly two years in the water, could have any chance
+to get up with her, if she were once allowed to escape from the port.
+Wherefore, and as we were now discovered, and the whole coast would
+soon be alarmed, and as our continuing to cruise any longer in
+these parts would now answer no purpose, the commodore determined
+to endeavour to take Payta by surprise, having in the first place
+informed himself minutely of its strength and condition, by examining
+the prisoners, and being fully satisfied that there was little danger
+of losing many of our men in the attempt.
+
+This attack on Payta, besides the treasure it promised, and its being
+the only enterprise in our power to undertake, had also several other
+probable advantages. We might, in all probability, supply ourselves
+with great quantities of live provisions, of which we were in great
+want; and we should also have an opportunity of setting our prisoners
+on shore, who were now very numerous, and made a greater consumption
+of our food than our remaining stock was capable of furnishing much
+longer. In all these lights, the attempt was most eligible, and
+to which our situation, our necessities, and every prudential
+consideration, strongly prompted. How it succeeded, and how far it
+answered our expectations, shall be the subject, of the succeeding
+section.
+
+
+
+SECTION XVI.
+
+_Capture of Payta, and Proceedings at that Place._
+
+The town of Payta is in lat 50 deg. 12' S. [long. 81 deg. 15' W.] being
+situated in a most barren soil, composed only of sand and slate. It
+is of small extent, being about 275 yards in length along the shore
+of the bay, and 130 yards in breadth, containing less than two hundred
+families. The houses are only ground floors, their walls composed of
+split canes and mud, and the roofs thatched with leaves. Though thus
+extremely slight, these edifices are abundantly sufficient for a
+climate where rain is considered as a prodigy, and is not seen in many
+years: Insomuch that, a small quantity of rain falling in the year
+1728, is said to have ruined a great number of buildings, which
+mouldered away, and melted as it were before it. The inhabitants are
+chiefly Indians and black slaves, or of mixed breed, the whites
+being very few. The port of Payta, though little more than a bay,
+is reckoned the best on this coast, and is indeed a very secure and
+commodious anchorage, and is frequented by all vessels coming from the
+north, as here only the ships from Acapulco, Sonsonnate, Realejo,
+and Panama, can touch and refresh in their passage to Callao; and the
+length of these voyages, the wind for the greatest part of the year
+being full against them, renders it indispensably necessary for them
+to call in here for a recruit of fresh water. Payta itself, however,
+is situated in so parched a spot, that it does not furnish a drop
+of fresh water, neither any kind of vegetables or other provisions,
+except fish and a few goats. But, from an Indian town named Colan, two
+or three leagues to the northward, water, maize, vegetables, fowls,
+and other provisions, are conveyed to Payta on _balsas_ or floats,
+for the supply of ships which touch there; and cattle are sometimes
+brought from Piura, a town about thirty miles up the country. The
+water brought from Colan is whitish and of a disagreeable appearance,
+but is said to be very wholesome; for it is pretended by the
+inhabitants that it runs through large tracks overgrown with
+sarsaparilla, with which it is sensibly impregnated. Besides
+furnishing the trading ships bound from the north for Callao with
+water and other necessary refreshments this port of Payta is the
+usual place where passengers from Acapulco and Panama, bound to Lima,
+disembark; as the voyage from hence to Callao, the port of Lima, is
+two hundred leagues, and is extremely tedious and fatiguing, owing to
+the wind being almost always contrary; whereas there is a tolerably
+good road by land, running nearly parallel to the coast, with many
+stations and villages for the accommodation of travellers.
+
+Payta is merely an open town, unprovided with any defence, except
+a small fort or redoubt near the shore of the bay. It was of much
+consequence to us to be well informed of the fabric and strength of
+this fort; which, we learnt from our prisoners, had eight pieces of
+cannon, but neither ditch nor outwork, being merely surrounded by a
+plain brick wall; and that the garrison consisted of one weak company,
+though the town might possibly be able to arm three hundred men.
+Having informed himself of the strength of the place, the commodore
+determined upon making an attempt for its capture that very night,
+the 12th November. We were then about twelve leagues from shore; a
+sufficient distance to prevent being discovered, yet not so far but
+that, by making all the sail we could carry; we might arrive in the
+bay long before day-break. The commodore considered, however, that
+this would be an improper manner of proceeding, as our ships, being
+large bodies, might easily be seen at a distance, even in the night,
+and might alarm the inhabitants, so as to give them an opportunity of
+removing their most valuable effects. He resolved therefore, as the
+strength of the place did not require the employment of our whole
+force, to make the attempt with the boats only, ordering our
+eighteen-oared barge, with our own and the Tryal's pinnaces, on this
+service. Fifty-eight men, well furnished with arms and ammunition,
+were picked out to man them, and the command of the expedition
+was entrusted to Lieutenant Brett, to whom the commodore gave the
+necessary orders and instructions.
+
+The better to prevent the disappointment and confusion which might
+arise in the darkness of the night, and from the ignorance of our
+people of the streets and passages of the place, two of the Spanish
+pilots were appointed to attend Mr Brett, to conduct him to the most
+convenient landing-place, and afterwards to be his guides on shore.
+Likewise, that we might have the greater security for their fidelity
+on this occasion, the commodore publicly assured all our prisoners,
+that they should be set on shore and released at this place, provided
+the pilots acted faithfully: But, in case of any misconduct or
+treachery, the pilots were threatened with being instantly shot, and
+all the rest were assured of being carried prisoners to England. Thus
+the prisoners were themselves interested in our success, and we had no
+reason to suspect our guides of negligence or perfidy. It is worthy
+of remark, on this occasion, as a singular circumstance, that one
+of these pilots, as we afterwards learnt, had been taken by Captain
+Clipperton above twenty years before, and had then been obliged to
+guide Captain Clipperton and his people to the surprizal of Truxillo,
+a town to the southward of Payta; where, however, he contrived to
+alarm and save his countrymen, though the place was carried and
+pillaged. It is certainly an extraordinary incident, that the only two
+attempts on shore, and at so long an interval, should have been
+guided by the same person, a prisoner both times, and forced upon, the
+service contrary to his inclination.
+
+During our preparation, the ships continued to stand for the port with
+all the sail they could carry, secure that we were still at too great
+a distance to be seen. About ten at night, being then within five
+leagues of Payta, Lieutenant Brett put off with the boats under his
+command, and arrived at the mouth of the bay undiscovered. He had no
+sooner entered the bay, than some of the people in a ship riding there
+at anchor perceived him, and getting instantly into their boat, rowed
+towards the fort, shouting and crying, _The English! the English
+dogs!_ By this the whole town was suddenly alarmed, and our people
+soon observed several lights hurrying backwards and forwards in the
+fort, and other indications of the inhabitants being all in motion.
+On this, Mr Brett encouraged his men to pull briskly, that they might
+give the enemy as little time as possible to prepare for defence. Yet,
+before our boats could reach the shore, the people in the fort had
+got some of their cannons ready, and pointed them towards the
+landing-place; and though, in the darkness of the night, chance may
+be supposed to have had a greater share in their direction than skill,
+yet the first shot passed extremely near one of our boats, whistling
+just over the heads of the crew. This made our people redouble their
+efforts, so that they had reached the shore, and were in part landed,
+by the time the second shot was fired.
+
+As soon as our men were landed, they were conducted by one of the
+pilots to the entrance of a narrow street, not above fifty yards from
+the beach, where they were covered from the fire of the fort; and
+being here formed as well as the shortness of the time would allow,
+they marched immediately for the parade, a large square at the other
+end of this street, on one side of which stood the fort, while the
+governor's house formed another side of the same square. In this
+march, though performed with tolerable regularity, the shouts and
+clamours of nearly threescore sailors, who had been so long confined
+on ship board, and who were now for the first time on shore of an
+enemy's country, joyous as seamen always are when they land, and
+animated on the present occasion with the hopes of immense pillage,
+joined with the noise of their drums, and favoured by the night, had
+augmented their numbers, in the opinion of the astonished enemy, to
+at least three hundred; by which estimation, the inhabitants were so
+greatly intimidated, that they were infinitely more solicitous about
+the means of flight than of resistance. Hence, though upon entering
+the parade, our people received a volley from the merchants to whom
+the treasure then in the town belonged, who were ranged in a gallery
+that went round the governor's house, yet that post was immediately
+abandoned on the first fire made by our people, who were thereby left
+in quiet possession of the parade.
+
+Mr Brett now divided his men into two parties, ordering one of them to
+surround the governor's house, and if possible to secure the governor,
+while he went himself at the head of the other party, with the
+intention of forcing possession of the fort. But the enemy abandoned
+it on his approach, making their escape over the walls, and he entered
+it without opposition. Thus the place was mastered in less than a
+quarter of an hour after landing, and with no other loss on our side
+than one man killed and two wounded. One of these was the Spanish
+pilot of the Teresa, who received a slight bruise by a ball, which
+grazed his wrist. The honourable Mr Keppell, son to the Earl of
+Albemarle, had on this occasion a narrow escape. He wore a jockey-cap,
+one side of the peak of which was shaved off by a ball, close to his
+temple, yet did him no other injury.
+
+Having thus far happily succeeded, Mr Brett placed a guard at the
+fort, and another in the governor's house, and fixed centinels at all
+the avenues of the town, both to prevent any surprise from the enemy,
+and to secure the effects in the place from being embezzled. His next
+care was to seize upon the custom-house, in which the treasure was
+lodged, and to examine if any of the inhabitants remained in the town,
+that he might know what farther precautions were necessary. He soon
+found that the numbers remaining were no ways formidable; for by far
+the greatest part of them, being in bed when the place was surprised,
+had run away with so much precipitation, that they had not taken
+time to put on their clothes. The governor was not the last to secure
+himself in this general rout; for he fled betimes half-naked, leaving
+his wife behind, a young lady of about seventeen, to whom he had
+only been married three or four days; yet she also was carried off
+half-naked, by a couple of centinels, just as our detachment, ordered
+to invest the house, arrived for that purpose. This escape of
+the governor was an unpleasant circumstance, as the commodore had
+particularly recommended to Mr Brett to secure him if possible, as by
+that means he might have treated for the ransom of the place; but his
+alacrity in flight rendered this impracticable. The few inhabitants
+who remained were confined in one of the churches under a guard,
+except some stout negroes, who were employed the remaining part of
+the night in carrying the treasure, from the custom-house and other
+places, to the fort, each party of them being attended by a file
+of musketeers. This transportation of the treasure was the chief
+employment of Mr Brett's people after getting possession of the
+place; yet the sailors, while thus busied, could not be prevented from
+entering the houses in their way, in search of private pillage; when
+the first things that occurred to them, were the clothes left by the
+Spaniards, and which were mostly embroidered or laced, according to
+the fashion of the country. Our people eagerly seized these glittering
+dresses, and put them on over their own dirty trowsers and jackets,
+not forgetting the tye or bag-wigs, and laced hats, which were
+generally found along with the clothes. When this had once begun,
+there was no possibility of preventing the whole detachment from
+imitating the example; but those who came latest into the fashion, not
+finding men's clothes sufficient to equip them, were forced to take
+up with women's gowns and petticoats, which, provided these were fine
+enough, they made no scruple of putting on and blending with their own
+greasy dress: So that, when a party of them first made they appearance
+in that guise before Mr Brett, he was extremely surprised at their
+grotesque exhibition, and could hardly believe they were his own men.
+
+While these transactions were going on at Payta, we lay-to till one
+in the morning, from the time when our boats pushed off; and then,
+supposing the detachment to be near landing, we went on under easy
+sail for the bay. This we began to open about seven a.m. of the 13th,
+and soon after had a view of the town. Though we had no reason to
+doubt the success of the enterprise, yet we saw with much joy an
+infallible sign of its being effected, as, by means of our telescope,
+we could see the English flag hoisted on the flag-staff of the fort.
+We plied into the bay with as much expedition as the wind, which then
+blew from the shore, would, allow; and at eleven a.m. the Tryal's
+pinnace came on board us, laden with dollars and church plate, when
+the officer who commanded her gave an account of the transactions
+of the preceding night. About two p.m. we anchored in ten and a half
+fathoms, about a mile and half from the town, and were consequently
+near enough to have direct intercourse; with the shore.
+
+Mr Brett had hitherto gone on, collecting and removing the treasure,
+without interruption; but the enemy had now rendezvoused from all
+parts of the country, on a hill at the back of the town, where they
+made no inconsiderable appearance; as, among the rest of their force,
+there were two hundred horse, seemingly well armed and mounted,
+and, as we conceived, properly trained and regimented, as they were
+furnished with trumpets, drums, and standards. These troops paraded
+about the hill with much ostentation, sounding their military music;
+and, as our small force on shore was by this time known to them,
+practising every art to intimidate us, in hopes we might be induced,
+by our fears of them, to abandon the place before completing its
+pillage. We were not, however so ignorant as to believe that this body
+of horse, which seemed to be what they chiefly depended on, would dare
+to venture themselves among the streets and houses, even had they been
+three times more numerous; and we went on calmly, as long as
+day-light lasted, in sending off the treasure, and carrying on board
+refreshments, such as hogs, poultry, and the like, which we found in
+great abundance. At night, to prevent surprise, the commodore sent a
+reinforcement on shore, who were posted in all the avenues leading to
+the parade; and, for farther security, all the streets were traversed
+with barricades six feet high. But the enemy continued quiet all
+night, and at day-break we resumed our labour, in loading and sending
+off the boats.
+
+We were now thoroughly convinced of what consequence it would have
+been, had fortune seconded the prudent views of the commodore, by
+enabling us to have secured the governor. For we found many warehouses
+full of valuable effects, which were quite useless to us in our
+present circumstances, as we could not find room for them on board.
+But, had the governor been in our power, he would have treated, in all
+probability, for the ransom of this merchandize, which would have
+been extremely advantageous, both for him and us. Whereas, he being
+at liberty, and having collected all the force of the country for many
+leagues around, and having even got a body of militia from Piura, he
+was so elated by his numbers, and so fond of his new military command,
+that he did not seem to care about the fate of his government.
+Insomuch that, although our commodore sent several messages to him,
+by some of the inhabitants who were made prisoners, offering to enter
+into treaty for the ransom of the town and goods, even giving
+an intimation that we should be far from insisting on a rigorous
+equivalent, and might perhaps be satisfied with some live cattle
+and other necessaries for the use of the squadron, yet the governor
+despised all these reiterated overtures, and did not deign to give
+the slightest answer, though repeatedly threatened, if he would not
+condescend to treat, that we would set the town and all the warehouses
+on fire.
+
+On the second day of our possessing the place, several negro slaves
+deserted from the enemy on the hill, and voluntarily entered into our
+service, one of them being well known to a gentleman on board, who
+remembered to have seen him formerly at Panama. We now learnt that the
+Spaniards, without the town, were in extreme distress for water; for
+many of their slaves crept into town by stealth, and carried away
+several jars of water to their masters on the hill; and, though some
+of these were seized in the attempt, yet their thirst was so pressing,
+that they continued the practice as long as we remained in possession
+of the place. In the course of this second day, we were assured, both
+by deserters and prisoners, that the Spaniards were now increased to
+a formidable number, and had resolved to storm the town and fort next
+night, under the command of one Gordon, a Scots papist, and captain
+of a ship in these seas. We continued, however, to prosecute our work,
+without hurry, loading and sending off the boats as long as we had
+light; and at night, a reinforcement was again sent on shore by the
+commodore, and Mr Brett doubled his guards at all the barricades, all
+his posts being connected, by means of centinels placed within call
+of each other, and the whole visited by frequent rounds, attended by a
+drum. These marks of our vigilance and readiness to receive the enemy,
+which they could not be ignorant of, cooled their resolution, and made
+them forget the vaunts of the preceding day; so that we passed this
+second night with as little molestation as we had done the first.
+
+We had finished sending the treasure on board the evening before, so
+that the third morning, being the 15th of November, the boats were
+employed in carrying off the most valuable part of the effects from
+the town. As the commodore proposed to sail in the afternoon, he this
+day about ten o'clock, pursuant to his promise, sent all his prisoners
+on shore, to the number of eighty-eight, giving orders to Lieutenant
+Brett to have them secured in one of the churches under a strict
+guard, till he and his men were ready to embark. Mr Brett was also
+ordered to set the whole town on fire, except the two churches, which
+fortunately stood at some distance from the houses, after which he was
+to abandon the place and return on board. Mr Brett punctually complied
+with these orders, and immediately distributed pitch, tar, and other
+combustibles, of which there was great abundance to be had, into
+various houses in the several streets of the town, so that as the
+place was to be fired in many different quarters at the same time, the
+destruction might be the more violent and sudden, and the enemy
+might not be able to extinguish it after his departure. All these
+preparations being made, Mr Brett made the cannon in the fort be
+spiked; and setting fire to the houses most to windward, he collected
+his men and marched them to the beach, where the boats waited to take
+them off.
+
+As that part of the beach where he intended to embark was an open
+place without the town, near the churches, his retreat was perceived
+by the Spaniards on the hill, on which they resolved to endeavour
+to precipitate his departure, in order to have a pretext for
+future boasting. For this purpose, a small squadron of their horse,
+consisting of about sixty, selected probably for this service, marched
+down the hill with much seeming resolution, as if they had proposed
+to have charged our men now on the open beach without any advantage
+or situation. But no sooner did Mr Brett halt his men and face about,
+than they stopped their career, and did not venture to advance any
+farther. On arriving at the boats, and being quite ready to embark,
+our people were detained some time by missing one of their number;
+and, after some considerable delay, being unable to learn where he
+was left, or by what accident he was detained, they resolved to depart
+without him. Just when the last man was embarked, and the boats were
+going to shove off they heard him calling to be taken in; at which
+time the town was so thoroughly on fire, and the smoke so covered the
+beach, that they could hardly discern him, though he was quite well
+heard. Mr Brett, however, instantly ordered one of the boats to his
+relief, which found him up to the chin in the water, for he had waded
+as far as he durst, being extremely terrified at the idea of falling
+into the hands of the enemy, enraged as they doubtless were at the
+pillage and destruction of their town. On enquiring into the cause of
+his staying behind the rest, he acknowledged having taken too large a
+dose of brandy, which had thrown him into so profound a sleep that he
+did not wake till the fire began to scorch him. At first opening his
+eyes, he was amazed to see all the houses in a blaze on one side, and
+several Spaniards and Indians not far from him on the other. The great
+and sudden terror instantly restored him to sobriety, and gave him
+sufficient presence of mind to push through the thickest of the smoke,
+as the most likely means of escaping from the enemy; and, making
+the best of his way to the beach, he ran into the water as far as he
+durst, for he could not swim, before he ventured to look back.
+
+It was certainly much to the honour of our people, that though there
+were great quantities of wine and spirits found in the town, yet this
+was the only one who was known to have so far neglected his duty as to
+get drunk: indeed, their whole behaviour, while on shore, was greatly
+more regular than could well have been expected, from sailors who had
+been so long confined on board ship; and, though much of this good
+conduct must doubtless be imputed to the diligence of the officers,
+and to the excellent discipline they had been constantly inured to
+under the commodore, it was certainly not a little to the reputation
+of the men, that they should so generally have refrained from
+indulging in these intoxicating liquors, which they found in abundance
+in every warehouse.
+
+There was another singular incident occurred here which merits being
+recorded. An Englishman, who had formerly wrought as a ship-carpenter
+in Portsmouth yard, had left his country and entered into the
+Spanish service, and was at this time employed by them at the port of
+Guayaquil; and, as it was well known to his friends in England that he
+was in that part of the world, they had put letters for him on board
+the Centurion. This man happened at the present time to be among the
+Spaniards who had retired to the hill of Payta; and ambitious, as it
+would seem, of acquiring reputation among his new masters, he came
+down unarmed to one of our centinels, who was posted at some distance
+from the fort towards the enemy, pretending that he was desirous of
+surrendering himself and returning to the service of his country. Our
+centinel had a cocked pistol in his hand, but, deceived by the fair
+speeches of the carpenter, he allowed him very imprudently to come
+much too near him, so that, watching his opportunity, the carpenter
+wrenched the pistol from his hand, and ran away with it up the
+hill. By this time two others of our men, who had seen the carpenter
+advance, and suspected his intentions, were making towards him, and
+now pursued him, but he got up the hill before they could reach him,
+and then turned round and fired the pistol. His pursuers immediately
+returned the fire, though at a great distance, and the crest of the
+hill covered him as soon as they had fired, so that they took it for
+granted they had missed him: yet we afterwards learnt that he was shot
+through the body, and had fallen dead the very next step he took after
+firing his pistol and getting out of sight. The centinel, too, whom
+he had so grossly imposed upon, did not escape unpunished; as he was
+ordered to be severely whipt, for allowing himself to be so shamefully
+surprised on his post, and giving an example of carelessness, which,
+if followed in other instances, might have proved fatal to us all.
+
+By the time our people had taken their comrade out of the water, and
+were making the best of their way to the squadron, the flames had got
+possession of every part of the town with so powerful a hold, by means
+of the combustibles laid for the purpose, and by the slightness of the
+materials of the houses, and their aptitude to take fire, that it was
+now quite apparent no efforts of the enemy, who now flocked down in
+great numbers, could possibly stop its ravages, or prevent the entire
+destruction of the place and all the merchandize it contained. Our
+detachment under Lieutenant Brett safely joined the squadron, and the
+commodore prepared to leave the bay that same evening. On our first
+arrival there were six vessels belonging to the enemy at anchor, one
+of which was the ship, that was to have sailed with the treasure to
+the coast of Mexico; and, as she was supposed to be a good sailer,
+the commodore resolved to take her along with us. The others were
+two snows, a bark, and two row gallies of thirty-six oars each. These
+last, as we afterwards learnt, with many others of the same kind built
+at different ports, were intended to prevent us from landing in the
+neighbourhood of Callao; as the Spaniards, on the first intelligence
+of our squadron being destined for the South seas, and learning its
+force, expected that we would attempt the city of Lima. Having no
+occasion for these five vessels, the commodore ordered all their masts
+to be cut by the board at our first arrival; and on leaving the place,
+they were all towed out into deep water, scuttled, and sunk. The
+command of the remaining ship, called the Solidad, was given to Mr
+Hughes, lieutenant of the Tryal, with a crew of ten men. Towards
+midnight the squadron weighed anchor and sailed out of the bay,
+now consisting of six ships, the Centurion, Tryal's prize, Carmelo,
+Teresa, Carmin, and Solidad.
+
+Before proceeding to narrate our subsequent transactions, it may be
+proper to give a succinct account of the booty we acquired at Payta,
+and the losses there sustained by the Spaniards. It has been already
+observed, that there were great quantities of valuable effects at this
+place, but most of them were of a nature that we could neither dispose
+of nor carry away, and their value, therefore, can only be guessed at.
+In their representations to the court of Madrid, as we were afterward
+assured, the Spaniards estimated their loss at a million and a half of
+dollars; and as no small portion of the goods we there burnt were
+of the richest and most expensive kinds, as broad cloths, silks,
+cambrics, velvets, and the like, perhaps that valuation might be
+sufficiently moderate. The acquisition we made, though inconsiderable
+in comparison to what we destroyed, was yet far from despicable, as,
+in wrought plate, dollars, and other coin, there was to the value of
+more than 30,000l. sterling, besides several rings, bracelets, and
+other jewels, the value of which could not then be ascertained;
+and besides the very great plunder which became the property of the
+immediate captors.
+
+It has been already observed, that all the prisoners we had taken
+in our preceding prizes were here discharged. Among these were some
+persons of considerable distinction, one of them a youth of
+seventeen, son to the vice-president of Chili. As the barbarity of the
+buccaneers, and the artful uses the Spanish ecclesiastics had made of
+that circumstance, had filled the natives of these countries with
+the most horrible notions of the English cruelty, we always found our
+prisoners, on first coming aboard, extremely dejected, and under great
+horror and anxiety. This youth particularly, having never been before
+from home, lamented his captivity in the most moving terms, regretting
+the loss of his parents, his brothers, his sisters, and his native
+country; all of which he believed he should never see more, conceiving
+that he was devoted for the remainder of his life to an abject and
+cruel servitude. Indeed, all the Spaniards who came into our power,
+seemed to entertain similarly desponding notions of their condition.
+The commodore constantly exerted his utmost endeavours to efface these
+terrifying impressions, always having as many of the principal people
+among them as there was room for to dine at his table; and
+giving strict charges that they should at all times, and in every
+circumstance, be treated with the utmost decency and humanity. In
+spite of this precaution, they hardly ever parted with their fears
+for the first few days, suspecting the gentleness of their usage to be
+only preparatory to some after calamity; but at length, convinced of
+our sincerity, they grew perfectly easy and cheerful, so that it
+was often doubtful whether they considered their captivity as a
+misfortune. The before-mentioned youth, who was near two months on
+board the Centurion, had at last so completely conquered his
+original melancholy surmises, and had taken such an affection for
+the commodore, and seemed so much pleased with the manner of life
+on board, so different from all he had ever seen before, that I much
+question, if it had been in his choice, if he would not have preferred
+a voyage to England in the Centurion to going on shore at Payta,
+though he had here liberty of returning to his friends and country.
+
+This generous conduct of our commodore to his prisoners, which he
+continued without interruption or deviation, gave them all the highest
+idea of his humanity and benevolence; and, as mankind are ever fond
+of forming general opinions, induced them to entertain very favourable
+thoughts of the whole English nation. But, whatever opinion they might
+be disposed to form of his character before the capture of the Teresa,
+their veneration for him was prodigiously increased by his conduct
+towards the women who were taken in that vessel, as formerly
+mentioned. For the circumstance of leaving them in possession of their
+own apartments, the strict orders he issued to prevent any of our
+people from approaching them, and his permitting the pilot to remain
+with them as their guardian, were measures that seemed so different
+from what they expected in an enemy and a heretic, that, although the
+Spanish prisoners had themselves experienced his beneficence, they
+were astonished at this particular instance; and the more so, that all
+this was done without his ever having seen the women, though the two
+daughters were both reckoned handsome, and the youngest was celebrated
+for her uncommon beauty. The women were themselves so sensible of the
+obligations they owed him for the attention and delicacy with which
+he had protected them, that they refused to go on shore at Payta
+till permitted to wait upon him, that they might in person return him
+thanks. Indeed all the prisoners left us with the strongest assurances
+of their grateful remembrance of his uncommon kindness. A Jesuit,
+in particular, of some distinction, expressed himself with great
+thankfulness for the civilities he and his countrymen had experienced
+while on board, declaring that he should consider it his duty to do
+Mr Anson justice at all times; adding, that his usage of the men
+prisoners was such as could never be forgotten, and merited the
+highest acknowledgments; but his behaviour to the women was so
+extraordinary and honourable, that he doubted all the regard due to
+his own ecclesiastical character would be scarcely sufficient to make
+it believed. Indeed, we were afterwards informed that he and the rest
+of the prisoners had not been silent on this topic, but had given the
+highest commendations of our commodore, both at Lima and other places;
+and the Jesuit, as we were told, had interpreted in his favour, in a
+lax and hypothetical sense, that article of his church which asserts
+the impossibility of heretics being saved.
+
+Let it not be imagined, that the impression received by the Spaniards
+to our advantage on the present occasion was a matter of slight
+import; for, not to mention several of our countrymen who had already
+felt the good effects of these prepossessions, it may be observed,
+that the good opinion of this nation is certainly of more consequence
+to us than that of all the world besides. Not only as the commerce we
+have formerly carried on with them, and perhaps may again hereafter,
+is so extremely valuable, but also as its transacting so immediately
+depends upon the honour and good faith of those who are entrusted with
+its management. Even if no national conveniences were likely to flow
+from this honourable conduct of our commodore, his own equity and good
+dispositions would not the less have prevented him from the exercise
+of tyranny and oppression on those whom the chance of war had put into
+his hands. I shall only add, that, by his constant practice of this
+humane and prudent conduct, he acquired a distinguished character
+among the Spanish Creoles over all their settlements in America, so
+that his name was universally mentioned with honour and applause by
+most of the Spanish inhabitants of that vast empire.
+
+
+
+SECTION XVII.
+
+_Occurrences from our Departure from Payta to our Arrival at Quibo._
+
+Setting sail from the road of Payta about midnight of the 16th
+November, we stood to the westward, and next morning the commodore
+caused the squadron to spread, on purpose to look out for the
+Gloucester, as we drew near the station where Captain Mitchell had
+been directed to cruise, and we hourly expected to get sight of him,
+yet the whole day passed without seeing him.
+
+At this time a jealousy between those who had gone ashore to the
+attack of Payta, and those who had continued on board, grew to such a
+height, that the commodore became acquainted with it, and thought
+it necessary to interpose his authority for its abatement. This was
+occasioned by the plunder taken at Payta, which those who acted on
+shore had appropriated to themselves, considering it as due to the
+risks they had run, and the resolution they had shewn on that service.
+But those who had remained on board, deemed this a very partial and
+unjust procedure; urging, that they also would have preferred acting
+on shore if it had been left to their choice; that their duty on
+board was extremely fatiguing while their comrades were on shore; for,
+besides the labour of the day, they were forced to remain all night
+under arms to secure the prisoners, who were more numerous than
+themselves, and of whom it was then necessary to be extremely
+watchful, to prevent any attempts they might have planned at that
+critical conjuncture. They insisted, also, that it was undeniably as
+necessary to the success of the enterprize to have an adequate force
+on board as on shore in its execution, and, therefore, that those who
+remained on board could not be deprived of their share in the plunder,
+without manifest injustice. These contests were carried on with great
+heat on both sides; and though the plunder in question was a mere
+trifle, in comparison with the treasure taken, in which there was no
+doubt that those on board had an equal right, yet, as the obstinacy
+of sailors is not always regulated by the importance of the matter in
+dispute, the commodore thought it necessary to put a speedy stop to
+this commotion. Accordingly, on the morning of the 17th, he ordered
+all hands to assemble on the quarter-deck, when, addressing his
+discourse to those who had been detached on shore, he highly commended
+their gallant conduct, and thanked them for their services on that
+occasion. He then represented to them the reasons that had been urged
+by those who continued on board, for an equal distribution of the
+plunder, telling them that he thought these reasons were conclusive,
+and that the expectations of their comrades were justly founded; and
+he insisted, therefore, that not only the men, but all the officers
+also, who had been employed in the capture of Payta, should
+immediately produce the whole of their plunder upon the quarter-deck,
+and that it should be impartially divided among the whole crew,
+proportionally to the rank and commission of each. To prevent those
+who had been in possession of this plunder from murmuring at this
+decision, and the consequent diminution of their shares, he added,
+as an encouragement to those who might be afterwards employed on
+like services, that he gave up his entire share, to be distributed
+exclusively among those who had been detached to attack the place.
+Thus this troublesome affair, which might perhaps have had mischievous
+consequences if permitted to go on, was soon appeased by the prudence
+of the commodore, to the general satisfaction of all. Some few,
+indeed, whose selfish dispositions were uninfluenced by the justice of
+this procedure, and who were incapable of discerning the equity of the
+decision, were dissatisfied, as it tended to deprive them of what they
+had once possessed.
+
+This important affair employed the best part of the day after leaving
+Payta; and at night, having seen nothing of the Gloucester, the
+commodore made the squadron bring to, that we might not pass her in
+the dark. Next morning we again spread on the look-out, and saw a sail
+at 10 a.m. to which we gave chase, and which we came near enough by
+two p.m. to observe to be the Gloucester, having a small vessel in
+tow. We joined her in about an hour after, when we learnt that Captain
+Mitchell had only taken two small prizes during the whole of his
+cruise. One was a small snow, the cargo of which consisted chiefly
+of wine, brandy, and olives in jars, with about 7000l. in specie. The
+other was a large boat or launch, taken near shore by the Gloucester's
+barge. The prisoners on board this boat alleged that they were very
+poor, and that their loading consisted only of cotton; though the
+circumstances under which they were surprized, seemed to insinuate
+that they were more opulent than they pretended; for they were found
+at dinner on a pigeon-pye, served up in silver dishes. The officer who
+commanded the barge, having opened several of the jars in the prize,
+to satisfy his curiosity, found nothing as he thought but cotton,
+which inclined him to believe the account given by the prisoners; but
+when these jars were examined more strictly in the Gloucester, they
+were agreeably surprised to find the whole a very extraordinary piece
+of deception; as in every jar there was a considerable quantity of
+double doubloons and dollars, artfully concealed among the cotton, to
+the amount in all of near 12,000l. This treasure was going to Payta,
+and belonged to the same merchants who were proprietors of most of
+the money we had taken there; so that, if this boat had escaped the
+Gloucester, her cargo would probably have fallen into our hands.
+Besides these two prizes, the Gloucester had been in sight of two or
+three other ships, which had escaped them; and one of them, from some
+of our intelligence, we had reason to believe was of immense value.
+
+It was now resolved to stand to the northwards, and to make the best
+of our way either for Cape St Lucas, in California, or Cape Corientes
+on the coast of Mexico. When at Juan Fernandez, the commodore had
+resolved to touch somewhere in the neighbourhood of Panama, to
+endeavour to get some correspondence overland with the fleet under
+Admiral Vernon. For, on our departure from England, we left a fleet
+at Portsmouth intended for the West Indies, to be employed there in
+an expedition against some of the Spanish settlements. Taking for
+granted, therefore, that this enterprise had succeeded, and that
+Portobello might then be garrisoned by British troops, the commodore
+conceived he might easily procure an intercourse with our countrymen,
+on the other side of the isthmus of Darien, either by means of
+the Indians, who are greatly disposed to favour us, or even by
+the Spaniards themselves; some of whom might be induced, by proper
+rewards, to carry on this correspondence; which, when once begun,
+might be continued with little difficulty. By this means, Mr Anson
+flattered himself that he might procure a reinforcement of men from
+the other side, and that, by settling a prudent plan of co-operation
+with our commanders in the West Indies, he might even have taken
+Panama. This would have given the British nation the command of the
+isthmus, by which we should in effect have become masters of all the
+wealth of Peru, and should have held an equivalent in our hands
+for any demand, however extraordinary, that might have been thought
+advisable to make on either branch of the Bourbon family.
+
+Such were the magnificent projects which the commodore revolved in his
+mind, when at the island of Juan Fernandez, notwithstanding the feeble
+condition to which his force was then reduced; and, had the success
+of the expedition to the West Indies been answerable to the general
+expectation, these views had certainly been the most prudent that
+could have been devised. But, on examining the papers found on board
+the Carmelo, our first prize, it was then learnt, though I deferred
+mentioning it till now, that the attempt on Carthagena had failed, and
+that there was no probability of our fleet in the West Indies engaging
+in any new enterprise that could at all facilitate this plan. Mr
+Anson, therefore, had relinquished all hope of being reinforced across
+the isthmus, and consequently had no inducement to proceed at present
+for Panama, being incapable of assaulting that place; and there was
+reason to believe there was now a general embargo over all the coast
+of the South Sea. The only feasible measure that now remained, was to
+steer as soon as possible for the southern parts of California, or the
+adjacent coast of Mexico, and there to cruise for the Manilla galleon,
+which was now known to be at sea on her voyage to Acapulco; and we had
+no doubt of being able to get upon that station in sufficient time to
+intercept her, as she does not usually arrive at Acapulco till
+towards the middle of January, and, being now only about the middle of
+November, we did not suppose our passage thither would cost us above
+a month or six weeks, so that, in our opinion, we had nearly twice as
+much time as was necessary.
+
+There was one business, however, which we knew must occasion some
+delay, but which we hoped might be accomplished in four or five days.
+This was to recruit our water; for the number of prisoners we had to
+maintain, ever since we left Juan Fernandez, had so far exhausted our
+stock, that it was impossible to think of venturing upon a passage to
+the coast of Mexico, till we had procured a fresh supply; especially
+as we had not found enough at Payta for our consumption while there.
+It was for some time a matter of deliberation with the commodore,
+where we might take in this necessary article; but, by consulting the
+accounts of former navigators, and examining our prisoners, he at last
+resolved for the island of Quibo, beyond the bay of Panama. There was
+indeed a small island called _Cocos_, less out of our way than Quibo,
+where some of the Buccaneers pretended to have found water: But none
+of our prisoners knew any thing of that island, and it was thought too
+hazardous to risk the safety of the squadron, by exposing ourselves to
+the chance of not finding water at that place, on the mere authority
+of these legendary writers, of whose misrepresentations and falsities
+we had almost daily experience. Besides, we were not without hopes
+that in going to Quibo some of the enemies ships bound to or from
+Panama might fall into our hands, particularly such of them as were
+put to sea, before they had intelligence of our squadron; we therefore
+directed our course to the northward, being eight sail, and so
+having the appearance of a very formidable fleet; and on the 19th
+at day-break, we discovered Cape Blanco, bearing S.S.E. 1/2 E. seven
+miles distant. This cape lies in the latitude of 4 deg. 15' south, and is
+always made by ships bound either to windward or to leeward, so that
+it is a most excellent station to cruise upon the enemy. As our last
+prize, the Solidad, was far from answering the character given her of
+a good sailer, and she and the Santa Teresa delayed us considerably,
+the commodore ordered them to be cleared of every thing that might
+prove useful to the rest of the ships, and then to be burnt. We then
+proceeded in our course for Quibo, and, on the 22d in the morning,
+saw the island of Plata bearing east, distant four leagues. One of our
+prizes, which was ordered to stand close in, both to discover if there
+were any ships between that island and the continent, and likewise to
+look out for a stream of fresh water reported to be there, returned
+without having seen any ship, or finding any water. At three in the
+afternoon point Manta bore S.E. by E. seven miles distant; and there
+being a town of the same name in the neighbourhood, Captain Mitchell
+took this opportunity of sending away several of his prisoners
+from the Gloucester in the Spanish launch. The boats were now daily
+employed in distributing provisions on board the Tryal and other
+prizes, to complete their stock for six months; and, that the
+Centurion might be the better prepared to give the Manilla ship (one
+of which we were told was of immense size) a warm reception, the
+carpenters were ordered to fix eight stocks in the main and fore-tops
+for the mounting of swivel guns.
+
+On the 25th we had a sight of the island of Gallo, bearing E.S.E. 1/2
+E. four leagues distant; from hence we crossed the bay of Panama with
+a N.W. course, hoping that this would have carried us in a direct line
+to the island of Quibo. But we afterwards found that wrought to have
+stood more to the westward, for the winds in a short time began to
+incline to that quarter, and made it difficult for us to gain the
+island. And now, after passing the equinoctial on the 22d, leaving the
+neighbourhood of the Cordilleras, and standing more and more towards
+the isthmus, where the communication of the atmosphere to the eastward
+and the westward was no longer interrupted, we found, in a few
+days, an extraordinary alteration in the climate. Instead of uniform
+temperature, we had, for several days together, close and sultry
+weather, resembling what we had met with between the tropics on the
+eastern side of America. We had besides frequent calms and heavy
+rains, which we at first ascribed to the neighbourhood of the line,
+where this kind of weather is found to prevail; but, observing that it
+attended us to the latitude of seven degrees north, we were induced
+to believe that the stormy season, or, as the Spaniards call it, the
+Vandevals, was not yet over; though many positively assert, that it
+begins in June, and is ended November.
+
+On the 27th Captain Mitchel's largest prize being cleared, was
+scuttled, and set on fire, and as the remaining five ships were all
+good sailers, so we never occasioned any delay to each other. Being
+now in a rainy climate, which we had been long disused to, we found
+it necessary to caulk the decks and sides of the Centurion, to prevent
+the rain-water from running into her.
+
+On the 3d of December we had a view of the island of Quibo, the
+east end then bearing N.N.W. four leagues distant, and the island of
+Quicara W.N.W. at about the same distance. Here we struck ground with
+sixty-five fathom of line, and found the bottom to consist of grey
+sand, with black specks. When we got sight of the land, we found the
+wind to hang westerly, and therefore thought it adviseable to stand
+off till morning, as there are said to be some shoals in the entrance
+of the channel. At six the next morning, point Mariato bore N.E. 1/2
+N. three or four leagues distant. In weathering this point, all the
+squadron, except the Centurion, were very near it, and the Gloucester,
+being the leewardmost ship, was forced to tack and stand to the
+southward, so that we lost sight of her. At nine, the island Sebaco
+bore N.W. by N. four leagues distant; but the wind still proving
+unfavourable, we were obliged to ply on and off for the succeeding
+twenty-four hours, and were frequently taken a-back. However, at
+eleven the next morning the wind happily settling in the S.S.W. we
+bore away for the S.S.E. end of the island, and about three in the
+afternoon entered Canal Bueno, passing round a shoal which stretches
+off about two miles from the south point of the island. This Canal
+Bueno, or Good Channel, is at least six miles in breadth; and as we
+had the wind large, we kept in a good depth of water, generally from
+twenty-eight to thirty-three fathom, and came not within a mile and a
+half distance of the breakers, though, in all probability, if it had
+been necessary, we might have ventured much nearer without incurring
+the least danger. At seven in the evening we came to an anchor in
+thirty-three fathom, muddy ground; the south point of the island
+bearing S.E. by E. a remarkable high part of the island W. by N. and
+the island Sebaco E. by N.
+
+
+
+SECTION XVIII.
+
+_Our Proceedings at Quibo, with an Account of the Place._
+
+The morning after our coming to an anchor, an officer was dispatched
+to discover the watering-place; and, having found it, returned before
+noon; then we sent the long-boat for a load of water, and at the same
+time weighed and stood farther in with our ships. At two we came
+again to an anchor in twenty-two fathom, with a bottom of rough gravel
+intermixed with broken shells, the watering-place now bearing from us
+N.W. 1/2 N. only three quarters of a mile distant.
+
+The island of Quibo is extremely convenient for wooding and watering,
+for the trees grow close to the high-water mark, and a large rapid
+stream of fresh water runs over the sandy beach into the sea; so that
+we were little more than two days in laying in all the wood and water
+we wanted. The whole island is of a very moderate height, excepting
+one part. It consists of a continued wood spread over the whole
+surface of the country, which preserves its verdure all the year
+round. We found there abundance of cassia, and a few lime-trees.
+It appeared singular to us, that, considering the climate and the
+shelter, we should see no other birds there than parrots, parroquets,
+and mackaws; of the last there were prodigious flights. Next to these
+birds, the animals we found in most plenty were monkeys and guanos,
+and these we frequently killed for food; for though there were many
+herds of deer upon the place, yet the difficulty of penetrating the
+woods prevented our coming near them, so that though we saw them
+often, we killed only two during our stay. Our prisoners assured us
+that this island abounded with tygers; we did once discover the print
+of a tyger's paw upon the beach, but the tygers themselves we never
+saw. The Spaniards, too, informed us that there was often found in the
+woods a most mischievous serpent, called the Flying Snake, which they
+said darted itself from the boughs of trees on either man or beast
+that came within its reach, and whose sting they believed to be
+inevitable death. Besides these mischievous land-animals, the
+sea hereabouts is infested with great numbers of alligators of an
+extraordinary size; and we often observed a large kind of flat fish
+jumping a considerable height out of the water, which we supposed to
+be the fish that is said frequently to destroy the pearl-divers, by
+clasping them in its fins as they rise from the bottom; and we were
+told that the divers, for their security, are now always armed with a
+sharp knife, which, when they are entangled, they stick into the belly
+of the fish, and thereby disengage themselves from its embraces.
+
+Whilst the ship continued here at anchor, the commodore, attended by
+some of his officers, went in a boat to examine a bay which lay to
+the northward; and afterwards ranged all along the eastern side of
+the island. In the places where they put on shore in the course of his
+expedition, they generally found the soil to be extremely rich, and
+met with great plenty of excellent water. In particular, near the
+N.E. point of the island, they discovered a natural cascade, which
+surpassed, as they conceived, every thing of this kind, which human
+art or industry hath hitherto produced. It was a river of transparent
+water, about forty yards wide, which ran down a declivity of near
+a hundred and fifty yards in length. The channel it ran in was very
+irregular; for it was entirely formed of rock, both its sides and
+bottom being made up of large detached blocks; and by these the course
+of the water was frequently interrupted: For in some places it ran
+sloping with a rapid but uniform motion, while in other parts it
+tumbled over the ledges of rocks with a perpendicular descent. All the
+neighbourhood of this stream was a fine wood; and even the huge
+masses of rock which overhung the water, and which, by their various
+projections, formed the inequalities of the channel, were covered with
+lofty forest trees. Whilst the commodore, and those with him, were
+attentively viewing this place, and remarking the different blendings
+of the water, the rocks, and the wood, there came in sight (as it
+were with an intent still to heighten and animate the prospect) a
+prodigious flight of mackaws, which hovering over this spot, and often
+wheeling and playing on the wing about it, afforded a most brilliant
+appearance, by the glittering of the sun on their variegated
+plumage; so that some of the spectators cannot refrain from a kind of
+transport, when they recount the complicated beauties which occurred
+in this extraordinary scene.
+
+In this expedition, along the eastern side of the island, though they
+met with no inhabitants, yet they saw many huts upon the shore, and
+great heaps of shells of fine mother-of-pearl scattered up and down
+in different places: These were the remains left by the pearl-fishers
+from Panama, who often frequent this place in the summer season; for
+the pearl oysters, which are to be met with every where in the bay of
+Panama, are so plenty at Quibo, that by advancing a very little way
+into the sea, you might stoop down and reach them from the bottom.
+They are usually very large, but extremely tough and unpalatable.
+
+The oysters most productive of pearls, are those found in considerable
+depths; for, though what are taken up by wading are of the same
+species, yet the pearls found in them are rare and very small. It is
+said, too, that the pearl partakes in some degree of the quality of
+the bottom on which the oyster is found; so that if the bottom be
+muddy, the pearl is dark and ill-coloured.
+
+The diving for oysters is a work performed by negro slaves, of whom
+the inhabitants of Panama and the neighbouring coast formerly kept
+great numbers, carefully trained to this business. These are not
+esteemed complete divers, till they are able to protract their stay
+under water so long, that the blood gushes out from their nose, mouth,
+and ears. It is the tradition of the country, that when this accident
+has once befallen them, they dive for the future with much greater
+facility than before; that no inconvenience attends it, the bleeding
+generally stopping of itself, and that there is no probability of
+their being subject to it a second time.[1]
+
+[Footnote 1: The intelligent reader will demand more than the
+_tradition of the country_ to induce his belief, that this diving
+business is not most certainly destructive of the miserable wretches
+who are compelled to pursue it. The divers in the Persian gulph, where
+it is well known the pearl fishery is carried on by individuals on
+their own account, "seldom live to a great age," (says Mr Morier in
+the account of his Journey through Persia.) "Their bodies break out
+in sores, and their eyes become very weak and blood-shot. They are
+restricted to a certain regimen; and to food composed of dates and
+other light ingredients." It cannot be imagined that the negroes of
+Panama fare better in this hazardous occupation. But to the expression
+of any solicitude as to _their_ blood, it is very probable the answer
+might be something in the style of one of Juvenal's worthy ladies:
+
+ ----ita servus homo est?
+ Hoc volo, sic jubeo, sit pro ratione voluntas.--P.]
+
+The sea at this place furnished us with a dainty, in the greatest
+plenty and perfection, viz. the turtle. There are reckoned four
+species of turtle: the trunk-turtle, the loggerhead, the hawksbill,
+and the green turtle. The two first are rank and unwholesome; the
+hawksbill (which furnishes the tortoise-shell) is but indifferent
+food, though better than the other two; but the green turtle is
+esteemed, by the greatest part of those who are acquainted with
+its taste, as the most delicious of eatables; and that it is a most
+wholesome food, we were amply convinced by our own experience: For we
+fed on this for near four months, and consequently had it been in any
+degree noxious, its ill effects could not possibly have escaped us. At
+this island we took what quantity we pleased with great facility; for,
+as they are an amphibious animal, and get on shore to lay their eggs,
+which they generally deposit in a large hole in the sand, just above
+the high-water mark, covering them up, and leaving them to be hatched
+by the heat of the sun, we usually dispersed several of our men along
+the beach, whose business it was to turn them on their backs when
+they came to land; and the turtle being thereby prevented from getting
+away, we carried them off at our leisure. These proved of great
+service both in lengthening out our store of provision, and in
+heartening the whole crew with an almost constant supply of fresh and
+palatable food; for the turtle being large, generally weighing about
+200 lb. weight each, what we took with us lasted us near a month, and
+by that time we met with a fresh recruit on the coast of Mexico, where
+we often saw them in the heat of the day floating in great numbers
+on the surface of the water fast asleep. Our mode of taking them was
+this; we sent out our boat with a man in the bow, who was a dexterous
+diver; when the boat came within a few yards of the turtle, the
+diver plunged into the water, and took care to rise close upon it; on
+seizing the shell near the tail, and pressing down the hinder parts,
+the turtle awakened, and began to strike with its claws, which motion
+supported both it and the diver, till the boat came up and took them
+in. By this management we never wanted turtle for the succeeding four
+months in which we continued at sea; and though we had been three
+months on board, without putting our foot on shore, except for the
+few days we stayed at the island of Quibo, and those employed in the
+attack of Payta, yet, in the whole seven months, from our leaving Juan
+Fernandez to our anchoring in the harbour of Chequetan, we buried no
+more in the whole squadron than two men; a most incontestable proof
+that the turtle on which we fed for the last four months of this term,
+was at least innocent, if not something more. It appears wonderful,
+therefore, that a species of food so very palatable and salubrious,
+and so much abounding in those parts, should be proscribed by the
+Spaniards as unwholesome, and little less than poisonous. Perhaps the
+strange appearance of this animal may have been the foundation of this
+ridiculous aversion, which is strongly rooted in all the inhabitants
+of that coast, and of which we had many instances in the course of
+this navigation. Some Indian and negro slaves we had taken in our
+prizes, and continued on board to assist in navigating our ships, were
+astonished at our feeding on turtle, and seemed fully persuaded that
+it would soon destroy us; but finding that none of us died, nor even
+suffered in our health by a continuation of this diet, they at last
+got so far the better of their aversion, as to be persuaded to taste
+it, to which the absence of all other kinds of fresh provisions might
+not a little contribute. However, it was with great reluctance, and
+very sparingly, that they began to eat it: But the relish improving
+upon them by degrees, they at last grew extremely fond of it,
+preferred it to every other kind of food, and often felicitated each
+other on the happy experience they had acquired, and the delicious and
+plentiful repasts it would be always in their power to procure, when
+they should return to their country. Those who are acquainted with the
+manner of life of these unhappy wretches, need not be told, that next
+to large draughts of spirituous liquors, plenty of tolerable food is
+the greatest joy they know; and that the discovering a method which
+would supply them with what quantity they pleased of a kind more
+luxurious to the palate than any their haughty lords and masters
+could indulge in, was a circumstance which they considered as the most
+fortunate that could befal them.
+
+In three days time we had completed our business at this place, and
+were extremely impatient to put to sea, that we might arrive time
+enough on the coast of Mexico to intercept the Manilla galleon. The
+wind being contrary detained us a night, and the next day when we got
+into the offing, (which we did through the same channel by which we
+entered) we were obliged to keep hovering about the island, in hopes
+of getting sight of the Gloucester. It was the 9th of December, in the
+morning, when we put to sea, and continuing to the southward of the
+island, looking out for the Gloucester, we, on the 10th, at five in
+the afternoon, discerned a small sail to the northward of us, to which
+we gave chase, and coming up took her. She proved to be a bark from
+Panama, bound to Cheripe, an inconsiderable village on the continent,
+and was called the _Jesu Nazareno_. She had nothing on board but some
+oakum, about a ton of rock-salt, and between 30l. and 40l. in specie,
+most of it consisting of small silver money, intended for purchasing a
+cargo of provisions at Cheripe.
+
+I cannot but observe, for the use of future cruisers, that had we been
+in want of provisions, we had by this capture an obvious method of
+supplying ourselves. For at Cheripe, whither she was bound, there is a
+constant store of provisions prepared for the vessels which go thither
+every week from Panama, the market of Panama being chiefly supplied
+from thence: So that by putting a few of our hands on board our prize,
+we might easily have seized a large store without any hazard, since
+Cheripe is a place of no strength.
+
+On the 12th of December we were relieved from the perplexity we had
+suffered, by the separation of the Gloucester; for on that day she
+joined us, and informed us, that in tacking to the southward on our
+first arrival, she had sprung her fore-top-mast, which had disabled
+her from working to windward, and prevented her from joining us
+sooner. We now scuttled and sunk the Jesu Nazareno, the prize we took
+last, and having the greatest impatience to get into a proper station
+for the galleon, stood altogether to the westward, and notwithstanding
+the impediments we met with, left the island of Quibo in about nine
+days after our first coming in sight of it.
+
+
+
+SECTION XIX.
+
+_From Quibo to the Coast of Mexico._
+
+On the 12th of December we left Quibo, and the same day the commodore
+delivered fresh instructions to the captains of the men of war, and
+the commanders of our prizes, appointing them the rendezvouses
+they were to make, and the courses they were to steer in case of a
+separation. And first, they were directed to use all possible dispatch
+in getting to the northward of the harbour of Acapulco, where they
+were to endeavour to fall in with the land, between the latitudes of
+18 and 19 deg.; from thence, they were to beat up the coast at eight or
+ten leagues distance from the shore, till they came a-breast of Cape
+Corientes, in the latitude of 20 deg.20'. When they arrived there, they
+were to continue cruising on that station till the 14th of February;
+and then they were to proceed to the middle island of the Tres Marias,
+in the latitude of 21 deg.25', bearing from Cape Corientes N.W. by N.,
+twenty-five leagues distant. And if at this island they did not meet
+the commodore, they were there to recruit their wood and water, and
+then to make the best of their way to the island of Macao, on the
+coast of China. These orders being distributed, we had little doubt
+of arriving soon upon our intended station; as we expected, upon
+the increasing our offing from Quibo, to fall in with the regular
+trade-wind. But, to our extreme vexation, we were baffled for near a
+month, either with tempestuous weather from the western quarter, or
+with dead calms and heavy rains, attended with a sultry air; so that
+it was the 25th of December before we got a sight of the island of
+Cocos, which by our reckoning was only a hundred leagues from the
+continent; and we had the mortification to make so little way, that we
+did not lose sight of it again in five days. This island we found to
+be in the latitude of 5 deg.20' north. It has a high hummock towards the
+western part, which descends gradually, and at last terminates in a
+low point to the eastward. From the island of Cocos we stood W. by N.,
+and were till the 9th of January in running an hundred leagues more.
+We had at first flattered ourselves, that the uncertain weather and
+western gales we met with were owing to the neighbourhood of the
+continent, from which, as we got more distant, we expected every day
+to be relieved, by falling in with the eastern trade-wind: But as our
+hopes were so long baffled, and our patience quite exhausted, we began
+at length to despair of succeeding in the great purpose we had in
+view, that of intercepting the Manilla galleon; and this produced
+a general dejection amongst us, as we had at first considered this
+project as almost infallible, and had indulged ourselves in the most
+boundless hopes of the advantages we should thence receive. However,
+our despondency was at last somewhat alleviated, by a favourable
+change of the wind; for, on the 9th of January, a gale for the first
+time sprang up from the N.E., and on this we took the Carmelo in tow,
+as the Gloucester did the Carmin, making all the sail we could to
+improve the advantage, for we still suspected that it was only a
+temporary gale, which would not last long; but the next day we had the
+satisfaction to find, that the wind did not only continue in the same
+quarter, but blew with so much briskness and steadiness, that we now
+no longer doubted of its being the true trade-wind. And as we advanced
+apace towards our station, our hopes began to revive, and our despair
+by degrees gave place to pleasing prejudices: For though the customary
+season of the arrival of the galleon at Acapulco was already elapsed,
+yet we were unreasonable enough to flatter ourselves, that some
+accidental delay might lengthen her passage beyond its usual limits.
+
+When we got into the trade-wind, we found no alteration in it till the
+17th of January, when we were advanced to the latitude of 12 deg.50', but
+on that day it shifted to the westward of the north: This change
+we imputed to our having haled up too soon, though we then esteemed
+ourselves full seventy leagues from the coast, which plainly shows,
+that the trade-wind doth not take place, but at a considerable
+distance from the continent. After this, the wind was not so
+favourable to us as it had been: However, we still continued to
+advance, and, on the 26th of January, being then to the northward of
+Acapulco, we tacked and stood to the eastward, with a view of making
+the land.
+
+In the preceding fortnight we caught some turtle on the surface of the
+water, and several dolphins, bonitos, and albicores. One day, as one
+of the sail-makers mates was fishing from the end of the gib-boom, he
+lost his hold, and dropped into the sea; and the ship, which was then
+going at the rate of six or seven knots, went directly over him: But
+as we had the Carmelo in tow, we instantly called out to the people on
+board her, who threw him over several ends of ropes, one of which he
+fortunately caught hold of, and twisting it round his arm, was hauled
+into the ship, without having received any other injury than a wrench
+in his arm, of which he soon recovered.
+
+On the 26th of January, we stood to the eastward, expecting, by our
+reckonings, to have fallen in with the land on the 28th; but though
+the weather was perfectly clear, we had no sight of it at sun-set, and
+therefore continued our course, not doubting but we should see it
+by the next morning. About ten at night we discovered a light on the
+larboard-bow, bearing from us N.N.E. The Tryal's prize too, about a
+mile a-head of us, made a signal at the same time for seeing a sail;
+and as we had no doubt that what we saw was a ship's light, we were
+extremely animated with a firm persuasion, that it was the Manilla
+galleon, which had been so long the object of our wishes: And what
+added to our alacrity, was our expectation of meeting with two of them
+instead of one, for we took it for granted, that the light in view
+was carried in the top of one ship for a direction to her consort.
+We immediately cast off the Carmelo and pressed forward with all our
+canvass, making a signal for the Gloucester to do the same. Thus we
+chased the light, keeping all our hands at their respective quarters,
+under an expectation of engaging in the next half hour, as we
+sometimes conceived the chase to be about a mile distant, and at other
+times to be within reach of our guns; and some positively averred,
+that besides the light, they could plainly discern her sails. The
+commodore himself was so fully persuaded that we should be soon
+along-side of her, that he sent for his first lieutenant, who
+commanded between decks, and directed him to see all the great guns
+loaded with two round-shot for the first broadside, and after that
+with one round-shot and one grape, strictly charging him, at the same
+time, not to suffer a gun to be fired, till he, the commodore, should
+give orders, which he informed the lieutenant would not be till we
+arrived within pistol-shot of the enemy. In this constant and eager
+attention we continued all night, always presuming that another
+quarter of an hour would bring us up with this Manilla ship, whose
+wealth, with that of her supposed consort, we now estimated by round
+millions. But when the morning broke, and day-light came on, we were
+most strangely and vexatiously disappointed, by finding that the light
+which had occasioned all this bustle and expectancy was only a fire
+on the shore. Indeed the circumstances of this deception are so
+extraordinary as to be scarcely credible; for, by our run during the
+night, and the distance of the land in the morning, this fire, when we
+first discovered it, must have been above twenty-five leagues from
+us. It was indeed upon a very high mountain, and continued burning
+for several days afterwards; it was not a volcano, but rather, as
+I suppose, stubble, or heath, set on fire for some purpose of
+agriculture.[1]
+
+[Footnote 1: The reasons for this supposition ought to have been
+adduced. It is not improbable that the volcanic mountain in the
+neighbourhood of Acapulco did furnish this vexatious light.--E.]
+
+At sun-rising, after this mortifying delusion, we found ourselves
+about nine leagues off the land, which extended from the N.W. to E.
+1/2 N. On this land we observed two remarkable hummocks, such as are
+usually called paps, which bore north from us: These, a Spanish pilot
+and two Indians, who were the only persons amongst us that pretended
+to have traded in this part of the world, affirmed to be over the
+harbour of Acapulco. Indeed, we very much doubted their knowledge of
+the coast; for we found these paps to be in the latitude of 17 deg.56',
+whereas those over Acapulco are said to be in 17 deg. only; and we
+afterwards found our suspicions of their skill to be well grounded:
+However, they were very confident, and assured us, that the height of
+the mountains was itself an infallible mark of the harbour; the
+coast, as they pretended, (though falsely) being generally low to the
+eastward and westward of it.
+
+And now being in the track of the Manilla galleon, it was a great
+doubt with us (as it was near the end of January,) whether she was or
+was not arrived: But examining our prisoners about it, they assured
+us, that she was sometimes known to come in after the middle of
+February; and they endeavoured to persuade us, that the fire we
+had seen on shore was a proof that she was as yet at sea, it being
+customary, as they said, to make use of these fires as signals for
+her direction, when she continued longer out than ordinary. On this
+information, strengthened by our propensity to believe them in a
+matter which so pleasingly flattered our wishes, we resolved to cruise
+for her for some days; and we accordingly spread our ships at the
+distance of twelve leagues from the coast, in such a manner, that it
+was impossible she should pass us unobserved: However, not seeing her
+soon, we were at intervals inclined to suspect that she had gained
+her port already; and as we now began to want a harbour to refresh
+our people, the uncertainty of our present situation gave us
+great uneasiness, and we were very solicitous to get some positive
+intelligence, which might either set us at liberty to consult our
+necessities, if the galleon was arrived, or might animate us to
+continue our present cruise with cheerfulness, if she was not.
+With this view the commodore, after examining our prisoners very
+particularly, resolved to send a boat, under night, into the harbour
+of Acapulco, to see if the Manilla ship was there or not, one of the
+Indians being very positive that this might be done without the
+boat itself being discovered. To execute this project, the barge
+was dispatched the 6th of February, with a sufficient crew and two
+officers, who took with them a Spanish pilot, and the Indian who had
+insisted on the practicability of this measure, and had undertaken to
+conduct it. Our barge did not return to us again till the eleventh,
+when the officers acquainted Mr Anson, that, agreeable to our
+suspicion, there was nothing like a harbour in the place where the
+Spanish pilots had at first asserted Acapulco to lie; that when they
+had satisfied themselves in this particular, they steered to the
+eastward, in hopes of discovering it, and had coasted along shore
+thirty-two leagues; that in this whole range they met chiefly with
+sandy beaches of a great length, over which the sea broke with so much
+violence, that it was impossible for a boat to land; that at the
+end of their run they could just discover two paps at a very great
+distance to the eastward, which from their appearance and their
+latitude, they concluded to be those in the neighbourhood of Acapulco;
+but that not having a sufficient quantity of fresh water and provision
+for their passage thither and back again, they were obliged to return
+to the commodore, to acquaint him with their disappointment. On this
+intelligence we all made sail to the eastward, in order to get into
+the neighbourhood of that port, the commodore resolving to send the
+barge a second time upon the same enterprize, when we were arrived
+within a moderate distance. And the next day, which was the 12th of
+February, we being by that time considerably advanced, the barge was
+again dispatched, and particular instructions given to the officers
+to preserve themselves from being seen from the shore. On the 13th we
+espied a high land to the eastward, which we first imagined to be that
+over the harbour of Acapulco; but we afterwards found that it was the
+high land of Seguateneo, where there is a small harbour, of which we
+shall have occasion to make more ample mention hereafter. And now,
+having waited six days without any news of our barge, we began to be
+uneasy for her safety; but, on the 7th day, that is, on the 19th of
+February, she returned. The officers informed the commodore, that they
+had discovered the harbour of Acapulco, which they esteemed to bear
+from us E.S.E. at least fifty leagues distant: That on the 17th, about
+two in the morning, they were got within the island that lies at
+the mouth of the harbour, and yet neither the Spanish pilot, nor the
+Indian who were with them, could give them any information where they
+then were; but that while they were lying upon their oars in suspence
+what to do, being ignorant that they were then at the very place
+they sought for, they discerned a small light upon the surface of
+the water, on which they instantly plied their paddles, and moving
+as silently as possible towards it, they found it to be in a fishing
+canoe, which they surprised, with three negroes that belonged to it.
+It seems the negroes at first attempted to jump overboard; and being
+so near the land, they would easily have swam on shore; but they
+were prevented by presenting a piece at them, on which they readily
+submitted, and were taken into the barge. The officers further added,
+that they had immediately turned the canoe adrift against the face of
+a rock, where it would inevitably be dashed to pieces by the fury of
+the sea: This they did to deceive those who perhaps might be sent from
+the town to search after the canoe; for upon seeing several pieces of
+a wreck, they would immediately conclude that the people on board her
+had been drowned, and would have no suspicion of their having fallen
+into our hands. When the crew of the barge had taken this precaution,
+they exerted their utmost strength in pulling out to sea, and by dawn
+of day had gained such an offing, as rendered it impossible for them
+to be seen from the coast.
+
+And now having got the three negroes in our possession, who were not
+ignorant of the transactions at Acapulco, we were soon satisfied about
+the most material points which had long kept us in suspense: And
+on examination we found, that we were indeed disappointed in our
+expectation of intercepting the galleon before her arrival at
+Acapulco; but we learnt other circumstances which still revived our
+hopes, and which, we then conceived, would more than balance the
+opportunity we had already lost: For though our negro prisoners
+informed us that the galleon arrived at Acapulco on our 9th of
+January, which was about twenty days before we fell in with this
+coast, yet they at the same time told us, that the galleon had
+delivered her cargo, and was taking in water and provisions for her
+return, and that the viceroy of Mexico had by proclamation fixed her
+departure from Acapulco to the 14th of March, N.S. This last news
+was most joyfully received by us, as we had no doubt but she must
+certainly fall into our hands, and as it was much more eligible to
+seize her on her return, than it would have been to have taken her
+before her arrival, as the specie for which she had sold her cargo,
+and which she would now have on board, was prodigiously more to be
+esteemed by us than the cargo itself; great part of which would have
+perished on our hands, and no part of it could have been disposed of
+by us at so advantageous a mart as Acapulco.
+
+Thus we were a second time engaged in an eager expectation of meeting
+with this Manilla ship, which, by the fame of its wealth, we had been
+taught to consider as the most desirable prize that was to be met with
+in any part of the globe. As all our future projects will be in
+some sort regulated with a view to the possession of this celebrated
+galleon, and as the commerce which is carried on by means of these
+vessels between the city of Manilla and the port of Acapulco is
+perhaps the most valuable, in proportion to its quantity, of any in
+the known world, I shall endeavour, in the ensuing chapter, to give as
+distinct an account as I can of all the particulars relating thereto,
+both as it is a matter in which I conceive the public to be in some
+degree interested, and as I flatter myself, that from the materials
+which have fallen into my hands, I am enabled to describe it with more
+distinctness than has hitherto been done, at least in our language.
+
+
+
+SECTION XX.
+
+_An Account of the Commerce carried on between the City of Manilla
+on the Island of Luconia, and the Port of Acapulco in the Coast of
+Mexico._[1]
+
+Though Spain did not acquire the property of any of the spice islands,
+by the enterprising labours of Magellan (related in our tenth volume,
+to which we refer,) yet the discovery made in his expedition to the
+Philippine Islands, was thought too considerable to be neglected; for
+these were not far distant from those places which produced spices,
+and were very well situated for the Chinese trade, and for the
+commerce of other parts of India; and therefore a communication was
+soon established, and carefully supported between these islands
+and the Spanish colonies on the coast of Peru: So that the city of
+Manilla, (which Was built on the island of Luconia, the chief of the
+Philippines) soon became the mart for all Indian commodities, which
+were brought up by the inhabitants, and were annually sent to the
+South-Seas to be there vended on their account; and the returns of
+this commerce to Manilla being principally made in silver, the place
+by degrees grew extremely opulent and considerable, and its trade so
+far increased, as to engage the attention of the court of Spain, and
+to be frequently controlled and regulated by royal edicts.
+
+[Footnote 1: Much of the original in this section is omitted, as
+either unimportant now; or elsewhere given in the work.]
+
+In the infancy of this trade, it was carried on from the port
+of Callao to the city of Manilla, in which voyage the trade-wind
+continually favoured them; so that notwithstanding these places were
+distant between three and four thousand leagues, yet the voyage was
+often made in little more than two months: But then the return from
+Manilla was extremely troublesome and tedious, and is said to have
+sometimes taken them up above a twelvemonth, which, if they pretended
+to ply up within the limits of the trade-wind, is not at all to be
+wondered at; and it is asserted, that in their first voyages they were
+so imprudent and unskilful as to attempt this course. However, that
+route Was soon laid aside by the advice, as it is said, of a Jesuit,
+who persuaded them to steer to the northward till they got clear of
+the trade-winds, and then by the favour of the westerly winds, which
+generally prevail in high latitudes, to stretch away for the coast
+of California. This has been the practice for at least a hundred and
+sixty years past, (1740-4:) For Sir Thomas Cavendish, in the year
+1586, engaged off the south end of California a vessel bound from
+Manilla to the American coast. And it was in compliance with this
+new plan of navigation, and to shorten the run both backwards and
+forwards, that the staple of this commerce to and from Manilla was
+removed from Callao, on the coast of Peru, to the port of Acapulco, on
+the coast of Mexico, where it continues fixed at this time.
+
+This trade to Acapulco is not laid open to all the inhabitants of
+Manilla, but is confined by very particular regulations, somewhat
+analogous to those by which the trade of the register ships from Cadiz
+to the West-Indies is restrained.
+
+The trade is limited to a certain value, which the annual cargo ought
+not to exceed. Some Spanish manuscripts', I have seen, mention this
+limitation to be 600,000 dollars; but the annual cargo does certainly
+surpass this sum; and though it may be difficult to fix its exact
+value, yet from many comparisons I conclude, that the return cannot be
+greatly short of three millions of dollars.
+
+This trade from Manilla to Acapulco and back again, is usually carried
+on in one or at most two annual ships, which set sail from Manilla
+about July, and arrive at Acapulco in the December, January, or
+February following, and having there disposed of their effects, return
+for Manilla some time in March, where they generally arrive in June;
+so that the whole voyage takes up very near an entire year: For this
+reason, though there is often no more than one ship employed at
+a time, yet there is always one ready for the sea when the other
+arrives; and therefore are provided three or four stout ships, that,
+in case of any accident, the trade may not be suspended.
+
+The ship having received her cargo on board, and being fitted for
+the sea, generally weighs from the mole of Cabite about the middle of
+July, taking the advantage of the westerly monsoon, which then sets
+in, to carry them to sea. It appears that the getting through the
+Boccadero to the eastward must be a troublesome navigation, and in
+fact it is sometimes the end of August before they get clear of the
+land. When they have got through this passage, and are clear of the
+islands, they stand to the northward of the east, in order to get into
+the latitude of thirty odd degrees, where they expect to meet
+with westerly winds, before which they run away for the coast of
+California.[2] It is most remarkable, that by the concurrent testimony
+of all the Spanish navigators, there is not one port, nor even a
+tolerable road, as yet found out betwixt the Philippine Islands and
+the coast of California and Mexico; so that from the time the Manilla
+ship first loses sight of land, she never lets go her anchor till she
+arrives on the coast of California, and very often not till she gets
+to its southermost extremity: And therefore, as this voyage is rarely
+of less than six months continuance, and the ship is deep laden with
+merchandise and crowded with people, it may appear wonderful how they
+can be supplied with a stock of fresh water for so long a time. A
+supply indeed they have, but the reliance upon it seems at first sight
+so extremely precarious, that it is wonderful such numbers should
+risque perishing by the most dreadful of all deaths, on the
+expectation of so casual a circumstance. In short, their only method
+of recruiting their water is by the rains, which they meet with
+between the latitudes of 30 deg. and 40 deg. north, and which they are always
+prepared to catch: For this purpose they take to sea with them a
+great number of mats, which they place slopingly against the gunwale,
+whenever the rain descends; these mats extend from one end of the ship
+to the other, and their lower edges rest on a large split bamboe, so
+that all the water which falls on the mats drain into the bamboe,
+and by this, as a trough, is conveyed into ajar; and this method of
+supplying their water, however accidental and extraordinary it may at
+first sight appear, hath never been known to fail them, so that it is
+common, for them, when their voyage is a little longer than usual, to
+fill all their water jars several times over.
+
+[Footnote 2: In the original is inserted a chart for the explanation
+of this track, which it is unnecessary to give here.--E.]
+
+The length of time employed in this passage, so much beyond what
+usually occurs in any other navigation, is perhaps in part to be
+imputed to the indolence and unskilfulness of the Spanish sailors, and
+to an unnecessary degree of caution and concern for so rich a vessel:
+For it is said, that they never set their main-sail in the night, and
+often lie by unnecessarily. And indeed the instructions given to their
+captains (which I have seen) seem to have been drawn up by such as
+were more apprehensive of too strong a gale, though favourable, than
+of the inconveniences and mortality attending a lingering and tedious
+voyage; for the captain is particularly ordered to make his passage in
+the latitude of 30 deg. if possible, and to be extremely, careful to
+stand no farther to the northward than is absolutely necessary for the
+getting a westerly wind. This, according to our conceptions, appears
+to be a very absurd restriction; since it can scarcely be doubted,
+that in the higher latitudes the westerly winds are much steadier and
+brisker than in the latitude of 30 deg.: So that the whole conduct of this
+navigation seems liable to very great censure. If instead of steering
+E.N.E. into the latitude of thirty odd degrees, they at first stood
+N.E., or even still more northerly, into the latitude of 40 deg. or 45 deg.,
+in part of which course the trade-winds would greatly assist them, I
+doubt not they might considerably contract their voyage. And this is
+not merely matter of speculation; for I am credibly informed, that
+about the year 1721, a French ship, by pursuing this course, ran from
+the coast of China to the valley of Vanderas on the coast of
+Mexico, in less than fifty days: But it was said that this ship,
+notwithstanding the shortness of her passage, suffered prodigiously
+by the scurvy, so that she had only four or five of her crew left when
+she arrived in America.
+
+The Manilla ship having stood so far to the northward as to meet with
+a westerly wind, stretches away nearly in the same latitude for the
+coast of California: And when she has run into the longitude of 96 deg.
+from Cape Espiritu, Santo, she generally meets with a plant floating
+on the sea, which, being called Porra by the Spaniards, is, I
+presume, a species of sea-leek. On the sight of this plant they esteem
+themselves sufficiently near the Californian shore, and immediately
+stand to the southward; they rely so much on this circumstance, that
+on the first discovery of the plant the whole ship's company chaunt
+a solemn _Te Deum_, esteeming the difficulties and hazards of their
+passage to be now at an end; and they constantly correct their
+longitude thereby, without ever coming within sight of land, till they
+draw near its southern extremity.
+
+The most usual time of the arrival of the galleon at Acapulco is
+towards the middle of January: But this navigation is so uncertain,
+that she sometimes gets in a month sooner, and at other times has been
+detained at sea above a month longer. The port of Acapulco is by
+much the securest and finest in all the northern parts of the Pacific
+Ocean; being, as it were, a bason surrounded by very high mountains:
+But the town is a most wretched place, and extremely unhealthy, for
+the air about it is so pent up by the hills, that it has scarcely any
+circulation. The place is besides destitute of fresh water; except
+what is brought from a considerable distance; and is in all respects
+so inconvenient, that except at the time of the mart, whilst the
+Manilla galleon is in the port, it is almost deserted.
+
+When the galleon arrives in this port, she is generally moored on its
+western side, and her cargo is delivered with all possible expedition.
+And now the town of Acapulco, from almost a solitude, is immediately
+thronged with merchants from all parts of the kingdom of Mexico. The
+cargo being landed and disposed of, the silver and the goods intended
+for Manilla are taken on board, together with provisions and water,
+and the ship prepares to put to sea with the utmost expedition.
+There is indeed no time to be lost; for it is an express order to the
+captain to be out of the port of Acapulco on his return, before the
+first day of April, N.S.
+
+The principal return is made in silver, and consequently the rest of
+the cargo is but of little account; the other articles, besides the
+silver, being some cochineal and a few sweetmeats, the produce of the
+American settlements, together with European millinery ware for the
+women at Manilla, and some Spanish wines, such as tent and sherry,
+which are intended for the use of their priests in the administration
+of the sacrament.
+
+This difference in the cargo of the ship to and from Manilla,
+occasions a very remarkable variety in the manner of equipping the
+ship for these two different voyages. For the galleon, when she sets
+sail from Manilla, being deep laden with a variety of bulky goods, has
+not the conveniency of mounting her lower tire of guns, but
+carries them in her hold, till she draws near Cape St Lucas, and is
+apprehensive of an enemy. Her hands too are as few as is consistent
+with the safety of the ship, that she may be less pestered with the
+stowage of provisions. But on her return from Acapulco, as her cargo
+lies in less room, her lower tire is (or ought to be) always mounted
+before she leaves the port, and her crew is augmented with a supply of
+sailors, and with one or two companies of foot, which are intended
+to reinforce the garrison at Manilla. And there being besides many
+merchants who take their passage to Manilla, her whole number of hands
+on her return is usually little short of six hundred, all which are
+easily provided for, by reason of the small stowage necessary for the
+silver. The galleon being thus fitted for her return, the captain, on
+leaving the port of Acapulco, steers for the latitude of 13 deg. or 14 deg.,
+and runs on that parallel, till he gets sight of the island of Guam,
+one of the Ladrones. In this run the captain is particularly directed
+to be careful of the shoals of St Bartholomew, and of the island of
+Gasparico. He is also told in his instructions, that to prevent his
+passing the Ladrones in the dark, there are orders given that, through
+all the month of June, fires shall be lighted every night on the
+highest part of Guam and Rota, and kept in till the morning.
+
+At Guam there is a small Spanish garrison, purposely intended to
+secure that place for the refreshment of the galleon, and to yield her
+all the assistance in their power. However, the danger of the road at
+Guam is so great, that though the galleon is ordered to call there,
+yet she rarely stays above a day of two, but getting her water and
+refreshments on board as soon as possible, she steers away directly
+for Cape Espiritu Santo, on the island of Samal. Here the captain is
+again ordered to look out for signals; and he is told, that centinels
+will be posted not only on that Cape, but likewise in Catanduanas,
+Butusan, Birriborongo, and on the island of Batan. These centinels
+are instructed to make a fire when they discover the ship, which the
+captain is carefully to observe: For if, after this first fire is
+extinguished, he perceives that four or more are lighted up again, he
+is then to conclude that there are enemies on the coast; and on this
+he is immediately to endeavour to speak with the centinel on shore,
+and to procure from him more particular intelligence of their force,
+and of the station they cruise in; pursuant to which, he is to
+regulate his conduct, and to endeavour to gain some secure port
+amongst those islands, without coming in sight of the enemy; and in
+case he should be discovered when in port, and should be apprehensive
+of attack, he is then to land his treasure, and to take some of his
+artillery on shore for its defence, not neglecting to send frequent
+and particular accounts to the city of Manilla of all that passes.
+But if, after the first fire on shore, the captain observes that two
+others only are made by the centinels, he is then to conclude, that
+there is nothing to fear: And he is to pursue his course without
+interruption, and to make the best of his way to the port of Cabite,
+which is the port to the city of Manilla, and the constant station for
+all the ships employed in this commerce to Acapulco.
+
+
+
+SECTION XXI.
+
+_Our Cruise off the Port of Acapulco for the Manilla Ship._
+
+I have already mentioned, that the return of our barge from the port
+of Acapulco, where she had surprised three negro fishermen, gave us
+inexpressible satisfaction, as we learnt from our prisoners, that the
+galleon was then preparing to put to sea, and that her departure was
+fixed, by an edict of the viceroy of Mexico, to the 14th of March,
+N.S. that is, to the 3d of March, according to our reckoning.
+
+Having satisfied ourselves upon this head, we indulged our curiosity
+in enquiring after other news; when the prisoners informed us, that
+they had received intelligence at Acapulco, of our having plundered
+and burnt the town of Paita; and that, on this occasion, the governor
+of Acapulco had augmented the fortifications of the place, and had
+taken several precautions to prevent us from forcing our way into the
+harbour; that in particular, he had placed a guard on the island which
+lies at the harbour's mouth, and that this guard had been withdrawn
+but two nights before the arrival of our barge: So that had the barge
+succeeded in her first attempt, or had she arrived at the port the
+second time two days sooner, she could scarcely have avoided being
+seized on, or if she had escaped, it must have been with the loss of
+the greatest part of her crew, as she would have been under the fire
+of the guard, before she had known her danger.
+
+The withdrawing of this guard was a circumstance that greatly
+encouraged us, as it seemed to demonstrate, not only that the enemy
+had not as yet discovered us, but likewise that they had now no
+farther apprehensions of our visiting their coast, indeed the
+prisoners assured us, that they had no knowledge of our being in those
+seas, and that they had therefore flattered themselves, that, in
+the long interval since our taking of Paita, we had steered another
+course. But we did not consider the opinion of these negro prisoners
+so authentic a proof of our being hitherto concealed, as the
+withdrawing of the guard from the harbour's mouth, which being the
+action of the governor, was of all arguments the most convincing, as
+he might be supposed to have intelligence, with which the rest of the
+inhabitants were unacquainted.
+
+Satisfied therefore that we were undiscovered, and that the time was
+fixed for the departure of the galleon from Acapulco, we made all
+necessary preparations, and waited with the utmost impatience for the
+important day. As this was the 3d of March, and it was the 19th of
+February when the barge returned and brought us our intelligence, the
+commodore resolved to continue the greatest part of the intermediate
+time on his present station, to the westward of Acapulco, conceiving
+that in this situation there would be less danger of his being seen
+from the shore, which was the only circumstance that could deprive us
+of the immense treasure, on which we had at present so eagerly fixed
+our thoughts. During this interval, we were employed in scrubbing and
+cleansing our ships, in bringing them into their most advantageous
+trim, and in regulating the orders, signals, and stations to be
+observed, when we should arrive off Acapulco, and the time of the
+departure of the galleon should draw nigh.
+
+On the first of March, we made the high lands, usually called the paps
+over Acapulco, and got with all possible expedition into the situation
+prescribed by the commodore's orders. The distribution of our squadron
+on this occasion, both for the intercepting the galleon, and for the
+avoiding a discovery from the shore, was so very judicious, that it
+well merits to be distinctly described.
+
+The Centurion brought the paps over the harbour to bear N.N.E., at
+fifteen leagues distance, which was a sufficient offing to prevent our
+being seen by the enemy. To the westward of the Centurion there was
+stationed the Carmelo, and to the eastward were the Tryal prize, the
+Gloucester, and the Carmin: These were all ranged in a circular line,
+and each ship was three leagues distant from the next; so that the
+Carmelo and the Carmin, which were the two extremes, were twelve
+leagues distant from each other: And as the galleon could, without
+doubt, be discerned at six leagues distance from either extremity,
+the whole sweep of our squadron, within which nothing could pass
+undiscovered, was at least twenty-four leagues in extent; and yet
+we were so connected by our signals, as to be easily and speedily
+informed of what was seen in any part of the line: And, to render this
+disposition still more complete, and to prevent even the possibility
+of the galleon's escaping us in the night, the two cutters belonging
+to the Centurion and the Gloucester were both manned and sent in
+shore; and were ordered to lie all day at the distance of four or five
+leagues from the entrance of the port, where they could not possibly
+be discovered; but they were directed in the night to stand nearer
+to the harbour's mouth, and as the light of the morning came on, to
+return back again to their day-posts. When the cutters should first
+discover the Manilla ship, one of them was to return to the squadron,
+and to make a signal, whether the galleon stood to the eastward or
+to the westward; whilst the other was to follow the galleon at a
+distance, and if it grew dark, to direct the squadron in their chace,
+by shewing false fires.
+
+Besides the care we had taken to prevent the galleon from passing us
+unobserved, we had not been inattentive to the means of engaging her
+to advantage, when we came up with her: For, considering the thinness
+of our hands, and the vaunting accounts given by the Spaniards of her
+size, her guns, and her strength, this was a consideration not to be
+neglected. As we supposed that none of our ships but the Centurion
+and the Gloucester were capable of lying alongside of her, we took
+on board the Centurion all the hands belonging to the Carmelo and the
+Carmin, except what were just sufficient to navigate those ships;
+and Captain Saunders was ordered to send from the Tryal prize
+ten Englishmen, and as many negroes, to reinforce the crew of the
+Gloucester. For the encouragement of our negroes, we promised them,
+that on their good behaviour they should all have their freedom; and
+as they had been almost every day trained to the management of the
+great guns for the two preceding months, they were very well qualified
+to be of service to us; and from their hopes of liberty, and in return
+for the usage they had met with amongst us, they seemed disposed to
+exert themselves to the utmost of their power.
+
+Being thus prepared for the reception of the galleon, we expected,
+with the utmost impatience, the so-often-mentioned third of March, the
+day fixed for her departure. And on that day we were all of us most
+eagerly engaged in looking out towards Acapulco; and we were so
+strangely prepossessed with the certainty of our intelligence, and
+with an assurance of her coming out of port, that some or other of us
+were constantly imagining they discovered one of our cutters returning
+with a signal. But, to our extreme vexation, both this day and the
+succeeding night passed without any news of the galleon: However,
+we did not yet despair, but were all heartily disposed to flatter
+ourselves, that some unforeseen accident had intervened, which might
+have put off her departure for a few days; and suggestions of this
+kind occurred in plenty, as we knew that the time fixed by the viceroy
+for her sailing was often prolonged on the petition of the merchants
+of Mexico. Thus we kept up our hopes, and did not abate of our
+vigilance; and as the 7th of March was Sunday the beginning of
+Passion-week, which is observed by the Papists with great strictness,
+and a total cessation from all kinds of labour, so that no ship is
+permitted to stir out of port during the whole week, this quieted our
+apprehensions for some days, and disposed us not to expect the galleon
+till the week following. On the Friday in this week our cutters
+returned to us, the officers being very confident that the galleon was
+still in port, and that she could not possibly have come out but they
+must have seen her. On the Monday morning succeeding Passion-week,
+that is, on the 15th of March, the cutters were again dispatched
+to their old station, and our hopes were once more indulged in as
+sanguine prepossessions as before; but in a week's time our eagerness
+was greatly abated, and a general dejection and despondency took
+place. It is true, there were some few amongst us who still kept
+up their spirits, and were very ingenious in finding out reasons to
+satisfy themselves, that the disappointment had been occasioned by a
+casual delay of the galleon, which a few days would remove, and not
+by a total suspension of her departure for the whole season: But these
+speculations were not relished by the generality of our people; for
+they were persuaded that the enemy had, by some accident, discovered
+our being upon the coast, and had therefore laid an embargo on the
+galleon till the next year. And indeed this persuasion was but too
+well founded; for we afterwards learnt, that our barge, when sent on
+the discovery of the port of Acapulco, had been seen from the
+shore; and that this circumstance (no embarkations but canoes
+ever frequenting that coast) was to them a sufficient proof of the
+neighbourhood of our squadron; on which they stopped the galleon till
+the succeeding year.
+
+The commodore himself, though he declared not his opinion, was yet in
+his own thoughts very apprehensive that we were discovered, and that
+the departure of the galleon was put off; and he had, in consequence
+of this opinion, formed a plan for possessing himself of Acapulco;
+for he had no doubt that the treasure remained in the town, though the
+orders for dispatching the galleon were countermanded.[3]
+
+[Footnote 3: It is unnecessary to detail this plan, as, for sufficient
+reasons soon discovered, it was not attempted to be executed.--E.]
+
+His scheme was formed on a supposition that the galleon was detained
+till the next year; but as this was a matter of opinion only, and not
+founded on intelligence, and there was a possibility that she might
+still put to sea in a short time, the commodore thought it prudent
+to continue his cruise upon this station, as long as the necessary
+attention to his stores of wood and water, and to the convenient
+season for his future passage to China, would give him leave; and
+therefore, as the cutters had been ordered to remain, before Acapulco
+till the 23d of March, the squadron did not change its position till
+that day; when the cutters not appearing, we were in some pain for
+them, apprehending they might have suffered either from the enemy or
+the weather; but we were relieved from our concern the next morning,
+when we discovered them, though at a great distance and to the leeward
+of the squadron: We bore down to them and took them up and were
+informed by them, that, conformable to their orders, they had left
+their station the day before, without having seen any thing of the
+galleon; and we found, that the reason of their being so far to
+the leeward of us was a strong current, which had driven the whole
+squadron to windward.
+
+It afterwards appeared that this prolongation of our cruise was a very
+prudent measure, and afforded us no contemptible chance of seizing the
+treasure, on which we had so long fixed our thoughts. For it seems,
+after the embargo was laid on the galleon, the persons principally
+interested in the cargo sent several expresses to Mexico, to beg
+that she might still be permitted to depart: For as they knew, by the
+accounts sent from Paita, that we had not more than three hundred men
+in all, they insisted that there was nothing to be feared from us;
+for that the galleon (carrying above twice as many hands as our whole
+squadron) would be greatly an overmatch for us. Though the viceroy was
+inflexible; yet, on this representation, she was kept ready for the
+sea for near three weeks after the first order came to detain her.
+
+When we had taken up the cutters, all the ships being joined, the
+commodore made a signal to speak with their commanders; and upon
+enquiry into the stock of fresh water remaining on board the squadron,
+it was found to be so very slender, that we were under a necessity of
+quitting our station to procure a fresh supply. It was agreed, that
+the harbour of Seguataneo or Chequetan being the nearest to us, was,
+on that account, the most eligible; it was therefore immediately
+resolved to make the best of our way thither: And that, even while
+we were recruiting our water, we might not abandon our views upon the
+galleon, which perhaps, upon certain intelligence of our ship being
+employed at Chequetan, might venture to slip out to sea; our cutter,
+under the command of Mr Hughes, the lieutenant of the Tryal prize, was
+ordered to cruise off the port of Acapulco for twenty-four days, that
+if the galleon should set sail in that interval, we might be speedily
+informed of it. In pursuance of these resolutions we endeavoured
+to ply to the westward, to gain our intended port, but were often
+interrupted in our progress by calms and adverse currents: In these
+intervals we employed ourselves in taking out the most valuable part
+of the cargoes of the Carmelo and Carmin prizes, which two ships we
+intended to destroy as soon as we had tolerably cleared them. By the
+first of April we were so far advanced towards Seguataneo, that we
+thought it expedient to send out two boats, that they might range
+along the coast, and discover the watering-place; they were gone some
+days, and our water being now very short, it was a particular felicity
+to us that we met with daily supplies of turtle, for had we been
+entirely confined to salt provisions, we must have suffered
+extremely in so warm a climate. Indeed our present circumstances were
+sufficiently alarming, and gave the most considerate amongst us
+as much concern as any of the numerous perils we had hitherto
+encountered; for our boats, as we conceived by their not returning,
+had not as yet discovered a place proper to water at, and by the
+leakage of our cask and other accidents, we had not ten days water
+on board the whole squadron; so that from the known difficulty of
+procuring water on this coast, and the little reliance we had on
+the Buccaneer writers, (the only guides we had to trust to) we were
+apprehensive of being soon exposed to a calamity, the most terrible
+of any in the long disheartening catalogue of the distresses of a
+sea-faring life.
+
+But these gloomy suggestions were soon happily ended; for our boats
+returned on the 5th of April, having discovered a place proper for our
+purpose, about seven miles to the westward of the rocks of Seguataneo,
+which, by the description they gave of it, appeared to be the port
+called by Dampier the harbour of Chequetan. They were ordered out
+again the next day, to sound the harbour and its entrance, which they
+had represented as very narrow. At their return they reported the
+place to be free from any danger; so that on the 7th we stood in, and
+that evening came to an anchor in eleven fathom. The Gloucester came
+to an anchor at the same time with us; but the Camelo and the Carmin
+having fallen to leeward, the Tryal prize was ordered to join them,
+and to bring them in, which in two or three days she effected.
+
+
+
+SECTION XXII.
+
+_A short Account of Chequetan, and of the adjacent Coast and Country._
+
+The harbour of Chequetan lies in the latitude of 17 deg. 36' N. and is
+about thirty leagues to the westward of Acapulco. It is easy to
+be discovered by any ship that will keep well in with the land,
+especially by such as range down coast from Acapulco, and will attend
+to the following particulars.
+
+There is a beach of sand which extends eighteen leagues from the
+harbour of Acapulco to the westward, against which the sea breaks with
+such violence that it is impossible to land in any part of it; but yet
+the ground is so clean; that ships, in the fair season, may anchor in
+great safety at the distance of a mile or two from the shore. The land
+adjacent to this beach is generally low, full of villages, and planted
+with a great number of trees; and on the tops of some small eminencies
+there are several look-out towers, so that the face of the country
+affords a very agreeable prospect: For the cultivated part, which is
+the part here described, extends some leagues back from the shore, and
+there appears to be bounded by the chain of mountains, which stretch
+to a considerable distance on either side of Acapulco. It is a most
+remarkable particularity, that in this whole extent, being, as hath
+been mentioned, eighteen leagues, and containing, in appearance, the
+most populous and best planted district of the whole coast, there
+should be neither canoes, boats, nor any other embarkations either for
+fishing, coasting, or for pleasure.
+
+The beach here described is the surest guide for finding the harbour
+of Chequetan; for five miles to the westward of the extremity of this
+beach there appears a hummock, which at first makes like an island,
+and is in shape not very unlike the hill of Petaplan, hereafter
+mentioned, though much smaller. Three miles to the westward of this
+hummock is a white rock lying near the shore, which cannot easily be
+passed by unobserved; it is about two cables length from the land,
+and lies in a large bay about nine leagues over. The westward point
+of this bay is the hill of Petaplan. This hill, like the forementioned
+hummock, may be at first mistaken for an island, though it be, in
+reality, a peninsula, which is joined to the continent by a low and
+narrow isthmus, covered over with shrubs and small trees. The bay of
+Seguataneo extends from this hill a great way to the westward; and at
+a small distance from the hill, and opposite to the entrance of
+the bay, there is an assemblage of rocks, which are white, from the
+excrements of boobies and tropical birds. Four of these rocks are high
+and large, and, together with several other smaller ones, are, by
+the help of a little imagination, pretended to resemble the form of a
+cross, and are called the White Friars. These rocks bear W. by N.
+from Petaplan, and about seven miles to the westward of them lies the
+harbour of Chequetan, which is still more minutely distinguished by a
+large and single rock, that rises out of the water a mile and a half
+distant from its entrance, and bears S. 1/2 W. from the middle of
+it.[1]
+
+[Footnote 1: In the original are references to some plates, which
+cannot be given in this work.--E.]
+
+These are the infallible marks by which the harbour of Chequetan may
+be known to those who keep well in with the land; and I must add, that
+the coast is no ways to be dreaded from the middle of October to the
+beginning of May, nor is there then any danger from the winds, though
+in the remaining part of the year there are frequent and violent
+tornadoes, heavy rains, and hard gales, in all directions of the
+compass. But as to those who keep at any considerable distance from
+the coast, there is no other method to be taken by them for finding
+this harbour than that of making it by its latitude; for there are so
+many ranges of mountains rising one upon the back of another within
+land, that no drawings of the appearance of the coast can be at all
+depended on when off at sea, for every little change of distance, or
+variation of position, brings new mountains in view, and produces an
+infinity of different prospects, which would render all attempts of
+delineating the aspect of the coast impossible.
+
+The harbour is environed on all sides, except to the westward, with
+high mountains overspread with trees. The passage into it is very safe
+on either side of the rock that lies off the mouth of it, though we,
+both in coming in and going out, left it to the eastward. The ground
+without the harbour is gravel mixed with stones, but within it is soft
+mud: And it must be remembered, that in coming to an anchor a good
+allowance should be made for a large swell, which frequently causes a
+great send of the sea; as likewise for the ebbing and flowing of the
+tide, which we observed to be about five feet, and that it set nearly
+E. and W.
+
+The watering-place had the appearance of a large standing lake,
+without any visible outlet into the sea, from which it is separated
+by a part of the strand. The origin of this lake is a spring, that
+bubbles out of the ground near half a mile within the country. We
+found the water a little brackish, but more considerably so towards
+the sea-side, for the nearer we advanced towards the spring-head,
+the softer and fresher it proved: This laid us under a necessity
+of filling all our casks from the furthest part of the lake, and
+occasioned us some trouble, and would have proved still more difficult
+had it not been for our particular management, which, for the
+conveniency of it, deserves to be recommended to all who shall
+hereafter water at this place. Our method consisted in making use of
+canoes which drew but little water; for, loading them with a number of
+small casks, they easily got up the lake to the spring-head, and the
+small casks being there filled, were in the same manner transported
+back again to the beach, where some of our hands always attended to
+start them into other casks of a larger size.
+
+Though this lake, during our continuance there, appeared to have no
+outlet into the sea, yet there is reason to suppose that in the wet
+season it overflows the strand, and communicates with the ocean; for
+Dampier, who was formerly here, speaks of it as a large river. Indeed,
+there must be a very great body of water amassed before the lake can
+rise high enough to overflow the strand, for the neighbouring country
+is so low, that great part of it must be covered with water before it
+can run out over the beach.
+
+As the country in the neighbourhood, particularly the tract which we
+have already described, appeared to be well peopled and cultivated, we
+hoped thence to have procured fresh provision and other refreshments
+which we stood in need of. With this view, the morning after we came
+to an anchor, the commodore ordered a party of forty men, well armed,
+to march into the country, and to endeavour to discover some town
+or village, where they were to attempt a correspondence with the
+inhabitants; for we doubted not if we could have any intercourse with
+them, but that by presents of some of the coarse merchandise, with
+which our prizes abounded (which, though of little consequence to us,
+would to them be extremely valuable,) we should allure them to furnish
+us with whatever fruits or fresh provisions were in their power. Our
+people were directed on this occasion to proceed with the greatest
+circumspection, and to make as little ostentation of hostility as
+possible; for we were sensible that we could meet with no wealth here
+worth our notice, and that what necessaries we really wanted we
+should in all probability be better supplied with by an open amicable
+traffic, than by violence and force of arms. But this endeavour of
+opening an intercourse with the inhabitants proved ineffectual, for
+towards evening, the party which had been ordered to march into the
+country, returned greatly fatigued with their unusual exercise, and
+some of them so far spent as to have fainted by the way, and to be
+obliged to be brought back upon the shoulders of their companions.
+They had marched in all, as they conceived, about ten miles, in a
+beaten road, where they often saw the fresh dung of horses or mules.
+When they had got about five miles from the harbour, the road divided
+between the mountains into two branches, one running to the east and
+the other to the west. After some deliberation about the course they
+should take, they agreed to pursue the eastern road, which, when they
+had followed for some time, led them at once into a large plain or
+savannah; on one side of which they discovered a centinel on horseback
+with a pistol in his hand: It was supposed that when they first saw
+him he was asleep, but his horse startled at the glittering of their
+arms, and, turning round suddenly, rode off with his master, who was
+very near being unhorsed in the surprise, but he recovered his seat,
+and escaped with the loss of his hat and his pistol, which he dropped
+on the ground. Our people ran after him, in hopes of discovering
+some village or habitation, but as he had the advantage of being on
+horseback, they soon lost sight of him. However, they were unwilling
+to come back without making some discovery, and therefore still
+followed the track they were in; but the heat of the day increasing,
+and finding no water to quench their thirst, they were first obliged
+to halt, and then resolved to return; for, as they saw no signs of
+plantations or cultivated land, they had no reason to believe that
+there was any village or settlement near them: But, to leave no means
+untried of procuring some intercourse with the people, the
+officers stuck up several poles in the road, to which were affixed
+declarations, written in Spanish, encouraging the inhabitants to
+come down to the harbour and to traffic with us, giving the strongest
+assurances of a kind reception, and faithful payment for any
+provisions they should bring us. This was doubtless a very prudent
+measure, but it produced no effect; for we never saw any of them
+during the whole time of our continuance at this port of Chequetan.
+But had our men, upon the division of the path, taken the western road
+instead of the eastern, it would soon have led them to a village or
+town, which, in some Spanish manuscripts, is mentioned as being in
+the neighbourhood of this port, and which we afterwards learnt was not
+above two miles from that turning.
+
+And on this occasion I cannot help mentioning another adventure which
+happened to some of our people in the bay of Petaplan, as it may help
+to give the reader a just idea of the temper of the inhabitants of
+this part of the world. Some time after our arrival at Chequetan,
+Lieutenant Brett was sent by the commodore, with two of our boats
+under his command, to examine the coast to the eastward, particularly
+to make observations on the bay and watering-place of Petaplan. As Mr
+Brett with one of the boats was preparing to go on shore towards the
+hill of Petaplan, he, accidentally looking across the bay, perceived,
+on the opposite strand, three small squadrons of horse parading upon
+the beach, and seeming to advance towards the place where he proposed
+to land. On sight of this he immediately put off the boat, though he
+had but sixteen men with him, and stood over the bay towards them; and
+he soon came near enough to perceive that they were mounted on very
+sightly horses, and were armed with carbines and lances. On seeing him
+make towards them they formed upon the beach, and seemed resolved to
+dispute his landing, firing several distant shot at him as he drew
+near; till at last, the boat being arrived within a reasonable
+distance of the most advanced squadron, Mr Brett ordered his people
+to fire, upon which this resolute cavalry instantly ran in great
+confusion into the wood. In this precipitate flight one of their
+horses fell down and threw his rider; but whether he was wounded or
+not we could not learn, for both man and horse soon got up again, and
+followed the rest. In the mean time the other two squadrons, who were
+drawn up at a great distance behind, out of the reach of our shot,
+were calm spectators of the rout of their comrades; for they had
+halted on our first approach, and never advanced afterwards. It was,
+doubtless, fortunate for our people that the enemy acted with so
+little prudence, and exerted so little spirit, for had they concealed
+themselves till our men had landed, it is scarcely possible but
+the whole boat's crew must have fallen into their hands, since the
+Spaniards were not much short of two hundred in number. However,
+the discovery of so considerable a force collected in this bay of
+Petaplan, obliged us constantly to keep a boat or two before it; for
+we were apprehensive that the cutter, which we had left to cruise off
+Acapulco, might, on her return, be surprised by the enemy, if she did
+not receive timely information of her danger.
+
+After our unsuccessful attempt to engage the people of the country
+to furnish us with the necessaries we wanted, we were obliged to be
+contented with what we could procure in the neighbourhood of the
+port. We caught fish here in tolerable quantities, especially when the
+smoothness of the water permitted us to hale the seyne. Amongst the
+rest, we got here cavallies, breams, mullets, soles, fiddle-fish, sea
+eggs, and lobsters; and here, and in no other place, met with that
+extraordinary fish called the Torpedo, or numbing fish, which is in
+shape very like the fiddle-fish, and is not to be known from it but by
+a brown circular spot of about the bigness of a crown-piece near the
+centre of its back; perhaps its figure will be better understood when
+I say it is a flat fish, much resembling the thorn-back. This fish is
+of a most singular nature, productive of the strangest effects on the
+human body; for whoever handles it, or happens even to set his foot
+upon it, is presently seized with a numbness all over him, but more
+distinguishable in that limb which was in immediate contact with it.
+The same effect, too, will be, in some degree, produced by touching
+the fish, with any thing held in the hand; for I myself had a
+considerable degree of numbness conveyed to my right arm through a
+walking cane, which I rested on the body of the fish for some time,
+and I make no doubt but I should have been much more sensibly affected
+had not the fish been near expiring when I made the experiment: For it
+is observable that this influence acts with most vigour when the fish
+is first taken out of the water, and entirely ceases when it is
+dead, so that it may be then handled, or even eaten, without any
+inconvenience. I shall only add that the numbness of my arm on
+this occasion did not go off on a sudden, as the accounts of some
+naturalists gave me reason to expect, but diminished gradually, so
+that I had some sensation of it remaining till the next day.
+
+To the account given of the fish we met with here, I must add, that
+though turtle now grew scarce, and we met with none in this harbour of
+Chequetan, yet our boats, which, as I have mentioned, were stationed
+off Petaplan, often supplied us therewith; and though this was a food
+that we had now been so long as it were confined to, (for it was the
+only fresh provisions which we had tasted for near six months,) yet we
+were far from being cloyed with it, or finding that the relish we had
+of it at all diminished.
+
+The animals we met with on shore were principally guanos, with which
+the country abounds, and which are by some reckoned delicious food.
+We saw no beasts of prey here, except alligators, several of which
+our people discovered, but none of them very large. However, we were
+satisfied there were tygers in the woods, though none of them came in
+sight; for we every morning found the beach near the watering-place
+imprinted with their footsteps: But we never apprehended any mischief
+from them, for they are by no means so fierce as the Asiatic or
+African tyger, and are rarely, if ever, known to attack mankind. Birds
+were in sufficient plenty, especially pheasants of different kinds,
+some of them of an uncommon size, but they were very dry and tasteless
+food. Besides these we had a variety of smaller birds, particularly
+parrots, which we often killed for food.
+
+The fruits and vegetable refreshments at this place were neither
+plentiful, nor of the best kinds: There were, it is true, a few
+bushes scattered about the woods, which supplied us with limes, but we
+scarcely could procure enough for our present use; and these, with
+a small plumb of an agreeable acid, called in Jamaica the hog-plumb,
+together with another fruit called a papah, were the only fruits to be
+found in the woods. Nor is there any other useful vegetable here worth
+mentioning, except brook-lime: This indeed grew in great quantities
+near the fresh-water banks; and, as it was esteemed an antiscorbutic,
+we fed upon it frequently, though its extreme bitterness made it very
+unpalatable.
+
+By all that has been said, it will appear that the conveniences of
+this port of Chequetan, particularly in the articles of refreshment,
+are not altogether such as might be desired: But, upon the whole, it
+is a place of considerable consequence, as the only secure harbour in
+a vast extent of coast, except Acapulco.
+
+
+
+SECTION XXIII.
+
+_Account of Proceedings at Chequetan and on the adjacent Coast, till
+our setting sail for Asia._
+
+The next morning, after our coming to an anchor in the harbour of
+Chequetan, we sent about ninety of our men well armed on shore, forty
+of whom were ordered to march into the country, as has been mentioned,
+and the remaining fifty were employed to cover the watering-place, and
+to prevent any interruption from the natives.
+
+Here it was agreed, after mature consultation, to destroy the Tryal's
+prize, as well as the Carmelo and Carmin whose fate had been before
+resolved on. Indeed the ship was in good repair and fit for the sea;
+but as the whole numbers onboard our squadron did not amount to the
+complement of a fourth-rate man of war, we found it was impossible
+to divide them into three ships, without rendering them incapable
+of navigating in safety in the tempestuous weather we had reason to
+expect on the coast of China, where we supposed we should arrive about
+the time of the change of the monsoons.
+
+During our stay here there happened an incident, which, as it proved
+the means of convincing our friends in England of our safety, which
+for some time they were in doubt about, I shall beg leave particularly
+to recite. I have observed, that from this harbour of Chequetan there
+was but one path-way which led through the woods into the country.
+This we found much beaten, and were thence convinced that it was well
+known to the inhabitants. As it passed by the spring-head, and was
+the only avenue by which the Spaniards could approach us, we, at some
+distance beyond the spring-head, felled several large trees, and laid
+them one upon the other across the path; and at this barricado we
+constantly kept a guard: And we besides ordered our men employed in
+watering to have their arms ready, and, in case of any alarm, to march
+instantly to this post. Though our principal intention was to prevent
+our being disturbed by any sudden attack of the enemy's horse, yet it
+answered another purpose, which was not in itself less important; this
+was to hinder our own people from straggling singly into the country,
+where we had reason to believe they would be surprised by the
+Spaniards, who would doubtless be extremely solicitous to pick up some
+of them, in hopes of getting intelligence of our future designs.
+To avoid this inconvenience, the strictest orders were given to the
+centinels, to let no person whatever pass beyond their post: But,
+notwithstanding this precaution, we missed one Lewis Leger, who was
+the commodore's cook; and as he was a Frenchman, and suspected to be
+a papist, it was by some imagined that he had deserted with a view
+of betraying all that he knew to the enemy; but this appeared by the
+event to be an ill-grounded surmise, for it was afterwards known
+that he had been taken by some Indians, who carried him prisoner to
+Acapulco, from whence he was transferred, to Mexico, and then to Vera
+Cruz, where he was shipped on board a vessel bound to Old Spain: And
+the vessel being obliged by some accident to put into Lisbon, Leger
+escaped on shore, and was by the British consul sent from thence to
+England; where he brought the first authentic account of the safety of
+the commodore, and of what he had done in the South Seas. The relation
+he gave of his own seizure was, that he had rambled into the woods
+at some distance from the barricade, where he had first attempted to
+pass, but had been stopped and threatened to be punished; that his
+principal view was to get a quantity of limes for his master's store;
+and that in this occupation he was surprised by four Indians, who
+stripped him naked, and carried him in that condition to Acapulco,
+exposed to the scorching heat of the sun, which at that time of the
+year shone with its greatest violence: And afterwards at Mexico his
+treatment in prison was sufficiently severe, and the whole course
+of his captivity was a continued instance of the hatred which the
+Spaniards bear to all those who endeavour to disturb them in the
+peaceable possession of the coasts of the South Seas. Indeed, Leger's
+fortune was upon the whole extremely singular; for after the hazards
+he had run in the commodore's squadron, and the severities he had
+suffered in his long confinement amongst the enemy, a more fatal
+disaster attended him on his return to England: For though, when he
+arrived in London, some of Mr Anson's friends interested themselves in
+relieving him from the poverty to which his captivity had reduced him,
+yet he did not long enjoy the benefit of their humanity, for he was
+killed in an insignificant night brawl, the cause of which could
+scarcely be discovered.
+
+And here I must observe, that though the enemy never appeared in sight
+during our stay in this harbour; yet we perceived that there were
+large parties encamped in the woods about us; for we could see their
+smokes, and could thence determine that they were posted in a circular
+line surrounding us at a distance; and just before our coming away
+they seemed, by the increase of their fires, to have received a
+considerable reinforcement.
+
+Towards the latter end of April, the unloading of our three prizes,
+our wooding and watering, and, in short, all our proposed employments
+at the harbour of Chequetan were completed: So that, on the 27th of
+April, the Tryal's prize, the Carmelo, and the Carmin, all which we
+intended to destroy, were towed on shore and scuttled, and a quantity
+of combustible materials were distributed in their upper works; and
+the next morning the Centurion and the Gloucester weighed anchor, but
+as there was but little wind, and that not in their favour, they were
+obliged to warp out of the harbour. When they had reached the offing,
+one of the boats was dispatched back again to set fire to our prize,
+which was accordingly executed. And a canoe was left fixed to a
+grapnel in the middle of the harbour, with a bottle in it well corked,
+inclosing a letter to Mr Hughes, who commanded the cutter, which was
+ordered to cruise before the port of Acapulco, when we came off that
+station. And on this occasion I must mention more particularly than I
+have yet done, the views of the commodore in leaving the cutter before
+that port.
+
+When we were necessitated to make for Chequetan to take in our water,
+Mr Anson considered that our being in that harbour would soon be known
+at Acapulco; and therefore he hoped, that on the intelligence of our
+being employed in port, the galleon might put to sea, especially as
+Chequetan is so very remote from the course generally steered by the
+galleon: He therefore ordered the cutter to cruise twenty-four
+days off the port of Acapulco, and her commander was directed, on
+perceiving the galleon under sail, to make the best of his way to the
+commodore at Chequetan. As the Centurion was doubtless a much better
+sailer than the galleon, Mr Anson in this case resolved to have got
+to sea as soon as possible, and to have pursued the galleon across the
+Pacific Ocean: And supposing he should not have met with her in his
+passage, (which considering that he would have kept nearly the same
+parallel, was not very improbable,) yet he was certain of arriving
+off Cape Espiritu Santo, on the island of Samal, before her; and that
+being the first land she makes on her return to the Philippines, we
+could not have failed to have fallen in with her, by cruising a few
+days in that station. But the viceroy of Mexico ruined this project by
+keeping the galleon in the port of Acapulco all that year.
+
+The letter left in the canoe for Mr Hughes, the commander of the
+cutter, the time of whose return was now considerably elapsed,
+directed him to go back immediately to his former station before
+Acapulco, where he would find Mr Anson, who resolved to cruise for him
+there for a certain number of days; after which it was added, that
+the commodore would return to the southward to join the rest of the
+squadron. This last article was inserted to deceive the Spaniards, if
+they got possession of the canoe, (as we afterwards learnt they did)
+but could not impose on Mr Hughes, who well knew that the commodore
+had no squadron to join, nor any intention of steering back to Peru.
+
+Being now in the offing of Chequetan, bound cross the vast Pacific
+Ocean in our way to China, we were impatient to run off the coast as
+soon as possible; for as the stormy season was approaching apace, and
+as we had no further views in the American seas, we had hoped that
+nothing would have prevented us from standing to the westward, the
+moment we got out of the harbour of Chequetan: And it was no small
+mortification to us, that our necessary employment there had detained
+us so much longer than we expected; and now we were farther detained
+by the absence of the cutter, and the standing towards Acapulco in
+search of her. Indeed, as the time of her cruise had been expired near
+a fortnight, we suspected that she had been discovered from the shore;
+and that the governor of Acapulco had thereupon sent out a force to
+seize her, which, as she carried but six hands, was no very difficult
+enterprize. However, this being only conjecture, the commodore, as
+soon as we got clear of the harbour of Chequetan, stood along the
+coast to the eastward in search of her: And to prevent her from
+passing by us in the dark, we brought to every night; and the
+Gloucester, whose station was a league within us towards the shore,
+carried a light which the cutter could not but perceive if she kept
+along shore, as we supposed she would do; and as a farther security,
+the Centurion and the Gloucester alternately showed two false fires
+every half hour.
+
+By Sunday, the 2d of May, we were advanced within three leagues of
+Acapulco, and having seen nothing of our boat, we gave her over for
+lost, which, besides the compassionate concern for our shipmates, and
+for what it was apprehended they might have suffered, was in itself
+a misfortune in our present scarcity of hands, we were all greatly
+interested in: For the crew of the cutter, consisting of six men and
+the lieutenant, were the very flower of our people, purposely picked
+out for this service, and known to be every one of them of tried
+and approved resolution, and as skilful seamen as ever trod a deck.
+However, as it was the general belief among us that they were taken
+and carried into Acapulco, the commodore's prudence suggested a
+project which we hoped would recover them. This was founded on our
+having many Spanish and Indian prisoners in our possession, and
+a number of sick negroes, who could be of no service to us in the
+navigating of the ship. The commodore therefore wrote a letter the
+same day to the governor of Acapulco, telling him that he would
+release them all, provided the governor returned the cutter's crew;
+and the letter was dispatched the same afternoon by a Spanish officer,
+of whose honour we had a good opinion, and who was furnished with
+a launch belonging to one of our prizes, and a crew of six other
+prisoners who all gave their parole for their return. The officer,
+besides the commodore's letter, carried with him a petition signed by
+all the prisoners, beseeching his excellency to acquiesce in the terms
+proposed. From a consideration of the number of our prisoners, and
+the quality of some of them, we did not doubt but the governor would
+readily comply, and therefore we kept plying on and off the whole
+night, intending to keep well in with the land, that we might receive
+an answer at the limited time, which was the next day, being Monday:
+But both on the Monday and Tuesday we were driven so far off shore,
+that we could not hope to receive any answer; and on the Wednesday
+morning we found ourselves fourteen leagues from the harbour of
+Acapulco; but as the wind was now favourable, we pressed forwards with
+all our sail, and did not doubt of getting in with the land in a
+few hours. Whilst we were thus standing in, the man at the mast-head
+called out that he saw a boat under sail at a considerable distance
+to the south-eastward: This we took for granted was the answer of the
+governor to the commodore's message, and we instantly edged towards
+it; but when we drew nearer, we found to our unspeakable joy that it
+was our own cutter. While she was still at a distance, we imagined
+that she had been discharged out of the port of Acapulco by the
+governor; but when she drew nearer, the wan and meagre countenances of
+the crew, the length of their beards, and the feeble and hollow tone
+of their voices, convinced us that they had suffered much greater
+hardships than could be expected from even the severities of a
+Spanish prison. They were obliged to be helped into the ship, and were
+immediately put to bed, and with rest, and nourishing diet, which
+they were plentifully supplied with, from the commodore's table, they
+recovered their health and vigour apace. We learnt that they had kept
+the sea the whole time of their absence; that when they finished their
+cruise before Acapulco, and had just begun to ply to the westward in
+order to join the squadron, a strong adverse current had forced them
+down the coast to the eastward in spite of all their efforts; that at
+length their water being all expended, they were obliged to search
+the coast farther on to the eastward, in quest of some convenient
+landing-place, where they might get a fresh supply; that in this
+distress they ran upwards of eighty leagues to leeward, and found
+every where so large a surf, that there was not the least possibility
+of their landing; that they passed some days in this dreadful
+situation without water, and having no other means left them to allay
+their thirst than sucking the blood of the turtle which they caught;
+and at last, giving up all hopes of relief, the heat of the climate
+augmenting their necessities, and rendering their sufferings
+insupportable, they abandoned themselves to despair, fully persuaded
+that they should perish by the most terrible of all deaths; but that
+they were soon after happily relieved by a most unexpected incident,
+for there fell so heavy a rain, that by spreading their sails
+horizontally, and by putting bullets in the centres of them to draw
+them to a point, they caught as much water as filled all their casks;
+that immediately upon this fortunate supply they stood to the westward
+in quest of the commodore; and being now luckily favoured by a strong
+current, they joined us in less than fifty hours, from the time
+they stood to the westward, after having been absent from us full
+forty-three days. Those who have an idea of the inconsiderable size of
+a cutter belonging to a sixty-gun ship, (being only an open boat
+about twenty-two feet in length,) and who will attend to the various
+accidents to which she was exposed during a six weeks continuance
+alone, in the open ocean, on so impracticable and dangerous a coast,
+will readily own that her return to us, after all the difficulties
+which she actually experienced, and the hazards to which she was each
+hour exposed, was little short of miraculous.
+
+I cannot finish this article without remarking how little reliance
+navigators ought to have on the accounts of the Buccaneer writers:
+For though in this run eighty leagues to the eastward of Acapulco,
+she found no place where it was possible for a boat to land, yet
+those writers have not been ashamed to feign harbours and convenient
+watering-places within these limits, thereby exposing such as should
+confide in their relations to the risk of being destroyed by thirst.
+
+Having received our cutter, the sole object of our coming a second
+time before Acapulco, the commodore resolved not to lose a moment's
+time longer, but to run off the coast with the utmost expedition, both
+as the stormy season on the coast of Mexico was now approaching apace,
+and as we were apprehensive of having the westerly monsoon to struggle
+with when we came upon the coast of China; and therefore he no longer
+stood towards Acapulco, as he now wanted no answer from the governor;
+but yet he resolved not to deprive his prisoners of the liberty which
+he had promised them; so that they were all immediately embarked in
+two launches which belonged to our prizes, those from the Centurion in
+one launch, and those from the Gloucester in the other. The launches
+were well equipped with masts, sails, and oars, and, lest the wind
+might prove unfavourable, they had a stock of water and provisions
+put on board them sufficient for fourteen days. There were discharged
+thirty-nine persons from on board the Centurion, and eighteen from the
+Gloucester, the greatest part of them Spaniards, the rest Indians and
+sick negroes: But as our crews were very weak, we kept the mulattoes
+and some of the stoutest of the negroes, with a few Indians, to assist
+us; but we dismissed every Spanish prisoner whatever. We have since
+learnt, that these two launches arrived safe at Acapulco, where the
+prisoners could not enough extol the humanity with which they had been
+treated; and that the governor, before their arrival, had returned a
+very obliging answer to the commodore's letter, and had attended it
+with a present of two boats laden with the choicest refreshments and
+provisions which were to be got at Acapulco; but that these boats
+not having found our ships, were at length obliged to put back again,
+after having thrown all their provisions overboard in a storm which
+threatened their destruction.
+
+The sending away our prisoners was our last transaction on the
+American coast; for no sooner had we parted with them, than we and the
+Gloucester made sail to the S.W., proposing to get a good offing from
+the land, where we hoped, in a few days, to meet with the regular
+trade-wind, which the accounts of former navigators had represented as
+much brisker and steadier in this ocean, than in any other part of the
+globe: For it has been esteemed no uncommon passage to run from
+hence to the eastermost parts of Asia in two months; and we flattered
+ourselves that we were as capable of making an expeditious passage as
+any ships that had ever run this course before us; so that we hoped
+soon to gain the coast of China, for which we were now bound. And
+conformable to the general idea of this navigation given by former
+voyagers, we considered it as free from all kinds of embarrassment of
+bad weather, fatigue, or sickness; and consequently we undertook it
+with alacrity, especially as it was no contemptible step towards oar
+arrival at our native country, for which many of us by this time began
+to have great longings. Thus, on the 6th of May, we, for the last
+time, lost sight of the mountains of Mexico, persuaded, that in a
+few weeks we should arrive at the river of Canton in China, where
+we expected to meet with many English ships, and numbers of our
+countrymen; and hoped to enjoy the advantages of an amicable,
+well-frequented port, inhabited by a polished people, and abounding
+with the conveniences and indulgences of a civilized life, which for
+near twenty months had never been once in our power.
+
+[It is judged advisable to omit altogether the next section of the
+original, as occupied by mere reckoning on the advantages "which might
+have been expected from the squadron, had it arrived in the South Seas
+in good time." They are in part specified at the beginning.]
+
+
+
+SECTION XXIV.
+
+_The Run from the Coast of Mexico to the Ladrones or Marian Islands._
+
+When we left the coast of America, we stood to the S.W. with a view
+of meeting with the N.E. trade-wind, which the accounts of former
+writers made us expect at seventy or eighty leagues distance from the
+land: We had another reason for standing to the southward, which was
+the getting into the latitude of 13 deg. or 14 deg. north; that being
+the parallel where the Pacific Ocean is most usually crossed, and
+consequently where the navigation is esteemed the safest: This last
+purpose we had soon answered, being in a day or two sufficiently
+advanced to the south. At the same time we were also farther from the
+shore, than we had presumed was necessary for the falling in with
+the trade-wind: But in this particular we were most grievously
+disappointed; for the wind still continued to the westward, or at best
+variable. As the getting into the N.E. trade-wind, was to us a matter
+of the last consequence, we stood more to the southward, and made many
+experiments to meet with it; but it was seven weeks, from our leaving
+the coast, before we got into it. This was an interval, in which we
+believed we should well nigh have reached the easternmost parts of
+Asia: But we were so baffled with the contrary and variable winds,
+which for all that time perplexed us, that we were not as yet advanced
+above a fourth part of the way. The delay alone would have been a
+sufficient mortification; but there were other circumstances
+attending it, which rendered this situation not less terrible, and
+our apprehensions perhaps still greater than in any of our past
+distresses. For our two ships were by this time extremely crazy;
+and many days had not passed, before we discovered a spring in the
+fore-mast of the Centurion, which rounded about twenty-six inches of
+its circumference, and which was judged to be at least four inches
+deep: And no sooner had our carpenters secured this with fishing it,
+but the Gloucester made a signal of distress; and we learnt that
+she had a dangerous spring in her main-mast, twelve feet below the
+trussel-trees; so that she could not carry any sail upon it. Our
+carpenters, on a strict examination of this mast, found it so very
+rotten and decayed, that they judged it necessary to cut it down as
+low as it appeared to have been injured; and by this it was reduced to
+nothing but a stump, which served only as a step to the topmast. These
+accidents augmented our delay, and occasioned us great anxiety about
+our future security: For on our leaving the coast of Mexico, the
+scurvy had begun to make its appearance again amongst our people;
+though from our departure from Juan Fernandes we had till then enjoyed
+a most uninterrupted state of health. We too well knew the effects of
+this disease, from our former fatal experience, to suppose that any
+thing but a speedy passage could secure the greater part of our crew
+from perishing by it: And as, after-being seven weeks at sea, there
+did not appear any reasons that could persuade us we were nearer the
+trade-wind than when we first set out, there was no ground for us to
+suppose but our passage would prove at least three times as long as
+we at first expected; and consequently we had the melancholy prospect,
+either of dying by the scurvy, or perishing with the ship for want of
+hands to navigate her. Indeed, some amongst us were at first willing
+to believe, that in this warm climate, so different from what we felt
+in passing round Cape Horn, the violence of this disease, and its
+fatality, might be in some degree mitigated; as it had not been
+unusual to suppose that its particular virulence in that passage
+was in a great measure owing to the severity of the weather; but the
+havock of the distemper, in our present circumstances, soon convinced
+us of the falsity of this speculation; as it likewise exploded some
+other opinions, which usually pass current about the cause and nature
+of this disease.[1]
+
+[Footnote 1: Some remarks respecting the nature and treatment of
+this disease are now given in the original, but being imperfect and
+conjectural, are omitted here.--E.]
+
+Our surgeon (who, during our passage round Cape Horn, had ascribed the
+mortality we suffered to the severity of the climate) exerted himself
+in the present run to the utmost, and at last declared, that all his
+measures were totally ineffectual, and did not in the least avail his
+patients. When we reached the trade-wind, and it settled between the
+north and the east, yet it seldom blew with so much strength, but
+the Centurion might have carried all her small sails abroad with the
+greatest safety; so that now, had we been a single ship, we might
+have run down our longitude apace, and have reached the Ladrones soon
+enough to have recovered great numbers of our men, who afterwards
+perished. But the Gloucester, by the loss of her main-mast, sailed so
+very heavily, that we had seldom any more than our top-sails set, and
+yet were frequently obliged to lie to for her: And, I conceive, that
+in the whole we lost little less than a month by our attendance upon
+her, in consequence of the various mischances she encountered. In all
+this run it was remarkable, that we were rarely many days together,
+without seeing great numbers of birds; which is a proof that there
+are many islands, or at least rocks, scattered all along, at no very
+considerable distance from our track. Some indeed there are marked in
+a Spanish chart; but the frequency of the birds seems to evince,
+that there are many more than have been hitherto discovered: For the
+greatest part of the birds we observed were such as are known to roost
+on shore; and the manner of their appearance sufficiently made out,
+that they came from some distant haunt every morning, and returned
+thither again in the evening; for we never saw them early or late;
+and the hour of their arrival and departure gradually varied, which we
+supposed was occasioned by our running nearer their haunts, or getting
+farther from them.
+
+The trade-wind continued to favour us without any fluctuation, from
+the end of June till towards the end of July. But on the 26th of July,
+being then, as we esteemed, about three hundred leagues distant from
+the Ladrones, we met with a westerly wind, which did not come about
+again to the eastward in four days time. This was a most dispiriting
+incident, as it at once damped all our hopes of speedy relief,
+especially too as it was attended with a vexatious accident to the
+Gloucester: For in one part of these four days the wind-flatted to a
+calm, and the ships rolled very deep; by which means the Gloucester's
+forecap split, and her top-mast came by the board, and broke her
+fore-yard directly in the slings. As she was hereby rendered incapable
+of making any sail for some time, we were obliged, as soon as a gale
+sprung up, to take her in tow; and near twenty of the healthiest and
+ablest of our seamen were taken from the business of our own ship, and
+were employed for eight or ten days together on board the Gloucester
+in repairing her damages: But these things, mortifying as we thought
+them, were but the beginning of our disasters; for scarce had our
+people finished their business in the Gloucester, before we met with
+a most violent storm in the western board, which obliged us to lie to.
+In the beginning of this storm our ship sprung a leak, and let in
+so much water, that all our people, officers included, were employed
+continually in working the pumps: And the next day we had the vexation
+to see the Gloucester, with her top-mast once more by the board; and
+whilst we were viewing her with great concern for this new distress,
+we saw her main-top mast, which had hitherto served as a jury
+main-mast, share the same fate. This completed our misfortunes, and
+rendered them without resource; for we knew the Gloucester's crew
+were so few and feeble, that without our assistance they could not
+be relieved: And our sick were now so far increased, and those that
+remained in health so continually fatigued with the additional duty of
+our pumps, that it was impossible for us to lend them any aid. Indeed
+we were not as yet fully apprized of the deplorable situation of
+the Gloucester's crew; for when the storm abated, (which during its
+continuance prevented all communication with them) the Gloucester bore
+up under our stern; and Captain Mitchel informed the commodore, that
+besides the loss of his masts, which was all that had appeared to
+us, the ship had then no less than seven feet of water in her hold,
+although his officers and men had been kept constantly at the pump for
+the last twenty-four hours.
+
+This last circumstance was indeed a most terrible accumulation to the
+other extraordinary distresses of the Gloucester, and required, if
+possible, the most speedy and vigorous assistance; which captain
+Mitchel begged the commodore to send him: But the debility of our
+people, and our own immediate preservation, rendered it impossible for
+the commodore to comply with his request. All that could be done was
+to send our boat on board for a more particular condition of the ship;
+and it was soon suspected that the taking her people on board us, and
+then destroying her, was the only measure that could be prosecuted in
+the present emergency, for the security of their lives and our own.
+
+Our boat soon returned with a representation of the state of the
+Gloucester, and of her several defects, signed by Captain Mitchel and
+all his officers; by which it appeared, that she had sprung a leak by
+the stern-post being loose, and working with every roll of the ship,
+and by two beams a midships being broken in the orlope; no part of
+which the carpenters reported was possible to be repaired at sea. That
+both officers and men had worked twenty-four hours at the pump without
+intermission, and were at length so fatigued, that they could continue
+their labour no longer; but had been forced to desist, with seven feet
+of water in the hold, which covered their cask, so that they could
+neither come at fresh water, nor provision: That they had no mast
+standing, except the fore-mast, the mizen-mast, and the mizen
+top-mast, nor had they any spare masts to get up in the room of those
+they had lost: That the ship was besides extremely decayed in every
+part, for her knees and clamps were all worked quite loose, and her
+upper works in general were so loose, that the quarter-deck was
+ready to drop down: And that her crew was greatly reduced, for there
+remained alive on board her no more than seventy-seven, men, eighteen
+boys, and two prisoners, officers included; and that of this whole
+number, only sixteen men and eleven boys were capable of keeping the
+deck, and several of these very infirm.
+
+The commodore, on the perusal of this melancholy representation,
+presently ordered them a supply of water and provisions, of which
+they seemed to be in immediate want, and at the same time sent his
+own carpenter on board them, to examine into the truth of every
+particular; and it being found, on the strictest enquiry, that the
+preceding account was in no instance exaggerated, it plainly appeared,
+that there was no possibility of preserving the Gloucester any longer,
+as her leaks were irreparable, and the united hands on board both
+ships, capable of working, would not be able to free her, even if
+our own ship should not employ any part of them. What then could be
+resolved on, when it was the utmost we ourselves could do to manage
+our own pumps? Indeed there was no room for deliberation; the only
+step to be taken was, the saving the lives of the few that remained on
+board the Gloucester, and getting out of her as much as was possible
+before she was destroyed. And therefore the commodore immediately
+sent an order to Captain Mitchel, as the weather was now calm and
+favourable, to send his people on board the Centurion as expeditiously
+as he could; and to take out such stores as he could get at, whilst
+the ship could be kept above water. And as our leak required less
+attention, whilst the present easy weather continued, we sent our
+boats with as many men as we could spare, to Captain Mitchel's
+assistance.
+
+The removing the Gloucester's people on board us, and the getting out
+such stores as could most easily be come at, gave us full employment
+for two days. Mr Anson was extremely desirous to have gotten two of
+her cables and an anchor, but the ship rolled so much, and the men
+were so excessively fatigued, that they were incapable of effecting
+it; nay, it was even with the greatest difficulty that the
+prize-money, which the Gloucester had taken in the South-Seas, was
+secured, and sent on board the Centurion: However, the prize-goods
+on board her, which amounted to several thousand pounds in value, and
+were principally the Centurion's property, were entirely lost; nor
+could any more provision be got out than five casks of flour, three
+of which were spoiled by the salt-water. Their sick men, amounting
+to near seventy, were removed into boats with as much care as the
+circumstances of that time would permit; but three or four of them
+expired as they were hoisting them into the Centurion.
+
+It was the 15th of August, in the evening, before the Gloucester was
+cleared of every thing that was proposed to be removed; and though
+the hold was now almost full of water, yet, as the carpenters were of
+opinion that she might still swim for some time, if the calm should
+continue, and the water become smooth, she was set on fire; for we
+knew not how near we might now be to the island of Guam, which was in
+the possession of our enemies, and the wreck of such a ship would have
+been to them no contemptible acquisition. When she was set on fire,
+Captain Mitchel and his officers left her, and came on board the
+Centurion: And we immediately stood from the wreck, not without some
+apprehensions (as we had now only a light breeze) that if she blew
+up soon, the concussion of the air might damage our rigging; but she
+fortunately burnt, though very fiercely, the whole night, her guns
+firing successively, as the flames reached them. And it was six in the
+morning, when we were about four leagues distant, before she blew up;
+the report she made upon this occasion was but a small one, but there
+was an exceeding black pillar of smoke, which shot up into the air to
+a very considerable height.
+
+Thus perished his majesty's ship the Gloucester. And now it might have
+been expected, that, being freed from, the embarrassments which her
+frequent disasters had involved us in, we would proceed on our way
+much brisker than, we had hitherto done, especially as we had received
+some small addition to our strength, by the taking on board the
+Gloucester's crew; but our anxieties were not yet to be relieved; for,
+notwithstanding all that we had hitherto suffered, there remained much
+greater distresses, which we were still to struggle with. For the late
+storm, which had proved so fatal to the Gloucester, had driven us to
+the northward of our intended course; and the current setting the same
+way, after the weather abated, had forced us still a degree or two
+farther, so that we were now in 17 deg. 1/4 of north latitude, instead of
+being in 13 deg. 1/2, which was the parallel we proposed to keep, in order
+to reach the island of Guam: And as it had been a perfect calm for
+some days since the cessation of the storm, and we were ignorant how
+near we were to the meridian of the Ladrones, and supposed ourselves
+not to be far from it, we apprehended that we might be driven to the
+leeward of them by the current, without discovering them: In this
+case, the only land we could make would be some of the eastern parts
+of Asia, where, if we could arrive, we should find the western monsoon
+in its full force, so that it would be impossible for the stoutest
+best-manned ship to get in. And this coast being removed between
+four and five hundred leagues farther, we, in our languishing
+circumstances, could expect no other than to be destroyed by the
+scurvy, long before the most favourable gale could carry us to such a
+distance: For our deaths were now extremely alarming, no day passing
+in which we did not bury eight or ten, and sometimes twelve of our
+men; and those, who had hitherto continued healthy, began to fall
+down apace. Indeed we made the use we could of the present calm, by
+employing our carpenters in searching after the leak, which was now
+considerable, notwithstanding the little wind we had: The carpenters
+at length discovered it to be in the gunner's fore store-room, where
+the water rushed in under the breast-hook, on each side of the stein;
+but though they found where it was, they agreed that it was impossible
+to stop it, till we should get into port, and till they could come at
+it on the outside: However, they did the best they could within board,
+and were fortunate enough to reduce it, which was a considerable
+relief to us.
+
+We had hitherto considered the calm which succeeded the storm, and
+which continued for some days, as a very great misfortune; since the
+currents were driving us to the northward of our parallel, and we
+thereby risqued the missing of the Ladrones, which we now conceived
+ourselves to be very near. But when a gale sprung up, our condition
+was still worse; for it blew from the S.W. and consequently was
+directly opposed to the course we wanted to steer: And though it
+soon veered to the N.E. yet this served only to tantalize us, for it
+returned back again in a very short time to its old quarter. However,
+on the 22d of August we had the satisfaction to find that the
+current was shifted; and had set us to the southward: And the 23d, at
+day-break, we were cheered with the discovery of two islands in the
+western board: This gave us all great joy, and raised our drooping
+spirits; for before this an universal dejection had seized us, and
+we almost despaired of ever seeing land again: The nearest of these
+islands we afterwards found to be Anatacan; we judged it to be full
+fifteen leagues from us, and it seemed to be high land, though of
+an indifferent length: The other was the island of Serigan; and had
+rather the appearance of a high rock, than a place we could hope to
+anchor at. We were extremely impatient to get in with the nearest
+island, where we expected to meet with anchoring-ground, and an
+opportunity of refreshing our sick: But the wind proved so variable
+all day, and there was so little of it, that we advanced towards it
+but slowly; however, by the next morning we were got so far to the
+westward, that we were in view of a third island, which was that of
+Paxaros, though marked in the chart only as a rock. This was small and
+very low land, and we had passed within less than a mile of it, in the
+night, without seeing it: And now at noon, being within four miles
+of the island of Anatacan, the boat was sent away to examine the
+anchoring-ground and the produce of the place; and we were not a
+little solicitous for her return, as we then conceived our fate to
+depend upon the report we should receive: For the other two islands
+were obviously enough incapable of furnishing us with any assistance,
+and we knew not then that there were any others which we could reach.
+In the evening the boat came back, and the crew informed us that there
+was no place for a ship to anchor, the bottom being every where foul
+ground, and all, except one small spot, not less than fifty fathom
+in depth; that on that spot there was thirty fathom, though not above
+half a mile from the shore; and that the bank was steep, and could
+not be depended on: They farther told us, that they had landed on the
+island, but with some difficulty, on account of the greatness of the
+swell; that they found the ground was every where covered with a kind
+of cane, or rush; but that they met with no water, and did not believe
+the place to be inhabited; though the soil was good, and abounded with
+groves of cocoa-nut trees.
+
+This account of the impossibility of anchoring at this island,
+occasioned a general melancholy on board; for we considered it as
+little less than the prelude to our destruction; and our despondency
+was increased by a disappointment we met with the succeeding night;
+for, as we were plying under top-sails, with an intention of getting
+nearer to the island, and of sending our boat on shore to load with
+cocoa-nuts for the refreshment of our sick, the wind proved squally,
+and blew so strong off shore, as to drive us so far to the southward,
+that we dared not to send off our boat. And now the only possible
+circumstance, that could secure the few that remained alive from
+perishing, was the accidental falling in with some other of the
+Ladrone islands, better prepared for our accommodation; and as our
+knowledge of these islands was extremely imperfect, we were to trust
+entirely to chance for our guidance; only as they are all of them
+usually laid down near the same meridian, and we had conceived those
+we had already seen to be part of them, we concluded to stand to the
+southward, as the most probable means of falling in with the next.
+Thus, with the most gloomy persuasion of our approaching destruction,
+we stood from the island of Anatacon, having all of us the strongest
+apprehensions (and those not ill founded) either of dying of the
+scurvy, or of perishing with the ship, which, for want of hands to
+work her pumps, might in a short time be expected to founder.
+
+
+
+SECTION XXV.
+
+_Our Arrival at Tinian, and an Account of the Island, and of our
+Proceedings there, till the Centurion drove out to Sea._
+
+It was the 26th of August, 1742, in the morning, when we lost sight
+of Anatacan. The next morning we discovered three other islands to the
+eastward, which were from ten to fourteen leagues from us. These were,
+as we afterwards learnt, the islands of Saypan, Tinian, and Aguigan.
+We immediately steered towards Tinian, which was the middlemost of the
+three, but had so much of calms and light airs, that though we were
+helped forwards by the currents, yet next day, at day-break, we were
+at least five leagues distant from it. However, we kept on our course,
+and about ten in the morning we perceived a proa under sail to the
+southward, between Tinian and Aguigan. As we imagined from hence that
+these islands were inhabited, and knew that the Spaniards had always a
+force at Guam, we took the necessary precautions for our own security,
+and for preventing the enemy from taking advantage of our present
+wretched circumstances, of which they would be sufficiently informed
+by the manner of our working the ship; we therefore mustered all our
+hands, who were capable of standing to their arms, and loaded our
+upper and quarter-deck guns with grape-shot; and, that we might the
+more readily procure some intelligence of the state of these
+islands, we showed Spanish colours, and hoisted a red flag at the
+fore-top-masthead, to give our ship the appearance of the Manilla
+galleon, hoping thereby to decoy some of the inhabitants on board us.
+Thus preparing ourselves, and standing towards the land, we were near
+enough, at three in the afternoon, to send the cutter in shore, to
+find out a proper birth for the ship; and we soon perceived that a
+proa came off the shore to meet the cutter, fully persuaded, as we
+afterwards found, that we were the Manilla ship. As we saw the cutter
+returning back with the proa in tow, we immediately sent the pinnace
+to receive the proa and the prisoners, and to bring them on board,
+that the cutter might proceed on her errand. The pinnace came back
+with a Spaniard and four Indians, which were the people taken in the
+proa. The Spaniard was immediately examined as to the produce
+and circumstances of this island of Tinian, and his account of it
+surpassed even our most sanguine hopes; for he informed us that it
+was uninhabited, which, in our present defenceless condition, was an
+advantage not to be despised, especially as it wanted but few of the
+conveniences that could be expected in the most cultivated country;
+for he assured us, that there was great plenty of very good water,
+and that there were an incredible number of cattle, hogs, and poultry
+running wild on the island, all of them excellent in their kind;
+that the woods produced sweet and sour oranges, limes, lemons, and
+cocoa-nuts in great plenty, besides a fruit peculiar to these islands
+(called by Dampier, Bread-fruit); that from the quantity and goodness
+of the provisions produced here, the Spaniards at Guam made use of it
+as a store for supplying the garrison; that he himself was a serjeant
+of that garrison, and was sent here with twenty-two Indians to jerk
+beef, which he was to load for Guam on board a small bark of about
+fifteen tun, which lay at anchor near the shore.
+
+This account was received by us with inexpressible joy: Part of it
+we were ourselves able to verify on the spot, as we were by this time
+near enough to discover several numerous herds of cattle feeding in
+different places of the island; and we did not any ways doubt the rest
+of his relation, as the appearance of the shore prejudiced us greatly
+in its favour, and made us hope, that not only our necessities might
+be there fully relieved, and our diseased recovered, but that, amidst
+those pleasing scenes which were then in view, we might procure
+ourselves some amusement and relaxation, after the numerous fatigues
+we had undergone: For the prospect of the country did by no means
+resemble that of an uninhabited and uncultivated place, but had
+much more the air of a magnificent plantation, where large lawns and
+stately woods had been laid out together with great skill, and where
+the whole had been so artfully combined, and so judiciously adapted
+to the slopes of the hills, and the inequalities of the ground, as to
+produce a most striking effect, and to do honour to the invention of
+the contriver. Thus (an event not unlike what we had already seen)
+we were forced upon the most desirable and salutary measures by
+accidents, which at first sight we considered as the greatest of
+misfortunes; for had we not been driven by the contrary winds and
+currents to the northward of our course (a circumstance which at
+that time gave us the most terrible apprehensions) we should, in
+all probability, never have arrived at this delightful island, and
+consequently we should have missed of that place, where alone all
+our wants could be most amply relieved, our sick recovered, and our
+enfeebled crew once more refreshed, and enabled to put again to sea.
+
+The Spanish serjeant, from whom we received the account of the island,
+having informed us that there were some Indians on shore under his
+command, employed in jerking beef, and that there was a bark at anchor
+to take it on board, we were desirous, if possible, to prevent the
+Indians from escaping, who doubtless would have given the governor
+of Guam intelligence of our arrival; and we therefore immediately
+dispatched the pinnace to secure the bark, which the serjeant told us
+was the only embarkation on the place; and then, about eight in the
+evening, we let go our anchor in twenty-two fathom; and though it was
+almost calm, and whatever vigour and spirit was to be found on board
+was doubtless exerted to the utmost on this pleasing occasion, when,
+after having kept the sea for some months, we were going to take
+possession of this little paradise, yet we were full five hours in
+furling our sails: It is true, we were somewhat weakened by the crews
+of the cutter and pinnace having been sent on shore; but it is not
+less true, that, including those absent with the boats and some
+negro and Indian prisoners, all the hands we could muster capable of
+standing at a gun amounted to no more than seventy-one, most of which
+number too were incapable of duty; but on the greatest emergencies
+this was all the force we could collect, in our present enfeebled
+condition, from the united crews of the Centurion, the Gloucester, and
+the Tryal, which, when we departed from England, consisted altogether
+of near a thousand hands.
+
+When we had furled our sails, the remaining part of the night was
+allowed to our people for their repose, to recover them from the
+fatigue they had undergone; and in the morning a party was sent on
+shore well armed, of which I myself was one, to make ourselves masters
+of the landing place, as we were not certain what opposition might be
+made by the Indians on the island: We landed without difficulty, for
+the Indians having perceived, by our seizure of the bark the night
+before, that we were enemies, they immediately fled into the woody
+parts of the island. We found on shore many huts which they had
+inhabited, and which saved us both the time and trouble of erecting
+tents; one of these huts which the Indians made use of for a
+storehouse was very large, being twenty yards long, and fifteen broad;
+this we immediately cleared of some bales of jerked beef, which we
+found in it, and converted it into an hospital for our sick, who as
+soon as the place was ready to receive them were brought on shore,
+being in all a hundred and twenty-eight: Numbers of these were so
+very helpless that we were obliged to carry them from the boats to the
+hospital upon our shoulders, in which humane employment (as before at
+Juan Fernandes) the commodore himself, and every one of his officers,
+were engaged without distinction; and, notwithstanding the great
+debility and the dying aspects of the greatest part of our sick, it is
+almost incredible how soon they began to feel the salutary influence
+of the land; for, though we buried twenty-one men on this and the
+preceeding day, yet we did not lose above ten men more during our
+whole two months stay here; and in general, our diseased received so
+much benefit from the fruits of the island, particularly the fruits of
+the acid kind, that, in a week's time, there were but few who were not
+so far recovered, as to be able to move about without help.[2]
+
+[Footnote 2: The description of this beautiful island, and its most
+desirable productions, is deferred till we come to the voyage of
+Commodore Byron, who visited it in 1765.--E.]
+
+Whilst we were employed in the removal of our sick on shore, four of
+the Indians, being part of the Spanish serjeant's detachment, came and
+surrendered themselves to us, so that with those we took in the
+proa, we had now eight of them in our custody. One of the four, who
+submitted, undertook to show us the most convenient place for killing
+cattle, and two of our men were ordered to attend him on that service;
+but one of them unwarily trusting the Indian with his firelock and
+pistol, the Indian escaped with them into the woods: His countrymen,
+who remained behind, were apprehensive of suffering for this perfidy
+of their comrade, and therefore begged leave to send one of their own
+party into the country, who they engaged should both bring back the
+arms, and persuade the whole detachment from Guam to submit to us.
+The commodore granted their request; and one of them was dispatched on
+this errand, who returned next day, and brought back the firelock
+and pistol, but assured us, he had met with them in a path-way in the
+wood, and protested that he had not been able to meet with any one of
+his countrymen: This report had so little the air of truth, that we
+suspected there was some treachery carrying on, and therefore, to
+prevent any future communication amongst them, we immediately ordered
+all the Indians who were in our power on board the ship, and did not
+permit them to return any more on shore.
+
+When our sick were well settled on the island, we employed all the
+hands that could be spared from attending them; in arming the cables
+with a good rounding, several fathom from the anchor, to secure them
+from being rubbed by the coral rocks, which here abounded: And this
+being completed, our next attention was our leak, and in order to
+raise it out of water, we, on the first of September, began to get the
+guns aft to bring the ship by the stern; and now the carpenters, being
+able to come at it on the outside, ripped off the old sheathing that
+was left, and caulked all the seams on both sides the cut-water, and
+leaded them over, and then new-sheathed the bows to the surface of the
+water: By this means we conceived the defect was sufficiently secured;
+but upon our beginning to bring the guns into their places, we had the
+mortification to perceive, that the water rushed into the ship in
+the old place, with as much violence as ever: Hereupon we were
+necessitated to begin again; and that our second attempt might be
+more effectual, we cleared the fore store-room, and sent a hundred and
+thirty barrels of powder on board the small Spanish bark we had seized
+here, by which means we raised the ship about three feet out of the
+water forwards, and the carpenters ripped off the sheathing lower
+down, and new caulked all the seams, and afterwards laid on new
+sheathing; and then, supposing the leak lobe effectually stopped, we
+began to move the guns forwards; but the upper deck guns were scarcely
+in their places, when, to our amazement, it burst out again; and now,
+as we durst not cut away the lining within board, lest a but-end or a
+plank might start, and we might go down immediately, we had no other
+resource left than chincing and caulking within board; and indeed by
+this means the leak was stopped for some time; but when our guns were
+all in their places, and our stores were taken on board, the water
+again forced its way through a hole in the stem, where one of the
+bolts was driven in; and on this we desisted from all farther efforts,
+being now well assured, that the defect was in the stem itself, and
+that it was not to be remedied till we should have an opportunity of
+heaving down.
+
+Towards the middle of September, several of our sick were tolerably
+recovered by their residence on shore; and, on the 12th of September,
+all those who were so far relieved, since their arrival, as to be
+capable of doing duty, were sent on board the ship: And then the
+commodore, who was himself ill of the scurvy, had a tent erected for
+him on shore, where he went with the view of staying a few days for
+the recovery of his health, being convinced, by the general experience
+of his people, that no other method but living on the land was to be
+trusted to for the removal of this dreadful malady. The place, where
+his tent was pitched on this occasion, was near the well, whence we
+got all our water, and was indeed a most elegant spot. As the crew
+on board were now reinforced by the recovered hands returned from the
+island, we began to send our cask on shore to be fitted up, which till
+now could not be done, for the coopers were not well enough to work.
+We likewise weighed our anchors, that we might examine our cables,
+which we suspected had by this time received considerable damage.
+And as the new moon was now approaching, when we apprehended violent
+gales, the commodore, for our greater security, ordered that part
+of the cables next to the anchors to be armed with the chains of the
+fire-grapnels; and they were besides cackled twenty fathom from the
+anchors, and seven fathom from the service, with a good rounding of
+a 41/2 inch hawser; and to all these precautions we added that of
+lowering the main and fore-yard close down, that in case of blowing
+weather the wind might have less power upon the ship, to make her ride
+a strain.
+
+Thus effectually prepared, as we conceived, we expected the new moon,
+which was the 18th of September, and riding safe that and the
+three succeeding days, (though the weather proved very squally and
+uncertain) we flattered ourselves (for I was then on board) that the
+prudence of our measures had secured us from all accidents; but, on
+the 22d, the wind blew from the eastward with such fury, that we soon
+despaired of riding out the storm; and therefore we should have been
+extremely glad that the commodore and the rest of our people on shore,
+which were the greatest part of our hands, had been on board with
+us, since our only hopes of safety seemed to depend on our putting
+immediately to sea; but all communication with the shore was now
+effectually cut off, for there was no possibility that a boat could
+live, so that we were necessitated to ride it out, till our cables
+parted. Indeed it was not long before this happened, for the small
+bower parted at five in the afternoon, and the ship swung off to the
+best bower; and as the night came on, the violence of the wind still
+increased; but notwithstanding its inexpressible fury, the tide ran
+with so much rapidity, as to prevail over it; for the tide having set
+to the northward in the beginning of the storm, turned suddenly to the
+southward about six in the evening, and forced the ship before it in
+despight of the storm, which blew upon the beam: And now the sea broke
+most surprisingly all round us, and a large tumbling swell threatened
+to poop us; the long-boat, which was at this time moored a-stern,
+was on a sudden canted so high, that it broke the transom of the
+commodore's gallery, whose cabin was on the quarter-deck, and would
+doubtless have risen as high as the tafferel, had it not been for this
+stroke which stove the boat all to pieces; but the poor boat-keeper,
+though extremely bruised, was saved almost by miracle. About eight
+the tide slackened, but the wind did not abate; so that at eleven, the
+best bower-cable, by which alone we rode, parted. Our sheet-anchor,
+which was the only one we had left, was instantly cut from the bow;
+but before it could reach the bottom, we were driven from twenty-two
+into thirty-five fathom; and after we had veered away one whole cable,
+and two-thirds of another, we could not find ground with sixty fathom
+of line: This was a plain indication, that the anchor lay near the
+edge of the bank, and could not hold us. In this pressing danger, Mr
+Sanmarez, our first lieutenant, who now commanded on board, ordered
+several guns to be fired, and lights to be shown, as a signal to the
+commodore of our distress; and in a short time after, it being then
+about one o'clock, and the night excessively dark, a strong gust,
+attended with rain and lightning, drove us off the bank, and forced us
+out to sea, leaving behind us, on the island, Mr Anson, with many more
+of our officers, and great part of our crew, amounting in the whole to
+an hundred and thirteen persons. Thus were we all, both at sea and
+on shore, reduced to the utmost despair by this catastrophe, those on
+shore conceiving they had no means left them ever to leave the island,
+and we on board utterly unprepared to struggle with the fury of the
+seas and winds we were now exposed to, and expecting each moment, to
+be our last.
+
+
+
+SECTION XXVI.
+
+_Transactions at Tinian after the Departure of the Centurion._
+
+The storm, which drove the Centurion to sea, blew with too much
+turbulence to permit either the commodore or any of the people on
+shore bearing the guns, which she fired as signals of distress; and
+the frequent glare of the lightning had prevented the explosions from
+being observed: So that, when at day-break, it was perceived from the
+shore that the ship was missing, there was the utmost consternation
+amongst them: For much the greatest part of them immediately concluded
+that she, was lost, and entreated the commodore that the boat might
+be sent round the island to look for the wreck; and those who believed
+her safe, had scarcely any expectation that she would ever be able to
+make the island again: For the wind continued to blow strong at east,
+and they knew how poorly she was manned and provided for struggling
+with so tempestuous a gale. And if the Centurion was lost, or should
+be incapable of returning, there appeared no possibility of their ever
+getting off the island; For they were at least six hundred leagues
+from Macao, which was their nearest port; and they were masters of no
+other vessel than the small Spanish bark, of about fifteen tun, which
+they seized at their first arrival, and which would not even hold a
+fourth part of their number: And the chance of their being taken off
+the island by the casual arrival of any ship was altogether desperate;
+as perhaps no European ship had ever anchored here before, and it
+were madness to expect that like incidents should send another in an
+hundred ages to come: So that their desponding thoughts could only
+suggest to them the melancholy prospect of spending the remainder
+of their days on this island, and bidding adieu for ever to their
+country, their friends, their families, and all their domestic
+endearments.
+
+Nor was this the worst they had to fear: For they had reason to
+expect, that the governor of Guam, when he should be informed of their
+situation, might send a force sufficient to overpower them, and to
+remove them to that island; and then, the most favourable treatment
+they could hope for would be to be detained prisoners for life; since,
+from the known policy and cruelty of the Spaniards in their distant
+settlements, it was rather to be expected, that the governor, if he
+once had them in his power, would make their want of commissions (all
+of them being on board the Centurion) a pretext for treating them, as
+pirates, and for depriving them of their lives with infamy.
+
+In the midst of these gloomy reflections, Mr Anson had his share of
+disquietude; but he kept up his usual composure and steadiness: And
+having soon projected a scheme for extricating himself and his men
+from their present anxious situation, he first communicated it to some
+of the most intelligent; and being satisfied that it was practicable,
+he then endeavoured to animate his people to a speedy and vigorous
+prosecution of it. With this view he represented to them, how little
+foundation there was for their apprehensions of the Centurion's being
+lost: That he should have hoped, they had been all of them better
+acquainted with sea-affairs, than to give way to the impression of so
+chimerical a fright; and that he doubted not, if they would seriously
+consider what such a ship was capable of enduring, they would confess
+that there was not the least probability of her having perished: That
+he was not without hopes that she might return in a few days; but if
+she did not, the worst that could be supposed was, that she was driven
+so far to the leeward of the island that she could not regain it, and
+that she would consequently be obliged to bear away for Macao on the
+coast of China: That as it was necessary to be prepared against all
+events, he had, in this case, considered of a method of carrying them
+off the island, and joining their old ship the Centurion again at
+Macao: That this method was to hale the Spanish bark on shore, to saw
+her asunder, and to lengthen her twelve feet, which would enlarge her
+to near forty tun burthen, and would enable her to carry them all to
+China: That he had consulted the carpenters, and they had agreed
+that this proposal was very feasible, and that nothing was wanting to
+execute it, but the united resolution and industry of the whole body:
+He added, that, for his own part, he would share the fatigue and
+labour with them, and would expect no more from any man than what he
+himself was ready to submit to; he concluded with representing to them
+the importance of saving time; and that, in order to be the better
+prepared for all events, it was necessary to set to work immediately,
+and to take it for granted, that the Centurion would not be able to
+put back (which was indeed the commodore's secret opinion;) since, if
+she did return, they should only throw away a few days application;
+but, if she did not, their situation, and the season of the year,
+required their utmost dispatch.
+
+These remonstrances, though not without effect, did not immediately
+operate so powerfully as Mr Anson wished: He indeed raised their
+spirits, by showing them the possibility of their getting away, of
+which they had before despaired; but then, from their confidence of
+this resource, they grew less apprehensive of their situation, gave
+a greater scope to their hopes, and flattered themselves that the
+Centurion would return and prevent the execution of the commodore's
+scheme, which they could easily foresee would be a work of
+considerable labour. By this means, it was some days before they were
+all of them heartily engaged in the project; but at last, being in
+general convinced of the impossibility of the ship's return, they set
+themselves zealously to the different tasks allotted them, and were as
+industrious and as eager as their commander could desire, punctually
+assembling at day-break at the rendezvous, whence they were
+distributed to their different employments, which they followed with
+unusual vigour till night came on.
+
+And here I must interrupt the course of this transaction for a moment,
+to relate an incident which for some time gave Mr Anson more concern
+than all the preceding disasters. A few days after the ship was driven
+off, some of the people on shore cried out, A sail. This spread a
+general joy, every one supposing that it was the ship returning; but
+presently a second sail was descried, which quite destroyed their
+conjecture, and made it difficult to guess what they were. The
+commodore eagerly turned his glass towards them, and saw they were two
+boats; on which it immediately occurred to him that the Centurion was
+gone to the bottom, and that these were her two boats coming back with
+the remains of her people; and this sudden and unexpected suggestion
+wrought on him so powerfully, that, to conceal his emotion, he was
+obliged (without speaking to any one) instantly to retire to his tent,
+where he past some bitter moments, in the firm belief that the ship
+was lost, and that now all his views of farther distressing the enemy,
+and of still signalizing his expedition by some important exploit,
+were at an end.
+
+But he was soon relieved from these disturbing thoughts, by
+discovering that the two boats in the offing were Indian proas,
+and, perceiving that they stood towards the shore, he directed every
+appearance that could give them any suspicion to be removed, and
+concealed his people in the adjacent thickets, prepared to secure
+the Indians when they should land; but, after the proas had stood in
+within a quarter of a mile of the land, they suddenly stopt short,
+and remaining there motionless for near two hours, they then made
+sail again, and stood to the southward.--To return to the projected
+enlargement of the bark.
+
+If we examine how they were prepared for going through with this
+undertaking, on which their safely depended, we shall find, that,
+independent of other matters which were of as much importance, the
+lengthening of the bark alone was attended with great difficulty.
+Indeed, in a proper place, where all the necessary materials and tools
+were to be had, the embarrassment would have been much less; but
+some of these tools were to be made, and many of the materials were
+wanting; and it required no small degree of invention to supply all
+these deficiences. And when the hull of the bark should be completed,
+this was but one article; and there were many others of equal weight,
+which were to be well considered: These were the rigging it, the
+victualling it, and, lastly, the navigating it, for the space of six
+or seven hundred leagues, through unknown seas, where no one of the
+company had ever passed before. In some of these particulars
+such obstacles occurred, that, without the intervention of very
+extraordinary and unexpected accidents, the possibility of the whole
+enterprise would have fallen to the ground, and their utmost industry
+and efforts must have been fruitless. Of all these circumstances I
+shall make a short recital.
+
+It fortunately happened that the carpenters, both of the Gloucester
+and of the Tryal, with their chests of tools, were on shore when the
+ship drove out to sea; the smith, too, was on shore, and had with
+him his forge and some tools, but unhappily his bellows had not
+been brought from on board, so that he was incapable of working,
+and without his assistance they could not hope to proceed with their
+design; their first attention, therefore, was to make him a pair of
+bellows, but in this they were for some time puzzled, by their want of
+leather; however, as they had hides in sufficient plenty, and they had
+found a hogshead of lime, which the Indians or Spaniards had prepared
+for their own use, they tanned some hides with this lime; and though
+we may suppose the workmanship to be but indifferent, yet the leather
+they thus made served tolerably well, and the bellows (to which a
+gun-barrel served for a pipe) had no other inconvenience than that of
+being somewhat strong-scented from the imperfection of the tanner's
+work.
+
+Whilst the smith was preparing the necessary iron work, others were
+employed in cutting down trees, and sawing them into plank, and this
+being the most laborious task, the commodore himself wrought at it
+for the encouragement of his people. As there were neither blocks
+nor cordage sufficient for tackles to hale the bark on shore, it
+was proposed to get her up on rollers; and for these the body of the
+cocoa-nut tree was extremely useful, for its smoothness and circular
+turn prevented much labour, and fitted it for the purpose with very
+little workmanship; many of these trees were therefore felled, and the
+ends of them properly opened for the reception of hand-spikes; and
+in the mean time a dry dock was dug for the bark, and ways laid from
+thence quite into the sea to facilitate the bringing her up. Besides
+those who were thus occupied in preparing measures for the future
+enlargement of the bark, a party was constantly ordered for the
+killing and preparing of provisions for the rest: And though in these
+various employments, some of which demanded considerable dexterity,
+it might have been expected there would have been great confusion and
+delay, yet good order being once established, and all hands engaged,
+their preparations advanced apace. Indeed, the common men, I presume,
+were not the less tractable for their want of spirituous liquors;
+for, there being neither wine nor brandy on shore, the juice of
+the cocoa-nut was their constant drink, and this, though extremely
+pleasant, was not at all intoxicating, but kept them very cool and
+orderly.
+
+And now the officers began to consider of all the articles necessary
+for the fitting out the bark; when it was found, that the tents on
+shore, and the spare cordage accidentally left there by the Centurion,
+together with the sails and rigging already belonging to the bark,
+would serve to rig her indifferently well, when she was lengthened.
+As they had tallow in plenty, they proposed to pay her bottom with
+a mixture of tallow and lime, which it was known was well adapted to
+that purpose; so that with respect to her equipment, she would not
+have been very defective. There was, however, one exception, which
+would have proved extremely inconvenient, and that was her size; for
+as they could not make her quite forty tun burthen, she would have
+been incapable of containing half the crew below the deck, and must
+have been so top-heavy, that if they were all at the same time on
+deck, there would be no small hazard of her oversetting; but this was
+a difficulty not to be removed, as they could not augment her beyond
+the size already proposed. After the manner of rigging and fitting up
+the bark was considered and regulated, the next essential point to be
+thought on was, how to procure a sufficient stock of provisions for
+their voyage; and here they were greatly at a loss what course to
+take; for they had neither grain nor bread of any kind on shore, their
+bread-fruit, which would not keep at sea, having all along supplied
+its place; and though they had live cattle enough, yet they had no
+salt to cure beef for a sea-store, nor would meat take salt in that
+climate. Indeed, they had preserved a small quantity of jerked beef,
+which they found upon the place at their landing, but this was greatly
+disproportioned to the run of near six hundred leagues, which they
+were to engage in, and to the number of hands they should have on
+board. It was at last, however, resolved to take on board as many
+cocoa-nuts as they possibly could; to make the most of their jerked
+beef, by a very sparing distribution of it, and to endeavour to supply
+their want of bread by rice; to furnish themselves with which, it was
+proposed, when the bark was fitted up, to make an expedition to the
+island of Rota, where they were told that the Spaniards had large
+plantations of rice under the care of the Indian inhabitants: But as
+this last measure was to be executed by force, it became necessary
+to examine what ammunition had been left on shore, and to preserve it
+carefully; and on this enquiry, they had the mortification to find,
+that the utmost that could be collected, by the strictest search, did
+not amount to more than ninety charges of powder for their firelocks,
+which was considerably short of one a-piece for each of the company,
+and was indeed a very slender stock of ammunition, for such as were
+to eat no grain or bread for a month, but what they were to procure by
+force of arms.
+
+But the most alarming circumstance, and what, without the providential
+interposition of very improbable events, had rendered all their
+schemes abortive, remains yet to be related. The general idea of the
+fabric and equipment of the vessel was settled in a few days, and when
+this was done, it was not difficult to make some estimation of the
+time necessary to complete her. After this, it was natural to expect
+that the officers would consider on the course they were to steer,
+and the land they were to make. These reflections led them to the
+disheartening discovery, that there was neither compass nor quadrant
+on the island. Indeed, the commodore had brought a pocket compass
+on shore for his own use, but Lieutenant Brett had borrowed it to
+determine the position of the neighbouring islands, and he had been
+driven to sea in the Centurion, without returning it; and as to a
+quadrant, that could not be expected to be found on shore, for as it
+was of no use at land, there could be no reason for bringing it
+from on board the ship. It was eight days, from the departure of the
+Centurion, before they were relieved from this terrible perplexity: At
+last, in rummaging a chest belonging to the Spanish bark, they found a
+small compass, which, though little better than the toys usually made
+for the amusement of school-boys, was to them an invaluable treasure.
+And a few days after, by a similar piece of good fortune, they found
+a quadrant on the sea-shore, which had been thrown overboard amongst
+other lumber belonging to the dead: The quadrant was eagerly seized,
+but it unluckily wanted vanes, and therefore, in its present state,
+was altogether useless; however, fortune still continuing in a
+favourable mood, it was not long before a person, out of curiosity,
+pulling out the drawer of an old table, which had been driven on
+shore, found some vanes, which fitted the quadrant very well; and it
+being thus completed, it was examined by the known latitude of the
+place, and found to answer to a sufficient degree of exactness.
+
+All these obstacles being in some degree removed (which were always as
+much as possible concealed from the vulgar, that they might not grow
+remiss with the apprehension of labouring to no purpose,) the work
+proceeded very successfully and vigorously: The necessary iron-work
+was in great forwardness; and the timbers and planks (which, though
+not the most exquisite performances of the sawyer's art, were yet
+sufficient for the purpose,) were all prepared; so that on the 6th of
+October, being the 14th day from the departure of the ship, they
+haled the bark on shore, and, on the two succeeding days, she was sawn
+asunder (though with great care not to cut her planks,) and her two
+parts were separated the proper distance from each other, and, the
+materials being all ready before-hand, they, the next day, being
+the 9th of October, went on with great dispatch in their proposed
+enlargement of her; and by this time they had all their future
+operations so fairly in view, and were so much masters of them, that
+they were able to determine when the whole would be finished, and had
+accordingly fixed the 5th of November for the day of their putting
+to sea. But their projects and labours were drawing to a speedier and
+happier conclusion; for on the 11th of October, in the afternoon,
+one of the Gloucester's men, being upon a hill in the middle of the
+island, perceived the Centurion at a distance, and running down with
+his utmost speed towards the landing-place, he, in the way, saw some
+of his comrades, to whom he hallooed out with extacy, The ship, the
+ship! This being heard by Mr Gordon, a lieutenant of marines, who
+was convinced by the fellow's transport that his report was true, Mr
+Gordon ran towards the place where the commodore and his people
+were at work, and being fresh and in breath, easily outstripped the
+Gloucester's man, and got before him to the commodore, who, on hearing
+this happy and unexpected news, threw down his axe with which he was
+then at work, and by his joy broke through, for the first time, the
+equable and unvaried character which he had hitherto preserved; the
+others, who were with him, instantly ran down to the sea-side in a
+kind of frenzy, eager to feast themselves with a sight they had so
+ardently wished for, and of which they had now for a considerable time
+despaired. By five in the evening the Centurion was visible in the
+offing to them all; and, a boat being sent off with eighteen men to
+reinforce her, and with fresh meat and fruits for the refreshment of
+her crew, she, the next afternoon, happily came to an anchor in the
+road, when the commodore immediately went on board, and was received
+with the sincerest and heartiest acclamations: For, from the following
+short recital of the fears, the dangers and fatigues we in the ship
+underwent during our nineteen days absence from Tinian, it may be
+easily conceived, that a harbour, refreshments, repose, and the
+joining of our commander and shipmates, were not less pleasing to us
+than our return was to them.
+
+
+
+SECTION XXVII.
+
+_Account of the Proceedings on board the Centurion when driven out to
+Sea._
+
+The Centurion being now once more safely arrived at Tinian, to the
+mutual respite of the labours of our divided crew, it is high time
+that the reader, after the relation already given of the projects and
+employment of those left on shore, should be apprised of the fatigues
+and distresses to which we, who were driven off to sea, were exposed
+during the long interval of nineteen, days that we were absent from
+the island.
+
+It has been already mentioned, that it was the 22d of September, about
+one o'clock, in an extreme dark night, when, by the united violence of
+a prodigious storm, and an exceeding rapid tide, we were driven from
+our anchors and forced to sea. Our condition was truly deplorable; we
+were in a leaky ship, with three cables in our hawses, to one of which
+hung our only remaining anchor; we had not a gun on board lashed, nor
+a port barred in; our shrowds were loose, and our top-masts unrigged,
+and we had struck our fore and main-yards close down, before the storm
+came on, so that there were no sails we could set, except our mizen.
+In this dreadful extremity we could muster no more strength on board
+to navigate the ship, than an hundred and eight hands, several
+negroes and Indians included: This was scarcely the fourth part of our
+complement, and of these the greater number were either boys, or such
+as, being lately recovered from the scurvy, had not yet arrived at
+half their vigour. No sooner were we at sea, but by the violence of
+the storm, and the working of the ship, we made a great quantity of
+water through our hawse-holes, ports, and scuppers, which, added to
+the constant effect of our leak, rendered our pumps alone a sufficient
+employment for us all: But though this leakage, by being a short time
+neglected, would inevitably end in our destruction, yet we had other
+dangers then impending, which occasioned this to be regarded as a
+secondary consideration only. For we all imagined that we were driving
+directly on the neighbouring island of Aguiguan, which was about two
+leagues distant; and as we had lowered our main and fore-yards close
+down, we had no sails we could set but the mizen, which was altogether
+insufficient to carry us clear of this instant peril; we therefore
+immediately applied ourselves to work, endeavouring, by the utmost of
+our efforts, to heave up the main and fore-yards, in hopes that, if
+we could but be enabled to make use of our lower canvass, we might
+possibly weather the island, and thereby save ourselves from this
+impending shipwreck. But after full three hours ineffectual labour,
+the jeers broke, and the men being quite jaded, we were obliged, by
+mere debility, to desist, and quietly to expect our fate, which we
+then conceived to be unavoidable: For we imagined ourselves by this
+time to be driven just upon the shore, and the night was so extremely
+dark, that we expected to discover the island no otherwise than by
+striking upon it; so that the belief of our destruction, and the
+uncertainly of the point of time when it would take place, occasioned
+us to pass several hours under the most serious apprehensions, that
+each succeeding moment would send us to the bottom. Nor did these
+continued terrors of instantly striking and sinking end but with the
+day-break, when we, with great transport, perceived that the island
+we had thus dreaded was at a considerable distance, and that a strong
+northern current had been the cause of our preservation.
+
+The turbulent weather which forced us from Tinian, did not begin to
+abate till three days after; and then we swayed up the fore-yard, and
+began to heave up the main-yard, but the jeers broke and killed one of
+our men, and prevented us at that time from proceeding. The next day,
+being the 26th of September, was a day of most severe fatigue to us
+all; for it must be remembered, that in these exigences no rank or
+office exempted any person from the manual application and bodily
+labour of a common sailor. The business of this day was no less than
+an attempt to heave up the sheet-anchor, which we had hitherto
+dragged at our bows with two cables an end. This was a work of
+great importance to our future preservation: For, not to mention the
+impediment to our navigation, and the hazard it would be to our ship,
+if we attempted to make sail with the anchor in its present situation,
+we had this most interesting consideration to animate us, that it was
+the only anchor we had left; and, without securing it, we should be
+under the utmost difficulties and hazards, whenever we made the
+land again; and therefore, being all of us fully apprized of the
+consequence of this enterprize, we laboured at it with the severest
+application for full twelve hours, when we had indeed made a
+considerable progress, having brought the anchor in sight; but, it
+then growing dark, and we being excessively fatigued, we were obliged
+to desist, and to leave our work unfinished till the next morning,
+when, by the benefit of a night's rest, we completed it, and hung the
+anchor at our bow.
+
+It was the 27th of September in the morning, that is, five days after
+our departure, when we thus secured our anchor; And the same day we
+got up our main-yard: And having now conquered in some degree the
+distress and disorder which we were necessarily involved in at
+our first driving out to sea, and being enabled to make use of our
+canvass, we set our courses, and for the first time stood to the
+eastward, in hopes of regaining the island of Tinian, and joining
+our commodore in a few days: For we were then, by our accounts, only
+forty-seven leagues to the south-west of Tinian; so that on the first
+day of October, having then run the distance necessary for making
+the island according to our reckoning, we were in full expectation
+of seeing it; but we were unhappily disappointed, and were thereby
+convinced that a current had driven us to the westward. And as
+we could not judge how much we might hereby have deviated, and
+consequently how long we might still expect to be at sea, we had great
+apprehensions that our stock of water might prove deficient; for we
+were doubtful about the quantity we had on board, and found many
+of our casks so decayed, as to be half leaked out. However, we were
+delivered from our uncertainty the next day by having a sight of the
+island of Guam, by which we discovered that the currents had driven us
+forty-four leagues to the westward of our accounts. This sight of land
+having satisfied us of our situation, we kept plying to the eastward,
+though with excessive labour, for the wind continuing fixed in the
+eastern board, we were obliged to tack often, and our crew were so
+weak, that, without the assistance of every man on board, it was not
+in our power to put the ship about: This severe employment lasted
+till the 11th of October, being the nineteenth day from our departure;
+when, arriving in the offing of Tinian, we were reinforced from the
+shore, as hath been already mentioned; and on the evening of the same
+day, to our inexpressible joy, came to an anchor in the road, thereby
+procuring to our shipmates on shore, as well as to ourselves, a
+cessation from the fatigues and apprehensions which this disastrous
+incident had given rise to.
+
+
+
+SECTION XXVIII.
+
+_Of our Employment at Tinian, till the final Departure of the
+Centurion, and of the Voyage to Macao._[1]
+
+The commodore resolved to stay no longer at the island than was
+absolutely necessary to complete our stock of water, a work which we
+immediately set ourselves about. But the loss of our long-boat, which
+was staved against our poop when we were driven out to sea, put us
+to great inconveniences in getting our water on board: For we were
+obliged to raft off all our cask, and the tide ran so strong, that,
+besides the frequent delays and difficulties it occasioned, we more
+than once lost the whole raft. Nor was this our only misfortune; for,
+on the third day after our arrival, a sudden gust of wind brought home
+our anchor, forced us off the bank, and drove the ship out to sea a
+second time. The commodore, it is true, and the principal officers,
+were now on board; but we had near seventy men on shore, who had been
+employed in filling our water, and procuring provisions: These had
+with them our two cutters; but as they were too many for the cutters
+to bring off at once, we sent the eighteen-oared barge to assist them;
+and at the same time made a signal for all that could to embark. The
+two cutters soon came off to us full of men; but forty of the company,
+who were employed in killing cattle in the wood, and in bringing
+them down to the landing-place, were left behind; and though the
+eighteen-oared barge was left for their conveyance, yet, as the ship
+soon drove to a considerable distance, it was not in their power to
+join us. However, as the weather was favourable, and our crew was now
+stronger than when we were first driven out, we, in about five days
+time, returned again to an anchor at Tinian, and relieved those we
+had left behind us from their second fears of being deserted by their
+ship.
+
+[Footnote 1: The original contains also a description of the Ladrones
+(or Marian Islands, as they are now usually called,) which, for a
+reason before mentioned, is omitted.]
+
+On our arrival, we found that the Spanish bark, the old object of
+their hopes, had undergone a new metamorphosis: For those we had
+left onshore began to despair of our return, and conceiving that the
+lengthening the bark, as formerly proposed, was both a toilsome and
+unnecessary measure, considering the small number they consisted of,
+they had resolved to join her again, and to restore her to her first
+state; and in this scheme they had made some progress; for they had
+brought the two parts together, and would have soon completed her, had
+not our coming back put a period to their labours and disquietudes.
+
+These people we had left behind informed us, that, just before we were
+seen in the offing, two proas had stood in very near the shore, and
+had continued there for some time; but, on the appearance of our
+ship, they crowded away, and were presently out of sight. And, on this
+occasion, I must mention an incident, which, though it happened during
+the first absence of the ship, was then omitted, to avoid interrupting
+the course of the narration.
+
+It hath been already observed, that a part of the detachment, sent to
+this island under the command of the Spanish Serjeant, lay concealed
+in the woods; and we were the less solicitous to find them out, as our
+prisoners all assured us, that it was impossible for them to get
+off, and consequently that it was impossible for them to send any
+intelligence about us to Guam. But when the Centurion drove out to
+sea, and left the commodore on shore, he one day, attended by some
+of his officers, endeavoured to make the tour of the island: In this
+expedition, being on a rising ground, they perceived in the valley
+beneath them the appearance of a small thicket, which, by observing
+more nicely, they found had a progressive motion: This at first
+surprised them; but they soon discovered, that it was no more than
+several large cocoa bushes, which were dragged along the ground, by
+persons concealed beneath them. They immediately concluded that
+these were some of the Serjeant's party (which, was indeed true); and
+therefore the commodore and his people made after them, in hopes
+of finding out their retreat. The Indians soon perceived they were
+discovered, and hurried away with precipitation; but Mr Anson was so
+near them, that he did not lose sight of them till they arrived at
+their cell, which he and his officers entering found to be abandoned,
+there being a passage from it down a precipice contrived for the
+conveniency of flight. They found here an old firelock or two, but
+no other arms. However, there was a great quantity of provisions,
+particularly salted spare-ribs of pork, which were excellent; and
+from what our people saw here, they concluded, that the extraordinary
+appetite, which they had found at this island, was not confined to
+themselves; for, it being about noon, the Indians had laid out a very
+plentiful repast considering their numbers, and had their bread-fruit
+and cocoa-nuts prepared ready for eating, and in a manner which
+plainly evinced, that, with them too, a good meal was neither an
+uncommon nor an unheeded article. The commodore having in vain
+endeavoured to discover the path by which the Indians had escaped, he
+and his officers contented themselves with sitting down to the dinner,
+which was thus luckily filled to their present appetites; after which,
+they returned back to their old habitation, displeased at missing the
+Indians, as they hoped to have engaged them in our service, if they
+could have had any conference with them. But, notwithstanding what our
+prisoners had asserted, we were afterwards assured, that these Indians
+were carried off to Guam long before we left the place.
+
+On our coming to an anchor again; after our second driving off to sea;
+we laboured indefatigably in getting in our water; and having, by the
+20th of October, completed it to fifty tun, which we supposed would be
+sufficient for our passage to Macao, we, on the next day, sent one of
+each mess on shore, to gather as large a quantity of oranges, lemons,
+cocoa-nuts, and other fruits of the island, as they possibly could,
+for the use of themselves and mess-mates, when at sea. And, these
+purveyors returning on board us on the evening of the same day, we
+then set fire to the bark and proa, hoisted in our boats, and got
+under sail, steering away for the south-end of the island of Formosa,
+and taking our leaves, for the third and last time, of the island of
+Tinian: An island, which, whether we consider the excellence of its
+productions, the beauty of its appearance, the elegance of its woods
+and lawns, the healthiness of its air or the adventures it gave rise
+to, may in all these views be truly styled romantic.
+
+[After the description, certainly a very imperfect one, of the
+Ladrones, which now follows, the author gives a curious account of the
+proas or prows so much used among them. This is extracted, as likely
+to interest the reader, and as more satisfactory, than the brief
+notice already given in the history of Magellan's voyage. This account
+is more deserving of regard, as being drawn up from very particular
+examination of one of the vessels taken, as has been mentioned, at
+Tinian.]
+
+The Indians that inhabit the Ladrones, of which Tinian (formerly well
+peopled) is one, are a bold, well-limbed people; and it should seem
+from some of their practices, that they are no ways defective in
+understanding; for their flying proa in particular, which has been for
+ages the only vessel used by them, is so singular and extraordinary
+an invention, that it would do honour to any nation, however dexterous
+and acute. Whether we consider its aptitude to the particular
+navigation of these islands, or the uncommon simplicity and ingenuity
+of its fabric and contrivance, or the extraordinary velocity with
+which it moves, we shall find it worthy of our admiration, and
+meriting a place amongst the mechanical productions of the most
+civilized nations, where arts and sciences have most eminently
+flourished.
+
+The name of flying proa given to these vessels, is owing to the
+swiftness with which they sail. Of this the Spaniards assert such
+stories, as appear altogether incredible to those who have never seen
+these vessels move; nor are the Spaniards the only people who relate
+these extraordinary tales of their celerity. For those who shall have
+the curiosity to enquire at the dock at Portsmouth, about a trial made
+there some years since, with a very imperfect one built at that place,
+will meet with accounts not less wonderful than any the Spaniards have
+given. However, from some rude estimations made, by our people, of the
+velocity with which they crossed the horizon at a distance, whilst we
+lay at Tinian, I cannot help believing that with a brisk trade-wind
+they will run near twenty miles an hour: Which, though greatly short
+of what the Spaniards report of them, is yet a prodigious degree of
+swiftness.
+
+The construction of this proa is a direct contradiction to the
+practice of the rest of mankind. For as the rest of the world make
+the head of their vessels different from the stern, but the two sides
+alike, the proa, on the contrary, has her head and stern exactly
+alike, but her two sides very different; the side, intended to be
+always the lee-side, being flat; and the windward-side made rounding,
+in the manner of other vessels: And, to prevent her oversetting, which
+from her small breadth, and the straight run of her leeward-side,
+would, without this precaution, infallibly happen, there is a frame
+laid out from her to windward, to the end of which is fastened a log,
+fashioned into the shape of a small boat, and made hollow: The weight
+of the frame is intended to balance the proa, and the small boat is by
+its buoyancy (as it is always in the water) to prevent her oversetting
+to windward; and this frame is usually called an outrigger. The body
+of the proa (at least of that we took) is made of two pieces joined
+end-ways, and sowed together with bark, for there is no iron used
+about her: She is about two inches thick at the bottom, which at the
+gunwale is reduced to less than one.[2]
+
+[Footnote 2: The author refers to a plate for a minute description,
+which is necessarily omitted.--E.]
+
+The proa generally carries six or seven Indians; two of which are
+placed in the head and stem, who steer the vessel alternately with a
+paddle, according to the tack she goes on, be in the stern being the
+steersman; the other Indians are employed either in baling out the
+water which she accidentally ships, or in setting and trimming
+the sail. From the description of these vessels it is sufficiently
+obvious, how dexterously they are fitted for ranging this collection
+of islands called the Ladrones: For as these islands lie nearly N. and
+S. of each other, and are all within the limits of the trade-wind,
+the proas, by sailing most excellently on a wind, and with either
+end foremost, can ran from one of these islands to the other and back
+again, only by shifting the sail, without ever putting about; and,
+by the flatness of their lee-side, and their small breadth, they are
+capable of lying much nearer the wind than any other vessel hitherto
+known.
+
+The eastern monsoon was now, we reckoned, fairly settled; and we had
+a constant gale blowing right upon our stern: So that we generally
+ran from forty to fifty leagues a-day. But we had a large hollow
+sea pursuing us, which occasioned the ship to labour much; whence we
+received great damage in our rigging, which was grown very rotten, and
+our leak was augmented: But, happily for us, our people were now in
+full health; so that there were no complaints of fatigue, but all went
+through their attendance on the pumps, and every other duty of the
+ship, with ease and cheerfulness.
+
+Having no other but our sheet-anchor left, except our prize-anchors,
+which were stowed in the hold, and were too light to be depended on,
+we were under great concern how we should manage on, the coast
+of China, where we were all entire strangers, and where we should
+doubtless be frequently under the necessity of coming to an anchor.
+Our sheet-anchor being much too heavy for a coasting anchor, it was
+at length resolved to fix two of our largest prize-anchors into one
+stock, and to place between their shanks two guns, four pounders,
+which was accordingly executed, and it was to serve as a best bower:
+And a third prize-anchor being ill like manner joined with our
+stream-anchor, with guns between them, we thereby made a small bower;
+so that, besides our sheet-anchor, we had again two others at our
+bows, one of which weighed 3900, and the other 2900 pounds.
+
+The 3d of November, about three in the afternoon, we saw an island,
+which at first we imagined to be the island of Botel Tobago Xima: But
+on nearer approach we found it to be much smaller than that is usually
+represented; and about an hour after we saw another island, five or
+six miles farther to the westward. As no chart, nor any journal we had
+seen, took notice of any other island to the eastward of Formosa, than
+Botel Tobago Xima, and as we had no observation of our latitude
+at noon, we were in some perplexity, being apprehensive that an
+extraordinary current had driven us into the neighbourhood of the
+Bashee islands; and therefore, when night came on, we brought to, and
+continued in this posture till the next morning, which proving dark
+and cloudy, for some time prolonged our uncertainty; but it cleared
+up about nine o'clock, when we again discerned the two islands
+above-mentioned; we then prest forwards to the westward, and by
+eleven got a sight of the southern part of the island of Formosa. This
+satisfied us that the second island we saw was Botel Tobago Xima, and
+the first a small island or rock, lying five or six miles due east
+from it, which, not being mentioned by any of our books or charts, was
+the occasion of our fears.[3]
+
+[Footnote 3: These two islands are marked in Arrowsmith's map of Asia,
+under the names of Bottle Tobago and Little Bottle Tobago.--E.]
+
+When we got sight of the island of Formosa, we steered W. by S. in
+order to double its extremity, and kept a good look-out for the rocks
+of Vele Rete, which we did not see till two in the afternoon. They
+then bore from us W.N.W. three miles distant, the south end of Formosa
+at the same time bearing N. by W. 1/2 W. about five leagues distant.
+To give these rocks a good birth, we immediately haled up S. by W.
+and so left them between us and the land. Indeed we had reason to be
+careful of them; for though they appeared as high out of the water as
+a ship's hull, yet they are environed with breakers on all sides, and
+there is a shoal stretching from them at least a mile and a half to
+the southward, whence they may be truly called dangerous. The course
+from Botel Tobago Xima to these rocks is S.W. by W. and the distance
+about twelve or thirteen leagues: And the south end of Formosa, off
+which they lie, is in the latitude of 21 deg. 50' north, and in 23 deg. 50'
+west longitude from Tinian, according to our most approved reckonings,
+though by some of our accounts above a degree more.
+
+While we were passing by these rocks of Vele Rete, there was an outcry
+of fire on the fore-castle; this occasioned a general alarm, and the
+whole crew instantly flocked together in the utmost confusion, so that
+the officers found it difficult for some time to appease the uproar:
+But having at last reduced the people to order, it was perceived that
+the fire proceeded from the furnace; and, pulling down the brick-work,
+it was extinguished with great facility, for it had taken its rise
+from the bricks, which, being over-heated, had begun to communicate
+the fire to the adjacent wood-work. In the evening we were surprised
+with a view of what we at first sight conceived to have been breakers,
+but, on a stricter examination, we found them to be only a great
+number of fires on the island of Formosa. These, we imagined, were,
+intended by the inhabitants of that island as signals for us to touch
+there, but that suited not our views, we being impatient to reach the
+port of Macao as soon as possible. From Formosa we steered W.N.W. and
+sometimes still more northerly, proposing to fall in with, the coast
+of China, to the eastward of Pedro Blanco; for the rock so called is
+usually esteemed an excellent direction for ships bound to Macao. We
+continued this course till the following night, and then frequently
+brought to, to try if we were in soundings: But it was the 5th of
+November, at nine in the morning, before we struck ground, and then,
+we had forty-two fathom, and a bottom of grey sand mixed with shells.
+When we had got about twenty miles farther W.N.W. we had thirty-five
+fathom; and the same bottom, from whence our sounding gradually
+decreased from thirty-five to twenty-five fathom; but soon after, to
+our great surprise, they jumped back again to thirty fathom: This was
+an alteration we could not very well account for,[4] since all the
+charts laid down regular soundings every-where to the northward of
+Pedro Blanco; and for this reason we kept a very careful look-out, and
+altered our course to N.N.W. and having run thirty-five miles in this
+direction, our soundings again gradually diminished to twenty-two
+fathom, and we at last, about mid-night, got sight of the main land of
+China, bearing N. by W. four leagues distant: We then brought the ship
+to, with her head to the sea, proposing to wait for the morning; and
+before sun-rise we were surprised to find ourselves in the midst of an
+incredible number of fishing-boats, which seemed to cover the surface
+of the sea as far as the eye could reach. I may well style their
+number incredible, since I cannot believe, upon the lowest estimate,
+that there were fewer than six thousand, most of them manned with
+five hands, and none with less than three. Nor was this swarm of
+fishing-vessels peculiar to this spot; for, as we ran on to the
+westward, we found them as abundant on every part of the coast. We at
+first doubted not but we should procure a pilot from them to carry
+us to Macao; but though many of them came close to the ship, and we
+endeavoured to tempt them by showing them a number of dollars, a most
+alluring bait for Chinese of all ranks and professions, yet we could
+not entice them on board us, nor procure any directions from them;
+though, I presume, the only difficulty was their not comprehending
+what we wanted them to do, for we could have no communication with
+them, but by signs: Indeed we often pronounced the word Macao; but
+this we had reason to suppose they understood in a different sense;
+for in return they sometimes held up fish to us, and we afterwards
+learnt, that the Chinese name for fish is of a somewhat similar sound.
+But what surprised us most, was the inattention and want of curiosity,
+which we observed in this herd of fishermen: A ship like ours had
+doubtless never been in those seas before; perhaps, there might not
+be one, amongst all the Chinese employed in this fishery, who had ever
+seen any European vessel; so that we might reasonably have expected
+to have been considered by them as a very uncommon and extraordinary
+object; but though many of their vessels came close to the ship, yet
+they did not appear to be at all interested about us, nor did
+they deviate in the least from their course to regard us; which
+insensibility, especially in maritime persons, about a matter in
+their own profession, is scarcely to be credited, did not the
+general behaviour of the Chinese, in other instances, furnish us with
+continual proofs of a similar turn of mind: It may perhaps be doubted,
+whether this cast of temper be the effect of nature or education;
+but, in either case, it is an incontestable symptom of a mean and
+contemptible disposition, and is alone a sufficient confutation of the
+extravagant panegyrics, which many hypothetical writers have bestowed
+on the ingenuity and capacity of this nation.[5]
+
+[Footnote 4: It was probably occasioned by their being over a sand
+bank, which is laid down by Arrowsmith in this part of the Centurion's
+course.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 5: Neither the ingenuity nor the capacity of the Chinese is
+at all implicated by the circumstances recorded, the source of which
+may be probably enough conjectured, viz. their contempt of every thing
+foreign, which, it is well known, they never scruple to avow. Besides,
+as is very soon mentioned, their fishermen were under authority, and
+had received no orders or permission to the effect desired.--E.]
+
+Not being able to procure any information from the Chinese fishermen
+about our proper course to Macao, it was necessary for us to rely
+entirety on our own judgment; and concluding from our latitude, which
+was 22 deg. 42' north, and from our soundings, which were only seventeen
+or eighteen fathoms, that we were yet to the eastward of Pedro
+Blanco, we stood to the westward: And, for the assistance of future
+navigators, who may hereafter doubt about the parts of the coast they
+are upon, I must observe, that, besides the latitude of Pedro Blanco,
+which is 22 deg. 18', and the depth of water, which to the westward of
+that rock is almost every where twenty fathoms, there is another
+circumstance which will give great assistance in judging of the
+position of the ship: This is, the kind of ground; for, till we came
+within thirty miles of Pedro Blanco, we had constantly a sandy bottom;
+but there the bottom changed to soft and muddy, and continued so quite
+to the island of Macao; only while we were in sight of Pedro Blanco,
+and very near it, we had for a short space a bottom of greenish mud,
+intermixed with sand.
+
+On the fifth of November, at midnight, we made the coast of China; and
+the next day, about two o'clock, as we were standing to the westward
+within two leagues of the coast, and still surrounded by fishing
+vessels in as great numbers as at first, we perceived that a boat
+a-head of us waved a red flag, and blew a horn; This we considered as
+a signal made to us, either to warn us of some shoal, or to inform
+us that they would supply us with a pilot, and in this belief we
+immediately sent our cutter to the boat, to know their intentions; but
+we were soon made sensible of our mistake, and found that this boat
+was the commodore of the whole fishery, and that the signal she had
+made, was to order them all to leave off fishing, and to return in
+shore, which we saw them instantly obey. On this disappointment we
+kept on our course, and soon after passed by two very small rocks,
+which lay four or five miles distant from the shore; but night came on
+before we got sight of Pedro Blanco, and we therefore brought-to till
+the morning, when we had the satisfaction to discover it. It is a rock
+of a small circumference, but of a moderate height, and, both in shape
+and colour, resembles a sugar-loaf, and is about seven or eight miles
+from the shore. We passed within a mile and a half of it, and left
+it between us and the land, still keeping on to the westward; and the
+next day, being the 7th, we were a-breast of a chain of islands,
+which stretched from east to west. These, as we afterwards found, were
+called the islands of Lema;[6] they are rocky and barren, and are in
+all, small and great, fifteen or sixteen; and there are, besides, a
+great number of other islands between them and the main land of China.
+These islands we left on the star-board side, passing within four
+miles of them, where we had twenty-four fathom water. We were still
+surrounded by fishing-boats; and we once more sent the cutter on board
+one of them, to endeavour to procure a pilot, but could not prevail;
+however, one of the Chinese directed us by signs to sail round the
+westermost of the islands, or rocks of Lema, and then to hale up.
+We followed this direction; and in the evening came to an anchor in
+eighteen fathom.
+
+[Footnote 6: Called Grand Lema in Arrowsmith's map, and touched at by
+the Lion in 1793.--E.]
+
+On the 9th at four in the morning, we sent our cutter to sound the
+channel, where we proposed to pass; but before the return of the
+cutter, a Chinese pilot put on board us, and told us, in broken
+Portuguese, he would carry us to Macao for thirty dollars: These were
+immediately paid him, and we then weighed and made sail; and soon
+after, several other pilots came on board us, who, to recommend
+themselves, produced certificates from the captains of several ships
+they had piloted in, but we continued the ship under the management of
+the Chinese who came first on board. By this time we learnt, that we
+were not far distant from Macao, and that there were in the river of
+Canton, at the mouth of which Macao lies, eleven European ships, of
+which four were English. Our pilot carried us between the islands of
+Bamboo and Cabouce, but the winds hanging in the northern board, and
+the tides often setting strongly against us, we were obliged to come
+frequently to an anchor, so that we did not get through between the
+two islands till the 12th of November, at two in the morning. In
+passing through, our depth of water was from twelve to fourteen
+fathom; and as we still steered on N.W. 1/2 W. between a number of
+other islands, our soundings underwent little or no variation till
+towards the evening, when they increased to seventeen fathom; in which
+depth (the wind dying away) we anchored not far from the island of
+Lantoon, which is the largest of all this range of islands. At seven
+in the morning we weighed again, and steering W.S.W. and S.W. by
+W., we at ten o'clock happily anchored in Macao road, in five fathom
+water, the city of Macao bearing W. by N., three leagues distant; the
+peak of Lantoon E. by N., and the grand Ladrone S. by E. each of them
+about five leagues distant. Thus, after a fatiguing cruise of above
+two years continuance, we once more arrived in an amicable port, in
+a civilized country; where the conveniences of life were in great
+plenty; where the naval stores, which we now extremely wanted, could
+be in some degree procured; where we expected the inexpressible
+satisfaction of receiving letters from our relations and friends; and
+where our countrymen, who were lately arrived from England, would be
+capable of answering the numerous enquiries we were prepared to make,
+both about public and private occurrences, and to relate to us many
+particulars, which, whether of importance or not, would be listened
+to by us with the utmost attention, after the long suspension of
+our correspondence with our country, to which the nature of our
+undertaking had hitherto subjected us.
+
+
+
+SECTION XXIX.
+
+_Proceedings at Macao._
+
+The city of Macao, in the road of which we came to an anchor on the
+12th of November, is a Portuguese settlement, situated in an island
+at the mouth of the river of Canton. It was formerly a very rich and
+populous city, and capable of defending itself against the power of
+the adjacent Chinese governors: But at present it is much fallen from
+its ancient splendour, for though it is inhabited by Portuguese, and
+has a governor nominated by the king of Portugal, yet it subsists
+merely by the sufferance of the Chinese, who can starve the place,
+and dispossess the Portuguese whenever they please: This obliges the
+governor of Macao to behave with great circumspection, and carefully
+to avoid every circumstance that may give offence to the Chinese.[7]
+The river of Canton, at the mouth of which this city lies, is the only
+Chinese port, frequented by European ships; and this river is indeed
+a more commodious harbour, on many accounts, than Macao: But the
+peculiar customs of the Chinese, only adapted to the entertainment of
+trading ships, and the apprehensions of the commodore, lest he should
+embroil the East-India company with the regency of Canton, if he
+should insist on being treated upon a different footing than the
+merchantmen, made him resolve to go first to Macao, before he ventured
+into the port of Canton. Indeed, had not this reason prevailed with
+him, he himself had nothing to fear: For it is certain that he might
+have entered the port of Canton, and might have continued there as
+long as he pleased, and afterwards have left it again, although the
+whole power of the Chinese empire had been brought together to oppose
+him.
+
+[Footnote 7: This circumspection has never availed much. The
+Portuguese obtained this port and the adjoining territory of about 8
+miles in circuit, as a reward for assistance given in extirpating a
+pirate who took refuge here. But the ingratitude of the Chinese always
+grudged, and often violated, the immunities thus won from their fears.
+The city, built after the European model, and originally possessed of
+both military strength and commercial consequence, has, through the
+carelessness of the Portuguese, and the exactions and insolence of
+their neighbours, dwindled into comparative insignificance. According
+to Sir George Staunton's account, the population does not now exceed
+12000, and more than half is Chinese. In short, Macao is virtually a
+Chinese town, where the Portuguese are merely tolerated. The Chinese,
+it is certain, require almost any other treatment than condescension
+and good manners. The reader will soon see in the narrative how
+practicable it is to reduce them to common sense--one of the
+ingredients of it they have in a high degree, the desire of
+self-preservation. The following quotation from a work recently
+published, may amuse him in the mean time, and serves besides to
+confirm the statement of the text. "The situation of the Portuguese in
+Macao is particularly restrained, and that of their governor extremely
+unpleasant to him. Although the latter invariably conducts himself
+with the greatest circumspection, cases still arise in which he cannot
+give way without entirely sacrificing the honour of his country,
+already greatly diminished in the eyes of the Chinese. A few months
+only before our arrival (November 1805,) a circumstance happened fully
+illustrative of this; an account of which may tend to prove that, if
+the Portuguese possessed greater power at Macao, the cowardly Chinese
+would not dare to treat them with so little consideration, or, to
+speak more correctly, with so much contempt. If Macao were in
+the hands of the English, or even of the Spaniards, the shameful
+dependence of this possession on the Chinese would soon fall to the
+ground; and, with the assistance of their important possessions in the
+vicinity of China, either of these nations established in Macao might
+bid defiance to the whole empire. A Portuguese resident at Macao
+stabbed a Chinese, but being rich, he offered the family of the
+deceased a sum of money to suffer the affair to drop. This was agreed
+to, and he paid 4000 piastres; scarcely, however, had he given the
+money, when the affair was represented to the Chinese magistracy, who
+exacted from the governor that the criminal should be instantly given
+up. The latter refused, alleging, that, as the deed was committed
+in Macao, he was liable to the Portuguese law, according to which he
+would be punished if they found him guilty. The Chinese, who wished
+to inflict punishment on the Portuguese, immediately on the receipt of
+this answer shut up all their booths, and forbade the importation of
+provisions into Macao; but the governor, who had two years stock of
+provisions for his garrison, (we shall find it was otherwise with
+the governor in Anson's time) troubled himself very little with this
+threat, and still refused to give up the criminal; in the mean time
+his trial went on; he was found guilty of the murder, and immediately
+hanged. The Chinese assembled with the intention of endeavouring to
+seize the perpetrator of the murder whilst on his way to the scaffold:
+The governor collected his troops, loaded the artillery on the
+batteries, and awaited the attack; and, alarmed at his decisive
+measures, the Chinese withdrew, under the pretence of being
+perfectly satisfied with the execution of the murderer, and order
+was immediately restored." The work from which this is extracted
+is Captain Krusenstern's account of his voyage round the world, in
+1803-4-5 and 6; being the first circumnavigation the Russians have
+made, and that too under the patronage and by the command of the most
+magnanimous and beneficient Alexander, a monarch whom every friend of
+humanity must admire and love from the heart, as surpassing even his
+liberality in the promotion of useful science and discovery amongst
+his own subjects, by the splendour and substantial value of his
+services in the best interests of Europe, and the world:
+
+ Non possidentem multa vocaveris
+ Recte beatum: rectius occupat
+ Nomen beati, qui deorum
+ Muneribus sapienter uti,
+ Duramque callet _pauperiem_ pati,
+ Pejusque leto flagitium timet;
+ Non ille pro caris _amicis_
+ Aut patria timidus perire.
+
+To return to Macao: Captain K. strongly expresses his wish that
+some European power of sufficient energy and consequence would take
+possession of it, before the Portuguese themselves abandon it to the
+Chinese. It is evident he alludes to the English. An agreement, it is
+very probable, might be readily entered into with the Portuguese
+for the possession of that place, which could not fail to prove most
+convenient for our eastern commerce. An equivalent may be found among
+the West Indian islands; but it is perhaps equally vain and invidious
+to speculate on such very distant concerns, when the wonderful events
+now occurring in a kingdom so long the torment and the _teacher_ of
+nations, arrest the imagination from every trivial selfish pursuit,
+and fix the mind undividedly on the operations of the great source of
+power, justice, and truth. A new aera commences in the world--May it
+be remarkable to all succeeding generations for liberal policy,
+disinterestedness, and general benevolence!--E.
+
+12th April, 1814.]
+
+The commodore, not to depart from his usual prudence, no sooner came
+to an anchor in Macao road, than he dispatched an officer with his
+compliments to the Portuguese governor of Macao, requesting his
+excellency, by the same officer, to advise him in what manner it would
+be proper to act, to avoid offending the Chinese, which, as there were
+then four of our ships in their power at Canton, was a matter
+worthy of attention. The difficulty, which the commodore principally
+apprehended, related to the duty usually paid by all ships in the
+river of Canton, according to their tunnage. For as men of war are
+exempted in every foreign harbour from all manner of port charges, the
+commodore thought it would be derogatory to the honour of his country
+to submit to this duty in China: And therefore he desired the advice
+of the governor of Macao, who, being an European, could not be
+ignorant of the privileges claimed by a British man of war, and
+consequently might be expected to give us the best lights for avoiding
+this perplexity. Our boat returned in the evening with two officers
+sent by the governor, who informed the commodore, that it was the
+governor's opinion, that if the Centurion ventured into the river of
+Canton, the duty would certainly be demanded; and therefore, if
+the commodore approved of it, he would send him a pilot, who should
+conduct us into another safe harbour, called the Typa, which was every
+way commodious for careening the ship, (an operation we were resolved
+to begin upon as soon as possible) and where the above-mentioned duty
+would, in all probability, be never asked for.
+
+This proposal the commodore agreed to, and in the morning we weighed
+anchor, and, under the direction of the Portuguese pilot, steered
+for the intended harbour. As we entered two islands, which form the
+eastern passage to it, we found our soundings decreased to three
+fathom and a half: But the pilot assuring us that this was the least
+depth we should meet with, we continued our course, till at length the
+ship stuck fast in the mud, with only eighteen feet water abaft; and,
+the tide of ebb making, the water sewed to sixteen feet, but the ship
+remained perfectly upright; we then sounded all round us, and finding
+the water deepened to the northward, we carried out our small bower
+with two hawsers an end, and at the return of the tide of flood, hove
+the ship afloat, and a small breeze springing up at the same instant,
+we set the fore top-sail, and, slipping the hawser, ran into the
+harbour, where we moored in about five fathom water. This harbour
+of the Typa is formed by a number of islands, and is about six miles
+distant from Macao. Here we saluted the castle of Macao with eleven
+guns, which were returned by an equal number.
+
+The next day the commodore paid a visit in person to the governor, and
+was saluted at his landing by eleven guns, which were returned by
+the Centurion. Mr Anson's business in this visit was to solicit the
+governor to grant us a supply of provisions, and to furnish us with
+such stores as were necessary to refit the ship The governor seemed
+really inclined to do us all the service he could, and assured the
+commodore, in a friendly manner, that he would privately give us all
+the assistance in his power; but, at the same time, frankly owned that
+he dared not openly furnish us with any thing we demanded, unless we
+first procured an order for it from the viceroy of Canton, for that
+he neither received provisions for his garrison, nor any other
+necessaries, but by permission from the Chinese government; and as
+they took care only to furnish him from day to day, he was indeed no
+other than their vassal, whom they could at all times compel to submit
+to their own terms, only by laying an embargo on his provisions.
+
+On this declaration of the governor, Mr Anson resolved himself to go
+to Canton to procure a license from the viceroy; and accordingly hired
+a Chinese boat for himself and his attendants; but just as he was
+ready to embark, the Hoppo, or Chinese custom-house officer at Macao,
+refused to grant a permit to the boat, and ordered the watermen not to
+proceed at their peril. The commodore at first endeavoured to prevail
+with the hoppo to withdraw his injunction, and to grant a permit; and
+the governor of Macao employed his interest with the hoppo to the same
+purpose. Mr Anson, finding the officer inflexible, told him the next
+day, that if he longer refused to grant the permit, he would man and
+arm his own boats to carry him thither; asking the hoppo, at the
+same time, who he imagined would dare to oppose him. This threat
+immediately brought about what his entreaties had laboured for in
+vain: The permit was granted, and Mr Anson went to Canton. On his
+arrival there he consulted with the supercargoes and officers of
+the English ships, how to procure an order from the viceroy for the
+necessaries he wanted; but in this he had reason to suppose, that the
+advice they gave him, though doubtless well intended, was yet not the
+most prudent; for as it is the custom with these gentlemen never to
+apply to the supreme magistrate himself, whatever difficulties they
+labour under, but to transact all matters relating to the government
+by the mediation of the principal Chinese merchants, Mr Anson was
+advised to follow the same method upon this occasion, the English
+promising (in which they were doubtless sincere) to exert all their
+interest to engage the merchants in his favour. And when the Chinese
+merchants were applied to, they readily undertook the management of
+it, and promised to answer for its success; but after near a month's
+delay, and reiterated excuses, during which interval they pretended
+to be often upon the point of completing the business, they at last
+(being pressed, and measures being taken for delivering a letter to
+the viceroy) threw off the mask, and declared they neither had applied
+to the viceroy nor could they; for he was too great a man, they said,
+for them to approach on any occasion. And, not contented with having
+themselves thus grossly deceived the commodore, they now used all
+their persuasion with the English at Canton, to prevent them from
+intermeddling with any thing that regarded him, representing to them;
+that it would in all probability embroil them with the government, and
+occasion them a great deal of unnecessary trouble; which groundless
+insinuations had indeed but too much weight with those they were
+applied to.
+
+It may be difficult to assign a reason for this perfidious conduct of
+the Chinese merchants: Interest indeed is known to exert a boundless
+influence over the inhabitants of that empire; but how their interest
+could be affected in the present case is not easy to discover, unless
+they apprehended that the presence of a ship of force might damp
+their Manilla trade, and therefore acted in this manner with a view of
+forcing the commodore to Batavia: But it might be as natural in this
+light to suppose, that they would have been eager to have got him
+dispatched. I, therefore, rather impute their behaviour to the
+unparalleled pusillanimity of the nation, and to the awe they are
+under of the government; for as such a ship as the Centurion, fitted
+for war only, had never been seen in those parts before, she was
+the horror of these dastards, and the merchants were in some degree
+terrified even with the idea of her, and could not think of applying
+to the viceroy (who is doubtless fond of all opportunities of fleecing
+them) without representing to themselves the pretences which a hungry
+and tyrannical magistrate night possibly find, for censuring their
+intermeddling in so unusual a transaction, in which he might pretend
+the interest of the state was immediately concerned. However, be this
+as it may, the commodore was satisfied that nothing was to be done by
+the interposition of the merchants, as it was on his pressing them to
+deliver a letter to the viceroy that they had declared they durst
+not intermeddle, and had confessed, that, notwithstanding all their
+pretences of serving him, they had not yet taken one step towards it.
+Mr Anson therefore told them, that he would proceed to Batavia and
+refit his ship there; but informed them, at the same time, that this
+was impossible to be done, unless he was supplied with a stock of
+provisions sufficient for his passage. The merchants on this undertook
+to procure him provisions, but assured him that it was what they
+durst not engage in openly, but proposed to manage it in a clandestine
+manner, by putting a quantity of bread, flour, and other provision, on
+board the English ships, which were now ready to sail, and these were
+to stop at the mouth of the Typa, where the Centurion's boats were to
+receive it. This article, which the merchants represented as a
+matter of great favour, being settled, the commodore, on the 16th
+of December, returned from Canton to the ship, seemingly resolved to
+proceed to Batavia to refit, as soon as he should get his supplies of
+provision on board.
+
+But Mr Anson (who never intended going to Batavia) found, on his
+return to the Centurion, that her main-mast was sprung in two places,
+and that the leak was considerably increased; so that, upon the whole,
+he was fully satisfied, that though he should lay in a sufficient
+stock of provisions, yet it would be impossible for him to put to
+sea without refitting: For, if he left the port with his ship in her
+present condition, she would be in the utmost danger of foundering,
+and therefore, notwithstanding the difficulties he had met with, he
+resolved at all events to have her hove down before he left Macao. He
+was fully convinced, by what he had observed at Canton, that his great
+caution not to injure the East India Company's affairs, and the regard
+he had shown to the advice of their officers, had occasioned all
+his embarrassments. For he now saw clearly, that if he had at first
+carried his ship into the river of Canton, and had immediately applied
+himself to the mandarines, who are the chief officers of state,
+instead of employing the merchants to apply for him, he would, in all
+probability, have had all his requests granted, and would have been
+soon dispatched. He had already lost a month by the wrong measures
+he had been put upon, but he resolved to lose as little more time as
+possible; and, therefore, the 17th of December, being the next day
+after his return from Canton, he wrote a letter to the viceroy of that
+place, acquainting him that he was commander-in-chief of a squadron of
+his Britannic majesty's ships of war which had been cruising for two
+years past in the South Seas against the Spaniards, who were at war
+with the king his master; that, in his way back to England, he had put
+into the port of Macao, having a considerable leak in his ship, and
+being in great want of provisions, so that it was impossible for
+him to proceed on his voyage till his ship was repaired, and he was
+supplied with the necessaries he wanted; that he had been at Canton,
+in hopes of being admitted to a personal audience of his excellency,
+but being a stranger to the customs of the country, he had not been
+able to inform himself what steps were necessary to be taken to
+procure such an audience, and therefore was obliged to apply to him
+in this manner, to desire his excellency to give orders for his being
+permitted to employ carpenters and proper workmen to refit his ship,
+and to furnish himself with provisions and stores, thereby to enable
+him to pursue his voyage to Great Britain with this monsoon, hoping,
+at the same time, that these orders would be issued with as little
+delay as possible, lest it might occasion his loss of the season, and
+he might be prevented, from departing till the next winter.
+
+This letter was translated into the Chinese language, and the
+commodore delivered it himself to the hoppo, or chief officer of the
+emperor's customs at Macao, desiring him to forward it to the viceroy
+of Canton with as much expedition as he could. The officer at first
+seemed unwilling to take charge of it, and raised many difficulties
+about it, so that Mr Anson suspected him of being in league with the
+merchants of Canton, who had always shown a great apprehension of
+the commodore's having any immediate intercourse with the viceroy or
+mandarines; and, therefore, the commodore, with some resentment, took
+back his letter from the hoppo, and told him he would immediately
+send, an officer with it to Canton in his own boat, and would give him
+positive orders not to return without an answer from the viceroy. The
+hoppo, perceiving the commodore to be in earnest, and fearing to be
+called to an account for his refusal, begged to be entrusted with the
+letter, and promised to deliver it, and to procure an answer as soon
+as possible. And now it was soon seen how justly Mr Anson had at last
+judged of the proper manner of dealing with the Chinese; for this
+letter was written but the 17th of December, as hath been already
+observed, and on the 19th in the morning, a mandarine of the first
+rank, who was governor of the city of Janson, together with two
+mandarines of an inferior class, and a great retinue of officers and
+servants, having with them eighteen half gallies, decorated with a
+great number of streamers, and furnished with music, and full of men,
+came to grapnel a-head of the Centurion; whence the mandarine sent
+a message to the commodore, telling him that he (the mandarine) was
+ordered by the viceroy of Canton to examine the condition of the ship,
+and desiring the ship's boat might be sent to fetch him on board. The
+Centurion's boat was immediately dispatched, and preparations were
+made for receiving him; for a hundred of the most sightly of the crew
+were uniformly drest in the regimentals of the marines, and were drawn
+up under arms on the main-deck on his arrival. When he entered the
+ship he was saluted by the drums, and what other military music there
+was on board; and, passing by the new-formed guard, he was met by the
+commodore on the quarter-deck, who conducted him to the great cabin.
+Here the mandarine explained his commission, declaring, that
+his business was to examine all the particulars mentioned in the
+commodore's letter to the viceroy, and to confront them with the
+representation that had been given of them; that he was particularly
+instructed to inspect the leak, and had for that purpose brought with
+him two Chinese carpenters; and that, for the greater regularity and
+dispatch or his business, he had every head of enquiry separately
+wrote down on a sheet of paper, with a void space opposite to it,
+where he was to insert such information and remarks thereon as he
+could procure by his own observation.
+
+This mandarine appeared to be a person of very considerable parts,
+and endowed with more frankness and honesty than is to be found in the
+generality of the Chinese. After the proper enquiries had been made,
+particularly about the leak, which the Chinese carpenters reported to
+be as dangerous as it had been represented, and consequently that
+it was impossible for the Centurion to proceed to sea without being
+refitted, the mandarine expressed himself satisfied with the account
+given in the commodore's letter. And this magistrate, as he was more
+intelligent than any other person of his nation that came to our
+knowledge, so likewise was he more curious and inquisitive, viewing
+each part of the ship with particular attention, and appearing greatly
+surprised at the largeness of the lower-deck guns, and at the weight
+and size of the shot. The commodore, observing his astonishment,
+thought this a proper opportunity to convince the Chinese of the
+prudence of granting him a speedy and ample supply of all he wanted:
+With this view he told the mandarine, and those who were with him,
+that, besides the demands he made for a general supply, he had a
+particular complaint against the proceedings of the custom-house of
+Macao; that at his first arrival the Chinese boats had brought on
+board plenty of greens, and variety of fresh provisions for daily use,
+for which they had always been paid to their full satisfaction, but
+that the custom-house officers at Macao had soon forbid them, by which
+means he was deprived of those refreshments which were of the utmost
+consequence to the health of his men after their long and sickly
+voyage; that as they, the mandarines, had informed themselves of his
+wants, and were eye-witnesses of the force and strength of his
+ship, they might be satisfied it was not for want of power to supply
+himself, that he desired the permission of the government to purchase
+what provisions he stood in need of; that they must be convinced that
+the Centurion alone was capable of destroying the whole navigation of
+the port of Canton, or of any other port in China, without running the
+least risk from all the force the Chinese could collect; that it
+was true this was not the manner of proceeding between nations in
+friendship with each other, but it was likewise true that it was
+not customary for any nation to permit the ships of their friends to
+starve and sink in their ports, when those friends had money to supply
+their wants, and only desired liberty to lay it out; that they must
+confess he and his people had hitherto behaved with great modesty and
+reserve, but that, as his wants were each day increasing, hunger
+would at last prove too strong for any restraint, and necessity was
+acknowledged in all countries to be superior to every other law, and
+therefore it could not be expected that his crew would long continue
+to starve in the midst of that plenty to which their eyes were every
+day witnesses. To this the commodore added, (though perhaps with a
+less serious air,) that if by the delay of supplying him with fresh
+provisions his men should be reduced to the necessity of turning
+cannibals, and preying upon their own species, it was easy to be
+foreseen, that, independent of their friendship to their comrades,
+they would, in point of luxury, prefer the plump well-fed Chinese to
+their own emaciated shipmates. The first mandarine acquiesced in the
+justness of this reasoning, and told the commodore that he should that
+night proceed for Canton; that on his arrival a counsel of mandarines
+would be summoned, of which he himself was a member, and that by being
+employed in the present commission, he was of course the commodore's
+advocate; that, as he was fully convinced of the urgency of Mr Anson's
+necessity, he did not doubt but on his representation the counsel
+would be of the same opinion; and that all that was demanded would
+be amply and speedily granted. And with regard to the commodore's
+complaint of the custom-house of Macao, he undertook to rectify that
+immediately by his own authority; for, desiring a list to be given him
+of the quantity of provision necessary for the expense of the ship
+for a day, he wrote a permit under it, and delivered it to one of his
+attendants, directing him to see that quantity sent on board early
+every morning; and this order, from that time forwards, was punctually
+complied with.[8]
+
+[Footnote 8: Captain Krusenstern, in his very interesting work already
+referred to, relates an anecdote, which it may amuse the reader to
+compare with the reasoning of Commodore Anson's now given:
+
+"An English brig (The Harrier) of eighteen guns, sent by Captain Wood,
+commanding a squadron on that station, to demand indemnification for
+a Spanish prize stranded on the coast of China, and plundered by the
+natives, had the audacity, in defiance of the laws of China, which
+prohibit ships of war going up the Tigris, to force her way as high as
+Whampoa. Two mandarines, as usual, went aboard the brig at the mouth
+of the river, to enquire what her cargo was. The captain shewed them a
+cannon-ball, on which they instantly retired.
+
+"The brig," says K. "had found her way to Whampoa without a pilot; and
+the captain, with a guard of twelve men, proceeded to Canton to
+demand the payment of the sum (L30,000.) This daring conduct threw the
+viceroy into astonishment, and perhaps occasioned him some terror; for
+nothing but the excessive cowardice of the Chinese could have deterred
+him from noticing the affront. They, indeed, shewed a disposition
+after the captain had quitted Canton of avenging themselves, but this
+altogether in their customary manner; and I was assured, that the
+viceroy, as indemnification for this insult of the English captain,
+had imposed a heavy fine upon the Kohong (a company of merchants
+possessing the monopoly of the European trade,) although the members
+of this body could have no concern in the transaction." Capt. K. is
+decidedly of opinion, that nothing but resolute conduct will overcome
+the fickleness and knavery of the Chinese. He pays a high compliment
+to our countrymen, especially Mr Drummond, president of the factory,
+who interfered in his behalf when at Whampoa, and with effect, when
+they could easily have thwarted his plan, and embroiled his government
+with that of China. "That they pursued a very different line of
+conduct," says he, "will appear by the above account of their
+proceedings; nor can I sufficiently rejoice at the zeal and eagerness
+manifested by them in this business. Had we been detained only
+twenty-four-hours longer (he had applied for leave to depart, which
+was granted with much difficulty, and actually revoked a day after
+he had gone,) we must have fallen into the absolute power of these
+savages, who have been emboldened by an useless moderation, not only
+to call the polite nations of Europe barbarians, but also to treat
+them as such."--E.]
+
+When this weighty affair was thus in some degree regulated, the
+commodore invited him and his two attendant mandarines to dinner,
+telling them at the same time, that if his provisions, either in
+kind or quantity, were not what they might expect, they must thank
+themselves for having confined him to so hard an allowance. One of his
+dishes was beef, which the Chinese all dislike, though Mr Anson
+was not apprized of it; this seems to be derived from the India
+superstition, which for some ages past has made a great progress
+in China. However, his guests did not entirely fast; for the three
+mandarines completely finished the white part of four large fowls. But
+they were extremely embarrassed with their knives and forks, and were
+quite incapable of making use of them: So that, after some fruitless
+attempts to help themselves, which were sufficiently awkward, one of
+the attendants was obliged to cut their meat in small pieces for them.
+But whatever difficulty they might have in complying with the European
+manner of eating, they seemed not to be novices in drinking. The
+commodore excused himself in this part of the entertainment, under the
+pretence of illness; but there being another gentleman present, of a
+florid and jovial complexion, the chief mandarine clapped him on the
+shoulder, and told him by the interpreter, that certainly he could not
+plead sickness, and therefore insisted on his bearing him company; and
+that gentleman perceiving, that after they had dispatched four or five
+bottles of Frontiniac, the mandarine still continued unruffled, he
+ordered a bottle of citron-water to be brought up, which the Chinese
+seemed much to relish; and this being near finished, they arose from
+table in appearance cool and uninfluenced by what they had drank,
+and the commodore having, according to custom, made the mandarine a
+present, they all departed in the same vessels that brought them.
+
+After their departure, the commodore with great impatience expected
+the resolution of the council, and the necessary licences for his
+refitment. For it must be observed, as hath already appeared from
+the preceding narration, that he could neither purchase stores nor
+necessaries with his money, nor did any kind of workmen dare to engage
+themselves to work for him, without the permission of the government
+first obtained. And in the execution of these particular injunctions,
+the magistrates never fail of exercising great severity, they,
+notwithstanding the fustian eulogiums bestowed on them by the catholic
+missionaries and their European copiers, being composed of the same
+fragile materials with the rest of mankind, and often making use
+of the authority of the law, not to suppress crimes, but to enrich
+themselves by the pillage of those who commit them; for capital
+punishments are rare in China, the effeminate genius of the nation,
+and their strong attachment to lucre, disposing them rather to make
+use of fines; and hence arises no inconsiderable profit to those
+who compose their tribunals: Consequently prohibitions of all kinds,
+particularly such as the alluring prospect of great profit may often
+tempt the subject to infringe, cannot but be favourite institutions in
+such a government. But to return:
+
+Some time before this, Captain Saunders took his passage to England
+on board a Swedish ship, and was charged with dispatches from the
+commodore; and soon after, in the month of December, Captain Mitchel,
+Colonel Cracherode, and Mr Tassel, one of the agent-victuallers, with
+his nephew Mr Charles Harriot, embarked on board some of our company's
+ships; and I, having obtained, the commodore's leave to return home,
+embarked with them.
+
+Whilst we lay here at Macao, we were informed by some of the officers
+of our Indiamen, that the Severn and Pearl, the two ships of our
+squadron, which had separated from us off Cape Noir, were safely
+arrived at Rio Janeiro on the coast of Brazil. I have formerly taken
+notice, that at the time of their separation, we apprehended them
+to be lost. And there were many reasons which greatly favoured this
+suspicion: For we knew that the Severn in particular was extremely
+sickly; and this was the more obvious to the rest of the ships, as,
+in the preceding part of the voyage, her commander, Captain Legg, had
+been remarkable for his exemplary punctuality in keeping his station,
+till, for the last ten days before his separation, his crew was so
+diminished and enfeebled, that with his utmost efforts it was not
+possible for him to maintain it. Whatever was the cause of it, the
+Severn was by much the most sickly of the squadron: For before her
+departure from St Catharines, she buried more men than any of them,
+insomuch that the commodore was obliged to recruit her with a number
+of fresh hands; and the mortality still continuing, she was supplied
+with men a second time at sea, after our setting sail from St Julians;
+and, notwithstanding these different reinforcements, she was at last
+reduced to the distressed condition I have already mentioned.
+
+Notwithstanding the favourable disposition of the mandarine governor
+of Janson, at his leaving Mr Anson, several days were elapsed before
+he had any advice from him; and Mr Anson was privately informed there
+were great debates in council upon his affair; partly perhaps owing
+to its being so unusual a case, and in part to the influence, as I
+suppose, of the French at Canton: For they had a countryman and fast
+friend residing on the spot, who spoke the language very well, and
+was not unacquainted with the venality of the government, nor with the
+persons of several of the magistrates, and consequently could not be
+at a loss for means of traversing the assistance desired by Mr
+Anson. And this opposition of the French was not merely the effect of
+national prejudice or contrariety of political interests, but was in
+good measure owing to their vanity, a motive of much more weight with
+the generality of mankind, than any attachment to the public service
+of their community: For, the French pretending their Indiamen to be
+men of war, their officers were apprehensive that any distinction
+granted to Mr Anson, on account of his bearing the king's commission,
+would render them less considerable in the eyes of the Chinese, and
+would establish a prepossession at Canton in favour of ships of war,
+by which they, as trading vessels, would suffer in their importance:
+And I wish the affectation of endeavouring to pass for men of war, and
+the fear of sinking in the estimation of the Chinese, if the Centurion
+was treated in a different manner from themselves, had been confined
+to the officers of the French ships only.[9] However, notwithstanding
+all these obstacles, it should seem that the representation of the
+commodore to the mandarines of the facility with which he could right
+himself, if justice were denied him, had at last its effect: For,
+on the 6th of January, in the morning, the governor of Janson, the
+commodore's advocate, sent down the viceroy of Canton's warrant for
+the refitment of the Centurion, and for supplying her people with
+all they wanted; and the next day a number of Chinese smiths and
+carpenters went on board to agree for the work. They demanded at first
+to the amount of a thousand pounds sterling for the necessary repairs
+of the ship, the boats, and the masts: This the commodore seemed to
+think an unreasonable sum, and endeavoured to persuade them to work
+by the day; but that proposal they would not hearken to; so it was at
+last agreed, that the carpenters should have to the amount of about
+six hundred pounds; and that the smiths should be paid for their
+iron-work by weight, allowing them at the rate of three pounds a
+hundred nearly for the small work, and forty-six shillings for the
+large.
+
+[Footnote 9: This sly insinuation, it is pretty evident from
+the preceding narrative, is directed against some of the English
+merchants.--E.]
+
+This being regulated, the commodore exerted himself to get this most
+important business completed; I mean the heaving down the Centurion,
+and examining the state of her bottom: For this purpose the first
+lieutenant was dispatched to Canton to hire two country vessels,
+called in their language junks, one of them being intended to heave
+down by, and the other to serve as a magazine for the powder and
+ammunition: At the same time the ground was smoothed on one of the
+neighbouring islands, and a large tent was pitched for lodging the
+lumber and provisions, and near a hundred Chinese caulkers were
+soon set to work on the decks and sides of the ship. But all these
+preparations, and the getting ready the careening gear, took up a
+great deal of time; for the Chinese caulkers, though they worked very
+well, were far from being expeditions; and it was the 26th of January
+before the junks arrived; and the necessary materials, which were
+to be purchased at Canton, came down very slowly, partly from the
+distance of the place, and partly from the delays and backwardness
+of the Chinese merchants. And in this interval Mr Anson had the
+additional perplexity to discover that his fore-mast was broken
+asunder above the upper deck partners, and was only kept together by
+the fishes which had been formerly clapt upon it.
+
+However, the Centurion's people made the most of their time, and
+exerted themselves the best they could; and as, by clearing the ship,
+the carpenters were enabled to come at the leak, they took care to
+secure that effectually, whilst the other preparations were going
+forwards. The leak was found to be below the fifteen-foot mark, and
+was principally occasioned by one of the bolts being wore away and
+loose in the joining of the stem where it was scarfed.
+
+At last all things being prepared, they, on the 22d of February, in
+the morning, hove out the first course of the Centurion's starboard
+side, and had the satisfaction to find that her bottom appeared sound
+and good; and, the next day (having by that time completed the new
+sheathing of the first course) they righted her again, to set up
+anew the careening rigging which stretched much. Thus they continued
+heaving down, and often righting the ship from a suspicion of their
+careening tackle, till the 3d of March; when, having completed the
+paying and sheathing the bottom, which proved to be every where very
+sound, they for the last time righted the ship to their great joy, for
+not only the fatigue of careening had been considerable, but they had
+been apprehensive of being attacked by the Spaniards, whilst the ship
+was thus incapacitated for defence. Nor were their fears altogether
+groundless; for they learnt afterwards by a Portuguese vessel, that
+the Spaniards at Manilla had been informed that the Centurion was
+in the Typa, and intended to careen there; and that thereupon the
+governor had summoned his council, and had proposed to them to
+endeavour to burn her whilst she was careening, which was an
+enterprise, which, if properly conducted, might have put them in great
+danger: They were farther told that this scheme was not only
+proposed, but resolved on; and that a captain of a vessel had actually
+undertaken to perform the business for forty thousand dollars, which
+he was not to receive unless he succeeded; but the governor pretending
+that there was no treasure in the royal chest, and insisting that the
+merchants should advance the money, and they refusing to comply with
+the demand, the affair was dropped: Perhaps the merchants suspected
+that the whole was only a pretext to get forty thousand dollars from
+them; and indeed this was affirmed by some who bore the governor no
+good will, but with what truth it is difficult to ascertain.
+
+As soon as the Centurion was righted, they took in her powder and
+gunner's stores, and proceeded in getting in their guns as fast as
+possible, and then used their utmost; expedition in repairing the
+fore-mast, and in completing the other articles of her refitment.
+And being thus employed, they were alarmed on the 10th of March, by a
+Chinese fisherman, who brought them intelligence that he had been on
+board a large Spanish ship off the grand Ladrone, and that there were
+two more in company with her: He added several particulars to his
+relation, as that he had brought one of their officers to Macao; and
+that, on this, boats went off early in the morning from Macao to them:
+And the better to establish the belief of his veracity, he said he
+desired no money if his information should not prove true. This was
+presently believed to be the fore-mentioned expedition from Manilla,
+and the commodore immediately fitted his cannon and small arms in the
+best manner he could for defence; and having; then his pinnace and
+cutter in the offing, who had been ordered to examine a Portuguese
+vessel which was getting under sail, he sent them the advice he had
+received, and directed them to look out strictly: But no such ships
+ever appeared, and they were soon satisfied the whole of the story
+was a fiction; though it was difficult to conceive what reason could
+induce the fellow to be at such extraordinary pains to impose on them.
+
+It was the beginning of April before they had new-rigged the ship,
+stowed their provisions and water on board, and had fitted her for the
+sea; and before this time the Chinese grew very uneasy, and extremely
+desirous that she should be gone; either not knowing, or pretending
+not to believe, that this was a point the commodore was as eagerly set
+on as they could be. On the 3d of April, two mandarine boats came on
+board from Macao to urge his departure; and this having been often
+done before, though there had been no pretence to suspect Mr Anson
+of any affected delays, he at this last message answered them in a
+determined tone, desiring them to give him no further trouble, for he
+would go when he thought proper, and not before. On this rebuke the
+Chinese (though it was not in their power to compel him to be gone)
+immediately prohibited all provisions from being carried on board him,
+and took such care that their injunctions should be complied with,
+that from that time forwards nothing could be purchased at any rate
+whatever.
+
+On the 6th of April, the Centurion weighed from the Typa, and warped
+to the southward; and by the 15th, she was got into Macao road,
+completing her water as she passed along, so that there remained now
+very few articles more to attend to, and her whole business being
+finished by the 19th, she, at three in the afternoon of that day,
+weighed and made sail, and stood to sea.
+
+
+
+SECTION XXX.
+
+_From Macao to Cape Espiritu Santo; the taking of the Manilla Galleon,
+and returning back again._
+
+The commodore was now got to sea, with his ship very well refitted,
+his stores replenished, and an additional stock of provisions on
+board: His crew too was somewhat reinforced; for he had entered
+twenty-three men during his stay at Macao, the greatest part of which
+were Lascars or Indian sailors, and some few Dutch. He gave out at
+Macao that he was bound to Batavia, and thence to England; and though
+the westerly monsoon was now set in, when that passage is considered
+as impracticable, yet, by the confidence he had expressed in the
+strength of his ship, and the dexterity of his people, he had
+persuaded not only his own crew, but the people at Macao likewise,
+that he proposed to try this unusual experiment; so that there were
+many letters put on board him by the inhabitants of Canton and Macao
+for their friends at Batavia.
+
+But his real design was of a very different nature: For he knew, that
+instead of one annual ship from Acapulco to Manilla, there would be
+this year in all probability two; since, by being before Acapulco, he
+had prevented one of them from putting to sea the preceding season.
+He therefore resolved to cruise for these returning vessels off Cape
+Espiritu Santo, on the island of Samal, which is the first land they
+always make in the Philippine Islands. And as June is generally the
+month in which they arrive there, he doubted not but he should get to
+his intended station time enough to intercept them. It is true, they
+were said to be stout vessels, mounting forty-four guns a-piece, and
+carrying above five hundred hands, and might be expected to return in
+company; and he himself had but two hundred and twenty-seven hands
+on board, of which near thirty were boys: But this disproportion of
+strength did not deter him, as he knew his ship to be much better
+fitted for a sea-engagement than theirs, and as he had reason to
+expect that his men would exert themselves in the most extraordinary
+manner, when they had in view the immense wealth of these Manilla
+galleons.
+
+This project the commodore had resolved on in his own thoughts, ever
+since his leaving the coast of Mexico. And the greatest mortification
+which he received, from the various delays he had met with in China,
+was his apprehension, lest he might be thereby so long retarded as to
+let the galleons escape him. Indeed, at Macao it was incumbent on
+him to keep these views extremely secret; for there being a great
+intercourse and a mutual connection of interests between that port and
+Manilla, he had reason to fear, that if his designs were discovered,
+intelligence would be immediately sent to Manilla, and measures taken
+to prevent the galleons from falling into his hands: But being now at
+sea, and entirely clear of the coast, he summoned all his people on
+the quarter-deck, and informed them of his resolution to cruise for
+the two Manilla ships, of whose wealth they were not ignorant. He told
+them he should chuse a station, where he could not fail of meeting
+with them; and though they were stout ships, and full manned, yet, if
+his own people behaved with their accustomed spirit, he was certain
+he should prove too hard for them both, and that one of them at least
+could not fail of becoming his prize: He further added, that many
+ridiculous tales had been propagated about the strength of the sides
+of these ships, and their being impenetrable to cannon-shot; that
+these fictions had been principally invented to palliate the cowardice
+of those who had formerly engaged them; but he hoped there were none
+of those present weak enough to give credit to so absurd a story: For
+his own part, he did assure them upon his word, that, whenever he met
+with them, he would fight them so near, that they should find, his
+bullets, instead of being stopped by one of their sides, should go
+through them both.
+
+This speech of the commodore's was received by his people with
+great joy: For no sooner had he ended, than they expressed their
+approbation, according to naval custom, by three strenuous cheers, and
+all declared their determination to succeed or perish, whenever the
+opportunity presented itself. And now their hopes, which, since their
+departure from the coast of Mexico, had entirely subsided, were again
+revived; and they all persuaded themselves, that, notwithstanding the
+various casualties and disappointments they had hitherto met with,
+they should yet be repaid the price of their fatigues, and should at
+last return home enriched with the spoils of the enemy: For, firmly
+relying on the assurances of the commodore, that they should certainly
+meet with the vessels, they were all of them too sanguine to doubt a
+moment of mastering them; so that they considered themselves as
+having them already in their possession. And this confidence was
+so universally spread through the whole ship's company, that, the
+commodore having taken some Chinese sheep to sea with him for his own
+provision, and one day enquiring of his butcher, why, for some time
+past, he had seen no mutton at his table, asking him if all the sheep
+were killed, the butcher very seriously replied, that there were
+indeed two sheep left, but that, if his honour would give him leave,
+he proposed to keep those for the entertainment of the general of the
+galleons.
+
+When the Centurion left the port of Macao, she stood for some days to
+the westward; and, on the first of May, they saw part of the island
+of Formosa; and, standing thence to the southward, they, on the 4th
+of May, were in the latitude of the Bashee islands, as laid down by
+Dampier; but they suspected his account of inaccuracy, as they found
+that he had been considerably mistaken in the latitude of the south
+end of Formosa: For this reason they kept a good look-out, and about
+seven in the evening discovered from the mast-head five small islands,
+which were judged to be the Bashees, and they had afterwards a sight
+of Bottle Tobago Xima. By this means they had an opportunity of
+correcting the position of the Bashee islands, which had been hitherto
+laid down twenty-five leagues too far to the westward: For, by their
+observations, they esteemed the middle of these islands to be in 21 deg.
+4' north, and to bear from Botel Tobago Xima S.S.E. twenty leagues
+distant, that island itself being in 21 deg. 57' north.[1]
+
+
+[Footnote 1: The Bashee Islands were so called by Dampier from the
+name of a liquor used by the natives. Four of them are inhabited, and
+are tolerably fertile, producing sugar canes, pine apples, plantaines,
+potatoes, &c. and having some hogs and goats. The inhabitants, who
+are reckoned a harmless and peaceable race, are said to resemble the
+Japanese, and probably are derived from them. The unfortunate Peyreuse
+visited one of the most northerly of these islands, and found its
+latitude to be 21 deg. 9' 13" N. Arrowsmith's map lays them down very
+particularly. The passage betwixt Formosa and these islands is held
+very dangerous on account of the rock called Vele Rete, the precise
+situation of which is matter of discord among the navigators. Captain
+Krusenstern went through this passage during the night, and that
+a stormy one too, with perfect safety, keeping the middle of the
+channel, and having men continually on the look-out. He seems to
+prefer the position of Vele Rete and its reef of rocks, (of about two
+miles circuit,) as given by Broughton, according to whose observations
+the latitude is 21 deg. 43' 24", and the longitude 239 deg. 15'.--E.]
+
+After getting a sight of the Bashee islands, they stood between the S.
+and S.W. for Cape Espiritu Santo; and, the 20th of May at noon, they
+first discovered that cape, which about four o'clock they brought
+to bear S.S.W. about eleven leagues distant. It appeared to be of a
+moderate height, with several round hummocks on it. As it was known
+that there were centinels placed upon this cape to make signals to the
+Acapulco ship, when she first falls in with the land, the commodore
+immediately tacked, and ordered the top-gallant sails to be taken in,
+to prevent being discovered; and, this being the station in which it
+was resolved to cruise for the galleons, they kept the cape between
+the south and the west, and endeavoured to confine themselves between
+the latitude of 12 deg. 50', and 13 deg. 5', the cape itself lying, by their
+observations, in 12 deg. 40' north, and 4 deg. of east longitude from Botel
+Tobago Xima.
+
+It was the last of May, when they arrived off this cape; and the month
+of June being that in which the Manilla ships are usually expected,
+the Centurion's people were now waiting each hour with the utmost
+impatience for the happy crisis which was to balance the account
+of all their past calamities. As from this time there was but small
+employment for the crew, the commodore ordered them almost every day
+to be exercised in the management of the great guns, and in the use
+of their small arms. This had been his practice, more or less, at all
+convenient seasons, during the whole course of his voyage; and the
+advantages which he received from it, in his engagement with the
+galleon, were an ample recompence for all his care and attention.[2]
+
+[Footnote 2: The original has here some reflections on the importance
+and advantages of exercising the seamen in firing, &c. which, however
+good, are too common and obvious to merit insertion. The art of
+destroying men's lives has been abundantly improved since our author's
+day.--E.]
+
+The galleons being now expected, the commodore made all necessary
+preparations for receiving them, having hoisted out his long-boat, and
+lashed her alongside, that the ship might be ready for engaging, if
+they fell in with the galleons in the night. All this time too he was
+very solicitous to keep at such a distance from the cape, as not to
+be discovered: But it hath been since learnt, that notwithstanding
+his care, he was seen from the land; and advice of him was sent
+to Manilla, where it was at first disbelieved, but on reiterated
+intelligence (for it seems he was seen more than once) their merchants
+were alarmed, and the governor was applied to, who undertook (the
+commerce supplying the necessary sums) to fit out a force consisting
+of two ships of thirty-two guns, one of twenty guns, and two sloops
+of ten guns each, to attack the Centurion on her station: And some
+of these vessels did actually weigh with this view; but the principal
+ship not being ready, and the monsoon being against then, the commerce
+and the governor disagreed, and the enterprize was laid aside. This
+frequent discovery of the Centurion from the shore was somewhat
+extraordinary; for the pitch of the cape is not high, and she usually
+kept from ten to fifteen leagues distant; though once indeed, by an
+indraught of the tide, as was supposed, they found themselves in the
+morning within seven leagues of the land.
+
+As the month of June advanced, the expectancy and impatience of the
+commodore's people each day increased. And I think no better idea can
+be given of their great eagerness on this occasion, than by copying a
+few paragraphs from the journal of an officer, who was then on
+board, as it will, I presume, be a more natural picture of the full
+attachment of their thoughts to the business of their cruise, than can
+be given by any other means. The paragraphs I have selected, as they
+occur in order of time, are as follow:
+
+"_May_ 31. Exercising our men at their quarters, in great expectation
+of meeting with the galleons very soon; this being the eleventh of
+June their stile."
+
+"_June_ 3. Keeping in our stations, and looking out for the galleons."
+
+"_June_ 5. Begin now to be in great expectation, this being the middle
+of June their stile."
+
+"_June_ 11. Begin to grow impatient at not seeing the galleons."
+
+"_June_ 13. The wind having blown fresh easterly for the forty-eight
+hours past, gives us great expectations of seeing the galleons soon."
+
+"_June_ 15. Cruising on and off, and looking out strictly."
+
+"_June_ 19. This being the last day of June, N.S. the galleons, if
+they arrive at all, must appear soon."
+
+From these samples it is sufficiently evident, how completely the
+treasure of the galleons had engrossed their imagination, and how
+anxiously they passed the latter part of their cruise, when the
+certainty of the arrival of these vessels was dwindled down to
+probability only, and that probability became each hour more and more
+doubtful. However, on the 20th of June, O.S. being just a month from
+their arrival on their station, they were relieved from this state
+of uncertainty; when, at sun-rise, they discovered a sail from the
+mast-head, in the S.E. quarter. On this, a general joy spread
+through the whole ship; for they had no doubt but this was one of
+the galleons, and they expected soon to see the other. The commodore
+instantly stood towards her, and at half an hour after seven they were
+near enough to see her from the Centurion's deck; at which time the
+galleon fired a gun, and took in her top-gallant sails, which
+was supposed to be a signal to her consort, to hasten her up; and
+therefore the Centurion fired a gun to leeward, to amuse her. The
+commodore was surprised to find, that in all this time the galleon
+did not change her course, but continued to bear down upon him; for
+he hardly believed, what afterwards appeared to be the case, that she
+knew his ship to be the Centurion, and resolved to fight him.
+
+About noon the commodore was little more than a league distant from
+the galleon, and could fetch her wake, so that she could not now
+escape; and, no second ship appearing, it was concluded that she had
+been separated from her consort. Soon after, the galleon haled up
+her fore-sail, and brought-to under top-sails, with her head to the
+northward, hoisting Spanish colours, and having the standard of Spain
+flying at the top-gallant-mast-head. Mr Anson, in the mean time, had
+prepared all things for an engagement on board the Centurion, and had
+taken all possible care, both for the most effectual exertion of his
+small strength, and for the avoiding the confusion and tumult too
+frequent in actions of this kind. He picked out about thirty of his
+choicest hands and best marksmen, whom he distributed into his tops,
+and who fully answered his expectation, by the signal services
+they performed. As he had not hands enough remaining to quarter a
+sufficient number to each great gun, in the customary manner, he
+therefore, on his lower tire, fixed only two men to each gun, who were
+to be solely employed in loading it, whilst the rest of his people
+were divided into different gangs of ten or twelve men each, who were
+constantly moving about the decks, to ran out and fire such guns as
+were loaded. By this management he was enabled to make use of all his
+guns; and, instead of firing broad-sides with intervals between them,
+he kept up a constant fire without intermission, whence he doubted not
+to procure very signal advantages; for it is common with the Spaniards
+to fall down upon the decks when they see a broadside preparing, and
+to continue in that posture till it is given; after which they rise
+again, and, presuming the danger to be for some time over, work their
+guns, and fire with great briskness, till another broad-side is ready:
+But the firing gun by gun, in the manner directed by the commodore,
+rendered this practice of theirs impossible.
+
+The Centurion being thus prepared, and nearing the galleon apace,
+there happened, a little after noon, several squalls of wind and rain,
+which often obscured the galleon from their sight; but whenever it
+cleared up, they observed her resolutely lying-to; and, towards one
+o'clock, the Centurion hoisted her broad pendant and colours, she
+being then within gun-shot of the enemy. And the commodore observing
+the Spaniards to have neglected clearing their ship till that time, as
+he then saw them throwing overboard cattle and lumber, he gave orders
+to fire upon them with the chace-guns, to embarrass them in their
+work, and prevent them from completing it, though his general
+directions had been not to engage till they were within pistol-shot.
+The galleon returned the fire with two of her stern-chacers; and, the
+Centurion getting her sprit-sail-yard fore and aft, that if necessary
+she might be ready for boarding, the Spaniards in a bravado rigged
+their sprit-sail-yard fore and aft likewise. Soon after, the Centurion
+came a-breast of the enemy within pistol-shot, keeping to the leeward
+with a view of preventing them from putting before the wind, and
+gaining the port of Jalapay, from which they were about seven leagues
+distant. And now the engagement began in earnest, and, for the first
+half hour, Mr Anson over-reached the galleon, and lay on her bow;
+where, by the great wideness of his ports, he could traverse almost
+all his guns upon the enemy, whilst the galleon could only bring a
+part of hers to bear. Immediately on the commencement of the action,
+the mats, with which the galleon had stuffed her netting, took fire,
+and burnt violently, blazing up half as high as the mizen-top. This
+accident (supposed to be caused by the Centurion's wads) threw
+the enemy into great confusion, and at the same time alarmed the
+commodore, for he feared least the galleon should be burnt, and least
+he himself too might suffer by her driving on board him: But the
+Spaniards at last freed themselves from the fire, by cutting away the
+netting, and tumbling the whole mass, which was in flames, into the
+sea. But still the Centurion kept her first advantageous position,
+firing her cannon with great regularity and briskness, whilst at the
+same time the galleon's decks lay open to her top-men, who, having
+at their first volley driven the Spaniards from their tops, made
+prodigious havock with their small-arms, killing or wounding every
+officer but one that ever appeared on the quarter-deck, and wounding
+in particular the general of the galleon himself. And though the
+Centurion, after the first half hour, lost her original situation,
+and was close alongside the galleon, and the enemy continued to
+fire briskly for near an hour longer, yet at last the commodore's
+grape-shot swept their decks so effectually, and the number of their
+slain and wounded was so considerable, that they began to fall into
+great disorder, especially as the general, who was the life of the
+action, was no longer capable of exerting himself. Their embarrassment
+was visible from on board the commodore. For the ships were so near,
+that some of the Spanish officers were seen running about with great
+assiduity, to prevent the desertion of their men from their quarters:
+But all their endeavours were in vain; for after having, as a last
+effort, fired five or six guns with more judgment than usual, they
+gave up the contest; and, the galleon's colours being singed off
+the ensign-staff in the beginning of the engagement, she struck
+the standard at her main-top-gallant-mast-head, the person who was
+employed to do it, having been in imminent peril of being killed,
+had not the commodore, who perceived what he was about, given express
+orders to his people to desist from firing.
+
+Thus was the Centurion possessed of this rich prize, amounting in
+value to near a million and a half of dollars. She was called the
+Nostra Signora de Cabadonga, and was commanded by the general Don
+Jeronimo de Montero, a Portuguese by birth, and the most approved
+officer for skill and courage of any employed in that service. The
+galleon, was much larger than the Centurion, had five hundred and
+fifty men and thirty-six guns mounted for action, besides twenty-eight
+pidreroes in her gunwale, quarters and tops, each of which carried a
+four-pound ball. She was very well furnished with small arms, and was
+particularly provided against boarding, both by her close quarters,
+and by a strong net-work of two-inch rope, which was laced over her
+waist, and was defended by half pikes. She had sixty-seven killed in
+the action, and eighty-four wounded, whilst the Centurion had only two
+killed, and a lieutenant and sixteen wounded, all of whom, but one,
+recovered: Of so little consequence are the most destructive arms in
+untutored and unpractised hands.
+
+The treasure thus taken by the Centurion having been for at least
+eighteen months the great object of their hopes, it is impossible
+to describe the transport on board, when, after all their reiterated
+disappointments, they at last saw their wishes accomplished. But their
+joy was near being suddenly damped by a most tremendous incident: For
+no sooner had the galleon struck, than one of the lieutenants coming
+to Mr Anson to congratulate him on his prize, whispered him at
+the same time, that the Centurion was dangerously on fire near the
+powder-room. The commodore received this dreadful news without any
+apparent emotion, and, taking care not to alarm his people, gave the
+necessary orders for extinguishing it, which was happily done in a
+short time, though its appearance at first was extremely terrible. It
+seems some cartridges had been blown up by accident between decks,
+by which a quantity of oakum in the after-hatch-way, near the
+after-powder-room, was set on fire; and the great smother and smoke
+of the oakum occasioned the apprehension of a more extended and
+mischievous fire. At the same instant, too, the galleon fell on board
+the Centurion on the starboard quarter, but she was cleared without
+doing or receiving any considerable damage.
+
+The commodore made his first lieutenant, Mr Saumarez, captain of this
+prize, appointing her a post-ship in his majesty's service. Captain
+Saumarez, before night, sent on board the Centurion all the Spanish
+prisoners, but such as were thought the most proper to be retained to
+assist in navigating the galleon. And now the commodore learnt, from
+some of the prisoners, that the other ship, which he had kept in the
+port of Acapulco the preceding year, instead of returning in company
+with the present prize, as was expected, had set sail from Acapulco
+alone much sooner than usual, and had, in all probability, got into
+the port of Manilla long before the Centurion arrived off Espiritu
+Santo; so that Mr Anson, notwithstanding his present success, had
+great reason to regret his loss of time at Macao, which prevented him
+from taking two rich prizes instead of one.
+
+The commodore, when the action was ended, resolved to make the best of
+his way with his prize for the river of Canton, being in the mean time
+fully employed in securing his prisoners, and in removing the treasure
+from on board the galleon into the Centurion. The last of these
+operations was too important to be postponed; for as the navigation to
+Canton was through seas but little known, and where, from the season
+of the year, much bad weather might be expected, it was of great
+consequence that the treasure should be sent on board the Centurion,
+which ship, by the presence of the commander in chief, the greater
+number of her hands, and her other advantages, was doubtless much
+safer against all the casualties of winds and seas than the galleon;
+and the securing the prisoners was a matter of still more consequence,
+as not only the possession of the treasure, but the lives of the
+captors, depended thereon. This was indeed an article which gave the
+commodore much trouble and disquietude; for they were above double the
+number of his own people; and some of them, when they were brought on
+board the Centurion, and had observed how slenderly she was manned,
+and the large proportion which the striplings bore to the rest, could
+not help expressing themselves with great indignation to be thus
+beaten by a handful of boys. The method, which was taken to hinder
+them from rising, was by placing all but the officers and the
+wounded in the hold, where, to give them as much air as possible, two
+hatch-ways were left open; but then (to avoid all danger, whilst
+the Centurion's people should be employed upon the deck) there was a
+square partition of thick planks, made in the shape of a funnel,
+which enclosed each hatch-way on the lower deck, and reached to
+that directly over it on the upper deck; these funnels served to
+communicate the air to the hold better than could have been done
+without them; and, at the same time, added greatly to the security of
+the ship; for they being seven or eight feet high, it would have been
+extremely difficult for the Spaniards to have clambered up; and
+still to augment that difficulty, four swivel-guns loaded with
+musquet-bullets were planted at the mouth of each funnel, and a
+centinel with lighted match constantly attended, prepared to fire into
+the hold amongst them, in case of any disturbance. Their officers,
+who amounted to seventeen or eighteen, were all lodged in the first
+lieutenant's cabin, under a constant guard of six men; and the
+general, as he was wounded, lay in the commodore's cabin with a
+centinel always with him; and they were all informed, that any
+violence or disturbance would be punished with instant death. And
+that the Centurion's people might be at all times prepared, if,
+notwithstanding these regulations, any tumult should arise, the small
+arms were constantly kept loaded in a proper place, whilst all the men
+went armed with cutlasses and pistols; and no officer ever pulled off
+his cloaths, and when he slept had always his arms lying ready by him.
+
+These measures were obviously necessary, considering the hazards to
+which the commodore and his people would have been exposed, had they
+been less careful. Indeed, the sufferings of the poor prisoners,
+though impossible to be alleviated, were much to be commiserated; for
+the weather was extremely hot, the stench of the hold loathsome beyond
+all conception, and their allowance of water but just sufficient to
+keep them alive, it not being practicable to spare them more than at
+the rate of a pint a-day for each, the crew themselves having only an
+allowance of a pint and a half. All this considered, it was wonderful
+that not a man of them died during their long confinement, except
+three of the wounded, who died the same night they were taken; though
+it must be confessed, that the greatest part of them were strangely
+metamorphosed by the heat of the hold; for when they were first taken,
+they were sightly, robust fellows; but when, after above a month's
+imprisonment, they were discharged in the river of Canton, they were
+reduced to mere skeletons; and their air and looks corresponded much
+more to the conception formed of ghosts and spectres, than to the
+figure and appearance of real men.
+
+Thus employed in securing the treasure and the prisoners, the
+commodore stood for the river of Canton; and, on the 30th of June, at
+six in the evening, got sight of Cape Delangano, which then bore west
+ten leagues distant; and, the next day, he made the Bashee islands,
+and the wind being so far to the northward, that it was difficult to
+weather them, it was resolved to stand through between Grafton and
+Monmouth islands, where the passage seemed to be clear; but in getting
+through, the sea had a very dangerous aspect, for it rippled and
+foamed, as if it had been full of breakers, which was still more
+terrible, as it was then night. But the ships got through very safe,
+(the prize always keeping a-head) and it was found that the appearance
+which had alarmed them had been occasioned only by a strong tide. I
+must here observe, that though the Bashee islands are usually reckoned
+to be no more than five, yet there are many more lying about them
+to the westward, which, as the channels amongst them are not at all
+known, makes it advisable for ships, rather to pass to the northward
+or southward, than through them; and indeed the commodore proposed
+to have gone to the northward, between them and Formosa, had it been
+possible for him to have weathered them. From hence the Centurion
+steering the proper course for the river of Canton, she, on the 8th
+of July, discovered the island of Supata, the westermost of the
+Lema islands. This island they made to be an hundred and thirty-nine
+leagues distant from Grafton's island, and to bear from it north 82 deg.,
+37 deg. west: And, on the 11th, having taken on board two Chinese pilots,
+one for the Centurion, and the other for the prize, they came to an
+anchor off the city of Macao.
+
+By this time the particulars of the cargo of the galleon were well
+ascertained, and it was found that she had on board 1,313,843 pieces
+of eight, and 35,682 oz. of virgin silver, besides some cochineal, and
+a few other commodities, which, however, were but of small account, in
+comparison of the specie. And this being the commodore's last prize,
+it hence appears, that all the treasure taken by the Centurion was
+not much short of 400,000l. independent of the ships and merchandise,
+which she either burnt or destroyed, and which, by the most reasonable
+estimation, could not amount to so little as 600,000l. more; so that
+the whole loss of the enemy, by our squadron, did doubtless exceed a
+million sterling. To which, if there be added the great expence of the
+court of Spain, in fitting out Pizarro, and in paying the additional
+charges in America, incurred on our account, together with the loss
+of their men of war, the total of all these articles will be a most
+exorbitant sum, and is the strongest conviction of the utility of this
+expedition, which, with all its numerous disadvantages, did yet prove
+so extremely prejudicial to the enemy.
+
+
+
+SECTION XXXI.
+
+_Transactions in the River of Canton._
+
+The commodore, having taken pilots on board, proceeded with his prize
+for the river of Canton; and on the 14th of July, came to an anchor
+short of the Bocca Tigris, which is a narrow passage forming the mouth
+of that river: This entrance he proposed to stand through the next
+day, and to run up as far as Tiger island, which is a very safe road,
+secured from all winds. But whilst the Centurion and her prize were
+thus at anchor, a boat with an officer came off from the mandarine,
+commanding the forts at Bocca Tigris, to examine what the ships were,
+and whence they came. Mr Anson informed the officer, that his ship was
+a ship of war, belonging to the king of Great Britain; and that the
+other in company with him was a prize he had taken; that he was going
+into Canton river to shelter himself against the hurricanes which were
+then coming on; and that as soon as the monsoon shifted, he should
+proceed for England. The officer then desired an account of what men,
+guns, and ammunition were on board, a list of all which he said was
+to be sent to the government of Canton. But when these articles were
+repeated to him, particularly when he was told that there were in the
+Centurion four hundred firelocks, and between three and four hundred
+barrels of powder, he shrugged up his shoulders, and seemed to be
+terrified with the bare recital, saying, that no ships ever came into
+Canton river armed in that manner; adding, that he durst not set down
+the whole of this force, lest it should too much alarm the regency.
+After he had finished his enquiries, and was preparing to depart, he
+desired to leave the two custom-house officers behind him; on which
+the commodore told him, that though as a man of war he was prohibited
+from trading, and had nothing to do with customs or duties of any
+kind, yet, for the satisfaction of the Chinese, he would permit two
+of their people to be left on board, who might themselves be witnesses
+how punctually he should comply with his instructions. The officer
+seemed amazed when Mr Anson mentioned being exempted from all duties,
+and told him, that the emperor's duty must be paid by all ships
+that came into his ports: And it is supposed, that on this occasion,
+private directions were given by him to the Chinese pilot, not to
+carry the commodore through the Bocca Tigris; which makes it necessary
+more particularly to describe that entrance.
+
+The Bocca Tigris is a narrow passage, little more than musquet-shot
+over, formed by two points of land, on each of which there is a fort,
+that on the starboard-side being a battery on the water's edge, with
+eighteen embrasures, but where there were no more than twelve iron
+cannon mounted, seeming to be four or six pounders; the fort on the
+larboard-side is a large castle, resembling those old buildings
+which here in England we often find distinguished by that name; it is
+situated on a high rock, and did not appear to be furnished with more
+than eight or ten cannon, none of which were supposed to exceed six
+pounders. These are the defences which secure the river of Canton;
+and which the Chinese (extremely defective in all military skill) have
+imagined were sufficient to prevent any enemy from forcing his way
+through.
+
+But it is obvious, from the description of these forts, that they
+could have given no obstruction to Mr Anson's passage, even if they
+had been well supplied with gunners and stores; and therefore, though
+the pilot, after the Chinese officer had been on board, refused at
+first to take charge of the ship, till he had leave from the forts,
+yet as it was necessary to get through without any delay, for fear of
+the bad weather which was hourly expected, the commodore weighed on
+the 15th, and ordered the pilot to carry him by the forts, threatening
+him that, if the ship ran aground, he would instantly hang him up
+at the yard-arm. The pilot, awed by these threats, carried the ship
+through safely, the forts not attempting to dispute the passage.
+Indeed the poor pilot did not escape the resentment of his countrymen,
+for when he came on shore, he was seized and sent to prison, and was
+rigorously disciplined with the bamboo. However, he found means to
+get at Mr Anson afterwards, to desire of him some recompence for
+the chastisement he had undergone, and of which he then carried very
+significant marks about him; and Mr Anson, in commiseration of his
+sufferings, gave him such a sum of money, as would at any time have
+enticed a Chinese to have undergone a dozen bastinadings.
+
+Nor was the pilot the only person that suffered on this occasion;
+for the commodore soon after seeing some royal junks pass by him from
+Bocca Tigris towards Canton, he learnt, on enquiry, that the mandarine
+commanding the forts was a prisoner on board them; that he was already
+turned out, and was now carrying to Canton, where it was expected he
+would be severely punished for having permitted the ships to pass; and
+the commodore urging the unreasonableness of this procedure, from
+the inability of the forts to have done otherwise, explaining to the
+Chinese the great superiority his ships would have had over the forts,
+by the number and size of their guns, the Chinese seemed to acquiesce
+in his reasoning, and allowed that their forts could not have stopped
+him; but they still asserted, that the mandarine would infallibly
+suffer, for not having done what all his judges were convinced was
+impossible. To such indefensible absurdities are those obliged to
+submit who think themselves concerned to support their authority, when
+the necessary force is wanting.
+
+On the 16th of July the commodore sent his second lieutenant to
+Canton, with a letter to the viceroy, informing him of the reason of
+the Centurion's putting into that port; and that the commodore himself
+soon proposed to repair to Canton, to pay a visit to the viceroy. The
+lieutenant was very civilly received, and was promised that an answer
+should be sent to the commodore the next day. In the mean time Mr
+Anson gave leave to several of the officers of the galleon to go to
+Canton, they engaging their parole to return in two days. When these
+prisoners got to Canton, the regency sent for them, and examined them,
+enquiring particularly by what means they had fallen into Mr Anson's
+power. And on this occasion the prisoners were honest enough to
+declare, that as the kings of Great Britain and of Spain were at war,
+they had proposed to themselves the taking of the Centurion, and
+had bore down upon her with that view, but that the event had been
+contrary to their hopes: However, they acknowledged that they had been
+treated by the commodore, much better than they believed they should
+have treated him, had he fallen into their hands. This confession from
+an enemy had great weight with the Chinese, who, till then, though
+they had revered the commodore's power, had yet suspected his morals,
+and had considered him rather as a lawless freebooter, than as one
+commissioned by the state for the revenge of public injuries. But
+they now changed their opinion, and regarded him as a more important
+person; to which perhaps the vast treasure of his prize might not a
+little contribute; the acquisition of wealth being a matter greatly
+adapted to the estimation and reverence of the Chinese nation.
+
+In this examination of the Spanish prisoners, though the Chinese had
+no reason in the main to doubt of the account which was given them,
+yet there were two circumstances which appeared to them so singular,
+as to deserve a more ample explanation; one of them was the great
+disproportion of men between the Centurion and the galleon; the other
+was the humanity with which the people of the galleon were treated
+after they were taken. The mandarines therefore asked the Spaniards,
+how they came to be overpowered by so inferior a force; and how it
+happened, since the two nations were at war, that they were not put
+to death when they came into the hands of the English. To the first of
+these enquiries the Spaniards replied, that though they had more hands
+than the Centurion, yet she being intended solely for war, had a great
+superiority in the size of her guns, and in many other articles, over
+the galleon, which was a vessel fitted out principally for traffic:
+And as to the second question, they told the Chinese, that amongst
+the nations of Europe, it was not customary to put to death those who
+submitted; though they readily owned, that the commodore, from
+the natural bias of his temper, had treated both them and their
+countrymen, who had formerly been in his power, with very unusual
+courtesy, much beyond what they could have expected, or than was
+required by the customs established between nations at war with each
+other. These replies fully satisfied the Chinese, and at the same time
+wrought very powerfully in the commodore's favour.
+
+On the 20th of July, in the morning, three mandarines, with a great
+number of boats, and a vast retinue, came on board the Centurion, and
+delivered to the commodore the viceroy of Canton's order for a daily
+supply of provisions, and for pilots lo carry the ships up the river
+as far as the second bar; and at the same time they delivered him a
+message from the viceroy, in answer to the letter sent to Canton. The
+substance of the message was, that the viceroy desired to be excused
+from receiving the commodore's visit, during the then excessive hot
+weather; because the assembling the mandarines and soldiers, necessary
+to that ceremony, would prove extremely inconvenient and fatiguing;
+but that in September, when the weather would be more temperate, he
+should be glad to see both the commodore himself, and the English
+captain of the other ship, that was with him. As Mr Anson knew that an
+express had been dispatched to the court at Pekin, with an account of
+the Centurion and her prize being arrived in the river of Canton, he
+had no doubt, but the principal motive for putting off this visit was,
+that the regency at Canton might gain time to receive the emperor's
+instructions, about their behaviour on this unusual affair.
+
+When the mandarines had delivered their message, they began to talk
+to the commodore about the duties to be paid by his ships; but he
+immediately told them, that he would never submit to any demand of
+that kind; that as he neither brought any merchandise thither, nor
+intended to carry any away, he could not be reasonably deemed to
+be within the meaning of the emperor's orders, which were doubtless
+calculated for trading vessels only, adding, that no duties were ever
+demanded of men of war, by nations accustomed to their reception,
+and that his master's orders expressly forbad him from paying any
+acknowledgement for his ships anchoring in any port whatever.
+
+The mandarines being thus cut short on the subject of the duty, they
+said they had another matter to mention, which was the only remaining
+one they had in charge; this was a request to the commodore, that he
+would release the prisoners he had taken on board the galleon; for
+that the viceroy of Canton apprehended the emperor, his master, might
+be displeased, if he should be informed, that persons, who were his
+allies, and carried on a great commerce with his subjects, were under
+confinement in his dominions. Mr Anson was himself extremely desirous
+to get rid of the Spaniards, having, on his first arrival, sent about
+an hundred of them to Macao, and those who remained, near four hundred
+more, were, on many accounts, a great incumbrance to him. However,
+to enhance the favour, he at first raised some difficulties; but
+permitting himself to be prevailed on, he at last told the mandarines,
+that to show his readiness to oblige the viceroy, he would release the
+prisoners, whenever they, the Chinese, would send boats to fetch them
+off. This matter being thus adjusted, the mandarines departed; and, on
+the 28th of July, two Chinese junks were sent from Canton, to take on
+board the prisoners, and to carry them to Macao. And the commodore,
+agreeable to his promise, dismissed them all, and ordered his purser
+to send with them eight days provision for their subsistence, during
+their sailing down the river; this being dispatched, the Centurion
+and her prize came to her moorings, above the second bar, where they
+proposed to continue till the monsoon shifted.
+
+Though the ships, in consequence of the viceroy's permit, found no
+difficulty in purchasing provisions for their daily consumption, yet
+it was impossible for the commodore to proceed to England; without
+laying in a large quantity both of provisions and stores for his use,
+during the voyage: The procuring this supply was attended with much
+embarrassment; for there were people at Canton who had undertaken
+to furnish him with biscuit, and whatever else he wanted; and his
+linguist, towards the middle of September, had assured him, from
+day to day, that all was ready, and would be sent on board him
+immediately. But a fortnight being elapsed, and nothing being brought,
+the commodore sent to Canton to enquire more particularly into the
+reasons of this disappointment: And he had soon the vexation to be
+informed, that the whole was an illusion: that no order had been
+procured from the viceroy to furnish him with sea-stores, as had
+been pretended; that there was no biscuit baked, nor any one of the
+articles in readiness which had been promised him; nor did it appear,
+that the contractors had taken the least step to comply with their
+agreement. This was most disagreeable news, and made it suspected,
+that the furnishing the Centurion for her return to Great Britain
+might prove a more troublesome matter than had been hitherto imagined;
+especially too, as the month of September was nearly elapsed, without
+Mr Anson's having received any message from the viceroy of Canton.
+
+And here perhaps it might be expected that some satisfactory account
+should be given of the motives of the Chinese for this faithless
+procedure. But as I have already, in a former chapter, made some kind
+of conjectures about a similar event, I shall not repeat them again
+in this place, but shall observe, that after all, it may perhaps be
+impossible for an European, ignorant of the customs and manners of
+that nation, to be fully apprised of the real incitements to this
+behaviour. Indeed, thus much may undoubtedly be asserted, that in
+artifice, falsehood, and an attachment to all kinds of lucre, many of
+the Chinese are difficult to be paralleled by any other people; but
+then the combination of these talents, and the manner in which they
+are applied in particular emergencies, are often beyond the reach of
+a foreigner's penetration: So that though it may be safely concluded,
+that the Chinese had some interest in thus amusing the commodore, yet
+it may not be easy to assign the individual views by which they were
+influenced. And that I may not be thought too severe in ascribing to
+this nation a fraudulent and selfish turn of temper, so contradictory
+to the character given of them in the legendary accounts of the Roman
+missionaries, I shall here mention an extraordinary transaction or
+two, which I hope will be some kind of confirmation of what I have
+advanced.
+
+When the commodore lay first at Macao, one of his officers, who had
+been extremely ill, desired leave of him to go on shore every day on
+a neighbouring island, imagining that a walk upon the land would
+contribute greatly to the restoring of his health: The commodore would
+have dissuaded him, suspecting the tricks of the Chinese, but the
+officer continuing importunate, in the end the boat was ordered to
+carry him. The first day he was put on shore he took his exercise, and
+returned without receiving any molestation, or even seeing any of
+the inhabitants; but the second day, he was assaulted, soon after his
+arrival, by a great number of Chinese who had been hoeing rice in the
+neighbourhood, and who beat him so violently with the handles of their
+hoes, that they soon laid him on the ground incapable of resistance;
+after which they robbed him, taking from him his sword, the hilt of
+which was silver, his money, his watch, gold-headed cane, snuff box,
+sleeve-buttons, and hat, with several other trinkets: In the mean time
+the boat's crew, who were at some little distance, and had no arms of
+any kind with them, were incapable of giving him any assistance;
+till at last one of them flew on the fellow who had the sword in his
+possession, and wresting it out of his hands, drew it, and with it
+was preparing to fall on the Chinese, some of whom he could not have
+failed of killing; but the officer, perceiving what he was about,
+immediately ordered him to desist, thinking it more prudent to
+submit to the present violence, than to embroil his commodore in an
+inextricable squabble with the Chinese government by the death
+of their subjects; which calmness in this gentleman was the more
+meritorious, as he was known to be a person of an uncommon spirit, and
+of a somewhat hasty temper: By this means the Chinese recovered the
+possession of the sword, which they soon perceived was prohibited
+to be made use of against them, and carried off their whole booty
+unmolested. No sooner were they gone, than a Chinese on horseback,
+very well dressed, and who had the air and appearance of a gentleman,
+came down to the shore, and, as far as could be understood by his
+signs, seemed to censure the conduct of his countrymen, and to
+commiserate the officer, being wonderfully officious to assist in
+getting him on board the boat: But notwithstanding this behaviour,
+it was shrewdly suspected that he was an accomplice in the theft, and
+time fully evinced the justice of those suspicions.
+
+When the boat returned on board, and reported what had passed to
+the commodore, he immediately complained of it to the mandarine, who
+attended to see his ship supplied; but the mandarine coolly replied,
+that the boat ought not to have gone on shore, promising, however,
+that if the thieves could be found out, they should be punished;
+though it appeared plain enough, by his manner of answering, that he
+would never give himself any trouble in searching them out. However,
+a considerable time afterwards, when some Chinese boats were selling
+provisions to the Centurion, the person who had wrested the sword from
+the Chinese came with great eagerness to the commodore, to assure
+him that one of the principal thieves was then in a provision-boat
+alongside the ship; and the officer, who had been robbed, viewing
+the fellow on this report, and well remembering his face, orders were
+immediately given to seize him; and he was accordingly secured on
+board the ship, where strange discoveries were now made.
+
+This thief, on his being apprehended, expressed so much fright in his
+countenance, that it was feared he would have died upon the spot; the
+mandarine too, who attended the ship, had visibly no small share of
+concern on the occasion. Indeed he had reason enough to be alarmed,
+since it was soon evinced that he had been privy to the whole robbery,
+for the commodore, declaring that he would not deliver up the thief,
+but would himself order him to be shot, the mandarine immediately put
+off the magisterial air with which be had at first pretended to
+demand him, and begged his release in the most abject manner; and the
+commodore appearing inflexible, there came on board, in less than two
+hours time, five or six of the neighbouring mandarines, who all joined
+in the same entreaty, and, with a view of facilitating their suit,
+offered a large sum of money for the fellow's liberty. Whilst they
+were thus soliciting, it was discovered that the mandarine, who was
+the most active amongst them, and who seemed to be most interested in
+the event, was the very gentleman who came to the officer just after
+the robbery, and who pretended to be so much displeased with the
+villainy of his countrymen. And, on further enquiry, it was found that
+he was the mandarine of the island; and that he had, by the authority
+of his office, ordered the peasants to commit that infamous action:
+And it seemed, as far as could be collected from the broken hints
+which were casually thrown out, that he and his brethren, who were all
+privy to the transaction, were terrified with the fear of being
+called before the tribunal at Canton, where the first article of their
+punishment would be the stripping them of all they were worth; though
+their judges (however fond of inflicting a chastisement so lucrative
+to themselves) were perhaps of as tainted a complexion as the
+delinquents. Mr Anson was not displeased to have caught the Chinese
+in this dilemma; and he entertained himself for some time with their
+perplexity, rejecting their money with scorn, appearing inexorable to
+their prayers, and giving out that the thief should certainly be shot;
+but as he then foresaw that he should be forced to take shelter in
+their ports a second time, when the influence he might hereby acquire
+over the magistrates would be of great service to him, he at length
+permitted himself to be persuaded, and, as a favour, released his
+prisoner, but not till the mandarine had collected and returned all
+that had been stolen from the officer, even to the minutest trifle.
+
+But, notwithstanding this instance of the good intelligence between
+the magistrates and criminals, the strong inclination of the Chinese
+to lucre often prompts them to break through this awful confederacy,
+and puts them on defrauding the authority that protects them, of its
+proper quota of the pillage. For not long after the above-mentioned
+transaction, (the former mandarine attendant on the ship, being, in
+the mean time, relieved by another,) the commodore lost a top-mast
+from his stern, which, after the most diligent enquiry, could not be
+traced: As it was not his own, but had been borrowed at Macao to heave
+down by, and was not to be replaced in that part of the world, he was
+extremely desirous to recover it, and published a considerable reward
+to any who would bring it him again. There were suspicions from the
+first of its being stolen, which made him conclude a reward was the
+likeliest method of getting it back: Accordingly, soon after, the
+mandarine told him that some of his, the mandarine's people, had found
+the top-mast, desiring the commodore to send his boats to fetch it,
+which being done, the mandarine's people received the promised reward;
+but the commodore told the mandarine that he would make him a present
+besides for the care he had taken in directing it to be searched for,
+and, accordingly, Mr Anson gave a sum of money to his linguist, to be
+delivered to the mandarine; but the linguist knowing that the people
+had been paid, and ignorant that a further present had been promised,
+kept the money himself: However, the mandarine fully confiding in Mr
+Anson's word, and suspecting the linguist, took occasion one morning
+to admire the size of the Centurion's masts, and thence, on a
+pretended sudden recollection, he made a digression to the top-mast
+which had been lost, and asked Mr Anson if he had not got it again. Mr
+Anson presently perceived the bent of this conversation, and enquired
+of him if he had not received the money from the linguist, and finding
+he had not, he offered to pay it him upon the spot. But this the
+mandarine refused, having now somewhat more in view than the sum which
+had been detained; for the next day the linguist was seized, and was
+doubtless mulcted of all he had gotten in the commodore's service,
+which was supposed to be little less than two thousand dollars; he
+was, besides, so severely bastinadoed with the bamboo, that it was
+with difficulty he escaped with life; and when he was upbraided by
+the commodore (to whom he afterwards came begging) with his folly in
+risking all he had suffered for fifty dollars (the present intended
+for the mandarine.) he had no other excuse to make than the strong
+bias of his nation to dishonesty, replying, in his broken jargon,
+"Chinese man very great rogue truly, but have fashion, no can help."
+
+It were endless to recount all the artifices, extortions, and
+frauds which were practised on the commodore and his people, by this
+interested race. The method of buying all things in China being by
+weight, the tricks made use of by the Chinese to increase the weight
+of the provision they sold to the Centurion, were almost incredible.
+One time a large quantity of fowls and ducks being bought for the
+ship's use, the greatest part of them presently died. This alarmed the
+people on board with the apprehensions that they had been killed by
+poison, but, on examination, it appeared that it was only owing to
+their being crammed with stones and gravel to increase their weight,
+the quantity thus forced into most of the ducks being found to amount
+to ten ounces in each. The hogs, too, which were bought ready killed
+of the Chinese butchers, had water injected into them for the same
+purpose; so that a carcass, hung up all night for the water to drain
+from it, hath lost above a stone of its weight; and when, to avoid
+this cheat, the hogs were bought alive, it was found that the Chinese
+gave them salt to increase their thirst, and having by this means
+excited them to drink great quantities of water, they then took
+measures to prevent them from discharging it again by urine, and sold
+the tortured animal in this inflated state. When the commodore first
+put to sea from Macao, they practised an artifice of another kind;
+for as the Chinese never object to the eating of any food that dies of
+itself, they took care; by some secret practices, that great part
+of his live sea-store should die in a short time after it was put on
+board, hoping to make a second profit of the dead carcasses, which
+they expected would be thrown overboard; and two-thirds of the hogs
+dying before the Centurion was out of sight of land, many of the
+Chinese boats followed her, only to pick up the carrion. These
+instances may serve as a specimen of the manners of this celebrated
+nation, which is often recommended to the rest of the world as a
+pattern of all kinds of laudable qualities.
+
+The commodore, towards the end of September, having found out (as
+has been said) that those who had contracted, to supply him with
+sea-provisions and stores had deceived him, and that the viceroy had
+not sent to him according to his promise, saw it would be impossible
+for him to surmount the embarrassment he was under, without going
+himself to Canton and visiting the viceroy; and, therefore, on the
+27th. of September, he sent a message to the mandarine who attended
+the Centurion, to inform him that he, the commodore, intended, on the
+1st of October, to proceed in his boat to Canton, adding, that the day
+after he got there he should notify his arrival to the viceroy,
+and should desire him to fix a time for his audience; to which the
+mandarine returned no other answer, than that he would acquaint the
+viceroy with the commodore's intentions. In the mean time all things
+were prepared for this expedition; and the boat's crew in particular,
+which Mr Anson proposed to take with him, were cloathed in an uniform
+dress, resembling that of the watermen on the Thames; they were in
+number eighteen and a coxswain; they had scarlet jackets and blue
+silk; waistcoats, the whole trimmed with silver buttons, and with
+silver badges on their jackets and caps. As it was apprehended,
+and even asserted, that the payment of the customary duties for the
+Centurion and her prize would be demanded by the regency of Canton,
+and would be insisted on previous to the granting a permission for
+victualling the ship for her future voyage, the commodore, who was
+resolved never to establish so dishonourable a precedent, took all
+possible precaution to prevent the Chinese from facilitating the
+success of their unreasonable pretensions, by having him in their
+power at Canton; and, therefore, for the security of his ship, and
+the great treasure on board her, he appointed his first lieutenant,
+Mr Brett, to be captain of the Centurion under him, giving him proper
+instructions for his conduct; directing him, particularly, if he, the
+commodore, should be detained at Canton on account of the duties
+in dispute, to take out the men from the Centurion's prize, and to
+destroy her; and then to proceed down the river through the Bocca
+Tigris with the Centurion alone, and to remain without that entrance
+till he received further orders from Mr Anson.
+
+These necessary steps being taken, which were not unknown to the
+Chinese, it should seem as if their deliberations were in some sort
+embarrassed thereby. It is reasonable to imagine, that they were
+in general very desirous of getting the duties to be paid them, not
+perhaps solely in consideration of the amount of those dues, but to
+keep up their reputation for address and subtlety, and to avoid
+the imputation of receding from claims on which they had already so
+frequently insisted: However, as they now foresaw that they had no
+other method of succeeding than by violence, and that even against
+this the commodore was prepared, they were at last disposed, I
+conceive, to let the affair drop, rather than entangle themselves in
+an hostile measure, which they found would only expose them to the
+risk of having the whole navigation of their port destroyed, without
+any certain prospect of gaining their favourite point.
+
+However, though there is reason to imagine that these were their
+thoughts at that time, yet they could not depart at once from the
+evasive conduct to which they had hither to adhered. For when the
+commodore, on the morning of the 1st of October, was preparing to
+set out for Canton, his linguist came to him from the mandarine, who
+attended his ship, to tell him that a letter had been received from
+the viceroy of Canton, desiring the commodore to put off his going
+thither for two or three days: But in the afternoon of the same day
+another linguist came on board, who, with much seeming fright, told Mr
+Anson that the viceroy had expected him up that day, that the counsel
+was assembled, and the troops had been under arms to receive him; and
+that the viceroy was highly offended at the disappointment, and had
+sent the commodore's linguist to prison chained, supposing that the
+whole had been owing to the linguist's negligence. This plausible tale
+gave the commodore great concern, and made him apprehend that there
+was some treachery designed him, which he could not yet fathom; and
+though it afterwards appeared that the whole was a fiction, not one
+article of it having the least foundation, yet (for reasons best known
+to themselves) this falsehood was so well supported by the artifices
+of the Chinese merchants at Canton, that, three days afterwards, the
+commodore received a letter, signed by all the supercargoes of the
+English ships then at that place, expressing their great uneasiness at
+what had happened, and intimating their fears that some insult would
+be offered to his boat, if he came thither before the viceroy was
+fully satisfied about the mistake. To this letter Mr Anson replied,
+that he did not believe there had been any mistake, but was persuaded
+it was a forgery of the Chinese, to prevent his visiting the viceroy;
+that, therefore, he would certainly come up to Canton on the 13th of
+October, confident that the Chinese would not dare to offer him an
+insult, as well knowing it would be properly returned.
+
+On the 13th of October, the commodore continuing firm, to his
+resolution, all the supercargoes of the English, Danish, and Swedish
+ships, came on board the Centurion, to accompany him to Canton, for
+which place he set out in his barge the same day, attended by his own
+boats, and by those of the trading ships, which, on this occasion,
+came to form his retinue; and, as he passed by Whampoa, where the
+European vessels lay, he was saluted by all of them but the French,
+and in the evening arrived safely at Canton.
+
+
+
+SECTION XXXII.
+
+_Proceedings at the City of Canton, and the Return of the Centurion to
+England._
+
+When the commodore arrived at Canton, he was visited by the principal
+Chinese merchants, who affected to appear very much pleased that
+he had met with no obstruction in getting thither, and who thence
+pretended to conclude that the viceroy was satisfied about the former
+mistake, the reality of which they still insisted on; they added, that
+as soon as the viceroy should be informed that Mr Anson was at Canton
+(which they promised should be done the next morning,) they were
+persuaded a day would be immediately appointed for the visit, which
+was the principal business that had brought the commodore thither.
+
+The next day the merchants returned to Mr Anson, and told him that
+the viceroy was then so fully employed in preparing his dispatches for
+Pekin, that there was no getting admittance to him for some days, but
+that they had engaged one of the officers of his court to give them
+information as soon as he should be at leisure, when they proposed
+to notify Mr Anson's arrival, and to endeavour to fix the day of
+audience. The commodore was by this time too well acquainted with
+their artifices not to perceive that this was a falsehood; and had he
+consulted only his own judgment, he would have applied directly to
+the viceroy by other hands: But the Chinese merchants had so far
+prepossessed the supercargoes of our ships with chimerical fears,
+that they were extremely apprehensive of being embroiled with the
+government, and of suffering in their interest, if those measures
+were taken, which appeared to Mr Anson at that time to be the most
+prudential; and, therefore, lest the malice and double-dealing of the
+Chinese might have given rise to some sinister incident, which would
+be afterwards charged on him, he resolved to continue passive as long
+as it should appear that he lost no time by thus suspending his own
+opinion. With this view, he promised not to take any immediate step
+for getting admittance to the viceroy, provided the Chinese with whom
+he contracted for provisions would let him see that his bread was
+baked, his meat salted, and his stores prepared with the utmost
+dispatch; but if by the time when all was in readiness to be shipped
+off (which it was supposed would be in about forty days,) the
+merchants should not have procured the viceroy's permission, then, the
+commodore proposed to apply for himself. These were the terms Mr Anson
+thought proper to offer, to quiet the uneasiness of the supercargoes,
+and, notwithstanding the apparent equity of the conditions, many
+difficulties and objections were urged; nor would the Chinese agree
+to them till the commodore had consented to pay for every article
+he bespoke before it was put in hand. However, at last, the contract
+being past, it was some satisfaction to the commodore to be certain
+that his preparations were now going on, and being himself on the
+spot, he took care to hasten them as much as possible.
+
+During this interval, in which the stores and provisions were getting
+ready, the merchants continually entertained Mr Anson with accounts of
+their various endeavours to get a license from the viceroy, and their
+frequent disappointments, which to him was now a matter of amusement,
+as he was fully satisfied there was not one word of truth in any thing
+they said. But when all was completed, and wanted only to be shipped,
+which was about the 24th of November, at which time too the N.E.
+monsoon was set in, he then resolved to apply himself to the viceroy
+to demand an audience, as he was persuaded that, without this
+ceremony, the procuring a permission to send his stores on board would
+meet with great difficulty. On the 24th of November, therefore, Mr
+Anson sent one of his officers to the Mandarine, who commanded the
+guard of the principal gate of the city of Canton, with a letter
+directed to the viceroy. When this letter was delivered to the
+mandarine, he received the officer who brought it very civilly, and
+took down the contents of it in Chinese, and promised that the viceroy
+should be immediately acquainted with it; but told the officer it was
+not necessary for him to wait for an answer, because a message would
+be sent to the commodore himself.
+
+On this occasion Mr Anson had been under great difficulties about a
+proper interpreter to send with his officer, as he was well aware that
+none of the Chinese, usually employed as linguists, could be relied
+on: But he at last prevailed with Mr Flint, an English gentleman
+belonging to the factory, who spoke Chinese perfectly well, to
+accompany his officer. This person, who upon this occasion and many
+others was of singular service to the commodore, had been left at
+Canton when a youth, by the late Captain Rigby. The leaving him there
+to learn the Chinese language was a step taken by that captain, merely
+from his own persuasion of the great advantages which the East-India
+company might one day receive from an English interpreter; and though
+the utility of this measure has greatly exceeded all that was expected
+from it, yet I have not heard that it has been to this day imitated:
+But we imprudently choose (except in this single instance) to carry on
+the vast transactions of the port of Canton, either by the ridiculous
+jargon of broken English, which some few of the Chinese have
+learnt, or by the suspected interpretation of the linguists of other
+nations.[1]
+
+[Footnote 1: The practice recommended, it is almost unnecessary to
+remark, has been adopted since our author's time, but certainly not to
+the extent the probable advantages of it would suggest.--E.]
+
+Two days after the sending the above-mentioned letter, a fire broke
+out in the suburbs of Canton. On the first alarm, Mr Anson went
+thither with his officers, and his boat's crew, to assist the Chinese.
+When he came there, he found that it had begun in a sailor's shed, and
+that by the slightness of the buildings, and the awkwardness of the
+Chinese, it was getting head apace: But he perceived, that by pulling
+down some of the adjacent sheds it might easily be extinguished; and
+particularly observing that it was running along a wooden cornish,
+which would soon communicate it to a great distance, he ordered his
+people to begin with tearing away that cornish; this was presently
+attempted, and would have been soon executed; but, in the meantime, he
+was told, that, as there was no mandarine there to direct what was
+to be done, the Chinese would make him, the commodore, answerable
+for whatever should be pulled down by his orders. On this his people
+desisted; and he sent them to the English factory, to assist in
+securing the company's treasure and effects, as it was easy to foresee
+that no distance was a protection against the rage of such a fire,
+where so little was done to put a stop to it; for all this time the
+Chinese contented themselves with viewing it, and now and then holding
+one of their idols near it, which they seemed to expect should check
+its progress: However, at last, a mandarine came out of the city,
+attended by four or five hundred firemen: These made some feeble
+efforts to pull down the neighbouring houses; but by this time the
+fire had greatly extended itself, and was got amongst the merchants'
+warehouses; and the Chinese firemen, wanting both skill and spirit,
+were incapable of checking its violence; so that its fury increased
+upon them, and it was feared the whole city would be destroyed, in
+this general confusion the viceroy himself came thither, and the
+commodore was sent to, and was entreated to afford his assistance,
+being told that he might take any measures he should think most
+prudent in the present emergency. And now he went thither a second
+time, carrying with him about forty of his people; who, upon this
+occasion, exerted themselves in such a manner, as in that country
+was altogether without example: For they were rather animated than
+deterred by the flames and falling buildings, amongst which they
+wrought; so that it was not uncommon to see the most forward of them
+tumble to the ground on the roofs, and amidst the ruins of houses,
+which their own efforts brought down with them. By their boldness
+and activity the fire was soon extinguished, to the amazement of the
+Chinese; and the building being all on one floor, and the materials
+slight, the seamen, notwithstanding their daring behaviour, happily
+escaped with no other injuries, than some considerable bruises. The
+fire, though at last thus luckily extinguished, did great mischief
+during the time it continued; for it consumed an hundred shops and
+eleven streets full of warehouses, so that the damage amounted to
+an immense sum; and one of the Chinese merchants, well known to the
+English, whose name was Succoy, was supposed, for his own share, to
+have lost near two hundred thousand pounds sterling. It raged indeed
+with unusual violence, for in many of the warehouses, there were large
+quantities of camphor, which greatly added to its fury, and produced a
+column of exceeding white flame, which shot up into the air to such
+a prodigious height that it was plainly seen on board the Centurion,
+though she was thirty miles distant.
+
+Whilst the commodore and his people were labouring at the fire, and
+the terror of its becoming general still possessed the whole city,
+several of the most considerable Chinese merchants came to Mr Anson,
+to desire that he would let each of them have one of his soldiers (for
+such they styled his boat's crew from the uniformity, of their dress)
+to guard their warehouses and dwellings-houses, which, from the known
+dishonesty of the populace, they feared would be pillaged in the
+tumult. Mr Anson granted them this request; and all the men that he
+thus furnished to the Chinese behaved greatly to the satisfaction of
+their employers, who afterwards highly applauded their great diligence
+and fidelity.
+
+By this means, the resolution of the English at the fire, and their
+trustiness and punctuality elsewhere, was the general subject of
+conversation amongst the Chinese: And, the next morning, many of the
+principal inhabitants waited on the commodore to thank him for
+his assistance; frankly owning to him, that they could never have
+extinguished the fire of themselves, and that he had saved their city
+from being totally consumed. And soon after a message came to the
+commodore from the viceroy, appointing the 30th of November for his
+audience; which sudden resolution of the viceroy, in a matter that had
+been so long agitated in vain, was also owing to the signal services
+performed by Mr Anson and his people at the fire, of which the viceroy
+himself had been in some measure an eye-witness.
+
+The fixing this business of the audience, was, on all accounts, a
+circumstance which Mr Anson was much pleased with; as he was satisfied
+that the Chinese government would not have determined this point,
+without having agreed among themselves to give up their pretensions to
+the duties they claimed, and to grant him all he could reasonably ask;
+for as they well knew the commodore's sentiments, it would have been
+a piece of imprudence, not consistent with the refined cunning of the
+Chinese, to have admitted him to an audience, only to have contested
+with him. And therefore, being himself perfectly easy about the result
+of his visit, he made all necessary preparations against the day.
+Mr Flint, whom he engaged to act as interpreter in the conference,
+acquitted himself much to the commodore's satisfaction; repeating with
+great boldness; and doubtless with exactness, all that was given in
+charge, a part which no Chinese linguist would ever have performed
+with any tolerable fidelity.
+
+At ten o'clock in the morning, on the day appointed, a mandarine
+came to the commodore, to let him know that the viceroy was ready to
+receive him; on which the commodore and his retinue immediately set
+out: And as soon as he entered the outer gate of the city, he found
+a guard of two hundred soldiers drawn up ready to attend him; these
+conducted him to the great parade before the emperor's palace, where
+the viceroy then resided. In this parade, a body of troops, to the
+number of ten thousand, were drawn up under arms, and made a very fine
+appearance, being all of them new clothed for this ceremony: And Mr
+Anson and his retinue having passed through the middle of them, he
+was then conducted to the great hall of audience, where he found the
+viceroy seated under a rich canopy in the emperor's chair of state,
+with all his council of mandarines attending: Here there was a
+vacant seat prepared for the commodore, in which he was placed on
+his arrival: He was ranked the third it order from the viceroy, there
+being above him only the head of the law, and of the treasury, who in
+the Chinese government take place of all military officers. When
+the commodore was seated, he addressed himself to the viceroy by
+his interpreter, and began with reciting the various methods he had
+formerly taken to get an audience; adding, that he imputed the delays
+he had met with to the insincerity of those he had employed, and that
+he had therefore no other means left, than to send, as he had done,
+his own officer with a letter to the gate. On the mention of this the
+viceroy stopped the interpreter, and bid him assure Mr Anson, that the
+first knowledge they had of his being at Canton, was from that letter.
+Mr Anson then proceeded, and told him, that the subjects of the
+king of Great Britain trading to China had complained to him, the
+commodore, of the vexatious impositions both of the merchants
+and inferior custom-house officers, to which they were frequently
+necessitated to submit, by reason of the difficulty of getting access
+to the mandarines, who alone could grant them redress: That it was
+his, Mr Anson's, duty, as an officer of the king of Great Britain, to
+lay before the viceroy these grievances of the British subjects, which
+he hoped the viceroy would take into consideration, and would give
+orders, that for the future there should be no just reason for
+complaint. Here Mr Anson paused, and waited some time in expectation
+of an answer; but nothing being said, he asked his interpreter if he
+was certain the viceroy understood what he had urged; the interpreter
+told him, he was certain it was understood, but he believed no reply
+would be made to it. Mr Anson then represented to the viceroy the case
+of the ship Haslingfield, which, having been dismasted on the coast of
+China, had arrived in the river of Canton but a few days before. The
+people on board this vessel had been great sufferers by the fire; the
+captain in particular had all his goods burnt, and had lost besides,
+in the confusion, a chest of treasure of four thousand five hundred
+tahel, which was supposed to be stolen by the Chinese boat-men. Mr
+Anson therefore desired that the captain might have the assistance
+of the government, as it was apprehended the money could never be
+recovered without the interposition of the mandarines. And to this
+request the viceroy made answer, that in settling the emperor's
+customs for that ship, some abatement should be made in consideration
+of her losses.
+
+And now the commodore having dispatched the business with which the
+officers of the East-India company had entrusted him, he entered on
+his own affairs; acquainting the viceroy, that the proper season was
+now set in for returning to Europe, and that he waited only for a
+licence to ship off his provisions and stores, which were all ready;
+and that as soon as this should be granted him, and he should have
+gotten his necessaries on board, he intended to leave the river of
+Canton, and to make the best of his way for England. The viceroy
+replied to this, that the licence should be immediately issued, and
+that every thing should be ordered on board the following day. And
+finding that Mr Anson had nothing farther to insist on, the viceroy
+continued the conversation for some time, acknowledging in very civil
+terms how much the Chinese were obliged to him for his signal
+services at the fire, and owning that he had saved the city from being
+destroyed: And then observing that the Centurion had been a good while
+on their coast, he closed his discourse, by wishing the commodore a
+good voyage to Europe. After which, the commodore, thanking him for
+his civility and assistance, took his leave.
+
+As soon as the commodore was out of the hall of audience, he was
+much pressed to go into a neighbouring apartment, where there was
+an entertainment provided; but finding, on enquiry, that the viceroy
+himself was not to be present, he declined the invitation, and
+departed, attended in the same manner as at his arrival; only at his
+leaving the city he was saluted by three guns, which are as many as
+in that country are ever fired on any ceremony. Thus the commodore,
+to his great joy, at last finished this troublesome affair, which, for
+the preceding four months, had given him great disquietude. Indeed he
+was highly pleased with procuring a licence for the shipping of his
+stores and provisions; for thereby he was enabled to return to Great
+Britain with the first of the monsoon, and to prevent all intelligence
+of his being expected: But this, though a very important point, was
+not the circumstance which gave him the greatest satisfaction; for he
+was more particularly attentive to the authentic precedent established
+on this occasion, by which his majesty's ships of war are for the
+future exempted from all demands of duty in any of the ports of China.
+
+In pursuance of the promises of the viceroy, the provisions were begun
+to be sent on board the day after the audience; and, four days after,
+the commodore embarked at Canton for the Centurion; and on the 7th
+of December, the Centurion and her prize unmoored, and stood down
+the river, passing through the Bocca Tigris on the 10th. And on this
+occasion I must observe, that the Chinese had taken care to man the
+two forts, on each side of that passage, with as many men as they
+could well contain, the greatest part of them armed with pikes and
+match-lock musquets. These garrisons affected to shew themselves as
+much as possible to the ships, and were doubtless intended to induce
+Mr Anson to think more reverently than he had hitherto done of the
+Chinese military power: For this purpose they were equipped with much
+parade, having a great number of colours exposed to view; and on
+the castle in particular there were laid considerable heaps of large
+stones; and a soldier of unusual size, dressed in very sightly
+armour, stalked about on the parapet with a battle-axe in his hand,
+endeavouring to put on as important and martial an air as possible,
+though some of the observers on board the Centurion shrewdly
+suspected, from the appearance of his armour, that instead of steel,
+it was composed only of a particular kind of glittering paper.
+
+The Centurion and her prize being now without the river of Canton, and
+consequently upon the point of leaving the Chinese jurisdiction, I beg
+leave, before I quit all mention of the Chinese affairs, to subjoin
+a few remarks on the disposition and genius of that extraordinary
+people. And though it may be supposed, that observations made at
+Canton only, a place situated in the corner of the empire, are very
+imperfect materials on which to found any general conclusions, yet as
+those who have had opportunities of examining the inner parts of
+the country, have been evidently influenced by very ridiculous
+prepossessions, and as this transactions of Mr Anson with the regency
+of Canton were of an uncommon nature, in which many circumstances
+occurred, different perhaps from any which have happened before,
+I hope the following reflections, many of them drawn from these
+incidents, will not be altogether unacceptable to the reader.
+
+That the Chinese are a very ingenious and industrious people, is
+sufficiently evinced, from the great number of curious manufactures
+which are established amongst them, and which are eagerly sought for
+by the most distant nations; but though skill in the handicraft arts
+seems to be the most important qualification of this people, yet
+their talents therein are but of a second-rate kind; for they are much
+out-done by the Japanese in those manufactures, which are common
+to both countries; and they are in numerous instances incapable of
+rivalling the mechanic dexterity of the Europeans. Indeed, their
+principal excellency seems to be imitation; and they accordingly
+labour under that poverty of genius, which constantly attends all
+servile imitators. This is most conspicuous in works which require
+great truth and accuracy; as in clocks, watches, fire-arms, &c. for in
+all these, though they can copy the different parts, and can form
+some resemblance of the whole, yet they never could arrive at such
+a justness in their fabric, as was necessary to produce the desired
+effect. And if we pass from their manufactures to artists of a
+superior class, as painters, statuaries, &c., in these matters they
+seem to be still more defective, their painters, though very numerous
+and in great esteem, rarely succeeding in the drawing or colouring of
+human figures; or in the grouping of large compositions; and though in
+flowers and birds their, performances are much more admired, yet even
+in these, some part of the merit is rather to be imputed to the native
+brightness and excellency of the colours, than to the skill of the
+painter; since it is very unusual to see the light and shade justly
+and naturally handled, or to find that ease and grace in the drawing,
+which are to be met with in the works of European artists; In
+short, there is a stiffness and minuteness in most of the Chinese
+productions, which are extremely displeasing: And it may perhaps
+be asserted with great truth, that these defects in their arts are
+entirely owing to the peculiar turn of the people, amongst whom
+nothing greater spirited is to be met with.
+
+If we next examine the Chinese literature; (taking our accounts from
+the writers, who have endeavoured to represent sent it in the most
+favourable light) we shall find; that on this head their obstinacy
+and absurdity are most wonderful: For though, for many ages, they have
+been surrounded by nations, to whom the use of letters was familiar,
+yet they, the Chinese alone, have hitherto neglected to avail
+themselves of that almost divine invention, and have continued to
+adhere to the rude and inartificial method of representing words by
+arbitrary marks; a method, which necessarily renders the number of
+their character too great for human memory to manage, makes writing
+to be an art that requires prodigious application, and in which no
+man can be otherwise than partially skilled; whilst all reading, and
+understanding of what is written, is attended with infinite obscurity
+and confusion; for the connection between these marks, and the words
+they represent; cannot be retained in books, but must be delivered
+down from age to age by oral tradition: And how uncertain this must
+prove in such a complicated subject, is sufficiently obvious to those
+who have attended to the variation which all verbal relations undergo,
+when they are transmitted through three or four hands only. Hence it
+is easy to conclude, that the history and inventions of past
+ages, recorded by these perplexed symbols, must frequently prove
+unintelligible; and consequently the learning and boasted antiquity of
+the nation most, in numerous instances, be extremely problematical.
+
+But we are told by some of the missionaries, that though the skill
+of the Chinese in science is indeed much inferior to that of the
+Europeans, yet the morality and justice taught and practised by them
+are most exemplary. And from the description given by some of these
+good fathers, one should be induced to believe that the whole empire
+was a well-governed affectionate family, where the only contests were,
+who should exert the most humanity and beneficence: But our preceding
+relation of the behaviour of the magistrates, merchants, and tradesmen
+at Canton, sufficiently refutes these jesuitical fictions. And as
+to their theories of morality, if we may judge from the specimens
+exhibited in the works of the missionaries, we shall find them solely
+employed in recommending ridiculous attachments to certain immaterial
+points, instead of discussing the proper criterion of human actions,
+and regulating the general conduct of mankind to one another on
+reasonable and equitable principles. Indeed, the only pretension
+of the Chinese to a more refined morality than their neighbours is
+founded, not on their integrity or beneficence, but solely on the
+affected evenness of their demeanour, and their constant attention
+to suppress all symptoms of passion and violence. But it must be
+considered, that hypocrisy and fraud are often not less mischievous to
+the general interests of mankind, than, impetuosity and vehemence
+of temper, since these, though usually liable to the imputation of
+imprudence, do not exclude sincerity, benevolence, resolution,
+nor many other laudable qualities. And perhaps if this matter were
+examined to the bottom, it would appear that the calm and patient
+turn of the Chinese, on which they so much value themselves, and which
+distinguishes the nation from all others, is in reality the source of
+the most exceptionable part of their character; for it has been often
+observed by those who have attended to the nature of mankind, that
+it is difficult to curb the more robust and violent passions, without
+augmenting at the same time the force of the selfish ones: So that the
+timidity, dissimulation, and dishonesty of the Chinese, may, in some
+sort, be owing to the composure and external decency so universally
+prevailing in that empire.
+
+Thus much for the general disposition of the people: But I cannot
+dismiss this subject without adding a few words about the Chinese
+government, that too having been the subject of boundless panegyric.
+And on this head I must observe, that the favourable accounts often
+given of their prudent regulations for the administration of their
+domestic affairs, are sufficiently confuted by their transactions with
+Mr Anson: For we have seen that their magistrates are corrupt, their
+people thievish, and their tribunals crafty and venal. Nor is the
+constitution of the empire, or the general orders of the state, less
+liable to exception: Since that form of government, which does not
+in the first place provide for the security of the public against
+the enterprises of foreign powers, is certainly a most defective
+institution: And yet this populous, this rich, and extensive country,
+so pompously celebrated for its refined wisdom and policy, was
+conquered about an age since by an handful of Tartars; and even now,
+by the cowardice of the inhabitants, and the want of proper military
+regulations, it continues exposed not only to the attempts of any
+potent state, but to the ravages of every petty invader. I have
+already observed, on occasion of the commodore's disputes with the
+Chinese, that the Centurion alone was an overmatch for all the
+naval power of that empire: This perhaps may appear an extraordinary
+position; but to render it unquestionable, one may refer to vessels
+made use of by the Chinese.[2] The first of these is a junk of about
+a hundred and twenty tons burden, and was what the Centurion hove down
+by; these are most used in the great rivers, though they sometimes
+serve for small coasting voyages: The other junk is about two hundred
+and eighty tons burden, and is of the same form with those in which
+they trade to Cochinchina, Manilla, Batavia, and Japan, though some of
+their trading vessels are of a much larger size; its head is perfectly
+flat; and when the vessel is deep laden, the second or third plank
+of this flat surface is oft-times under water. The masts, sails, and
+rigging of these vessels are ruder than their built; for their masts
+are made of trees, no otherwise fashioned than by barking them, and
+lopping off their branches. Each mast has only two shrouds made of
+twisted rattan, which are often both shifted to the weather-side; and
+the halyard, when the yard is up, serves instead of a third shroud.
+The sails are made of mat, strengthened every thee feet by an
+horizontal rib of bamboo; they run upon the mast with hoops, and when
+they are lowered down, they fold upon the deck. These merchantmen
+carry no cannon; and it appears, from this whole description, that
+they are utterly incapable of resisting any European armed, vessel.
+Nor is the state provided with ships of considerable force, or of a
+better fabric, to protect them: For at Canton, where doubtless their
+principal naval power is stationed, we saw no more than four men
+of war junks, of about three hundred tons burden, being of the make
+already described, and mounted only with eight or ten guns, the
+largest of which does not exceed a four-pounder. This may suffice to
+give an idea of the defenceless state of the Chinese empire. But it
+is time to return to the commodore, whom I left with his two ships
+without the Bocca Tigris; and who, on the 12th of December, anchored
+before the town of Macao.
+
+[Footnote 2: The plate is necessarily omitted.]
+
+Whilst the ships lay here, the merchants of Macao finished their
+agreement for the galleon, for which they had offered 6000 dollars;
+this was much short of her value, but the impatience of the commodore
+to get to sea, to which the merchants were no strangers, prompted them
+to insist on so unequal a bargain. Mr Anson had learnt enough from the
+English at Canton, to conjecture that the war betwixt Great Britain
+and Spain was still continued; and that probably the French might
+engage in the assistance of Spain, before he could arrive in Great
+Britain; and therefore knowing, that no intelligence could get to
+Europe of the prize he had taken, and the treasure he had on board,
+till the return of the merchantmen from Canton, he was resolved to
+make all possible expedition in getting back, that he might be himself
+the first messenger of his own good fortune, and might thereby prevent
+the enemy from forming any projects to intercept him: For these
+reasons, he, to avoid all delay, accepted of the sum offered for
+the galleon; and she being delivered to the merchants the 15th of
+December, 1743, the Centurion the same day got under sail, on her
+return to England. And on the 3d of January, she came to an anchor at
+Prince's Island, in the straits of Sunda, and continued there wooding
+and watering till the 8th, when, she weighed and stood for the Cape of
+Good Hope, where, on the eleventh of March she anchored in Table-Bay.
+
+Here the commodore continued till the beginning of April, highly
+delighted with the place, which, by its extraordinary accommodations,
+the healthiness of its air, and the picturesque appearance of the
+country, all enlivened by the addition of a civilized colony, was
+not disgraced in an imaginary comparison with the vallies of Juan
+Fernandez, and the lawns of Tinian. During his stay he entered about
+forty new men; and having by the 3d of April, 1744, completed his
+water and provision, he on that day weighed and put to sea; and on
+the 19th of the same month they saw the island of St Helena, which,
+however, they did not touch at, but stood on their way; and, on the
+10th of June, being then in soundings, they spoke with an English ship
+from Amsterdam bound for Philadelphia, whence they received the first
+intelligence of a French war; the 12th they got sight of the Lizard;
+and the 15th, in the evening, to their infinite joy, they came safe to
+an anchor at Spithead. But that the signal perils which had so often
+threatened them in the preceding part of the enterprise, might pursue
+them to the very last, Mr Anson learnt on his arrival, that there
+was a French fleet of considerable force cruising in the chops of
+the channel, which, by the account of their position, he found the
+Centurion had run through, and had been all the time concealed by a
+fog. Thus was this expedition finished, when it had lasted three years
+and nine months; after having, by its event, strongly evinced this
+important truth, that though prudence, intrepidity, and perseverance
+united, are not exempted from the blows of adverse fortune; yet in a
+long series of transactions, they usually rise superior to its power,
+and in the end rarely fail of proving successful.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+[In concluding the account of this very interesting circumnavigation,
+it is necessary to advert to a question of some importance in
+literature, as every question must be that involves the claims of
+authors and their respective titles to reputation. Nor is the public
+often impatient in listening to evidence on such subjects, if the
+merit contended for be sufficiently great to justify solicitude as
+to its being rightly conferred. That it is so in the case of the
+question, Who was the author of this work? no one can doubt, that is
+capable of relishing its excellencies; or is aware of the high rank
+it has always held among compositions of the kind--that its first
+reception was such as to take off four large impressions within a
+twelvemonth--that it has been repeatedly printed since in a variety of
+forms--and that it has been translated into most of the languages of
+Europe. The claimants are Mr Walter, chaplain of the Centurion, under
+whose name (as is mentioned in this volume of the Collection, p. 201,)
+it was originally, and, so far as the editor knows, always published;
+and Mr Benjamin Robins, an ingenious mathematician, and author of
+several works, much esteemed by men of science. A short statement of
+such information as the editor has been able to procure, is all that
+the limits of this work will permit to be said on the subject of this
+question. The public, being interested in what had been generally
+reported through the medium of the periodical publications, respecting
+the proceedings and fate of the squadron under Commodore Anson,
+had eagerly expected some account of this voyage drawn up under his
+notice, or authenticated by his approval. This anxiety, it is likely,
+was not a little enhanced by the circumstance of several small, but
+curious enough, narratives having been published of the distresses
+experienced by part of the squadron, especially the Wager; from which
+it was naturally enough inferred, that a judicious and minute account
+of the whole could not fail to gratify rational curiosity, and the
+common disposition to wonder. Mr Walter, accordingly, who had gone in
+the Centurion, the commodore's vessel, as chaplain, and who, it seems,
+had been in the habit of keeping memorials of the transactions and
+occurrences of the squadron, prepared materials for publication, and
+actually procured subscriptions for the liquidation of its expense. He
+brought down his narrative to the time of his leaving the Centurion at
+Macao, when he returned by another conveyance to England. But as the
+public expectation had been raised very high, some persons, it would
+appear, suggested that the materials intended to be published should
+be carefully examined, and, if need be, corrected, by an adequate
+judge of literary and scientific composition. Mr Robins, already well
+known as an author of both mathematical and political essays, and much
+valued by several distinguished characters of the times, was engaged
+to undertake this task, whether with or without the desire of Mr
+Walter, or under any allegation of that gentleman's known or
+reputed incompetency to fulfil the hopes entertained, cannot now
+be discovered. On examination, we are told, it was resolved that Mr
+Robins should write the whole work anew, and merely use the materials
+furnished by Mr Walter, or otherwise, as the particulars of wind,
+weather, currents, courses, &c. &c. usually given in a sailor's
+journal. The introduction, and several dissertations interspersed
+through, the work, are said, moreover, to have been written by Mr
+Robins without any such assistance whatever; but to what magnitude his
+labours throughout amounted, it is perhaps impossible to ascertain.
+That he acquired reputation by it is unquestionable; but that Mr
+Walter himself should not have contributed so much as to warrant his
+name appearing on the title-page of the book, and at its dedication to
+the Duke of Bedford, would require a proof of both want of talents and
+meanness of disposition, which no one yet has attempted to adduce. Mr
+Walter's character, indeed, seems to have been quite above either such
+deficiency; and, in all probability, was, both in point of firmness
+and moral and intellectual worth, the very circumstance which obtained
+for him the appointment to a responsible office in an expedition,
+which, in its origin, progress, and issue, attracted the peculiar
+regard of the British government, and the admiration of mankind in
+general. Besides this office, it may be mentioned, that in 1745, on
+his return from the expedition, he was made chaplain of Portsmouth
+dock-yard, in which situation he continued till his death on March
+10th, 1785. The first edition of the work appeared in 1748; and a
+fifth being required in the following year, Mr Robins, it is said,
+revised it, and intended, had he remained in England, to have added a
+second volume. This rests on the assertion of Dr Wilson, who published
+Mr Robins' works after his death, in 2 vols. 8vo. 1761; and who, in
+the account of that gentleman's life prefixed, has been at pains to
+claim, in the strongest language, the merit of the Narrative for his
+friend. A passage or two from that memoir may satisfy the reader as to
+this part of the evidence, and as to the opinion of Dr W. one of the
+principal witnesses, respecting the proportional labours of Messrs
+Walter and Robins. "Upon a strict perusal of both the performances,"
+says he, "I find Mr Robins' to contain about as much matter again as
+that of Mr Walter--so this famous Voyage was composed in the person of
+the Centurion's chaplain, by Mr Robins in his own style and manner. Of
+this Mr Robins' friends, Mr Glover and Mr Ockenden, are witnesses as
+well as myself, we having compared the printed book with Mr
+Walter's manuscript. And this was at that time no secret, for in
+the counterpart of an indenture, now lying before me, made between
+Benjamin Robins, Esq. and John and Paul Knapton, booksellers, I find
+that those booksellers purchased the copy of this book from Mr Robins,
+as the sole proprietor, with no other mention of Mr Walter than a
+proviso in relation to the subscriptions he had taken." Dr Wilson
+evidently writes under some conviction that his assertions are liable
+to scrutiny, and that the matter of his remarks is debatable; hence
+his allegation that other _friends_ of Mr Robins are witnesses as well
+as himself, and his insinuation that what he testifies was no secret.
+But it is obvious, that, were his own assertions of the fact at all
+questionable, he would be equally obnoxious to discredit in assigning
+these other witnesses; for clearly, the man who could falsify in the
+one case, would be capable of doing so in the other. This may be said
+without any impeachment whatever of either Dr Wilson or the other
+friends of Mr Robins. It is merely a remark on the mode of proof which
+the Dr has adopted. As to the insinuation again, of the fact being no
+secret, all that it may be requisite to say is simply this, that the
+circumstance of the existence of the counterpart of such an indenture
+as is mentioned, is a very indifferent proof of publicity; and that
+even were it otherwise, were it "confirmation strong," still it might
+be readily conceived that Mr Robins should be the sole proprietor of
+the work, and yet in no degree the author of it. One may believe, at
+least, that Mr Robins, having aided in drawing up the materials for
+publication, and having furnished some pieces for it, was entrusted
+with the disposal of it to the booksellers; Mr Walter himself, for
+value received; or other considerations, abandoning all further
+concern. Some importance has been attached to a letter from Lord Anson
+to Mr Robins, as preserved by Dr Wilson, and published, as he says, by
+his lordship's permission, or, to use his own expression, "Printed
+not without the noble lord's consent; who," says the doctor, "being
+requested to permit that this testimony might be exhibited to the
+world of his lordship's esteem for Mr Robins, replied, in the politest
+manner, That every thing in his power was due to the memory of one who
+had deserved so well of the public." That Mr Robins deserved well of
+the public was unquestionable, though he had not written a line of
+the Narrative. He had published several works on subjects of general
+utility; and, besides his private instructions in beneficial science,
+he had been employed officially in the service of his country: In
+short, he needed not any thing of the reputation of the author of
+the Narrative, whoever he was, to extend his own. But does the letter
+referred to, or the quotation now given respecting Lord Anson's
+permission to publish it, in any degree determine the question, or any
+thing connected with it? The Editor has a different opinion of it; he
+thinks it quite irrelevant--that it does not yield the least shadow
+of proof, that Mr Robins had any thing to do with the volume of the
+Narrative, already given to the public. All that can be legitimately
+inferred from it amounts to this, that Lord Anson, entertaining a
+high opinion of Mr Robins, and being much pleased with his works, was
+desirous that he should publish a second volume of the Voyage, and
+apprehended that he had abandoned the intention of doing so. Of the
+fact of Mr Robins being the author of what had appeared, or even of
+the existence of materials for a second volume in a state fit for the
+public notice--of any thing, in short, but an intention on the part of
+Mr Robins to this effect, the letter in question says not a word. Let
+the reader judge for himself. The letter is as follows:--
+
+
+"DEAR SIR,
+
+"When I last saw you in town, I forgot to ask you, whether you
+intended to publish the second volume of my "Voyage" before you leave
+us; which, I confess, I am very sorry for. If you should have laid
+aside all thoughts of favouring the world with more of your works, it
+will be much disappointed, and no one in it more than your very much
+obliged and humble servant,
+
+_Bath, 22d October, 1749._
+
+"ANSON."
+
+"If you can tell the time of your departure, let me know it."
+
+
+This letter is also preserved by Mr Nichols in his Literary Anecdotes
+of the 18th Century, vol. ii. page 206, where the Narrative is
+explicitly ascribed to Mr Robins, but not on, any particular evidence.
+The statement indeed that is there given seems founded on Dr Wilson's
+account of Mr Robins, without any other source of information having
+been consulted. The Encyclopaedia Britannica is somewhat more candid,
+stating merely what was generally thought as to the Narrative
+being the work of Mr Robins, and at the same time pointing, though
+indirectly, to the existence of information opposed to that opinion.
+"In 1748," says the article Robins, 3d edition, "appeared Lord Anson's
+Voyage round the World, which, though Mr Walter's name is in the
+title, has been generally thought to be the work of Mr Robins."--"The
+5th edition, printed at London, in 1749, was revised and corrected
+by Mr Robins himself. It appears, however, from the corrigenda and
+addenda to the 1st volume of the Biographia Britannica, printed in
+the beginning of the 4th volume of that work, that Mr Robins was only
+consulted with respect to the disposition of the drawings, and that
+he had left England before the book was printed. Whether this be the
+fact, as it is asserted to be by the widow of Mr Walter, it is not for
+us to determine." The remark now made seems somewhat ambiguous, and
+may refer to either the 5th edition only, or to the work in general.
+In referring, however, to the Biog. Brit. as above, the ambiguity is
+removed, and a testimony is discovered in opposition to the statement
+of Dr Wilson, which the reader cannot fail to consider of very high
+import, and as bearing strongly against the claims of Mr Robins. The
+writers of the Biog. had spoken, in their account of Lord Anson, of
+the history of his voyage having been written by Mr Robins. This they
+did on common though uncontradicted report, arising in all probability
+from the positive assertions of Dr Wilson, to which, it is certainly
+very singular, neither Mr Walter nor any of his friends chose to
+object. With the most praise-worthy liberality and candour, however,
+these gentlemen, in the corrigenda; &c. referred to, insert the
+following notice:--"Thus has the matter hitherto stood. But so late
+as the present year (1789) and a few days previously to the writing of
+this note, a letter upon the subject has been put into our hands by
+Mr John. Walter, bookseller at Charing Cross. It is addressed to that
+gentleman by Mrs Walter, the widow of the publisher of that Voyage,
+and is as follows:
+
+
+"SIR,
+
+"I am informed that the Biographia Britannica insinuates that Mr
+Robins, and not Mr Walter, was the writer of Lord Anson's Voyage round
+the World. I shall therefore take it as a favour, if you will put me
+in the way of correcting so great a mistake. During the time of Mr
+Walter's writing that Voyage, he visited me almost daily previous to
+our marriage, and I have frequently heard him say how closely be had
+been engaged in writing for some hours to prepare for his constant
+attendance upon Lord Anson at six every morning for his approbation,
+as his lordship overlooked every sheet that was written. At some
+of those meetings Mr Robins assisted, as he was consulted in the
+disposition of the drawings; and I also know that Mr Robins left
+England (for he was sent to Bergen-op-Zoom,)[2] some months before the
+publication of that book; and I have frequently seen Mr Walter correct
+the proof sheets for the printer. You may perhaps wonder that Mr
+Walter never took any steps to contradict the assertion; but that
+wonder will cease when I tell you that for four years before his
+death (which was in 1785) he laboured under very severe and painful
+illnesses, and therefore never heard any thing but newspaper squibs,
+which he looked upon with contempt. But as it now appears to be
+published in a work that will be handed down to-posterity, that Mr
+Walter was not the real author, I think it a duty incumbent upon me
+to endeavour to clear his memory from any imputation of duplicity.
+Nor can it be supposed that any man would write a book for another
+to share the greatest part of the advantages. These and many other
+reasons make me to apply to you, as I should suppose that, as a
+relation to the deceased, you would be anxious for his fame, as well
+as,
+
+Sir,
+
+Your most humble servant,
+
+JANE WALTER."
+
+_June 16th, 1789._
+
+[Footnote 2: "Mr Robins," says Dr Wilson, "was invited over to assist
+in the defence of Bergen-op-Zoom, then invested by the French; and
+he did accordingly set out for that place; but it was entered by the
+besiegers September 16, 1747, just after his arrival in the Dutch
+army." This corresponds well with Mrs Walter's statement, and must
+have its weight in the question.--E.]
+
+"We shall make no other comment on this letter than to observe,
+that it is highly worthy of attention. If it shall give such full
+satisfaction to our readers as to convince them that Mr Walter was the
+writer of the voyage in its present form, we shall rejoice in having
+had an opportunity of doing justice to an injured character."
+
+Such is all the information the Editor has been able to procure
+on this subject; and he regrets that it is not adequate to what is
+desirable for the determining it. He might seem invidiously disposed
+were he positively to decide in the claims, the respective evidences
+of which, though not logically contradictory, are so much opposed to
+each other; but he thinks he can hazard no unfavourable imputation, if
+he should merely state his opinion drawn from the consideration of the
+testimonies, and the comparison of the style of part of the Narrative,
+with that of the works which appeared in Mr Robins' name. He thinks,
+then, in few words, that the Narrative is really the production of
+Mr Walter, under whose name it appeared, but that it was materially
+increased in size, if not in real value, by the contributions of
+Mr Robins; and that the species of those contributions may be
+condescended on, which of course goes far to determine their amount.]
+
+
+END OF VOLUME ELEVENTH.
+
+Edinburgh: Printed by James Ballantyne & Co.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of
+Voyages and Travels, Volume 11, by Robert Kerr
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOLUME 11 ***
+
+***** This file should be named 15376.txt or 15376.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+ https://www.gutenberg.org/1/5/3/7/15376/
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Alison Hadwin and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team. This file was produced from
+images generously made available by the Canadian Institute
+for Historical Microreproductions.
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
+paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works. See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+ the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+ you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
+ owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+ has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+ Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
+ must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+ prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+ returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+ sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+ address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+ the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+ you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+ does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+ License. You must require such a user to return or
+ destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+ and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+ Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+ money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+ electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+ of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+ distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+ Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+ Chief Executive and Director
+ gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+ https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+*** END: FULL LICENSE ***
+
generated by cgit v1.2.3 (git 2.25.1) at 2026-04-09 15:24:13 +0000